centum vp 1b30_04

Toc F-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

CS 1000/CS 3000ReferenceEngineering

CONTENTS

10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition

PART-F EngineeringF1. System Configuration .......................................................................... F1-1

F1.1 System View .................................................................................................. F1-2

F1.1.1 File Menu of System View ............................................................... F1-7

F1.1.2 Edit Menu of System View ............................................................ F1-13

F1.1.3 View Menu of System View ........................................................... F1-14

F1.1.4 Tool Menu of System View ............................................................ F1-17

F1.1.5 Load Menu of System View ........................................................... F1-24

F1.1.6 Project Menu of System View........................................................ F1-32

F1.1.7 FCS Menu of System View ........................................................... F1-33

F1.1.8 HIS Menu of System View ............................................................. F1-34

F1.1.9 Help Menu of System View ........................................................... F1-35

F1.2 Creating a New Project ............................................................................... F1-36

F1.3 Project’s Attribution Utility ......................................................................... F1-45

F1.4 Project Devices Configuration ................................................................... F1-50

F1.4.1 Creating a New FCS ..................................................................... F1-52

F1.4.2 Creating a New HIS ...................................................................... F1-80

F1.4.3 Creating a New BCV ..................................................................... F1-85

F1.4.4 Creating a New CGW ................................................................... F1-86

F1.4.5 Creating a New Station ................................................................. F1-90

F1.5 Creating a New IOM .................................................................................... F1-94

F1.5.1 Creating a Node ........................................................................... F1-95

F1.5.2 Creating a New I/O Module ......................................................... F1-101

F1.6 Project Data Backup ................................................................................. F1-108

F1.7 FCS Automatic Backup ............................................................................ F1-117

F1.7.1 Automatic Backup of FCS Database ............................................F1-118

F1.7.2 FCS Database Diagnosis ........................................................... F1-121

F1.7.3 Project Database Error Handling ................................................ F1-125

F1.8 Software Configuration Viewer ................................................................ F1-126

F2. Engineering Common Items ................................................................ F2-1F2.1 Names ............................................................................................................ F2-2

F2.2 Comment ....................................................................................................... F2-6

IM 33S01B30-01E

Toc F-2


F2.3 File Types ...................................................................................................... F2-8

F2.4 Structure of Folders and Files .................................................................... F2-20

F2.5 Utilization of External Files......................................................................... F2-35

F2.5.1 Export ........................................................................................... F2-36

F2.5.2 Import ........................................................................................... F2-37

F3. Control Drawing Builder ....................................................................... F3-1F3.1 Changing Drawing File Settings .................................................................. F3-8

F3.2 Changing Grid ............................................................................................. F3-10

F3.3 Registering Function Blocks...................................................................... F3-11

F3.4 Changing Function Block Properties ........................................................ F3-24

F3.5 Changing Data Link Block Properties ....................................................... F3-32

F3.6 Changing Function Block Control Sequence ............................................ F3-34

F3.7 Changing Block Symbol Tag Name ........................................................... F3-35

F3.8 Changing Block Symbol Model Name ....................................................... F3-36

F3.9 Entering Block Symbol Connection Information ...................................... F3-38

F3.10 Changing Block Symbol Terminal Name ................................................... F3-39

F3.11 Displaying Block Comment for Block Symbols ........................................ F3-40

F3.12 Drawing Wiring............................................................................................ F3-42

F3.13 Changing Wiring Properties ....................................................................... F3-47

F3.14 Inserting and Deleting Connection Point for Wiring ................................. F3-48

F3.15 Displaying Text ............................................................................................ F3-49

F3.16 Changing Text Properties ........................................................................... F3-50

F3.17 Moving an Object ........................................................................................ F3-52

F3.18 Copying an Object ...................................................................................... F3-60

F3.19 Cutting an Object ........................................................................................ F3-63

F3.20 Deleting an Object....................................................................................... F3-65

F3.21 Function Block Overview Dialog................................................................ F3-68

F3.22 Import and Export Text File ........................................................................ F3-73

F3.23 Importing CS Source File ........................................................................... F3-78

F3.24 Starting Function Block Overview Builder ................................................ F3-85

F3.25 Starting Function Block Detail Builder ...................................................... F3-86

F3.26 Setting Constants ....................................................................................... F3-88

F3.27 Status Display Settings for Control Drawings .......................................... F3-91

F4. Editing Logic Chart ............................................................................... F4-1F4.1 Overview of Logic Chart Edit Window ......................................................... F4-2

F4.2 Changing Grid ............................................................................................. F4-10

F4.3 Setting File Properties ................................................................................ F4-11

F4.4 Setting Object Properties ........................................................................... F4-13

F4.5 Element Symbol Type and Element Resource Count ............................... F4-20

F4.6 Switching to Mode for Editing Objects ...................................................... F4-30

F4.7 Drawing and Editing an Element Symbol .................................................. F4-31

F4.8 Drawing and Editing Wirings...................................................................... F4-38

Toc F-3

IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00

F4.9 Displaying and Editing Text ........................................................................ F4-45

F4.10 Drawing and Executing a Switch View ...................................................... F4-47

F4.11 Setting Processing Timing ......................................................................... F4-49

F4.12 Setting Logic Operation Execution Order ................................................. F4-51

F4.13 Grouping Objects ........................................................................................ F4-53

F4.14 Importing and Exporting an External File .................................................. F4-56

F4.15 Status Display Settings for Logic Charts .................................................. F4-57

F5. Status Display Builder .......................................................................... F5-1

F6. Editing SFC ........................................................................................... F6-1F6.1 Switching to Selection Mode ........................................................................ F6-3

F6.2 Drawing a Step .............................................................................................. F6-4

F6.3 Drawing a Wait Step ...................................................................................... F6-6

F6.4 Drawing a Transition ..................................................................................... F6-7

F6.5 Drawing a Parallel Sequence ....................................................................... F6-8

F6.6 Drawing Selective Sequences.................................................................... F6-12

F6.7 Drawing a Loop ........................................................................................... F6-16

F6.8 Drawing a Link ............................................................................................ F6-19

F6.9 Drawing a Jump .......................................................................................... F6-20

F6.10 Adding Comments to Client Area .............................................................. F6-22

F6.11 Creating an Interrupt Step .......................................................................... F6-23

F6.12 Drawing a Double Height Step ................................................................... F6-24

F6.13 Renumbering Steps ................................................................................... F6-26

F6.14 Defining Step Attribute ............................................................................... F6-27

F6.15 Defining Transition Attribute ...................................................................... F6-31

F6.16 Call up Step Action Edit Window ............................................................... F6-32

F6.17 Editing Interrupt Steps ............................................................................... F6-33

F6.18 How to Use FCS Sequence Library ............................................................ F6-34

F7. Windows for Configuring Unit ............................................................. F7-1F7.1 Configuring Unit Instrument ........................................................................ F7-2

F7.2 Defining Operations ...................................................................................... F7-5

F8. FCS Sequence Library.......................................................................... F8-1F8.1 Defining a SEBOL User Function in FCS Sequence Library ...................... F8-3

F8.2 Defining an SFC Sequence in FCS Sequence Library ................................ F8-5

F8.3 Defining a Unit Procedure in FCS Sequence Library .................................. F8-7

F9. Security Policy ...................................................................................... F9-1F9.1 User ............................................................................................................... F9-8

F9.2 User Group .................................................................................................. F9-27

F9.3 Privilege Level ............................................................................................. F9-33

F9.4 Function Block Security ............................................................................. F9-39

F9.5 Operation Mark ........................................................................................... F9-44

F9.6 Advanced Security Settings ....................................................................... F9-49

F9.6.1 Defining Window Operation and Monitoring Authorities ................. F9-53

IM 33S01B30-01E

Toc F-4


F9.6.2 Defining Function Block Operation and Monitoring Authorities ...... F9-54

F9.6.3 Operation Mark Security Level Definition ...................................... F9-62

F9.6.4 Definition of Password Control Modes ........................................... F9-64

F9.7 HIS Security ................................................................................................. F9-65

F10. Scheduler ............................................................................................ F10-1

F11. Self-Documentation............................................................................ F11-1F11.1 Self-Document Printing .............................................................................. F11-3

F11.2 Specifying Print Range for Self-Document Printing ............................... F11-10

F11.3 Editing Header and Footer for Self-Document Printing .......................... F11-12

F11.4 Specifying Print Type for Self-Document Printing .................................. F11-14

F11.5 Editing Table of Contents for Self-Document Printing ........................... F11-15

F11.6 Drawing Select Print of Self-Documentation ........................................... F11-19

F11.7 Print Parameters ....................................................................................... F11-21

F11.8 Specifying Print Range for Tuning Parameters ....................................... F11-22

F11.9 Editing Header and Footer for Tuning Parameters ................................. F11-23

F11.10 Printing Self Documents to PDF Files ..................................................... F11-24

F11.10.1 Setup .......................................................................................... F11-25

F11.10.2 Printing to PDF Files and Viewing PDF Files ............................... F11-30

F12. Graphic Builder................................................................................... F12-1F12.1 Optimizing Graphic Window Display Size ................................................. F12-6

F12.1.1 Settings Recommended for Windows ........................................... F12-7

F12.1.2 HIS and Graphic Builder Setup Items ............................................ F12-8

F12.1.3 Values Recommended for Graphic Window Size .......................... F12-9

F12.1.4 Calculating Graphic Window Display Size ................................... F12-11

F12.2 Assigning Softkeys to a Graphic Window ............................................... F12-15

F12.3 Data Bind ................................................................................................... F12-18

F12.4 Importing a Bitmap File into the Graphic Window .................................. F12-28

F12.5 Saving a Graphic Object as a Part ........................................................... F12-31

F12.6 External File for Search and Replace....................................................... F12-33

F12.7 Creating a New Graphic Window ............................................................. F12-39

F12.7.1 Type Tab ..................................................................................... F12-40

F12.7.2 Set Details Tab ............................................................................ F12-42

F12.8 List of Graphic Builder Menus ................................................................. F12-44

F12.9 Graphic Builder Toolbar List .................................................................... F12-50

F12.10 Setting Properties for Files....................................................................... F12-57

F12.10.1 Attribute Tab................................................................................ F12-58

F12.10.2 Data Bind Tab - File Properties .................................................... F12-60

F12.10.3 Window Linked Function Tab ...................................................... F12-65

F12.11 Setting the Options ................................................................................... F12-66

F12.12 Tools Used to Create and Edit Graphic Objects ...................................... F12-69

F12.12.1 Selecting the Objects .................................................................. F12-70

F12.12.2 Modifying the Objects ................................................................. F12-71

Toc F-5

IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.12.3 Drawing Freehand Lines and Graphics ....................................... F12-75

F12.12.4 Drawing a Straight Line ............................................................... F12-78

F12.12.5 Drawing a Polyline ...................................................................... F12-80

F12.12.6 Drawing an Arc ........................................................................... F12-82

F12.12.7 Drawing a Rectangle .................................................................. F12-84

F12.12.8 Drawing a Fill Area ...................................................................... F12-86

F12.12.9 Drawing a Circle ......................................................................... F12-88

F12.12.10Drawing an Ellipse ...................................................................... F12-90

F12.12.11Drawing a Sector ........................................................................ F12-92

F12.12.12Drawing a Marker ....................................................................... F12-94

F12.12.13Displaying Text ............................................................................ F12-96

F12.12.14Displaying Data with Numeric Values or Character Strings .......... F12-98

F12.12.15Displaying Data Using Rectangular Bar .................................... F12-101

F12.12.16Displaying Data Using Arrow Bar .............................................. F12-104

F12.12.17Displaying Data Using Circle Bar .............................................. F12-107

F12.12.18Displaying Data Using Line-Segment Graph ............................. F12-110

F12.12.19Displaying Data Using User-Defined Line-Segment Graph ....... F12-112

F12.12.20Displaying Data Using Bar Graph.............................................. F12-114

F12.12.21Displaying Data Using Step Graph ............................................ F12-116

F12.12.22Displaying Data Using Radar Chart .......................................... F12-118

F12.12.23Displaying Data Using Two-Dimensional Graph ........................ F12-120

F12.12.24Creating Touch Target ............................................................... F12-122

F12.12.25Displaying Push Button ............................................................. F12-124

F12.12.26Displaying Faceplate Block Button ............................................ F12-127

F12.12.27Displaying Instrument Diagram ................................................. F12-129

F12.12.28Displaying Window Information ................................................. F12-131

F12.12.29Displaying Message .................................................................. F12-133

F12.12.30Displaying Dialog Name............................................................ F12-135

F12.12.31Displaying Trend Data ............................................................... F12-137

F12.12.32Creating Overview Object ......................................................... F12-139

F12.12.33Creating Control Object ............................................................ F12-142

F12.13 Setting Properties for Graphic Objects ................................................. F12-144

F12.13.1 General Tab .............................................................................. F12-146

F12.13.2 Line Tab .................................................................................... F12-148

F12.13.3 Fill Tab ...................................................................................... F12-152

F12.13.4 Text Tab .................................................................................... F12-155

F12.13.5 Graphic Modify Tab ................................................................... F12-157

F12.13.6 Modify Coordinates Tab ............................................................ F12-165

F12.13.7 Marker Tab ................................................................................ F12-169

F12.13.8 Process Data-Character Tab ..................................................... F12-170

F12.13.9 Process Data-Bar Tab ............................................................... F12-175

F12.13.10Process Data-Arrow Tab ........................................................... F12-179


IM 33S01B30-01E

Toc F-6

F12.13.11 Process Data-Circle Tab ........................................................... F12-183

F12.13.12Line-Segment Graph Tab .......................................................... F12-186

F12.13.13User-Defined Line-Segment Graph Tab .................................... F12-189

F12.13.14Bar Graph Tab .......................................................................... F12-192

F12.13.15Step Graph Tab ......................................................................... F12-195

F12.13.16Radar Chart Tab ....................................................................... F12-198

F12.13.17Two-Dimensional Graph Tab ..................................................... F12-201

F12.13.18Control Tab ............................................................................... F12-203

F12.13.19Function Tab ............................................................................. F12-204

F12.13.20Function Tab [Call Window] ....................................................... F12-206

F12.13.21Function Tab [Execute the System Function Key] ...................... F12-210

F12.13.22Function Tab [Start/Stop/Restart Trend] .................................... F12-212

F12.13.23Function Tab [LED Flashing/On/Off Specification] ..................... F12-213

F12.13.24Function Tab [Execute the Program by File Name] .................... F12-214

F12.13.25Function Tab [Instrument Command Operation] ........................ F12-216

F12.13.26Function Tab [Call Data Input Dialog] ........................................ F12-218

F12.13.27Function Tab [Call Menu Dialog] ................................................ F12-220

F12.13.28Function Tab [Data-Item-Dependent Menu Dialog] .................... F12-222

F12.13.29Function Tab [Execute Multimedia] ............................................ F12-225

F12.13.30Function Tab [Report Printout] .................................................. F12-227

F12.13.31Function Tab [Call Panel Set] .................................................... F12-228

F12.13.32Function Tab [Others] ................................................................ F12-229

F12.13.33Menu Tab .................................................................................. F12-230

F12.13.34Faceplate Block Button Tab ....................................................... F12-234

F12.13.35Label Tab .................................................................................. F12-235

F12.13.36Instrument Diagram Tab ............................................................ F12-237

F12.13.37Window Tab .............................................................................. F12-239

F12.13.38Dialog Name Tab ...................................................................... F12-241

F12.13.39Message Tab ............................................................................ F12-242

F12.13.40Trend Tab .................................................................................. F12-244

F12.13.41Overview Tab ............................................................................ F12-246

F12.13.42Overview Tab [Tag Name] ......................................................... F12-248

F12.13.43Overview Tab [Window] ............................................................. F12-250

F12.13.44Overview Tab [Annunciator] ...................................................... F12-252

F12.13.45Overview Tab [Comment] .......................................................... F12-254

F12.13.46Data Bind Tab – Object Properties ............................................ F12-256

F12.14 User-Defined Faceplate .......................................................................... F12-258

F12.14.1 Analog User-Defined Faceplate ................................................ F12-259

F12.14.2 Discrete User-Defined Faceplate .............................................. F12-269

F12.14.3 Compound Block User-Defined Faceplate ................................ F12-272

F12.14.4 Procedure for Calling a User-Defined Faceplate Window .......... F12-273


Toc F-7

IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.15 Debugging on the Graphic Builder ........................................................ F12-277

F12.16 Importing CS Source Files ..................................................................... F12-280

F12.17 Graphic Utility ......................................................................................... F12-285

F13. Linked Parts ........................................................................................ F13-1F13.1 Outline of Linked Parts ............................................................................... F13-2

F13.2 Management of Linked Parts ..................................................................... F13-6

F13.2.1 Linked Part Files ........................................................................... F13-7

F13.2.2 Linked-Part List Window ............................................................... F13-9

F13.3 Editing and Creating Linked Parts ........................................................... F13-17

F13.3.1 Functions of Linked-Part Editor Window ...................................... F13-19

F13.3.2 Registering Other Objects as Linked Parts .................................. F13-22

F13.4 Inserting a Linked Part to Graphic Window ............................................. F13-25

F13.4.1 Editing a Linked Part Object ........................................................ F13-27

F13.4.2 Setting Linked Part Object Properties ......................................... F13-29

F13.5 Updating and Downloading Linked Part Objects .................................... F13-34

F13.5.1 Starting Linked Part Update Dialog ............................................. F13-35

F13.5.2 Functions of Update Linked Part Dialog Box ............................... F13-36

F13.5.3 Update and Download ................................................................ F13-41

F14. Graphic Container .............................................................................. F14-1F14.1 Licensing Mechanisms for the ActiveX Control ........................................ F14-4

F14.2 Flow from Creating an ActiveX Control to Displaying itin a Graphic Window ................................................................................... F14-5

F14.2.1 Creating an ActiveX Control .......................................................... F14-8

F14.2.2 Creating a Setup Disk for the ActiveX Control ............................. F14-23

F14.2.3 Embedding in a Graphic Window ................................................ F14-32

F14.2.4 Downloading to HIS .................................................................... F14-33

F14.2.5 Setting up ActiveX Control .......................................................... F14-34

F14.2.6 Displaying Graphic Window ........................................................ F14-35

F14.2.7 Creating ActiveX Controls ........................................................... F14-36

F14.2.8 Precautions on the Font Size of ActiveX Controls ........................ F14-38

F14.3 Graphic Interface Control ......................................................................... F14-41

F14.3.1 Graphic Interface Control Operating Environment ....................... F14-42

F14.3.2 ActiveX Control Development Environmentfor Graphic Interface Control ....................................................... F14-43

F14.3.3 Interface Types ........................................................................... F14-44

F14.3.4 Property Details .......................................................................... F14-47

F14.3.5 Event Details .............................................................................. F14-50

F14.3.6 Method Details ............................................................................ F14-57

F14.3.7 Event Notification Using a Function Key ...................................... F14-75

F15. All Generation ..................................................................................... F15-1F15.1 Overview of All Generation ......................................................................... F15-2

F15.1.1 Problems that May Occur in FCS Engineering .............................. F15-3

F15.1.2 What is All Generation? ................................................................ F15-4


IM 33S01B30-01E

Toc F-8

F15.2 Precautions for Using All Generation ........................................................ F15-5

F15.3 All Generation Dialog Box .......................................................................... F15-7


F1-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1. System Configuration>

F1. System ConfigurationWhen configuring a control system, the engineer should take the system scale intoconsideration and create a system configuration (engineering database) that meetsthe system requirements.

■ Outline of System ViewThe System View can display the engineering data (folders or files) of the system in a treeview similar to MS Windows Explorer. Via the various menus, create a project, create FCS,HIS, I/O modules that comprise a system and various user-definable operations andmonitoring windows as well as Help dialog boxes.

IMPORTANT

Do not use Windows Explorer to change the files handled by System View.

■ Use the System View to Generate SystemFrom System View, the following engineering works can be implemented.

● Create Projects

Create projects that are basic unit for engineering data management.

● Definition of System Configuration

Types of FCS and HIS as well as their connection in the network are defined in the systemconfiguration.

● I/O Module Definition

Create engineering database for specifying the actions of the I/O modules used to acquireprocess data.

● Create Graphic Windows

Create the user-defined Graphic windows used for operation and monitoring.

SEE ALSO

For Graphic window, see the following:

“■ User-Defined Windows” in E2.1, “ System Windows and User-Defined Windows”

● Help Dialog Box Creation

The user can create arbitrary HELP messages.

SEE ALSO

For details on help dialog, see the following:

E4.12, “Help Dialog Box”


F1-2<F1.1 System View>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F1.1 System ViewSystem View provides various taskbars in the menu. From the menu, an engineercan create projects which are the basic units for engineering data management, andcreate various user-definable operation and monitoring windows and Help dialogboxes used for FCS, HIS and I/O modules that comprise the project.

■ System View Menu Items ¡ £▼ Menu List

A list of the menu items in System View is shown below:

Table System View Menu Item (1/5) ¡ £

Menu Menu item Cascade Description

File Create New

Project... Creates a new project

FCS... Creates a new FCS

HIS...

BCV...

CGW...

Creates a new HIS

Creates a new BCV

Creates a new CGW

SEBOL User Function... Creates a new user-defined SEBOL function

SFC Sequence... Creates a new SFC sequence

Unit Procedure... Creates a new unit procedure

FCS-C Task... Creates a new FCS-C task (*1)

Node... Creates a new Node (*2)

IOM... Creates a new I/O module

Window... Creates a new window

Common Block... Creates a new common block (*5)

Recipe Group... Creates a new recipe group (*5)

Station... Creates a new non-CS 1000/CS 3000 series

F010101E.EPS

State Transition Matrix... Creates a new State Transition Matrix

Nest... Creates a new Nest (*3)

Trend Acquisition Pen Assignment... Creates a new trend acquisition pen assignment (*4)

*1: ¡ £ This menu item is available only on PFCS, SFCS. When applying this package, please contact Yokogawa formore information.

*2: £ This menu item is available only on KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, RFCS5 and RFCS2.*3: £ This menu item is available only on RFCS5 and RFCS2.*4: £ This menu item is available only on CS 3000 system.*5: This menu item is available only when Batch Management is installed.

SEE ALSO

For more information about RFCS5 and RFCS2, see the following:

Migrated-FCS (FIO) (IM 33Q01B41-01E)


F1-3

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>



File

Print Preview

Project Property Displays print preview of the project property

Station Property Displays print preview of the FCS and HIS property

IOM Property Displays print preview of the IOM property

Window Hierarchy Displays print preview of the window hierarchy

Window List Displays print preview of the window list

SEBOL User’s Function List

Displays print preview of the SEBOL user-defined function list

SFC Sequence List Displays print preview of the SFC Sequence list

Unit Procedure List Displays print preview of the unit procedure list

FCS-C Program List Displays print preview of the FCS-C program list (*1)

Node Property Displays print preview of the node property (*2)

Nest Properties Displays print preview of nest properties (*3)

Common Block List Displays print preview of the common block list (*4)

F010102E.EPS

Open• Opens selected folder• Starts builders to edit the selected files

Delete Deletes selected engineering data

Properties... Changes the properties of selected file or folder

Import Window Hierarchy... Imports window hierarchy information

External FileExport Window Hierarchy... Exports window hierarchy information

Control Drawing List Displays print preview of the control drawing list

*1: ¡ £ This menu item is available only on PFCS, SFCS.*2: £ This menu item is available only on KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, RFCS5 and RFCS2.*3: £ This menu item is available only on RFCS5 and RFCS2.*4: This menu item is available only when Batch Management is installed.

SEE ALSO





IM 33S01B30-01E



FilePrint

Project Property Prints the project property

Station Property Prints the FCS and HIS property

Nest Properties Prints the properties of nest (*3)

Window Hierarchy Prints the window hierarchy

Window List Prints the window list

State Transition Matrix List Prints the list of State Transition Matrixes

SEBOL User’s Function List Prints the SEBOL user-defined function list

SFC Sequence List Prints the SFC Sequence list

Unit Procedure List Prints the unit procedure list

FCS-C Program List Prints the FCS-C program list (*1)

Node Property Prints the node property (*2)

IOM Property Prints the IOM property

Common Block List Prints the common block list (*4)

Exit System View Exits System View

F010103E.EPS

Control Drawing List Prints the control drawing list

*1: ¡ £ This menu item is available only on PFCS, SFCS.*2: £ This menu item is available only on KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, RFCS5 and RFCS2.*3: £ This menu item is available only on RFCS5 and RFCS2.*4: This menu item is available only when Batch Management is installed.

SEE ALSO




F1-5

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>



Edit

Cut Cut

Copy Copy

Paste Paste

F010104E.EPS

Paste Shortcut Pastes shortcut

Move Upward

Move Downward Moves down

Moves up

View

Toolbar Shows or hides the toolbar

Status bar Shows or hides the status bar

Message Display Area Shows or hides the message display area

Large Icons Displays the data list area using large icons

Small Icons Displays the data list area using small icons

List Displays the data list area as a list

Details Displays the details of the data list area

Arrange Icons

System Order Displays the icons in the data list area by System Order

By Name Displays the icons in the data list area by name

Refresh Displays the most recent conditions

Tools

Check for Double-Defined Tags... Searches for function blocks with the same tag name

Reference All Elements/Tags... Creates a tag cross reference list

Self-Document Printing... Starts up self-document function

Print Parameters... Prints FCS tuning parameters

Search by Name... Searches for element numbers and tag names

Logging...

Status Display Setting...

Environment Setting...

Set Backup...

Start Backup...

Linked Part Updating...

Enables/disables user comment logging

Opens the status display setting dialog box

Opens the environment setting dialog box

Opens the update linked part dialog box

Opens the backup setting dialog box

Opens the backup specification dialog box

All Control Drawing Display Displays all control drawings

By Date Displays the icons in the data list area by date

Builder Quick Start Opens the Builder Quick Start dialog box

Plant Hierarchy Viewer Displays Plant Hierarchy Viewer

Opens fieldbus device information dialog box

Downloads to all field devices in the ALF111 segment or in the FCS

Audit Trail DB Viewer Starts Audit Trail Database Viewer

FCS Database Diagnosis Tool... Starts FCS Database Diagnosis Tool

Fieldbus

Generate Host File... (*1)

Display Device Information... (*1)

Upload All... (*1)

Download All... (*1)

Creates ALF111 host file set for whole project or for whole FCS

Uploads block parameters of all field devices in the ALF111 segment or in the FCS

Tuning Parameters Saving... Starts Tuning Parameter Saving Tool

Offline Loading... Starts Offline Loading Tool

*1: £ Valid only in the KFCS2, KFCS, RFCS5 or RFCS2 stations in which the ALF111 is configured.



IM 33S01B30-01E



Load

Download Project Common Section Downloads common project data to HIS

Download IOM... Downloads I/O module configuration data to FCS

Save FCS Tuning Parameter Saves FCS tuning parameters

Off-line Download to FCS

Download to HIS Downloads engineering data to HIS

Download Taglist... Downloads the FCS and BCV tag list to HIS

Status Display File Download... Downloads status display files

Offline Download to BCV Off-line Downloads to BCV

Download Tag-List/Gateway Information Downloads taglist of the station (non CS 1000/CS 3000 series station) and gateway information

CGW Download Downloads to CGW

Project

Open Project... Opens an existing project

Close Project Closes a project

FCS

HIS

Error Check Checks the consistency of the engineering data withinthe FCS

Resource Information... Opens a resource information dialog box

Test Function (*1) Starts the Test Function

Virtual HIS (*2)Start HIS functions in virtual mode. Runs Operation and monitoring functions without starting the Test Functions or FCS Simulation.

Help

Using On-line Manual... Displays how to use the online manual

Engineering Tutorial... Displays the Engineering Tutorial (IM 33S04H10-01E)

Builder Definition Items... Displays the builder definition item list

Reference Index ... Displays the reference manual index

Version Information... Starts the Software Configuration Viewer

F010105E.EPS

Download Off-line Downloads the engineering data to FCS

Save BCV Operation Mark Saves BCV operation marks

Common Block Download (*1) Downloads common blocks

Resolve Invalid Element Modify or recompile to clean the invalid elements after project common area modification.

All Generation... Opens All Generation dialog box

*1: This menu item is available only when Batch Management is installed.*2: This menu is available only when Test Functions Package is installed.*3: This menu item is available only when the Enhanced Test Functions Package is installed.


F1-7

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>

F1.1.1 File Menu of System ViewThe [File] menu and the submenus under the [File] menu of System View are ex-plained in this section.

■ Create New ¡ £When menu [File] - [Create New] is selected, a dialog box for creating new project appears,while when menu [File] - [Create New] is selected with a project folder selected, the dialogbox for creating the FCS, HIS, IOM or windows appears. Double click an item, a new folderor a new file corresponding to the selected item in the cascade menu may be created.

Table Files and Folders Created for “Create New” Menu Items (1/2) ¡ £

Menuitem

Selectablefolder

Folder name or filename File or folder that is created automatically

Project SYSTEMVIEW User specified Hierarchy below the project folder

FCS ProjectFolder/user-specifiedFiles under thefolder/system-fixed

Hierarchy below FCS folder (excludes I/O modulesFCS-C, SEBOL user functions, SFC sequence and user procedure)

HIS ProjectFolder/user-specifiedFiles under thefolder/system-fixed

Hierarchy below HIS folder (Graphic windows, Helpdialog boxes are not included)

BCV ProjectFolder/user-specifiedFiles under thefolder/system-fixed

Hierarchy below BCV folder

CGW ProjectFolder/user-specifiedFiles under thefolder/system-fixed

Hierarchy below CGW folder

F010106E.EPS

State Transition Matrix

MATRIX Matrix Number Matrix{m} file



IM 33S01B30-01E

Table Files and Folders Created for “Create New” Menu Items (2/2) ¡ £

Menuitem

Selectablefolder

Folder name orfile name File or folder that is created automatically

SEBOL UserFunction

SEBOL_ USER_FUNCTION

File/user-specified

File/user-specified

File/user-specified

SEBOL user-defined function’s file

SFC sequence’s fileSFC Sequence

Unit Procedure

FCS-C Task (*1)

Node (*2)

SFC_ SEQUENCE

UNIT_PROCEDURE

FCS

IOM

NODE{n} (*2)NEST{n} (*3)

File/task

Node number

Unit procedure’s file

FCS-C task’s file

Node{n}’s folder

RDT0001 to PDT0982

Group number defined when recipegroup was created

Common block files RDT0950 to RDT0982Common Block (*6)

Recipe Group (*6)

Station...

Menu item

COMMON-BLOCK

BATCH

Project

Selectable folder

Folder/user-specifiedFiles under the folder/system-fixed

Folder name orfile ame

Hierarchy below RG{n}folder

Hierarchy below STN folder

File or folder that is created automatically

IOM

HIS CONFIGU-RATION

IOM slot position and I/O module type/ I/O nest model type defined when IOM was configured

Files under NODE folder of the FCS

IOM (*4) Hierarchy below IOM folder of the FCS

WindowWINDOW User specified Graphic window’s file and folder

HELP User specified Help dialog box’s file

F010107E.EPS

Nest (*3) IOM2 Nest number Nest{n} folder

Trend Acquisition Pen Assignment (*5)

File/user-specified Trend acquisition pen assignment’s file

*1: ¡ £ This menu item is available only on PFCS, SFCS.*2: £ This menu item is available only on KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, RFCS5 and RFCS2.*3: £ This menu item is available only on RFCS5, RFCS2.*4: ¡ £ This menu item is available only on PFCS and SFCS.*5: £ This menu item is available only on CS 3000 system.*6: This menu item is available only when Batch Management is installed.

SEE ALSO


Migrated-FCS (FIO) (IM33Q01B41-01E)


F1-9

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>

■ OpenWhen [Open] from the [File] menu is selected while a folder is selected, the folder will open.If the selected file is already opened, no change happens.

When [Open] from the [File] menu is selected while a file is selected in the data list, buildersfor editing the engineering data will start up.

■ External File• Import Window Hierarchy

Imports window hierarchy information from a text file.If there is no window that corresponds to the description in the text file, an import errorwill occur.

• Export Window HierarchyExports window hierarchy information to a text file.

■ DeleteWhen [Delete] from the [File] menu is clicked while a file or folder is selected, the selectedfile or folder may be deleted. However, the folders or files that may be deleted are thosecreated in System View. The current project folder and the default project folder can not bedeleted. Furthermore, when selecting a folder or file that can not be deleted, the [Delete]task bar grays out.

● Deleting a State Transition Matrix

If a State Transition Matrix of an FCS is being used, the State Transition Matrix can not bedeleted. A warning message will be displayed when try to delete it.

● Deleting an IOM

Note the following when deleting a dual-redundant IOM:

• A dual-redundant IOM (u-s IOM name Dup) cannot be deleted. If deletion operation isexecuted, a dialog box containing a message “Can not delete ‘u-s IOM nameDup.edf’.” will appear.

• When the source IOM of a dual-redundant IOM is deleted, the dual-redundant IOM(u-s IOM name Dup) will also be deleted.




■ PropertiesWhen [Properties] from the [File] menu is selected, the property tab of the selected folder orfile may be displayed. Properties can be changed in the properties sheet.

IMPORTANT

• For the project with “current” attribute, when clicking [OK] button after changing a FCSfolder’s property, the new contents will be off-line loaded to the FCS.

• For the project with “current” attribute, when clicking [OK] button after changing an I/Omodule’s property, the new contents will be downloaded to the I/O module.

• When clicking [OK] button after changing HIS folder or user-defined windows proper-ties, the new contents may be reflected only after downloading them separately in toHIS.

F1-11

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>


■ Print Preview ¡ £To select one of the following items to display the printout image as the print preview.

• Project property

• Station property

• State Transition Matrix List

• SEBOL user’s function list

• SFC sequence list

• Unit procedure list

• FCS-C program list (*1)

• Node property (*2)

• Nest properties (*3)

• IOM properties

• Control drawing list

• Window hierarchy

• Window list

• Common block list (*4)

*1: ¡ £ The Print Preview for the engineering data is available only on PFCS, SFCS.*2: £ The Print Preview for the engineering data is available only on KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, RFCS5 and

RFCS2.*3: £ The print preview for the engineering data is available only on RFCS5 and RFCS2.*4: The Print Preview for the engineering data is available only when Batch Management is installed.

TIP

To run Print Preview, printer details need to be set in Windows system.



■ Print ¡ £Select one of the following items for printing.

• Project property

• Station property

• SEBOL user’s function list

• SFC Sequence list

• Unit procedure list

• FCS-C program list (*1)

• Node property (*2)

• Nest property (*3)

• IOM properties

• Control drawing list

• Engineering unit symbol

• Switch position label

• Plant hierarchy

• Window hierarchy

• Window list

• Common block list (*4)

*1: ¡ £ Printing out the engineering data is available only on PFCS, SFCS.*2: £ Printing out the engineering data is available only onKFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, RFCS5 and RFCS2.*3: £ Printing out the engineering data is available only on RFCS5 and RFCS2.*4: Printing out the engineering data is available only when Batch Management is installed.

TIP

To run Print, printer details need to be set in Windows system.

■ Exit System ViewTerminates the System View. When any application for builders started from System Viewis running, the System View can not be terminated until the builders are terminated.

F1-13

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>


F1.1.2 Edit Menu of System ViewThe [Edit] menu of System View is explained in this section.

■ CutThe folder or file selected in System View is cut from System View then put to the clip-board. The folder or the file in the clipboard will then be removed after “Paste.”

■ CopyThe folders or files selected in System View are copied to the clipboard.

■ PasteThe selected folders or files in the clipboard are pasted to the folder or file selected inSystem View.

■ Paste ShortcutAn HIS window definition file is pasted to the folder selected in System View.

Select [Copy] from the [Edit] menu to copy the shortcut source file to the clipboard. Then,select a window definition folder in the data tree area of the System View and select [PasteShortcut] from the [Edit] menu.

[Paste Shortcut] cannot be selected after [Cut].

■ Move UpwardSelect a window definition folder in the data tree area, then select [Move Upward] from the[Edit] menu. The display order of the file will move up among the windows in the samehierarchy level.

■ Move DownwardSelect a window definition folder in the data tree area, then select [Move Downward] fromthe [Edit] menu. The display order of the file will move down among the windows in thesame hierarchy level.



F1.1.3 View Menu of System ViewThe [View] menu and the submenus under the [View] menu of System View areexplained in this section.

■ ToolbarToggle between show or hide the status bar.

■ Status BarToggle between show or hide the toolbar.

■ Message Display AreaToggle between show or hide the message display area.

■ Large IconThe files are displayed in large icons in the data list area.

■ Small IconThe files are displayed in small icons in the data list area.

■ ListThe file names are displayed in a list in the data list area.

■ DetailsThe names, types and update times of the files are listed in the data list area.

■ Arrange IconsThe display of the data list area may be rearranged.

• System OrderThe files will be listed in a fixed order (System Order). When displaying files in thisorder there will be a check mark at [System Order] taskbar on [Arrange Icons]submenu of [View] menu.The files will be displayed in the order as the following table when the System Order ischecked.The files not listed in the table will be displayed in the order by names.

F1-15

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>


Table Files Displayed by System Order

Folder File Name Type Display

PROJECT\COMMON\MATRIX

MultiPjt.edf Multiple Projects Connection

CustomPlant.edf Plant Hierarchy

BlkStsLabel.edf Block Status Character String

AlmStsLabel.edf Alarm Status Character String

AlmTbl.edf Alarm Processing Table

StnConf.edf Station configuration

UserSec.edf Security

OpeMarkDef.edf Operation Mark

EngUnit.edf Engineering Unit Symbol

InstLabel.edf Switch Position Label

SysStsLabel.edf System Fixed Status Character String

AlmPri.edf Alarm Priority

StsChange.edf Status Change Command Character String

Matrix{m}.edf State Transition Matrix

CommDataWW.edf Communication I/O

WBTagDef.edf Communication I/O Tag

SwitchDef.edf Common Switch

GswitchDef.edf Global Switch

ProductWnd.edf Product Control

PROJECT\COMMON Same as listed left.

By numbers

TrainName.edf TrainBATCH\RG{nn} Same as listed

left.

FCS{dd}{nn}\SWITCH Same as listed left.

FCS{dd}{nn}\FUNCTION_BLOCK\DR{mmmm} <TagName>.edf Function Block Detail By defined

order

SD{nn}01.edf Printout Message

OG{nn}01.edf Operator Guide

EV{nn}01.edf Signal Event

AN{nn}01.edf Annunciator

FCS{dd}{nn}\MESSAGE Same as listed left.

<GraphicName>.edf

Graphic<OverviewName>.edf

<ControlName>.edf

<TrendName>.edf Trend display pen assignment

HIS{dd}{nn}\WINDOW By window hierarchies

OpeconDef.edf HIS Constants

Scheduler.edf Scheduler

MsgReqDef.edf Sequence Message Request

FuncKey.edf Assign Function Keys

PanelSet.edf Panel Set

TR{rrrr}.edf Trend acquisition pen assignment

HIS{dd}{nn}\CONFIGURATION Same as listed left.

F010108E.EPS

*1: The function blocks are listed in the defined order.*2: Windows are displayed according to their hierarchies.



• By NameThe data list area is displayed in order of the names of the icons. When displayed byname, it is indicated by a check mark beside [By Name] in the [Display] menu.

• By DateThe data list area is displayed in order of the date of the icons. When displayed bydate, it is indicated by a check mark beside [By Date] in the [Display] menu.

■ All Control Drawing DisplayWhen [All control drawing display] is checked, all control drawings including the emptydrawings are displayed in the file list, otherwise only the defined drawings are displayed.

[All control drawing display] is the default setting.

■ RefreshWhen editing is performed using the builder, the information displayed in System View maybe different from the actual engineering data. When [Refresh] is selected, the data tree andthe data list in System View are displayed with the most recent information.

F1-17

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>


F1.1.4 Tool Menu of System ViewThe [Tools] menu of System View is explained in this section.

■ Builder Quick StartDisplays the builder quick start dialog box. By entering the builder window name, elementname, user-defined label or tag name to this dialog box, the corresponding builder can bestarted directly.

In general, a builder is started by choosing its icon by unfolding the folders in the tree viewof System View.

For an example, to start a control drawing builder, open <Project folder> - [FCS] folder-[FUNCTION BLOCK] folder, then choose the control drawing file on the list view of SystemView can start the control drawing builder.

With this builder quick start dialog box, the control drawing builder can be started (thedrawing file is openned) directly by entering a tag name of a function block defined in thecontrol drawing.

Name

F010116E.EPS

Builder Quick Start

Start

Figure Builder Quick Start Dialog Box

■ Check for Double-Defined TagsSearches for function blocks with the same tag name within a project.

The window names in HIS will also be searched for checking double-defined tags, so that ifan identical tag name and window name can also be found.

The result of search will be displayed with window names, comments and station names.

The related builder can be started directly using the window name or the tag name in thesearch result.

■ Reference All Elements/TagsCreates a list of all element numbers and tag names within the range specified in the dialogbox.

■ Self Document PrintingDisplays the window for self documentation.

■ Print ParametersDisplays the window for printing saved tuning parameters.



■ Search by NameSearches for element numbers or tag names within the range specified in the dialog box(by project, by station).

The related builder can be started directly using the element name or the tag name in thesearch result.

■ Plant Hierarchy ViewerDisplays the plant hierarchy of the project.

■ LoggingUser Comment Logging can be enabled or disabled as necessary. User comments arelogged to manage a history of operations in various builders. When logging of user com-ments is enabled, a dialog box for entering user comments such as the reason for chang-ing configuration will be displayed whenever the builders overwrite the current configurationby a Save or Download operation.

Enable User Comment Logging?

CancelOK

F010109E.EPS

Logging Specification

Enable User Comment Logging

Disable User Comment Logging

Figure Logging Specification Dialog Box

■ Status Display SettingThe Status Display Setting dialog box is used to set the display color of the wiring and thefont of the process data in the HIS status display window. It is possible to set these settingsfor both the Control Drawing and Logic Chart. This setting is made in project units.

SEE ALSO

• For details on the settings for Control Drawings in the Status Display Setting dialog box, see the follow-ing:

F3.27, “Status Display Settings for Control Drawings”

• For details on the settings for the Logic Charts in the Status Display Setting dialog box, see the follow-ing:

F4.15, “Status Display Settings for Logic Charts”

F1-19

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>


■ Environment SettingThe tool for setting the generation environment and the printing environment of GraphicBuilder is started.

Environment Setting

Standard Set

F010114E.EPS

Print window back ground color when specifying color print

Print All

Set individually

Graphic Builder

Screen Image

Data Bind

Modify Information

HIS-Specific Primitive Information

Linked-Part Information

Specify items to print

Priority to printer setting

Execute color print or monochrome print regardless of the printer setting

Forced Monochrome Print

Forced Color Print

OK Cancel

Display Downloading Confirmation Dialog

Generation

Figure Environment Setting Dialog Box



● Display Downloading Confirmation Dialog

If you check this check box, the Downloading Confirmation dialog box appears when youperform downloading in a builder related to FCSs. Data downloaded to an FCS is displayedin the Downloading Confirmation dialog box. This information is also displayed in themessage display area of System View.

Starting generation Sun Sep 28 17:06:19 2003Detecting difference startConverted Generation Time Of StationConverted Generation Time Of Area Detecting difference end

F010117E.EPS

CancelOK

Downloading confirmation dialog

Dowmload to FCS ?

Figure Downloading Confirmation Dialog

Downloading to the FCS is started if you click the [OK] button in the Downloading Confir-mation dialog box. Click the [Cancel] button to cancel downloading to the FCS.

The following Downloading Confirmation dialog box appears for some of the buildersrelated to Fieldbus Builder.

Download to FCS ?

NoYes

F010118E.EPS

Downloading Confirmation dialog

Figure Downloading Confirmation Dialog

● Print Window Background Color when Specifying Color Print

The background color is printed if the checkbox is checked.

● Specify Items to Print

Make settings so that only the items necessary for Graphic Builder are printed. If [Print All]is selected, all items are printed. If [Set individually] is selected, Screen Image, Data Bind,Modify Information, HIS Specific Primitive Information, and Linked Part Information can beselected to be printed.

● Execute Color Print or Monochrome Print regardless of the Printer Setting

How items are printed using Graphic Builder can be specified. If [Priority to printer setting]is selected, the selected items are printed according to Windows NT's printer setting. If[Forced Monochrome Print] is selected, they are printed in monochrome regardless of theprinter setting. If [Forced Color Print] is selected, they are printed in color regardless of theprinter setting.

F1-21

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>


■ Tuning Parameters SavingStarts a tool to save the tuning parameters of selected FCSs continuously.

STATIONFCS0101FCS0102

COMM...PFCD-EPFCD-E

RESULTS...Before Exe...Before Exe...

MODIFIED TIME

F010119E.EPS

CLOSETUNING PARAMETER SAVE

SELECT ALL

ALL CLEAR

PREVIOUSRESULT

Tuning parameters save continuously

PROJECT: MYPJT

Figure Tuning Parameters Save Continuously T ool

■ Offline LoadingStarts a tool to perform offline load continuously to the selected FCSs.



■ Fieldbus : KFCS2/KFCS £The following four fieldbus related tasks are displayed in the cascade menu.

• Generate Host File

• Upload All

• Download All

• Display Device Information

● Generate Host File : KFCS2/KFCS £

Generates a host file set for ALF111 (Fieldbus H1 Communication Module).

SEE ALSO

For more information about generating host file set, see the following:

“■ Host File Set Generation” in D1.5, “Other Engineering Items” in FOUNDATION fieldbus Reference(IM 33Y05P10-01E)

● Upload All : KFCS2/KFCS £

Starts a tool to upload fieldbus device parameters of the whole FCS or whole ALF111(Fieldbus HI Communication Module) segment.

SEE ALSO

For more information about fieldbus overall upload, see the following:

“■ Fieldbus Overall Upload” in D1.5, “Other Engineering Items” in FOUNDATION fieldbus Reference (IM33Y05P10-01E)

● Download All : KFCS2/KFCS £

Starts a downloading tool so as to download to all filedbus devices in the segment ofALF111 (fieldbus H1 module) or in the FCS.

SEE ALSO

For more information about fieldbus overall download, see the following:

“■ Download to All Fieldbus Devices” in D1.5, “Other Engineering Items” in FOUNDATION fieldbus Ref-erence (IM 33Y05P10-01E)

● Display Device Information : KFCS2/KFCS £

Opens fieldbus device information dialog box for displaying the information of fieldbusdevices.

SEE ALSO

For more information about displaying fieldbus devices information, see the following:

“■ Displaying Device Information” in D1.5, “Other Engineering Items” in FOUNDATION fieldbus Refer-ence (IM 33Y05P10-01E)

F1-23

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>


■ Update Linked PartThe tool for updating linked parts is started.

SEE ALSO

For the details on updating linked parts, see the following:

F13, “Linked Parts”

■ Backup SettingThe tool for making settings for project data backup is started.

SEE ALSO

For the details on the backup settings, see the following:

F1.6, “Project Data Backup”

■ Start BackupThe tool for backing up project data is started.

SEE ALSO

For how to use the backup tool, see the following:

F1.6, “Project Data Backup”

■ FCS Database Diagnosis ToolThe FCS database consistency check tool is started.

SEE ALSO

For the explanation about the FCS database diagnosis tool, see the following:

“■ FCS Database Diagnosis Tool” in F1.7.2, “FCS Database Diagnosis”

■ Audit Trail DB ViewerStarts Audit Trail Database Viewer so as to view the audit trails.

SEE ALSO

• For more information about engineering audit trail database viewer, see the following:

P3.4, “Browsing Audit Trail Data”

• For more information about recipe management audit trail database viewer, see the following:

P7.4, “Browsing Audit Trail Data”



F1.1.5 Load Menu of System ViewThe [Load] menu and the submenus under the [Load] menu of System View areexplained in this section.

■ Download Project Common SectionWhen [Download Project Common Section] is selected on the [Load] menu, a confirmationmessage box for downloading the common part of the project configuration will appear.

Clicking the [OK] button in the message box may download the contents defined in theproject builders into HIS, UHMIS (Unified Operation/Monitoring Station) and HP9000.

Whenever adding or removing a FCS or HIS, it is required to carry out the project commondownload from System View.

If a project folder is selected, definition contents are downloaded to every HIS, UHMIS (Unified Operation/Monitoring Station) and HP9000 in the project.

If an HIS folder is selected, it is downloaded only to the selected HIS.

■ Download IOMWhen the [Download IOM] on the [Load] menu is clicked while the FCS folder of the currentproject is selected, the IOM download dialog box will appear. When [OK] is clicked whilethe IOM is selected from the IOM download dialog box, the engineering data for the se-lected FCS I/O modules will be downloaded.

Choosing an I/O module on the IOM download dialog box can pop out a new box forselecting a signal conditioner card for downloading.

IMPORTANT

IOM download may not be performed to FCS that has not been through off-line FCSdownload before.

SEE ALSO

For details on FCS off-line download, see the following of later section:

“■ Offline-Download to FCS”

F1-25

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>


IMPORTANT

When the items indicated below are changed and the IOM download is performed, the I/Omodule will be stopped.

• When the type of a thermocouple, or the range is changed

• When the attributes of process data such as square root extraction or IOP detectionspecifications are changed

When the I/O module stops, the following actions occur for the function block connected tothe I/O module.

• Input dataThe previous value is retained. When the I/O module returns to normal, the new values may be accessed.

• Output dateFor analog outputs, output values are retained when the changes do not affect theoutput values.In the case of contact outputs, the output may be turned off or to hold previous goodvalue.

SEE ALSO

For the details on the IOM behaviors when IOM downloading is performed, see the following:

B3.5, “Operation of I/O Module when Downloading is Performed”



■ Save FCS Tuning Parameter

IMPORTANT

• FCS tuning parameter save may not be performed to FCS that has not been throughoff-line FCS download before.

• The saved tuning parameters take precedence over the constants upon off-linedownloading to an FCS, while the constants take precedence over the unsaved tuningparameters upon initial off-line downloading to an FCS.

• When online downloading to an FCS, the constants are compared to the currentsaved tuning parameters for a modified function block.If those are not identical, the constants will override the existing tuning parameters onthe FCS.

• When saving the tuning parameters, it is recommended to close Control DrawingBuilder, the Function Block Overview Builder and the Function Block Detail Builder.

When [Save FCS Tuning Parameter] is selected from the [Load] menu while the FCS folderof the current project is selected, a message dialog box is displayed.

Clicking on [OK] in the message dialog box saves the tuning parameters of the selectedFCS.

Perform tuning parameter save for Project 'MYPJT' FCS 'FCS0101' ?

CancelOK

F010110E.EPS

Confirm to Save FCS Tuning Parameter

Figure Confirm to Save FCS Tuning Parameter Dialog Box

During virtual test, the parameters for the FCS within the testing project may be saved.

The saving procedure is the same as the procedure for saving parameters in currentproject.

By using the import operation on the Function Block Overview Builder, Function BlockDetail Builder and Control Drawing Builder of the current project, the FCS tuning param-eters of a virtually tested project may be applied to the current project.

F1-27

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>


■ Offline-Download to FCS

IMPORTANT

When FCS off-line download is executed, the target FCS stops.

● Download

When [Download] is clicked on [Offline-Download to FCS] task bar of the [Load] menuwhile an FCS folder of the current project or default projects selected, Confirm OfflineDownloading to FCS dialog box appears.

Perform offline download to Project 'MYPJT' FCS 'FCS0101' ?

CancelOK

F010111E.EPS

Confirm offline downloading to FCS

Figure Confirm Offline Downloading to FCS Dialog Box

Click [OK] button on the dialog box, a message box prompting for saving tuning param-eters of the selected FCS appears.

When offline downloading to FCS, the tuning parameters will be lost.Save tuning parameters of Project: 'MYPJT', Station: 'FCS0101' ?

NoYes

F010115E.EPS

Confirm to save FCS Tuning Parameter

Figure Confirm to Save FCS Tuning Parameter Dialog Box



Click [OK] button on “Confirm to Save FCS Tuning Parameter” dialog box to start saving theparameters. Clock [No], download continues without saving the parameters.

If the parameters are saved, the parameters are kept in the FCS database. After the invalidelements are resolved, downloading to FCS starts. During downloading, the process will beindicted by the messages in the Generation Dialog window.

Start Offline Downloading Fri Nov 19 18:30:19 1999

Started off-line load FCS0101 Fri Nov 19 18:30:37 1999Initializing... FCSIoading... FCS program size = 4834928 bytesIoading... FCS database size = 3805184 bytesIoading... IOM database size = 5256 bytesEqualize start. HIS0124Equalize completed successfully. HIS0124Off-line load ended Fri Nov 19 18:31:51 1999

Completed Offline Downloading Fri Nov 19 18:31:51 1999

F010113E.EPS

Close

Generation Dialog - [Pjt:MYPJT Stn:FCS0101]

Figure Generation Dialog Box

● Precautions when Offline Downloading

• “Off-line download to FCS” may transfer all FCS related engineering information to theFCS after stopping the FCS.

• When the FCS off-line download is executed, the tuning parameters of the functionblocks in the FCS memory will be overwritten. In order to prevent the tuning param-eters from being changed, the tuning parameters should be saved prior to the FCSoff-line download. By saving the tuning parameters to the source files, when the FCSoff-line download is executed to the FCS, the saved tuning parameters can be trans-ferred along with the contents defined on the FCS builder. If the tuning parameters arenot saved, the default values of the tuning parameters when each function block iscreated or the parameters saved before previous downloading will be downloaded.

• If the fixed constants of the function block are set as parameters, the saved tuningparameters will have precedence over them.

• When “Off-line download to FCS” is performed for the first time, saving the tuningparameters is not necessary.

F1-29

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>


■ Download to HISWhen [Download to HIS] is clicked on the [Load] menu while a project folder or hierarchiesbelow the HIS folder of the current project is selected, [Confirm download to HIS] dialogbox will be displayed.

Clicking [OK] button in the message box may download the information in the folders belowthe selected hierarchy to the designated HIS.

IMPORTANT

• When HIS download is executed, trend acquisition will be reset and the previouslysampled trend data may be lost. So that save the trend samples before downloading.

SEE ALSO

For details on trend data saving, see the following:

E4.2.1, “Components of Trend Window”

• When running HIS downloading right before the processes of hour-closing (closed ateach hour sharp), the trend data maybe excluded from the hour-closing processes.Thus, it is necessary to run HIS downloading at least three minutes before or after thetime of hour-closing processes are performed.

When an HIS folder is selected, it is downloaded to the selected HIS.When windows are selected, they are downloaded to the selected HIS window by window.

■ Download Tag ListWhen [Download FCS Taglist] is selected on the [Load] menu, a dialog box for selectingthe station, source of tag list, and the HIS, destination station of tag list, appears.

More than one tag list source station or destination station can be selected.

By clicking the [Equalize] button on the dialog box, the FCS tag list may be downloaded tothe HIS. When a BCV is selected to be the source of tag list, the tag list of the controlstations connected to the BCV is downloaded to HIS too. Furthermore, the tag list of upperor lower gateways specified in the BCV may also be downloaded to the HIS.



■ Status Display File DownloadWhen [Status Display File Download] is selected from the [Load] menu while a statusdisplay file is selected, a dialog box for selecting the download destination station willappear.

Clicking [OK] button after selecting a station will prompt a confirmation message box fordownloading. Clicking [OK] button on the message box may download the Status DisplayFile to the selected station.

Vary with different ways of selecting the Status Display Files for downloading, the followingfiles may be downloaded accordingly.

• Selecting and then downloading the DISPLAY folderAll of the selected status display files (control drawing status display files, and logicchart status display files) will be downloaded to the specified station.

• Selecting and then downloading the LOGICCHART folderAll of the logic chart status display files will be downloaded to the specified station.

• Selecting the status display files in the data list and then downloading themSelecting the DISPLAY folder or LOGICCHART folder will display in the data list areaa list of the status display files of the selected folder. If a single (or multiple) statusdisplay file(s) displayed in the data list is selected and then downloaded, only theselected status display file(s) will be downloaded to the specified station.Note that the control drawing status display files and logic chart status display filescannot be selected simultaneously.

■ Offline Download to BCVWhen [Offline Download to BCV] is selected on the [Load] menu while a BCV folder isselected, a confirmation message box for confirming BCV downloading will appear.

Clicking [OK] button in the message box may perform off-line download to BCV.

For BCV-H or BCV-L, the database transmitted to the BCV contains a tag list. The BCVstarts immediately after the off-line download is completed.

The tag list of the Control Units and the Control Stations on the Control Bus, configured aslower level of the network, will be downloaded to all HISs, UHMISs (Unified Operation/Monitoring stations) and HP9000 computers.

F1-31

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>


■ Download Tag-List/Gateway InformationWhen [Download Tag-List/Gateway Information] is selected on the [Load] menu while astation is selected, a dialog box for confirmation appears.

Clicking the [OK] button may start downloading the tag list and gateway information.

The tag list will be downloaded to all BCVs and all HISs, Unified Operation/Monitoringstations and HP9000 Computers, while the gateway information is downloaded to all HISs,UHMISs (Unified Operation/Monitoring stations) and HP9000 Computers.

■ Save BCV Operation MarkWhen [Save BCV Operation Mark] is clicked on [Load] menu while a BCV-H or a BCV-Lfolder is selected, a confirmation dialog box for Saving BCV operation marks will appear.Clicking [OK] buttons in the dialog box may start saving the BCV operation marks.

■ Download to CGWWhen [CGW Download] is selected from the [Load] menu while a CGW folder is selected, amessage box for confirming CGW download will appear.

Clicking [OK] button in the message box may download the CGW database to the selectedCGW.

The CGW download is performed via the control bus, not Ethernet.

■ Common Block Download (*1)Select [Common Block Download] from the [Load] menu while a common block folder orcommon block file is selected in the System View. A Common Block confirmation messagebox will appear.

Clicking [OK] button in the message box. The common block will be downloaded to allstations defined as the server for the selected recipe group.

*1: The [Common block download] task bar may be selected only when Batch Management is installed.



F1.1.6 Project Menu of System ViewThe [Project] menu of System View is explained in this section.

■ Open ProjectThe existing user-defined projects are displayed in System View.

When [Open Project] is selected from the [Project] menu, the open project dialog box iscalled up. The project to be opened may be selected in the open project dialog box. Thecurrent project is always displayed in the System View.

IMPORTANT

Do not drag & drop in the folder list display section of the open project dialog box. Dragging& dropping may damage the engineering data.

■ Close ProjectThe selected user-defined project is closed from System View. The closed project will nolonger be displayed in System View so that the project can not be removed.

However, if the builder file of the project is being used, the project can not be closed. Also,the current project and the default project can not be closed.

■ Resolve Invalid ElementClick this task bar may repair or recompile the files to resolve the invalid elements. If theproject is not a current project, the files required from the project common part will be takento repair the FCS download files.

IMPORTANT

During the virtual test, the file will not be sent to FCS even after Resolving Invalid Elementsis performed.

F1-33

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>


F1.1.7 FCS Menu of System ViewThe [FCS] menu of System View is explained in this section.

■ Error CheckWhen [Error Check] from the [FCS] menu is selected while an FCS folder is selected, theconsistency of the engineering data of the selected FCS (duplicate tag name definitionsand block connection information) are checked. The check results are displayed in themessage display area.

■ Resource InformationWhen [Resource information] is selected from the [FCS] menu, the resource informationdialog box is displayed.

In the resource information dialog box, the numbers of different types of function blocksused by the FCS and the common items of the station are displayed.

■ Test FunctionThere are two types of tests: virtual test and target test. When [Test Function] is selectedfrom the [FCS] menu while an FCS folder is selected, either virtual test or target test isstarted depending on the attribute of the project to which the selected FCS belongs. Theconditions for starting each of these test is given below:

• If the attribute of the project to which the selected FCS belongs is current project, thetarget test may be performed.

• If the attribute of the project to which the selected FCS belongs is user defined projector a default project, the virtual test may be performed.

■ All GenerationWhen [All Generation] is selected from the [FCS] menu while the FCS folder is beingselected, the all generation dialog box will be displayed.

Generation of multiple FCS-related builder files can be performed by a single operation inthe all generation dialog box.

SEE ALSO

For more information on all generation, see the following:

F15, “All Generation”


IM 33S01B30-01E

F1.1.8 HIS Menu of System ViewThe [HIS] menu of System View is explained.

■ Virtual HISWhen [Virtual HIS] is selected from the [HIS] menu while the HIS folder is being selected, adialog to change the HIS to a virtual mode will be displayed.

SEE ALSO

For more information on how to start the virtual HIS, see the following:

D2.2, “Starting and Ending the Virtual HIS in a Standalone Mode” in the Engineering Test Guide (IM33S04N10-01E)


F1-35

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.1 System View>

F1.1.9 Help Menu of System ViewThe [Help] menu of System View is explained in this section.

■ Using On-Line Manual“Using Online Manual” is displayed.

■ Engineering TutorialEngineering Tutorial (IM 33S04H10-01E) is displayed.

■ Builder Definition ItemsThe builder definition item list of System View is displayed.

■ Reference IndexThe index of the Reference (IM 33S01B30-01E) is displayed.

■ Version InformationThis menu item starts the software configuration viewer. The software configuration viewerdisplays the installed engineering function software and its version information.


F1-36<F1.2 Creating a New Project>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F1.2 Creating a New ProjectCreate a project, which is the basic unit of the engineering database management.

■ ProjectsA project is a unit manages the database of the FCS and the HIS created by the user. Allbuilder files defined by various builders are managed under the project.

IMPORTANT

Make sure to use the same package revision for each of the PCs if you want to engineerthe same project on several PCs.

F010201E.EPS

2 stations

All Folders Opened Folders : MYPJTName Type Modified DateSYSTEM VIEW

MYPJT

COMMON

BATCH

FCS0101

CONFIGURATION

SEQ-LIBRARY

IOM

SWITCH

MESSAGE

FUNCTION-BLOCK

DISPLAY

APPLICATION

HIS0124

CONFIGURATION

WINDOW

HELP

-

-

-

+

+

-

System View (CS 1000) -MYPJT

+

+

File Edit View Tools Load Project FCS HIS Help

az 87

Figure Project Architecture

There are three types of project; the default project, the current project and the user-defined project.

The project attribute (default, current, and user-defined) may be changed using the ProjectAttribute Change Utility.

SEE ALSO

For details on project attribute change, see the following:

F1.3, “Project’s Attribution Utility”


F1-37

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.2 Creating a New Project>

● Default Project

After installation of the system, the project created the first time when the System Viewstarts is referred to as the default project.

The characteristics of the default project are as follows:

• This project is downloadable to the FCS.

• The virtual test with the FCS simulator can be performed for this project.

• This project is downloadable to the HIS.

• This project is downloadable off-line to the FCS of the target system.

● Current Project

When any one of the FCS’s created in a default project is successfully downloaded, theattribute of the project changes from the default project to a current project. Online engi-neering becomes enabled.

The current project can perform the target test using the Test Function.

The characteristics of the current project are as follows:

• Multiple current projects cannot be created.

• The target test can be performed for this project.

• This project is downloadable to the HIS.

• This project is downloadable to the FCS of the target system.

Each builder file defined by the various builders are written onto the hard disk when down-loading to the FCS or HIS is completed normally. With the current project, the data on thehard disk always matches the data on the FCS or HIS.

● User-Defined Project

A project copied either from the default project or from the current project is referred to as auser-defined project.

This project cannot be downloaded to the FCS. This project is used when engineeringusing virtual tests or making a backup copy of the current project.

The characteristics of the user-defined project are as follows:

• Multiple user-defined projects can be created in System View.

• The virtual test with the FCS simulator can be performed for this project.

• This project is not downloadable to the FCS or HIS of the target system.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Project ManagementA project is created when System View is executed for the first time after the builders areinstalled. The project created has the attribute of “the default project” at this stage. Oncethis project is downloaded to the FCS of the target system, the project’s attribute ischanged from “the default project” to the current project.

F010202E.EPS

Ready

All Folders Opened Folders:Name Type Modified DateSYSTEM VIEW

MYPJT

COMMON

BATCH

FCS0101

HIS0124

PJT01

COMMON

FCS0101

HIS0124

-

-

+

+

+-

+

+

System View (CS 1000)

File Edit View Tools Load Project FCS HIS Help

az 87

Current object

User defined project

Figure Project Types


F1-39

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Outline of Project▼ Software Information, Project Information

When creating a project, the outline dialog box appears, the project outline information maybe input.

● Software Information

The software information area displays the user name and the company name registeredwhen the software was installed. The registration may be modified in this dialog box. Butthe model cannot be changed.

● Project Information

The project information area allows the project creator to enter arbitrary characters. Enterinformation on the process and the person in charge of DCS to manage the project.

• Process:Production type, plant name/ equipment name

• Person in charge of DCS:Company name/ organization name, department responsible, person in charge, dateof creation, scope of responsibility

CS 1000

CS1000 Software Information

Model :

CS1000User :

YOKOGAWACompany :

Enter Project Information

CancelOK

F010203E.EPS

Outline

Process: Yokogawa Tokyo FactoryDistillation processManufactory equipment for products Interma

Person in charge of DCS: Yokogawa Head OffEngineering DepartmentMr. YokogawaJan. 15 1998HIS, FCSGraphics are user's responsibility

Project Information

Figure Project Information



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Project Name and Position ¡ £▼ Project, Position, Project Comment, Alias of Project

After creating a new project, a menu box for the outline of the project, the project name andproject location will be displayed in Create New Project dialog box.

Project name is an alphanumeric character string less than 8 characters. The project ismanaged according to this project name.

The comment within 32 alphanumeric characters or 16 double-byte characters may beentered as the project description.

Moreover, an alias can be created for a project. An alias of project can be defined with 8alphanumeric characters.

The project position is the project folder’s location in the hard disk. The default location inwhich to store the project is shown below. If more than one hard disk exist, the storagedrive may be specified accordingly such as D:.

• C:\CS1000\ENG\BkProject\ (*1)

• C:\CS3000\ENG\BkProject\ (*2)

*1: ¡ The default location in the CS 1000.*2: £ The default location in the CS 3000.

CancelOK

Create New Project

MYPJT

Position

C:\CS1000\eng\BkProject\

Project

Alias of Project

Project Comment

Browse...

F010204E.EPS

Detailed SettingConstantOutlineName and Position

Figure Project Properties (Name and Position)


F1-41

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Domain Number and Control Bus Dual-Redundant Configuration ¡A domain number and the control bus dual-redundant configuration may be set on the[Constant] tab when creating a new project.

Domain

Number 1

CancelOK

Create New Project

F010205E.EPS

Make Control Bus Dual-Redundant

Detailed SettingConstantOutlineName and Position Constant

Figure Constant Tab in Create New Project Dialog Box ¡

● Default Domain Number ¡

▼ Domain Number

A default domain number may be displayed when creating a new project. Set this numberfor domain number.

A domain number is used to identify each domain in a network. The domain number maybe set in the range of 1 to 16. The domain number can not be changed once it is set.

● Control Bus Dual-Redundant Configuration ¡

▼ Make Control Bus Dual-Redundant

The user can specify whether to duplicate the VL net to improve the reliability of a system. Ifthe VL net is in dual-redundant configuration, when one of the two buses fails or in troubles,the communication can continue by the other bus. When the VL net is in dual-redundantconfiguration, the bus 1 and bus 2 carry out the communication alternately in normalsituations.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Setting Domain Number £A domain number may be set on the Constant tab when creating a new project.

Domain

Number 1

CancelOK

Create New Project

F010206E.EPS

Make Control Bus Dual-Redundant


Figure Constant Tab in Create New Project Dialog Box £

● Default Domain Number £

▼ Domain Number

A default domain number may be displayed when creating a new project. Set this numberfor domain number.

A domain number is used to identify each domain in a network.

The domain number may be set in the range of 1 to 16. The domain number can not bechanged once it is set.

Note that every time a new FCS or HIS is created, a domain number can be set for thestation.


F1-43

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Detailed Setting of ProjectOn the [Detailed Setting] tab of [Create New Project] dialog box, the options for [ManuallyRegister Engineering Unit] and [Manually Register Switch Position Label] can be set.

CancelOK

F010207E.EPS

Manually Register Engineering Unit Symbol

Manually Register Switch Position Label

Create New Project


Create New Project


Plant Hierarchy

Start Number 1

Maximum Number of use 32767

Number of use (Number of Custom facilities) 1000 (1000)

Figure Detailed Setting Tab in Create New Project Dialog Box

● Manually Register Engineering Unit

▼ Manually Register Engineering Unit Symbol

To manually register the engineering unit can be specified.

• When the option is checked, an engineering unit needs to be manually registered onEngineering Unit Symbol Builder. However, an unregistered engineering unit can notbe used.

• When the option is not checked, an engineering unit will be automatically registered.The Engineering Unit Symbol Builder will be in Read mode. In Read mode, the Engi-neering Unit Symbol Builder can read the engineering units entered on Function BlockDetail Builder or other builders and add them to the registration.

● Manually Register Switch Position Label

▼ Manually Register Switch Position Label

To manually register the switch position label can be specified.

• When the option is checked, a switch position label needs to be manually registeredon Switch Position Label Builder. However, an unregistered switch position label cannot be used.

• When the option is not checked, a switch position label will be automatically regis-tered. The Switch Position Label Builder will be in Auto mode. In Auto mode, theSwitch Position Label Builder can read the switch position labels entered on FunctionBlock Detail Builder or other builders and add them to the registration.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Plant Hierarchy

▼ Start Number, Maximum Number of Use

This is used when a project has a CENTUM CS system at the upper level and a CS1000 orCS 3000 system at the lower level.

• Start NumberThe start number for Plant Hierarchy can be defined between 1 and 32767.Since the numbers 1 to 4096 are reserved for CENTUM CS, a number greater than orequal to 4097 should be used for CS 1000 or CS 3000.

• Maximum Number of UseMaximum number of plant hierarchies can be set between 1 and 32767.

Number of in Use (Number of Custom Facilities)This indicates the number of plant hierarchies that are running in the project. Numberof Custom Facilities means the number of plant hierarchies built in Plant HierarchyBuilder.

■ Status Display SettingWhen [Status Display Setting] from the [Tools] menu is selected, status display settingdialog box will appear. On status display setting dialog box, the wiring colors and theprocess data display style of control drawing can be set. The settings are valid for thewhole project. After the settings are set, the displays will conform to the settings. It isnecessary to set the status display settings before creating control drawing or logic chartfiles. The settings can be done on the status display setting builder of System View.

SEE ALSO

• For more information about control drawing status display settings on Status Display Setting dialog box,see the following:


• For more information about logic chart status display settings on Status Display Setting dialog box, seethe following:



F1-45

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.3 Project’s Attribution Utility>

F1.3 Project’s Attribution UtilityTo change attribute of a project, or to register a project created from other PC onSystem View, Project’s Attribution Utility can be used. Moreover, the project regis-tered on System View can be removed using Project’s Attribution Utility.

IMPORTANT

• Before starting Project’s Attribution Utility, it is necessary to confirm that System Viewis not opened by another PC in the project.

• If a project is being used by a different user, using Project Attribution Utility to changethe project may cause errors in the project. So that it is important to make sure that theproject is not being used by other users before changing the project with ProjectAttribution Utility.

• When using Project Attribution Utility to modify a current project, offline download maybe required for the running field control stations.

• A project can be removed or can be registered on System View. They can be per-formed using the [Project] menu on System View.

■ Outline of Project’s Attribution UtilityThe Project’s Attribution Utility is an engineering tool that makes it convenient to register aproject created from other PC, to change a project’s properties or to remove the registrationof a project.

● Registering a Project

Using the Project’s Attribution Utility, a newly created project can be registered in SystemView. For instance, when a project is created on an HIS other than the HIS for the existingsystem, the Project’s Attribution Utility can be used to register the newly created project.

The attribute of the project can be set during registration, by choosing from Current Project,Default Project and User Defined Project.

● Changing the Attribute of a Project

Using the Project’s Attribution Utility, the attribute of a project (Default Project, CurrentProject and User Defined Project) can be changed.

● Remove Registration of a Project

Using the Project’s Attribution Utility, projects that have been registered in System View canbe removed. For instance, when the number of projects registered in System View hasreached the limit, projects that will not be used in upcoming operations can be removedtemporality from System View, using the Project’s Attribution Utility.

Note removing a project means to delete the registered information of the project from theSystem View, the project itself will not be deleted. The project can be registered again byclicking Registration button of Project’s Attribution Utility, or choose [Project] - [OpenProject...] task bar on System View.


F1-46<F1.3 Project’s Attribution Utility>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Notes on the Project Attribute Change UtilityBe careful about the following when using the Project Attribute Change Utility:

• Before using the Project Attribute Change Utility, check that System View is notrunning. If it is running, the Project Attribute Change Utility cannot run.

• Only one project can exist as the default project or current project in System View.Therefore, if a project having the same attribute already exists, first change the at-tribute of that project to user-defined project before setting the attribute of the newproject to default project or current project.

■ Running the Project Attribute Change Utility1. Before running the Project Attribute Change Utility, check that System View is not

running. When performing engineering on multiple PCs, check that the System Viewsis not running on these PCs, either.

TIP

When staring Project Attribution Utility while the System View is running, a warning message appears. Inthis case, close the System View first then start Project Attribution Utility.

2. Click [Programs] from Windows’s Start menu, then click [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] and[Project’s Attribution Utility]. Then a confirmation dialog box as shown below will open.

F010305E.EPS

CancelOK

Do not use this utility program for a project shared by multiple users. A fatal error may occur.Before changing the project contents, make sure that no other users are accessing the project.

Utility To Change Project’s Attribution

Figure Confirmation Dialog Box when Starting Project Attribution Utility

3. Click [OK] on the dialog box, the utility starts running, the dialog box of “Utility toChange Project’s Attribute” displays.

F010301E.EPS

Utility To Change Project’s Attribution

ExitDeletingChangingRegistration

Projects

Project Name Location Project Attribute

MYPJT D:\CS1000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT

D:\CS1000\eng\BKProject\PJT01

Current Project

User Defined ProjectPJT01

D:\CS1000\eng\BKProject\PJT02 User Defined ProjectPJT02

Figure Utility To Change Project’s Attribution Dialog Box


F1-47

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Quitting the Project Attribute Change UtilityTo quit the Project Attribute Change Utility, click [Exit] in the Utility To Change Project’sAttribution dialog box.

■ Registering a ProjectFollow the procedure below to register a new project and set the attribute of that project.

1. In the Utility To Change Project’s Attribution dialog box, click [Registration].The Registration Of Projects dialog box then appears.

F010302E.EPS

Resistration Of Projects

Location

Project Name

Default Project Current Project User Defined Project

Cancel

OK

Project Attribute

MYPJT

PJT01

PJT02

BKProject

Figure Registration Of Projects Dialog Box

2. In the list box, select the folder of the project you want to register.The project name of the folder you selected in the list box is displayed in the [ProjectName] box immediately below.

3. Under [Project Attribute], set the project attribute;select [Default Project], [Current Project], or [User Defined Project].

TIP

If you select Default Project or Current Project and click OK but the registered default or current projectalready exists, a warning dialog box appears.

4. Click [OK].The utility program then registers the project and updates the Projects list in the UtilityTo Change Project’s Attribution dialog box.


F1-48<F1.3 Project’s Attribution Utility>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Changing the Attribute of a ProjectFollow the procedure below to change the attribute of a project.

1. In the [Projects] list box of the Utility To Change Project’s Attribution dialog box, selectthe project whose attribute you want to change.

2. Click [Changing].The Changing Attribute Of Projects dialog box (shown below) then opens.

Default Project

Current Project

User Defined Project

F010303E.EPS

Changing Atrribute Of Projects

Attribute Of Projects

Projects

CancelApply

MYPJT

Figure Changing Attribute Of Projects Dialog Box

3. Under [Attribute Of Projects] (the present attribute of the selected project is unavail-able), select the new attribute to be given to the selected project.

TIP

If you select Default Project or Current Project and click [Apply] but the registered default or currentproject already exists, a warning dialog box appears.

4. Click [Apply].The utility program then changes the attribute and updates the project attribute indica-tion in the Projects list box of the Utility To Change Project’s Attribution dialog box.


F1-49

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Deleting a ProjectFollow the procedure below to delete a project.

1. In the [Projects] list box of the Utility To Change Project’s Attribution dialog box, selectthe project you want to delete.

2. Click [Deleting].The Deleting Of Projects dialog box (shown below) then opens.

F010304E.EPS

Deleting Of Projects

Delete Projects

CancelApply

PJT02

Figure Deleting Of Projects Dialog Box

3. In the Deleting Of Projects dialog box, click [Apply].The utility program then deletes the project and updates the Projects list of the UtilityTo Change Project’s Attribution dialog box.


F1-50<F1.4 Project Devices Configuration>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F1.4 Project Devices ConfigurationThe devices applied in a project need to be configured.

Click the [Create New..] on the [File] menu of System View, and a device comprisingthe project may be selected. Selecting a device, may pop up the [Create New] dialogbox. On this dialog box, the station type and network address of the selected devicemay be defined.

■ Project Devices ¡The devices that comprise a project are shown as follows.

• FCS

• HIS

• BCV

• CGW

• Station (*1)

*1: “Station” refers to stations of a system connected with BCV other than CS 1000 stations such as HIS, FCS, BCV, CGWor etc. For example UHMIS (Unified Operation/Monitoring Station) or a control unit of �XL series products can beconfigured in this category.

Both Ethernet and VL net may be used for the communication among the devices such asHISs, FCSs and other devices.

VL net is used in the communication of the process data, message exchange and controlsignals. On one VL net, up to 8 HISs and 16 FCSs may be configured.

Ethernet is used to transmit engineering data defined by the various builders to HIS and tocommunicate with the supervisory computers. Note that the Ethernet is not indispensablefor a project.

When Ethernet is absent, equalization communication with the HIS is performed via the VLnet.

HIS

PFCSPFCS

Station

HIS

J010401E.EPS

VL net

Ethernet

BCV

CGW

RL bus

MFCU MFCU

Station

Figure An Example of System Configuration ¡


F1-51

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.4 Project Devices Configuration>

■ Project Devices £The devices that may be configured in a project are shown as follows.

• FCS

• HIS

• BCV

• CGW

• Station (*1)

*1: “Station” refers to stations of a system connected with BCV other than CS 3000 stations such as HIS, FCS, BCV, CGWor etc. For example, UHMIS (Unified Operation/Monitoring Station) or a station of �XL series products can beconfigured in this category.

Both Ethernet and V net may be used for the communication among the devices such asHISs, FCSs and other devices.

V net is used in the communication of the process data, message exchange and controlsignals. On each domain of V net, up to 16 HISs and 48 FCSs may be configured.

Ethernet is used to transmit engineering data defined by various builders to HIS and tocommunicate with the supervisory computers. Note that both Ethernet and V net arerequired and the V net must be in dual-redundant configuration.

HIS

SFCSLFCSKFCS

HIS

F010402E.EPS

V net

V net

Ethernet

BCV

CGW

Figure An Example of System Configuration £



IM 33S01B30-01E

F1.4.1 Creating a New FCSIn the dialog box for creating a new FCS, the following items need to be defined.

■ Station Type ¡ £▼ Station Type

FCS station type may be specified.

● FCS Station Type ¡

There are four station types for FCS shown as follows.

• PFCS-S Field Control Station (Standard Type)

• PFCD-S Duplexed Field Control Station (Standard Type)

• PFCS-E Field Control Station (Enhanced Type)

• PFCD-E Duplexed Field Control Station (Enhanced Type)

● FCS Station Type £

There are eight categories for FCS stations; SFCS, LFCS, LFCS2, KFCS, KFCS2, RFCS2,RFCS5, APCS and GSGW.

SFCS consists of the following two station types:

• PFCS-H Field Control Station (Compact Type)

• PFCD-H Duplexed Field Control Station (Compact Type)

LFCS consists of the following four types:

• AFS10S Field Control Unit (for RIO, Rack Mountable)

• AFS10D Duplexed Field Control Unit (for RIO, Rack Mountable)

• AFS20S Field Control Unit (for RIO, with Cabinet)

• AFS20D Duplexed Field Control Unit (for RIO, with Cabinet)

LFCS2 consists of the following four types:

• AFG10S Field Control Unit (RIO, Rack Mountable)

• AFG10D Duplexed Field Control Unit (RIO, Rack Mountable)

• AFG20S Field Control Unit (RIO, Cabinet)

• AFG20D Duplexed Field Control Unit (RIO, Cabinet)

KFCS consists of the following four types:

• AFS30S Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19” Rack Mountable)

• AFS30D Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19” Rack Mountable)

• AFS40S Field Control Unit (for FIO, with Cabinet)

• AFS40D Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, with Cabinet)


F1-53

IM 33S01B30-01E


KFCS2 consists of the following four station types:

• AFG30S Field Control Unit (FIO, Rack Mountable)

• AFG30D Duplexed Field Control Unit (FIO, Rack Mountable)

• AFG40S Field Control Unit (FIO, Cabinet)

• AFG40D Duplexed Field Control Unit (FIO, Cabinet)

RFCS2 consists of the following eight types:

• AFS81S Field Control Station (for SIO/FIO, CENTUM V Migration type)

• AFS81D Duplexed Field Control Station (for SIO/FIO, CENTUM V Migration type)

• AFS82S Field Control Station (for SIO/FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration type)

• AFS82D Duplexed Field Control Station (for SIO/FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration type)

• AFS83S Field Control Station (for FIO, CENTUM V Migration type)

• AFS83D Duplexed Field Control Station (for FIO, CENTUM V Migration type)

• AFS84S Field Control Station (for FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration type)

• AFS84D Duplexed Field Control Station (for FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration type)

RFCS5 consists of the following eight station types:

• AFG81S Field Control Station (SIO/FIO, CENTUM V Migration Type)

• AFG81D Duplexed Field Control Station (SIO/FIO, CENTUM V Migration Type)

• AFG82S Field Control Station (SIO/FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration Type)

• AFG82D Duplexed Field Control Station (SIO/FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration Type)

• AFG83S Field Control Station (FIO, CENTUM V Migration Type)

• AFG83D Duplexed Field Control Station (FIO, CENTUM V Migration Type)

• AFG84S Field Control Station (FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration Type)

• AFG84D Duplexed Field Control Station (FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration Type)

APCS consists of the following type:

• APCS Advanced Process Control Station

GSGW consists of the following type:

• GSGW Generic Subsystem Gateway

SEE ALSO

• For more information about RFCS2 and RFCS5, see the following:


• For more information about APCS, see the following:

APCS (IM 33Q03M10-01E)

• For more information about GSGW, see the following:

PART-Q Generic Subsystem Gateway



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Power Supply Unit in Dual-Redundant Configuration ¡ £▼ Dual-Redundant Power Supply

Specify if the dual configuration is required for power supply unit

● Dual Configuration of Power Supply Unit ¡For PFCS-S Field Control Station (Standard type) and PFCS-E Field Control Station(Enhanced type), the power supply unit may be defined in dual-redundant configuration.

● Dual Configuration of Power Supply Unit £For PFCS-H Field Control Station [Compact Type], the power supply unit may be defined indual-redundant configuration.

■ Define Database Type ¡▼ Database Type

The database type for the FCS is decided according to the control system configured forthe FCS. The different type of database handles different numbers of function blocks.

IMPORTANT

Once a database type is defined, the database type can not be changed.

The types of function blocks and the model names of function blocks corresponding tovarious types are shown as follows.

Table Function Block Models ¡

Block type Function block models

Regulatory control/Calculation

ST16, ST16E, LC64

PVI, PVI-DVPID, PI-HLD, PID-BSW, ONOFF, ONOFF-G, PID-TP, PD-MR, PI-BLEND, PID-STCONOFF-E(*1), ONOFF-GE(*1)MLD, MLD-PVI, MLD-SW, MC-2, MC-3, MC-2E(*1), MC-3E(*1)RATIO, PG-L13, BSETU-2, BSETU-3VELLIMSS-H, SS-M, SS-L, AS-H, AS-M, AS-L, SS-DUALFOUT, FFSUM, XCPL, SPLITPTCADD, MUL, DIV, AVESQRT, EXP, LAG, INTEG, LD, RAMP, LDLAG, DLAY, DLAY-CAVE-M, AVE-C, FUNC-VAR, TPCFL, ASTM1, ASTM2SW-33, SW-91, DSW-16, DSW-16C, DSET, DSET-PVISLCD, SLPC, SLMC, SMST-111, SMST-121, SMRT, SBSD, SLBC, SLCC, STLD

Sequence

SFC blocks _SFCSW, _SFCPB, _SFCAS

Switch Instruments/Sequence Elements

SI-1, SI-2, SO-1, SO-2, SIO-11, SIO-12, SIO-21, SIO-22, SIO-12P, SIO-22PSI-1E, SI-2E, SO-1E, SO-2E, SIO-11E, SIO-12E, SIO-21E, SIO-22E, SIO-12PE, SIO-22PETM, CTS, CTP, CI, CO

General-purpose calculations CALCU, CALCU-C

Faceplate/OthersINDST2, INDST2S, INDST3, PBS5C, BSI, HAS3CBDSET-1L, BDSET-1C, BDSET-2L, BDSET-2C, BDA-L, BDA-CALM-R, RL, RS, VLVM

Unit Instruments _UTSW, _UTPB, _UTAS_UTSW-N, _UTPB-N, _UTAS-N

OperationOPSBL, OPSFCOPSFCP1, OPSFCP2, OPSFCP3, OPSFCP4, OPSFCP5

F010403E.EPS

*1: The function blocks can be applied only in enhanced type PFCS (PFCS-E/PFCD-E).


F1-55

IM 33S01B30-01E


● FCS Database Types Selectable in the Standard Type PFCS ¡

The following table lists the capacity of FCS database types for the PFCS Field ControlStation as well as the PFCD Duplexed Field Control Station:

Table Standard Type FCS Database Types ¡

Element for each station (*1)

Function block/element for each area (*2)

Node

Common Switch

Communication I/O

Annunciator

Batch Event

Printing Message

Operator Guide

Regulatory control / Calculation

Sequence

Switch Instruments / Sequence Elements

General-purpose Calculations

Faceplate / Others

SFC block

Operation

Unit Instrument

1 sec./10 sec. trend

ADL

SEBOL User Function

Recipe Area

User C Area

RegulatoryMonitoring

500

1500

1

1000

1000

200

100

100

100

500

30

40

10

30

5

0

0

128

160

0

0

64 Kbyte

SEQMonitoring

500

1500

1

1000

1000

200

100

100

100

50

30

500

10

30

5

0

0

128

160

0

0

64 Kbyte

General-Purpose

500

1500

1

1000

1000

200

100

100

100

80

80

400

80

20

5

0

0

128

160

0

0

64 Kbyte

RegulatoryControl

Standard

500

1500

1

1000

1000

200

100

100

100

250

50

120

50

20

5

0

0

128

160

0

0

64 Kbyte

SEQ ControlStandard(Medium

SequenceCapacity)

500

1500

1

1000

1000

200

100

100

100

100

80

400

50

50

5

0

0

128

160

0

0

64 Kbyte

500

1500

1

1000

1000

200

100

100

100

Drawing 50 50 5050 50 50

50

120

300

30

40

5

0

0

128

160

0

0

SEQ ControlStandard

(LargeSequenceCapacity)

64 Kbyte

Global Switch 0 0 00 0 0

F010404E.EPS

*1: The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z),common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB).

*2: The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to functionblocks and annunciators (%AN).



IM 33S01B30-01E

● FCS Database Types Selectable in the Enhanced Type PFCS ¡

The following table lists the capacity of FCS database types for the PFCS Field ControlStation (Enhanced type) as well as the PFCD Field Control Station (Enhanced type):

Table Enhanced Type FCS Database Types (1/3) ¡

Regulatory Control Enhanced(Loaded C

programinglanguage)

Small-SizedUnit Control

Small-SizedUnit Control(Loaded C

programinglanguage)

2000 2000 2000

1500 1500 1500

1 1 1

1000 1000 1000

4000 4000 4000

200 200 200

100 100 100

100 100 100

50 50 50

250 80 80

50 80 80

120 400 400

50 80 80

20 20 20

10 5 5

0 30 30

0 2 2

256 256 256

160 160 160

0 40 40

0 0 0

500 Kbyte 64 Kbyte 500 Kbyte

F010405E.EPS



Node

Common Switch

Communication I/O

Annunciator

Batch Event

Printing Message

Drawing

100 100 100Operator Guide


Sequence



Faceplate / Others

SFC block

Operation

Unit Instrument


ADL

SEBOL User Function

Recipe Area

User C Area

256 256 256Global Switch




F1-57

IM 33S01B30-01E



1

0

0

0

SEQ ControlStandard(Medium

SequenceCapacity/Loaded

C programinglanguage)

2000

1500

1000

4000

200

100

100

50

100

80

400

50

50

10

256

160

40

500 Kbyte

1

SEQ ControlEnhanced(Medium

SequenceCapacity) with

Recipe

2000

1500

1000

4000

200

100

100

50

100

80

400

50

50

10

100

10

256

160

40

1 Mbyte

64 Kbyte

1

SEQ ControlEnhanced (MediumSequenceCapacity/Loaded

C programinglanguage) with

Recipe

2000

1500

1000

4000

200

100

100

50

100

80

400

50

50

10

100

10

256

160

40

1 Mbyte

500 Kbyte

SEQ ControlStandard

(LargeSequenceCapacity/Loaded


2000

1500

1

1000

4000

200

100

100

50

50

120

300

30

40

10

0

0

256

160

40

0

500 Kbyte

1

0

SEQ ControlEnhanced

(LargeSequenceCapacity)

2000

1500

1000

4000

200

100

100

50

50

120

300

30

40

10

100

10

256

160

40

64 Kbyte

SEQ ControlEnhanced

(LargeSequenceCapacity/Loaded


2000

1500

1

1000

4000

200

100

100

50

50

120

300

30

40

10

100

10

256

160

40

0

500 Kbyte

F010406E.EPS



Node

Common Switch

Communication I/O

Annunciator

Batch Event

Printing Message

100100 100100100 100Operator Guide

Drawing


Sequence



Faceplate / Others

SFC block

Operation

Unit Instrument


ADL

SEBOL User Function

Recipe Area

User C Area

256256 256256256 256Global Switch





IM 33S01B30-01E


General(Calculation

Oriented)

Batch Control(SEBOL Oriented with Recipe) (*3)

Batch Control(Sequence Table

Oriented with Recipe) (*3)

2000 2500 2500

1500 1500 1500

1 1 1

1000 1000 1000

4000 4000 4000

200 200 200

100 100 100

100 100 100

50 50 50

80 100 100

80 50 120

400 400 400

200 80 80

20 50 120

5 10 10

30 120 100

2 15 10

256 256 256

160 64 64

40 40 20

0 500 Kbyte 500 Kbyte

500 Kbyte 350 Kbyte 350 Kbyte

F010415E.EPS



Node

Common Switch

Communication I/O

Annunciator

Batch Event

Printing Message

100 100 100Operator Guide

Drawing


Sequence



Faceplate / Others

SFC block

Operation

Unit Instrument


ADL

SEBOL User Function

Recipe Area

User C Area

256 256 256Global Switch



*3: In the databases of Batch Control (SEBOL Oriented with Recipe) and Batch Control (Sequence Table Oriented withRecipe) types, the operation blocks are counted as SFC blocks. In the database of Batch Control (SEBOL Oriented)type, since the area for SEBOL programming and the area for running the SEBOL programs are expanded, SEBOLoriented engineering becomes possible. The assignment of the areas are as follows.• Batch Control (SEBOL Oriented with Recipe) : Area = 150 blocks

In other type databases, the area is 120+10=130 blocks. For reserving the sufficient area for SEBOL programming,the size is expanded.

• Batch Control (Sequence Table Oriented with Recipe) : Area = 100 blocksIn other type databases, the area is 120+10=130 blocks. For reserving the sufficient area for sequence tables, thesize is shrunken.


F1-59

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Define Database Type £▼ Database Type

The database type for the FCS is decided according to the control system configured forthe FCS. The different type of database handles different numbers of function blocks.

IMPORTANT

Once a database type is defined, the database type can not be changed.

The types of function blocks and the model names of function blocks corresponding toeach types are shown as follows.

Table Function Block Models £

PVI, PVI-DVPID, PI-HLD, PID-BSW, ONOFF, ONOFF-G, PID-TP, PD-MR, PI-BLEND, PID-STCONOFF-E, ONOFF-GEMLD, MLD-PVI, MLD-SW, MC-2, MC-3, MC-2E, MC-3ERATIO, PG-L13, BSETU-2, BSETU-3VELLIMSS-H, SS-M, SS-L, AS-H, AS-M, AS-L, SS-DUALFOUT, FFSUM, XCPL, SPLITPTCADD, MUL, DIV, AVESQRT, EXP, LAG, INTEG, LD, RAMP, LDLAG, DLAY, DLAY-CAVE-M, AVE-C, FUNC-VAR, TPCFL, ASTM1, ASTM2SW-33, SW-91, DSW-16, DSW-16C, DSET, DSET-PVISLCD, SLPC, SLMC, SMST-111, SMST-121, SMRT, SBSD, SLBC, SLCC, STLDFF-AI, FF-DI, FF-CS, FF-PID, FF-RA, FF-AO, FF-DO, FF-OS, FF-SC, FF-ITFF-IS, FF-MDI, FF-MDO, FF-MAI, FF-MAO

SI-1, SI-2, SO-1, SO-2, SIO-11, SIO-12, SIO-21, SIO-22, SIO-12P, SIO-22PSI-1E, SI-2E, SO-1E, SO-2E, SIO-11E, SIO-12E, SIO-21E, SIO-22E, SIO-12PE, SIO-22PE

CALCU, CALCU-C

INDST2, INDST2S, INDST3, PBS5C, PBS10C, BSI, HAS3C

AND, OR, NOT, SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, SRS2-RWOUT, OND, OFFD, TON, TOFF, GT, GE, EQ, BAND, BOR, BNOT

ALM-R, RL, RS, VLVM

_SFCSW, _SFCPB, _SFCAS

BDSET-1L, BDSET-1C, BDSET-2L, BDSET-2C, BDA-L, BDA-C

_UTSW, _UTPB, _UTAS_UTSW-N, _UTPB-N, _UTAS-N

OPSBL, OPSFCOPSFCP1, OPSFCP2, OPSFCP3, OPSFCP4, OPSFCP5

F010407E.EPS

ST16, ST16E, LC64

TM, CTS, CTP, CI, CO

Block type Function block models

Regulatory control/Calculation

Sequence

M_ST16, M_ST16ESequence (M-size)(*1)

L_ST16, L_ST16ESequence (L-size)(*1)

SFC blocks

Switch Instruments

Sequence Elements 1

Logic operation

Sequence Elements 2

Batch data

General-purpose calculations

Faceplate blocks

Unit Instruments

Operation

FSBSET, BLENDOff-site block

*1: £ The blocks only supported in RFCS2. Even though the function block may appear on menu of builders in all typesof FCS database, however, a generation error occurs except for RFCS2.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● FCS Database Types Selectable in the SFCS : SFCS £

The following table lists the application capacities for the FCS database types for theSFCS:

Table FCS Database Types : SFCS £

General-purpose

Continuousmonitoring

Sequencemonitoring

Unit control(without Recipe)

Unit control(with Recipe)

General-purpose

Continuousmonitoring

Sequencemonitoring

Unit control(without Recipe)

Unit control(with Recipe)

Element for each station (*1) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000

Function block/element for each area (*2) 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500

Node 1 1 1 1 1

Common Switch 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

Communication I/O 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

Annunciator 500 500 500 500 500

Batch Event 200 200 200 200 200

Printing Message 200 200 200 200 200

Drawing 200 200 200 200 200

Regulatory control / Calculation 250 1500 200 200 200

150 60 60 120 80Sequence

250 150 1500 200 200

Sequence Elements 1

Switch Instruments

120 60 60 80 80General-purpose Calculations

Faceplate

Logic operation

Sequence Elements 2

Batch Data

60 60 60 30 30

SFC block 10 0 0 10 10

Operation 0 0 0 150 150

Unit Supervision

Offsite

Valve pattern monitor

0 0 0 20 20

50 30 30 30 30

50 50 50 50 50

60 60 60 20 20

30 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0

10 0 0 80 80

200 200 200 250 250

1 sec./10 sec. trend 256 256 256 256 256

ADL 160 160 160 160 160

SEBOL user function

10 0 0 100 100FCS simultaneous execution

SEBOL daemon

0 0 0 40 40

Recipe area 0 0 0 0 1 Mbyte

User C / Option area 500 Kbyte 500 Kbyte 500 Kbyte 500 Kbyte 500 Kbyte

Global Switch 256 256 256 256 256

Operator Guide 200 200 200 200 200

F010408E.EPS

0 0 0 0 0Sequence (M-size)

0 0 0 0 0Sequence (L-size)




F1-61

IM 33S01B30-01E


● FCS Database Types Selectable in the LFCS : LFCS £

The following table lists the application capacities for the FCS database types for the LFCS:

Table FCS Database Types (1/3) : LFCS £

General-Purpose

General-Purpose

2000

2500

8

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

450

450

200

10

0

0

150

150

200

0

0

10

600

256

512

0

0

64 Kbyte

F010409E.EPS



Node

Common Switch

Communication I/O

Annunciator

Batch Event

Printing Message

Drawing

700Regulatory control / Calculation

Sequence

Sequence Elements 1

Switch Instruments

400General-purpose Calculations

Faceplate

Logic operation

Sequence Elements 2

Batch Data

SFC block

Operation

Unit Instruments

Offsite



ADL

SEBOL user function

10SFC simultaneous execution

SEBOL daemon

Recipe area

User C / Option area

Global Switch 256

0Sequence (M-size)

0

ContinuousMonitoring


2000

2500

8

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

200

450

200

0

0

0

150

150

200

0

0

0

450

256

512

0

0

64 Kbyte

2000

200

0

256

0

0

SequenceMonitoring

SequenceMonitoring

2000

2500

8

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

200

2000

200

0

0

0

150

150

200

0

0

0

600

256

512

0

0

64 Kbyte

300

200

0

256

0

0

RegulatoryControl

RegulatoryControl

2000

2500

8

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

300

300

200

0

0

0

100

150

300

0

0

0

600

256

512

0

0

64 Kbyte

800

550

0

256

0

0

SequenceControl

(mainly bySFC Blocks)

SequenceControl

(mainly bySFC Blocks)

2000

2500

8

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

200

1000

200

80

20

5

150

150

50

0

0

40

600

256

512

20

0

64 Kbyte

300

200

80

256

0

0Sequence (L-size)

General-Purpose

(Large numberof elements)

General-Purpose

(Large numberof elements)

5800

2500

8

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

200Operator Guide 200 200 200 200200

550

450

450

450

50

10

0

0

150

150

200

0

0

10

10

600

256

512

0

0

64 Kbyte

256

0

0





IM 33S01B30-01E


F010410E.EPS


Function block/element for each area(*2)

Node

Common Switch

Communication I/O

Annunciator

Batch Event

Printing Message

Drawing


Sequence

Sequence Elements 1

Switch Instruments


Faceplate

Logic operation

Sequence Elements 2

Batch Data

SFC block

Operation

Unit Instruments

Offsite



ADL

SEBOL user function

SFC simultaneous execution

SEBOL daemon

Recipe area


Global Switch

Sequence (M-size)

Unit Control(without Recipe)


2000

2500

8

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

250

250

500

100

100

10

250

35

100

150

50

0

0

120

150

600

256

128

70

0

64 Kbyte

256

0

0

Unit Control(with Recipe)

OffsiteBlock


2000

2500

8

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

250

200

450

80

50

10

200

30

50

50

50

0

0

100

150

500

256

64

70

1 Mbyte

64 Kbyte

256

0

0

OffsiteBlock

2000

2500

8

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

700

350

450

400

200

10

0

0

150

150

200

80

0

10

10

600

256

512

0

0

128 Kbyte

256

0

0Sequence (L-size)

SequenceControl

(mainly bySequence

Blocks)

SequenceControl

(mainly bySequence

Blocks)

2000

2500

8

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

Operator Guide 200 200 200200

600

1000

200

10

0

0

150

150

400

0

0

10

600

256

512

0

0

64 Kbyte

400

200

10

256

0

0




F1-63

IM 33S01B30-01E



MigrationMigration Type(with Expanded

Sequence Table)

2000 2000

2500 2500

8 8

4000 4000

4000 4000

500 500

200 200

400 400

200 200

300 300

450 200

600 600

600 600

50 50

5 5

0 0

0 0

100 100

300 300

100 100

0 0

0 0

5 5

5 5

600 600

256 256

512 512

0 0

0 0

64 Kbyte 64 Kbyte

F010416E.EPS



Node

Common Switch

Communication I/O

Annunciator

Batch Event

Printing Message

Drawing


Sequence

Sequence Elements 1

Switch Instruments


Faceplate

Logic operation

Sequence Elements 2

Batch Data

SFC block

Operation

Unit Instruments

Offsite



ADL

SEBOL user function


SEBOL daemon

Recipe area


256 256Global Switch

0 200Sequence (M-size)

0 50Sequence (L-size)

Valve patternmonitor

2000

2500

8

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

200 200

Sequence Control(with Expanded

Sequence Block)

2000

2500

8

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

500

200

600

500

10

20

0

0

100

300

200

0

0

5

5

700

256

512

20

0

64 Kbyte

256

100

100

200Operator Guide 200

250

200

450

80

50

10

200

30

50

50

50

0

20

100

150

500

256

64

70

500 Kbyte

128 Kbyte

256

0

0





IM 33S01B30-01E

● FCS Database Types Selectable in the LFCS2 : LFCS2 £

The following table lists the application capacities for the FCS database types for theLFCS2:

Table FCS Database Types : LFCS2 £

Migration

5800

2500

8

4000

4000

1000

500

1000

200

1200

400

1000

1050

200

10

0

0

200

600

500

0

0

10

10

1050

256

512

0

0

200 Kbyte

F010417E.EPS



Node

Common Switch

Communication I/O

Annunciator

Batch Event

Printing Message

Drawing


Sequence

Sequence Elements 1

Switch Instruments


Faceplate

Logic operation

Sequence Elements 2

Batch Data

SFC block

Operation

Unit Instruments

Offsite



ADL

SEBOL user function


SEBOL daemon

Recipe area


256Global Switch

400Sequence (M-size)

100Sequence (L-size)

General-Purpose

5800

2500

8

4000

4000

1000

500

1000

200


1200

600

1000

500

200

60

400

60

200

200

400

40

0

250

150

700

256

512

70

1 Mbyte

200 Kbyte

256

0

0




F1-65

IM 33S01B30-01E


● FCS Database Types Selectable in the KFCS : KFCS £The following table lists the application capacities for the FCS database types for theKFCS:Table FCS Database Types (1/3) : KFCS £

General-Purpose

SEQ Control(mainly by

SFC Blocks)

2000 2000

2500 2500

10 10

4000 4000

4000 4000

500 500

200 200

400 400

200 200

450 200

450 1000

200 200

10 80

0 20

0 5

150 150

150 150

200 50

0 0

0 0

600 600

F010418E.EPS



Node

Common Switch

Communication I/O

Annunciator

Batch Event

Printing Message

Drawing

700(250)

300(250)Regulatory control / Calculation (*4)

Sequence

Sequence Elements 1

Switch Instruments

400 200General-purpose Calculations

Faceplate

Logic operation

Sequence Elements 2

Batch Data

SFC block

Operation

Unit Instruments

Offsite


Global Switch 256 256


0


2000

2500

10

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

200

450

200

0

0

0

150

150

200

0

0

450

2000(250)

200

256

0

0

SequenceMonitoring

2000

2500

10

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

200

2000

200

0

0

0

150

150

200

0

0

600

300(250)

200

256

0

0

RegulatoryControl

2000

2500

10

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

300

300

200

0

0

0

100

150

300

0

0

600

800(250)

550

256

0


50

General-Purpose(Large numberof elements)

5800

2500

10

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

16 16Number of ALF111 installation

Number of ALR111, ALR121, ALE111, and ALP111 installation (*3)

16 16 1616

6 66 6 66

200 200Operator Guide 200 200 200200

550(250)

450

450

450

10

0

0

150

150

200

0

0

600

256

0

0

10 40

256 256

512 512

0 20

0 0

64 Kbyte 64 Kbyte


ADL

SEBOL user function

10 80SFC simultaneous execution

SEBOL daemon

Recipe area


0

256

512

0

0

64 Kbyte

0

0

256

512

0

0

64 Kbyte

0

0

256

512

0

0

64 Kbyte

0

10

10

256

512

0

0

64 Kbyte



*3: The total number of mounted ALR111, ALR121, ALE 111 and ALP111 modules.*4: The number in () is the number of FOUNNDATION fieldbus faceplate blocks can be applied.



IM 33S01B30-01E

Table FCS Database Types (2/3) : KFCS £

Offsite Block

Offsite Block

2000

2500

10

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

700(250)

350

450

400

200

10

0

0

150

150

200

80

0

10

10

600

256

512

0

0

128 Kbyte

F010420E.EPS



Node

Common Switch

Communication I/O

Annunciator

Batch Event

Printing Message

Drawing

Regulatory control / Calculation (*4)

Sequence

Sequence Elements 1

Switch Instruments


Faceplate

Logic operation

Sequence Elements 2

Batch Data

SFC block

Operation

Unit Instruments

Offsite



ADL

SEBOL user function


SEBOL daemon

Recipe area


256Global Switch

0Sequence (M-size)



2000

2500

10

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

250(30)

250

500

100

100

10

250

30

100

150

50

0

0

120

150

600

256

128

70

0

64 Kbyte

256

0

0



2000

2500

10

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

250(30)

200

450

80

50

10

200

30

50

50

50

0

0

100

150

500

256

64

70

1 Mbyte

64 Kbyte

256

0



Sequence Blocks)


Sequence Blocks)

2000

2500

10

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

16Number of ALF111 installation 2 216

Number of ALR111, ALR121, ALE111, and ALP111 installation (*3) 6 6 66

200Operator Guide 200 200200

600

1000

200

10

0

0

150

150

400

0

0

10

600

256

512

0

0

64 Kbyte

400(250)

200

10

256

0

0





F1-67

IM 33S01B30-01E


Table FCS Database Types (3/3) : KFCS £

Migration

Migration

Migration Type(with Expanded

Sequence Table)

Migration Type(with Expanded

Sequence Table)

2000 2000

2500 2500

10 10

4000 4000

4000 4000

500 500

200 200

400 400

200 200

300(30)

300(30)

450 200 200

600 600

600 600

50 50

5 5

0 0

0 0

100 100

300 300

100 100

0 0

0 0

5 5

5 5

600 600

256 256

512 512

0 0

0 0

64 Kbyte 64 Kbyte

F010421E.EPS



Node

Common Switch

Communication I/O

Annunciator

Batch Event

Printing Message

Drawing

Regulatory control / Calculation (*4)

Sequence

Sequence Elements 1

Switch Instruments


Faceplate

Logic operation

Sequence Elements 2

Batch Data

SFC block

Operation

Unit Instruments

Offsite



ADL

SEBOL user function


SEBOL daemon

Recipe area


256 256Global Switch





2000

2500

10

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

2 2

10

500(30)

2Number of ALF111 installation 2

6 6 6Number of ALR111, ALR121, ALE111, and ALP111 installation (*3) 6

200 200Operator Guide 200

250(30)

200

450

80

50

10

200

30

50

50

50

0

20

100

150

500

256

64

70

500 Kbyte

128 Kbyte

256

0

0


Sequence Block)


Sequence Block)

2000

2500

4000

4000

500

200

400

200

600

500

10

20

0

0

100

300

200

0

0

5

5

700

256

512

20

0

64 Kbyte

256

100

100

200






IM 33S01B30-01E

● FCS Database Types Selectable in the KFCS2 : KFCS2 £The following table lists the application capacities for the FCS database types for theKFCS:Table FCS Database Types : KFCS2 £

General-Purpose

General-Purpose

5800

2500

10

4000

4000

1000

500

1000

200

600

1000

200

60

400

60

200

200

400

40

0

250

700

256

512

70

1 Mbyte

200 Kbyte

F010422E.EPS



Node

Common Switch

Communication I/O

Annunciator

Batch Event

Printing Message

Drawing

1200(600)Regulatory control / Calculation (*4)

Sequence

Sequence Elements 1

Switch Instruments

500General-purpose Calculations

Faceplate

Logic operation

Sequence Elements 2

Batch Data

SFC block

Operation

Unit Instruments

Offsite



ADL

SEBOL user function

150SFC simultaneous execution

SEBOL daemon

Recipe area


Global Switch 256

0Sequence (M-size)

0Sequence (L-size)

200

Migration

Migration Remote Node Expanded

5800

2500

10

4000

4000

1000

500

1000

200


1200(600)

400

1000

1050

10

0

0

200

600

500

0

0

10

10

1050

256

512

0

0

200 Kbyte

256

400

100

200

Remote Node Expanded

5800

2500

15

4000

4000

1000

500

1000

200

16Number of ALF111 installation 16 32

16Number of ALR111, ALR121, ALE111, and ALP111 installation (*3) 16 16

500

1200(600)

600

1000

500

60

400

60

200

200

400

40

0

210

150

700

256

512

70

1 Mbyte

200 Kbyte

256

0

0





F1-69

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Station Address ¡▼ Station Number

Station addresses are used to identify the stations on the VL net. The station address iscomposed of a domain number and a station number. The domain number may be set inthe dialog box when creating the project. The domain number can not be changed once it isset.

● Station Number ¡

Station numbers are used to identify the devices in the same domain of the system. WithFCSs, the station number is generally set from 1 in ascending order.

The station number may be set in the range of 1 to 24. The station number can not bechanged once it is set.

■ Station Address £▼ Domain Number, Station Number

Station addresses are used to identify the stations on the V net. The station address iscomposed of a domain number and a station number.

● Domain Number £

Set a domain number for a new FCS to be created. Set a domain number in the range of 1to 16. The domain number can not be changed once it is set.

● Station Number £

Station numbers are used to identify the devices in the same domain of the system.

With FCSs, the station number is generally set from 1 in ascending order.

The station number may be set for each domain in the range of 1 to 64. The station numbercan not be changed once it is set.

■ Component Numbers▼ Component Number

Component numbers are used for devices that are configured in the project. For example,assigning a component number to a FCS cabinet will be much convenient for wiring thecables by labelling the connection origin or connection destination component numbers.

Component number settings may be omitted.

■ Station Comments▼ Station Comment

If more information about each station is required, the station comment may be input foreach station. The station comment may be omitted.

The station comment is displayed on the FCS property tab.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Alias of Station▼ Alias of Station

An alias can be used as an alternative of station name.

After setting aliases, the stations displayed on the HIS will be indicated by their aliases.

An alias of a station can be defined with up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

■ Station Status Display▼ Station Status Display

A window can be designated to display the station status on HIS instead of using the HISstation status display panel. The name of this window can be designated using up to 16alphanumeric characters.

■ Upper Equipment NameThe name of the higher-level process equipment group in plant hierarchy can be desig-nated using up to 16 alphanumeric characters.

■ High-Speed Scan Period ¡High-speed Scan period may be applied when the fast response is required for the processcontrol. Either 200 ms or 500 ms may be specified as the High-speed Scan period.

SEE ALSO

For details on High-speed Scan period, see the following:

“● High-Speed Scan ¡ ” in “■ Scan Period ¡ ” in C7.1.1, “Scan Period”

■ High-Speed Scan Period £High-speed Scan period may be applied when the fast response is required for the processcontrol. 200 ms or 500 ms may be specified as the High-speed Scan period. 50 ms or 100ms may be specified with keystrokes.

SEE ALSO

For details on High-speed Scan period, see the following:

“● High-Speed Scan £ ” in “■ Scan Period £ ” in C7.1.1, “Scan Period”


F1-71

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Medium-Speed Scan Period – KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS £Medium-speed scan period may be applied when the relatively faster response is requiredfor the process control.

Either 200 ms or 500 ms may be specified as the medium-speed scan period.

SEE ALSO

For details on Medium-speed Scan period, see the following:

“● Medium-Speed Scan : KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS £ ” in “■ Scan Period £ ” in C7.1.1, “ScanPeriod”

■ Pulse Width and Serial Startup Interval for MC Instrument BlockThe settings related to motor control blocks (MC-2 and MC-3) may be set.

● Pulse Width

When the MC-2 or MC-3 blocks output signal conversion type is either [2-position PulsiveOutput ] or [3-position Pulsive Output], the time span of the contact output signal’s ON(pulse width) may be set. The range for setting the pulse width is from 1 to 100 seconds.The default setting is 1 second.

SEE ALSO

For details on pulse width of the MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, see the following:

“● Pulse Width Time” in “■ Output Signal Coversion of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3 andMC-3E)” in D1.17.3, “Output Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3 and MC-3E)”

● Serial Start Interval

The serial start function puts the motor control blocks (MC-2, MC-3) of the same controlstation into groups and starts multiple motor control blocks (MC-2, MC-3) in the samegroup sequentially at a specified interval when start requests are issued to these blockssimultaneously.

Serial start is executed only when the manipulated output value (MV) is changed to agreater value.

The serial start interval may be set between 0 and 9999 seconds.

The default setting is 0 second.

SEE ALSO

For details on the serial start interval of the MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, see the following:

“■ Serial Start” in D1.17.2, “Control Computation Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E,MC-3 and MC-3E)”



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ MLD-SW Block AUT/CASManual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) is a function block to switch the outputbetween the signal from the connected function block such as a regulatory control blockand the manual output signal of itself.

When MLD-SW is in manual (MAN) mode, it outputs the manipulated output value (MV) setby the operator. When MLD-SW is in automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode, the signalinput from other function block (CSV) is calculated and output as the manipulate outputvalue (MV) of MLD-SW.

The mode AUT or CAS may be set for the situation that the MLD-SW outputs the signalfrom another function block (CSV), then calculated and output as it’s own manipulateoutput value (MV).

The default setting is [AUT].

SEE ALSO

For details on MLD-SW block automatic mode, see the following:

“■ Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW)” in D1.16, “Manual Loader Block with Auto/ManSW (MLD-SW)”

■ Action Type of SEBOL “drive” StatementThere are 3 action types of SEBOL “drive” statement may be specified.

In accordance with the block mode of the function block which is running SEBOL and theaction type specified here, the permission to output the operation commands to functionblocks may be checked.

SEE ALSO

For details on the SEBOL “drive” statement, see the following:

H1.5.4, “drive Statement”

■ Setting Options ¡ £▼ Options

When using option programs, the programs need to be registered on the FCS propertiessetting box. After installing the option programs, the programs may be listed on the proper-ties setting box for registration.

Select an option program from the list in the combo box displayed in the [Options] settingarea, then click [Add] button to register the program.


F1-73

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Blocks with User-Defined Data Items £▼ User-Defined Block

In order to use the blocks containing data items that can be defined by users (SFC block,unit instrument), a specific area for the user-defined instrument information needs to bespecified.

When you create a new FCS, free space based on the database type of the FCS is auto-matically searched for and a value that does not overlap with other FCSs is set as thedefault value. If you change this value, it is checked whether or not the changed valueoverlaps with other FCSs, and a message is displayed if it does.

[Number of Block Type] displays the number of blocks with user-defined data items thatcan be used for the database types. Make sure to specify the start position of the area byreferencing [Number of Block Type] if you wish to enter a value other than the default valuefor [Block-type start number]. Specify a value that does not overlap with other FCSs for[Block-type start number] in the range from 0 to 7679.

■ Action when Downloading to IOMWhen downloading to an I/O module, the behavior of function blocks connected to themodule may be specified as IOP (input open) or not.

SEE ALSO

For details on the actions of I/O modules during downloading, see the following:

B3.5, “Operation of I/O Module when Downloading is Performed”

■ PID Pulse Width OutputSpecify whether the MV value should be set to “50%” or “previous MV value” when pulsesare not output under the conditions that the block mode is in the AUT mode and there is nofeedback input.

If you check the [CENTUM V Compatible MV Display] check box, the MV value becomes50% in the case above. By default, this check box is not checked (the previous MV value isspecified).

SEE ALSO

For more information about PID Pulse Width Output, see the following:

“● No Feedback, Pulse Width Output MV at AUT Mode” in section “■ Feedback Input” in C4.8.2, “PulseWidth Output Conversion”



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ PI-HLD Action after HoldSpecify whether “PV value immediately before holding the output” or “current PV value”should be used for the previous PV value used in the first control calculation after theoutput is held in a PI-HLD block.

If you check the [CENTUM-XL Compatible] check box, the previous PV value used in thefirst control calculation after the output is held is overwritten with the current PV value. Bydefault, this check box is not checked (the PV value immediately before holding the outputis used).

SEE ALSO

For more information about PI-HLD Action after Hold, see the following:

“● PI-HLD Action after Hold” in section “■ PI Control Computation with Hold” in D1.6, “Sampling PIController Block (PI-HLD)”

■ SS-DUAL PV Update during Deviation Alarm▼ SS-DUAL PV Update During Deviation Alarm

When SS-DUAL block signal selector switch is at the position 3, both input1 and input2 willbe monitored. If one of them is not normal, the switch will select the normal side input. If adeviation alarm occurs, to update PV or to hold the current PV can be set by checking thisoption.

When checking the option box for [SS-DUAL PV Update During Deviation Alarm], if adeviation alarm occurs when the switch position is 3, the data status of PV will becomeBAD but the PV itself will continue to update vary with the selected input signal.

The default setting does not check this option, so that when a deviation alarm occurs, theSS-DUAL will hold its current PV.

This setting covers all SS-DUAL blocks for the whole FCS.


F1-75

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Alarm Notify Action when All AOF Released▼ Alarm Notify Action When All AOF Released

When alarm inhibition (AOF) of all function blocks are released, if the existing alarm givesan output or not can be specified by checking this option box.

When checking [Alarm Notify Action When All AOF Released] option box, all the existingalarms will output when their inhibitions (AOF) are released all together.

By default setting, this option box is not checked, so that the existing alarms will not outputwhen AOF released.

This setting covers the whole FCS, it can only be changed via offline maintenance.

● Do not Output Alarms when AOF Released All Together (Default Setting)

When AOF released all together, the existing alarms will not output alarms to notify the HIS.

● Output Existing Alarms when AOF Released All Together

When AOF released all together, all the existing alarms will behave like newly initiatedalarms and send the alarm outputs to the HIS.

When AOF is released one by one (Example: TagName.AOF.IOP released), the alarm willnot give an output even when the alarm status exists. For the alarms inhibited by Repre-sentative Alarm Block (ALM-R), when the inhibition is released by changing the SV or SWof the ALM-R block, the existing alarms will not initiate alarm message outputs.

■ Specify Reference Station for Tag List▼ Specify Reference Station for Tag List

● Enable to Designate Station for Referencing Tag List

The tag list of a designated station can be referenced when checking this option box. Afterchecking [Specify Reference Station for Tag List] option box, designating a station forreferencing the tag list will be enabled. When this option is not checked, the stations startfrom smallest domain number and the smallest station number will be listed in ascendingorder and set as the default stations for referencing tag list.

● The Station for Referencing Tag List

Among the station list, the station for referencing tag list may be designated. This is pos-sible only when the option box [Specify Reference Station for Tag List] is checked. In thestation list, the stations in the system configuration as well as the stations removed from thesystem configuration but had been registered as the referencing station before removal areavailable for designation. If choose the station already removed from the system configura-tion for referencing the tag list, an error will occur.

10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-0010th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00


IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Annunciator Message with Data▼ Annunciator Message with Data

● Annunciator Message Head Number

The annunciator message head number can be designated.

When an annunciator is initiated, the data assigned for the annunciator can be referencedfor the printing message.

The annunciators from the designated annunciator head number will correspond one byone to the printing messages from the designated printing message head number.

● Printing Message Head Number

The printing message head number corresponds to the annunciator message head num-ber can be designated.

When the setting for annunciator message head number or for printing message headnumber is not correct, an error will be displayed in the dialog box and the setting will be-come invalid.

Table Check the Settings for Annunciator Message Head Number and Printing Message HeadNumber

F010411E.EPS

ResultCheck

OKAnnunciator Message Head Number=0 AND Printing Message Head Number=0

OKAnnunciator Message Head Number !=0 AND Printing Message Head Number !=0

NGAnnunciator Message Head Number > Total Annunciator Messages

NGPrinting Message Head Number > Total Printing Messages

NG(Total Annunciator Messages - Annunciator Message Head Number) > (Total Printing Messages - Printing Message Head Number)

■ Increase Number of System Common Switches : LFCS2/LFCS/KFCS2/KFCS £

If you check this check box, the number of system common switches (%SW0001 to%SW0200) is extended to %SW0001 to %SW0400. By default, this check box is checked(extend).


F1-77

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ State Transition Matrix▼ Specify State Transition Matrix

When the FCS database is a type of database for unit configuration, state transition matrixcan be defined.

● Maximum Specification Number

Indicates the total number of state transition matrixes. This is only an indication can not beedited.

● Designating a State Transition Matrix

A state transition matrix to be applied in this FCS can be selected from the state transitionmatrix list of this project. In the matrix list, the matrixes registered in the project as well asthe matrixes removed from the project but had been registered as the state transitionmatrix before removal are available for selection. If choose a matrix already removed fromthe project as the state transition matrix, an error will occur.

■ Making IO Bus Dual-Redundant : KFCS2/KFCS £▼ Make IO Bus Dual-Redundant

Specify whether or not the ESB bus is made dual-redundant in an FCS in which only oneCPU card is used.

When this checkbox is checked to make the ESB bus dual-redundant, the ESB buses willusually be used alternatively. If an error occurs in one of the ESB buses, the other ESB buswill be used for communication. Error recovery monitoring of an abnormal ESB bus will beperformed periodically.

SEE ALSO

For details on making the ESB bus dual-redundant, see the following:

“■ Dual-Redundant Architecture of Extended Serial Backboard Bus (ESB Bus): KFCS2/KFCS £ ” inB4.2, “Dual-Redundant Architecture of KFCS2 and KFCS”

■ Interface Card Type : KFCS2/KFCS £▼ Interface Card Type

Specify the type of the ESB bus interface card (SB301/SB302). To use the CENTUM-XLcabinet, specify SB302. To use a rack mountable type, specify SB301.

■ Using XL-HKU : KFCS2/KFCS £▼ Use XL-HKU

Check this checkbox to monitor the status of the CENTUM-XL cabinet. This can only bespecified when SB302 is specified for the type of the ESB bus interface card. A maximumof four cabinets can be monitored.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Making RIO Bus Dual-Redundant : LFCS2/LFCS £▼ Make RIO Bus Dual-Redundant

The RIO bus dual-redundant configuration may be specified even for single CPU FCS.

In RIO bus Dual-Redundant Configuration RIO buses is usually alternatively used. If anerror occurs in one bus, the other bus will be used for communication. Error recovery in thebuses will be monitored periodically.

SEE ALSO

For details on making the RIO bus dual-redundant, see the following:

“■ Dual-Redundant Architecture of FCU : LFCS2/LFCS £ ” in B4.3, “Dual-Redundant Architecture ofLFCS2 and LFCS”

■ Repeater Connection : LFCS2/LFCS £▼ Repeater Connection

Allowed transmission distance of the RIO bus may be extended by connecting a busrepeater.

Specify whether to connect a bus repeater to the RIO bus.


F1-79

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Control Bus TCP/IP Settings ¡ £▼ VL net TCP/IP Settings, V net TCP/IP Settings

Normally there is no need to change the TCP/IP protocol setting for the control bus.

● Control Bus IP Address ¡ £

The IP addresses on the control bus are used to logically identify the HIS for communica-tion among HISs on the control bus.

The bus type, domain number and station number of an IP address on the control bus isautomatically determined. In normal situation, the automatically determined setting shouldbe used.

172. 16. dd. ss

172:System fixed16: Identifier showing that the bus type is control bus (fixed)dd: Domain number specified during project creation (*1)

Domain number specified during FCS creation (*2)ss: Station number specified during FCS creation

*1: ¡ This is for the CS 1000.*2: £ This is for the CS 3000.

● Control Bus Subnet Mask

The control bus subnet mask is set to “255.255.0.0” as the default setting. In normal situa-tions, this default setting should be used.

■ Control Drawing Builder▼ Use Control Drawing Builder

On the Function Block Detail Builder, a check box “Use control drawing builder” is provided.Check this box when using the Control Drawing Builder.

TIP

For CS 1000, Control Drawing is optional.

SEE ALSO

For details on the Control Drawing Builder, see the following:

F3, “Control Drawing Builder”




F1.4.2 Creating a New HISIn the dialog box for creating a new HIS, the following items need to be defined.

■ Station Type - HIS ¡ £▼ Station Type

The HIS station type may be specified.

● HIS Station Type ¡

There are two station types for the HIS as shown below:

• PC with Operation and Monitoring Functions

• YPCKIT Open Display Style Console Type HIS

● HIS Station Type £

There are three station types for the HIS as shown below:

• PC with Operation and Monitoring Functions

• LPCKIT Enclosed Display Style Console Type HIS

• YPCKIT Open Display Style Console Type HIS

■ Station Address ¡▼ Station Number

Station addresses are used to identify the stations on the VL net. The station address iscomposed of domain number and station number. The domain number may be set in thedialog box when creating the project. The domain number can not be changed once it isset.

● Station Number ¡

Station numbers are used to identify the devices in the same domain of the system. WithHISs, the station number is generally set from the maximum number in descending order.

The station number may be set in the range of 1 to 24. The station number can not bechanged once it is set.

F1-81

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Station Address £▼ Station Number, Domain Number

Station addresses are used to identify the stations on the V net. The station address iscomposed of a domain number and a station number.

● Domain Number £

Set a domain number for a new HIS to be created. Set a domain number in the range of 1to 16. The domain number can not be changed once it is set.

● Station Number £

Station numbers are used to identify the devices in the same domain of the system.

With HISs, the station number is generally set from the maximum number in descendingorder.

The station number may be set for each domain in the range of 1 to 64. The station numbercan not be changed once it is set.

■ Component Numbers▼ Component Number

Component numbers are used for devices that are configured in the project. These num-bers are used to indicate the connection origin or connection destination componentnumbers when wiring the devices.

Component number settings may be omitted.

■ Station Comments▼ Station Comment

If more information about each station is required, the station comment may be input foreach station. The station comment may be omitted.

The station comment is displayed on the HIS property tab.

■ Alias of Station▼ Alias of Station

An alias can be used as an alternative of station name.

After setting aliases, the stations displayed on the HIS will be indicated by their aliases.

An alias of a station can be defined with up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

■ Station Status Display▼ Station Status Display

A window can be designated to display the station status on HIS instead of using the HISstation status display panel. The name of this window can be designated using up to 16alphanumeric characters.

■ Upper Equipment NameThe name of the higher-level process equipment group in plant hierarchy can be desig-nated.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Buzzer ACK IDThe buzzer ACK ID is an ID that allows buzzers on other HISs with the same buzzer ACKID to be reset when a buzzer is acknowledged on one HIS.

The buzzer ACK ID can be set with up to eight single-byte characters.

SEE ALSO

For details on the buzzer ACK ID, see the following:

“● Buzzer - ACK ID” in “■ Buzzer Sounds” in E11.2, “Message Output Actions”

■ Operation Group IdentifierThe operation group identifier is used for the identification if different operation groupsexist. Up to eight single-byte characters may be used for an identifier. The first two charac-ters are identifier characters, the rest are comment text.

The default setting is [A1].

A wild card [*] may be used as the operation group identifier.

SEE ALSO

For details on operation group, see the following:

E1.5, “Operation Group”


F1-83

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Control Bus TCP/IP Settings ¡ £▼ VL net TCP/IP Settings, V net TCP/IP Settings

Normally, there is no need to change the TCP/IP protocol setting.

● Control Bus Host Name ¡ £

The control bus host name is automatically determined according to the bus type, domainnumber and station number. In normal situations, the automatically determined host nameshould be used.

Mddss

M: Identifier indicating that the bus type is control bus (fixed)dd: Domain number specified during project creation (*1)

Domain number specified during HIS creation (*2)ss: Station number specified during HIS creation


● Control Bus IP Address ¡ £

The IP addresses on the control bus are used to logically identify the HIS for communica-tion among HISs on the control bus.

The IP address on the control bus is automatically determined according to the bus type,domain number and station number. In normal situations, the automatically determinedsetting should be used.

172.16.dd. ss

172:System fixed16: Identifier showing that the bus type is control bus (fixed)dd: Domain number specified during project creation (*1)

Domain number specified during HIS creation (*2)ss: Station number specified during HIS creation


● Control Bus Subnet Mask

The control bus subnet mask is set to “255.255.0.0” by default.

In normal situations, this default setting should be used.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Ethernet TCP/IP Settings ¡ £▼ Ethernet TCP/IP Settings

Make sure that the names of HIS computer and HIS station match. Normally, there is noneed to specify the Ethernet TCP/IP. Make sure to use the initial settings.

IMPORTANT

The Ethernet TCP/IP needs to be specified to connect to an HIS on another subnet via arouter. If any HIS is connected this way within a project, consult with Yokogawa.

● Ethernet Hostname ¡ £

The Ethernet Hostname will be automatically determined according to the bus type, domainnumber and station number. In normal situations, the automatically determined hostnameshould be used.

Eddss

E: Identifier indicating that the bus type is Ethernet (fixed)dd: Domain number specified when the project was created (*1)

Domain number specified when HIS was created (*2)ss: Station number specified when HIS was created

*1: ¡ For CS 1000.*2: £ For CS 3000.

● Ethernet IP Address ¡ £

Ethernet IP addresses are used to logically identify the HIS connected to the Ethernet.

The Ethernet IP addresses are automatically determined according to the bus type, domainnumber and station number. In normal situations, the automatically determined settingshould be used.

172.17.dd. ss : Ethernet IP address

172:System fixed17: Identifier showing that the bus type is Ethernet (fixed)dd: Domain number specified during the project creation (*1)

Domain number specified during HIS creation (*2)ss: Station number specified during the HIS creation


● Ethernet Subnet Mask

The Ethernet subnet mask is set to “255.255.0.0” by default. Normally, this default settingshould be used.


F1-85

IM 33S01B30-01E


F1.4.3 Creating a New BCVBCV represents Bus Converter for RL Bus (BCV-L), Bus Converter for HF Bus (BCV-H), Bus Converter for V net (BCV-V) and Bus Converter for VL bet (BCV-A). Whencreating a BCV, the configurations vary with the types of bus converter.

SEE ALSO

For more information about bus converters, see the followings:

L3.3.3, “Creating a New Bus Converter for RL Bus”

L4.3.3, “Creating a New Bus Converter for HF Bus”

L1.3, “Engineering of Bus Converter for V net”

L2.3, “Engineering of Bus Converter for VL net”

■ Precautions when Creating a Bus ConverterThe station names for bus converters are as follows:

BCV-L: BCVLddnn

BCV-H: BCVHddnn

BCV-V: BCVVddnn

BCV-A: BCVVddnn

dd: Domain number nn: Station number

Domain number and station number will be assigned automatically.

When multiple projects are connected via a BCV, configure the BCV in the upper levelproject (domain) of the network is necessary. Offline-downloading to a BCV is possible onlywhen the BCV is configured in the upper level. If a BCV is put in the lower level project(domain), an error will occur when offline-downloading to the BCV.

A BCV can not be created in a BCV folder. When bus converters are configured in cas-cade, the information of stations should be defined in all bus converters respectively. Thebus converters can not be displayed in cascade on the directory tree view.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F1.4.4 Creating a New CGWCGW stands for both Text Mode Communication Gateway Unit and Frame ModeCommunication Gateway Unit. The type of CGW can be selected on the dialog boxfor “Create New CGW.”

■ Text Mode Communication Gateway UnitIn the dialog box for creating a new text mode communication gateway unit, the followingitems need to be defined.

• Station Type

• Station Address

• Component Number

• Station Comment

• Alias of Station

• Station Status Display

• Upper Equipment Name

• Ethernet TCP/IP protocol

• Use Router

• Maximum number of received texts

• Perform sequence number control

• Communication mode

• Delimiter

• Receive MS message

• Perform OOB notification

• Specify Reference Station for Tag List

SEE ALSO

For details on each definition item for the text mode communication gateway unit, see the following:

L5.4, “Text Mode Gateway Engineering”


F1-87

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Frame Mode Communication Gateway Unit ¡In the dialog box for creating a new frame mode communication gateway unit, the followingitems need to be defined.

• Station Type

• Station Address


• Station Comment





• Use Router

• Upper Domain Number

• Receive Lower Status

• Connect Authorization Station List

SEE ALSO

For details on each definition item for the frame mode communication gateway unit, see the following:

L6.2, “Frame Mode Gateway Engineering”



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Frame Mode Communication Gateway Unit £There are two types of Frame Mode Communication Gateway Unit, [Frame Mode] and[Connect to Wide Area Network]. Either of functions can be selected for the unit. However,both functions can not be used at the same time.

● Frame Mode Function Configuration Items £

In the dialog box for creating a new communication gateway (Frame Mode) unit, the follow-ing items need to be configured.

• Station Address


• Station Comment





• Use Router

• Upper Domain Number

• Receive Lower Status

• Connect Authorization Station List

SEE ALSO

For details on each definition item for frame mode communication gateway unit, see the following:

L6.2, “Frame Mode Gateway Engineering”


F1-89

IM 33S01B30-01E


● WAN Connecting Configuration Items £

In the dialog box for creating a new communication gateway (Connect to Wide Area Net-work) unit, the following items need to be configured.

• Station Address


• Station Comment





• Use Router

• Server/Client Function Type

• Remote Destination CGW

• Receive Remote Status

• Receive FCS Message

• Receive HIS Message

• Receive System Time

• Enable TCP/IP on FCS

• Load Distribution Filter

SEE ALSO

For details on each definition item for frame mode communication gateway unit, see the following:

L6.4, “Wide Area Connection Gateway Engineering”



IM 33S01B30-01E

F1.4.5 Creating a New StationThe stations other than above described may be created on the Create New Stationdialog box and the following items need to be defined.

• Station Type

• Station Name

• Station Address


• Station Comment




• Tag Suffix

• Actual Device

• Make Control Bus Dual-Redundant

• Station Status Display Window Name

• Control bus TCP/IP Protocol

• Ethernet TCP/IP Protocol

TIP

The definition items are determined depending on the station type.


F1-91

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Station Type List ¡The types of machines may be configured as Station are listed as follows.

Table Station Type List ¡

�XL series products; Control Unit, Monitoring Unit, Operator Station

HP9000 connected via Frame Mode Communication Gateway Unit

F010412E.EPS

Station Type Description

�XL MFCD-EXT Control Unit�XL MFCD-STD Control Unit�XL MFCN-EXT Control Unit�XL MFCN-STD Control Unit�XL MFCU-EXT Control Unit�XL MFCU-STD Control Unit�XL MFMU-EXT Control Unit�XL MFMU-STD Control Unit�XL MFSD-EXT Control Unit�XL MFSD-STD Control Unit�XL MFSU-EXT Control Unit�XL MFSU-STD Control Unit�XL MOPS Operator Station

Exaopc StationUHMIS Unified Operation/Monitoring Station

A PC installed with Engineering Tools such as Fieldbus Engineering Tools but not with packages for Operation and Monitoring or a PC for engineering only.

PC

UHMIS HP9000

SEE ALSO

For details on each item for each type of machines, see the following chapters:

• For connecting �XL series products;

L3.3.1, “Configuring �XL Control Units and Operator Stations”

• For connecting Exaopc stations, see the manuals provided with the Exaopc stations.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Station Type List £The types of stations can be created as Station are shown as follows:

Table Station Types (1/2) £

F010413E.EPS


CENTUM-XL Series

CENTUM-XL EFCD Standard Redundant Control StationCENTUM-XL EFCS Standard Non-Redundant Control StationCENTUM-XL EFCDH2 Advanced Redundant Control StationCENTUM-XL EFCSH2 Advanced Non-Redundant Control StationCENTUM-XL EFGW Field Gateway UnitCENTUM-XL EFMS Field Monitoring Station CENTUM-XL EFUD Redundant Field Control UnitCENTUM-XL EFUS Field Control UnitCENTUM-XL EOPS Operator StationCENTUM-XL EDFS Data File StationCENTUM-XL EDFW Dual Data File StationCENTUM-XL ECGW Communication Gateway UnitCENTUM-XL ECGW2 Communication Gateway UnitCENTUM-XL ECGW3 Communication Gateway UnitCENTUM-XL ENGS Engineering StationCENTUM-XL HP9000 Computer System

�XL Series

�XL MFCD-EXT Control Unit�XL MFCD-STD Control Unit�XL MFCN-EXT Control Unit�XL MFCN-STD Control Unit�XL MFCU-EXT Control Unit�XL MFCU-STD Control Unit�XL MFMU-EXT Monitoring Unit�XL MFMU-STD Monitoring Unit�XL MFSD-EXT Control Unit�XL MFSD-STD Control Unit�XL MFSU-EXT Control Unit�XL MFSU-STD Control Unit�XL MOPS Operator Station�XL MOPS Gateway Operator Station

HP9000 Workstation Connected via a Frame mode GatewayUHMIS HP9000 Computer System

Exaopc StationUHMIS Unified Operation/Monitoring Station


F1-93

IM 33S01B30-01E


Table Station Types (2/2) £

F010414E.EPS


CENTUM CFCD2 Redundant Control StationCENTUM CFCDE Redundant Control Station for Power PlantsCENTUM CFGW Field Gateway UnitCENTUM CFMS2 Field Monitoring StationCENTUM CFSD Sequence Subjective Type Redundant Control StationCENTUM CFSS Sequence Subjective Type Non-Redundant Control StationCENTUM CGWU-1 Communication Gateway UnitCENTUM CGWU-2 Communication Gateway UnitCENTUM CGWU-1/A Communication Gateway UnitCENTUM CGWU-2/A Communication Gateway UnitCENTUM COPSV*A Operator StationCENTUM COPSV*B Operator StationCENTUM COPS2*B Operator Station

CENTUM V Series

A PC installed withEngineering Tools such asFieldbus Engineering Toolsbut not with packages forOperation and Monitoring,or a PC for engineering only.

PC

ProSafe System

When multiple projects are connected, the stations suchas FCS or BCV in the projectat lower level network can beconfigured as Other Project Stations.

SCS01 Safety Control Station

Other Project Stations

SEE ALSO

For details on items for each type of stations, see the followings:

• For connecting CENTUM-XL stations and CENTUM V stations;

L4.3.1, “Defining Stations”

• For connecting �XL stations;

L3.3.1, “Configuring �XL Control Units and Operator Stations”

• For connecting Exaopc stations, see the manuals provided with the Exaopc stations.

• For connecting ProSafe system;

M10, “ProSafe Connection”

• For more information about station of other project;

“■ Creating New Stations for Other Projects £” in chapter M9.3.1, “Engineering Upper Projects”


F1-94<F1.5 Creating a New IOM>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F1.5 Creating a New IOMThe types and locations of the input and output modules installed in an FCS can bedefined.

The types of I/O modules can be used on FCS vary with the type of FCS and the typeof I/O bus.

When the station type of an FCS is either KFCS or LFCS, a node for installing an I/Omodule must be created prior to creating an I/O module.


F1-95

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.5 Creating a New IOM>

F1.5.1 Creating a NodeA node for holding I/O modules can be created.

■ Creating a New Node : KFCS2/KFCS £Create a new node for installing an I/O module. While selecting the [IOM] folder, select[Create New] - [Node] from the [File] menu. The following new FIO node dialog box forcreating a new node will be displayed:

F010501E.EPS

New FIO Node

Type

Local Remote

Dual-Redundant Power Supply

80W

40W 24 VDC External Power Supply

Type

Master

Node 2

Power Supply Unit

Remote Node

Component Number

Node Comment

Address of Left-Hand Side EB501

Address of Right-Hand Side EB501

192.168.0.18

192.168.0.146

CancelOK

NODE1\1EB401

Use User-Defined IP Address

Figure New FIO Node Dialog Box : KFCS2/KFCS £

The definition items of the new FIO node dialog box are as follows:

● Node Type : KFCS2/KFCS £

▼ Type

Two selections, Local and Remote, are available for Type. Specify the type of a node to becreated. To create a remote node, it is necessary to define an EB401 (ER bus interfacemaster module) for a local node to which that remote node is to be connected in advance.

If a remote node is specified without defining an EB401 in advance, a warning dialog boxwill be displayed.

SEE ALSO

For the definition of the EB401, see the following:

“■ Creating a New EB401 (ER Bus Interface Master Module) : KFCS2/KFCS £” in F1.5.2, “Creatinga New I/O Module”



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Node Number : KFCS2/KFCS £

▼ Node

The node number is used to identify a node unit. Specify a node number between 1 and15(*1). The default node number is 1.

A maximum of 10(*1) local nodes, a maximum of 14(*1) remote nodes, and a total of 15(*1)local and remote notes when they are mixed can be connected. Also, a maximum of fourER buses can be connected to each KFCS2/KFCS.

*1: The number of nodes for a FCS varies with the database type of the FCS.Nevertheless, the node number of a local node can be designated within the range of 1 to 10 regardless of thedatabase type.

● Remote Master Specification : KFCS2/KFCS £

▼ Master

Select the installation position of the EB401 (ER bus interface master module) to which aremote node is to be connected. Specify this item only when the node type is remote. Theinstallation position is expressed in the following format:

NODEn\sEB401

n: Node number

s: Slot number

● Making the Power Supply Unit (PSU) Dual-Redundant : KFCS2/KFCS £

▼ Dual-Redundant Power Supply

Specify whether or not to make the power supply unit dual-redundant. To make the powersupply unit dual-redundant, check this check box. By default, this check box is checked(dual-redundant power supply unit).

● Power Supply Capacity of the Power Supply Unit (PSU) : KFCS2/KFCS £

▼ Power Supply Capacity

The power supply unit has two options, 80W or 40W. When using 80W power supply unit,up to six modules(*1) which can supply power to field transmitter can be installed in onenode unit.

If 40 W power supply unit is used, the external power supply is required when the I/Omodules providing power to the field transmitters. in this case, check the check box of[24VDC from External Power Unit]. If the installed I/O modules do not supply power to thefield transmitters, do not check the check box of [24VDC from External Power Unit]. Thusthe 24VDC will not be supplied to the field transmitters.

*1: The following I/O modules may supply power to the field transmitters.• AAI141-S (Analog Input Module)• AAI135-S (Analog Input Module)• AAI143-S (Analog Input Module)• AAI543-S (Analog Output Module)• AAI841-S (Analog Input/Output Module)• AAB841-S (Analog Input/Output Module)• AAI835-S (Analog Input/Output Module)• AAP135-S (Pulse Input Module)


F1-97

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Component Number : KFCS2/KFCS £

▼ Component Numer

Enter the component number within eight single-byte characters. This field is blank bydefault.

The component number is a number assigned to a cabinet that houses an FCS. Thisnumber is used to indicate the connecting source and destination of each cable whencables are wired.

The specification of the component number may be omitted.

● Node Comment : KFCS2/KFCS £

▼ Node Comment

Enter a comment on the node within 24 single-byte or 12 double-byte characters. This fieldis blank by default. The specification of the node comment may be omitted.

● Changing the Node Properties : KFCS2/KFCS £

While selecting a node folder (NODExx), select [Properties] from the [File] menu. The newFIO node dialog box will be displayed to change the properties of the node. In this dialogbox the dual-redundant power supply and power supply capacity of the power supply unit,the component number, and the node comment can be modified.

To change the node type (local/remote), delete the corresponding node, and then create anew node.

● Deleting a Node : KFCS2/KFCS £

While selecting a node folder (NODExx), select [Delete] from the [File] menu, or press the[Del] key on the keyboard. A dialog box that confirms the deletion of the node will be dis-played. Click the [OK] button to delete the node. However, if there is an IOM under thenode, the node can not be deleted.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Creating a New Node : LFCS2/LFCS £When a new LFCS is added, one node will be automatically created in primary I/O bus.You can create more nodes, delete existing nodes and change nodes’ properties.

While selecting the [IOM] folder, select [Create New] [Node] from the [File] menu. Thefollowing create new node dialog box will be displayed:

F010502E.EPS

Create New NODE

Type Unit

Cabinet Rack

Dual-Redundant Power Supply

HKU set

Node Number 2

Installation pattern

Component Number

Node Comment

CancelOK

Figure Create New NODE Dialog Box : LFCS2/LFCS £

The create new node dialog box consists of the Type tab and the Unit tab. The definitionitems of the create new node dialog box are as follows:

● Node Number (Type Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £

▼ Node Number

The node number is a number to identify a node, which is set between 1 to 8. The default is1.

● Dual-Redundant Power Supply (Type Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £

▼ Dual-Redundant Power Supply

Specify whether or not to make the power supply unit dual-redundant. To make the powersupply unit dual-redundant, check this check box. By default, this check box is checked(dual-redundant power supply unit).

● HKU Set (Type Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £

▼ HKU Set

Select “Yes” if you use a housekeeping unit (HKU), “No” if you do not. The default is “No.” Ifthe air aspiration and exhaustion temperatures are 35 degrees C or more and 40 degreesC or more in the I/O Expansion Cabinet respectively, the HKU speeds up the revolution offans to inhibit the temperature increase.

● Installation Pattern (Type Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £

▼ Installation Pattern

Select “Cabinet” or “Rack” to install nodes. The default is “Cabinet.”


F1-99

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Component Number (Type Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £

▼ Component Number

The component number is a number given to the cabinet to install FCS units, which is usedto identify where to connect a cable. Up to 8 characters can be used for the number. Nocharacters are entered at the default. The component number setting can be omitted.

● Node Comment (Type Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £

▼ Node Comment

Up to 24 single-byte characters or 12 double-byte characters can be used for the nodecomment. No characters are entered at the default. The node comment setting can beomitted.

● Start Mode (Unit Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £

▼ Start Mode

This is the start mode on I/O units. Set time within 1 to 16,000 msec, or select “MAN”(manual).

The default is 2000 msec.

TIP

This item can not be set with no I/O module defined.

SEE ALSO

For the start mode on I/O units, see the following:

B2.4, “Start Operation of LFCS2 and LFCS I/O Units”

● High Speed Read (Unit Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £

▼ High Speed Read

Select “Yes” or “No” for reading data of I/O units at high-speed. The default is “No.”

TIP

This item can not be set with no I/O module defined.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Change Node Properties : LFCS2/LFCS £

Choosing a node (NODEx) then click [Properties] taskbar on [File] menu. A node Propertiesdialog box will appear. On this dialog box, the properties of the node can be changed.However, the node number can not be changed.

● Delete a Node : LFCS2/LFCS £

Choosing a node (NODEx) then click [Delete] taskbar on [File] menu or push the [Del] keyon keyboard. A confirmation box will appear. Click [OK] on this box, the node will be de-leted. However, if there is an I/O module in the node, the node can not be deleted.


F1-101

IM 33S01B30-01E


F1.5.2 Creating a New I/O ModuleInput and output modules for the FCS can be created.

■ Creating a New I/O Module ¡ £An I/O module can be created for the FCS selected on data tree area of System View.

Choose a folder under the FCS, for an KFCS or an LFCS, choose an [FCS] - [IOM] -[NODExx] folder, then select [Create New] - [IOM] from [File] menu (*1). A dialog box forsetting the I/O module will display.

*1: £ NODExx can be selected only on KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS.

● Create New IOM Dialog Box : PFCS/SFCS/LFCS2/LFCS

▼ Installation Position – Unit, Installation Position – Slot, High Speed Read, IOM Comment

There are two tabs on the Create New IOM dialog box. [Type and Position] tab and [SetDetails] tab. The setting items in the tabs may very with the types of module.

• Type and Position:IOM type, Installation position, dual-redundant configuration, high-speed read andIOM comment text can be specified.

• Set Details: The detailed settings of IOM can be set.

F010503E.EPS

IOM type

Installation position

CancelOK

Create New IOM

Type and Position Set Details

Duplicate Next CardHigh Speed Read

IOM Comment

Category Multi-Point Control Analog I/O(AMN34)

Type Multi-point control analog I/O(AMC80)

1Unit Slot 1

Figure Create New IOM Dialog Box (Type and Position) : PFCS/SFCS/LFCS2/LFCS

SEE ALSO

For more information about types of I/O modules and I/O module installation about PFCS/SFCS/LFCS2/LFCS, see General Specification (GS) for I/O Module Nest, I/O Module (for RIO) (GS 33Y06K40-31E).



IM 33S01B30-01E

• I/O module Dual-Redundant ConfigurationThe two I/O modules installed next to each other (odd numbered slot and the oddnumber + 1 slot) can be configured as dual-redundant.When the option [Duplicate the next card] is checked, a dual-redundant I/O module (u-s IOM name Dup) will be created. If the I/O module is already in dual-redundantconfiguration, unchecking the option may remove the dual-redundant I/O module (u-sIOM name Dup). The properties of a dual-redundant I/O module (u-s IOM name Dup)cannot be changed. For a dual-redundant I/O module (u-s IOM name Dup), the [Typeand Position] and [Set Details] tabs opened from [Properties] tab are Read-only.Changes in the source I/O module of a pair of dual-redundant I/O modules will bereflected into its mating I/O module (u-s IOM name Dup).

• High Speed ReadChecking the [High Speed Read] option with only one I/O module installed in one unitwill enable the FCU to read from I/O module at high speed. This option is available forPackage Communication modules (ACM11/ACM12) and the Fieldbus Communicationmodule (ACF11).For Fieldbus Communication module, High Speed Read can be specified only whenthe number of devices communicate via that module is less than or equal to 16.

SEE ALSO

For more information about IOM high-speed read, see the following:

• For high-speed read in PFCS, see the followings in section “■ Data Flow in Process I/O ¡ £” inC7.1.3 “Timing of Process I/O”;

“● Analog Data ¡”

“● Contact I/O Data ¡”

• For high-speed read in SFCS/LFCS, see the followings in section “■ Data Flow in Process I/O ¡ £”in C7.1.3 “Timing of Process I/O”;

“● Analog Data : LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS £”

“● Contact I/O Data : LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS £”

• IOM CommentUp to 24 alphanumeric characters or up to 12 double-byte characters can be put asIOM comment text. The comment can be omitted. There is not comment text by de-fault.


F1-103

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Creating a New IOM : KFCS2/KFCS £

▼ Installation Position – Slot, High Speed Read, IOM Comment

There are two tabs on the Create New IOM dialog box. [Type and Position]tab and [SetDetails]tab. The setting items in the tabs may vary with the types of module.

• Type and Position tab:IOM Type, Installation Position, Duplicate Next Card, Output Type and High SpeedRead options can be selected. IOM comment text can be entered on this tab.

• Set Details tab:The detailed settings of each IOM can be set on this tab.

F010504E.EPS

IOM type

Installation Position

Create New IOM


Duplicate Next Card

High Speed Read

IOM Comment

Category Remote Node Communication

Type EB401(ER Bus Interface Master Module)

5Slot

Output in a lump Output immediately

Output Type

OK Cancel

Figure Create New IOM Dialog Box (Type and Position) : KFCS2/KFCS £

SEE ALSO

For more information about types of I/O modules and I/O module installation of KFCS2/KFCS, seeGeneral Specification (GS) for FIO System Overview(GS 33Q06Q01-31E)and Models ANB10S,ANB10D, ANR10S, ANR10D Node Units (for FIO)(GS 33Q06Q10-31E).

TIP

For serial communication I/O modules, the IOM property sheet contains four tabs, Type and Position,Card Common, Port1 and Port2 tabs. Set Details tab is not displayed.

SEE ALSO

For more information about the settings regarding to serial communication modules, see the following:

PART-K, Subsystem Communication (Using FIO)



IM 33S01B30-01E

• Duplicate Next CardThe two I/O modules installed next to each other (odd numbered slot and the oddnumber + 1 slot) can be configured as dual-redundant.After checking the option “Duplicate Next Card,” a duplicated IOM (sIOM name Dup)is created. IF uncheck this option, the duplicated IOM (sIOM name Dup) will be re-moved. The properties of the duplicated IOM (sIOM name Dup) can not be modified.The property sheet and the contents in the property sheet can not be accessed. Whenthe original IOM is modified, the same modification will be automatically duplicated tothe duplicated IOM (sIOM name Dup).

SEE ALSO

For information about EB401 (ER bus interface master module) dual-redundant configuration, see thefollowing in later part of this chapter:

“■ Creating a New EB401 (ER Bus Interface Master Module) : KFCS2/KFCS £”

• Output TypeOutput type can be specified to the analog input/output modules and analog outputmodules. Different output type makes the output to the modules or to the EB401 atdifferent timings.Output in a lump: Output when all highest scan function blocks in the FCS completetheir processing.Output immediately: Output when the connected function block is performing outputprocess.

SEE ALSO

For more information about output type, see the following:

“● Output Timing : KFCS2/KFCS £” in section “■ Timing of Process I/O £” in C7.1.3, “Timing ofProcess I/O”

• High Speed ReadWhen check the option box [High Speed Read], CPU reads the data at high speedfrom the I/O module. However, the I/O modules for communication with remote nodes,and the I/O modules for Fieldbus communication, High Speed Read option is notavailable.

SEE ALSO

For more information about high speed read from the I/O modules, see the followings in section “■ DataFlow in Process I/O ¡ £” in C7.1.3, “Timing of Process I/O”:

“● Analog Data : KFCS2/KFCS £”

“● Contact I/O Data : KFCS2/KFCS £”

• IOM CommentUp to 24 alphanumeric characters or up to 12 double-byte characters can be put asIOM comment text. The IOM comment can be omitted. There is not comment text bydefault.


F1-105

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Creating a New EB401 (ER Bus Interface Master Module) : KFCS2/KFCS£

Create a new EB401 (ER bus interface master module) for connecting a remote node in alocal node. While selecting the FCS folder - IOM folder - NODExx folder in the data treesection of System View, select [Create New] - [IOM] from the [File] menu. The create newIOM dialog box will be displayed:

The create new IOM dialog box consists of the Type and Position tab and the Set Detailstab. The definition items of the create new IOM dialog box are as follows:

F010505E.EPS

IOM type

Installation Position

Create New IOM


Duplicate Next Card

High Speed Read

IOM Comment

Category Remote Node Communication

Type EB401(ER Bus Interface Master Module)

5Slot

Output in a lump Output immediately

Output Type

OK Cancel

Figure Create New IOM Dialog Box (Type and Position) : KFCS2/KFCS £

Communication Basic Period 10 msec

Node Response Timeout 12 msec

Nubmber of Retries Upon Node Response Timeout 3 time

Constant Sending Period Wait for Recieving

Maximum Number of Nodes

Communication Protocol

4


OK

Default

Cancel

Create New IOM

F010506E.EPS

Figure Create New IOM Dialog Box (Detail Setting of EB401) : KFCS2/KFCS £



IM 33S01B30-01E

TIP

[Output Type] and [High Speed Read] on the Type and Position tab are for display only; they can not beset.

● IOM Type (Type and Position Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS £

Specify the category and type of the IOM. For Category, select [Remote Node Communica-tion] from the list. When [Remote Node Communication] is selected for Category, [EB401ER Bus Interface Master Module] will be entered automatically in the Type field.

● Installation Position (Type and Position Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS £

Specify the number of the slot in which the EB401 will be installed. Specify an odd number.Another I/O module can not be installed in the slot at the right of the slot in which the EB401has been installed.

● Dual-Redundant Designation (Type and Position Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS £

▼ Duplicate Next Card - Remote Node Communication

The ER bus can be made dual-redundant by installing two EB401 cards. Install the deal-redundant EB401 card in the adjoining even slot at the right. To make the ER bus dual-redundant, check [Duplicate Next Card]. When it is checked, a file named slot numberEB401Dup will be created. This check box is unchecked by default.

● Maximum Number of Nodes (Set Details Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS £

▼ Maximum Number of Nodes

Specify the maximum number of remote nodes to be connected to the EB401. Select from2, 4 and 8. The default setting is 4.

● Communication Protocol (Set Details Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS £

▼ Communication Protocol

Specify the communication protocol between the EB401 and the node. Select either[Constant Sending Period] or [Wait for Receiving]. The default setting is [Wait for Receiv-ing]. Do not change the default setting unless it is necessary to do so.

[Constant Sending Period] starts the next transmission at every [Communication BasicPeriod] even when the response to the previous transmission has not been completed.Therefore, even if one node does not respond, it will not affect the data update periods ofother nodes.

[Wait for Receiving] starts the next transmission only when the response to the previoustransmission has been received or when [Node No Response Monitoring Time] has beenreached.


F1-107

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Communication Basic Period (Set Details Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS £

▼ Communication Basic Period

This item is set when [Constant Sending Period] is specified as the communication proto-col.

Set the communication basic period between the EB401 and the remote node within therange from 10 to 1000 msec. The default setting is 10 msec.

● Node Response Timeout (Set Details Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS £

▼ Node Response Timeout

When the time it takes for the EB401 to start transmission until it completes receptionexceeds the value set in [No Response Timeout], that node is judged to be not responding.Set the node response timeout according to the table below. If a remote node is connectedvia an optical repeater, add 6 milliseconds to the node response timeout as compensationfor the transmission delay time due to the optical repeater.

Table Node Response Timeout

F010507E.EPS

Communication protocol

Node response timeout setting

Allowable setting range Default value When an optical

repeater is connected

Wait for Receiving 10 to 200 msec 12 msec 18 msec

Constant Sending Period

10 to communication basic period x 5

10 msec 16 msec

● Number of Retries Upon Node Response Timeout (Set Details Tab) :KFCS2/KFCS £

▼ Number of Retries Upon Node Response Timeout

Set the number of retries for communication to a non-responding node within the rangefrom 0 to 7 times. The default setting is 3.


F1-108<F1.6 Project Data Backup>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F1.6 Project Data BackupBy making backup copies of project data, the newest project data can be protectedfrom data loss due to hardware failures such as a disk crash.

■ Backup ToolUsing Windows explorer can copy the whole project folder to an external media such as aMO or DAT, the project (all files and folders under the project folder) can be backed up.However, when backup the project to a different hard disk, or to a different PC via network,the Backup Tool introduced here is a useful program which can backup the project conve-niently.

The backup tool can be started from both System View and Recipe View. The backupprocessing started from System View and the backup processing started from Recipe Viewact independent of each other.

The operation of the backup tool started from Recipe View is the same as the operation ofthe backup tool started from System View.

In this section, the operation of the backup tool started from System View is explained.

■ Setting of Backup InformationWhen using the backup function, it is necessary to set certain items of backup information(whether or not each project is to be backed up, and the backup destination if backed up)for each project first.

■ Execution of Backup TimingThe backup can be made by the backup function at the following two timings.

• Backup at the completion of engineeringAll specified project data is backed up when engineering is completed and SystemView is exited.

• Backup at any timing specified by the userThe user backs up only the project data that needs to be backed up at any timing inSystem View.

■ Restoring Backed up Project DataUse Windows Explorer to copy the backup data to the restore location in order to restorebacked up project data.

IMPORTANT

When restoring a backed up project, if the same project is still existing in the system, alldata of the existing project should be deleted completely before restoring the project. Otherwise, the restored data may conflict with the existing data and the whole project becomesabnormal and useless.


F1-109

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.6 Project Data Backup>

■ Flow of Project BackupThe following flowchart shows the flow of the project backup.

F010601E.EPS

Backup setting dialog box

System View

Backup status display dialog box

Windows Explorer

START

Enter the name of the shared backup destination.

Set the backup information for the project data.

Select [Start Backup] from the [Tools] menu in System View.Exit System View.

END

Check the execution status of backup.

Specify the projects to be backed up.

In case of backup at the completion of engineering

In case of backup at any timing by the user

Execute the backup.

Backup specification dialog box

Figure Flow of Backup

1. Enter the name of the location where projects are to be backed up using WindowsExplorer, and make sure it is shared. If the drive that is used as a backup destinationis already shared, it is not necessary to perform this.

2. Set the backup information for the projects to be backed up in the Backup settingdialog box. Project databases for which no backup information is set are excludedfrom the backup targets.

3. Exit System View or select [Start Backup] from the [Tools] menu of System View.The Backup specification dialog box is displayed in order to select the backup targets.

4. Select the projects to be backed up in the Backup Specification dialog box.

5. Click the [Back up] button in the Backup Specification dialog box.The backup is started. The project databases selected in the Backup specificationdialog box are backed up to the chosen backup destination. During the backup ex-ecuted upon exiting from System View, System View closes when the backup of allthe projects is completed.

6. The progress of the backup can be checked in the Backup Status Display dialog box.The progress of the backup is displayed for each project in the Backup Status Displaydialog box.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Setting Backup Information for ProjectsSet backup information for projects that are to be backed up. Project databases for whichno backup information is set are excluded from the backup targets.

Set the backup information in the Backup setting dialog box.

Select [Set Backup] from the [Tools] menu.

The Backup setting dialog box is displayed.

Project Name Backup destination

It is backed up at the end.

Backup FCS database automatically.

Backup Setting

Backup destination \\PC1\CSPJTBKUP0

F010602E.EPS

...

OK

Cancel

Apply

MYPJTPJT01

PJT02PJT03PJT04

FCS backup

– – –– – –

– – –– – –– – –

\\PC1\CSPJTBKUP0\\PC1\CSPJTBKUP1\\PC1\CSPJTBKUP2

Project Settings

Figure Backup Setting Dialog Box

In the Backup Setting dialog box, the names of all the projects opened in System View areshown.

Make the following settings for all projects to be backed up.

● Setting of whether or not to back up

For each project listed, specify whether or not it should be backed up.

• If the project should be backed up : Check the check box.

• If a project should not be backed up : Do not check the check box.

TIP

For newly created projects and old revision projects, the check boxes are unchecked by default.

● Backup on Closing Recipe View

When the option box “It is Backed up at the end” is checked, the recipe data backup toolautomatically starts when closing Recipe View. By default, this option is checked.


F1-111

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Setting the Backup Destination

Enter the UNC (Universal Naming Convention) path of a disk where the selected projectsare to be backed up. The UNC path should be entered in the format “\\computername\storage location.” Once the backup destination is set, it is displayed in the [Backupdestination] field.

The drives to be used as backup destinations must be shared on the network in advance.

IMPORTANT

Make sure to set [Backup destination] for projects whose check boxes showing whether ornot they should be backed up are checked.

In addition, network sharing must be set for backup destination drives in advance. It isnecessary to set network sharing even if the backup destination is a local drive.

If no backup destinations are set or drives other than the ones shared on the network areset as backup destinations, the message, “Project XXX backup destination is not set,” isdisplayed.

When the items mentioned above are set for all the projects to be backed up, click the [OK]button, [Apply] button, or [Cancel] button.

• [OK] :The settings take effect and the Backup setting dialog box closes.

• [Apply] :The settings take effect. However, the Backup setting dialog box is not closed.

• [Cancel] :Cancels the settings, and the Backup setting dialog box closes. However, if the [Apply]button is clicked before [Cancel] button is clicked, the settings become valid at thetime the [Apply] button is clicked.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Backup Destination Specification Dialog Box

Click the [...] button of the Backup setting dialog box in order to display the Browse forFolder dialog box. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, a drive and a folder can be selectedas a backup destination.

Network Neighborhood

Browse for Folder

Select Backup Destination

F010603E.EPS


OK Cancel

Entire NetworkPC1HIS0123


HIS0124

CTMRECPCS1000PJT

CTMRMNG

CS1000

Figure Browse for Folder Dialog Box

In the Browse for Folder dialog box, a list of drives on the local PC and folders in thosedrives is displayed. In addition, a list of PCs connected to the network is displayed.

Select a drive and a folder as a backup destination from the list and click the [OK] button.

The Browse for Folder dialog box is closed, and the backup destination selected in theBrowse for Folder dialog box is set in the [Backup destination] field of the Backup settingdialog box.

TIP

• If the [Cancel] button is clicked, the Browse for Folder dialog box is closed without setting the backupdestination.

• If a shared name was not specified for the selected backup destination, a message dialog box thatdisplays the message, “Project XXX backup destination is not set,” appears. Click the [OK] button inthe message dialog box to close the dialog box and return to the Backup destination specificationdialog box.


F1-113

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Execution of BackupThe execute backup, exit System View or select [Start Backup] from the [Tools] menu.

The Backup specification dialog is displayed. A list of the projects whose backup informa-tion is set in the Backup setting dialog box among the projects opened in System View isdisplayed in the Backup specification dialog box.


Back up even if it is used in other PC.

Backup specification

F010604E.EPS

Back up

Not Back up

MYPJT \\PC1\CSPJTBKUP0PJT01 \\PC1\CSPJTBKUP1PJT02 \\PC1\CSPJTBKUP2PJT03PJT04

Figure Backup Specification Dialog Box

In the Backup specification dialog box, set the following items for each project listed.

● Setting of whether or not to Back up

For each project listed, specify whether or not it should be backed up.

• If the project should be backed up : Check the check box.

• If the project should not be backed up : Do not check the check box.

Projects that are excluded from backup will not be backed up even if they are set to bebacked up in the Backup setting dialog box.

● Setting whether or not to Back up even if a Project is Used in Other PCs

If the [Back up even if it is used other PC] check box is checked, backup is executed for allthe target project data even if they are being used by other PCs.

If the [Back up even if it is used in other PC] check box is unchecked, backup is not ex-ecuted for the project data that is being used by other PCs.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Execution of Backup

Click the [Back up] button. The Backup specification dialog box is closed and a backup isstarted for all the projects chosen to be backed up. In addition, the Backup status displaydialog box is displayed to show the progress of the backup.

If a project to be backed up is being updated or written to by another PC, that project is notbacked up.

For projects that were not backed up, the message, “Project XXX has not been backed upbefore. Please back it up,” is displayed when System View is started next time. Moreover, ifa backup fails, the message, “Project XXX has not been backed up before. Please back itup,” is also displayed when System View is started next time.

If the [Not Back up] button is clicked, the Backup specification dialog box closes withoutexecuting a backup.

■ Checking the Progress of BackupWhen a backup is being executed, the Backup status display dialog box is displayed.

Start Project MYPJT backup.Fri Sep 26 15:10:15 2003End Project MYPJT backup. Fri Sep 26 15:11:24 2003

Start Project PJT01 backup.Fri Sep 26 15:11:24 2003Backup is cancelled after completing the ongoing backup.End Project PJT01 backup. Fri Sep 26 15:12:52 2003

––ERROR =0 WARNING =0 ––

F010605E.EPS

CloseAbort

Backup status display

Progress barDisplayed only during backup

Figure Backup Status Display Dialog Box

The progress of the backup is displayed for each project in the Backup status display dialogbox.

The user can stop a backup at the end of each project backup by clicking the [Abort] button.

The backup is aborted at the point where the backup currently in progress is completed. Inthis case, any project set to be backed up after the aborted project will not be backed up.

Click the [Close] button to close the Backup status display dialog. This button cannot beoperated while a backup is in progress.


F1-115

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Backup Processing of Project DataThe files in the project folder to be backed up will be copied to the backup destination, andthe files in the project folder with the same project name at the backup destination will bedeleted under the following conditions:

• Folder to be backed upThe folders and files in the project folder will be backed up.

• If the same file exists in the project folder to be backed up and at the backup destina-tionIf there is any difference between the saving date of these two files, the target file iscopied to the backup destination. If not, it is not copied.

• If a file or folder that is not in the project folder to be backed up exists at the backupdestinationThat file or folder is deleted from the backup destination.

• If a file or folder that exists in the project folder to be backed up does not exist at thebackup destinationThat file or folder is copied to the backup destination.

IMPORTANT

• If a backup fails for some reason during execution, execute the backup again.

• Writing to the project data to be backed up from Builder cannot be performed during abackup.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Recommended System Configuration for BackupConsidering that the number of sessions will increase due to actions of the backup tool,etc., a recommended system configuration for backup that takes this increase into accountis shown below.

In this configuration, since the operation monitoring is executed on a different PC than theone executing the engineering, the CPU load during backup processing is lowered, thusminimizing the influence of backup processing on the operation monitoring function. Inaddition, the increase of the number of sessions by backup processing can be suppressed.

Note that a backup is executed via Ethernet in case the backup destination is another PC.

F010607E.EPS

Project database

Backup destination drive

PC for engineering(The backup tool is running)

PC for the operation monitoring

PC on which the backup destination drive exists

Backup

Ethernet

Figure Recommended System Configuration for Backup

■ Number of Sessions Used for BackupThe number of sessions to be used at backup is determined according to the following.

Table Number of Sessions Used at Backup

Conditions Number of sessions used

1

2

1

F010606E.EPS

To back up engineering data on the local PC to a drive on the local PC

To back up engineering data on the local PC to a drive on a remote PC

To back up engineering data on a remote PC to a drive on a remote PC


F1-117

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.7 FCS Automatic Backup>

F1.7 FCS Automatic BackupBy using the FCS automatic backup, you can recover the project database withoutperforming offline download to the FCS and continue online maintenance in case ofa hard disk crash in the PC on which the project database resides or similar cases.The FCS automatic backup consists of two functions, “automatic backup of FCSdatabase” and “FCS database diagnosis.”

IMPORTANT

It should be noted that if the hard disk of the PC on which the project database residescrashes during backup, the project database loses consistency and it can no longer berecovered.


F1-118<F1.7 FCS Automatic Backup>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F1.7.1 Automatic Backup of FCS DatabaseIn order to perform online maintenance, the database within an FCS and the data-base within a PC must always be mutually consistent. There are, however, caseswhere the database within an FCS and the database within a PC may lose consis-tency due to hardware errors etc. For this reason, it is necessary to automaticallyback up the latest FCS database every time online download is performed to preventinconsistencies between the databases. The automatic backup of FCS databasefunction automatically backs up the FCS database within the PC (changed files only)after online download to the FCS is completed.

TIP

The FCS automatic backup only backs up the current project.

■ Operating ConditionsThe automatic backup of FCS database function operates under the following conditions.

• A project must be specified as the backup target.

• The backup destination must be specified.

• The project attribute of the project must be current project.

• The FCS automatic backup must be set to be performed.

■ Backup DestinationThe destination of the automatic backup of FCS database function is the same as theproject backup destination explained in F1.6, “Project Data Backup”. Do not specify aremovable disk such as a magneto-optic disk as the backup destination. The performanceis degraded and the operability becomes lower.

■ Files Backed up with Automatic Backup of FCS DatabaseThe files in the FCS folder under the project folder and the FCS related files in the ETCfolder and COMMON folder are backed up by the automatic backup of FCS databasefunction.


F1-119

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Automatic Backup Timings of FCS DatabaseWhen you set the automatic backup of FCS database function, the FCS database isbacked up at the following timings.

• After online download is completed in FCS related builders (including FCS operationsin System View)

• After FCS offline download is completed

• After saving the tuning parameters is completed

• After all generation is completed

TIP

The entire project is backed up to maintain the consistency of the project if you create or delete an FCS,or change the properties of an FCS. Backing up the entire project takes some time.

■ Setting of Automatic Backup of FCS DatabaseThis section explains various settings and procedures for automatically backing up the FCSdatabase.

IMPORTANT

In order to automatically back up the FCS database, the project backup, which is explainedin F1.6, “Project Data Backup” must have been set.

1. Select [Set Backup...] from the [Tools] menu of System View.

The Backup Setting Dialog Box appears.


It is backed up at the end.

Backup FCS database automatically.

Backup Setting

Backup destination \\PC1\CSPJTBKUP0

F010701E.EPS

...

OK

Cancel

Apply

MYPJTPJT01

PJT02PJT03PJT04

FCS backup

– – –– – –

– – –– – –– – –

\\PC1\CSPJTBKUP0\\PC1\CSPJTBKUP1\\PC1\CSPJTBKUP2

Project Settings

Figure Backup Setting Dialog Box



IM 33S01B30-01E

2. Check the [Backup FCS database automatically.] check box in the Backup settingdialog box.

If you check this check box, [YES] is displayed in the [FCS backup] column of thecurrent project in the backup target project list display area. [- - -] is always displayedfor projects whose project attribute is not current project.

3. Click the [OK] or [Apply] button in the Backup setting dialog box.

The backup message dialog box appears only when you set the automatic backup ofFCS database function for the first time.

MYPJT : FCS Database Automatic Backup was set. Do the backup of the entire project.

OK

F010702E.EPS

BKEBackUp

Figure Backup Message Dialog Box

Click the [OK] button in the backup message dialog box to close the backup messagedialog box.

Select [Start Backup...] from the [Tools] menu of System View to back up the projectdatabase only when you are setting the automatic backup of FCS database function for thefirst time.

IMPORTANT

The automatic backup of FCS database function compares the times at which files savedin the backup destination and current files were updated, and backs up only the files whosetimes of update are different. Back up the project data when you are setting the automaticbackup of FCS database function for the first time because the file used for comparing thetimes of update may not exist in the backup destination.

If you do not back up the project, the project cannot be recovered when errors occur inproject data or it will take long to back up the project when the automatic backup of FCSdatabase function is executed.


F1-121

IM 33S01B30-01E


F1.7.2 FCS Database DiagnosisBuilders related to FCS save changes in the project database within a PC afteronline download to an FCS succeeds. At this point, the changes are reflected inseveral files in the project database of the FCS. If any of the files in the project data-base is not updated because some error occurs, the FCS database becomes incon-sistent. If you continue the generation operation in this state, problems will occurthat will make analysis and recovery difficult. The FCS database diagnosis is per-formed in order to avoid such circumstances. The FCS database diagnosis functionis enabled automatically when you set the automatic backup of FCS database func-tion. It is also possible to check for inconsistencies of the FCS database by startingthe FCS database diagnosis tool from the [Tools] menu of System View.

■ FCS Database Diagnosis Error MessagesThe FCS database diagnosis function is automatically enabled when you set the automaticbackup of FCS database function. The FCS database diagnosis function monitors that noinconsistencies occur in the project database from the completion of a successful onlinedownload operation to the completion of updating the builder files. If any inconsistency isdetected in the project database, an error message indicating that an inconsistency oc-curred is displayed at the next generation or when starting System View. Some examplesof error message displays are shown below.

Mismatching of database is detected in the last generation.

Computer Name:XXXX

Program ID:0x2100

Project Name:MYPJT

Station Name:FCS0101

Generation Time:Thu Dec 18 18:56:25 2003

File Path:\CS3000\ENG\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0101\FUNCTION_BLOCK\DR0001.edf

SEE ALSO

For how to handle cases where error messages are displayed at generation or when starting SystemView, see the following:

F1.7.3, “Project Database Error Handling”



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ FCS Database Diagnosis ToolThe FCS database diagnosis tool is used to check inconsistencies of the project database.It displays diagnosis results if errors are found in the check.

The FCS database diagnosis tool can only be used for projects for which the automaticbackup of FCS database function is set. Moreover, the backup database must always beupdated with the latest data.

● Operation Procedure of the FCS Database Diagnosis Tool

Follow the operation procedure below to use the FCS database diagnosis tool.

1. Select [FCS Database Diagnosis Tool...] from the [Tools] menu of System View. TheFCS database diagnosis tool starts.

F010703E.EPS

BKECheckFcsDB

Project Name MYPJT Station Name FCS0101

Checks FCS database

Action

Start Close

Detects difference in whole project

Figure FCS Database Diagnosis Tool

2. Select the project you want to check from the [Project Name] list box.

3. Select the FCS you want to check from the [Station Name] list box.

All FCSs will be checked if you do not select a station.


F1-123

IM 33S01B30-01E


4. Select one of the options in the [Action] section.Select either [Checks FCS database] or [Detects difference in whole project]. Bydefault, [Checks FCS database] is selected.

If you select [Checks FCS database], the tool performs the following actions.

• It compares the project database of the specified project and the backup database tocheck that the project database is correct.

• If the specified project is the current project, it communicates with the FCS to acquirethe generation time of the FCS and compares it with the FCS database generationtime of the project.

• If a station name is specified, it checks the database of the target FCS.If no station name is specified, it checks the databases of all FCSs.

If you select [Detects difference in whole project], the tool performs the followingactions.

• It compares all project databases and backup databases.If it is necessary to restore a backup database, it keeps track of changes in the projectcommon section and databases of stations other than FCSs and uses this data for therestoration.

• With this specification, the FCS database is not checked.

• Even if a station name is specified, the specification of the station name will be ig-nored.

● Diagnosis Results of the FCS Database Diagnosis Tool and Actions to beTaken

The table below lists the diagnosis results of the FCS database diagnosis tool and actionsto be taken.

Table Diagnosis Results of the FCS Database Diagnosis Tool and Actions to be Taken

Diagnosis result Action to be taken

F010704E.EPS

The project database is normal, but it is not backed up. Execute the backup from System View.

The project database is normal, but it fails in backing up. Execute the backup from System View.

The project database cannot be restored.

Backup the project database from System View.

Backup the project database from System View.

The project database cannot be repaired.

An error is found in the project database. Restore the database. Repair the project database.

The project database is normal. No action is required.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Examples of Diagnosis Result Displays of the FCS Database DiagnosisTool

Checking MYPJT FCS0101...

The project database is compared with the backup database.

CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\AREADEF.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\AREADEF.1 Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\FcsRef.rdb Thu Jul 11 10:42:43 2003Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\FcsRef.rdb Thu Jul 09 16:52:33 2003CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\Inst0358.eng Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\Inst0358.eng Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\Inst0358.fcs Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\Inst0358.fcs Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\Inst0358.odb Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\Inst0358.odb Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\InstGroup.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\InstGroup.1 Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\IOMDEF.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:45 2003Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\IOMDEF.1 Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\OGDATA.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\OGDATA.1 Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\PRDATA.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\PRDATA.1 Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\TagRef.rdb Thu Jul 11 10:42:44 2003Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\TagRef.rdb Thu Jul 10 16:53:45 2003CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\TF0200.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:45 2003Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\TF0100.1 Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\TF0201.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\TF0101.1 Thu Jul 09 16:42:46 2003CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\SKELTON\SFDATA.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:45 2003Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\SKELTON\SFDATA.1Thu Jul 09 10:14:11 2003CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\SWITCH\SwitchDef.edf Thu Jul 11 10:42:49 2003Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\SWITCH\SwitchDef.edf Thu Jul 09 16:52:302003

There is a difference between the project database and the backup database.

The project database is normal, but it is not backed up. Execute the backup from SystemView.


F1-125

IM 33S01B30-01E


F1.7.3 Project Database Error HandlingThis section explains how to recover a project database when an error occurs in theproject database in the following two cases.

• When the hard disk of a PC on which a project resides crashes

• When a database becomes inconsistent

■ When the Hard Disk of a PC on which a Project Resides CrashesFollow the procedure below to handle a case where the hard disk of a PC on which aproject database resides crashes while not performing online downloading.

1. Restore the backed up project database from the backup destination to a normal PC.

2. Start the FCS database diagnosis tool and check that the FCS generation timesmatch.

IMPORTANT

Status display files are not automatically backed up, even if they are changed. Therefore,make sure to save the control drawing again if Control Drawing Builder was used for thelast generation when restoring the backed up project database.

■ When a Database Becomes InconsistentIf a database becomes inconsistent during online download for some reasons, the errormessage “Mismatching of database is detected in the last generation.” is displayed at thenext generation or when starting System View. If this message is displayed, start the FCSdatabase diagnosis tool and check the FCS database. Specify [Checks FCS database] for[Action] of the FCS database diagnosis tool.

IMPORTANT

If there are errors in the diagnosis result, disable (deselect) the [It is backed up at the end.]setting in the Backup setting dialog box and close System View.

Contact YOKOGAWA service agent after that.


F1-126<F1.8 Software Configuration Viewer>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F1.8 Software Configuration ViewerSoftware Configuration Viewer is a tool that displays information related to the CS1000/CS 3000 software installed on a PC. Software Configuration Viewer has thefollowing functions.

• Displaying user names and company name

• Displaying intellectual property rights, copyrights and registered trademarksincluded in the CS 1000/CS 3000 software

• Displaying the system release number

• Displaying the ID number (system ID license number)

• Displaying the package names and number of licenses

• Displaying installation logs

• Creating a key code FD for backup

• Displaying the program revisions

• Displaying registry information

• Printing information displayed in Software Configuration Viewer

F010801E.EPS

Print...Close

Software Configuration Viewer

All Install Log Create Key Code FD Program Info. Registry

Package Model NameLBC1210-S10LBC1220-S10LBC1230-S10LBC1260-S10LBS1100-S10

CENTUM is a registered trademark of Yokogawa Electric Corporation.Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated, which may be registered in certain jurisdictions. MELSEC-A is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.Modicon and Modbus are registered trademarks of AEG Schneider Automation. SYSMAC is a registered trademark of OMRON Corporation. SIEMENS and SIMANTIC are registered trademarks of Siemens Industrial Automation Ltd.We do not use TM or (R) mark to indicate those trademarks or registered trademarks.

CENTUM CS 3000

Copyright(C) 2003 Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Release Number : R3.04.00

Suzuki

YOKOGAWA

ID Number : XXXXXXXnnnnn

This product is licenced to the following:

Function NameStandard Bus Converter Function (For...Standard Bus Converter Function (For...Standard Bus Converter Function (For...Standard Bus Converter Function (For...Control Function for Compact Field Co...

Figure Software Configuration Viewer


F1-127

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F1.8 Software Configuration Viewer>

■ Starting Software Configuration ViewerSoftware Configuration Viewer can be started in the following two ways.

• Select [Programs] - [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Software Configuration Viewer] fromthe [Start] menu of Windows

• Select [Help] - [Version Information...] in System Viewer or a builder.

■ Tabs of Software Configuration ViewerSoftware Configuration Viewer contains the following tabs.

• All

• Install Log

• Create Key Code FD

• Program Information

• Registry

IMPORTANT

The Registry tab is displayed only when a user with the Administrator privilege is logged in.It is not displayed when a user without the Administrator privilege is logged in.



IM 33S01B30-01E

Functions of each of the tabs constituting Software Configuration Viewer are explainedbelow.

● All Tab

The All tab displays the following items.

• User names and company name

• Intellectual property rights, copyrights and registered trademarks included in the CS1000/CS 3000 software

• System release number

• System ID license number

• Package names and number of licenses

● Install Log Tab

The Install Log tab displays the history of installation tasks.

Print...Close



INFO CopyFile OK! (FILES.TXT->FILES.TXT)INFO CopyFile OK! (SYSREV.TXT->SYSREV.TXT)INFO RegDBSetKyeValueEx(SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3K\COMMON TO INFO RegDBSetKyeValueEx(SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CentumProductInfo FINFO RegDBSetKyeValueEx(SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CentumProductInfo FINFO BKCBackLaunchApp<END2:net share CS1000 /delete /yes>INFO BKCBackLaunchApp<END3:net share CS1000=C:\CS3000 /yes>WARNING DeleteProgramFolder<CS 1000>INFO RegDBGetKyeValueEx(SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session MINFO RegDBSetKyeValueEx1(SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session MWARNING BKCBackLaunchApp(C:\CS3000\INSTALL\INSTEND.EXE R3.04.0INFO BKCBackLaunchApp(C:\CS3000\INSTALL\BKCAFTERINSTALL.EXE CDEBUG same REBOOT=COMMONDEBUG same REBOOT=LHS1100DEBUG same REBOOT=LHS4150DEBUG same REBOOT=LHS4190DEBUG same REBOOT=LHS5101DEBUG same REBOOT=LHS5500DEBUG same REBOOT=LHS5110DEBUG same REBOOT=LHS5170INFO BKCBackLaunchApp<C:\CS3000\INSTALL\BKCREGSET.EXE /p C:\CSINFO BKCBackLaunchApp<C:\CS3000\INSTALL\BKCREGSET.EXE /p C:\CSINFO BKCBackLaunchApp<C:\CS3000\Install\BKCXPSetup.exe C:\CS3000>INFO BKCBackLaunchApp<C:\CS3000\Install\BKCRegAccess.exe MACHININFO BKCBackLaunchApp<C:\CS3000\Install\BKCRegAccess.exe MACHININFO BKCBackLaunchApp<C:\CS3000\Install\BKCRegAccess.exe MACHININFO BKCBackLaunchApp<C:\CS3000\Install\BKCRegAccess.exe USERS\INFO BKCBackLaunchApp<C:\CS3000\Install\BKCRegAccess.exe MACHININFO BKCBackLaunchApp<C:\CS3000\Install\BKCRegAccess.exe MACHININFO BKCBackLaunchApp<C:\CS3000\Install\BKCSetLcs.exe C:\CS3000>INFO Vnet driver update. Vnet:00000303.0762 CD:R3.04.00DEBUG CommitShardFiles OK!DEBUG path=1,cnf=1,batch_install=12003/9/9 10:46============LOG END============

F010802E.EPS

Figure Display Example of the Install Log Tab


F1-129

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Create Key Code FD Tab

The Create Key Code FD tab provides the following functions.

• Creating a key code FD for backup

• Putting together several key code FD created as a result of package addition andrevision upgrade into one FD

• Printing labels for key code FD

F010803E.EPS

Print...Close

FD Label PrintCreated Key Code FD



“Create Key Code FD” is used for the following cases:

-When creating backup of the Key Code FD.

-When combining multiple Key Code FDs into one floppy after package additions and rev ups.

Figure Display Example of the Create Key Code FD Tab

Follow the procedure below to create a key code FD.

1. Click the [Create Key Code FD] button in the Create Key Code FD tab. The insert FDdialog box appears.

F010804E.EPS

CancelOK

BKCSftView

Insert unused FD in drive A and choose “OK”. The content of FD is lost.

Figure Insert FD Dialog Box




2. Insert an unused FD in drive A and click the [OK] button in the insert FD dialog box.Formatting of the FD starts and a dialog box showing the progress of the formattingappears.

F010805E.EPS

Key Code FD

Formatting...

Figure FD Format Progress Dialog Box

3. When the formatting of the FD is completed without errors, all the revision key codefiles and package key code files are copied from the CS 1000/CS 3000 installationdisk to the FD.

4. When copying to the FD is completed without errors, a dialog box notifying that thecreation of the key code FD has been completed appears. Click the [OK] button toclose the key code FD creation complete dialog box.

F010806E.EPS

BKCSftView

Completed creating a Key Code FD.

OK

Figure Key Code FD Creation Complete Dialog Box

Click the [FD Label Print] button in the Create Key Code tab to print a label for a key codeFD. A label for a key code FD is printed out.

CENTUM CS 3000Key Code FDID Number : XXXXXXXnnnnn

2003/ 09/ 11 14 : 23: 59

F010807E.EPS

Figure Example of Key Code FD Label

F1-131

IM 33S01B30-01E



● Program Info. Tab

The Program Info. tab displays the detailed information of the CS 1000/CS 3000 softwareinstalled on a PC. It displays the version information and creation dates of executablemodules (*.exe), drivers (*.sys) and libraries (*.dll) of the CS 1000/CS 3000 software.

F010808E.EPS

Print...Close



File NameC:\CS3000\apcs\Extmdl\libuca.dllC:\CS3000\eng\BKMTest\Extmdl\Fcs\Tif...C:\CS3000\eng\BKMTest\Extmdl\Fcs\Tif...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0...C:\CS3000\eng\BKSystem\data\FCS\CU...C:\CS3000\eng\BKSystem\data\FCS\CU...C:\CS3000\eng\BKSystem\data\FCS\CU...C:\CS3000\eng\BKSystem\data\FCS\CU...C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BDEVCClient.exeC:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKCLogRegist.exeC:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKECheckFcsDB.exeC:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKEChPjtAttrUtilDlg...C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKEConvertTagListF...C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKECvtLargeScalePj...C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKEDDCopyTool.exeC:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKEFpatch.exeC:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKERDBFlagSetTool...C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKERDBtoMDB.exeC:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKESetUpUserDefFc

Build No.303.843 303.843 303.843 303.824 303.824 303.737 303.737 303.824 303.822 303.839 303.824 303.824 303.737 303.737 303.737 303.737 303.737 303.737 303.843 303.843 303.839 303.843 304.0304.0304.0304.0304.0304.0304.0304.0304.0304.0304.0

Fri Sep 05 03:04Fri Sep 05 03:04Fri Sep 05 03:04Thu Aug 07 10:5Thu Aug 07 10:5Thu Aug 15 18:5Thu Aug 15 18:5Thu Aug 07 10:5Wed Aug 06 08:Thu Aug 28 21:0Thu Aug 07 10:5Thu Aug 07 10:5Thu Aug 15 18:5Thu Aug 15 18:5Thu Aug 15 18:5Thu Aug 15 18:5Thu Aug 15 18:5Thu Aug 15 18:5Fri Sep 05 02:40Fri Sep 05 02:40Thu Aug 28 21:0Fri Sep 05 02:40Thu Jul 31 18:35Thu Jul 31 17:58Fri Sep 05 01:22Thu Sep 04 20:0Thu Sep 04 20:0Thu Sep 04 20:0Thu Sep 04 19:5Thu Jul 31 18:29Thu Sep 04 20:0Thu Sep 04 20:0Thu Sep 04 20:0

Date/Time Created

Figure Example of the Program Info. Tab



● Registry Tab

The Registry tab displays names and values of registry entries set or used by the CS 1000/CS 3000 software.

F010809E.EPS

Print...Close



Registry\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...\HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...

ValueDefaultColor.rebProgram\

0x00000001 (1)0x00000067 (103)0x00000080 (128)0x000000d9 (217)0x00000001 (1)0x00000058 (88)0x00000001 (1)0x000000d6 (214)0x00000001 (1)0x00000005 (5)0x00000001 (1)0x0000000e (14)0x00000004 (4)0x00000000 (0)C:\CS30000x00000003 (3)IM33SC:\CS3000\ENG\C:\CS3000\ENG\0x00000000 (0)0x00000000 (0)

0x0000002a (42)0x00000000 (0)

C:\WINDOWS\not

0x00000000 (0)0x00000000 (0)

Figure Display Example of the Registry Tab

F1-133

IM 33S01B30-01E



■ Printing Displayed InformationIt is possible to print the information displayed in a tab on a printer by clicking the [Print...]button provided in each tab.

Perform the following steps to print an information display.

1. Click [Print...] button. The Create Report dialog box appears.

F010810E.EPS

CancelOK

Create Report

Range

All Tabs

Current Tab

Output Destination

File

Printer Normally

Clipboard

Figure Create Report Dialog Box

2. Select one of the options in the [Range] section. By default, [Current Tab] is selected.

• If you select [Current Tab], only the information displayed in the currently displayed tabis printed.

• If you select [All Tabs], the information displayed in all tabs except for the Create KeyCode FD tab of Software Configuration Viewer is printed out sequentially.If you select [All Tabs], the information of the Registry tab is printed out even if the usercurrently logged in does not have the Administrator privilege.

3. Select one of the options in the [Output Destination] section. By default, [PrinterNormally] is selected.

• If you select [Printer Normally], the information is printed to the printer specified as“printer to be used normally” for the PC. On each page, the date and time of printingand a sequential page number starting from 1 are added as the header and footer,respectively.

• If you select [File], the Window’s standard Save As dialog box appears. Specify the filename and saving destination and save the information. The default file name andextension is “cssoft.txt.”

• If you select [Clipboard], the information is copied to the clipboard. It is then possibleto paste the information into another application to edit the text.

4. If you selected [Printer Normally] or [Clipboard] for [Output Destination], click the [OK]button in the Create Report dialog box. Printing to the specified destination is started.

Blank Page

F2-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F2. Engineering Common Items>

F2. Engineering Common ItemsThis chapter describes the following items that are common to the engineeringfunction:

• Names

• Comments

• File types

• Structure of folders and files

• External files

■ NamesThe names are identifications of the system elements such as function blocks or windowscreated by the System Builders.

■ CommentsThe comments are descriptions attached to the function blocks or windows created by theSystem Builders.

■ File TypesThere are three types of files handled by the System Builders; builder files, SVA files, andworking files.

■ Structure of Folders and FilesEngineering data is structured for each project. Creating a project will create a projectfolder, the project-common folders and station folders will be created under that projectfolder. Folders and builder files are further created under these folders.

■ External FilesThe defined builder file can be saved into an external file in a format different from thebuilder file format. This operation is referred to as export.

CS 1000/CS 3000 can import the external files including SVA files exported from otherprojects, or other stations for reuse. This operation is referred to as import.


F2-2<F2.1 Names>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F2.1 NamesThe names are identifications of the system elements used for engineering andoperation monitoring purpose such as function blocks or windows created by theSystem Builders. This paragraph explains the following names.

• Window names

• Tag names

• P&ID tag names

• User-defined labels


F2-3

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F2.1 Names>

■ Window NamesEach window has a window name that is specific to the system. When a window name isentered into the System Message window call dialog box, the window can be called up.

In addition to the window names provided by the system, there are windows to which thenames can be defined by the user.

● Window Names Provided by the System

The table below indicates the format of the window names provided by the system.

Window type Window name Remarks

Operator Guide window .OG When calling up window, search conditions can be specified

Process Alarm window .AL When calling up window, search conditions can be specified

Process Report window .PR When calling up window, search conditions can be specified

Historical Message Report window .HR When calling up window, search conditions can be specified

System Status Overview window .SO -

System Alarm window .SA -

FCS Status Display window .SF -

HIS Setup window .SH -

Help dialog box .HWWhen calling up dialog box, search conditions can be specified

Image window .IM -

F020101E.EPS

● User-Definable Window Names

▼ Window Name, Help, Help Message Number

• Graphic Window, Trend WindowFor a user-definable window, such as a Graphic window or a Trend window, the usercan define the window name freely. Do not use duplicate window names in the sameproject.

A user-defined window name is a string with up to 16 alphanumeric characters (capitalletters only for the English alphabet), [ _ ] (underscore) and [-] (hyphen). However, a[ _ ] (underscore) and [-] (hyphen) may not be placed at the beginning of a user-defined window name.

The following is an example of a user-defined window name.

GRREACTORA

• Help DialogThere are system-fixed help dialog and user-definable help dialog for defining helpmessage.The user-definable help dialog messages are treated as dialog names that may bespecified as HW0001 to HW9999.


F2-4<F2.1 Names>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Tag Names ¡ £The control station function blocks and control elements are assigned with tag names foridentification. HIS uses the tag names to identify operation and monitoring targets such ascalling up a function block. The tag names are also used in sequence tables and arithmeticexpressions to represent the corresponding function blocks.

One tag name only represents one function block. Do not define duplicate tag names inone project.

There are two types of tag names: user-defined tag names and system tag names.

● User-Defined Tag Names

▼ Tag Name

Tag names may be defined by users.

A user defined tag name is a string up to 16 alphanumeric characters (capital letters onlyfor the English alphabet), [ _ ] (underscore) and [-] (hyphen). However, a [ _ ] (underscore)and [-] (hyphen) may not be placed at the beginning of a tag name.

Here is an example of a tag name:

Example: FIC1000


F2-5

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F2.1 Names>

● System Tag Names ¡ £

These are name formats provided by the system. The user can call up an element to HISusing the following formats.

Table Formats of System Tag Name ¡ £

Type Format Example

Common switch %SWxxxxSddaa %SW311S0102

Annunciator Message %ANxxxxSddaa01 %AN23S010301

Process I/O%Z01usccSddaa (*1) %ZnnusccSddaa (*2) %Z0111201S0101

Communication I/O %WBxxxxbbSddaa %WB101201S0102

Function Block %BLxxxxSddaa01 %BL0125S010201

F020102E.EPS

Global switch %GSyyyaaSddmm %GS01201S0101

Note: SW, AN, Z, WB, BL: Type code indicating an element typexxxx: Element number (serial)S: Identifier indicating the domain number and the station number (fixed)dd: Domain Number (01 to 16)aa: Station numberyyy: Element number (001 to 256)mm: Station number (01 to 64)nn: Node number (01 to 08)u: Unit number (1 to 5)s: Slot number (1 to 4)cc: Terminal number (01 to 32)bb: Bit number (01 to 16)*1: ¡ £ Z01usccSddaa format is for PFCS and SFCS only.*2: £ ZnnusccSddaa format is for LFCS2/LFCS only.

■ P&ID Tag Names▼ P&ID Tag Name

P&ID tag names are the names used on the Process Instrumentation Diagrams. In CS1000, they are used as comment texts to remark their relationship with the tags on theProcess Instrumentation Diagrams. P&ID tag names are not displayed in the window.

■ User-Defined Labels▼ Label

User-defined labels are names that can be defined for the analog process I/O and formessages. These labels can be used when defining the process I/O connections, thefunction block connections, sequence tables and arithmetic expressions. User-definedlabel may be defined up to 16 alphanumeric characters. The format for a user-defined labelis given as below.

%%Mn ...n

%%: Fixed in the systemM: Alphabet character in capitaln ...n: Alphanumeric characters (A-Z, a-z, 0 to 9) up to 13 characters.


F2-6<F2.2 Comment>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F2.2 CommentThe comments are descriptions attached to the function blocks, windows, andbuilder files. It is helpful by using the attached comments to identify the functionblocks and windows during operation and monitoring.

There are three types of comments: tag comment, window comment and file com-ment.

The defined comment is displayed in the comment column together with the file onSystem View. Moreover, the defined comment may be printed out by the self-docu-mentation function.

■ Tag Comment▼ Tag Comment

An explanatory description for each function block can be defined with up to 24 single-bytecharacters or 12 double-byte characters.

The tag comment may be defined on the Control Drawing Builder and Function BlockOverview Builder or the Function Block Detail Builder. The defined tag comment is dis-played in the window along with the tag name.

■ Window Comment▼ Window Comment, Help Message Comment

An explanatory description for each user-defined window can be defined with up to 24single-byte characters or 12 double-byte characters.

The window comment is defined on the property sheet for the window.

The comment may be added to the following types of user-defined windows:

• Graphic windows

• Help dialog box


F2-7

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F2.2 Comment>

■ File Comment▼ Drawing Comment, Trend Block Comment

The comment may be added to the user-defined builder files.

The file comment may be entered on the builder menu or the files’ properties sheet.

The number of characters limited to the comment added to the builder files are as follows.

• Control drawingUp to 80 alphanumeric characters or 40 double-byte characters.

• Function block listUp to 80 alphanumeric characters or 40 double-byte characters.

• SEBOL user functionUp to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters.

• SFC sequenceUp to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters.

• Unit procedureUp to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters.

• IOM fileUp to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters.

• Common blockUp to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters.

• Window shortcutUp to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters.

• Trend acquisition pen assignmentUp to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters.

• Trend display pen assignmentUp to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters.

• Help windowUp to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters.

• Control drawing status display fileFile comments added to the control drawing builder are automatically added to thecontrol drawing status display file.

• Logic chart status display fileTag comments added to the logic chart block are automatically added to the logicchart status display file as file comments.


F2-8<F2.3 File Types>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F2.3 File TypesThere are three types of files that may be handled by the builders for building theOperation and Monitoring Functions and the FCS Control Functions.

• Builder file (file extension .edf)

• SVA file (file extension .sva)

• Working file (file extension .wkf)

■ Builder FileThe master files handled by the builder are referred to as builder files. The extension forbuilder file is .edf.

■ SVA FileWhen the defined contents on the builder have errors, the builder file can not be saved withthe Save command or downloaded. To save a file with an error, use the Save As commandon the file menu. The file’s extension should be .sva.

The file saved with the extension .sva may be imported on the builder for editing.

■ Working FileDuring editing of a builder file, the file may be saved as a working file. The file extension ofworking file is .wkf. A working file can be created even if an error exists in the contentsdefined on the builder.

The working files may be saved when working on the following builders.

• State Transition Matrix Builder

• FCS Constants Builder

• Global Switch Builder

• Common Switch Builder

• Annunciator Builder

• Signal Event Builder

• Operator Guide Builder

• Printout Message Builder

• FCS Sequence Library Builder (SEBOL User Function)

• FCS Sequence Library Builder (SFC Sequence)

• FCS Sequence Library Builder (Unit Procedure)

• Control Drawing Builder

• Function Block Overview Builder

• Function Block Detail Builder

• Graphic Builder (except for status display)

• Taglist Builder (Tag Name)


F2-9

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F2.3 File Types>

● Creating a Working File

When the contents of a builder is saved as a working file, the working file will be created inthe same directory as the builder file.

When the working file is created, the original file is intact as the builder file.

If a working file for the same object already exists, saving the contents of the working filewill overwrite the original contents without any warning message for confirmation.

F020301E.EPS

Create a working fileon the builder.

Builder file Working file

The editing resultwill not be saved

into the builder file.

A working file iscreatedfor storingthe editing result.

Figure Process Flow when Creating a Working File



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Deleting a Working File

If downloading or saving the currently edited builder file is completed successfully, theworking file will be removed from the same directory of the builder file.

Note that when off-line downloading the builder files to an FCS in System View, the workingfile will not be downloaded or removed.

F020302E.EPS

Click [Save] on [File] menuon the builder.

Builder file Working file

The defined contents will besaved into the builder file.

The working filewill be removed.

Figure Process Flow when Saving a Builder File


F2-11

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F2.3 File Types>

● Editing a Working File

If both a working file and a builder file exist for the same builder object, when the builderstarts, a dialog box will be displayed asking the user to select one of these files for editing.

When selecting a working file, the working file will be automatically imported as the builderfile for editing. The is automatically performed and there is no further indication to show thatthe working file is being edited.

F020303E.EPS

Start the builder.

Edit the file selectedin the dialog box.

Working file

Builder file

Select a working file ora builder file inthe dialog box.

Figure Process Flow when Starting the Builder

● Printing a Working File

The self-documentation function can only print out the builder files. If it is required to printout the working files, the working files may be printed out individually from the builder ofeach editing object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Working Files for Function BlocksTo define function blocks on the function block builder, the definition may be performed onFunction Block Overview Builder, Function Block Detail Builder and Control DrawingBuilder. This section describes how these builders handle the function block working files.

● Creating a Working File on Function Block Overview Builder or ControlDrawing Builder

When creating working files on Function Block Overview Builder or Control DrawingBuilder, the working files for a drawing file (DRnnnn.wkf) and the function blocks beingchanged (tag name.wkf) will be created.

F020304E.EPS

Create working fileson the Function Block

Overview Builder orthe Control Drawing Builder.

DRnnnn.edf DRnnnn.wkf

TagA.edf TagA.wkf

TagB.edf TagB.wkf

•••

•••

The editing result will notbe saved into the builder file.

Create a working fileto save the editing result.

Figure Illustration of Creating Working Files on Function Block Overview Builder or ControlDrawing Builder


F2-13

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F2.3 File Types>

● Saving the Builder Files on Function Block Overview Builder or ControlDrawing Builder with the Save Function

When saving the builder file on Function Block Overview Builder or Control DrawingBuilder, the working files for the drawing file (DRnnnn.wkf) and the function blocks beingchanged (tag name.wkf) will be removed automatically.

F020305E.EPS

Save working files onthe Function Block Overview

Builder or the ControlDrawing Builder

by clicking [Save].


TagA.edf TagA.wkf

TagB.edf TagB.wkf

•••

•••

The editing result will be savedinto the builder file.

The working fileswill be removed.

Figure Illustration of Removing the Working Files on Function Block Overview Builder or ControlDrawing Builder



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Creating Working Files on Function Block Detail Builder

When creating working files on Function Block Detail Builder, the contents of the functionblocks being currently edited will be saved into working files (tag name.wkf).

This operation does not create a working file (DRnnnn.wkf) for the drawing’s builder file(DRnnnn.edf). Even if a working file for the drawing already exists, this operation does notchange the file.

F020306E.EPS

Create working fileson the Function Block

Detail Builder.


TagA.edf TagA.wkf

The editing result will notbe saved into the builder file.

Create a working fileto save the editing result.

The working file forthe drawing willnot be created.

Figure Illustration of Creating a Working File on Function Block Detail Builder


F2-15

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F2.3 File Types>

● Saving the Builder Files on Function Block Detail Builder

When saving the builder file on Function Block Detail Builder, the working files for anfunction blocks (tag name.wkf) will be removed automatically.

The drawing file (DRnnnn.edf) and the working file (DRnnnn.wkf) for the drawing will not beremoved.

F020307E.EPS

Save the builder fileon the Function Block

Detail Builderby clicking [Save].


TagA.edf TagA.wkf

The editing result willbe saved into the builder file.

Only the working file forthe function block will be removed.

Figure Illustration of Removing the Working File for a Function Block on Function Block DetailBuilder



IM 33S01B30-01E

● When Starting Control Drawing Builder

When starting Control Drawing Builder from System View, a dialog box will be displayed forselecting a working file (.wkf) or a builder file (.edf) if both types of files exist for the samedrawing. The editing may be performed on the selected files for function blocks.

DR0001.edf

DR0001.wkf

TagA.edf

TagA.wkf

TagB.edf

TagB.wkf

The Control Drawing Builder is started.

F020308E.EPS

Start the Control Drawing Builder from System View.

•••

Select a builder file or a working file in the dialog box.

Figure Illustration of Starting the Control Drawing Builder


F2-17

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F2.3 File Types>

● When Starting the Function Block Detail Builder from System View

When starting the Function Block Detail Builder from System View, a dialog box will bedisplayed for selecting a working file (.wkf) or a builder file (.edf) if both types of files exist.The editing may be performed on the selected files for function blocks.

F020309E.EPS

Start the Function BlockDetail Builder from

System View.

The Function Block DetailBuilder is started.

TagA.wkf

TagA.edf

DR0002.edf

Select a builder file ora working file inthe dialog box.

Figure Illustration of Starting the Function Block Detail Builder

IMPORTANT

The working files (.wkf) for function block to be edited on the Function Block Detail Builderstarted from System View must be those for the function blocks already defined in thedrawing’s builder file (DRnnnn.edf), and the tag name and the model of the function blockmust be the same.

If the tag name or the function block’s model does not correspond to those in the drawing’sbuilder file, the working file (.wkf) cannot be imported on the Function Block Detail Builder.In the case like this, it must be started from the Control Drawing Builder.

The discrepancies of the tag name or function block model name between the working fileand builder file may be caused by creating a working file (.wkf) after changing the model orthe tag name of the function block without saving the change into the builder file.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● When Starting Function Block Detail Builder from the Control DrawingBuilder

When starting the Function Block Detail Builder from the Control Drawing Builder, thefunction block files to be edited on the Function Block Detail Builder will be the files beingedited on the Control Drawing Builder.

TagA.edf

TagB.wkf

The Control Drawing Builder is started.

F020310E.EPS

The Function Block Detail Builder is started.

TagA.edf and TagB.wkfare selected

as editing objects.

DR0001.edf

DR0001.wkf

TagA.wkf

TagB.edf

Select a builder file or a working file

in the dialog box.

Start the Control Drawing Builder

from System View.

The Function Block Detail Builder is started from the control drawing builder.

Figure Editing Objects on the Function Block Detail Builder Started from Control DrawingBuilder


F2-19

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F2.3 File Types>

IMPORTANT

On the Function Block Detail Builder started from the Control Drawing Builder, the workingfile can not be created.

● Handling of the Tuning Parameters when Importing the Working File

When saving the working file (.wkf) imported into the builder file (.edf), for the functionblocks for which both tag name and model name correspond in both types of files, thelatest tuning parameters saved on the builder file will be applied. For the function blocks forwhich only a tag name correspond in both types of files, only the parameters available forthe function blocks are applied.

● Online Download

If a working file is imported as the builder file, only the changed part of the function blockswill be downloaded online.

■ Use of SVA Files and Working FilesSVA files (.sva) and working files (.wkf) may be used in the following situations.

● SVA Files

• When Graphic Builder is started alone.

• When saving a working file on the builders that do not support working file.

• When passing the engineering data among users or among projects.

● Working Files

A working file should be used only to save builder contents currently edited. For the pur-pose of passing data to other users or other projects, an SVA file should be used instead ofa working file.


<F2.4 Structure of Folders and Files>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F2-20

F2.4 Structure of Folders and FilesThis chapter explains the structure of folders and files as well as the method ofengineering of the folders and files.

■ Location of Project ¡ £Engineering data are stored in the unit of project. When creating a new project on SystemView, a drive name and a folder name should be designated for the project. The defaultlocation of the project folder is shown as follows.

• C:\Cs1000\eng\BKProject\ (*1)

• C:\Cs3000\eng\BKProject\ (*2)

*1: ¡ The default location in CS 1000 system.*2: £ The default location in CS 3000 system.

On System View, the files and subfolders under the project folder can be displayed.

■ Structure of Project Folder ¡ £Structure of a project folder is shown in the following figure.

Project Name

COMMON

BATCH

FCS{dd} {nn}

HIS{dd} {nn}

BCVV{dd} {nn}

BCVL{dd} {nn}

ACG{dd} {nn}

STN{dd} {nn}

BCVH{dd} {nn}

F020401E.EPS

Legend:

dd: Domain Numbernn: Station Number

Folder

Builder File

(*1)

(*1)

Figure Structure of Project Folder ¡ £

*1: £ Available only in CS 3000.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Structure of COMMON Folder

F020402E.EPS

StnConf.edf

COMMON

OpeMarkDef.edf

UserSec.edf

Legend:

Folder

Builder File

Station Configuration

CustomPlant.edf Plant Hierarchy

Operation Mark

Security

InstLabel.edf

BlkStsLabel.edf

SysStsLabel.edf

Switch Position Label

EngUnit.edf Engineering Unit Symbol

Block Status Character String

System Fixed Status Character String

AlmTbl.edf

StsChange.edf

AlmPri.edf

Alarm Processing Table

AlmStsLabel.edf Alarm Status Character String

Status Change Command Character String

Matrix {m}.edf State Transition Matrix

MATRIX

Alarm Priority

m : State Transition Matrix

Figure Structure of COMMON Folder

● Structure of BATCH Folder

F020403E.EPS

BATCH

ProductWnd.edf

RG {nn}

RDT {nnnn}.edf

COMMON_BLOCK

Legend:

nnnn : Common Block Numbernn : Recipe Group Number

Folder

Builder File

Product Control

TrainName.edf Train

Common Block

Process Management ConfigurationBatchCnf.edf

Unit Common BlockUnitCommonBlk.edf

Figure Structure of BATCH Folder

F2-21



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Structure of FCS Folder : PFCS ¡

F020404E.EPS

FCS {dd} {nn}

StnDef.edf FCS Constants

CONFIGURATION

SwitchDef.edf

SWITCH

GSwitchDef.edf

{u} - {s}"IOM Name".edf

CommDataWW.edf

IOM

SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION

SEQ_LIBRARY

"User Function Name".edf

Legend:

dd: Domain Numbernn: Station Numberu: Unit Numbers: Slot Numbermmmm: Control Drawing Number

Folder

Builder File

SEBOL User Function

SFC_SEQUENCE

"Seguence Name".edf SFC Seguence

UNIT_PROCEDURE

"Seguence Name".edf UNIT Procedure

IOM

Common Switch

Global Switch

WBTagDef.edf Communication I/O Tag

Communication I/O

Equipment.edf Equipment

1

Figure Structure of FCS Folder : PFCS (1/2) ¡

F2-22



IM 33S01B30-01E

F020416E.EPS

DR {mmmm}.dsp

LOGICCHART

DISPLAY

"Tag Name".dsp

DR {mmmm}.edf

DR {mmmm}

FUNCTION_BLOCK

"Tag Name".edf

OG {nn} 01.edf

SD {nn} 01.edf

AN {nn} 01.edf

EV {nn} 01.edf

MESSAGE

Printout Message

Operator Guide

Signal Event

Function Block Overview or Control Drawing

Status Display

Function Block Detail

Logic Chart Status Display

Annunciator

Legend:


Folder

Builder File

1

Figure Structure of FCS Folder : PFCS (2/2) ¡

F2-23



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Structure of FCS Folder : SFCS £

F020405E.EPS

FCS {dd} {nn}


CONFIGURATION

SwitchDef.edf

SWITCH

WBTagDef.edf

{u} - {s}"IOM Name".edf

GSwitchDef.edf

IOM

UNIT_PROCEDURE

SEQ_LIBRARY

"Sequence Name".edf Unit Procedure

SFC_SEQUENCE

"Sequence Name".edf SFC Sequence

SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION

"User Function Name".edf SEBOL User Function

IOM

Common Switch(*1)

Communication I/O Tag

Global Switch


2

Legend:


Folder

Builder File


Figure Structure of FCS Folder : SFCS (1/2) £

*1: As for common switch files, SwitchDef2 to SwitchDef4 are available besides SwitchDef, each file is for defining 1000common switches. For example, common switches %SW0001 to %SW1000 are defined in file SwitchDef, while thecommon switches %SW1001 to %SW2000 are defined in file SwitchDef2.

F2-24



IM 33S01B30-01E

F020406E.EPS

DR {mmmm}.dsp

LOGICCHART

DISPLAY

"Tag Name".dsp

DR {mmmm}.edf

DR {mmmm}

FUNCTION_BLOCK

"Tag Name".edf

OG {nn} 01.edf

SD {nn} 01.edf

AN {nn} 01.edf

EV {nn} 01.edf

MESSAGE

Printout Message

Operator Guide

Signal Event


Status Display



Annunciator

2

Legend:


Folder

Builder File

Figure Structure of FCS Folder : SFCS (2/2) £

F2-25



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Structure of FCS Folder : LFCS2/LFCS £

F020407E.EPS

FCS {dd} {nn}


CONFIGURATION

SwitchDef.edf

SWITCH

WBTagDef.edf

NODE {n}

GSwitchDef.edf

IOM

UNIT_PROCEDURE

SEQ_LIBRARY


SFC_SEQUENCE


SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION


Common Switch(*1)


Global Switch


{u} - {s}"IOM Name".edf IOM

3

Legend:

dd: Domain Numbernn: Station Numbern: Node Numberu: Unit Numbers: Slot Numbermmmm: Control Drawing Number

Folder

Builder File


Figure Structure of FCS Folder : LFCS2/LFCS (1/2) £

*1: As for common switch files, SwitchDef2 to SwitchDef 4 are available besides SwitchDef, each file is for defining 1000common switches. For example, common switches %SW0001 to %SW1000 are defined in file SwitchDef, while thecommon switches %SW1001 to %SW2000 are defined in file SwitchDef2.

F2-26



IM 33S01B30-01E

F020408E.EPS

DR {mmmm}.dsp

LOGICCHART

DISPLAY

"Tag Name".dsp

DR {mmmm}.edf

DR {mmmm}

FUNCTION_BLOCK

"Tag Name".edf

OG {nn} 01.edf

SD {nn} 01.edf

AN {nn} 01.edf

EV {nn} 01.edf

MESSAGE

Printout Message

Operator Guide

Signal Event


Status Display



Annunciator

3

Legend:


Folder

Builder File

Figure Structure of FCS Folder : LFCS2/LFCS (2/2) £

F2-27



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Structure of FCS Folder : KFCS2/KFCS £

F020412E.EPS

FCS {dd} {nn}


CONFIGURATION

SwitchDef.edf

SWITCH

WBTagDef.edf

{s}"IOM Name".edf

GSwitchDef.edf

IOM

UNIT_PROCEDURE

SEQ_LIBRARY


SFC_SEQUENCE


SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION


IOM

Common Switch


Global Switch


4

Legend:


Folder

Builder File


{s}"IOM Name"

{s}"IOM Name"-{p}".edf ALF111

NODE {n}

Figure Structure of FCS Folder : KFCS2/KFCS (1/2) £

*1: As for common switch files, SwitchDef2 to SwitchDef4 are available besides SwitchDef, each file is for defining 1000common switches. For example, common switches %SW0001 to %SW1000 are defined in the file SwitchDef, while thecommon switches %SW1001 to %SW2000 are defined in file SwitchDef2.

F2-28



IM 33S01B30-01E

F020413E.EPS

DR {mmmm}.dsp

LOGICCHART

DISPLAY

"Tag Name".dsp

DR {mmmm}.edf

DR {mmmm}

FUNCTION_BLOCK

"Tag Name".edf

OG {nn} 01.edf

SD {nn} 01.edf

AN {nn} 01.edf

EV {nn} 01.edf

MESSAGE

Printout Message

Operator Guide

Signal Event


Status Display



Annunciator

4

Legend:


Folder

Builder File

Figure Structure of FCS Folder : KFCS2/KFCS (2/2) £

F2-29



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Structure of APCS Folder £

F020414E.EPS

FCS {dd} {nn}


CONFIGURATION

SwitchDef.edf

SWITCH

WBTagDef.edf

GSwitchDef.edf

MESSAGE

UNIT_PROCEDURE

SEQ_LIBRARY


SFC_SEQUENCE


SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION


Common Switch(*1)


Global Switch


SD {nn} 01.edf Printout Message

5

Legend:

dd: Domain Numbernn: Station Numbern: Node Numberu: Unit Numbers: Slot Numbermmmm: Control Drawing Number

Folder

Builder File


EV {nn} 01.edf

OG {nn} 01.edf

Signal Event

Operator Guide

AN {nn} 01.edf Annunciator

Figure Structure of APCS Folder (1/2) £

*1: As for common switch files, SwitchDef2 to SwitchDef4 are available besides SwitchDef, each file is for defining 1000common switches. For example, common switches %SW0001 to %SW1000 are defined in the file SwitchDef, while thecommon switches %SW1001 to %SW2000 are defined in file SwitchDef2.

F2-30



IM 33S01B30-01E

F020415E.EPS

DR {mmmm}.dsp

LOGICCHART

DISPLAY

"Tag Name".dsp

DR {mmmm}.edf

DR {mmmm}

FUNCTION_BLOCK

"Tag Name".edf


Status Display



5

Legend:


Folder

Builder File

APPLICATION

Package Name

SIM

FCS-C Task

USER CUSTOM

Figure Structure of APCS Folder (2/2) £

F2-31



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Structure of HIS Folder ¡

F020409E.EPS

HIS {dd} {nn}

TG0101

OV0001

CG0001

OpeconDef.edf HIS Constants

Scheduler

Sequence Message Request Function

Trend Acquisition Pen Assignment

Function Key Assignment

Graphic

Window Name or Window hierarchiescan be defined freely

Trend Display Pen Assignment

Graphic

Graphic

Help

Scheduler.edf

MsgReqDef.edf

Funckey.edf

TR {rrrr}.edf

Funckey.edf

GR0001

GR0001.edf

OV0001.edf

CG0001.edf

HW {hhhh}.edf

TG0101.edf

WINDOW

CONFIGURATION

HELP

Legend:

dd: Domain Numbernn: Station Numberrrrr: Trend Block Numberhhhh: Help Number

Folder

Builder File

Figure Structure of HIS Folder ¡

F2-32



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Structure of HIS Folder £

F020410E.EPS

TG0101

OV0001

CG0001

Scheduler.edf Scheduler

HIS Constants

Sequence Message Request Function

Trend Acquisition Pen Assignment

Function Key Assignment

Panl Set

Graphic

Window Name or Window hierarchiescan be defined freely

Trend Display Pen Assignment

Graphic (Overview)

Graphic(Control Group)

Help

MsgReqDef.edf

TR {rrrr}.edf

Funckey.edf

Funckey.edf

PanelSet.edf

GR0001

GR0001.edf

OV0001.edf

CG0001.edf

HW {hhhh}.edf

TG0101.edf

WINDOW

HELP

HIS {dd} {nn}

OpeconDef.edf

CONFIGURATION

Legend:

dd: Domain Numbernn: Station Numberrrrr: Trend Block Numberhhhh: Help Number

Folder

Builder File

Figure Structure of HIS Folder £

F2-33



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Structure of STN Folder

An example of the folder holding the tag lists of other type stations is structured as follows.When the tag list does not exist in the folder, only the STN folder will be displayed.

F020411E.EPS

STN{dd} {nn}

OGDATA.edf

TAGLIST

TFDATA.edf

SMDATA.edf

Tag-List Generation (Operation Guide Message)

Tag-List Generation (Tag Name)

Tag-List Generation (Sequence Message)

Legend:

dd: Domain Numbernn: Station Number

Folder

Builder File

PRDATA.edf Tag-List Generation (Printout Message)

Figure An example of Structure of STN Folder

TIP

The folder structure and builder file structure of other stations varies with types of stations.

F2-34


<F2.5 Utilization of External Files>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F2.5 Utilization of External FilesThis chapter explains how to save the builder files with other names for export. Andalso explains how to import the builder files created in other projects or other stationfolders.

IMPORTANT

The text files exported from builders and the exported text files ready for importing to thebuilders should not be edited. The text files created by users should not be imported.

F2-35



IM 33S01B30-01E

F2.5.1 ExportThe defined builder file can be saved into different types of files. This operation isreferred to as Export. The types of files can be exported are shown as follows,however, it varies with the types of builders.

• CSV file

• Text file

■ Procedure for Export OperationThe operation procedure of Export is shown as follows.

1. Activate the builder, then choose [External File] - [Export..] on [File] menu, a dialogbox will appear.

31/2 Floppy (A:)

(C:)

(D:)

(E:)

F020510E.EPS

Export

My ComputerSave in :

File name :

Cancel

Save

Text File (*.txt)Save as type :

Figure Export Dialog Box

2. Specify the path, name of the file and the type of file.

3. Then click [Save] button, the file will be exported.

F2-36



IM 33S01B30-01E

F2.5.2 ImportThe contents of other CS 1000/CS 3000 projects and the builder files created in otherCS 1000/CS 3000 projects can be duplicated and used for the current project. Thisoperation is referred to as Import.

The types of files may be imported are shown as follows, however, the types of filesvary with types of builders.

• Builder files

• SVA files

• CSV files

• Text files

• Status display files

• Converted files

IMPORTANT

The files can be imported are the files exported from other CS 1000/CS 3000 projects orother stations.

The CENTUM CS control drawing and graphic source files can be imported on CS 1000/CS 3000 Control Drawing Builder and Graphic Builders.

SEE ALSO

For more information about importing various CENTUM CS source files, see the following chapters:

• For importing CENTUM CS source files on Control Drawing Builder;

F3.23, “Importing CS Source File”

• For importing CENTUM CS source files on Graphic Builder;

F12.16, “Importing CS Source Files”

F2-37



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Operation Procedure of ImportFollow the procedures below for the Import operation. When import the data of functionblocks or graphics, the files for import must be created.

IMPORTANT

Data can be imported in the unit of file, builder information can not be partially imported asa part of file.

1. Activate the builder, then choose [External File] - [Import..] on [File] menu of thebuilder. Import dialog box may pop-out.

31/2 Floppy (A:)

(C:)

(D:)

(E:)

F020501E.EPS

Import

My ComputerLook in :

File name :

Cancel

Open

Builder File (*.edf)File of type :

Figure Import Dialog Box

2. Then specify the name and type of file to be imported.

SEE ALSO

About the location of builder files, see the following:

F2.4, “Structure of Folders and Files”

3. After clicking the [Open] button, a dialog box appears to prompt for confirmation.

F020502E.EPS

FCS Constants Builder

Current information will be lost. Import ?

Yes No

Figure Confirmation Dialog Box

4. Click [Yes] may import the file.

5. Then download the file after. The internal builder file will be replaced only when down-loading is completed properly.

F2-38



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How the Tuning Parameters be Handled when ImportWhen import builder files (*.edf) SVA files (*.sva), CSV files (*.csv), Text files (*.txt) onFunction Block Overview Builder, Control Drawing Builder and Function Block DetailBuilder, the tuning parameters are handled as follows.

● When Importing a Builder File

The existing parameters will be replaced by the parameters imported together with thebuilder file.

● When Importing a SVA File

The existing parameters will be replaced by the parameters imported together with the SVAfile.

● When Importing a CSV File

The existing parameters will be lost and the built-in system default parameters will be used.

● When Importing a Text File

The existing parameters will be lost and the built-in system default parameters will be used.

F2-39



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Examples of Import Operation ¡ £Examples for importing function block, Control Drawing Builder and window hierarchy filesare indicated as follows.

● An Example of Function Block Import ¡ £

Builder files of function block made on System View are located in the following directories,the file name format is “TagName .edf.”

• C:\Cs1000\eng\BKProject\Mypjt\Fcs0101\FUNCTION_BLOCK\Dr0001\(*1)

• C:\Cs3000\eng\BKProject\Mypjt\Fcs0101\FUNCTION_BLOCK\Dr0001\(*2)


C:\Cs1000\eng\BKProject\: Directory for the project


Mypjt: Project name

Fcs0101: Control station name

Dr0001: Control drawing name

The path of the corresponding project, the project name, the control stations name and thecontrol drawing name should be specified. The procedure to import a function block is asfollows.

1. First, create a function block on Control Drawing Builder or Function Block OverviewBuilder, then activate the Function Block Detail Builder.

When the function block for import has already been created, then activate the Func-tion Block Detail Builder by designating its tag name.

2. Then choose [External File] - [Import..] on [File] menu of the Function Block DetailBuilder. An import dialog box will pop-out.

FIC100.edfLIC100.edfPI100.edfPI200.edfPI300.edfTI100.edf

TI200.edfTI300.edf

F020503E.EPS

Import

Dr0001Look in :

File name :

Cancel

Open

Builder File (*.edf)File of type :

FIC100

Figure Function Block Import

F2-40



IM 33S01B30-01E

3. Designate a function block file for import on the import dialog box. The path of thefunction block builder files for import is explained as follows.

In the case of

Path of project folder: C:\Cs1000\eng\BkProject\

Project Name: MYPJT

Station name: FCS0101

Drawing name: DR0001

Tag name: FIC100

Then the path of the builder file can be specified asC:\Cs1000\eng\BkProject\Mypjt\Fcs0101\FUNCTION_BLOCK\Dr0001\

Specify FIC100 for [File name] and specify builder file type (*.edf) for [files of types].

4. If the specified contents are correct, then click [Open] button, a dialog box will appearto prompt for confirmation.

F020504E.EPS

Function Block Detail Builder


Yes No


5. Click [Yes] to import the file. Thus the function block will be imported.

At the same time, the tuning parameters of the function block will be imported togetherwith the builder file of the function block.

6. Then download the imported function block to FCS. The internal builder file will bereplaced only when downloading is completed properly.

F2-41



IM 33S01B30-01E

● An Example of Control Drawing Import ¡ £

When importing builder files of control drawing, the information of function blocks andfunction blocks’ details in the control drawing will import together.

The builder files of control drawings made on System View are located in the followingdirectories, the file name format is “ControlDrawingName.edf.”

• C:\Cs1000\eng\BKProject\Mypjt\Fcs0101\FUNCTION_BLOCK\(*1)

• C:\Cs3000\eng\BKProject\Mypjt\Fcs0101\FUNCTION_BLOCK\(*2)




Mypjt: Project name

Fcs0101: Control station name

The path of the corresponding project, the project name and the control stations nameshould be specified. The procedure to import a control drawing is as follows.

1. First, activate the Control Drawing Builder or Function Block Overview Builder.

2. Then choose [External File] - [Import..] on [File] menu of the Control Drawing Builderor Function Block Overview Builder. An import dialog box will pop-out.

Dr0041Dr0042Dr0043Dr0044Dr0045Dr0046Dr0047Dr0048

Dr0049Dr0050DR0001.edfDR0002.edfDR0003.edfDR0004.edfDR0005.edfDR0006.edf

DR0007.edfDR0008.edfDR0009.edfDR0010.edfDR0011.edfDR0012.edfDR0013.edfDR0014.edf

DR0DR0DR0DR0DR0DR0DR0DR0

F020505E.EPS

Import

FUNCTION_BLOCKLook in :

File name :

Cancel

Open

Drawing File (*.edf)File of type :

DR0001

Figure Control Drawing Import

F2-42



IM 33S01B30-01E

3. Designate a function block file for import on the import dialog box. The path of thefunction block builder files for import is explained as follows.

In the case of

Path of project folder: C:\Cs1000\eng\BkProject\

Project Name: MYPJT

Station name: FCS0101

Drawing name: DR0001

Then the path of the builder file can be specified asC:\Cs1000\eng\BkProject\Mypjt\Fcs0101\FUNCTION_BLOCK\

Specify DR0001 for [File name] and specify builder file type (*.edf) for [files of types].

4. If the specified contents are correct, then click [Open] button, a dialog box will appearto prompt for confirmation.

F020506E.EPS

Control Drawing Builder


OK Cancel


5. Click [Yes] will import the file. Then the control drawing and the function blocks in thedrawing will be imported. At the same time, the tuning parameters of the functionblocks will be imported together with the builder file of the control drawing.

6. Then download the imported control drawing to FCS. The internal builder file will bereplaced only when downloading is completed properly.

F2-43



IM 33S01B30-01E

● An Example of Window Hierarchy Import

The information built in other projects, the window hierarchies of other HISs can be im-ported in the same manner of importing builder files. Before importing the information ofother projects or importing the window hierarchies of other HISs, the files for importing mustbe created i.e. exported the files from the corresponding projects or HISs first. Furthermore,the imported window hierarchy consists of the information on the structure of folders andfiles only, each individual builder file needs to be imported separately on each graphicbuilder. Procedure for importing window hierarchy is indicated as follows.

1. The file for import must be created first by exporting the information to the file from theprojects or HISs on System View. Select the window folder under the HIS folder onSystem View. Then, choose [External File] - [Export Window Hierarchy..] on [File]menu on System View, an [Save As] dialog box will pop-out.

The window hierarchy information will be exported into a CSV file. Specify the path forthe file then click [Save] button to save the file.

F020507E.EPS

Save As

TempSave in :

File name :

Cancel

Save

CSV Format File (*.csv)Save as type :

Figure SVA File Dialog Box

2. Select the window folder under the HIS folder on System View, then choose [ExternalFile] - [Import Window Hierarchy..] on [File] menu, a dialog box will appear to promptfor confirmation.

OK Cancel

F020508E.EPS

Current window hierarchy information will be lost. Import ?

BKESysView


F2-44



IM 33S01B30-01E

3. To import the window hierarchy file, click [Yes], a dialog box will appear for file selec-tion.

ABC.CSV

F020509E.EPS

Open

TempLook in :

File name :

Cancel

Open

CSV Format File (*.csv)File of type :

ABC

Figure File Open Dialog Box

4. Specified the path and the name of the file, the [Files of types] is CSV type.

5. If the specified contents are correct, then click [Open] button, the window hierarchy willbe imported.

6. After importing the window hierarchy, activate each Graphic Builder to import eachgraphic file.

After importing the graphic files, download all imported files to HIS. Then the graphicfiles and the window hierarchy file will be downloaded.

F2-45


Blank Page

<F3. Control Drawing Builder> F3-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3. Control Drawing BuilderThe Control Drawing Builder is used to configure the basic control functions of theFCS. With the Control Drawing Builder, operations such as registering functionblocks in the drawing file and determining the flow of data between function blockscan be performed graphically.

■ Overview of the Control Drawing BuilderWith the Control Drawing Builder, the basic control functions of the FCS can be configuredin the window by combining objects. When doing so, multiple drawing files can be openedat the same time to compare their contents, while each file can be edited and saved sepa-rately.

F030001E.EPS

ABCD

OUT

IN OUT

FIC0001

PVI

FIC0004

FIC0002

PID

Wiring

Text Function block symbol

Data link block symbol

Figure Configuring Basic Control Functions by Object Combination

There are four types of object; function block, data link block, wiring and text. The functionblock and data link block are not only referred as objects but also referred as block sym-bols.

● Function Block

The object that represents the function block is called function block symbol.

PID

OUTINFIC0001

F030002E.EPS

Terminal name

Block model

I/O connection terminal(Terminal area)

Tag nameSymbol shape

Block area

Terminal name area

Figure A Function Block Symbol


F3-2<F3. Control Drawing Builder>

IM 33S01B30-01E

The block symbols have the following properties.

• Symbol name

• Symbol shape

• Tag name entry area

• Block model entry area

• I/O connection terminals

• Block area

• Terminal area

• I/O connection information (some shapes of symbols do not have this property)

The basic definition items for function block symbols may be defined on the control drawingbuilder. The so-called basic definition means to modify the settings on the property sheet ofthe function block or Function Block Overview dialog box. A number of items of the basicdefinition may be displayed on the Control Drawing Builder. The displayed information isrerred as block comment. The displayed block comment varies with the shape of blocksymbol.

SEE ALSO

For details on the display of the block comment, see the following:

F3.11, “Displaying Block Comment for Block Symbols”

PID

IN

FLOW

FIC0001

F030003E.EPS

OUT

10.00-50.00 M3/H

Block comment

Figure Block Comment

● Data Link Block

As with the function block, the object that represents the data link block is called data linkblock symbol. The data link block is used when connecting a function block with anotherfunction block or connecting a process I/O or software I/O. Two types of data link blocks areavailable: I/O data link block and external data link block.

An I/O data link block can connect to a process I/O or software I/O. An external data linkblock can connect to a function block defined in other control drawings or a function blockdefined on other control stations.

F030004E.EPS

I/O data link block External data link block

Figure Data Link Block Symbols



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Wiring

This object represents the flow of data between function blocks or between a function blockand a data link block.

F030005E.EPS

IN OUT

IN OUTFIC0001

PID

FIC0002

PID

Wiring

Function block symbol

Figure A Wiring

● Text

This object represents an arbitrary character string.

F030006E.EPS

ABCD

IN OUTFIC0002

PID

Text

Function block symbol

Figure A Text

■ Window Configuration of the Control Drawing BuilderA drawing window and a toolbar are displayed in the Control Drawing Builder. The drawingwindow is displayed for each drawing file and consists of a function block overview paneand a drawing pane.

F030007E.EPS


DR0001

DR0002

Toolbar

Drawing pane

Function block overview pane

Figure Function Block Overview Pane and Drawing Pane



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Function Block Overview Pane

The function block overview pane displays a list of registered function blocks. A functionblock can be registered in a drawing file from the function block overview pane. The linenumber in the function block overview pane represents the control sequence in the controldrawing.

F030008E.EPS

001002003004005

Model NameTag Name Tag Comment

Line number

Tag name entry area

Model name entry area

Tag comment

Figure Function Block Overview Pane

It is possible to hide the function block overview pane display.

To show or hide the function block overview pane can be switched by clicking [FunctionBlock Overview] from the [View] menu.

SEE ALSO

For details on function block registration, see the following:

F3.3, “Registering Function Blocks”

● Drawing Pane

The drawing pane displays function blocks and data link blocks as block symbols. The flowof data between function blocks or between a function block and a data link block is dis-played as wiring.

During the process of configuring the basic control functions, function blocks can be registeredin a drawing file from the drawing pane, wiring can be drawn, and the properties for objects canbe set.

Also, whenever a function block registered in the drawing pane changes tag name or code,the change will be reflected in the tag name entry area or model name entry area of thefunction block overview pane.

F030009E.EPS

Wiring

Block symbol

Figure Drawing Pane



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Toolbar

Icon buttons displayed in the upper area of the window provide the same functions as themenu. This series of icon buttons is called toolbar.

F030010E.EPS

Figure Draw Toolbar

Whether the icon buttons comprising the toolbar are displayed or not displayed can be setin the dialog box that appears when [Toolbar] is selected from the [View] menu.

The four toolbars available are “Standard,” “Draw,” “Format” and “Edit object.”

The Standard toolbar consists of the following icon buttons:

• Open

• Create Working File

• Save

• Print

• Print preview

• Cut

• Copy

• Paste

• Undo

• Grid

• Zoom in

• Zoom out

• Area zoom

• Specify Zoom size

• Edit Function Block Detail

The Draw toolbar consists of the following icon buttons:

• Select mode

• Function block

• Wiring

• Text

The Format toolbar consists of the following icon buttons:

• Font type

• Font size

• Alignment (Left Justification, Center, Right Justification)

• Bold

• Italic

• Underline

• Text color

• Properties



IM 33S01B30-01E

The Edit Object toolbar consists of the following icon buttons:

• Align

• Distribute

• Group

• Ungroup

■ Flow of Configuring Basic Control Functions in the Control DrawingBuilder

When configuring basic control functions in the Control Drawing Builder, first change thedrawing file settings and the grid on the window. After these settings are completed, config-ure the basic control functions in the following steps.

1. Set the settings related to the control drawing windows on the Status Display Settingdialog box started from System View.

2. Register function blocks using the function block overview pane or the drawing paneand draw block symbols.

3. Set the properties sheet for the function blocks or Function Block Overview dialog box.

4. Draw data link blocks.

5. Draw wiring and decide on the flow of data between the function blocks.

6. Change the control sequence for the function blocks as necessary.

In addition to the above steps, create copies of the objects to efficiently set the definitioncontents or adjust the object arrangement as necessary, and proceed with configuration.

● Cautions when Registering Function Blocks

Function blocks should be arranged to the control drawing files with consideration of thecontrol flow. The function blocks connected to each other and the function blocks related tothe same control scheme should be put into the same drawing file. Especially, for thecontrol sequence with expanded sequence tables, the rule extension tables should be putin the same drawing of the original sequence tables.

SEE ALSO

For more information about rule extension sequence table, see the following:

D3.2, “Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E)”

■ Text File Import and ExportOn the Control Drawing Builder, the information of a control drawing can be exported into atext file, vice versa, a text file of control drawing can be imported. Thus the control drawingfiles created by external tools or exported from the builder can be used.

Nevertheless, the parameters of the function blocks can not be imported or exported.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ CS Source File ImportA CENTUM CS control drawing source file can be imported and reused as CS 1000 or CS3000 control drawing file.

Nevertheless, CENTUM CS can not use the text file exported from CS 1000 or CS 3000Control Drawing Builder.

■ Builders Used with the Control Drawing BuilderIn the process of configuring the basic control functions, use the Function Block DetailBuilder and Status Display Builder as necessary.

● Function Block Detail Builder

Details for the function blocks registered in the drawing file are set in the Control DrawingBuilder or the Function Block Detail Builder.

● Status Display Builder

When the drawing file is downloaded to the FCS after the basic control functions have beenconfigured with the Control Drawing Builder, a status display file is created. To add a pictureof the plant or a display area for process data to the Graphical window display created withthe Control Drawing Builder, start the status display builder and edit the status display file.

SEE ALSO

Foundation Fieldbus faceplate block engineering can be performed on Fieldbus Builder. For moreinformation about Fieldbus engineering, see the following:

D2, “Fieldbus Builder” of FOUNDATION fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E)


F3-8<F3.1 Changing Drawing File Settings>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.1 Changing Drawing File SettingsSettings for the drawing window size or the line type for wiring in the drawing panecan be changed for each drawing file in the property sheet.

■ Drawing File Properties▼ Setting the Drawing File

Select a drawing file in the System View, then select [Properties] from the [File] menu todisplay the property sheet.

The property sheet for the drawing file consists of the following two tabs:

• Outline tabThis tab displays file name, project name, builder revision, update date and time,creation date and time, and file comment.

• Attribute tabThis tab is used to change the window size and line type for wiring.

When the [OK] button is selected and the property sheet closed, the changes are saved inthe drawing file.

■ Attribute TabThe attributes of drawing files and the line types for wiring may be set on the attribute tab.

F030101E.EPS

Size

Small Large

800 536�

CancelOK

File Properties

Outline Attribute

Line style of wiring

Direct Direction Reverse Direction

Figure File Properties Sheet


<F3.1 Changing Drawing File Settings> F3-9

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Window Size

Use the slider to select a window size from the following five sizes:

• 1600�1072 (maximum size)

• 1280�858

• 1024�686 (default size)

• 800�536

• 640�429 (minimum size)

As long as the size is within the range between the maximum and minimum sizes, the spinbox can be used to set the vertical and horizontal dimensions in dots. Also, the size can beentered directly from the keyboard.

● Line Type for Wiring

Select the line type for forward wiring or backward wiring. Line type can be selected fromsolid line, dashed line, chain line, single-chain line and double-chain line.

Forward wiring means wiring that follows the control sequence in the control drawing.Backward wiring means wiring in the reverse direction from the control sequence.

F030102E.EPS

OUT SET

1 2

SET OUT

1 2

FIC001

PID

FIC002

PID

FIC001

PID

FIC002

PID

Forward wiring

Backward wiring

In the order that displays on the function block list pane. (invisible)

Figure Forward Wiring and Backward Wiring

SEE ALSO

For details on forward wiring and backward wiring, see the following:

F3.6, “Changing Function Block Control Sequence”


F3-10<F3.2 Changing Grid>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.2 Changing GridThe grid displayed in the drawing pane can be changed. The grid can be changed inthe Grid Option dialog box.

■ How to Change the Grid▼ Grid Option

A grid can be displayed in the drawing pane to facilitate the positioning of symbol blocksand wiring being drawn.

When [Grid Option] is selected from the [Draw] menu, the Grid Option dialog box for settingthe drawing pane grid is displayed.

CancelOK

F030201E.EPS

Grid Option

Point Grid

Grid Type

Grid Color

Gray 75

Display grid

4Grid Size

Figure Grid Option Dialog Box

The following items can be changed in the Grid Option dialog box.

• Grid type

• Grid color

• Show/hide grid

• Grid size

The new grid settings will be reflected when the [OK] button in the Grid Option dialog box isselected and the dialog box closed. These settings are saved when the Control DrawingBuilder is closed and become effective when the builder is started next time.


<F3.3 Registering Function Blocks> F3-11

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.3 Registering Function BlocksFunction blocks can be registered from either the function block overview pane orthe drawing pane. In the drawing pane, registering a function block and creating itsblock symbol are performed at the same time.

■ Registering from the Function Block Overview Pane▼ Registering from the Function Block Overview Pane

Register a function block from the function block overview pane, then create a block sym-bol in the drawing pane.

● Registering the Function Block

To register a function block from the function block overview pane, select the line number,then perform the following operation:

• Select [Insert] - [Function Block] from the pop-up menu displayed when the rightmouse button is clicked.

The Select Function Block dialog box appears, displaying a list of function blocks that canbe registered.

CancelOK

F030301E.EPS

Select Function Block

Regulatory Control BlockSequenceGeneral-Purpose CalculationsSFC BlocksOperationSwitch InstrumentsSequence Elements 1 Faceplate Blocks Logic Operation Blocks Sequence Elements 2 Batch DataSequence [M-Size]Sequence [L-Size]Unit SupervisionLink Block

Model Name

Symbol

Symbol List<< >>

PVI

Figure Select Function Block Dialog Box

Select the function block model name. Thus, the function block is registered.

There are other ways to register function blocks. For example, function blocks can beregistered by entering the tag name and model name directly in the tag name entry areaand model name entry area of the function block overview pane.


F3-12<F3.3 Registering Function Blocks>

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Creating a Block Symbol

Click a line number then drag the function block from the function block overview pane anddrop it inside the drawing pane. A block symbol is created where the line was dropped. Ifthe block is not defined with tag name, then enter the tag name in the tag name entry areafor this block symbol. The entered tag name will be reflected in the tag name entry area ofthe function block overview pane.

F030302E.EPS

001002003004005

Drag and drop

Tag name entry area

Select a function block

Figure Creating One Block Symbol

Multiple function blocks can be dragged and dropped. In this case, multiple block symbolswill be created where the blocks were dropped. The blocks created on the drawing havethe following layout.

F030303E.EPS

001002003004005 Drag and drop

Select multiple blocks while holding the [Shift] key

Figure Creating Multiple Block Symbols

SEE ALSO

For the details of block symbol shapes, see the following:

“■ Overview of Block Symbols ¡ £”



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Registering from the Drawing Pane▼ Registering from the Drawing Pane

In the drawing pane, registering a function block and creating its block symbol are per-formed at the same time.

With the drawing pane in active status, use one of the following methods.

• Select [Function Block] from the [Insert] menu.

• Click [Function Block] button in the toolbar.

F030304E.EPS

Figure Function Block Button

Then Select Function Block dialog box will appear.

CancelOK

F030305E.EPS

Select Function Block

Regulatory Control BlockSequenceGeneral-Purpose CalculationsSFC BlocksOperationSwitch InstrumentsSequence Elements 1 Faceplate Blocks Logic Operation Blocks Sequence Elements 2 Batch DataUnit SupervisionLink Block

Model Name

Symbol

Symbol List<< >>

PVI

Figure Select Function Block Dialog Box

Select the function block model name and block symbol shape. The block symbol shapecan also be selected in the Select Symbol dialog box displayed when [Symbol List] isclicked.

CancelOK

F030306E.EPS

Select Symbol

Symbol Name

Box-8x8Circle-8x8

Symbol

Figure Select Symbol Dialog Box



IM 33S01B30-01E

SEE ALSO

For the details of block symbol shapes, see the following:

“■ Overview of Block Symbols ¡ £”

After the Select Function Block dialog box is closed, click on any place in the drawing pane.The function block is registered and a block symbol is created at the same time. Enter thetag name in the tag name entry area for this block symbol. The entered tag name will bereflected in the tag name entry area of the function block overview pane.

After entering the tag name for the block symbol, continue by clicking on a different place inthe drawing pane. A block symbol of the same model name and same symbol shape as thepreviously created symbol will be created. Enter the tag name in the tag name entry areafor this block symbol. The entered tag name will be reflected in the tag name entry area ofthe function block overview pane.

■ Points to Note when Changing Block SymbolsThe shape of a block symbol that has been created in the drawing pane can be changed.When changing the symbol shape, take note of the following points:

• Properties of wiring connected to the block symbol (automatic wiring or manual wiring)are retained even when the shape of the block symbol is changed.

• Wiring whose connection destination is lost as a result of the reduced number ofterminals available with the new block symbol will change to auxiliary wiring.

SEE ALSO

For auxiliary wiring, see the following:

F3.12, “Drawing Wiring”

• When there are multiple block symbols of the same tag name in the drawing pane,changing the shape of one block symbol does not affected other symbols.

• Once the shape of the block symbol is changed, the change cannot be canceled(undo).

• When the shape of a block symbol with a connection information entry area ischanged, the connection information will be deleted. Even if the new block symbol hasa connection information entry area, the connection information stored prior to thechange is deleted.

• If the block model name is same, multiple block symbols can be selected to changetheir shapes at the same time.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Overview of Block Symbols ¡ £The system provides block symbols for different categories of the function block. Thissection describes the block symbols provided by the system.

● Block Symbols Used for Regulatory Control Blocks, Sequence ControlBlocks and Calculation Blocks

The figure below shows block symbols that can be used for regulatory control blocks,sequence control blocks and calculation blocks:

Box-8x8 Circle-8x8

Modelname

Tag name

Modelname

Tag name

F030307E.EPS

Figure Block Symbols Used for Regulatory Control Blocks, Sequence Control Blocks andCalculation Blocks

Box-8x8 and Circle-8x8 have the same functions. The only differences are the symbol shapeand the number of their I/O terminals.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Block Symbol Used for Representative Alarm Block

The figure below shows a block symbol that can be used only for Representative Alarm(ALM-R) block:

Q01˜16-8 block symbol may be used for ALM-R block only.

F030308E.EPS

Q01~16-8

Q01

Q02

Q03

Q04

Q05

Q06

Q07

Q08

Q09

Q10

Q11

Q12

Q13

Q14

Q15

Q16

Tag name

Model name

(Q01)

(Q02)

(Q03)

(Q04)

(Q05)

(Q06)

(Q07)

(Q08)

(Q09)

(Q10)

(Q11)

(Q12)

(Q13)

(Q14)

(Q15)

(Q16)

Connection information entry area

Figure Block Symbol Used Only for Representative Alarm Block

● Block Symbol Used for Sequence Control Blocks

The figure below shows a block symbol that can be used only for sequence control blocks:

Sheet-8x8 block symbol may be used for sequence control blocks such as ST16, ST16E,and LC64 models.

Modelname

Tag name

F030309E.EPS

Sheet-8x8

Figure Block Symbol Used for Sequence Control Blocks



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Block Symbols Used for Calculation Blocks ¡ £

The figure below shows block symbols that can be used only for calculation blocks:

ADD

AND (*1)

MUL

SRS1-S (*1)

AVEDIV

OR (*1)

TON (*1)OND (*1)

WOUT (*1)

(W.O)

S

R1

GT (*1)

SRS1-R (*1)

S1

R

SRS2-S (*1)

S

R2

SRS2-R (*1)

S2

R

OFFD (*1)

NOT (*1)

TOFF (*1)

�

GE (*1)

�

GQ (*1)

�

F030310E.EPS

*1: £ The block symbols may only be applied in CS 3000 system.

Figure Block Symbols Used for Calculation Blocks (1/5) ¡ £



IM 33S01B30-01E

SW=0˜3-8 block symbol may be used for calculation block model SW33.

SW=0˜9-8 block symbol may be used for calculation block model SW91.

F030311E.EPS

SW=0~9-8

Tag name Model name

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

SW=0~3-8

Tag name Model name

1

2

3

0

Figure Block Symbols Used for Calculation Blocks (2/5)



IM 33S01B30-01E

SW=0˜16-8 block symbol may be used for calculation block model DSW16 or DSW16C.

F030312E.EPS

SW=0~16-8

Tag name Model name

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

0




IM 33S01B30-01E

J01˜16-8 block symbol may be used for calculation block model BDSET-1L, BDSET-1C,BDA-L or BDA-C.

F030313E.EPS

J01~16-8

Connection informationentry area (J01)
















J01

J02

J03

J04

J05

J06

J07

J08

J09

J11

J12

J13

J14

J15

Tag name

Model name

J16

J10




IM 33S01B30-01E

J01˜J16-8 block symbol may be used for calculation block model BDSET-2L or BDSET-2C.

F030314E.EPS

J01~16-8

















J01

J02

J03

J04

J05

J06

J07

J08

J09

J11

J12

J13

J14

J15

Tag name

Model name

J16

J10




IM 33S01B30-01E

● Block Symbols Used for Data Link Blocks

Data link blocks include I/O data link blocks (PIO) and external data link blocks (AREAIN/AREAOUT). The figure below shows block symbols that can be used for I/O data linkblocks:

For I/O data link blocks, two kinds of symbols SIO-8 and PIO-8 are available. The onlydifferences between SIO-8 and PIO-8 are the size of the block symbol and the number ofthe I/O terminals.

F030315E.EPS

SIO-8 PIO-8

Tag name Tag name

Figure Block Symbols Used for I/O Data Link Blocks

The figure below shows block symbols that can be used only for external data link blocks:

For external data link blocks, AREAIN or AREAOUT, two kinds of symbols Right-8 and Left-8 are available. The only difference between Right-8 and Left-8 is the direction of blocksymbols.

F030316E.EPS

Left-8

Left-8

Tag name

Tag name

Right-8

Right-8

AREAIN

AREAOUT

Tag name

Tag name

Figure Block Symbols Used for External Data Link Blocks



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Usage of I/O Data Link Blocks (PIO) and External Data Link Blocks(AREAIN/AREAOUT)

When applying the data link blocks, the I/O Data Link Blocks (PIO) and External Data LinkBlocks (AREAIN/AREAOUT) are applied differently in accordance with the connectiontypes and I/O signal types, shown as follows.

Moreover, in the following table, the linked information can be carried out by the data linkblocks are indicated in the column of Linked Information.

Table Linked Information of the Applied Data Link Blocks

Connection I/O Data Link Block

Data Connection

Data Reference

Communication I/O (*2)

TagName/Label/TerminalNumber.DataItem

Linked Information (*1)

TagName/Label/TerminalNumber.DataItem

Software I/O

TagName/ElementNumber.DataItem

Function Block

Same Drawing TagName.DataItem

Different Drawing

Different FCS

TagName.DataItem

TagName.DataItem

Data Setting

Process I/O

Communication I/O (*2)

Process I/O PIO

PIO

PIO

PIO

AREAIN

AREAIN

AREAOUT

PIO

PIO

PIO

PIO

AREAIN

AREAIN

AREAOUT

AREAIN

AREAIN

AREAOUT

PIOAREAINAREAOUT

Software I/O




Function Block


Different Drawing TagName.DataItem

Terminal Connection Function Block


Different Drawing TagName.DataItem

Sequence Connection

Condition Test

Process I/OCommunication I/O (*2)Fieldbus I/OSoftware I/O

TagName/Label/TerminalNumber.DataItem.Condition

Status Manipulation

TagName/ElementNumber.DataItem.Manipulation

F030317E.EPS

TagName/Label/TerminalNumber.DataItemFieldbus I/O

TagName/Label/TerminalNumber.DataItemFieldbus I/O

Different FCS TagName.DataItem

Different FCS TagName.DataItem

*1: “A/B/..” indicates that the linked information can be described in different ways. However, a part of the information maynot be available due to the restrictions of element type or etc.

*2: I/O signals of subsystems via communication modules.

● Cautions when Using Data Link Blocks for Connection

• On the Function Block Detail Builder, when describing the logic name for connecting afunction block of a different FCS, a (>) is prefixed to the tag name. However, this prefixcan not be used for the AREAOUT data link block in control drawing.

• When drawing a connection between two terminals, the function blocks of source anddestination of the connection needs to be described as linked information.

If only one side information is available, the other side information is not, the terminalconnection can not be established. Furthermore, if both blocks are in the same controldrawing, and if only one side information for connection is available, the wiring for theconnection will be removed when the drawing is updated.


F3-24<F3.4 Changing Function Block Properties>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.4 Changing Function Block PropertiesProperties of the function block can be changed from the function block overviewpane or the drawing pane. Use the property sheet to change the properties.

■ Function Block Property Sheet▼ Function Block Properties

A property sheet is provided for a function block to set the basic definition items of thefunction block. The property sheet can be opened from the function block overview pane orthe drawing pane.

Perform any one of the following operations to open the property sheet from the functionblock overview pane:

• Choosing a function block, select [Properties] from the [Format] menu.

• Double-click on the number.

• Choosing a line number, click on the right mouse button and select [Properties] fromthe pop-up menu displayed.

Perform any one of the following operations to open the property sheet from the drawingpane:

• Choosing the block symbol for the function block, select [Properties] from the [Format]menu.

• Double-click on the block symbol for the function block.

• Choosing the block symbol for the function block, click on the right mouse button andselect [Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed.

The function block property sheet consists of the following two tabs:

• Common tabThis tab is used to change the position of the block symbol (X coordinate, Y coordi-nate).

• Function block tabThis tab is used to change function block properties such as tag name and tag com-ment.

• Fieldbus Tab

This is a tab for defining Foundation Fieldbus faceplate block properties such asDevice Tag, Block ID, Sub-Scheduler Number and so on.

SEE ALSO

For more information about Foundation Fieldbus faceplate engineering, see the following:

D1.2, “Creating a New FF Faceplate Block” of “FOUNDATION fieldbus Reference” (IM 33Y05P10-01E)


<F3.4 Changing Function Block Properties> F3-25

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Function Block TabThe definition items may be set on Function Block tab are shown as follows.

F030401E.EPS

ApplyCancelOK

Function Block

Common Function Block

Symbol

Symbol List<< >>

Tag Name

Model Name

Tag Comment

Scal Low limit value

High limit value

Engineering Unit Symbol

Input Signal Conversion

Totalizer Time Unit

Tag Mark

Alarm Level

Lvl

Upper Equipment Name

FI001

FLOW A

PVI

0.0

100

%

No

None

Medium

4

General

Cell 1

Model name change button

Figure Function Block Tab

● Tag Name

Enter a tag name using up to 16 alphanumeric characters.

The reserved device names of windows can not be used as tag names, such asA: to Z:, CON, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, PRN, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7,LPT8, LPT9, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9

IMPORTANT

If a tag name that is already registered in the FCS is duplicated and used in the ControlDrawing Builder, an error occurs when save the drawing file. Also, if a tag name that isalready used in the control drawing is entered, an error occurs when confirm the entry.

● Model Name

This indicates the model name of the function block. Select the Model name change buttonto change the model name. The Select Function Block dialog box will appear.

Changing the model name, the default values set by the system will replace the existingcontents defined for the function block.

SEE ALSO

For details on function block model names, see the following:

Part D, “Function Block Details”



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Tag Comment

Enter a comment for the tag using up to 24 single-byte alphanumeric characters or 12double-byte characters.

SEE ALSO

For details on tag commen, see the following:

F2.2, “Comment”

● Scale Low Limit Value

Enter the low limit value for the process variable of engineering unit data as a value consist-ing of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point.

For example, if the range of the process variable is between -20.0 and 120.0 �C, enter“-20.0.”

● Scale High Limit Value

Enter the high limit value for the process variable as a value consisting of 7 digits or lessincluding the sign and decimal point.

For example, if the range of the process variable is between -20.0 and 120.0 �C, enter“120.0.”



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Engineering Unit Symbol

Designate an engineering unit for the process variable.

When automatically registering engineering unit is enabled, the engineering unit for thefunction block can be selected from the combo box. If the desired unit can not be found inthe box, a new user-defined engineering unit can be typed in directly. When saving thecontrol drawing, the entered new engineering unit will be automatically registered in the listof engineering unit file, which is common for the whole project. When type in the unit, up to6 single-byte character or 3 double-byte characters can be used.

However, the following characters can not be used in the string. Moreover, the spacecharacter at the end of string will be ignored.

• (,) comma

• (“) double quotation

If the automatically registering engineering unit is not enabled, the engineering unit canonly be entered by selecting from the combo box. The main engineering units for selectionare as follows:

• %

• S

• MIN

• HR

• D

• DEGC

SEE ALSO

• For details on the engineering unit of the process variables, see the following:

D1.1.2, “I/O Data Handled by the Regulatory Control Blocks”

• For more information about registering engineering units, see the following:

“■ Detailed Setting of Project” in F1.2, “Creating a New Project”



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Input Signal Conversion

Specify the method by which to convert input signals. The input signal conversion methodcan be selected from the combo box, or can be entered directly using the keyboard. Thedefinition contents are shown below:

• No

• Square Root

• Pulse Train Input

• 2-position Status Input

• 3-position Status Input

• Code Input

• Communication Input

• Control Priority Type Pulse Train Input

• Exact Totalization Pulse Train Input

SEE ALSO

For details on input signal conversion, see the following:

C3.1, “Input Signal Conversion”

● Totalizer Time Unit

Specify the unit for the totalizer time. The definition contents are shown below:

• None

• Second

• Minute

• Hour

• Day

SEE ALSO

For details on totalizer time unit, see the following:

C3.3, “Integration”



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Types of Tag Marks

Specify the priority level for the tag mark and whether or not an acknowledgment operation isperformed at the time of status change. The tag mark type can be selected from the combobox, or it can be entered directly using the keyboard. The contents are shown below:

• Important with Ack.

• General

• Aux.1

• Aux.2

• Important

• General with Ack.

• Aux.1 with Ack.

• Aux.2 with Ack.

SEE ALSO

For details on tag mark, see the following:

E8.1, “Components of Instrument Faceplate”

● Alarm Processing Level

Specify the priority of alarm processing. The alarm processing level can be selected from thecombo box, or it can be entered directly using the keyboard. The contents are shown below:

• High

• Medium

• Low

• Logging

• User [5]

• User [6]

• User [7]

• User [8]

• User [9]

• User [10]

• User [11]

• User [12]

• User [13]

• User [14]

• User [15]

• User [16]

SEE ALSO

For details on alarm processing levels, see the following:

C5.16, “Alarm Processing Levels”



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Security Level

Specify the security level for the function block. The security level can be selected from thecombo box, or it can be entered directly using the keyboard. The contents are shownbelow:

• 1

• 2

• 3

• 4

• 5

• 6

• 7

• 8

SEE ALSO

For details on security levels, see the following:

F9.4, “Function Block Security”



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Upper Equipment Name

The name of the higher-level process equipment group in plant hierarchy can be desig-nated by selecting one from the combo box, or by directly entering from keyboard. Whenentering from keyboard up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be used. However, thefollowing character strings can not be used.

• Double-byte characters

• Single-byte alphanumeric lower-case characters

• ALL

• NONE

• A string started with %DR

• A string that contains the following characters

• (,) comma

• (@) At mark

• Single-byte space

• (:) colon

• (*) asteriskAn (*) character can be used by itself.

When Upper Equipment Name is omitted, the equipment name for the control drawing willbe registered as the upper equipment for the function block when saving (and download-ing) the control drawing.

When the upper equipment name is dynamically set by SEBOL or other programs, enter (*)asterisks into this column, thus, the default upper equipment name will not automaticallyset to the block when saving (and downloading) the control drawing.

SEE ALSO

For more information about Upper Equipment, see the following:

“■ Upper Equipment Name” in E10.2.2, “Registering Custom Equipment (Other than Unit Equipment)”

● Block Symbol

Select the block symbol to be created in the drawing pane. The shape of the block symbolcan be selected using the [Symbol List] button, [<<] button or [>>] button.


F3-32<F3.5 Changing Data Link Block Properties>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.5 Changing Data Link Block PropertiesProperties of the data link block can be changed from the drawing pane. Use theproperty sheet to change the properties.

■ Data Link Block Property Sheet▼ Data Link Block Properties

Select a data link block in the drawing pane, then select [Properties] from the [Format]menu.

The data link block property sheet consists of the following two tabs:

• Common tabThis tab is used to change the position of the block symbol (X coordinate, Y coordi-nate).

• Data link block tabThis tab is used to change the data link block type and connection information.

■ Data Link Block TabThe data link block is used when connecting a function block to another function block orwhen connecting a process I/O or software I/O. There are two types of data link blocks: I/Odata link block and external data link block.

I/O data link blocks can be connected to a process I/O or software I/O.

External data link blocks can be connected to a function block defined in other controldrawings or on other FCSs.

Type

Connection Information

Symbol

Symbol List<< >>

AREAIN

F030501E.EPS

ApplyCancelOK

Link Block

Common Link Block

FIC004.SET

Figure Data Link Block Property Tab


<F3.5 Changing Data Link Block Properties> F3-33

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Type

This changes the type of data link block.

SEE ALSO

For details on the data link blocks, see the following:


● Connection Information

This inputs connection information.

SEE ALSO

• For more information about descriptions of the linked information and restrictions, see the following:

“■ Usage of I/O Data Link Blocks (PIO) and External Data Link Blocks (AREAIN/AREAOUT)” in F3.3,“Registering Function Blocks”

• For details on connection information, see the following:

C2, “I/O Connection”

● Block Symbol

Select the block symbol to be created in the drawing pane. The shape of the block symbolcan be selected using the [Symbol List] button, [<<] button or [>>] button.

SEE ALSO

For details on data link block symbols, see the following:



F3-34<F3.6 Changing Function Block Control Sequence>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.6 Changing Function Block Control SequenceThe function block control sequence can be changed in the function block overviewpane.

■ How to Change the Control Sequence▼ Function Block Control Sequence

Function blocks are arranged in control (line number) order in the function block overviewpane.

The control sequence can be changed by selecting a function block in the function blockoverview pane and dragging it to a new destination. Also, more than one function block canbe moved at the same time.

001002003004005

AB

B

001002003004005

AA

A

B

F030601E.EPS

B

Drag and drop

Select

Backward wiring

Forward wiring

Figure Changing Control Sequence

Forward wiring means the wiring follows the control sequence in the control drawing.Backward wiring means the wiring runs in the reverse direction from the control sequence.

The forward wiring permits the connected blocks to execute the control action in the samescan period.

The backward wiring makes the lower stream access the upper steam’s previous scansignal. For example, in the above drawing, the process of A is behind the process of B, sothat B can only process the signal of A availed from the previous scan.

When there is a shift in the forward wiring and backward wiring because of a change in thecontrol sequence, it is reflected in the relevant wiring in the drawing pane.


<F3.7 Changing Block Symbol Tag Name> F3-35

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.7 Changing Block Symbol Tag NameThe tag name of a block symbol can be changed in the tag name entry area of theblock symbol. When making a change, the tag name can be directly entered in thetag name entry area.

■ How to Change the Tag Name▼ Changing the Tag Name

Clicking on the tag name entry area of the block symbol in the drawing pane changes thestatus of the area then entering text becomes possible.

Select theblock symbol

Select the tag name entry areaFIC100

PID

FIC100

PID

FIC100

PID

FIC100

FIC200

F030701E.EPS

001002003004005

FIC100 PID

001002003004005

FIC200 PID

PID

PID

Change the tag name to FIC200

The tag name is changed.

Push [Return] key or click on the area other than the tag name entry area.

Figure Changing Block Symbol Tag Name

IMPORTANT

If a tag name that was already registered in the FCS is identically used in the controldrawing, an error occurs when the drawing file is saved. Also, if a tag name that is alreadyused in the control drawing is entered, an error occurs when the entry is confirmed.

To check the duplication of the tag name in the same project, click the [Check for Double-Defined Tags...] task bar on the [Tools] menu of System View.


F3-36<F3.8 Changing Block Symbol Model Name>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.8 Changing Block Symbol Model NameThe model name of a block symbol can be changed in the block symbol model nameentry area. For making a change, the model name can be directly entered in themodel name entry area using the keyboard.

■ How to Change the Model Name▼ Changing the Model Name

Clicking on the block symbol model name entry area in the drawing pane changes thestatus of the area then entering text becomes possible.

Selectthe symbol

Select thecode entry areaFIC100

PID

FIC100

PID

FIC100

PID

PVI

F030801E.EPS

PID

FIC100

001002003004005

FIC100 PID

001002003004005

FIC100 PVI

FIC100Change the model name to PVI

The model name is changed.

Push [Return] key or click on the area other than the tag name entry area.

Figure Changing Model Name via Direct Entry from Keyboard


<F3.8 Changing Block Symbol Model Name> F3-37

IM 33S01B30-01E

The model name can also be changed using the following methods:

• Change the model name from the property sheet that is displayed by double-clickingon the block symbol.

• Using the keyboard, directly enter a model name displayed in the function blockoverview pane.

● Cautions when Changing Block Model Name

Take note of the following points when changing the model name:

• Once executed, model name changes cannot be canceled (undo).

• Model name cannot be changed from the data link function block or vice versa.

• When a block model name is changed, the information defined in that function block isdeleted and the default definition information corresponding to the newly specifiedmodel name is read. At the same time, the block symbol in the drawing pane changesto the default shape.

• When multiple block symbols of the same tag name exist and the model name forsome of those block symbols are changed, the model name for other block symbols ofthe same name will also change accordingly.


F3-38<F3.9 Entering Block Symbol Connection Information>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.9 Entering Block Symbol ConnectionInformationConnection information can be entered from a block symbol in the drawing pane.

■ How to Enter Connection Information▼ Entering the Connection Information

Connection information indicates the connection destination for each terminal of the func-tion block.

Select a block symbol with a connection information entry area in the drawing pane andclick on the connection information entry area. The status of the area changes and enteringtext becomes possible. After entering the connection information from the keyboard, pressthe [Return] key or click on another area to confirm the entry.

F030901E.EPS

J01J02J03J04J05J06J07J08J09

Select the block symbol

J11J12J13J14J15

BSET101BDSET-1L

J16

J10

J01J02J03J04J05J06J07J08J09

J11J12J13J14J15

BSET101BDSET-1L

J16

J10

FIC100.SV

Connection information entry area

Enter connection information

Figure Example of Entering Connection Information


<F3.10 Changing Block Symbol Terminal Name> F3-39

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.10 Changing Block Symbol Terminal NameA terminal name for a block symbol expresses the type of data that is exchangedbetween the terminal and the function block being connected. The terminal name fora block symbol can be changed in the drawing pane.

■ How to Change the Terminal Name▼ Changing the Terminal Name

Clicking on the terminal name entry area of a block symbol in the drawing pane changesthe status of the area and entering text becomes possible. After the terminal name isentered from the keyboard and the [Return] key pressed or another area clicked, the entryis confirmed.

PID

INFIC0001

F031001E.EPS

OUT

Figure Example of Changing Terminal Name via Direct Entry from Keyboard

A pop-up menu appears when the right mouse button is clicked inside the terminal nameentry area. The terminal name can also be selected from this menu.

PID

IN OUTFIC0001

F031002E.EPS

MODE.MODE.BSW.AFLS.AF.AOFS.

Insert

Terminal NameTerminal Name

Selection Mode

Cannot Undo

Connection TerminalData Item 2Data Item 4Data Item 4 O/S

MANAUTAUTCASRCASROUTPRD

Figure Changing Terminal Name from Pop-Up Menu


F3-40<F3.11 Displaying Block Comment for Block Symbols>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.11 Displaying Block Comment for BlockSymbolsThe content of a function block’s detail definition can be displayed in the drawingpane as a block comment.

■ How to Display the Block Comment▼ Displaying the Block Comment

Select a block symbol then click the right mouse button inside the block symbol area, andselect the item to be displayed from the pop-up menu that appears. The content of thedetail definition corresponding to the selected item is displayed as a block comment.However, if nothing is set for the selected detail definition item of the function block, theitem name of the detail definition will be displayed.

PID

IN OUTFIC0001

F031101E.EPS

PID

IN OUTFIC0001

Property

Cut Ctrl+X

Copy Ctrl+C

Paste Ctrl+V

Delete Del

Edit Detail

Fieldbus Builder

Fieldbus Block List

Device Management Tool

Insert

Block Comment

Delete Symbol

Selection Mode

Cannot Undo

Tag NameTag CommentMV Reverse DisplayScale High/Low LimitsInput Signal ConversionPulse RateEngineering UnitControl Action DirectionManipulated Variable Range High/Low LimitsControl/Calculation Output Action

FLOWBlock comment

Figure Example of Block Comment

The displayed block comment can be moved to any location inside the drawing pane.

No block comment can be displayed for data link blocks.


<F3.11 Displaying Block Comment for Block Symbols> F3-41

IM 33S01B30-01E

The items displayed as block comment are shown as follows.

Table Items of Block Comments and Their Displays

F031102E.EPS

Item Contents Example

Tag Name Tag name text string FIC001

Tag Comment Tag comment text FLOW

SV High/Low Limits Low limit - High limit 0.0 - 100.0

MV Reverse Display YES or NO NO

Scale High/Low Limits Low limit - High limit 0.0 - 100.0

Input Signal Conversion LINEAR, SQRT, BTHPUL, 2ST, 3ST, CODE, SUBSYS, PULSE or QTPUL

LINEAR

Engineering unit Engineering unit %

Control Action Direction DIR or REV REV

MV Range High/Low Limits Low limit - High limit 0.0 - 100.0

Pulse Rate Pulse rate in Hz 1.00

Control/Calculation Output Action POS or VEL POS

IMPORTANT

In the packages before releases R2.10, the text indicating the control action are mixed withfull text (DIRECT/REVERSE) and abbreviated text (DIR/REV). Since release R2.10, theindication is standardized with abbreviated text. The software with R2.06 release stilldisplays full text DIRECT or REVERSE. When upgrading it to R2.10 or later versions, thefollowing phenomena may occur.

After upgrading the software, when opening a control drawing with full text display, amessage box “Display is upgraded” will appear. Click [OK] button, then the display forcontrol action on the control drawing will change from full text to abbreviated text, i.e., [DIR]or [REV].

When closing an above described control drawing file, a message box “Data has beenchanged. Save?” will appear, even though there is no modification performed to thatdrawing file.

In this situation, perform Save or Download the control drawing file, the display for controlaction will be saved with abbreviated text. In this case Save or Download the control draw-ing does not have any affect to the control actions. If Save or Download is not performed,the same message box will appear when the drawing is opened next time.

The control drawing status display windows behave the same as the control drawings. AfterSave or Download, the display for control action will be in abbreviated text.


F3-42<F3.12 Drawing Wiring>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.12 Drawing WiringWiring can be drawn by specifying an output connection terminal and an inputconnection terminal of block symbols in the drawing pane.

■ Wiring Method▼ Wiring

Wiring is displayed with an arrow to indicate the flow of data between two function blocks orbetween a function block and a data link block.

The three methods for drawing wiring are shown below:

• Automatic wiring

• Manual wiring

• All wiring

With automatic wiring and group wiring, the property of the wiring drawn is set as “auto-matic.” With manual wiring, the property is set as “manual.” Whether the wiring can beedited or not is determined by its property.

Also, there are forward wiring and backward wiring; these two types of wiring are displayeddifferently in the drawing pane. Forward wiring the means wiring follows the control se-quence in the control drawing. Backward wiring means the wiring runs in the reversedirection from the control sequence.

■ Automatic WiringTo connect blocks with auto wiring, perform one of the following operations.

• Select [Wiring] on the [Insert] menu.

• Click [Wiring] button at the toolbar.

F031201E.EPS

Figure Wiring Button

Specify two points representing an output connection terminal and an input connectionterminal of block symbols in the drawing pane. The wiring route is automatically determinedand the wiring is drawn. The color of the wiring is purple.

When there is only oneconnection destination

F031202E.EPS

CLICKCLICKCLICK

Figure Automatic Wiring Method

With automatic wiring, the wiring route is determined in accordance with the following rules:

• Two wiring lines both in the horizontal direction or in the vertical direction do notoverlap with each other.

• With the exception of block comments, no object cuts across the block area.


<F3.12 Drawing Wiring> F3-43

IM 33S01B30-01E

Automatic wiring method has the following restrictions.

• Terminals that already have wiring connected or terminals that are used for blockcomments cannot be specified as an input connection terminal.

• Wiring cannot be moved, or endpoint nodes cannot be inserted in wiring.

• Up to 32 input connection terminals can be specified as wiring destinations for a singleoutput connection terminal.

● Branching of the Wiring

Multiple destinations can be specified for a function block or data link block. In this case,the wiring will automatically branch when it is drawn.

CLICK CLICK

F031203E.EPS

CLICKCLICK

1 2

43

Figure Branching of Wiring in Automatic Wiring

Wiring that has already been drawn can also be modified to branch off. In the wiring al-ready drawn, specify the point where branching should occur and specify the wiring desti-nation.

CLICK

F031204E.EPS

CLICKCLICK

1

32

Figure Branching for Wiring Already Drawn

● Rewiring

▼ Re-wiring

All of the wiring already drawn in the drawing pane can be redrawn in accordance with theautomatic wiring rules.

Select [Re-wiring] from the [Draw] menu.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Auxiliary Wiring

There are cases where wiring cannot be drawn according to the automatic wiring rulesbecause of the arrangement of the block symbols. In this case, auxiliary wiring is drawn.The color of the wiring is white.

A control drawing file to which auxiliary wiring was added cannot be downloaded or savedunder the same name. To save a file that contains auxiliary wiring, select [Save As] from the[File] menu.

To delete auxiliary wiring, move the block symbol (or symbols) to a position where the inputconnection terminal and output connection terminal can be wired without using auxiliarywiring.

F031205E.EPS

Auxiliary wiring

Move

IN

IN OUTOUT

Figure Example of Auxiliary Wiring

Wiring whose connection destination has been lost because the number of terminalsdecreased due to a change in the block symbol will be displayed as auxiliary wiring. In thiscase, delete the auxiliary wiring.

■ Manual WiringSelect [Wiring] from the [Insert] menu, and specify an output connection terminal, thepoint(s) of wiring connection, and input connection terminal of a symbol block. Wiring willbe drawn along the specified points. The color of the wiring is light blue.

CLICK

CLICK

F031206E.EPS

1

CLICK

2

3

CLICKCLICK

54

Figure Manual Wiring Method

Up to 32 input connection terminals can be specified as wiring destinations for a singleoutput connection terminal.


<F3.12 Drawing Wiring> F3-45

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ All Wiring[All wiring] may be used to convert the wiring information when changing the builder forediting the control drawing created on the function block overview builder, from the functionblock overview builder to the control drawing builder.

Drag and drop the block symbols to the drawing pane, and then click [All Wiring] on the[Draw] menu to put all wirings on the drawing.

After [All Wiring] operation, the wirings for the connection of all the function block symbolsmay be drawn all together.

If the I/O connection or the external connection is defined, the I/O connection blocks or theexternal connection blocks may be drawn automatically.

The [All Wiring] operation automatically arranges the wiring and the connection blocks.Rearrange them accordingly if required.

If the [All Wiring] operation is performed again while rearranging the wiring or the connec-tion blocks, all rearranged objects will return to their previous positions.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Detailed Procedure from Changing the Control Drawing Builder to AllWiring

The following describes the procedure for changing the builder used to edit the controldrawing created on the function block overview builder, from the function block overviewbuilder to the control drawing builder, including the procedure up to All Wiring.

1. Open the properties sheet for the drawing file in the System View.

SEE ALSO

For details on displaying the properties sheet, see the following:

F3.24, “Starting Function Block Overview Builder”

2. On the Type tab of the properties sheet, check the box for [Use control drawingbuilder].

3. Click the [OK] button.Then the builder for the drawing changes from [Function Block Overview] to [Controldrawing].

4. Select the drawing file in the System View, and then open the control drawing builder.The defined function blocks are displayed on the function block overview pane of thecontrol drawing builder.

5. Drag and drop the required function blocks from the function block overview pane tothe drawing pane, so that their symbols may be displayed on the drawing pane.

SEE ALSO

For details on drawing the block symbols, see the following:


6. Click [All Wiring] from the [Draw] menu.The wiring of all the blocks will be drawn according to the wiring information previouslydefined.

7. The block symbols may be moved on the drawing pane accordingly if required.

8. Save the drawing in a builder file with the Save function.


<F3.13 Changing Wiring Properties> F3-47

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.13 Changing Wiring PropertiesThe property of the wiring drawn in the drawing pane can be changed. Use thewiring property sheet to change the property.

■ Wiring Property Sheet▼ Wiring Properties

Wiring has a certain number properties that are determined at the time of drawing. Whetherthe wiring can be edited or not varies depending on the content of the properties.

The wiring property sheet is displayed when [Properties] is selected from the [Format]menu after selecting a designated wiring object.

The wiring property sheet consists of the following two tabs:

• Common tabThe display of the object position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) on this tab is grayed outduring wiring.

• Wiring tabThis tab is used to change the wiring property.

■ Wiring TabThe wiring properties may be modified on the [Wiring] tab.

F031301E.EPS

ApplyCancelOK

Wiring

Common Wiring

Automatic

Wiring

Automatic wiring immediately after setting

Manual

Figure Wiring Property

● Wiring

▼ Wiring, Automatic Wiring Immediately After Setting

Set either automatic or manual as the wiring property.

Only when the wiring property is set as [Automatic] can the [Automatic Wiring ImmediatelyAfter Setting] option be selected. When this option is selected, wiring is done automaticallythe moment the property sheet is closed. If the [Automatic Wiring Immediately After Setting]option is not selected, only the wiring property becomes automatic and automatic wiring isnot performed.


F3-48<F3.14 Inserting and Deleting Connection Point for Wiring>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.14 Inserting and Deleting Connection Point forWiringIf the wiring property is manual, connection points can be inserted in the wiring orcan be deleted. The wiring route can be changed for the wiring that has been drawn,by inserting and deleting connection points.

■ How to Insert Connection Points▼ Insert Endpoint

Connection points can be inserted at desired position to change the wiring route.

Select a wiring object, then click the [Insert Endpoint] from the [Draw] menu, and thenspecify the position where the connection point is to be inserted.

F031401E.EPS

IN

OUTInsert a connection point

Figure Inserting a Connection Point

Once a connection point has been inserted, the wiring can be moved.

F031402E.EPS

IN

OUT

Drag

Figure Changing Wiring Route by Inserting a Connection Point

■ How to Delete a Connection PointWhen the wiring is moved and two connection points overlap, the overlapped connectionpoint will be deleted.

F031403E.EPS

Drag

Deleted

Figure Deleting a Connection Point


<F3.15 Displaying Text> F3-49

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.15 Displaying TextAny character string can be displayed in the drawing pane.

■ Drawing Text▼ Displaying Text

One of the following operations may add text to a drawing.

• Click [Text] on the [Insert] menu.

• Click [Text] button on toolbar.

F031501E.EPS

Figure Text Button

Drag a rectangular area on the drawing, the area becomes “entry waiting” state. At thismoment, text may be input from keyboard, after pushing the [Return] key, the text inputfrom the keyboard becomes entered.

F031502E.EPS

Drag

Select a rectangular area

Figure Drawing a Text Area

Or, if you select any text and click inside the text area, the status of the area changes andediting the text becomes possible. The entered text can now be modified or deleted.

■ Changing the Text Area SizeWhen a text is selected, a handle is displayed. The size of the text area can be enlarged orreduced by dragging this handle.

F031503E.EPS

DragHandle

Figure Changing Text Size


F3-50<F3.16 Changing Text Properties>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.16 Changing Text PropertiesThe text font and size can be changed in the drawing pane. Use the property sheet tochange the font or size.

■ Text Property Sheet▼ Text Properties

The property sheet is displayed when [Properties] is selected from the [Format] menu. Thetext property sheet consists of the following two tabs:

• Common tabThis tab is used to change the position of the object (X coordinate, Y coordinate).

• Text tabThis tab is used to change the properties of the text such as font, text color and size.


<F3.16 Changing Text Properties> F3-51

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Text TabText property may be changed on the text tab.

A

A

+

OK

Text

Common Text

FontFont Style

Bold

Size

SamplePosition

Text Color

Background Color

Transparent

F031601E.EPS

ApplyCancelOK

System

SystemTerminalFixedsysCourier

16

1618202224

Center

White

Black

ABCabcdefg

Italic

Underline

Figure Text Property

The following items can be changed in the text tab:

• FontThe type of font may be selected form the fonts installed to the HIS.

• SizeThe size may be set from 8 to 72 dots. Note that the selectable sizes vary with the fonttype.

• PositionThe text display position in the text area may be set.

• Font styleText font style such as Bold, Italic and underline may be set.

• Text colorThe desired text color may be selected from the color palette.

• Background colorThe desired background color may be selected from the color palette.


F3-52<F3.17 Moving an Object>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.17 Moving an ObjectWhen moving an object connected by wiring, it is necessary to consider the prop-erty of the wiring.

■ Moving a Block Symbol▼ Moving an Object

One or more objects in the control drawing can be moved freely by drag and drop them.When performing drag and drop while holding down the [Shift] key, the dragged objects canbe moved horizontally or vertically.

When a block symbol is moved, the relevant wiring information (the property of the con-nected wiring or terminal position information) is retained as is. When a block comment isdisplayed, the block comment is also moved.

F031701E.EPS

TANK LEVEL

Moves while retaining its relative position to the block symbol

Move

LIC100

PID

LIC100

PID

TANK LEVEL

LIC100’s block comment

Figure Moving a Block Symbol

When a wired block symbol is moved, the wiring will be redrawn according its property.

F031702E.EPS

Drag

Figure Moving a Block Symbol with Complete Wiring


<F3.17 Moving an Object> F3-53

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Moving a WiringIf the property of the wiring is “manual,” it can be moved in parallel direction in line segmentunits. Line segments connected to a block symbol are moved together with the blocksymbol with wiring information (the property of the connected wiring or terminal positioninformation) intact.

F031703E.EPS

IN

OUT

Drag

Figure Moving a Wiring

When line segments whose property is “automatic” are included in branch wiring, wiringcannot be moved if line segments whose property is “automatic” are selected. Change thecorresponding wiring property to “manual” before moving the wiring.

F031704E.EPS

Manual

Automatic

Manual

Connot be moved

Figure Wiring Containing Automatic and Manual Properties



IM 33S01B30-01E

However, if only a wiring segment whose wiring property is “manual” is selected, that wiringsegment can be moved.

Automatic

Manual

Automatic

Drag

Select

F031705E.EPS

Automatic

Manual

Automatic

Can be moved

Figure An Example of Moving Branch Wiring



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Moving the Connection Destination for WiringWhen the connection destination for wiring is moved, the corresponding terminal name isdisplayed at the location to which the destination has been moved in accordance with therules shown below. Also, when the connection destination for wiring is moved, the wiring isredrawn based on the wiring property.

● Moving within the Same Function Block

PV

F031706E.EPS

PVDrag

The same terminal name is displayed

Figure An Example of Moving Within Same Function Block

● Moving Between Function Blocks

PV

PV

Drag

F031707E.EPS

The same terminal name is displayed if the destination block has the same terminal

Figure An Example of Moving to Different Function Block

● Moving from a Function Block to a Data Link Block

PV

F031708E.EPS

Deletion of the terminal name

Data link blockData link block

DragThe terminal name is deleted

Figure An Example of Moving from Function Block to Data Link Block



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Moving from a Data Link Block to a Function Block

PV

F031709E.EPS

Data link blockData link block

Drag The default terminal nameis displayed

Figure An Example of Moving from Data Link Block to Function Block

■ Moving a Block Comment

F031710E.EPS

TANK LEVEL

TANK LEVEL

Can be moved to any desired locatioin in the drawing pane

LIC100

PID

LIC100’s block comment

Figure An Example of Moving Block Comment



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Moving an ObjectThe figure below shows examples of moving a wiring, a block symbol and terminal objects.

● When Connection Wiring Has No Connection Point

F031711E.EPS

Moving a wiring

Automatic: Cannot be moved.Manual: Cannot be moved.

Moving a block symbol

Automatic: Can be moved.Manual: The route is automatically determined.

Moving a terminal


Figure An Example of Moving Object Connected by Wiring with No Connection Point



IM 33S01B30-01E

● When Connection Wiring Has One Connection Point

F031712E.EPS

Automatic: Cannot be moved.Manual: Cannot be moved.



Moving a terminal


Moving a wiring

Figure An Example of Moving Object Connected by Wiring with One Connection Point



IM 33S01B30-01E

● When Connection Wiring Has Two or More Connection Points

F031713E.EPS

1

A

B

A

B

2


Automatic: Can be moved.Manual: The route between A and B is automatically determined.

Moving a terminal

Automatic: Can be moved.Manual: The route between A and B is automatically determined.

Moving a wiring

(1) Automatic: Cannot be moved.Manual: Cannot be moved

(2) Automatic: Cannot be moved.Manual: Can be moved..

Figure An Example of Moving Object Connected by Wiring with Two or More Connection Points


F3-60<F3.18 Copying an Object>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.18 Copying an ObjectA copy of an object can be created in the drawing pane or function block overviewpane.

■ How to Copy an Object▼ Copying an Object

To copy an object in the drawing pane, perform one of the following operations after select-ing the object:

• Drag and drop while holding down the [Ctrl] key. When holding down both [Ctrl] and[Shift] keys then drag and drop, the objects can be only duplicated horizontally orvertically.

• After selecting [Copy] from the [Edit] menu, select [Paste].

• After clicking on the [Copy] button in the toolbar, click on the [Paste] button.

• After selecting [Copy] from the pop-up menu, select [Paste].

To copy an object in the function block overview pane, perform one of the following opera-tions after selecting the line number:

• After selecting [Copy] from the [Edit] menu, select [Paste].

• After clicking on the [Copy] button in the toolbar, click on the [Paste] button.

• After selecting [Copy] from the pop-up menu, select [Paste].

■ Copying an Object in the Drawing PaneWhen duplicating a block symbol in the drawing pane, the function block, block commentand details associated with that block symbol are also duplicated.

In this case, the tag name and model name of the function block copied will also be dis-played in a line in the function block overview pane.

F031801E.EPS

C

Copyof C

001002003004005

BA

C

001002003004005

BA

CC

Property

PasteDelete

CopyCut

To be copied

Figure Copying an Object in Drawing Pane


<F3.18 Copying an Object> F3-61

IM 33S01B30-01E

When creating a copy of a block symbol including its wiring, select all block symbols con-nected by the wiring. At this time, the tag names and model names of all the function blockscopied will be displayed in the function block overview pane.

F031802E.EPS

Drag

Wiring to be copied

Figure Selecting Object Copied Together with Wiring

Enter a unique tag name which is not being used in the FCS or control drawing.

IMPORTANT

If a tag name that is already registered in the FCS is duplicated and used in the controldrawing builder, an error will occur when the drawing file is saved. Also, if a tag namealready used in the control drawing is entered, an error will occur when the entry is con-firmed.

The duplication of the tag name in the whole project may be checked by clicking the [Checkfor Double-Defined Tags...] task bar on the [Tools] menu of System View.


F3-62<F3.18 Copying an Object>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Copying an Object from the Function Block Overview PaneA copy of a block symbol or other object drawn in the drawing pane can be created byselecting the line number in the function block overview pane.

F031803E.EPS

Copy

Copy

001002003004005

Select

A

001002003004005

A

A

A

A

A

Figure Copying a Function Block with Function Block Overview Pane

Enter a unique tag name which is not used in the FCS or control drawing.

IMPORTANT

If a tag name that is already registered in the FCS is duplicated and used in the controldrawing builder, an error will occur when the drawing file is saved. Also, if a tag namealready used in the control drawing is entered, an error will occur when the entry is con-firmed.

The duplication of the tag name in the whole project may be checked by clicking the [Checkfor Double-Defined Tags...] task bar on the [Tools] menu of System View.


<F3.19 Cutting an Object> F3-63

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.19 Cutting an ObjectA block symbol or a wiring object may be cut. The object that was cut is stored in theclipboard.

■ How to Cut an ObjectTo cut an object in the drawing pane, perform one of the following operations after selectingthe object:

• Select [Cut] from the [Edit] menu.

• Click on the [Cut] button in the toolbar.

• Select [Cut] from the pop-up menu.

To cut an object in the function block overview pane, perform one of the following opera-tions after selecting the line number:

• Select [Cut] from the [Edit] menu.

• Click on the [Cut] button in the toolbar.

• Select [Cut] from the pop-up menu.

■ Cutting an Object in the Drawing Pane

● Cutting a Block Symbol

When a block symbol is cut in the drawing pane, the function block, block comment andfunction block detailed information that correspond to the block symbol are cut at the sametime. Then, the tag name and model name of the symbol block are removed from thefunction block overview pane.

F031901E.EPS

C

001002003004005

BA

C

001002003004005

BA

PropertyCut

PasteDelete

Copy

To be deleted

Figure Cutting an Object in Drawing Pane


F3-64<F3.19 Cutting an Object>

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Cutting a Wiring Object

When cutting a wiring object, select all block symbols connected by the wiring.

F031902E.EPS

Drag

Wiring to be deleted

Figure Selecting Objects for Cutting Together with Wiring

For example, if only one of the two connected blocks is selected for “cut and paste,” onlythe information on the selected block is stored in the clipboard, and the wiring informationwill be lost.

■ Cutting an Object from the Function Block Overview PaneAfter selecting the line number in the function block overview pane, select [Cut] from the[Edit] menu. The function block, the corresponding block symbol and the block commentobjects will be cut.


<F3.20 Deleting an Object> F3-65

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.20 Deleting an ObjectBlock symbols and wiring objects may be deleted.

■ How to Delete an Object▼ Deleting an Object, Delete Symbol

To delete an object in the drawing pane, perform one of the following operations afterselecting the object:

• Press the [DEL] key.

• Select [Delete] from the [Edit] menu.

• Click on the [Delete] button in the toolbar.

• Select [Delete] from the pop-up menu.

Also, a block symbol in the drawing pane can be deleted without deleting the correspond-ing function block in the function block overview pane. To do this, delete the block symbolusing either of the following methods after selecting the symbol:

• Select [Delete Symbol] from the [Edit] menu.

• Select [Delete symbol] from the pop-up menu.

■ Deleting a Block SymbolWhen a block symbol is removed from the drawing pane, the function block dependent onthe symbol and the related wiring will be removed too.

● Deleting a Block Symbol and Associated Objects

When a block symbol is deleted, the connected wiring, terminal name and block commentfor that block symbol are deleted at the same time. In addition, the corresponding functionblock in the function block overview pane is also deleted.

F032001E.EPS

C

BA

D

001002003004005

BA

DC

C

A

D

001002003004005

CA

D

B is deleted, then C and D are shifted upward.

Figure Deleting a Block Symbol


F3-66<F3.20 Deleting an Object>

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Deleting a Block Symbol Only

A block symbol may be removed without deleting the dependent function block.

The corresponding function block in the function block overview pane will not be deleted.

F032002E.EPS

A

001002003004005

A

001002003004005

A

Not deleted

Figure Deleting a Block Symbol Only

■ Deleting a WiringWhen wiring is deleted, the connected terminals are deleted at the same time. In addition,the connection information for the block symbols connected by the wiring is also deleted.

F032003E.EPS

PV

Figure Deleting a Wiring


<F3.20 Deleting an Object> F3-67

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Deleting a Block CommentWhen a block comment is selected and deleted from the drawing pane, only the blockcomment is deleted without deleting the block symbol or other related objects.

■ Deleting an Object from the Function Block Overview PaneWhen a function block in the function block overview pane is deleted by the same methodas used for deleting an object, the corresponding object that has been drawn in the drawingpane is also deleted.


F3-68<F3.21 Function Block Overview Dialog>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.21 Function Block Overview DialogThe list of the function blocks in a control drawing can be displayed in FunctionBlock Overview Dialog, the settings of the function blocks can also be edited on thisdialog. Using this dialog, the settings of the function blocks can be modified withoutopening detail setting window for the blocks. Moreover, the settings of the functionblocks can be exported to a CSV file, vice versa, the settings can also be importedvia a CSV file.

■ Open Function Block Overview Dialog▼ Function Block Overview Dialog

One of the following procedures may open the Function Block Overview Dialog on aControl Drawing Builder.

• Click [Function Block Overview Dialog] on [Format] menu.

• Click [Function Block Overview Dialog] icon on toolbar.

F032101E.EPS

Function Block Overview

CancelOKWrite Parameter...Read Parameter...

No.

001 FIC100 PID 0.0 100.0 % No002 FIC200 PID 0.0 100.0 % No

Tag Name Model Name Tag Comment Scale Low Limit Scale High Limit Engineering...

Setting Items

Export to a CSV fileImport from a CSV file

Figure Function Block Overview Dialog


<F3.21 Function Block Overview Dialog> F3-69

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Editing Function Blocks SettingsSettings of function blocks can be edited on Function Block Overview Dialog.

● Choose an Item for Editing

Click an item of a function block, then the item will become selected state, the setting of theitem can be edited at this state.

TIP

When an item is in selected state, push [Tab] key or [Return] key may move the cursor to the next item.The cursor moves in the following manners.

• When the cursor is at the extreme right position, it will move to the first item from the left of next line.

• When the cursor is at the extreme right position of the last line, it will move to the first item from theleft of the first line.

• Otherwise, cursor only moves to the right for the next item.

Moreover, when push [Tab] key together with [Shift] key, the cursor reverses its move as only push the[Tab] key.

● Editing Settings

The settings for the selected item can be edited. After pushing the Return key or clicksomewhere else, the modification for the setting will be fixed.

The settings may be edited in different ways vary with setting items. The editing methodsare as follows:

• Tag Comment, Scale High/Low LimitThe settings can be entered from keyboard when the item is selected.

• Input Signal Conversion, Totalizer Time Unit, Tag Mark, Alarm Processing Level,Security LevelThe setting can be chosen from the combo box when the item is selected.

• Engineering Unit Symbol, Upper Equipment NameThe setting can be chosen from the combo box and can also be entered keyboardwhen the item is selected.

Nevertheless, the settings for No., Tag Name and Model Name can not be edited.

TIP

When the engineering unit can be automatically registered, a new engineering unit other than the unitfrom the list in combo box can be entered from keyboard.

SEE ALSO

• For more information about automatically registering the engineering units, see the following:

“■ Detailed Setting of Project” in F1.2, “Creating a New Project”

• For more information about plant hierarchy, see the following:

E10, “Plant Hierarchy”



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Copy and Cut

When an item is selected, the contents of the item can be put into clipboard by clickingCopy or Cut.

For the settings that can not be omitted, Cut will not remove the existing setting from theitem.

TIP

When multiple items are selected, the contents of the items can be taken into clipboard by Copy or Cut alltogether.

Drag the mouse to a certain area may select all items in the dragged area.

● Paste

When an item is selected, the contents in the clipboard can be put into this item by Paste.However, the different columns' contents in the clipboard can not be pasted.

TIP

When multiple items are selected, the contents of the items can be put from clipboard by Paste alltogether.

■ Sort DisplayClick an item name (such as No. or Tag Name), the item will be used as keyword for sortingthe display. The sort can be in ascending or descending order. The ascending and de-scending order can be switched by clicking the item name again. Changing the order ofdisplay does not affect the control order of the function blocks.


<F3.21 Function Block Overview Dialog> F3-71

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Import and Export CSV FileThe information of the function blocks drawn in a control drawing can be exported to a file,or vice versa, the information can be imported from a file to a control drawing. The file willbe in CSV format, thus, the file is also referred to as CSV file.

The structure of the CSV file for function block information is the same of the CSV fileexported from Control Drawing Overview Builder.

● Export to a CSV File

Click the [Write Parameter…] button on [Function Block Overview Dialog] may export theinformation to a CSV file.

The information of the function blocks in the control drawing will be exported to a file in CSVformat.

When write a control drawing information to a CSV file, the information of the function blockwithout tag name will also be exported to the file. If there are more than one function blockswithout tag names, all the function blocks’ information will be exported to the CSV file. Inthe CSV file, with the function blocks information, the tag names will not exist.

● Import from a CSV File

Click the [Read Parameter…] button on [Function Block Overview Dialog] may import theinformation from a CSV file. A suffix [.csv] may be required when selecting a file for import-ing.

After importing the file to the control drawing, the settings of the function blocks in thecontrol drawing will be updated, however, a new function block can not be added to thecontrol drawing from the CSV file.

To update the blocks information based on the blocks’ model names and tag names in thecontrol drawing. How the blocks information be updated are shown as follows:

• When a block’s tag name and model name in the CSV file meet the tag name andmodel name in the control drawing, the setting information of that block will be up-dated.

• If a block’s tag name meets the tag name in the control drawing but the model namedoes not meet, the settings of that block will not be updated. The error messages arelogged into a file.

TIP

The log file can be found in the following path:

<Root Directory of CS 1000/CS 3000>\Log\Englog\ENGLOGnnnn-yyyymmdd.log (*1)*1: nnnn stands for a series number. yyyymmdd stands for a date in the format of YearMonthDay.



IM 33S01B30-01E

• If a block’s tag name is not found in the control drawing, the information for that tag willnot be imported to the control drawing.

• If a block’s tag name exist in control drawing but not found in the CSV file, the informa-tion for that block will not be updated.

• If multiple blocks with identical tag names and model names exist in the CSV file, thelatest one will be taken to update the block information in control drawing.

• When a control drawing contains a function block without tag name, the information inthe CSV file for the block without tag name will be used.

TIP

Different from importing the drawing builder file on function block builder, the information imported fromthe CSV file must not contain the information of additional blocks other than the function blocks in thedrawing. The information details of the function blocks in the CSV file are identified by the tag names andfunction block model names and they must correspond to the tag names and function block model namesin the control drawing file. The line numbers in the CSV file are irrelevant information and will be ignored.


<F3.22 Import and Export Text File> F3-73

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.22 Import and Export Text File▼ Import

All the information defined in a control drawing (except the tuning parameters) canbe export to or import from a text file. Thus the control drawing files created byexternal tools be used.

SEE ALSO

For more information about importing the source files exported from CENTUM CS Control DrawingBuilders, see the following:



F3-74<F3.22 Import and Export Text File>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Items for Importing and ExportingAll items that can be defined on Control Drawing Builder, on Function Block OverviewBuilder or on Function Block Detail Builder can be imported or exported. However, thetuning parameters can not.

The items may be imported or exported as listed as follows:

• Tag name, Model name

• Detailed settings, Command line

• Connection information

• Sequence table contents

• Logic chart contents

• Calculation block contents

• SFC contents (*1)

• System defined data items (only the editable items) (*1)

• User defined data items, menu definition (*1)

• Program name, (SFC sequence name, Unit procedure name)

• Tag generic name table, Operation generic name table

• Initial sequence, Monitoring sequence

• Block outlook user definition (Alarm status strings, Status change strings, Statetransition matrix) (*1)

• Control drawing block symbols, Block comment, Wiring, Text, Group)

• Logic chart element symbols, Wiring, Text, Group, Switch View)

• Drawing information (Drawing comment etc.)

*1: The items are not available in the CENTUM CS control drawing builder file (control drawing source file), so that can notbe imported from CS source file.

IMPORTANT

• When exporting a control drawing file of a project created in the environment of R2.10or earlier into a text format file, a warning message may appear indicating that a partof data may be lost. When this happens, quit exporting the text format drawing file.

• When exporting a control drawing file with function blocks inside of a project created inthe environment of R2.06 or earlier into a text format file, a part of data can not beexported. The reason is that the builder file created in the environment of R2.06 orearlier does not contain all contents of a builder file created in the environment ofR2.10 or later. Thus, a part of configuration will be lost, and the lost part will be re-placed by system default settings.

• To export all data items, it is necessary to upgrade the builder R2.06 to R2.10 or laterversions, then save (download) the file on the control drawing builder, or click [Update]on [File] menu then save (download) the file on the Control Drawing Builder or on theFunction Block Overview Builder.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Format of Scripts in Text FileThe format of scripts in the text files for import and export are the same as the script filescreated on control drawing builders of CENTUM CS (CS drawing source file). The informa-tion for the control drawing are described in the scripts.

■ Procedure of Importing a Text FileThe procedure for importing a text file is as follows:

1. Choose [External File] - [Import ..] from [File] menu on Control Drawing Builder.Then a dialog box for designating a text file will appear.

2. Select a text file for importing, the file name should have an extension .txt.Then import the selected file.

TIP

For Japanese version text file, the character code is standard Shift-JIS code, the paragraph mark isCR+LF (0x0D+0x0A).

■ Procedure of Exporting a Text FileThe procedure for exporting a text file is as follows:

1. Choose [External File] - [Export ..] from [File] menu on Control Drawing Builder.

TIP

For Japanese version text file, the character code is standard Shift-JIS code, the paragraph mark isCR+LF (0x0D+0x0A).


F3-76<F3.22 Import and Export Text File>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Confirmation of Import ResultWhen importing a text file, the event messages for starting import, the events during theimport are displayed in the message area of the Control Drawing Builder and the messagesare all log into a file.

TIP

The log file for the event messages can be found in the following path:

<Root Directory of CS 1000/CS 3000>\Log\Englog\ENGLOGnnnn-yyyymmdd.log (*1)

*1: nnnn stands for a series number. yyyymmdd stands for a date in the format of YearMonthDay.

The following example shows a message logged in the file for indicating the lack of infor-mation of a function block in the text file for importing.

Import File Name: DRW0001.s

Function block model PVI, tag name FI100 is an old type text file exported from an oldversion builder. The default settings will be set to the data items with absent informa-tion.

From this logging message, user can understand that the imported file is lack of informa-tion, and the default settings have been used for the absent information.

When a function block file created on the builder of release R2.06 or earlier is exported to atext file, without being saved or updated on the control drawing builder R2.10 or laterversions, the lacking information phenomena will occur.

TIP

• When importing a file completed with no error, only the message for importing start is logged in thelogging file, no messages for errors.

• The comment text in a drawing file can not be imported, no error message will be output.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Confirmation of Export ResultWhen exporting to a text file, the event messages for starting export, the events during theexport are displayed in the message area of the Control Drawing Builder and the mes-sages are all log into a file.

TIP

The log file for the event messages can be found in the following path:

<Root Directory of CS 1000/CS 3000>\Log\Englog\ENGLOGnnnn-yyyymmdd.log (*1)

*1: nnnn stands for a series number. yyyymmdd stands for a date in the format of YearMonthDay.

The following example shows a message logged in the file for indicating the lack of infor-mation of a function block in the text file exported.

Imported file: DRW0001.sFunction block model PVI, tag name FI100 is an old type editor file, a part of data cannot be imported, the default data is used.

From this logging message, user can understand that the file is lack of information for acertain function block, the absent information is not exported to the text file.

When a function block file created on the builder of release R2.06 or earlier is exported to atext file, without being saved or updated on the Control Drawing Builder R2.10 or laterversions, the lacking information phenomena will occur.


F3-78<F3.23 Importing CS Source File>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.23 Importing CS Source File▼ Importing CS Source File

The control drawing source files created on CENTUM CS (CS control drawingsource files) can be imported to CS 1000/ CS 3000. However, the information relatedto the function blocks not supported in CS 1000/CS 3000 will not be imported or willbe imported with modification. Moreover, in CENTUM CS, the information of SFCblocks or information of unit instruments are not contained in the control drawingfiles, so that those information need to be imported from different files. The sourcefiles created on CENTUM CS will be referred to as CS source files.

Moreover the source files of CS 1000 or CS 3000 can not be imported into CENTUMCS.

■ Required Files for ImportingTo import a CENTUM CS control drawing and the information in the control drawing, thefollowing files are required.

• Control drawing source file created on CENTUM CS (CS control drawing source file)Type: UNIX (paragraph mark is LF (0x0A), character code is EUC)After importing to CS 1000/CS 3000, the file will change to windows type.

Moreover, when importing file, the following files are required.

• CENTUM CS Control Drawing Symbol fileType: Windows (paragraph mark is CR+LF, Double-byte character is not allowed).

• CENTUM CS Logic Chart Symbol fileType: Windows (paragraph mark is CR+LF, Double-byte character is not allowed).


<F3.23 Importing CS Source File> F3-79

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Information for Importing ¡ £In a CS source file, some information can be imported and some information can not. Thedetails are as follows.

● Information that can be Imported ¡ £

• Function BlockThe information for function blocks can be imported. However, different function blockhas different information.

• Wiring and Connection between Function Blocks

• Wiring and Connection between Function Block and Link BlockHowever, the information for connection defined on the CENTUM CS simplifiedconfiguration panel can not be imported.

• Text CommentThe text scripts are fixed in the direction from left to right, the characters are fixedupside up. The ratio for horizontal is also applied for vertical.

• Block Comment of Function Blocks

When the number of the function blocks in a CS control drawing file exceeds 20 (*1) or 100(*2), the file can not be imported to CS 1000/ CS 3000 control drawing.

*1: ¡ The number for CS 1000 PFCS (8 Mbytes)*2: ¡ £ The number for FCS other than CS 1000 R1.0 PFCS (8 Mbytes)

● Information that can not be Imported

• Comment Objects other than Text

• Comment for Data, Comment for Data Value

• Wiring between Link Blocks

• Wiring between a Data Item of Function Block and a Link Block

• Block Comment of Link Blocks

• LSW

• HASTPV, HASPVC

• SEBOL Instruments (SEBOL, SEBOLP1 to P3)

• User-Defined Instruments (SFC Blocks, Unit Instruments, Operations)

• SAMA Instruments

The information of the user-defined instruments can not be imported from CS controldrawing source files, but it can be imported from other files for the user-defined instru-ments.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Function Block Details Imported from CENTUM CSThe details of function blocks in CS control drawing source file may be lost or modifiedduring importing to CS 1000/CS 3000. The details for each function block are explained asfollows.

● FUNC

The information will be put as for Variable Line-Segment Function Block (FUNC-VAR).However, the settings for segments will be lost.

● Batch Data Block

The information will be put as for the similar function block but with limiter settings.

• BDSET-1 will be put as for One-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-1L)

• BDSET-2 will be put as for Two-Batch Data Set Block (BDSET-2L)

• BDA will be put as for Batch Data Acquisition Block (BDA-L)

● Faceplate Blocks

Not only the block model name changes but also the behaviours of buttons.

• PBST5 will be put as for Extended 5-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS5C).

• PBST10 will be put as for Extended 10-Push-Button Switch Block (PBS10C).

• HAST3 will be put as for Extended Hybrid Manual Station Block (HAS3C).

Moreover, the buttons in CENTUM CS PBST5, PBST10, HAST3 have the following twooptions:

• RADIO (Radio button)

• CHECK (Check button)

After importing to CS 1000/CS 3000 and converted to PBS5C, PBS10C and HAS3C, thebuttons will have the following options:

• 0 (alternate button)

• 1 (radio button)

• 2 (momentary button)

When the setting for CENTUM CS is Check, in CS 1000/CS 3000, it will be converted into“0”.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E)

The algorithm of the sequence table can also be imported. However, the total number ofcondition and operations are limited to 64. The import results based on the number ofconditions are in the following table.

Table Number of Conditions and Table Import

Number ofConditions

0 to 8

9 to 16

17 to 24

25 to 32

33 to 40

41 to 48

49 to 56

57 to 64

Up to 56 lines of operations can be imported, others will be ignored.







Only 56 conditions can be imported.

Import Result

F032401E.EPS

The comment text for condition signals can be imported but the chart comment will not.

● Logic Chart Blocks (LC16, LC64)

LC16 CENTUM CS logic chart block will be put as for LC64 CS 1000/CS 3000 Logic chartblock with 32 I/O and 32 logic elements. The information of a logic chart can also be im-ported. The details of the information are as follows.

• Element and Wiring

• Comment TextThe text scripts are fixed in the direction from left to right, the characters are fixedupside up. The ratio for horizontal is also applied for vertical.

The following information can not be imported.

• Comment objects other than comment text.

• Chart comment

● Calculation Blocks

The calculation expressions in the calculation blocks will also be imported.

● _OPSW

_OPSW will be imported as for OPSFC.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Input Signal Conversion for Blocks such as PID

In CENTUM CS, pulse input can be specified as follows:

• PULSE (Pulse Train Input Conversion)

• QTPUL (Exact Totalization Pulse Train Input Conversion)

In CS 1000/CS 3000, only one type of pulse input BTHPUL(Pulse Train Input) can bespecified, so that the pulse input from any above two types will be converted into BTHPUL.

The function blocks providing the BTHPUL pulse input conversion include:

PVI, PVI-DV, PID, PI-HLD, PID-BSW, ONOFF, ONOFF-G, PID-TP, PD-MR, PI-BLEND, PID-STC, MLD-PVI, RATIO, BSETU-2, DSET-PVI

● Start Timing of Calculation Blocks

In CENTUM CS, start timing of calculation blocks can be specified as follows:

• T: Periodic + Oneshot

• O: Oneshot

• P: Periodic

In CS 1000/CS 3000, only two types T: Periodic+Oneshot and O: Oneshot can be speci-fied. When importing a calculation block with P: Periodic, it will be converted into T:Periodic+Oneshot type.

● Switch Types of SFC Blocks and Unit Instruments

In CENTUM CS, SFC blocks and Unit instruments have the following four types of switches

• LAMPBUTN: Button with Lamp

• LAMP: Lamp

• BUTTON: Button

• NO: Not used

In CS 1000/CS 3000, only one type LAMPBUTN is available so that any of the aboveswitch types will be converted to LAMPBUTN when importing the function blocks.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Procedure for Importing CENTUM CS Control DrawingImporting control drawing files from CENTUM CS may use the following procedures.

● Procedure 1: Preparing CS Control Drawing File on UNIX for Importing

To prepare the CS control drawing file on UNIX system.

● Procedure 2: Preparing Importing File on Windows

1. Copy the CS control drawing file to a directory in Windows that can be accessed fromCS 1000/CS 3000. There is no need to change the character coding method. Theparagraph mark characters are irrelevant can be ignored.

TIP

Use unit FTP to copy the CS control drawing files.

2. Copy the symbol file for control drawing and for logic chart to the following directories.

• Directory for control drawing symbol file<Root directory of the project>\Drawing\

• Directory for logic chart symbol file<Root directory of the project>\LogicChart\

TIP

The CENTUM CS control drawing symbol file (FbSymbol.s) can be found in the following directories.

• The symbol file created by symbol file tool for master files<Root directory of the project>/real/dfile/master/source

• The symbol file created by symbol file tool for work files<Root directory of the project>/real/dfile/work/source

• When the symbol file has not been created by symbol file tool<Default installed directory>/YDCS/real/dfile/work/source

The CENTUM CS logic chart symbol file (LcSymbol.s) can be found in the following directory.

<Default installed directory>/YDCS/real/dfile/work/source

3. On Windows NT, convert the character code for paragraph mark from UNIX (LF) toWindows’ (CR+LF).

● Procedure 3: Importing CS Control Drawing File on Windows

1. On Windows, start Control Drawing Builder on System View.Click [External File] - [Import CS Source File..] on [File] menu, then a dialog box forselecting file displays.

2. Choose a file for importing (file extension is .s).



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Confirmation of Import ResultWhen importing a CS drawing source file, the event messages for modifying the original fileand the message for data loss are displayed in the message area of the control drawingbuilder and the messages are all log into a file.

Here are some examples of logged message

● When Substituting a Function Block Model

The function block with model name of BDSET-1 (Tag name BD2101) is substituted withBDFSET-1L.

● When Fails to Import a Function Block

The function block with model name of HASTPV (Tag name HS2101) can not be imported.

● When Function Block Information is Partially Lost

The function block with model name of FUNC (Tag name FNC2101) is substituted withFUNC-VAR, the information for line-segment is abandoned.

The function block with model name of ST16 (Tag name ST2101) is imported but conditionsignals (over C17) and operation signals (over A49) are abandoned

● When Function Block Information is Partially Modified

The start timing P (Periodic) to can not be found the function block with model name ofCALCU (Tag name CALC2101) so that T (periodic) is used.

● When Wiring Information is Lost

The wiring information between two connection blocks [AREAIN](PID2101.SET)→[PIO](%Z11102) can not be imported.


<F3.24 Starting Function Block Overview Builder> F3-85

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.24 Starting Function Block Overview BuilderA drawing file can be edited with the Function Block Overview Builder. With thedefault setting for drawing file, double-clicking on a drawing file starts the ControlDrawing Builder. To start the Function Block Overview Builder, switch the drawingfile setting in the System View.

■ Switching the Builders to StartTo open the property sheet for a drawing file from the System View, perform one of thefollowing operations after selecting the drawing file:

• Click on the right mouse button and select [Properties] from the pop-up menu dis-played.

• Select [Properties] from the [File] menu.

Next, set the starting builder in the property sheet. This setting is saved in the drawing fileand becomes effective the next time editing is performed.

After completing the above setting, double-click on the drawing file in the System View. TheFunction Block Overview Builder will start.

IMPORTANT

When a drawing file is saved after the starting builder is changed to the Function BlockOverview Builder, the Graphical window information created with the control drawingbuilder (image created in the drawing pane) will be deleted.

The default starting builder is set in the Edit tab in the Create New FCS dialog box dis-played when a new FCS is created. The starting builder can be designated for each FCS.

■ Calling Function Block Overview Builder by Builder Quick StartIf a related control drawing is built with Function Block Overview builder, the correspondingFunction Block Overview builder can be called out by “Builder Quick Start.” The builder canalso be called out from the windows of “Cross Reference” and “Tag Duplication.”

SEE ALSO

For more information about quick start of the builders, see the following:

“■ Builder Quick Start” in F1.1.4, “Tool Menu of System View”


F3-86<F3.25 Starting Function Block Detail Builder>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.25 Starting Function Block Detail BuilderDetails of a function block can be defined on the Function Block Detail Builder. TheFunction Block Detail Builder can be started from the function block overview pane,drawing pane or System View.

■ How to Start from the Function Block Overview Pane▼ Starting the Function Block Detail Builder

To start the Function Block Detail Builder from the function block overview pane, performeither of the following operations after selecting the line number for the function block:

• Click on the right mouse button and select [Edit Detail] from the pop-up menu beingdisplayed.

• Select [Edit Function Block Detail] from the [Window] menu.

When multiple line numbers are selected, the menu will be shown in gray. Select one linenumber at a time.

■ How to Start from the Drawing PaneTo start the Function Block Detail Builder from the drawing pane, perform either of thefollowing operations after selecting the block symbol for the function block:

• Click on the right mouse button and select [Edit Detail] from the pop-up menu beingdisplayed.

• Select [Edit Function Block Detail] from the [Window] menu.

When multiple block symbols are selected or an object other than a block symbol is se-lected, the menu will be shown in gray. Select one block symbol at a time.

■ How to Start from System ViewTo start the Function Block Detail Builder from System View, select [Open] from the [File]menu after selecting the function block file.

■ Start from Tool WindowsFrom the tool windows such as the the windows of searching for tag names or checkingidentical tags, the related function block detail builder can be called out.

1. Search for a tag name on the tool window of search for tag name or the tool window ofsearching for identical tags.

2. Right-click a tag name of a function block displayed on the search result list.

3. From the pop up menu, choose Function [Builder...] - [Function Block Detail] to startthe function block detail builder.


<F3.25 Starting Function Block Detail Builder> F3-87

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Attentions when Starting the Function Block Detail BuilderWhen the Function Block Detail Builder is started from the Control Drawing Builder, opera-tions on the drawing pane and function block overview pane are subject to the followingrestrictions.

• Editing operation cannot be performed in the drawing pane.

• In the function block overview pane, editing operation is disabled only for the functionblock being edited on the function block detail builder. The information on the functionblock changed on the properties sheet can not be displayed.

IMPORTANT

If connection information regarding a drawing file containing wiring is changed in theFunction Block Detail Builder, the corresponding wiring will be deleted from the drawingpane. If the Function Block Detail Builder was started from System View, the correspondingwiring is deleted from the drawing pane when the drawing file is read on the Control Draw-ing Builder.


F3-88<F3.26 Setting Constants>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.26 Setting ConstantsThis section describes constants on the Others tab displayed by selecting [DetailedSetting Items] from [View].

■ Outline of Constants▼ Others - Constant

Constants are preset tuning parameters, they can be set in the Constant text box on Otherstab. Up to 1,024 alphanumeric characters can be used for each constant.

When online-downloading to an FCS, the constants are compared to the current savedtuning parameters for a modified function block. If those are not identical, the constants willoverride the existing tuning parameters on the FCS. The saved tuning parameters takeprecedence over the constants upon offline downloading to an FCS, while the constantstake precedence over the unsaved tuning parameters upon initial offline downloading to anFCS.

TIP

Setting constants can be omitted. When the constants are omitted, the default settings will be used.

● Syntax

The syntax for setting a constant is DataItemName = Constant

If the constant is a character string, enclose the string in " " double quotation marks.

The syntax for setting a constant for array data is DataItemName[Subscript1] = Constant orDataItemName[Subscript1, Subscript2] = Constant.

When setting multiple constants, separate them with a , (a comma).

• Example of setting constants.

PH=80,PL=20,USER01[1]="ABC",USER02[1,1]=2


<F3.26 Setting Constants> F3-89

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Data Items for Which Constants can not be Set ¡ £

Constants can not be set for some data items as their settings. The table below lists thedata items for which constants can not be set, and the function blocks with these dataitems:

Table List of Data Items for Which Constants can not be Set (1/2) ¡ £

ACFP, ACSP, CDEX, CNFP, CNSP, ELST, ISIG,OSIG, NOWR, NTPV, OPEX, RSTS, RULE, SSTS, STEP, THST, TLST

ST16, M_ST16 (*1), L_ST16 (*1)

Data items for which constants can not be set Function blocks

F032601E.EPS

FV, ONTH, ONTS

PL

MH, ML, PH, X01

KR

MV1, MV2

CSV, MV[1-8]

ERRL, ERRC

CIS, ISS, OSS

Function blocks other than:ST16, M_ST16 (*1), L_ST16 (*1), TM, CTS, CTP, CI, CO, PTC

SS-H, SS-M, SS-L

SS-H, SS-M, SS-L, AS-H, AS-M, AS-L, SS-DUAL

SS-H, SS-M, SS-L, AS-H, AS-M, AS-L

BSI

TPCFL

AVE-M, AVE-C

MC-2, MC-3, MC-2E, MC-3E

PV

RV1, RV2, RV3

SEL

RAW1, RAW2, RAW3

PHAS

PRS

PREV

CTS, CTP, CI, CO, PTC

PG-L13

RATIO

SPLIT

FOUT

CALCU, CALCU-C

LC64

*1 : ¡ £ This function blocks are only available in CS 3000.


F3-90<F3.26 Setting Constants>

IM 33S01B30-01E

Table List of Data Items for Which Constants can not be Set (2/2) ¡ £

Data items for which constants can not be set Function blocks

F032603E.EPS

RSPM[01-32], RQ[01-32]

ZONE

TMP

PT[01-64]

PV[01-16], PT[01-16], PVR

Function blocks other than faceplate blocks

PID-STC, LC64, GT (*1), BAND (*1), BNOT (*1)

PID-STC, LC64, GT (*1), BAND (*1), BNOT (*1)

PID-STC, BAND (*1), BOR (*1)

MC-2, MC-3, switch instrument blocks, MC-2E, MC-3E

SPLIT

SIO-11, SIO-12, SIO-21, SIO-22, SIO-12P, SIO-22P, OND (*1), OFFD (*1), SIO-11E, SIO-12E, SIO-21E, SIO-22E, SIO-12PE, SIO-22PE

BSETU-2, BSETU-3, SS-DUAL, FOUT

BSETU-2, BSETU-3

ALRM, BSTS

All function blocksDSH, DSL, MSH, MSL, SH, SL, SSH, SSL, AIN, AIN1, AIN2, AIN3, AFLS, DR, ASET, PVP, TYPE, CALC, CPV, CPV1, CPV2, DV, CMOD, OMOD

PID-STCRLV1, RLV2, SUM, VL

Faceplate blocksXALM, XBST, XMOD

OPMK

MODE

AF

SIMM

SRH1, SRL1, SRH2, SRL2

PTM

SV

TPCFL, ASTM1, ASTM2

LC64

VLVM

*1 : £ This function block is only available in CS 3000.


<F3.27 Status Display Settings for Control Drawings> F3-91

IM 33S01B30-01E

F3.27 Status Display Settings for Control DrawingsWhen a control drawing is created and saved, the display indicating the status of thecontrol drawing files can be set for the whole project.

The settings are set on Status Display Setting dialog box started from System View.

■ Status Display Setting ItemsStatus display settings of control drawings can be set on Status Display Setting dialog box.

The settings on this dialog box will be reflected for indicating the status of the created and saved controldrawing files.

IMPORTANT

The changed status display settings will not be reflected to the existing control drawingfiles. It is necessary to change the settings before the Control Drawing Builder is created.

● Wiring Color

The colors for default wiring, active wiring and inactive wiring can be set respectively.

● Process Data Display

Font and size of the process data display can be set, the option of “Left justify numericdata” can be selected or deselected. The process data include data status, data value andblock information (ALRM, MODE, and BSTS).

TIP

• When the environment of a project is upgraded, the settings set in Status Display Setting dialog boxfor the project will not be affected.

• When importing a control drawing file of a project created in the environment of the release numberR2.10 to a project in the environment of R2.20, or copy an FCS folder of an existing project into anew project, the settings saved in the drawing file will be reflected in the new project.


F3-92<F3.27 Status Display Settings for Control Drawings>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Recommended Settings for Status DisplayIn order to properly display the control drawing window, the following settings are recom-mended.

● Required Environment for Status Display Setting

To properly display the Status Display windows, the required environment shown belowneeds to be satisfied for status display setting. The required environment is the same forsetting the Graphic windows to recommended size.

• Settings on WindowsTaskbar : Hide (by dragging the upper edge downward)Desktop Area : 1280 x 1024Font Size : Small font

• HIS setup on HIS consoleFont Size : 16

● Recommended Settings

The recommended settings for Status Display Dialog are as follows. Window scaling onHIS is enabled.

Normally, the control drawing status displays are shown on the 21inch monitor (the sameas the CRT in console type HIS) in full screen.

Table Recommended Settings

Recommended Window SizeHIS Display Mode HIS Screen Setting

RequiredFont [12], Left-justified

Recommended Settings for Process Data

Full Screen

Window

1276x880

1024x686

F032701E.EPS

SEE ALSO

For more information about window size, see the following:

F3.1, “Changing Drawing File Settings”


<F3.27 Status Display Settings for Control Drawings> F3-93

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Change Status Display SettingsThe control drawing status display settings can be set on the Status Display Setting dialogbox.

Choose [Status Display Setting] on [Tools] menu of System View, then a dialog box ap-pears as follows.

Status Display Setting

Drawing Logic Chart

Font Size

Wiring Color

Process data Display

Active Wiring

Inactive Wiring

F032702E.EPS

Project Name

ImpactMonotype CorsivaTimes New Roman

16

18

2224

20

MYPJT

Red

Default Wiring White

Green

Courier New

Left justify numeric data

OK Cancel Apply

Courier New 16

Figure Status Display Setting Dialog Box

In the Control Drawing tab of this dialog, the following setting items related to controldrawing display can be set.

TIP

If the same Status Display Setting dialog box is already opened in a different PC, the [OK] and [Apply]buttons are grayed can not be clicked.

● Project Name

The project to which the Status Display Setting is applied.

The selected project is displayed in the combo box.

● Wiring Color

The colors of wiring vary with the states of corresponding I/O signals. They can be selectedfrom the list box.

• Default Wiring : White

• Active Wiring : Red

• Inactive Wiring : Green


F3-94<F3.27 Status Display Settings for Control Drawings>

IM 33S01B30-01E


The following items regarding to text style of the process data can be set. The settings canbe set by choosing from the list box or by directly entering a text.

• Font : Courier New (default)

• Size : 12 (default), 8 to 72 selectable.

Moreover, the option “left justify numeric data” can be selected or deselected.

TIP

In the project with previous environment before R2.10, the default font size was 10 and the justification ofprocess data was right justified.


<F4. Editing Logic Chart> F4-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

F4. Editing Logic ChartThe logical description of the logic chart block uses a logical operation element toexpress the relationship between the input signal and output signal with the inter-lock block diagram (IBD) method.

The logical description expressed by the interlock block diagram method is calledlogic chart.

The logic chart is edited in the logic chart edit window. In this window, the inputsignal, output signal, logical operation element, and flow of data are converted intosymbols and displayed as objects.

Results of the edit in the logic chart edit window are saved in the logic chart blockbuilder file.


F4-2

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.1 Overview of Logic Chart Edit Window>

F4.1 Overview of Logic Chart Edit WindowThe logic chart edit window can be displayed from either the Function Block Over-view Builder, Control Drawing Builder, or System View. The logic chart is describedby combining objects in the client area of the logic chart edit window.

■ How to Display the Logic Chart Edit WindowTo edit the logic chart, use one of the following methods and display the logic chart editwindow.

● Displaying from the Function Block Overview Builder

The logic chart edit window can be displayed by one of the following methods.

• Select a line of the logic chart, then click the [Edit Function Block Detail] task on[Window] menu.

• Double-click a line selector on the logic chart.

● Displaying from the Control Drawing Builder

Select the logic chart block in the control drawing, then execute [Window] - [Edit FunctionBlock Detail].

● Displaying from System View

In System View, double-click the builder file for the logic chart block.

● Displaying from Search Result

When using the name search tool, using the tag name of the logic chart from the result listcan display the window. Move the cursor to the tag name of the logic chart, then right-clickthe mouse and choose [Builder...]-[Logic Chart Status Display] from the popup menu, theLogic Chart Status Display Builder can be started.


<F4.1 Overview of Logic Chart Edit Window> F4-3

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Client Area in Logic Chart Edit Window▼ Logic Chart Edit Window

The logic chart is described in the client area of the logic chart edit window.

A

Courier New Center White16

F203.MODE.AUT

Example of Logic Chart

Switch view: LC64X1 LC64X3

F203.MODE.MAN

%Z012101.PV.ON

F201.MODE.AUT

F202.MODE.CAS

%SW0413.PV.ON

F203.ALRM.HI

SR1

%SW0413.PV.H

F203.ALRM.LO

Ready

File Edit View Insert Format Tools Draw Window Help

TProcessing Timing Basic ScanScan... Matrix ExpansionExecution

Function Block Detail Builder - [Pit:MYPJT Stn:FCS0102 Draw:DR0003 File:LO.edf - Edit Logic Chart]

F040101E.EPS

1

1

1

2

2

A B C D E F G H I J K L M

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Edit Logic ChartEdit Window

%Z012201.PV.H

%SW0413.PV.H

%Z012201.PV.H

%Z012202.PV.H

100 %1

FigureClient Area in Logic Chart Edit Window

The client area is a matrix comprised of 32(H) x 26(W) areas. Each area of the matrix isexpressed by coordinates (A, 1) to (Z, 32).

The objects indicated below are arranged (drawn) in the client area. These objects arecombined to describe the logic chart.


F4-4

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Element

Expresses the input element, output element, or logical operation element.

● Wiring

Indicates the flow of data between element symbols using lines.

● Text

Any text (character string) can be displayed.

● Switching Views

It is possible to switch from the currently displayed Logic Chart Status Display window toanother Logic Chart Status Display window, or to switch from the logic chart edit window toanother logic chart edit window.

However only the Logic Chart Status Display windows and logic chart edit windows in thesame control drawing and the same FCS can be switched.

■ Toolbar Used for Editing a Logic Chart

● Standard Toolbar

OpenSave

UpdateCreate Working File

F040102E.EPS

Print PreviewPrint

CutCopy

PasteUndo

Display/Hide Data MenuShow/Hide Detailed Setting Items

Edit Logic ChartEdit Window

Figure Standard Toolbar

● LC Standard Toolbar

100 %

F040103E.EPS

GridShow/Hide Display Terminal

Show/Hide of Execution Order Display Specify Zoom Size

Area ZoomZoom Out

Zoom In

1

Figure LC Standard Toolbar



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Draw Toolbar

F040104E.EPS

A

Select ModeElement

WiringText

Switch View

Figure Draw Toolbar

● Format Toolbar

Courier New Left

Black

10

F040105E.EPS

Font Type

Font Size

BoldItalic

Underline Properties

Alignment

Text Color

Figure Format Toolbar

● Edit Object Toolbar

F040106E.EPS

AlignDistribute

UngroupGroup

Re-wiring

Figure Edit Object Toolbar


F4-6

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ List of Menus for the Logic Chart Edit Window

Table Commands in [File] Menu

Command Action

Open... Opens a logic chart drawing file saved in .sva format.

Close Closes the active window.

SaveStores the contents being edited to the logic chart drawing file andstatus display file. This cannot be executed when the projectattribute is the current project, or when editing an individual drawing.

Save As... Saves the contents being edited under a different file name and .sva file type.

Update Updates the contents being edited.

External File

Default Reads the default file.

Import... Imports an external file.

Export... Exports the CS source file in text format.

Properties Displays the file property sheet.

Print Preview Displays the Print Preview window.

Print... Prints

Print All Details Prints the Logic Chart Builder file being edited.

Download

Downloads the function block being edited in the logic chart builder file to FCS and HIS. Writes to the logic chart function block file and status display file only when the download is successful. This cannot be executed when the project attribute is not the current project, or when editing an individual drawing.

The Latest File

Exit Function Block DetailBuilder Exits the Function Block Detail Builder.

Displays recently used file names.

F040107E.EPS

Create Working File Saves the contents being edited to a working file.



IM 33S01B30-01E

Table Commands in [Edit] Menu

Command Action

Undo Cancels the previous edit.

Cut Cuts out the selected object and saves it on the clipboard.

Copy Saves the selected object on the clipboard.

Paste Retrieves data that is saved on the clipboard.

Delete Deletes the selected object.

Selection Mode Switches to the object selection mode.

Select All Selects all objects.

Deselect All Cancels the selection of all objects.

Search for String Searches for an object using a character string.

Find NextSearches for the next applicable character string using the setsearch character string.

Get Tag Comment Automatically access the comment of the I/O elements.

Change Processing Timing Displays the dialog box for changing the processing timing.

F040108E.EPS

Select Specified Elements... Selects a specific type of objects.

Table Commands in [View] Menu

Command Action

Switch EditWindow

Edit LogicChart Switches to the Logic Chart Edit window.

FunctionBlockDetailDefinition

Switches to the Function Block Detail window.

Zoom In Enlarges the display area.

Zoom Out Reduces the display area.

Zoom Area Enlarges a specific area.

Whole Page Enlarges or reduces the display area so that the entire drawing areacan be displayed.

Display terminal Sets Show/Hide the terminal. When selecting a symbol, the terminal is displayed even if the setting is “hide.”

Execution Order Sets Show/Hide the execution order of logical operations.

Toolbar Sets Show/Hide the toolbar.

Status Bar Switches the status bar display.

Message Display Area Sets Show/Hide the message display area.

F040109E.EPS


F4-8

IM 33S01B30-01E


Table Commands in [Insert] Menu

Command Action

Element Draws elements.

Wiring Draws wiring.

Text Draws a text.

Switch View Draws a switch view.

Input Element Draws an input element object.

Output Element Draws an output element object.

Logic Element

AND Draws an AND object.

OR Draws an OR object.

NOT Draws a NOT object.

Flip-Flop

SRS1-R Draws a SRS1-R object.

SRS2-R Draws a SRS2-R object.

SRS1-S Draws a SRS1-S object.

SRS2-S Draws a SRS2-S object.

Wipeout Draws a wipeout object.

TimerOND Draws an OND object.

OFFD Draws an OFFD object.

One-shotTON Draws a TON object.

TOFF Draws a TOFF object.

Comparator

CMP-GE Draws a CMP-GE object.

CMP-GT Draws a CMP-GT object.

CMP-EQ Draws a CMP-EQ object.

F040110E.EPS

Table Commands in [Format] Menu

Command Action

Properties Displays the object property page.

F040111E.EPS

Table Commands in [Tools] Menu

Command Action

Create Default File Creates the user defined default file.

Delete Default File Deletes the user defined default file.

Tag/Window Name List... Displays the tag/window selection dialog box.

F040112E.EPS



IM 33S01B30-01E

Table Commands in [Draw] Menu

Command Action

Grid Option... Specifies the grid option.

Re-wiring Redraws all wiring automatically.

Change Execution Order Changes the execution order of logical operations for the symbolsconnected to selected wiring.

Insert endpoint Inserts an endpoint in the wiring.

Align Objects Displays a dialog box for arranging the selected objects.

Distribute Objects Displays a dialog box for arranging the selected objects in a uniformmanner.

Group Groups selected objects.

Ungroup Cancels the grouping of selected objects.

F040113E.EPS

Table Commands in [Window] Menu

Command Action

Switch View Opens the logic chart edit window specified by a selected switch view.

Cascade Displays all of the currently open logic chart edit windows in anoverlapping view.

Tile Horizontally Adjusts the size of each window and lines them up from left to rightso that all open logic chart edit windows can be viewed.

Tile Vertically Adjusts the size of each window and lines them up from top tobottom so that all open logic chart edit windows can be viewed.

Arrange Icons Arranges and displays the logic chart edit windows that have beenmade into an icon.

Document window title Displays the list of titles of currently open logic chart edit windows.

F040114E.EPS

Table Commands in [Help] Menu

Command Action

Using the Online Manual... Starts the on-line manual.

Builder Definition Items... Displays the list of builder definition items.

Reference Index... Displays the reference information.

Version Information... Displays the version information.

F040115E.EPS

■ Status Display Settings for Logic ChartsThe settings on status display setting window for logic charts will be reflected when display-ing the logic charts, such as the wiring colors and the process data display styles. Thesettings can be set on Status Display Setting dialog box started from System View.The settings are valid only when the logic chart files are saved after the settings are set. Sothat it is necessary to set the status display settings before editing logic chart files.

SEE ALSO

For more information about logic chart status display settings, see the following:



F4-10

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.2 Changing Grid>

F4.2 Changing GridThe grid displayed in the client area can be changed. The grid can be changed in theGrid Options dialog box.

■ How to Change the Grid▼ Grid Option

A grid can be displayed in the client area to facilitate the drawing of element symbols andwiring.

Choose [Grid Options] from the [Drawing] menu to display the grid option dialog box forsetting the client area’s grid.

CancelOK

F040201E.EPS

Grid Option

Poin

Matrix

Dot

Grid

Grid Type

Grid Color

Gray 75

Display grid

4

Grid Size

Figure Grid Option Dialog Box

The following items can be changed in the Grid Options dialog box.

• Grid type

• Grid color

• Show/hide grid

• Grid size

The new grid settings will be shown once the [OK] button in the Grid Options dialog box isselected and the dialog box is closed. These settings are saved when the Logic ChartBuilder is closed, and remain effective when the builder is started next time.


<F4.3 Setting File Properties> F4-11

IM 33S01B30-01E

F4.3 Setting File PropertiesThe line type for the wiring in the client area is set for each logic chart block builderfile using the file property sheet. The date of creating and updating the logic chartblock builder file can be checked in the file property sheet.

■ File Outline and Attribute▼ File Properties

Click [Properties] on the [File] menu on the logic chart edit window can display the propertysheet.

The property sheet for the logic chart block builder file consists of the following two types oftabs:

● Outline Tab

In this tab, the file name, project name, update date and time, creation date and time aredisplayed.

● Attribute Tab

In this tab, the window size and line type for wiring can be changed.

The attribute tab for changing the line type of the wiring is shown below.

F040301E.EPS

CancelOK

File Properties

Outline Attribute

Line style of wiring

Direct Direction Reverse Direction

Figure File Property Sheet


F4-12

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.3 Setting File Properties>

● Line Type for Wiring

Select the line type for forward wiring and reverse wiring. The selected Line type can be asolid line, dashed line, chain line, single-dotted chain line and double-dotted chain line.

Forward wiring means wiring that follows the logic operation execution sequence in thelogic chart. Reverse wiring means wiring in the reverse direction from the logic operationexecution sequence.

F040302E.EPSReverse wiring

Forward wiring

Order of execution

%SW0011.PV.L(W.O)

12

Figure Forward Wiring and Reverse Wiring


<F4.4 Setting Object Properties> F4-13

IM 33S01B30-01E

F4.4 Setting Object PropertiesProperties can be set for the object created in the client area. Properties are set foreach object using the property sheet.

The object position can also be set on the common tab. For other settings, differenttabs are available for each type of object.

■ Common TabThe position of each object (X coordinate, Y coordinate) can be changed or displayed.

X Y

F040401E.EPS

Wiring

Common Wiring

Position

ApplyCancelOK

Figure Common Tab

Clicking the [OK] or [Apply] button shows changes to the selected objects in the client area.Note that after clicking the [OK] button, the modified contents will be entered to the objectand the property sheet will be closed.

As for the wiring, the object’s position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) is grayed out and cannotbe changed.


F4-14

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.4 Setting Object Properties>

■ Element Property Sheet▼ Element Properties

The element property sheet includes the common tab and element tab. The element andshape of an element symbol can be selected in the element tab.

ApplyCancelOK

F040402E.EPS

Element

Symbol

Symbol List

AND-Left-5

<< >>

Element Name AND

Matrix Coordinate E

Common Element

...

3

[Element Change] button

Display area of element symbol

Figure Element Tab


● Element Name

The element name is displayed. To change the element name, click the [Element Change]button. The element selection dialog box is then displayed.

● Matrix Coordinate

Displays the coordinate of the element symbol.

● Element Symbol

The element symbol is displayed. To change the element symbol, click the [Symbol List],[<<] or [>>] button.

TIP

When multiple element symbols are selected in the client area, the background color of the symboldisplay area is black if the element symbols are of the same type and gray if the element symbols are ofdifferent types. The shape of the symbol displayed will be that of the element symbol initially selected inthe client area. The shapes of multiple element symbols can be changed all at once by clicking the[Symbol List] button, if all element symbols selected in the client area are of the same type.



IM 33S01B30-01E

SEE ALSO

The timer element (OND, OFFD) includes three tabs: common tab, element tab and timer setting tab. Forthe timer setting tab, see the following:

“■ Timer Element Property Sheet”

■ Timer Element Property SheetThe timer element (OND, OFFD) includes three tabs: common tab, element tab and timersetting tab. The timer number and timer comment can be set in the timer setting tab.

SEE ALSO

For the element tab of the timer element (OND, OFFD), see the following:

“■ Element Property Sheet”

TIP

When multiple element symbols are selected in the client area, the timer setting tab is displayed if theelement symbols are all timer element symbols.

F040403E.EPS

ApplyCancelOK

Element

Common Element Set Timer

Timer

Timer 1

Timer TIMER No.1

Figure Timer Setting Tab

Clicking the [OK] or [Apply] button shows changes to selected objects in the client area.Note that after clicking the [OK] button, the modified contents will be entered to the objectand the property sheet will be closed.


F4-16

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Timer Number

The timer number is displayed. When a timer element is created, an integer within therange of 1 to 64 is automatically assigned as a timer number. However, the number can bechanged later as desired. When changing the timer number, if the same number is alreadybeing used for another timer element, then the timer number will be switched between thetwo timer elements. For example, when timer element A has timer number 1, if the sametimer number 1 is set for timer element B that previously had timer number 3, then the timernumber 3 instead will be assigned for timer element A.

The timer number is assigned so that the same number is not used more than once in thelogic chart. If multiple timer elements are selected in the client area, then the timer numbercannot be changed.

● Timer Comment

A comment can be attached to the timer element symbol. Up to 24 alphanumeric charac-ters (12 double-byte characters) can be set for the timer comment.

TIP

By selecting multiple timer elements, the timer comments for those elements can be changed all at once.

The timer comment column is “white” when the timer comments for selected timer elements have thesame contents while it is gray when the comments are different. If the contents are changed in this state,the column becomes white.

■ Wiring Property Sheet▼ Wiring Properties

The wiring property sheet includes the common tab and wiring tab. The wiring tab displaysproperties that were set when the wiring was drawn. The wiring may or may not be editeddepending on these properties. For example, the wiring can be moved as desired in theclient area only in the “Manual” setting.

When the wiring object is selected, choosing [Properties] from the [Format] menu displaysthe wiring property sheet.

In wiring, the object position (X coordinate, Y coordinate) in the common tab is grayed outand cannot be changed.

F040404E.EPS

Wiring

Common Wiring

Automatic Manual

Wiring

Automatic wiring immediately after setting

ApplyCancelOK

Figure Wiring Tab

Clicking the [OK] or [Apply] button shows changes to selected objects in the client area.Note that after clicking the [OK] button, the modified contents will be entered to the objectand the property sheet will be closed.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Wiring

Set either Automatic or Manual as the wiring property.

The “Automatic Wiring Immediately After Setting” option can be selected only when “Auto-matic” is set in the wiring properties. When this option is selected, automatic wiring is doneonce the property sheet is closed. If the “Automatic Wiring Immediately After Setting” optionis not selected, then only the wiring property becomes automatic but automatic wiring is notperformed.

In the logic chart edit window, the color of wiring done automatically is magenta while thatof wiring done manually is cyan.

■ Text Property Sheet▼ Text Properties

The text property sheet includes the common tab and text tab. The text font and size canbe changed in this tab.

When the text object is selected, choosing [Properties] from the [Format] menu displays thetext property sheet.

OK

Text

Common Text

Font Font Style

Bold

Size

Sample

Position

Text Color

Background Color

Transparent

F040405E.EPS

ApplyCancelOK

Courier New

Courier NewLucida ConsoleLucida Sans UnicodeTimes New RomanWingdings

16

161820222426 Center

White

Black

Italic

Underline

ABCabcdefg

Figure Text Tab



F4-18

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Font

The font type can be selected from all of the fonts installed in the HIS.

● Size

The size can be set within the range of 8 to 72 points. However, the available sizes varywith types of font used.

● Position

This sets the position where the character string is displayed in the text area. Align Left,Center or Align Right can be defined.

● Font Style

This applies bold, italic or underlining to text.

● Color of text

One color can be selected from the color palette.

● Background color

One color can be selected from the color palette.

TIP

By selecting multiple texts, the property settings for those texts can be changed all at once.

The setting item column is [white] when the properties for selected texts are the same, while it is [gray] ifthey are different. If the properties are changed in this state, the column becomes white.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Property Sheet for Switch ViewThe property sheet for Switch View includes the common tab, text tab and switch view tab.In switch view tab, the tag name of the logic chart block can be edited.

SEE ALSO

For text tab, see the following:

“■ Text Property Sheet”

When the display switching primitive is selected, choosing [Properties] from the [Format]menu displays the property sheet.

F040406E.EPS

ApplyCancelOK

Switch View

Common Switch View

Tag

Text

Figure Switch View Tab

● Tag Name

TIP

By selecting multiple Switch View objects, the tag name settings for those objects can be changed all atonce.

The tag name column is [white] when the tag names for selected Switch View objects are the same, whileit is [gray] if they are different. If the tag names are changed in this state, the column becomes white.


F4-20

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.5 Element Symbol Type and Element Resource Count>

F4.5 Element Symbol Type and Element ResourceCountThe objects (element symbols) expressing elements in the logic chart include thefollowing three symbols:

• Input element symbol

• Output element symbol

• Logic operation element symbol

The number of element symbols that can be drawn in the logic chart is based on theelement resource count. The element resource count differs by element symbol.

■ Input Element SymbolThe input element symbols include those that only describe condition signals, and thosethat describe both condition signals and comments.

Comments are described in the comment description area of the input element symbol.

● Syntax of Condition Signal Description

▼ Syntax of Condition Signal Description

[Tag name] . [Data item name] . (=) [Condition specification]

Example) LIC001.ALRM.HH

LIC001.ALRM.HH

LIC001.ALRM.HHNo.1 TANK LEVEL

Condition signal description area

Element symbol that only can describe a condition signal

Element symbol that can describe both a condition signal and comment

Comment description area

CommentF040501E.EPS

Figure Description of an Input Element Symbol


<F4.5 Element Symbol Type and Element Resource Count> F4-21

IM 33S01B30-01E

● List of Input Element Symbols

Condition signal

Condition signal

Condition signalComment

Comment Condition signal

Input1

F040502E.EPS

Condition signal

CommentCondition signal

Comment

Condition signal

Condition signal


Comment

Condition signal


Comment

Condition signal


Condition signal

Figure List of Input Element Symbols (1/2)


F4-22

IM 33S01B30-01E


Condition signal

Condition signal



Input2

Condition signal

Condition signal

Condition signal

Condition signal

Condition signal

Input4

Condition signal

Condition signal

Input3

Condition signal

Condition signal

Condition signal

Input5

Condition signal

Condition signal

Condition signal

Condition signal

Condition signal

Input6

Condition signal

Condition signal

Condition signal

F040503E.EPS

Figure List of Input Element Symbols (2/2)

■ Output Element SymbolThe output element symbols include those that only describe action signals and those thatdescribe both action signals and comments.

Comments are described in the comment description area of the output element symbol.

● Syntax of Action Signal Description

▼ Syntax of Action Signal Description

[Tag name] . [Data item name] . (=) [Action specification]

Example) SW0001.PV.L

SW0001.PV.L

SW0001.PV.L

Action signal description areaComment description area

Action signal description area

F040504E.EPS

Element symbol that only can describe an action signal

Element symbol that can describe both an action signal and comment

M01 Interlock SW

Comment

Figure Description of an Output Element Symbol



IM 33S01B30-01E

● List of Output Element Symbols

Action signal

Action signal

Action signal Comment

Output1


Action signal

CommentAction signal

Comment

Action signal

Action signal


Comment

Action signal

Action signal

Comment


Action signal

Action signalComment

F040505E.EPS

Figure List of Output Element Symbols (1/2)


F4-24

IM 33S01B30-01E


Action signal

Action signal



Output2

Action signal

Action signal

Action signal

Action signal

Action signal

Output4

Action signal

Action signal

Output3

Action signal

Action signal

Action signal

Output5

Action signal

Action signal

Action signal

Action signal

Action signal

Output6

Action signal

Action signal

Action signal

F040506E.EPS

Figure List of Output Element Symbols (2/2)



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Logic Operation Element Symbols

● AND (logical product) Operator

F040507E.EPS

5 (*1) 5 (*1) 5 (*1)

13 (*1)

19 (*1)

31 (*2)

5 (*1)

*1: Indicates the number of input terminals*2: Indicates the number of input terminals. The maximum number of input terminals for one logic operator is 20. A wiring

alarm will be initiated if more than 20 signals are wired to one logic operator.

Figure Element Symbol for AND Operator

● OR (logical sum) Operator

5 (*1) 5 (*1) 5 (*1)

13 (*1)

19 (*1)

31 (*2)

5 (*1)

F040508E.EPS

*1: Indicates the number of input terminals*2: Indicates the number of input terminals. The maximum number of input terminals for one logic operator is 20. A wiring

alarm will be initiated if more than 20 signals are wired to one logic operator.

Figure Element Symbol for OR Operator


F4-26

IM 33S01B30-01E


● NOT (Negation) Operator

F040509E.EPS

Figure Element Symbol for NOT Operator

● SRS1-S (Set-Dominant Flip-Flop with 1 Output) Operator

S

R1

F040510E.EPS

Figure Element Symbol for SRS1-S Operator

● SRS2-S (Set-Dominant Flip-Flop with 2 Output) Operator

S

R2

F040511E.EPS

Figure Element Symbol for SRS2-S Operator

● SRS1-R (Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop with 1 Output) Operator

S1

R

F040512E.EPS

Figure Element Symbol for SRS1-R Operator

● SRS2-R (Reset-Dominant Flip-Flop with 2 Output) Operator

S2

R

F040513E.EPS

Figure Element Symbol for SRS2-R Operator

● WOUT (Wipeout) Operator

(W.O) (W.O)

F040514E.EPS

Figure Element Symbol for WOUT Operator



IM 33S01B30-01E

● OND (On Delay Timer) Operator

1

Timer 1

Timer number

Timer comment

F040515E.EPS

1

Figure Element Symbol for OND Operator

● OFFD (Off Delay Timer) Operator

1

F040516E.EPS

1

Timer 2

Timer number

Timer comment

Figure Element Symbol for OFFD Operator

● TON (One-Shot Rising-Edge Trigger) Operator

F040517E.EPS

Figure Element Symbol for TON Operator

● TOFF (One-Shot Falling-Edge Trigger) Operator

F040518E.EPS

Figure Element Symbol for TOFF Operator

● CMP-GT (Comparator [>]) Operator

�

F040519E.EPS

Figure Element Symbol for CMP-GT Operator


F4-28

IM 33S01B30-01E


● CMP-GE (Comparator [�]) Operator

�

F040520E.EPS

�

Figure Element Symbol for CMP-GE Operator

● CMP-EQ (Comparator [=]) Operator

�

F040521E.EPS

Figure Element Symbol for CMP-EQ Operator



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Element Resource Count▼ Element Resource Count

The element resource count is determined by the types of elements. The number of ele-ments that can be drawn in the client area is determined by the total element resourcecount.

Table Element Resource Count and Type of Element

Elementresource

countType of element

1Direct connection of input element and output element (as a logic operationelement conversion) Input1, Output1AND, OR, NOT, OND, OFFD, TON, TOFF

2 Input2, Output2SRS1-S, SRS2-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-R, WOUT, CMP-GT, CMP-GE, CMP-EQ

3 Input3, Output3

4 Input4, Output4

5 Input5, Output5

6 Input6, Output6

F040522E.EPS

The limit for element resource count for a Logic Chart Block (LC64) are 32 for input ele-ment symbols, 32 for output element symbols and 64 for logic operation element symbols.

The element resource count will be checked at the timing indicated below. If the elementresource used exceeds the limit, an error message will appear.

• When an element symbol is added

• When attribute of an element symbol is changed

Element resource count is indicated on the status bar.

F040523E.EPS

ChangeSelect7/8/6

Input elementLogic operation element

Output element

Figure Element Resource Count


F4-30

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.6 Switching to Mode for Editing Objects>

F4.6 Switching to Mode for Editing ObjectsSwitch to the selection mode for editing the logic chart.

■ How to Switch to the Selection ModeTo switch to the selection mode, do one of the following:

• Choose [Selection Mode] from the [Edit] menu.

• Click the [Select Mode] button on the toolbar.

• Push [ESC] key.

F040601E.EPS

Figure Selection Mode Button

The following can be performed once the selection mode is set.

• Selection of an object drawn in the logic chart

• Definition of the attributes for each object drawn in the logic chart

• Editing, such as deletion, copying, etc. of each object drawn in the logic chart

Select the element tool, wiring tool, or other tool to cancel the selection mode.


<F4.7 Drawing and Editing an Element Symbol> F4-31

IM 33S01B30-01E

F4.7 Drawing and Editing an Element SymbolSelect the element and symbol shape to draw the element symbol in the client area.The element symbol drawn can be edited in the client area (move, copy, delete, etc.).

■ How to Draw an Element▼ Insert Element

Do one of the following to draw an element symbol:

• Choose [Element] from the [Insert] menu.

• Click [Element] on the toolbar.

The element selection dialog box is displayed. In this element selection dialog box, select adesired element and its symbol shape.

CancelOK

F040701E.EPS

Select Element

Input Element Input1 Input2 Input3 Input4 Input5 Input6Output ElementLogic Operation Element

Symbol

Element Input1

Symbol List

Input>

<< >>

Figure Element Selection Dialog Box

Clicking the [OK] button or select the [Element] on [Insert] menu, the element symbol canbe inserted on the client area of the drawing. Then the condition signal or manipulationsignal can be defined according to the requirement of each symbol.

SEE ALSO

The syntax for describing a condition signal or action signal is the same as for the sequence table block.

For the description on control action of a condition signal or action signal in the sequence table block, seethe following:

D3.2, “Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E)”


F4-32

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.7 Drawing and Editing an Element Symbol>

● Drawing an Input Element Symbol

Once an input element symbol is drawn, the status of the condition signal area changesand entering text becomes possible. Enter the condition signal according to the followingdescription format.

[Tag name (label name)] . [Data item name] . (=) [Condition specification]

● Drawing an Output Element Symbol

Once an output element symbol is drawn, the action signal area enters the input waitstatus. Enter the action signal according to the description format below.

[Tag name (label name)] . [Data item name] . (=) [Action specification]

■ How to Select Multiple Element SymbolsDo one of the following to select multiple element symbols:

• While holding down the [Ctrl] key, select each additional element symbol.

• Create a rectangular area to enclose all element symbols.

• Clicking the [Select Specified Elements..] task on the [Edit] menu, the types of ele-ments can be selected from the dialog box of Select Specified Elements.

Reset

Symbol (In)Symbol (OUT)Symbol (LOGIC)WireTextTag

Set

Object Type

F040702E.EPS

Select Specified Elements

OK Cancel

Figure Select Specified Elements Dialog Box

The line of selected element symbols becomes thicker and each symbol turns to green.The terminal will be displayed even if the terminal display setting is set to “hide.”

To cancel the selection of individual symbols, select the element symbols to be deselectedwhile holding down the [Ctrl] key.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Move an Element SymbolAn element symbol can be moved by drag & drop. In this case, the element symbol will bemoved with its wiring information (connected wiring properties and terminal position infor-mation) intact.

F040703E.EPS

Move

FIC100.MODE.AUT

FIC100.MODE.AUT

Figure Moving an Element Symbol

When a wired element symbol is moved, it will be rewired based on the wiring properties.

F040704E.EPS

Drag

%SW0013.PV.L %SW0013.PV.L

%SW0013.PV.L

Figure Moving a Wired Element Symbol

■ How to Change the Condition Signal, Action Signal and Comment for anI/O Element Symbol

The following shows how to change the condition signal, action signal, and comment for anI/O element symbol.

FIC300.MODE.AUT

FIC100.MODE.AUT

FIC100.MODE.AUT

FIC100.MODE.AUT

Switch to the selection mode,

then select an element symbol

Select the text area

Change the text

Selection status

Text input wait status

FIC300.MODE.AUT

FIC300.MODE.AUT

Click another area or press

the [Return] key

The entered text is confirmed.

F040705E.EPS

Figure Changing the Condition Signal for an I/O Element Symbol


F4-34

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ How to Change an Element or an Element SymbolAn element or an element symbol is changed using the element property sheet.

To change the element name, click the [Element Change] button immediately to the right ofthe element name. The element selection dialog box is then displayed. To change theelement symbol, click the [Symbol List], [<<] or [>>] button.

ApplyCancelOK

F040706E.EPS

Element

Symbol

Symbol List

AND-Left-5

<< >>

Element Name AND

Matrix Coordinate E

Common Element

...

3

[Element Change] button

Figure Element Property Sheet

The following explains the items for changing the element symbol and the element.

• Once an element symbol is changed, the wiring connected to that element symbol isrewired according to the wiring properties (automatic/manual).

• If the number of terminals decreases due to a change made to the element symbol,then the wiring will become an auxiliary wiring in case it has lost the connectiondestination.

• Once a change is made to the element symbol, it cannot be canceled.

• Multiple element symbols can only be changed all at once when all these elementsymbols are of the same kind.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Copy an Element SymbolAn element symbol can be copied in the client area. To copy an element symbol, select theelement symbol and do one of the following:

• Dragging an object while holding down the [Ctrl] key.

• After choosing [Copy] from the [Edit] menu, select [Paste].

• After clicking the [Copy] button on the toolbar, click the [Paste] button.

• After choosing [Copy] from the pop-up menu, select [Paste].

When creating a copy of an element symbol, the element symbol and the element type arestored on the clipboard. To paste, specify a desired matrix.

F040707E.EPS

C C

Copy of C symbol

PasteDelete

Copy

PropertyCut

Figure Copying an Element Symbol

When making a copy of an element symbol including wiring, select all element symbolsconnected by that particular wiring.

F040708E.EPS

Drag

FIC100.MODE.AUT

FIC200.MODE.AUT

Wiring to be copied

Figure Selecting an Object when Copying an Element Symbol and Its Wiring


F4-36

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ How to Cut an Element SymbolAn element symbol can be cut in the client area. To cut an element symbol, select theelement symbol and do one of the following:

• Choose [Cut] from the [Edit] menu.

• Click the [Cut] button on the toolbar.

• Choose [Cut] from the pop-up menu.

When an element symbol is cut in the client area, the element symbol and element type arestored on the clipboard. Connected wiring is then deleted.

F040709E.EPS

C

Cut

PasteDelete

Copy

Property

Figure Cutting an Element Symbol



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Delete an Element SymbolAn element symbol can be deleted in the client area. To delete an element symbol, selectthe element symbol and do one of the following:


• Choose [Delete] from the [Edit] menu.

• Choose [Delete] from the pop-up menu.

When an element symbol is deleted, the wiring connected to that element is deleted at thesame time. The element symbol cannot be deleted by itself. Multiple element symbols canbe deleted all at once.

FIC100.MODE.AUT

FIC200.MODE.AUT

%SW0011.PV.L

%SW0012.PV.L

%SW0013.PV.L

FIC100.MODE.AUT

FIC200.MODE.AUT

%SW0011.PV.L

%SW0013.PV.L

F040710E.EPS

Click to select

Delete operation

Figure Deleting an Element Symbol


F4-38

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.8 Drawing and Editing Wirings>

F4.8 Drawing and Editing WiringsWiring can be drawn by specifying the I/O element symbol and the logic operationelement symbol in the client area. The wiring drawn can be edited in the client area(move, copy, delete, etc.).

■ Overview of WiringWiring is displayed with arrows that indicate the flow of data between an input elementsymbol and a logic operation element symbol or between a logic operation element symboland an output element symbol. The two methods for drawing wiring objects are shownbelow:

• Automatic wiring

• Manual wiring

The property of the wiring drawn with automatic wiring is set as “automatic” while that of thewiring drawn with manual wiring is set as “manual.” Wiring may or may not be editeddepending on its properties.

Wiring consists of forward wiring and reverse wiring. The two kinds of wiring are displayedin the client area, using opposite arrows to indicate their difference. Forward wiring meanswiring that follows the logical operation execution sequence in the logic chart while reversewiring means wiring that runs in the reverse direction from the logical operation executionsequence.

■ How to Draw Wiring Using Automatic Wiring▼ Automatic Wiring

To perform automatic wiring, do one of the following:

• Choose [Wiring] from the [Insert] menu.

• Click the [Wiring] button on the toolbar.

F040801E.EPS

Figure Wiring Button

Specify the start and end points of a wiring line in the client area. The wiring route is auto-matically determined and the wiring is drawn. The color of the wiring is purple.

When there is only one connection sourceF040802E.EPS

CLICKCLICKCLICK

%SW0011.PV.L

Figure Automatic Wiring Method

With automatic wiring, the wiring route is determined in accordance with the following rules:

• A horizontal or vertical wiring line does not overlap with other lines going in the samedirection.

• Wiring does not cut across the element symbol area.


<F4.8 Drawing and Editing Wirings> F4-39

IM 33S01B30-01E

Note the following with respect to automatic wiring.

• A wired terminal cannot be specified as an input connection terminal.

• Wiring cannot be moved, and endpoint nodes cannot be inserted in wiring.

• Up to 20 input connection terminals can be specified as wiring destinations of a singleoutput connection terminal.

● Branching of the Wiring

Multiple destinations can be specified as the endpoint of wiring. In this case, the wiring willautomatically branch as it is drawn.

F040803E.EPS

CLICK CLICK

CLICKCLICK

1 2

43

%SW0011.PV.L

%SW0013.PV.L

Figure Branching of Wiring in Automatic Wiring

Wiring that has already been drawn can also be modified to branch off. In wiring alreadydrawn, specify the point where the branching should occur and specify the wiring destina-tion.

CLICK

F040804E.EPS

CLICKCLICK

1

32

%SW0011.PV.L

%SW0013.PV.L

Figure Branching of Wiring Already Drawn

● Re-Wiring

All of the wiring already drawn in the client area can be redrawn in accordance with theautomatic wiring rules.

Choose [Re-wiring] from the [Drawing] menu. Rewiring will connect the terminals of theelement symbols used in the previous wiring.


F4-40

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Auxiliary Wiring

Depending on the layout of the element symbols, the wiring can be drawn without followingthe automatic wiring rules, these are, auxiliary wirings. The color of auxiliary wiring is white.

[Download] or [Save] cannot be selected for a logic chart block builder file that containsauxiliary wiring. To save a file that contains auxiliary wiring, choose [Save As] or [CreateWorking File] from the [File] menu.

To delete auxiliary wiring, move the element symbol to a position where the input connec-tion terminal and output connection terminal can be wired without using auxiliary wiring.

F040805E.EPS

Auxiliary wiring Move

IN

OUT

IN

OUT

Figure Auxiliary Wiring

In case the destination of wiring line is lost because the number of terminals has decreaseddue to a change in the element or element symbol, the wiring line will be displayed as anauxiliary wiring. In that case, delete the auxiliary wiring.

■ How to Draw Wiring Using Manual Wiring▼ Manual Wiring

Choose [Wiring] from the [Insert] menu, then specify in the client area the start and endpoints of the wiring line as well as the endpoints of line segments. Wiring will be drawnalong the specified points. The color of the wiring is light blue.

CLICK

CLICK

F040806E.EPS

1

CLICK

2

3

CLICKCLICK

54

%SW0013.PV.L

Figure Manual Wiring Method

Up to 20 input connection terminals can be specified as wiring destinations of a singleoutput connection terminal.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Select Multiple Wiring LinesTo select multiple wiring lines, do one of the following:

• While holding down the [Ctrl] key, click each additional wiring line.

• Drag a rectangular area to enclose all wiring and element symbols.

Using the following method, all wiring objects can be selected.

• Clicking [Select Specified Elements] task on the [Edit] menu, then check the [Wire]option.

The line of selected wiring becomes thicker and the line color turns to green.

With branched wiring, the selected area differs depending on the clicked area or the sec-tion enclosed in the rectangular area.

To cancel the selection of individual wiring, click on the desired wiring lines while holdingdown the [Ctrl] key.

■ How to Move the WiringIf [Manual] is set in the wiring properties, then each line segment can be moved in theparallel direction. The line segment connected to the element symbols will be moved alongwith the element symbols, and the wiring information (properties for connected wiring andinformation of terminal position) remains intact.

F040807E.EPS

Drag

%SW0013.PV.L

Figure Moving Wiring - Logic Chart

When [Automatic] is set in the properties of a line segment that is contained in thebranched wiring, the wiring cannot be moved as long as such line segment is included.Move the wiring after changing the wiring property to [Manual].

F040808E.EPS

Manual

Automatic

Manual

Cannot move

%SW0013.PV.L

%SW0014.PV.L

%SW0015.PV.L

Figure Wiring with Both Automatic and Manual Settings in the Properties


F4-42

IM 33S01B30-01E


The figure below shows how to move the portion of wiring whose property setting is[Manual].

Automatic

Manual

Automatic

Drag

Select

F040809E.EPS

Automatic

Manual

Automatic

Can move

%SW0013.PV.L

%SW0014.PV.L

%SW0015.PV.L

%SW0013.PV.L

%SW0014.PV.L

%SW0015.PV.L

Figure Moving Branched Wiring

■ How to Move the Wiring Connection DestinationThe following shows how to move the wiring connection destination.

When the wiring connection destination is moved, the wiring will be redrawn based on thewiring properties.

● Moving within the Same Element

F040810E.EPS

Drag

Select an element

Figure Moving within the Same Element

● Moving between Elements

F040811E.EPS

Drag

Select an element

Figure Moving to a Different Element



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Delete WiringWiring can be deleted. To delete a wiring, select the wiring and do one of the following:


• Choose [Delete] from the [Edit] menu.

• Choose [Delete] from the pop-up menu.

The above allows the deletion of wiring only. It is also possible to delete multiple wiring linesat the same time.

FIC100.MODE.AUT

FIC200.MODE.AUT

%SW0011.PV.L

%SW0012.PV.L

%SW0013.PV.L

FIC100.MODE.AUT

FIC200.MODE.AUT

%SW0011.PV.L

%SW0013.PV.L

%SW0012.PV.L

F040812E.EPS

Select

Delete operation

Figure Deleting Wiring Lines


F4-44

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Inserting and Deleting EndpointIf the wiring property is manual, endpoint can be inserted in the wiring or existing points canbe deleted. The wiring route can be changed for wiring that has been drawn, by insertingand deleting endpoints.

● How to Insert an Endpoint

Endpoint can be inserted at desired points to change the wiring route. Select wiring andchoose [Insert Endpoint] from the [Draw] menu, then specify a position where the endpointnode is to be inserted.

F040813E.EPS

Insert an endpoint

IN

OUT

%SW0013.PV.L

Figure Inserting an Endpoint

Once an endpoint has been inserted, the wiring can be moved.

F040814E.EPS

IN

OUT

Drag

%SW0013.PV.L

Figure Changing the Wiring Route by Inserting an Endpoint

● How to Delete an Endpoint

Move wiring until two endpoint nodes overlap.

F040815E.EPS

Drag

To be deleted

%SW0013.PV.L%SW0013.PV.L

Figure Deleting an Endpoint


<F4.9 Displaying and Editing Text> F4-45

IM 33S01B30-01E

F4.9 Displaying and Editing TextAny character string (text) can be displayed in the client area. To display a characterstring, draw a text object using the text tool. The text object can be edited in theclient area (move, copy, delete, etc.).

■ How to Enter Text▼ Insert Text

To display text, do one of the following:

• Choose [Text] from the [Insert] menu.

• Click the [Text] button on the toolbar.

F040901E.EPS

Figure Text Button

Select the location where text is to be placed as a rectangular area. The status of the areachanges and entering text becomes possible. After the text is entered from the keyboardand the [Return] key pressed or another area clicked, the entry is confirmed.

F040902E.EPS

DragSelect the rectangular area.

Figure Drawing Text Area

Or, if you select a text and click the text area, the status of the area changes and enteringtext becomes possible. The entered text can now be modified or deleted.


F4-46

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.9 Displaying and Editing Text>

■ How to Select TextTo select a displayed text, click the text. To select multiple sets of text, do one of the follow-ing:

• While holding down the [Ctrl] key, select each additional text.

• Create a rectangular area to enclose all of the text.

Selected text is displayed with handles.

To cancel the selection of individual text, click the text to be canceled while holding downthe [Ctrl] key.

■ How to Change the Size of a Text AreaWhen a text is selected, handles are displayed. The size of a text area can be enlarged orreduced by dragging these handles.

F040903E.EPS

Drag

Handle

Figure Changing the Text Size


<F4.10 Drawing and Executing a Switch View> F4-47

IM 33S01B30-01E

F4.10 Drawing and Executing a Switch ViewA switch view object can be put on the drawing with another logic chart’s tag namespecified. Clicking this object on HIS console can open the specified logic chart forstatus display. Clicking [Switch View] task on [Window] menu during engineeringcan open the logic chart edit window of the tag specified for the object.

■ How to Draw a Switch View▼ Switch View

One of the following methods may create a switch view object.

• Clicking [Switch View] task on [Insert] menu.

• Clicking [Switch View] button on toolbar.

F041001E.EPS

A

Figure [Switch View] Button

After drawing a rectangular shape on the place for the switch view object, it becomes entrywaiting state. After entering the text and push the Return key or click areas, the enteredcontent will be assigned to the object.

F041002E.EPS

DragSelect the rectangular area.

Figure Creating a Switch View

TIP

Clicking the text area of a selected switch view object, it becomes entry waiting state. Then the text canbe modified.

The next step is to define a tag name of a logic chart on its property sheet for switching.

SEE ALSO

For details on open the property sheet, see the following:

“■ Property Sheet for Switch View” in F4.4, “Setting Object Properties”


F4-48

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.10 Drawing and Executing a Switch View>

■ How to Use a Switch ViewTo open a logic chart block set as the switch view object via the Function Block DetailBuilder, select the switch view object and do one of the following:

• Choose [Switch View] from the pop-up menu that appears when clicking the rightbutton.

• Choose [Switch View] from the [Window] menu.

TIP

If multiple switch view objects are selected, or an object other than a switch view is selected, the menuwill be grayed out and no items can be selected.

■ How to Select Multiple Switch View ObjectsTo select multiple switch view objects, do one of the following:

• Select each additional switch view object while holding down the [Ctrl] key.

• Create a rectangular area to enclose the switch view object.

The line of selected switch view objects becomes thicker and the entire object turns togreen.

To cancel the selection of object individually, select the switch view object for desectionwhile holding down the [Ctrl] key.

■ How to Change the Destination of a Switch View ObjectThe destination logic chart of a switch view can be changed on the property sheet of theswitch view.

SEE ALSO

For details on open the property sheet, see the following:

“■ Property Sheet for Switch View” in F4.4, “Setting Object Properties”


<F4.11 Setting Processing Timing> F4-49

IM 33S01B30-01E

F4.11 Setting Processing TimingThe processing timing for the logic chart block can be set.

■ How to Set the Processing Timing ¡ £The processing timing for the logic chart block is set using the set start timing dialog box.

Choose [Change Processing Timing] from the [Edit] menu.

CancelOK

F041101E.EPS

Set Start Timing

Processing Timing

Scan

Basic Scan

1

0

Periodic Execution Type [T]Start Timing

Scan Period

Control Period

Control Phase

Figure Set Start Timing Dialog Box

TIP

The processing timing for the logic chart block can also be set using the dialog bar.

F041102E.EPS

T ...Processing Timing Basic ScanScan

Figure Processing Timing, Scan Cycle Dialog Bar

● Startup Timing

The startup timing includes the following:

• Periodic execution type (default)

• One-shot processing type

• Startup at initial cold start/restart

• Restricted initial execution type

● Scan Cycle: PFCS/SFCS

This only can be selected when the startup timing is [Periodic Execution Type].

• High-speed scan

• Basic scan (default)


F4-50

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.11 Setting Processing Timing>

● Scan Cycle £ : KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS

This can be selected only when the startup timing is “Periodic Execution Type.”

• High-speed scan

• Medium-speed scan

• Basic scan (default)

● Control Cycle

Specifies the control cycle for the logic chart block. A change can only be made when thescan cycle is “Basic Scan.”

The setting range is between 1 and 16. The default is 1.

● Control Phase

Specifies the control phase for the logic chart block. A change can only be made when thescan cycle is “Basic Scan.”

The setting range is between 0 and 15. The default is 0. However, the maximum value isthe set value for the control cycle minus one.


<F4.12 Setting Logic Operation Execution Order> F4-51

IM 33S01B30-01E

F4.12 Setting Logic Operation Execution OrderThe logic operation execution order includes matrix expansion and manual expan-sion. The logic operation execution order is set using the dialog bar.

■ Type of Logic Operation Execution Order▼ Execution Order

The execution order for logic operation elements in the logic chart (logic operation execu-tion order) includes matrix expansion and manual expansion. One of these operations isselected by using the logic operation execution order dialog bar. The default setting ismatrix expansion.

F041201E.EPS

Matrix ExpansionManual Expansion

Execution Matrix Expansion

Figure Logic Operation Execution Order Dialog Bar

● Matrix Expansion

In the client area, logic operation elements are executed in columns from left to right androws from top to bottom. When matrix expansion is selected, the execution order cannotbe changed for individual logic operation elements.

● Manual Expansion

Logic operation elements are executed in the order in which their symbols were drawn.The execution order can be changed for individual logic operation elements.

If the setting is changed from manual expansion to matrix expansion, then the changesmade in manual expansion will become invalid. Previous changes will not be retainedeven if the setting is changed back from matrix expansion to manual expansion.


F4-52

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.12 Setting Logic Operation Execution Order>

■ How to Change the Logic Operation Execution OrderThe execution order of logic operation element symbols can be changed.

To change the logic operation execution order, select the wiring connected to elementsymbols. Then choose [Change Execution Order] from the [Drawing] menu.

%SW0011.PV.ON

%SW0012.PV.ON %Z011101.PV.H(W.O)

1

23

%SW0011.PV.ON

%SW0012.PV.ON %Z011101.PV.H(W.O)

1

32

Changing the execution order of 2 and 3

F041202E.EPS

Forward wiring

Reverse wiring

Legend

Figure Changing the Execution Order

%Z0111101.PV.H

%SW0011.PV.ON1 2 3 4

%Z0111101.PV.H

%SW0011.PV.ON2 3 4 1

Changing the execution order of 1 and 4

F041203E.EPS

Forward wiring

Reverse wiring

Legend

Figure Changing the Execution Order of Related Logic Operation Element Symbols


<F4.13 Grouping Objects> F4-53

IM 33S01B30-01E

F4.13 Grouping ObjectsMultiple objects can be grouped and manipulated as a single object.

■ Grouping ObjectsMultiple objects can be grouped and manipulated as a single unit. A unit of grouped ob-jects is called “group object.” A group object can be edited (move or copy, etc.), but indi-vidual objects within the group object (such as wiring or getting tag information) cannot beedited.

%SW0001.PV.1

%SW0002.PV.1

%DO0001.PV.L

Grouping

Objects selected for grouping are highlighted

A rectangular area enclosing the selected objects is displayed

%SW0001.PV.1

%SW0002.PV.1

%DO0001.PV.L

F041301E.EPS

Figure Grouping Objects


F4-54

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.13 Grouping Objects>

● Selecting a Group Object

When one of the objects in a group object is selected, a rectangular area enclosing theentire group object is displayed. At this time, individual objects included in the group objectwill not be highlighted.

A rectangular area enclosing the selected objects is displayed.

%SW0001.PV.1

%SW0002.PV.1

%DO0001.PV.L

F041302E.EPS

Not highlighted

Figure Selecting a Group Object

● Structure of a Group Object

Even if a grouping target contains other group objects, it can still be grouped. Such group-ing is has a two-hierarchy structure. In that case, if the group object is ungrouped, then notall the objects will be ungrouped at the same time. Only the latest grouped objects can beungrouped.

■ Objects that can be GroupedThe following objects may be grouped.

• Element symbols (I/O elements, logic operation elements)

• Text

• Switch View

• Group objects

While wiring cannot be grouped by itself, it may be automatically included in a group objectwhen a number of objects are grouped. Items to note on group wiring are explained below.

• Wiring alone cannot be grouped to a group object

• If element symbols connected at both ends of wiring are grouped, then the wiring willbe included in the group object.

• If only one of the element symbols connected at both ends of the wiring is grouped,then the wiring will not be included in the group object.


<F4.13 Grouping Objects> F4-55

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Editing a Group ObjectA group object is edited (move, copy, cut, paste and delete) as if the group were a singleobject. For example, when cut and paste a group object, it will be the same as cut andpaste a single object.

An example of moving a group object is shown below.

Move the group object

When the wiring mode is automatic, wiring will be done automatically

F041303E.EPS

%SW0001.PV.1

%SW0002.PV.1

%DO0001.PV.L

%SW0001.PV.1

%SW0002.PV.1

%DO0001.PV.L

When a group object is selected, a rectangular area surrounding it will display

Figure Moving a Group Object

A group object does not have a property sheet.


F4-56

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.14 Importing and Exporting an External File>

F4.14 Importing and Exporting an External FileUsing the logic chart edit window, importing and exporting an external file can beperformed.

■ Importing an External File▼ Importing an External File

The readable files are indicated below.

IMPORTANT

If an external file is imported, the contents of the logic chart block builder file will be re-placed by the contents of the imported external file.

● Default File

The default file of the logic chart block (LC64) can be imported. If a user default file exists,then the user default file is imported.

● Function Block File

A logic chart block builder file (edf file) that has already been created can be imported.

● Temporary Saved File

A temporary saved file in a different name (sva file) can be imported.

● CS Source File

From the CENTUM CS source file, only the logic section of the logic chart block is importedas a text file.

SEE ALSO

For the details on the import from CS source file, see the following:


■ Exporting an External File▼ Exporting an External File

The file that can be exported is indicated below.

● CS Source File (Logic Section)

Only the logic section of a logic chart block can be exported in the CENTUM CS source fileformat.


<F4.15 Status Display Settings for Logic Charts> F4-57

IM 33S01B30-01E

F4.15 Status Display Settings for Logic ChartsWhen a logic chart is created and saved, the display indicating the status of the logicchart file can be set, the same settings can be used for the whole project.

The settings are set on Status Display Setting dialog box started from System View.

■ Status Display Setting ItemsStatus display settings of logic charts can be set on Status Display Setting dialog box.

The settings on this dialog box will be reflected for indicating the status of the created andsaved logic chart files.

IMPORTANT

• The changed status display settings will not be reflected to the existing logic chartfiles. It is necessary to change the settings before the logic chart is created.

• If a control drawing is not edited, the file for displaying its status will not be recreated.Only when a certain modification is implemented to the control drawing or the logicchart in the drawing, the status display settings can be reflected when the drawing fileis saved or downloaded.

● Wiring Color

The colors for default wiring, active wiring and inactive wiring can be set respectively.


Font and size of the process data display can be set. The process data include the runningstates of the logic elements.(0/1)


F4-58

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.15 Status Display Settings for Logic Charts>

■ Recommended Settings for Status DisplayIn order to properly display the Logic Chart window, the following settings are recom-mended.

● Required Environment for Status Display Setting

To properly display the Logic Chart windows, the required environment shown below needsto be satisfied for status display setting. The required environment is the same for settingthe Graphic windows to recommended size.

• Settings on WindowsTaskbar : Hide (by dragging the upper edge downward)Desktop Area : 1280 x 1024Font Size : Small font

• HIS setup on HIS consoleFont Size : 16

● Recommended Settings

The recommended settings for logic chart windows are as follows. The option “DisableScaling” on HIS setup windows is not checked by default.

Normally, the logic chart displays are shown on the 21inch monitor (the same as the CRT inconsole type HIS) in full screen.

Table Recommended Settings

Recommended Window SizeHIS Display Mode HIS Screen Setting

Required

Not RequiredFont Size [16]

Recommended Settings for Process Data

Screen Mode

Window Mode1664 x 1024

F041501E.EPS


<F4.15 Status Display Settings for Logic Charts> F4-59

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Change Status Display SettingsThe logic chart status display settings can be changed on the Status Display Setting dialogbox.

Choose [Status Display Setting] on [Tools] menu of System View, Click the tab of LogicChart, then a dialog box appears as follows.

F041502E.EPS

Status Display Setting

Drawing Logic Chart

Font Size

Wiring Color

Process data Display

Active Wiring

Inactive Wiring

Project Name

ImpactMonotype CorsivaTimes New Roman

16

18

2224

20

MYPJT

Red

Default Wiring White

Green

Courier New

Left justify numeric data

OK Cancel Apply

Courier New 16

Figure Logic Chart Tab on Status Display Setting Dialog Box

In the Logic Chart tab of this dialog, the following setting items related to Logic Chartdisplay can be set.

TIP

If the same Status Display Setting dialog box is already opened in a different PC, the [OK] and [Apply]buttons are grayed can not be clicked.

● Project Name

The project to which the Status Display Setting is applied.

The selected project is displayed in the combo box.

● Wiring Color

The colors of wiring vary with the states of corresponding I/O signals. They can be selectedfrom the list box.

• Active Wiring : Red (default)

• Inactive Wiring : Green (default)


F4-60

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F4.15 Status Display Settings for Logic Charts>


The following items regarding to text style of the process data can be set. The settings canbe set by choosing from the list box or by directly entering a text.

• Font : Courier New (default)

• Size : 16 (default), Up to 72 can be selected.

TIP

In the project with previous environment before R2.10, the default font size was 13.


<F5. Status Display Builder> F5-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

F5. Status Display BuilderWith the status display builder, a plant image or process data can be added to a controldrawing created with the function block builder (* 1) or to a status display file of a logicchart in order to create the status display window used for operation and monitoring onan HIS.

In this chapter, the outline, the starting method and features of Status DisplayBuilder are explained. Furthermore, the settings for status display can also beperformed on the builders other than Status Display Builder.

*1: The function block builder is the general term for the function block overview builder, the function block detail builder,and the control drawing builder.

■ Outline of the Status Display Builder▼ Details of Status Display Builder

The status display builder has the same user interface as the graphic builder. A statusdisplay window is created using the same tools as those for creating a Graphic window.There is no difference in the operation method between the status display builder andgraphic builder, only some of the functions are different.

SEE ALSO

For details on the operation method, see the following:

F12, “Graphic Builder”

The objects (block symbols, logical operator symbols, wiring, etc.) drawn with the functionblock builder are treated as a special group called the symbol group in the status displaybuilder. The symbol group includes the text objects and block comments in the controldrawing and logic charts created by the function block builder. The symbol group is differentfrom the object grouped with the function block builder in the following aspects:

• The symbol group cannot be edited or selected.

• There is no property sheet for the symbol group.

• The symbol group is displayed in the “foreground image” in front of the objects added-on the status display builder. However, the real display sequence may differ from thedisplay sequence on the builder.

• The operation of the graphic modifier automatically added by the function blockbuilder is not subject to debug.


F5-2<F5. Status Display Builder>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Settings for Status Display WindowsSettings for Status Display windows can be set on the Status Display Builder, and can alsobe set on the Status Display Setting dialog box started from System View or on HIS Setupwindow of HIS.

● Status Display Setting Dialog Box

On Status Display Setting dialog box, the wiring colors, the process data display style ofcontrol drawing can be set.

These settings are saved in the control drawing when the control drawing file is saved onthe Control Drawing Builder. It is necessary to set the status display settings before savingthe control drawing file.

SEE ALSO

• For more information about control drawing status display settings on Status Display Setting dialog box,see the following:


• For more information about logic chart status display settings on Status Display Setting dialog box, seethe following:


● HIS Setup on HIS Console

On HIS Setup window of HIS console, the options “Status Display without Scaling” can beset. These options are not checked by default.

• When Scaling is EnabledThe status display window will ignore the window size specified in the control drawingfile, but adjust the ration of the whole drawing to fit the drawing into the window for thecontrol drawing display.

• When Scaling is DisabledThe status display window will use the window size specified in the control drawingfile, if the window for the control drawing display is smaller than the specified windowsize, the scroll bars will appear on the window.

SEE ALSO

For more information about status display window scaling, see the following:

“● Status Display without Scaling” in E7.3.4, “Display Tab”



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Starting the Status Display BuilderThis section describes how to start the status display builder for control drawings and logiccharts.

● Starting the Status Display Builder for a Control Drawing

Double-clicking the control drawing status display file in the System View will start thestatus display builder.

F050001E.EPS

Select Control Drawing Status Display Definition

All Folders Opened Folder : DISPLAY

File Edit View Tools Load Project FCS Help

Name Type Modified DateSYSTEM VIEW

MYPJT

COMMON

BATCH

FCS0101

CONFIGURATION

SEQ-LIBRARY

IOM

SWITCH

MESSAGE

FUNCTION-BLOCK

DISPLAY

LOGICCHART

APPLICATION

HIS0124

-

-

-

+

+

-

System View (CS 1000) -DISPLAY

+

+

DR0001

DR0002

DR0003

DR0005

DR0006

DR0007

DR0050

Status Display

Status Display

Status Display

Status Display

Status Display

Status Display

Status Display

1998/03/26 18:42

1998/03/26 18:42

1998/03/26 18:42

1998/03/26 18:42

1998/03/26 18:42

1998/03/26 18:42

1998/03/26 18:42

Double-clicking this control drawingstatus display file will start the status display builder.

Figure System View

Note that the status display file does not exit for the drawing file created using the functionblock overview builder.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Starting the Status Display Builder for a Logic Chart

Double-clicking the logic chart status display file in the System View will start the statusdisplay builder.

F050002E.EPS

Select Logic Chart Status Display Definition

All Folders Opened Folder : LOGICCHART

File Edit View Tools Load Project FCS Help

Name Type Modified DateSYSTEM VIEW

MYPJT

COMMON

BATCH

FCS0101

CONFIGURATION

SEQ-LIBRARY

IOM

SWITCH

MESSAGE

FUNCTION-BLOCK

DISPLAY

LOGICCHART

APPLICATION

HIS0124

-

-

-

+

+

-

System View (CS 1000) -LOGICCHART

+

+

LC01

LC02

LC03

LC05

LC06

LC07

LC50

Status Display

Status Display

Status Display

Status Display

Status Display

Status Display

Status Display

1998/03/26 18:42

1998/03/26 18:42

1998/03/26 18:42

1998/03/26 18:42

1998/03/26 18:42

1998/03/26 18:42

1998/03/26 18:42

Double-clicking this logic chart status display file will start the status display builder.

Figure System View

● Start Status Display Builder

When using the name search tool to look for the tag names of function blocks, then theresult are displayed in the window. Right-click the mouse and choose [Builder...] - [Drawingstatus display] from the popup menu. If the function block is a logic chart block, Choose[Builder...] - [Logic Chart status display], the logic chart status display builder can be calledout.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Different Functions Between Status Display Builder and Graphic BuilderAlthough the features of the status display builder and graphic builder are fundamentallythe same, there are some differences in the functions noted below.

● File Property Setting

In the status display builder, the file property setting is subject to the following restrictions.These items are displayed on the Attribute tab of the file’s property sheet.

• The window type is fixed to “drawing status display window” for a control drawing and“logic chart status display window” for a logic chart.

• The window size cannot be changed. For this item, the size defined via the functionblock builder is displayed.

• The objects created on the status display builder can not be displayed on the functionblock builder.

● Creating a New Status Display File

A status display file is automatically created at the time a drawing file is saved with theSave command or downloaded via the function block builder.

In the status display builder [File] menu, [Create New] cannot be selected.

Table [File] Menu of the Status Display Builder

Command Action

Open... Opens a file saved under a different name.

Close Closes an active document window.

Save Writes the edited contents to a file.

Save As... Saves the contents under a different file name.

External File Import... Imports an external file.

Properties Displays the property sheet of a file.

Print Preview Displays a print preview window.

Print... Executes printing.

Download Downloads to HIS.

Exit Status Display Builder Exits the status display builder.

F050003E.EPS



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Default File

A default file cannot be created or deleted in the status display builder.

In the [Tools] menu of the status display builder, the items [Create default file] and [Deletedefault file] can not be selected.

Table [Tools] Menu of the Status Display Builder

Command Action

Debug... Executes debugging.

Tag/Window Name List... Displays the tag/window selection dialog box.

Options...Displays the option property sheet for setting theoperating environment of the status display builder.

F050004E.EPS

● Retrieving External File

In the status display builder, the following external files can be retrieved:

• Default graphic files (file extension is .edf)

• Status display file (file extension is .dsp)

• Graphic builder file (file extension is .edf)

• File saved by the status display builder or the graphic builder (file extension is .sva)

• CS graphic source files (file extension is .s)

IMPORTANT

When an external file is retrieved, the contents of the status display file will be replaced.

The same drawing can be displayed by function block builder and status display builder atthe same time. For doing this, it requires to save the file under another name [Save As..].


<F6. Editing SFC> F6-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6. Editing SFCThis chapter explains how to use the tools for editing SFC.

■ Control Algorithm Using SFCSFC (Sequential Function Chart) is a graphical programming language for controlalgorithms of SFC blocks.

In SFC, the following three basic elements are used to program the control algorithms:

• Step: For defining an action

• Transition: For defining a transition condition

• Link: For connecting a step and a transition, or a transition and a step

An example of SFC is shown below:

F060001E.EPS

Initialize

Feed water

Heating

1

2

3

Transition

Link

Step

Figure Example of an SFC

● Limitation for Number of Steps

A maximum number of steps can be described in one column is 99.


F6-2<F6. Editing SFC>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ SFC Control Details▼ Toolbar

In the SFC edit window of the function block detail builder, various tools are provided forediting SFC. Editing SFC blocks and operations and editing unit procedures use differenttools.

● Tools for Editing SFC Blocks and Operations

The tools used for editing SFC blocks and operations are shown below:

ATTRNo.

OUT

OUT

F060002E.EPS

INDropdown menu

Figure SFC Toolbar for SFC Blocks and Operations

● Tools for Editing Unit Procedures

The tools used for editing the unit procedures are shown below:

ATTR

IN

No.OUT

OUT

F060003E.EPS

Dropdown menu

Figure SFC Toolbar for Unit Procedures


<F6.1 Switching to Selection Mode> F6-3

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.1 Switching to Selection ModeIt is necessary to switch to the selection mode when defining or editing theattributes of an SFC element, and when editing step actions.

In order to switch to selection mode, the selection mode tool is used.

■ How to Switch to the Selection Mode▼ Selection Mode

To switch to the selection mode, select [Selection Mode] from the [Edit] menu, or click onthe [Selection Mode] button on the toolbar.

To cancel the selection mode, select a drawing tool such as the step tool or transition tool.

F060101E.EPS

Figure Selection Mode Button

When switched to the selection mode, the following actions may be performed:

• SFC element attribute definition

• SFC element editing such as deleting and copying

• Editing step actions


F6-4<F6.2 Drawing a Step>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.2 Drawing a StepFor drawing a step, there are two tools; step tool and step with transition tool.

The step tool is used to draw a step.

After a step is drawn, the step attributes such as step information and action defini-tions must be entered.

■ How to Use the Step Tool▼ Step

Select [Step]-[Step] from the [Draw] menu, or select the [Step] button on the toolbar.

F060201E.EPS

Figure Step Button

When a grid is clicked, a step is created at the position.

F060202E.EPS

02

Figure Drawing a Step

The first created step automatically becomes the initial step.

The initial step is indicated by a double-line square in the step column, but the function isthe same as other steps.

F060203E.EPS

01

Step column

Figure Drawing an Initial Step

After a step is created, the step attributes shown below must be defined:

• In SFC blocks or operationsStep information and action

• In unit proceduresStep information and operation

The step number of the step will be automatically defined. And this step number can bechanged when required.

SEE ALSO

For more information about the step attribute and the step number, see the following:

F6.14, “Defining Step Attribute”


<F6.2 Drawing a Step> F6-5

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Use the Step with Transition ToolSelect [Step]-[Step with transition] from the [Draw] menu or select the [Step with transition]button on the toolbar.

F060204E.EPS

Figure Step with Transition Button

When a grid is clicked, a step with transition is created at the position.

F060205E.EPS

02

Figure Drawing a Step with Transition

The first created step automatically becomes the initial step.

The initial step is indicated by a double-line square in the step column, but the function isthe same as other steps.

F060206E.EPS

01

Step column

Figure Drawing an Initial Step with Transition

After a step with transition is created, the step and transition attributes shown below mustbe defined:

• In SFC blocks and operationsStep information, action and transition conditions

• In unit proceduresStep information, operation and transition conditions

The step number of the step will be automatically defined. And this step number can bechanged when required.

SEE ALSO

For information about the step attribute, the transition attribute and the step number, see the followings:


F6.15, “Defining Transition Attribute”


F6-6<F6.3 Drawing a Wait Step>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.3 Drawing a Wait StepIn order to draw a wait step, the wait step tool is used.

The wait step can only be created in a unit procedure.

■ How to Use the Wait Step Tool▼ Wait Step

Select the [Wait Step] tool from the [Draw] menu, or select the [Wait Step] button on thetoolbar.

F060301E.EPS

Figure Wait Step Button

When a grid is clicked, a wait step will be created at the position.

02F060302E.EPS

Figure Drawing a Wait Step

The step number of the wait step will be automatically defined. And this step number can bechanged when required.

SEE ALSO

For the step number definition, see the following:



<F6.4 Drawing a Transition> F6-7

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.4 Drawing a TransitionTo draw a transition, the transition tool is used.

■ How to Use the Transition Tool▼ Transition

Select [Transition] from the [Draw] menu, or select the [Transition] button on the toolbar.

F060401E.EPS

Figure Transition Button

When a grid is clicked, a transition is created at the position.

F060402E.EPS

Figure Drawing a Transition

Define a transition condition after creating the transition. The transition condition needs tobe defined for selective sequence. Comment can be defined as required.

If a transition condition is not defined, judgement of the condition will be skipped and thenext step will be activated as soon as the current step is completed.

SEE ALSO

For the definition of comment and transition condition, see the following:



F6-8<F6.5 Drawing a Parallel Sequence>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.5 Drawing a Parallel SequenceFor drawing a parallel sequence, there are three tools; Start, End and Set tools.

The Start tool is used for creating a parallel sequence Start object.

The End tool is used for creating a parallel sequence End object.

The parallel sequence Set tool is used for creating parallel sequence with a Startobject, an End object and a Step object simultaneously.

The parallel sequence can only be created in the unit procedures.

■ Common Items for Parallel Sequence Tools▼ Parallel

Up to eight parallel sequences can be executed simultaneously.

Restrictions when the parallel sequences are nested (drawing a parallel sequence within aparallel sequence) are shown below.

• A maximum of three levels of nesting (drawing a parallel sequence in a parallelsequence) are possible for the parallel sequence.

• A maximum of 32 simultaneous parallel executions including nested sequences arepossible.

F060501E.EPS

Figure A Two-Level Nested Parallel Sequence


<F6.5 Drawing a Parallel Sequence> F6-9

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Use the Parallel Sequence Start ToolSelect [Parallel] - [Start] from the [Draw] menu, or click on the [Parallel-Start] button on thetoolbar.

F060502E.EPS

Figure Parallel-Start Button

When a grid to be the Start object of a parallel sequence is clicked, the border of the clickedgrid will be displayed with a black dotted line, indicating that the parallel sequence’s Startobject has been temporarily selected. If the grid shown in dotted line is clicked again, theselection will be canceled.

Continue clicking for each step of the parallel sequence Start objects, and when the lastStep object is double-clicked, the parallel sequence Start object will be created.

Double-clickClickClick

F060503E.EPS

: Positions that are clicked or double-clicked

Double-clicking fixesthe Start object

Figure Drawing a Parallel Sequence Start Obejct

After the parallel sequence Start obejct is created, the parallel sequence End obejct mustbe created using the parallel sequence End tool.


F6-10<F6.5 Drawing a Parallel Sequence>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Use the Parallel Sequence End ToolBefore creating the parallel sequence End object, the Start object must be created usingthe parallel Sequence Start tool.

Select [Parallel] - [End] from the [Draw] menu, or click on the [Parallel-End] button on thetoolbar.

F060504E.EPS

Figure Parallel-End Button

When a grid to be the End obejct of a parallel sequence is clicked, the border of the clickedgrid will be displayed with a black dotted line, indicating that the parallel sequence’s Endobject has been temporarily selected. If the grid shown in dotted line is clicked again, theselection will be canceled.

Continue clicking for each step of the parallel sequence End objects, and when the lastStep object is double-clicked, the parallel sequence End object will be created.


F060505E.EPS

: Position that was clicked or double-clicked

Double-clicking fixesthe End object

Figure Drawing a Parallel Sequence End Object


<F6.5 Drawing a Parallel Sequence> F6-11

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Use the Parallel Sequence Set ToolSelect [Parallel] - [Set] from the [Draw] menu, or select the [Parallel-Set] button on thetoolbar.

F060506E.EPS

Figure Parallel-Set Button

When a grid for drawing a parallel sequence is clicked, the border of the clicked grid will bedisplayed with a black dotted line, indicating that the parallel sequence position has beentemporarily selected. If the grid shown in dotted line is clicked again, the selection will becanceled.

Continue clicking for each step of the parallel sequence drawing positions, and when thelast Step object is double-clicked, a set of parallel sequence will be created.

Only one row of parallel sequences can be drawn using the parallel sequence set tool. Byperforming an operation such as line insertion after the parallel sequence is drawn, amultiple rows of parallel sequence can be drawn.


F060507E.EPS


Double-clicking fixesthe End object

Figure Drawing a Set of Parallel Sequence

After a parallel sequence has been created, the attributes for the steps in the parallelsequence must be defined.

SEE ALSO

For details on step attribute definitions, see the following:



F6-12<F6.6 Drawing Selective Sequences>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.6 Drawing Selective SequencesFor drawing selective sequence, the following three tools are provided; selectivesequence Split tool, selective sequence Join tool and selective sequence Set tool.

The Split tool is used for drawing a selective sequence split object.

The Join tool is used for drawing a selective sequence join object.

The Set tool is used for drawing a set of selective sequence with a step, a transition,a split and a join objects.

■ Common Items for the Selective Sequence Tools▼ Selective Sequence

Up to eight steps may be drawn in a set of selective sequence.

Always enter a transition condition for the Split object.

Restrictions when the selective sequences are nested are shown below.

• There is no limitation on the number of nesting levels of selective sequences (drawinga selective sequence within a selective sequence).

• In nested selective sequences, only one selective sequence is executed at a time.When multiple conditions are satisfied at the same time, the left-side selectivesequence stream has higher priority for execution.

F060601E.EPS

Figure A Two-Level Nested Selective Sequence


<F6.6 Drawing Selective Sequences> F6-13

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Use the Selective Sequence Split ToolSelect [Selective Seq.] - [Split] from the [Draw] menu, or select the [Selective Seq. - Split]button on the toolbar.

F060602E.EPS

Figure Selective Seq. - Split Button

When a grid to be the Split object of a selective sequence is clicked, the border of theclicked grid will be displayed with a black dotted line, indicating that the selectivesequence’s Split object has been temporarily selected. If the grid shown in dotted line isclicked again, the selection will be canceled.

Continue clicking for each step of the selective sequence Split object, and when the laststep position is double-clicked, the selective sequence Split object will be created.


F060603E.EPS

: The position that was clicked or double-clicked

Double-clicking fixesthe Split object

Figure Drawing a Selective Sequence Split Object

After the Split object of a selective sequence is created, the Join object of the selectivesequence must be created using the selective sequence Join tool.


F6-14<F6.6 Drawing Selective Sequences>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Use the Selective Sequence Join ToolBefore drawing the selective sequence Join object, the Split object of the selective se-quence must be created using the selective sequence Split tool.

Select [Selective Seq.] - [Join] from the [Draw] menu, or click on the [Selective Seq. - Join]button on the toolbar.

F060604E.EPS

Figure Selective Seq. - Join Button

When a grid to be the Join object of a selective sequence is clicked, the border of theclicked grid will be displayed with a black dotted line, indicating that the selectivesequence’s Join object has been temporarily selected. If the grid shown in dotted line isclicked again, the selection will be canceled.

Continue clicking for each step of the selective sequence Join objects, and when the lastJoin object is double-clicked, the selective sequence Join object will be created.


F060605E.EPS


Double-clicking fixesthe Join object

Figure Drawing a Selective Sequence Join Object


<F6.6 Drawing Selective Sequences> F6-15

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Use the Selective Sequence Set ToolSelect [Selective Seq.] - [Set] from the [Draw] menu, or click on the [Selective Seq. - Set]button on the toolbar.

F060606E.EPS

Figure Selective Seq. - Set Button

When a grid to draw a set of selective sequence is clicked, the border of the clicked grid willbe displayed with a black dotted line, indicating that the selective sequence position hasbeen temporarily selected. If the grid shown in dotted line is clicked again, the selection willbe canceled.

Continue clicking for each step of the selective sequence drawing positions, and when thelast step position is double-clicked, the set of selective sequence will be created.

Only a one-row selective sequence can be drawn using the selective sequence Set tool. Byperforming the operations such as line insertion after the set of selective sequence isdrawn, a multiple-row selective sequence can be created.


F060607E.EPS


Double-clicking fixesthe selective sequence

Figure Drawing a Set of Selective Sequence

After a selective sequence is created, the attributes of steps and transitions included in theselective sequence must be defined.

SEE ALSO

For details on step and transition attribute definitions, see the followings:




F6-16<F6.7 Drawing a Loop>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.7 Drawing a LoopFor drawing a loop, the following three tools are provided; Branch tool, Join tool andLoop tool.

The Branch tool is used for drawing a branch of a loop.

The Join tool is used for drawing a join of a loop.

The Loop tool is used for drawing complete loop with a step, a transition, a branchand a join objects.

■ How to Use the Loop Branch Tool▼ Loop

Select [Loop] - [Branch] from the [Draw] menu, or select the [Loop-Branch] button on thetoolbar.

F060701E.EPS

Figure Loop-Branch Button

When a grid to be the branch position of a loop is clicked, the border of the clicked grid willbe displayed with a black dotted line, indicating that the loop’s branch position has beentemporarily selected. If the grid shown in dotted line is clicked again, the selection will becanceled.

Continue clicking for each loop branch position, and when the last branch position isdouble-clicked, the loop branch will be created.

Loop branches are created regardless of the order they were clicked.


F060702E.EPS


Double-clicking fixesthe loop branch position

Figure Drawing Loop Branches

After the Branch of a loop is defined, the Join of the loop must be created using the loopJoin tool.


<F6.7 Drawing a Loop> F6-17

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Use the Loop Join ToolBefore the Join of the loop is drawn, the branches of the loop must be created using theloop Branch tool.

Select [Loop] - [Join] from the [Draw] menu, or select the [Loop-Join] button on the toolbar.

F060703E.EPS

Figure Loop-Join Button

When a grid to be the join position of a loop is clicked, the border of the clicked grid will bedisplayed with a black dotted line, indicating that the Join position of the loop has beentemporarily selected. If the grid shown in dotted line will be clicked again, the selection iscanceled.

Continue clicking for each loop join position, and when the last join position is double-clicked, the joins of the loop will be created.


F060704E.EPS

:Position that was clicked or double-clicked

Double-clicking fixesthe loop Joins

Figure Drawing Loop Joins


F6-18<F6.7 Drawing a Loop>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Use the Loop ToolSelect [Loop] - [Loop] from the [Draw] menu, or select the [Loop-Loop] button on thetoolbar.

F060705E.EPS

Figure Loop-Loop Button

When a grid to draw a loop is clicked, the border of the clicked grid will be displayed with ablack dotted line, indicating that the loop position has been temporarily selected. If the gridshown in dotted line is clicked again, the selection will be canceled.

Continue clicking for each loop branch positions, and when the last branch position isdouble-clicked, a complete loop will be created.

Double-clickClick

02

F060706E.EPS


Double-clicking fixes the loop branch position

Figure Drawing a Complete Loop

Only a one-step loop can be created with the Loop tool. If an action such as inserting a rowis performed after the loop is created, a loop with multiple steps may be created.

After the loop position is defined, the attributes of steps and transitions included in the loopmust be defined.

SEE ALSO

For details on defining the step and transition attributes, see the followings:




<F6.8 Drawing a Link> F6-19

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.8 Drawing a LinkThe link tool is used to draw links.

■ How to Use the Link Tool▼ Link

Choose [Link] from the [Draw] menu, or select the [Link] button on the toolbar.

F060801E.EPS

Figure Link Button

When the start grid and end grid are clicked in order, a link will be created.

Links may only be created in the vertical direction.

F060802E.EPS

02

03

Link

Figure Drawing a Link


F6-20<F6.9 Drawing a Jump>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.9 Drawing a JumpFor drawing a jump, three tools are provided; Jump Down, Jump Up and Jump Totools.

The Jump Down tool is used for starting a jump in the same direction of theprocessing.

The Jump Down tool is used for starting a jump in the reverse direction of theprocessing.

The Jump To tool is used to for ending a jump in a specified destination.

■ Common Items for the Jump Tools▼ Jump

A complete jump object consists of a Jump Down or a Jump Up and a Jump To. If a JumpTo is not paired with a Jump Down or a Jump Up, an error will occur when saving ordownloading the SFC.

When creating a jump, a label J00 will be automatically assigned to the jump, be sure tochange the label from J00 to a label between J01 to J99, otherwise, an error will occur.

When changing the label, switch the cursor to the selection mode, double-click the label,then write a number into it.

■ How to Use the Jump Down ToolSelect [Jump] - [Jump Down] from the [Draw] menu, or select the [Jump Down] on thetoolbar.

OUTF060901E.EPS

Figure Jump Down Button

When a position for starting a jump is selected, a Jump Down with an arrow pointingdownwards will be created.

F060902E.EPS

02 J01

J01

Jump Down

Jump To

Clicking position

Figure Drawing a Jump Down

After a Jump Down is created, a Jump To must be drawn.


<F6.9 Drawing a Jump> F6-21

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Use the Jump Up ToolSelect [Jump] - [Jump Up] from the [Draw] menu, or select the [Jump Up] on the toolbar.

OUTF060903E.EPS

Figure Jump Up Button

When a position for starting a jump is selected, a Jump Up with an arrow pointing upwardswill be created.

F060904E.EPS

02

J01

J01Jump Up

Jump To

Clicking position

Figure Drawing a Jump Up

After a Jump Up is created, a Jump To must be drawn.

■ How to Use the Jump To ToolSelect [Jump] - [Jump To] from the [Draw] menu, or click on the [Jump To] button on thetoolbar.

INF060905E.EPS

Figure Jump To Button

When a position for ending a jump is selected, a Jump To with an arrow pointing to theposition will be created.

F060906E.EPS

02 J01

J01

Jump Down

Jump To

Clicking position

Figure Drawing a Jump To

After a Jump Down or a Jump Up is created, a Jump To must be drawn.


F6-22<F6.10 Adding Comments to Client Area>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.10 Adding Comments to Client AreaWhen adding comments to the client area, the text comment tool is used.

■ How to Use the Text Comment Tool▼ Text Comment

Select [Text Comment] from the [Draw] menu, or select the [Text Comment] button on thetoolbar.

F061001E.EPS

Figure Text Comment Button

When a position in the client area is clicked, a comment can be input in that position.

F061002E.EPS

Initialize

Figure A Text Comment

When changing the comment, switch the cursor to the selection mode then double-click thetext comment in the client area and enter the new text comment.

SEE ALSO

For details on switching to selection mode, see the following:

F6.1, “Switching to Selection Mode”


<F6.11 Creating an Interrupt Step> F6-23

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.11 Creating an Interrupt StepWhen creating an interrupt step, the interrupt step tool is used.

The interrupt step may be created in SFC blocks or operations.

■ How to Use the Interrupt Step Tool▼ Interrupt Step

Select the [Interrupt Step] from the [Draw] menu, or select the [Interrupt Step] button on thetoolbar.

F061101E.EPS

Figure Interrupt Step Button

When a grid is clicked, an interrupt step is created at the position.

F061102E.EPS

02

03 Interrupt step

Figure Drawing an Interrupt Step

After an interrupt step is created, attributes such as action types and parameters must bedefined. Also, the details of the interrupt step must be defined by switching the target planeto interrupt steps.

User can define comments for an interrupt step when necessary. The user comments willbe displayed in the menu for switching the target plane.

SEE ALSO

• For details on defining attributes of interrupt steps, see the following:


• For the methods to switch the target plane to interrupt steps, see the following:

F6.17, “Editing Interrupt Steps”


F6-24<F6.12 Drawing a Double Height Step>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.12 Drawing a Double Height StepFor drawing a double-height step, there are the following two tools; Double-HeightStep tool and Double-Height Step with Transition tool.

The Double-Height Step tool is used for drawing a double-height step.

The transitional Double-Height Step tool is used for drawing a double-height stepand a transition simultaneously.

The only difference between the double-height step and regular-width step is thenumber of the letters that can be entered. Two lines may be entered for the double-height step, while just one line may be entered for the regular-width step.

■ How to Use the Double-Height Step Tool▼ Double-Height Step

Select [Double-Height Step] - [Double-Height Step] from the [Draw] menu, or select the[Double-Height Step] tool on the toolbar.

F061201E.EPS

Figure Double-Height Step Button

When a grid is clicked, a double-height step will be created at the position.

F061202E.EPS

02

Figure Drawing a Double-Height Step

The first created double-height step will be automatically defined as the initial double-heightstep.

The initial step is indicated by a double-line square in the step column, but it functions thesame as other double-height steps.

F061203E.EPS

01

Step column

Figure Drawing the Initial Double-Height Step

After a double-height step is created, the following attributes must be defined for the step:


• In unit proceduresStep information and operation

SEE ALSO

For double-height step attribute definitions, see the following:



<F6.12 Drawing a Double Height Step> F6-25

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ How to Use Double-Height Step with Transition ToolSelect [Double-Height Step] - [Double-Height Step with Transition] from the [Draw] menu, orselect the [Double-Height Step with transition] button on the toolbar.

F061204E.EPS

Figure Double-Height Step with Transition Button

When a grid is clicked, a double-height step with transition is created.

F061205E.EPS

02

Figure Drawing a Double-Height Step with Transition

The first created double-height step automatically becomes the initial double-height step.

The initial step is indicated by a double-line square in the step column, but it functions thesame as other double-height steps.

F061206E.EPS

01

Step column

Figure Drawing the Initial Double-Height Step with Transition

After a double-height step with transition is created, the attributes shown below must bedefined for the step.


• In unit proceduresStep information, operation, transition condition and transition attributes.

SEE ALSO

For definition of attributes for double-height steps and transitions, see the followings:




F6-26<F6.13 Renumbering Steps>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.13 Renumbering StepsTo renumber steps, the renumber tool or the attribute definition dialog is used.

■ How to Use the Renumber Tool▼ Renumbering Steps

Select [Numbering Change] from the [Edit] menu, or select [Renumber] on the toolbar.

No. F061301E.EPS

Figure Renumber Button

The numbers are automatically renumbered according to the rules below:

• Put numbers in the ascending order, starting from one

• From top to bottom

• If there are multiple steps in the same row, from left to right

SEE ALSO

For details on renumbering steps in the attribute definition dialog, see the following:



<F6.14 Defining Step Attribute> F6-27

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.14 Defining Step AttributeWhen defining the step attribute, the attribute definition tool is used.

■ How to Use the Attribute Definition Tool▼ Step Attribute

When one of the operations below is performed while in the selection mode, attributes of anstep can be defined:

• Select a step and select [Attribute Definition] from the [Edit] menu.

• Select a step and select the [Attribute Definition] button on the toolbar.

• Double-click on the step.

ATTRF061401E.EPS

Figure Attribute Definition Button

The contents of the definitions and definition methods may vary according to the step type.

There are the following types of step objects:

• Steps for the SFC block or operation (including double-height steps)

• Steps for the unit procedures (including double-height steps)

• Wait steps

• Interrupt steps


F6-28<F6.14 Defining Step Attribute>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Definition of Attributes for the SFC Block and Operation StepsDefinitions of step attributes are made in the step attribute dialog box.

CancelOK

F061402E.EPS

Step

Comment

Phase Signal

Step Information

Initial Step

Action Definition

Description Method

Generic Name/Tag Name

Variable Name

Execution Step

Step Attribute

Figure Step Attribute Dialog Box

The following items are defined in the step attribute dialog in the case of SFC blocks oroperations:

• Step

• Initial step

• Comment

• Phase signal (can be omitted)

• Description method

IMPORTANT

If a step number is changed to a number already in use, an error will occur.

Depending on the selected step action description method, the following items also need tobe defined:

• Name of the tag the step executes

• Variable name (can be omitted)

• Execution step of sequence table

TIP

Step numbers are defined when the step is created. Step numbers can be modified in the step attributeinput dialog as necessary.


<F6.14 Defining Step Attribute> F6-29

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Definition of Unit Procedure Step AttributesDefinition of step attributes is performed through the step attribute dialog box.

CancelOK

F061403E.EPS

Step

Comment

Step Information

Initial Step

Operation ID

Operation Name

Operation Definition

Step Attribute


In the step attribute dialog for the unit procedure, the following items are defined:

• Step number

• Initial step

• Comment

• Operation ID

• Operation name

SEE ALSO

For the details on the operation ID, see the following:

“■ Operation ID” in D6.10.4, “Operation Sharing”

■ Definition of Wait Step AttributesDefinition of wait step attributes is performed through the wait step attribute dialog box.

F061404E.EPS

Step

CancelOK

Wait Step Attribute

Figure Wait Step Attribute Dialog Box

The step number is defined in the wait step attribute dialog box.


F6-30<F6.14 Defining Step Attribute>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Definition of Interrupt Step AttributesDefinition of interrupt step attribute is performed through the step attribute dialog box asfollows.

CancelOK

F061405E.EPS

Comment

Parameter

Interrupt Step Attribute

Operation


The following items are defined in the interrupt step attribute dialog box:

• Comment

• Operation type

• Parameter

SEE ALSO

For the details on the action type of the interrupt step attribute and parameters, see the followings:

D5.1.4, “Step & Selective Sequences”

D6.14, “Interrupt Processing of Operation”


<F6.15 Defining Transition Attribute> F6-31

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.15 Defining Transition AttributeTo define the transition attribute, the attribute defining tool is used.

■ Definition of Transition Attributes▼ Transition Attribute

Definition of transition attributes is performed through the transition attribute dialog box.

F061501E.EPS

Comment

CancelOK

Transition

Transition Attributes

Figure Transition Attribute Dialog Box

The following items are defined in the transition attribute dialog box:

• Comment

• Transition

SEE ALSO

For the method of writing the transition condition, see the following:

D5.5, “Transition Conditions”


F6-32<F6.16 Call up Step Action Edit Window>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.16 Call up Step Action Edit WindowTo call up appropriate edit windows for editing actions of various steps, the stepaction edit tool is used.

■ How to Use the Step Action Edit Tool▼ Edit Step Action

Select [Edit Step Action] from the [Edit] menu, or select [Edit Step Action] on the toolbar.

F061601E.EPS

Figure Edit Step Action Button

The edit windows which are displayed vary according to the type of step or actiondescription method that were clicked.

● Step Action for Unit Procedure

Step action for unit procedure is written as an operation. Thus, when the step action editbutton is clicked, the operation editing window appears.

● Step Action for Operations and the SFC

Step action for operations and the SFC are written in SEBOL or described in a sequencetable or a logic chart. Thus, when the step action edit button is clicked, the SEBOL editwindow, the sequence table, or the logic chart editing window is displayed.

TIP

• Sequence tables are not displayed unless the Sequence Table Block (ST16 and ST16E) exists in thesame control drawing as the SFC and operations.

• The logic chart editing window is not displayed unless the Logic Chart Block (LC64) exists in thesame control drawing as the SFC and operations.


<F6.17 Editing Interrupt Steps> F6-33

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.17 Editing Interrupt StepsWhen editing interrupt steps, switch the target of editing from the main plane to theediting plane for the interrupt steps.

Interrupt steps may be used only for an SFC or an operation.

■ Editing the Interrupt Steps▼ Editing Interrupt Steps

When editing the interrupt steps, select the interrupt step to be edited from the [SwitchPlane] menu or the plane switching toolbar.


F6-34<F6.18 How to Use FCS Sequence Library>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F6.18 How to Use FCS Sequence LibraryThe SFC sequences defined in the FCS sequence library can be used in the SFCblock.

This section describes the method of using the FCS sequence library in the SFCblock.

■ How to Use FCS Sequence Library for an SFC SequenceTo use in the SFC block the SFC sequence defined in the FCS sequence library, specifythe name of that SFC sequence on the Basic tab of the Function Block Detail Builder. Notethat the SFC editing window cannot be displayed with the SFC block that uses the FCSsequence library.

IMPORTANT

After the above setting, the SFC sequence defined in the current SFC block will replaced bythe SFC sequence of the library.

SEE ALSO

For more information on the FCS sequence library, see the following:

F8.2, “Defining an SFC Sequence in FCS Sequence Library”


F7-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F7. Windows for Configuring Unit>

F7. Windows for Configuring UnitThis chapter describes windows and builder windows for defining unit instrumentsand operations.


F7-2

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F7.1 Configuring Unit Instrument>

F7.1 Configuring Unit InstrumentThis section explains how to configure unit instruments.

■ Windows for Configuring Unit InstrumentsUnit instruments can be configured using the windows displayed in the Function BlockDetail Builder.

Table Windows Used for Configuring Unit Instruments

WindowsType

Functionblock detail

Edit SFC Data itemGenericname

Unit instrument (resident) ��

Unit instrument (nonresident) ��

F070101E.EPS

��: The default window displayed when the function block detail builder is started�: The windows that can be switched from the default window�: The windows not displayed when sequence sharing is defined

● Windows for Configuring Unit Instruments

• Function Block Detail windowSame as for other function blocks, the details of the unit instrument may be defined onthis window.

• SFC Editing windowThe unit procedure may be defined on this window.

• Data Item windowThe data items for a unit instrument or for an operation started from a unit instrumentmay be defined on this window.

• Generic Name windowThe actually used tag name and the operation generic tag name for a unit instrumentor for an operation started from a unit instrument may be defined on this window.


F7-3

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Builder Windows for Configuring Unit Instrument

The builder windows for configuring unit instruments can be opened as shown below:

Function Block Detail Builder of Unit Instrument

System View


Data Item window

Generic Name window

Edit SFC window

Function Block Detail window

F070102E.EPS

Start the Function Block Detail Builder of Operation (*1)

Start

(*2)

Figure Builder Windows for Configuring Unit Instrument

*1: When unit instruments and operations are defined in the same drawing, it starts the Function Block Detail Builder foroperation.

*2: The window can not be opened when the unit procedure is shared.


F7-4

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Maintenance of Unit InstrumentsThe unit instruments like other function blocks, can be maintained online. The maintenancecorresponds to unit instruments and unit procedures may be carried out independently. Therestrictions for each type of the maintenance are different.

● Detailed Items of Unit Instrument Maintenance

For unit instrument configurations, to add, delete or modify a user-defined data item, datatype and array element are allowed.

IMPORTANT

When add a new unit instrument in a drawing or add a new user-defined data item in thedrawing, only two unit instruments can be downloaded at one time.

● Maintenance of Unit Procedure

Maintenance may be performed on a unit procedure only when the unit instrument is notrunning.


F7-5

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F7.2 Defining Operations>

F7.2 Defining OperationsThis section explains how to define operations.

■ Windows for Defining Operations

Table Edit Windows Used for Defining Unit Instruments and Operations

Edit window

Type

Functionblock detaildefinition

Edit SFC Edit SEBOL

Operation (SFC) ��

Operation (SEBOL) ��

F070201E.EPS

��: The default definition window displayed when the Function Block Detail Builder is started�: The definition windows not displayed when sequence sharing is defined

Basically, one definition window is displayed on the Function Block Detail Builder for defin-ing one function block. However, in order to define an operation, two or more definitionwindows may be opened for the function block, such as in the cases that a SEBOL Editingwindow may be started from the SFC Editing window.

● Windows for Defining Operations

• Function Block Detail windowSame as for other function blocks, the details related to the operation may be definedon this window.

• SFC Editing windowThe operation SFC may be defined on this window.

• SEBOL Editing windowThe SEBOL scripts for operations may be edited on this window.


F7-6

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F7.2 Defining Operations>

● Builder Windows for Defining Operation

The builder windows for operations can be developed as shown below:

SEBOL Edit window

Function Block Detail Builder for Operation (SEBOL)

System View


F070202E.EPS

Start

(*1)

(*1)


Edit Operation window

Function Block Detail Builder for Operation (SFC)


SEBOL Edit window

Figure Builder Windows for Defining Operations

Note: When unit instrument and operation are defined in the same drawing, it starts the Function Block Detail Builder foroperation.

*1: The window can not be opened when the unit procedure is shared.

■ Maintenance of OperationsWhen maintaining an operation, the operation should be terminated (to STOP or ABRTstatus).


<F8. FCS Sequence Library> F8-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

F8. FCS Sequence LibraryThe following sequences can be defined in the FCS sequence library;

• SEBOL user functions

• SFC sequence

• Unit procedure

This section describes the procedure for defining the above sequences in the FCSsequence library.

■ FCS Sequence LibraryThe following three sequences can be defined in the FCS sequence library:

● SEBOL User Functions

Any process in a SEBOL program can be defined in the FCS sequence library as a function(SEBOL user function). Any desired name can be assigned to a function so defined. Oncea SEBOL user function is defined, it can be called from a SEBOL program using the userassigned name.

● SFC Sequence

A name can be assigned to any process (SFC sequence) in the SFC block or operationand defined in the FCS sequence library. The name for the SFC sequence can be assignedas desired. Once an SFC sequence is defined, it can be called using the name defined bythe user on Function Block Detail Builder.

● Unit Procedure

A name can be assigned to any process (unit procedure) in the unit and defined in the FCSsequence library. The name for the unit procedure can be assigned as desired. Once a unitprocedure is defined, it can be called using the name defined by the user on Function BlockDetail Builder.


F8-2<F8. FCS Sequence Library>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Configuration of the FCS Sequence Library FolderThe SEBOL user functions, SFC sequences and unit procedures defined in the FCSsequence library are stored in the folders indicated below.

SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION

SEBOL user function

SEBOL user function

SEBOL user function

SFC_SEQUENCE

SFC sequence

SFC sequence

SFC sequence

F080002E.EPS

UNIT_PROCEDURE

Unit procedure

Unit procedure

Unit procedure

FCS

Project

SEQ_LIBRARY

Figure Configuration of FCS Sequence Library Folders


<F8.1 Defining a SEBOL User Function in FCS Sequence Library> F8-3

IM 33S01B30-01E

F8.1 Defining a SEBOL User Function in FCSSequence LibraryAfter creating a SEBOL user function file in System View, the SEBOL User’s Func-tions Builder may be started.

The SEBOL user function may be defined on the builder.

■ Procedure for Defining a User Function in the FCS Sequence Library▼ SEBOL User Function

The procedure for defining a SEBOL user function in the FCS sequence library is shownbelow:

1. After selecting a SEBOL user function folder in System View, select [Create New],then [SEBOL User Function] from the [File] menu .The SEBOL User’s Functions Builder may be started.

Ready

File Edit View Tools Window Help

SEBOL User’s Functions Builder

F080101E.EPS

Position: Line 1 Column 1

Message

Pjt:MYPJT Stn:FCS0101 Draw:DR0002 File:OPSBL1.edf Prog:0 Edit SEBOL

*-------------------------------------------------------------------Example of a function for AVE calculation*-------------------------------------------------------------------#include <std.h>integer function average(buf, n)integer buf[*], ninteger ilong sum sum = 0 for i = 1 to n sum = sum + buf[ i ] next@ return (sum / n)end

Figure Example of the SEBOL User’s Functions Builder

2. Using SEBOL statement, define the SEBOL user function.When defining the SEBOL user function, the following points need to be taken intoaccount.


F8-4<F8.1 Defining a SEBOL User Function in FCS Sequence Library>

IM 33S01B30-01E

• The number of alphanumeric characters defined per line is limited to 512.

• The number of lines defined per function is limited to 9999 and the number of alphanu-meric characters including the return code per function is limited to 65,536. Onedouble-byte character is counted as 2 alphanumeric characters.

• The file size after compilation is limited to 100 Kbytes.

• The SEBOL user function file name is the same as the function name.

SEE ALSO

For details on SEBOL statements, see the following:

H1, “SEBOL Details”

3. If the project is a user defined project, select [Save] from [File] menu to save the file.If the project is the current project, select [Update] from [File] menu to update thedatabase.A dialog box for entering file comment may appear when saving or updating the file.

4. A maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters may be used to define the file comment.Double-byte characters may also be used.

5. Click the [OK] button.When the SEBOL user function file is saved or updated, the SEBOL user function isregistered as a SEBOL user function in FCS sequence library.

■ SEBOL Check▼ SEBOL Check

Clicking [SEBOL Check] from [Tools] menu on SEBOL User’s Functions Builder, the cre-ated SEBOL program can be checked. However, when running generation for the SEBOLprogram, the SEBOL check is preformed at the same time.

■ To Use the SEBOL User Function Defined in the FCS Sequence LibraryThe SEBOL user function defined in the FCS sequence library can be called from a SEBOLprogram using the name assigned when the file was created.


<F8.2 Defining an SFC Sequence in FCS Sequence Library> F8-5

IM 33S01B30-01E

F8.2 Defining an SFC Sequence in FCS SequenceLibraryAfter creating an SFC sequence file in System View, the process is defined in thatfile using the SFC Sequence Builder.

■ Procedure for Defining an SFC Sequence in the FCS Sequence Library▼ SFC Sequence

The procedure for defining an SFC sequence in the FCS sequence library is shown below:

1. After selecting an SFC sequence folder in System View, select [Create New], then[SFC Sequence] from the [File] menu.The SFC Sequence Builder may be started.

ATTR

No.

OUT

Ready

Switch Plane

SFC Sequence Builder

F080201E.EPS

X=02,Y=11

Message

0 Main Plane

02 03 04

05

01

Pjt:MYPJT Stn:FCS0101 Draw:DR0002 File:SFC1.edf Plane:0 Edit SFC

File Edit View Draw Switch Plane Tools Window Help

Figure Example of the SFC Sequence Builder

2. Advance to SFC sequence definition.

SEE ALSO

For details on SFC sequence, see the followings:

D5, “Sequential Function Chart”

F6, “Editing SFC”


F8-6<F8.2 Defining an SFC Sequence in FCS Sequence Library>

IM 33S01B30-01E

3. If the project is a user defined project, select [Save] from [File] menu to save the file.If the project is the current project, select [Update] from [File] menu to update thedatabase.A dialog box for entering SFC sequence file name and file comment may appear whensaving or updating the file.

4. A maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters may be used to define the SFC sequencefile name and a maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters may be used to define thefile comment. Double-byte characters may also be used for file comment.

5. Click the [OK] button.When the SFC sequence file is saved or updated, the SFC sequence is registered inFCS sequence library.

■ Check SFC Sequence▼ Check SFC Sequence

Clicking [Check SFC Sequence] from [Tools] menu on SFC Builder, the created SFCprogram can be checked. However, when running generation for the SFC program, theSFC sequence check is preformed at the same time.

■ To Use the SFC Sequence Defined in the FCS Sequence LibraryTo use the SFC sequence that has been defined in the FCS sequence library, set the SFCsequence name defined when the file was created in the Basic Item Setup tab of thefunction block detail definition window.

IMPORTANT

If the above setting is performed while SFC sequences are already defined in the functionblock, the SFC sequences defined in the function block will be deleted.


<F8.3 Defining a Unit Procedure in FCS Sequence Library> F8-7

IM 33S01B30-01E

F8.3 Defining a Unit Procedure in FCS SequenceLibraryAfter creating a unit procedure file in System View, the process is defined in that fileusing the Unit Procedure Builder.

■ Procedure for Defining a Unit Procedure in the FCS Sequence Library▼ Unit Procedure

The procedure for defining a unit procedure in the FCS sequence library is shown below:

1. After selecting a unit procedure folder in System View, select [Create New], then [UnitProcedure] from the [File] menu.The Unit Procedure Builder may be started.

ATTR

No.

OUT

Ready

Switch Plane

Unit Procedure Builder

F080301E.EPS

ChangeDrawX=01,Y=01

0 Main Plane

02 03 04

05

01

Pjt:MYPJT Stn:FCS0101 Draw:DR0002 File:OPSFC1.edf Plane:0 Edit SFC

File Edit View Draw Switch Plane Tools Window Help

Figure Example of the Unit Procedure Builder

2. Advance to unit procedure definition.

SEE ALSO

For details on unit procedure, see the following:

D6.4, “Unit Procedure”


F8-8<F8.3 Defining a Unit Procedure in FCS Sequence Library>

IM 33S01B30-01E

3. If the project is a user defined project, select [Save] from [File] menu to save the file. Ifthe project is the current project, select [Update] from [File] menu to update the data-base.A dialog box for entering unit procedure file name and file comment may appear whensaving or updating the file.

4. A maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters be used to define the unit procedure filename and a maximum of 24 alphanumeric characters may be used to define the filecomment. Double-byte characters may also be used for file comment.

5. Click the [OK] button.When the unit procedure file is saved or updated, the unit procedure is registered as inFCS sequence library.

■ Check Unit Procedure▼ Check Unit Procedure

Clicking [Check Unit Procedure] from [Tools] menu on Unit Procedure Builder, the createdunit procedure can be checked. However, when running generation for the unit procedure,the unit procedure check is preformed at the same time.

■ To Use the Unit Procedure Defined in the FCS Sequence LibraryTo use the unit procedure that has been defined in the FCS sequence library, set the unitprocedure name defined when the file was created on the Basic tab of the function blockdetail definition window.

IMPORTANT

If the above setting is performed while unit procedures are already defined in the functionblock, the unit procedures defined in the function block will be deleted.


<F9. Security Policy> F9-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

F9. Security PolicyThe security policy is set to prevent illegal operations and other problems andensuring the safety of the system.

TIP

General-purpose Windows applications follow the security policy of Windows.

■ Outline of Security PolicyThe security policy restricts the scope of operation and monitoring permitted for an opera-tor, and masks certain alarms of which the operator need not be notified.

The following two types of policies are available in CS 1000/CS 3000.

• HIS Security PolicyHIS security policy stipulates the scope of operation and monitoring allowed on theHuman Interface Station. Regardless of the logon users, the operation performed to adevice or to a function block data item may be restricted.

• User Security PolicyUser security policy stipulates the scope of operation and monitoring for the users.Each user is restricted to operate or monitor a certain scope of devices and functionblock data items.

The scope of operation and monitoring permitted for an operator is determined by a combi-nation of HIS security and user security settings.

In the CS 1000/CS 3000 security policy, “operation and monitoring” is defined as follows:

• OperationSetting data to function blocks, changing function block statuses and other operations.

• MonitoringDisplaying function block data, acknowledgment of received messages and alarms orcalling up windows.


F9-2<F9. Security Policy>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ HIS SecurityHIS security is defined by the security settings specified for each HIS.

This function restricts the scope of operation and monitoring permitted for the HIS.

SEE ALSO

For the details of HIS security, see the following:

F9.7, “HIS Security”

■ User SecurityUser security is defined by the security settings specified for each user.

When an operator is checked for user security, the operator is identified by the user nameand the scope of operation and monitoring as well as privilege level (authority) granted forthe user are confirmed. As a result, the scope of operation and monitoring permitted for theoperator can be restricted.

In addition, alarms of which the user performing operation and monitoring need not benotified can also be masked.

The following items may be defined in relation to user security:

• User name

• Password

• Comment

• User group

• Privilege level

• Security level

• Operation mark

The user security function records the details of operation and monitoring performed by theuser as operation logs.

These operation records may be checked on the Historical Message Report window.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Flow of Security CheckingWhen the operator switches the privilege levels (authorities), the system conducts HISsecurity check and user security check, in sequence.

In the security checks, the operation and monitoring scope of the user having new privilegelevel (authority) is confirmed, and the scope of operation and monitoring permitted for thatoperator is restricted.

F090001E.EPS

Operator

Privilege levels (authorities) switching

User security checkHIS security check

Security check

Operation history

Plant operation by the operator • Operation and monitoring of function blocks• Operation and monitoring of windows• Operation and monitoring of received messages ...

Record operations

Checks the scopeof operation and

monitoringof a user

Checks the scopeof operation and

monitoringfor the HIS

Checks theauthority of a user

to access operationand monitoring

Figure Flow of Security Check



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Targets of the Operation and Monitoring Range Check for HIS

Among the operation and monitoring range for an HIS, operations that are performeddirectly on the HIS by an operator are checked. Remote access using an OPC or DDEinterface and message printing are not checked.

● Target of the Security Level Check for HIS

The security level of the HIS itself is checked.

● Targets of the Operation and Monitoring Range Check for User

The following items are checked among the operation and monitoring range for user:

• Field Control Station

• Control Drawing

• Unit Instrument

• User-defined Windows

● Targets of the Operation and Monitoring Authority Check for User

The following items are checked for the operation and monitoring authority for user:

• Accessing function block data items

• Accessing common block

• Accessing recipe

• Changing function key assignment

• Installing/removing operation marks

• Operating user-defined windows (Change the instrument faceplate assignment on thegraphic windows with control property, or change trend data acquisition pen assign-ment on the trend windows.)



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Determining the Range of Operation and MonitoringThe range of operation and monitoring permitted for an operator is determined by a combi-nation of HIS security and user security settings.

Therefore, the range of operation and monitoring permitted for an operator varies depend-ing on the HIS used by the operator for operation and monitoring. The range of operationand monitoring permitted for an operator is defined as the area included in both the opera-tion and monitoring range of the HIS used and that of the operator as a user.

F090002E.EPS

Overall plant operation

Range of operation and monitoring permitted for HIS0124

Range of operation and monitoring permitted for Operator A

When Operator A performs operation and monitoring using HIS0101

Range of operation and monitoring that can be performed by Operator A using HIS0124.

Figure Operation and Monitoring Range

■ Security BuilderSecurity Builder is used to register users (operators who perform operation and monitoringwith the HIS) and define various security settings of CS 1000/CS 3000 including usergroups, passwords and privilege levels.

If access to the builder is restricted, it is only administrators with the Administrator privilegewho can operate Security Builder. Even if access to the builder is not restricted, cancella-tion of lockout and password reset can only be performed by administrators with the Admin-istrator privilege.

The operation of Security Builder at startup varies depending on whether or not access tothe builder is restricted. The following sections explain the operations of the builder whenthe access is restricted and not restricted.

SEE ALSO

• For more information about restriction of access to the builder, see the following:

P2, “Access Control for Builders”

• For more information about cancellation of lockout, see the following:

“● Canceling Lockout” in “■ User Lockout” in F9.1, “User”

• For more information about password reset, see the following:

“■ Resetting Passwords” in F9.1, “User”



IM 33S01B30-01E

● When Access to the Builder is Restricted

When access to Security Builder is restricted, the administrator privilege confirmationdialog box appears if an engineer with the Write privilege attempts to start the builder. Thisdialog box is used to verify that the user has the Administrator privilege.

If an engineer without Write privilege to Security Builder starts the builder, the administratorprivilege confirmation dialog box does not appear; Security Builder starts up in the read-only mode.

F090003E.EPS

User Name:

Password:

CancelOK

Confirmation of Windows Account

Figure Confirmation of Windows Account Dialog Box

If it is verified that the user name and password entered in the administrator privilegeconfirmation dialog box belong to an administrator with the Administrator privilege, SecurityBuilder starts up and the operation of the builder is enabled unconditionally.

The retry message dialog box appears if the user name and password entered are wrongor belong to a user without the Administrator privilege.

F090004E.EPS


Your user name or your password is invalid, or you have no Administrative Privilege. Try again?

NoYes

Figure Retry Message Dialog Box

Click the [Yes] button to enter a user name and password again in the administrator privi-lege confirmation dialog box.

If you click the [No] button, Security Builder starts up in the read-only mode.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● When Access to the Builder is not Restricted

When access to Security Builder is not restricted, the builder starts up without displayingthe administrator privilege confirmation dialog box.

Note that the administrator privilege confirmation dialog box appears if a user attempts tocancel lockout and reset passwords, in order to verify that the user is an administrator withthe Administrator privilege.

If it is verified that the user name and password entered in the administrator privilegeconfirmation dialog box belong to an administrator with the Administrator privilege, lockoutcan be canceled and/or a password can be reset.

The following message dialog box appears if the user name and password entered arewrong or belong to a user without the Administrator privilege, and it will not be possible tocancel lockout or reset passwords.

F090005E.EPS


Your user name or your password is invalid, or you have no Administrative Privilege.

Yes

Figure Message Dialog Box


F9-8<F9.1 User>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F9.1 UserThe operators performing the operation and monitoring functions are classifiedbased on their privilege level (authority). This classification is called user.

The following attributes are assigned to each user:

• User name

• Password

• Comment

• User group

• Privilege level

• Automatic user-out

IMPORTANT

The Microsoft Windows’s security management is beyond the scope of this CS 1000/CS3000 security management. The “user” of HIS is different from the “user” managed byMicrosoft Windows operating system.


<F9.1 User> F9-9

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Positioning of User in User SecurityThe user security function confirms the privilege level (authority) of the user-in operatorthrough a user security check based on his/her user name.

■ Default User NamesThe HIS offers the following default user names.

The privilege level of the user who accesses from the User-in Dialog becomes valid whenthe mode switching key position of the operation keyboard is OFF.

Table Default User Names

User name Privilege level User group Description

OFFUSER (*1) S1 DEFGRP User name for monitoring data

ONUSER S2 DEFGRP User name for operation and monitoring data

ENGUSER S3 DEFGRP User name for maintenance

PROG (*2) S1 DEFGRP User name for accessing data from a user program

TESTUSER S3 DEFGRP User name for conducting a virtual test

F090101E.EPS

*1: When the user group for OFFUSER is changed to NONEGRP and the HIS is started, the operation and monitoring willbe disabled.

*2: User cannot user-in as PROG.

SEE ALSO

For details on user group, see the following:

F9.2, “User Group”

Password is not required for OFFUSER but required for ONUSER and ENGUSER, thepassword is user definable. The user group can be changed for any user.


F9-10<F9.1 User>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Switching UsersWhen starting HIS, the OFFUSER is assigned to the initial user automatically. In the HIS,the privilege level as well as the scope of operation and monitoring of the operator can bechanged by switching users.

In the HIS, switching the OFFUSER to a different user is called user-in, and the userswitching back to the OFFUSER is called user-out.

To perform user-in or user-out, call up the User-In dialog box from the System Messagewindow and enter a user name and the password.

Start the HIS

......

F090102E.EPS

USER BUSER A USER N

: User-in: User-out

OFFUSER

Figure User Switching

SEE ALSO

For details on User-In dialog box, see the following:

“■ Toolbar of the System Message Window” in E3.1.2, “Components of the System Message Window”


<F9.1 User> F9-11

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Limitation on Operation and Monitoring Window Call at User-out State

At the user-out state, whether or not to limit the operation and monitoring window call canbe specified. When the window call is limited, the operation and monitoring window cannotbe called up in the case that the mode switching key position of the operation keyboard isOFF and at the user-out state. If the operation and monitoring window is called while thewindow call is limited, the error operation message is displayed.

Whether or not to limit the operation and monitoring window call can be specified in theSecurity Policy Setting dialog box. Click the [Security Policy Setting] button in the HIS utilityto display the Security Policy Setting dialog box. Only an administrator with the Administra-tor privilege can operate this button.

Check the [Limits the window call at user out state] check box on the Security Policy Set-ting dialog.

F090110E.EPS

Security Policy Setting

OK Cancel

Password required for confirmation

Limits the window call at user out state

Send a notification after 0 invalid logon attempts. (0: No notification)

Lockout repeatedly denied account

Prompt for changing password 0 days. (0: No prompt)

Minimum password length 0

Do not use previous password

Figure Security Policy Setting Dialog Box

Even while the operation and monitoring window call is limited, the following windows anddialog boxes can be called up.

• User-in dialog

• Navigator windowThe operation and monitoring window call from the Navigator window is limited.

• Massage Monitor window

• Name Input dialogThe operation and monitoring window call from the Name Input dialog is limited.


F9-12<F9.1 User>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ User Registration ¡▼ User Name, Comment

The user registration may be carried out in the Valid User tab on the Security Builder. Eachuser name must be unique, consisting of 16 alphanumeric characters or fewer. Up to 100users can be defined. Upper- and lower-case letters are not distinguished.

Up to 32 characters or 16 double-byte characters may be entered as comment for eachuser name.

■ User Registration £▼ User Name, Comment

The user registration may be carried out in the Valid User tab on the Security Builder. Eachuser name must be unique, consisting of 16 alphanumeric characters or fewer. Up to 250users can be defined. Upper- and lower-case letters are not distinguished.

Up to 32 characters or 16 double-byte characters may be entered as comment for eachuser name.


<F9.1 User> F9-13

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Delete User ¡ £When a registered user is deleted, how to manage the user after the deletion varies bywhether or not the Access Administrator Package (FDA:21 CFR Part11 compliant) (*1) isinstalled in the PC on which the Security Builder is mounted.

*1: ¡ The name of the package type for CS1000: PHS5170 FDA:21 CFR Part11-compliant package£ The name of the package type for CS3000: LHS5170 FDA:21 CFR Part11-compliant package

● When Access Administrator Package (FDA:21 CFR Part11 compliant) isInstalled

FDA:21 CFR Part11 requires the unique ID (user name) in all registered data.

When the Access Administrator Package (FDA:21 CFR Part11 compliant) is installed, theInvalid User tab is additionally displayed on the Security Builder.

When a registered user is deleted, the user is also deleted from the Valid User tab andmoved to the Invalid User tab. The Invalid User tab provides the same items as in the ValidUser tab as well as the date and time when the deletion is performed.

The user moved to the Invalid User tab cannot be completely deleted from the database.The user name that once has been deleted and become invalid is no more available.

However, if the user registered on the Security Builder is deleted without saving, the user iscompletely deleted from the database; the user is not moved to the Invalid User tab.

The limit number of the invalid user is 10000. When this number is reached, valid user canno longer be deleted.

TIP

The Invalid User tab is shown when the detailed setting items are displayed.

● When Access Administrator Package (FDA:21 CFR Part11 compliant) isnot Installed

When the Access Administrator Package (FDA:21 CFR Part11 compliant) is not installed,the Invalid User tab is not displayed on the Security Builder.

When a registered user is deleted, the user is completely deleted from the database. Thedeleted user can be registered again.


F9-14<F9.1 User>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ PasswordThe HIS grants the specified authority to each user. Only the authorized users identified bypassword can switch users. Each user’s password is managed by the HIS.

Setting password can be carried out in the User-In dialog box called up from the SystemMessage window.

SEE ALSO

For details on User-In Dialog box, see the following:

“■ Toolbar of the System Message Window” in E3.1.2, “Components of the System Message Window”

● Password Expiration

14 days before the expiration date of a password, a message notifying that the passwordwill soon expire is displayed upon the successful user-in. When the password expires, amessage box to prompt to change the password is displayed after the user-in is estab-lished. However, the user itself will not become invalid.

Information

F090103E.EPS

You are recommended to change your password.Do you want to change it now?

Yes No

Figure Message Box Prompts for Changing Password

Click [Yes] button on this message box, then Change Password box displays. Passwordcan be changed on this box.

F090104E.EPS

Change Password

User Name TANAKA

Old Password

New Password

Confirm New Password

OK Cancel

Figure Change Password Box


<F9.1 User> F9-15

IM 33S01B30-01E

Expiration period of password can be set on Security Policy Setting dialog box. Click the[Security Policy Setting] button in the HIS utility to display the Security Policy Setting dialogbox. Only an administrator with the Administrator privilege can operate this button.

On this dialog box, set a number of days (0 to 1000) to the blank in the setting item of[Prompt for changing password in __ days]. When the number of days elapsed after a newpassword is set or after the password is changed, a message box prompts for changingpassword displays.

14 days before the expiration date of a password, the message notifying that the passwordwill soon expire is displayed. If the expiration period of the password is 14 days or shorter,the message notifying that the password will soon expire is shown immediately after settinga new password or changing the password.

The expiration period set on this dialog box is valid only for this HIS, other HISs need to beset separately. Setting an expiration period for each user group is not possible. In one HIS,this password expiration period is valid for all users in the HIS. If [Prompt for changingpassword in __ days] is set with a zero (0), it means the password never expires. In thiscase, the message to notify that the password will soon expire and the message box toprompt for changing the password do not appear. By default, zero (0) is set to this settingitem.

F090105E.EPS

Security Policy Setting

OK Cancel

Password required for confirmation

Limits the window call at user out state

Send a notification after 0 invalid logon attempts. (0: No notification)

Lockout repeatedly denied account

Prompt for changing password 0 days. (0: No prompt)

Minimum password length 0

Do not use previous password

Figure Security Policy Setting Dialog Box

● Restriction on Minimum Number of Characters for Passwords

The minimum number of characters that can be entered when registering a password canbe specified. This way, it is possible to ensure that character strings less than the minimumnumber of characters cannot be registered as passwords when setting new passwords orchanging passwords.

The minimum number of characters for password can be set in the Security Policy Settingdialog box. Click the [Security Policy Setting] button in the HIS utility to display the SecurityPolicy Setting dialog box. Only an administrator with the Administrator privilege can operatethis button.

Set the minimum number of characters for password (0 to 32 characters) in [Minimumpassword length] in the Security Policy Setting dialog box.

The minimum number of characters for passwords in this dialog box is valid for the currentHIS only. The setting must be made for other HISs separately.

If “0” is set for [Minimum password length], there will be no restriction on the number ofcharacters used for a password. By default, zero (0) characters is set for this setting item.


F9-16<F9.1 User>

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Prohibiting Using Previously Used Passwords

It is possible to make settings so that a user cannot specify the same character string as apreviously used password when the user changes the password.

Whether or not to prohibit using previous passwords can be set on the Security PolicySetting dialog box. Click the [Security Policy Setting] button in the HIS utility to display theSecurity Policy Setting dialog box. Only an administrator with the Administrator privilegecan operate this button.

To prohibit using previous passwords, check the [Do not use previous password] check boxin the Security Policy Setting dialog box.

● Confirmation with Password Dialog Box

When an operation on HIS requires user’s confirmation, a dialog box may appear to au-thenticate the user’s password. By this way, the user’s privilege can be checked. Whenchanging an operation mode, this dialog box may appear for authentication.

F090106E.EPS

PIC100 AUTReactor tank vapor pressure

Name :

Password :

TANAKA

********

Reason :

Figure Confirmation with Password Dialog Box

The option check box [Password Required for Confirmation] on Security Policy Settingdialog box needs to be checked to activate this feature. Click the [Security Policy Setting]button in the HIS utility to display the Security Policy Setting dialog box. Only an administra-tor with the Administrator privilege can operate this button.

Only when the above option [Password Required for Confirmation] is checked, the Confir-mation with Password dialog box may be displayed.

TIP

When using the double authentication for confirmation, the above-mentioned option [Password Requiredfor Confirmation] also needs to be checked.


<F9.1 User> F9-17

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Double Authenticated Confirmation Dialog Box

▼ Double Authentication

When manipulating the important function blocks, other than the logged-on user, one moreuser’s confirmation may be required. In this case, the confirmation may be performed onthe Double Authenticated Confirmation dialog box.

In order to activate the double authentication for confirmation, [Double Authentication]setting on the Function Block Detail Builder must be set to [Yes]. And the tag mark of thefunction block must be set as [Important].

There is no requirement that the user of [Name1] is superior to the user of [Name2] andvice versa. Any users, excluding the user of [Name1] and the default users (OFFUSER/ONUSER/ENGUSER) can be act as the user of [Name2] for double authentication.

F090107E.EPS

PIC100 Outside the Set Range OK ?Reactor Steam Pressure

Name1:

Password:

Reason :

TANAKA

For Summer Operations

********

SUZUKI

Confirmation

********

Name2:

Password:

Reason:

Figure Double Authenticated Confirmation Dialog Box

The user names of [Name1] and [Name2] and reasons for operation (Reason) are re-corded in the operation log message of the Double Authenticated Confirmation dialog box.

The operation log message on [Name2] is recorded as a part of character strings typed infor [Reason] of the [Name2]. Therefore, the filtering cannot be performed by [Name2].

1601 6/24/2002 18:09:32 PIC100 Reactor Steam Pressure SV = 0.7 MPA old= 0.8

For Summer Operations [Confirmation [ SUZUKI@HIS0164 ] ] [ TANAKA@HIS0164 ]

Name2 User NameName2 ReasonName1 Reason Name1 User NameF090111E.EPS

Figure Example of Operation Log Message for Double Authentication


F9-18<F9.1 User>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Password ControlThere are two modes for controlling passwords: Local control and Common control. Eitherof the two can be selected on the Security Builder. The mode can also be selected accord-ing to the security operation condition of your plant. The Local control is specified by de-fault. Each control mode is detailed in the following subsections.

SEE ALSO

For the detailed procedures to select a mode for controlling passwords, see the following:

F9.6.4, “Definition of Password Control Modes”

● Local Password Control

In the Local password control, passwords are individually managed upon each HIS. It isnecessary to configure passwords respectively for the HIS to which the user will logon,because the definitions made on the Security Builder are downloaded to each HIS in thiscontrol mode.

PC for running the Security Builder

Security definition file

HIS

Password file

HIS

Password file

HIS

Password file

Create

Create

Create

Download

Download

Download

F090112E.EPS

Password setting

Password setting

Password setting

Figure Local Password Control


<F9.1 User> F9-19

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Common Password Control

In the Common password control, the password management is centralized, allowingevery HIS to use passwords defined on one of the HISs. If there are many HISs and it ismandatory to change a password at established periods, this control mode is useful be-cause you can change the password for a user account in one operation.

PC for running the Security Builder

Password file(master)

Security definition file

HIS

HIS

HIS

Create

F090113E.EPS

Password setting

Figure Common Password Control

IMPORTANT

• The Common password control requires a PC with a master password file to runconstantly. If this PC is inactive, users may not be able to login with the latest pass-word information or authorized in the Confirmation with Password dialog box. A userwill not be able to change the password, either.

• Even while the Common password control is performed, the expiration of password iscontrolled by each HIS.

• When the control mode is switched from Local to Common, all passwords are initial-ized (deleted). Therefore, you need to register the passwords again in this case.

• It is impossible to exclude any given HIS from the Common password control target.

• While the test function is performed, the Common password control is not performed.

• The unit for Common password control is a project.


F9-20<F9.1 User>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Resetting PasswordsIf a user forgets her/his password, an administrator can reset the user’s password andplace the user in a status where she/he has no password. The user whose password isreset will be able to log in without any password.

IMPORTANT

The user must set a new password immediately after an administrator has reset her/hispassword.

Passwords can be reset in Security Builder. How passwords can be reset depends on howpasswords are managed. Only an administrator with the Administrator privilege can resetpasswords.

● Password Reset Operation when Passwords are Managed Locally on EachHIS

1. Select a user whose password you want to reset in the Valid User tab (multiple selec-tions are allowed).

2. Select [Edit] and then [Reset Password...]. The Password Reset confirmation dialogbox appears.

F090114E.EPS

Password Reset

Account: xxxxxxxx

HIS0162HIS0163HIS0164

HIS Cancel

Execute

Figure Password Reset Confirmation Dialog Box (When Passwords are Managed Locally onEach HIS)

TIP

[xxxxxxxx] displayed after [Account:] in the Password Reset confirmation dialog box refers to the username of the user whose password is to be reset.

3. In the Password Reset confirmation dialog box, select an HIS for which you want toreset the password (multiple selections are allowed) and click the [Execute] button. Ifyou have selected multiple users, perform this operation for all the users.

The passwords are reset when you finish the operation for all the selected users.


<F9.1 User> F9-21

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Password Reset Operation when Passwords are Managed Commonly forAll HISs

1. Select a user whose password you want to reset in the Valid User tab (multiple selec-tions are allowed).

2. Select [Edit] and then [Reset Password...]. The Password Reset confirmation dialogbox appears.

F090115E.EPS

NoYes

Reset Password

Do you want to reset Account xxxxxxxx’s password?

Figure Password Reset Confirmation Dialog Box (When Passwords are Managed Commonly forAll HISs)

TIP

[xxxxxxxx] displayed in the Password Reset confirmation dialog box refers to the user name of the userwhose password is to be reset.

3. To reset the user’s password, click the [Yes] button in the Reset Password confirma-tion dialog box. If you have selected multiple users, perform this operation for all theusers.

The passwords are reset in all the HISs when you finish the operation for all theselected users.


F9-22<F9.1 User>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Notification of Continuous Invalid Logon AttemptsIn order to protect HIS from intruders, the logon attempts with invalid password and username are monitored. If the attempts are continued for number of times, a system alarmmessage number 0891 is initiated to alert for the illegal access. This system alarm mes-sage is then logged into the HIS historical messages’ audit trail of the HIS operation group.The system alarm message contains the HIS station name and the last invalid user name.

Invalid logon attempts are counted in each HIS, the used users are irrelevant. For anexample, if five is set, the system alarm about user name “BBBB” occurs after “AAAA”logon continuously attempted for four times and “BBBB” logon attempted for one time.When the alarm is initiated, it will occur at every invalid logon attempt until the logon suc-cesses.

When the logon successes, the counted number of invalid logon attempts is reset.

The invalid logon attempts are counted under the following circumstances:

• Logon to user-in window fails

• Authentication fails when operating on “Confirmation with Password” dialog box andon “Double Authenticated Confirmation” dialog box.

• Changing a password

● Number of Continuous Invalid Logon Attempts

This number (0 to 10) is set on Security Policy Setting dialog box. Click the [Security PolicySetting] button in the HIS utility to display the Security Policy Setting dialog box. Only anadministrator with the Administrator privilege can operate this button.

The number of continuous invalid logon attempts set on this dialog box is valid only for thisHIS, other HISs need to be set separately. Each user’s logon attempts cannot be counted.If [Send a notification after __ logon attempts] is set with a zero (0), it means the invalidlogon attempts are not counted. If 1 is set, the system alarm occurs at every logon failures.By default, zero (0) is set to this setting item.


<F9.1 User> F9-23

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ User LockoutIt is possible to lock out the last user who attempted logon as an illegal user at the timingcorresponding to “notification of continuous invalid logon attempts” described earlier.Unless an administrator cancels the lockout, a locked out user cannot log in to an HIS norbe authorized in the Confirmation with Password dialog box/Double Authenticated Confir-mation dialog box.

The number of logon failures is counted for each HIS. If a user is locked out from a certainHIS, the user is locked out in all the HISs belonging to the same project.

The number of logon failures is counted independently from user names. When the logonsucceeds, the counted number of logon failures is reset.

Every time the number of consecutive logon failures exceeds the specified number oftimes, the name of the user who attempted the logon is locked out. No user is locked out ifthe user name used in the attempt is not registered.

Logon attempts by users who have already been locked out are also counted as logonfailures.

IMPORTANT

Information on locked out users is managed by a PC with a project database. This meansthat the PC with the project database must always be operating in order to lock out users. Ifthe PC with the project database goes down, users are locked out in the following manner.

• Lockout of users is managed by each HIS based on the locked out user informationheld by the PC with the project database before it goes down.

• Each HIS obtains the latest locked out user information from the PC with the projectdatabase whenever a user is authenticated in the HIS. This means that all the HISs inthe same project may not have the same locked out user information at the time thePC with the project database went down.

• Since the locked out user information is managed by each individual HIS after the PCwith the project database goes down, a user locked out from a certain HIS is notlocked out from other HISs.

• After the PC with the project database recovers, the temporary locked out user infor-mation managed by each HIS is discarded. User lockout is executed based on thelocked out user information managed by the PC with the project database.

Users locked out after the PC with the project database goes down are treated asvalid users after the PC recovers.


F9-24<F9.1 User>

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Setting Lockout

Whether or not to lock out illegal users can be set in the Security Policy Setting dialog box.Click the [Security Policy Setting] button in the HIS utility to display the Security PolicySetting dialog box. Only an administrator with the Administrator privilege can operate thisbutton.

To lock out illegal users, check the [Lockout repeatedly denied account] check box in theSecurity Policy Setting dialog box.

● Canceling Lockout

It is possible to cancel the lockout state of locked out users. Only an administrator with theAdministrator privilege can cancel the lockout state. Lockout can be canceled in SecurityBuilder.

1. Select a user whose lockout state you want to cancel in the Valid User tab (multipleselections are allowed).

An asterisk (*) is placed at the head of user names that have been locked out. It is notpossible to change the information in lines containing asterisks (*).

2. Select [Edit] and then [Release Lockout Account...]. The Release Lockout Accountconfirmation dialog box appears.

F090116E.EPS

NoYes

Lockout Account Release

Do you want to release the lockout Account XXXXXXXX?

Figure Release Lockout Account Confirmation Dialog Box

TIP

[xxxxxxxx] displayed in the Release Lockout Account confirmation dialog box refers to the user name ofthe user whose lockout state is to be canceled.

3. To cancel the user’s lockout state, click the [Yes] button in the Release Lockout Ac-count confirmation dialog box. If you have selected multiple users, perform this opera-tion for all the users. The lockout state is canceled when you finish the operation for allthe selected users.

4. When the lockout state is canceled, the asterisk (*) placed at the head of the username disappears and it becomes possible to change the information in the line.


<F9.1 User> F9-25

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Automatic User-Out▼ Set Automatic User Out Time

When an automatic user-out time is defined, the user automatically changes to theOFFUSER when the automatic user-out time elapsed. However, automatic User-out maybe delayed when waiting for a confirmation upon an operation of function block.

User may be automatically user-out under the following optional conditions.

• Automatically User-Out Due to No Operation TimeoutIf the keyboard or the mouse has not been touched for a designated time period, theuser is automatically user-out.

• A Certain Time Elapsed since User-InUser may be automatically user-out after a certain time elapsed since the user-in.

Automatic User-Out can be activated for each user on the User-Definition tab of securitybuilder. By default, Automatic User-Out is not activated. However, OFFUSER is not subjectto Automatic User-Out.

● Set No Operation Time for Automatic User-Out

The no operation time that triggers Automatic User-Out can be set by choosing [Set Auto-matic User Out Time] - [No Operation Time] and setting a time in the range of 1 to 59minutes for the setting of [Automatic User Out Time (Minutes)].

The following figure shows an example of automatic user-out due to no operation timeout.

Time

User-Out (Auto)

Automatic User-Out Time(1 to 59 minutes)

USER A

OFFUSER

No operationUser-In

F090108E.EPS

Operating and Monitoring User

Figure Automatic User-Out


F9-26<F9.1 User>

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Set Elapsed Time from User-In for Automatic User-Out

[Elapsed Time from User In] that triggers Automatic User-Out can be set by choosing [SetAutomatic User Out Time] - [Elapsed Time from User In] and setting a time in the range of 0hour 1 minute to 24 hours 0 minute for the setting of [Automatic User Out Time (Hour)] and[Automatic User Out Time (Minute)] accordingly.

An example of automatic user-out.

Time

User-Out (Auto)

Automatic User-Out Time(1 minute to 24 hours)

USER A

OFFUSER

User-In

F090109E.EPS

Operating and Monitoring User

Figure Automatic User-Out

■ Operation RecordWith the CS 1000/CS 3000 security, details of operations such as user switching arerecorded in operation logs.

The following items are recorded as operation logs:

• User who performed user-in

• User who performed user-out

• Location at which the user switching took place (HIS)

• Time at which the user switching took place

• Privilege level changed by mode switching key on the operation keyboard

Operation logs can be viewed in the Historical Message Report window.

Since each operation log includes the user name of the operator who performed the opera-tion, operation logs of each user can be traced easily.


<F9.2 User Group> F9-27

IM 33S01B30-01E

F9.2 User Group▼ User Group

The users are classified into groups based on their operation and monitoringscopes. This classification is called user group.

-The following attributes are assigned to each user group:

• User group name

• Monitoring range

• Operation and monitoring range

• Windows range

• Acknowledgement

• Process Message receiving

• Comment


F9-28<F9.2 User Group>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Positioning of User Group in User SecurityThe user security function confirms the monitoring range, operation and monitoring range,window range, acknowledgement and process message receiving of the user-in operatorthrough a user security check based on his/her user group name. The example of relation-ship between user group and operation and monitoring range is shown below:

Project

F090201E.EPS

"USER1," "USER2," and "USER3" "USER4"

Monitoring RangeMonitoring Range

Tank 2

Operation Range

Tank 1

Operation Range

Tank 3

A-GROUP B-GROUP

Figure Relationship between User Group and Operation/Monitoring Range

In the above example, the users belong to Group A (user1, user2 and user3) have rights onoperating and monitoring tank1 and monitoring tank2, but have not right on tank3.

While the user belongs to Group B (user4) has rights on operating and monitoring tank3but no right on tank1 nor on tank 2.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Default User GroupThe following built-in default user groups are managed by CS 1000/CS 3000 securitypolicy.

Table Default User Group

User group name

Operation andmonitoring

range

Windowrange Description

DEFGRP ALL ALL

Authorized to operate andmonitor all control stations andwindows connected in the sameControl Bus.

NONEGRP

Monitoringrange

ALL

NONE NONE NONENot authorized to operate andmonitor any control station andwindow connected in the Control Bus.

F090202E.EPS

Acknowledge-ment

ALL

NONE

ProcessMessageReceiving

ALL

NONE

■ User Group Name Definition ¡▼ User Group Name, Comment

The user group name may be defined on the Security Builder.

Each user group name must be unique and in 8 or less alphanumeric characters. 15 usergroups may be assigned to one project. There is no distinction using capital or small casecharacters when defining the user group names.

User group may be used to classify the messages sent to different printers.

Up to 32 characters or 16 double-byte characters may be defined as the comment for a usegroup name.

■ User Group Name Definition £▼ User Group Name, Comment

The user group name may be defined on the Security Builder.

Each user group name must be unique and in 8 or less alphanumeric characters. 50 usergroups may be assigned to one project. There is no distinction using capital or small casecharacters when defining the user group names.

User group may be used to classify the messages sent to different printers.

Up to 32 characters or 16 double-byte characters may be entered as the comment for auser group name.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Setting Operation and Monitoring RangeThe operation and monitoring range is set for each user group.

The user-in user can perform operation and monitoring within the range specified for theuser group to which he/she belongs.

The operation and monitoring range may be defined as inclusive or exclusive type on theSecurity Builder.

Specify the bus converter station name for a station name when the station is connected tothe lower side of the converter.

● Inclusive Definition

▼ Monitoring Range, Operation and Monitoring Range, Window Range, Acknowledgment, ProcessMessage Receiving, System Alarm Receiving

Specify the following items:

• Monitoring RangeSpecify the scope of data to be read. Specify a plant hierarchy name.

• Operation and Monitoring RangeSpecify the scope of data to be read and written. Specify a plant hierarchy name.Operation and Monitoring Range should be within the Monitoring Range.

• Window RangeSpecify a window name a user can operate and monitor after user-in. Specify windowname.

• AcknowledgmentSpecify the scope of acknowledged process alarms. Specify a plant hierarchy name.

• Process Message ReceivingSpecify the scope of monitored messages. Specify a plant hierarchy name.

• System Alarm ReceivingSpecify the scope of monitored system alarms by station name.

The following keywords are used in setting operation and monitoring scope:

• ALLOperation and monitoring rights on all stations and windows connected to the controlbus

• NONENo monitoring rights on any station

When setting operation and monitoring rights on designated station names or windownames, the wild card character “ * ” can be used instead of part or all characters in a char-acter string.

The default setting is that all stations and windows are within the operation and monitoringrange.

SEE ALSO

For the security using the plant hierarchy, see the following:

“● Security Using the Plant Hierarchy” in “■ Advantages of Plant Hierarchy and Usage Procedures” inE10.1.1, “How to Use the Plant Hierarchy”



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Exclusive Definition

▼ Exclude Operation, Exclude Operation and Monitoring, Exclude Acknowledgment, ExcludeProcess Message, Exclude System Alarm

Specify the following items:

• Exclude OperationSpecify the scope of data not to be written. Specify a plant hierarchy name.

• Exclude Operation and MonitoringSpecify the scope of data not to be read or written. Specify a plant hierarchy name.

• Exclude AcknowledgmentSpecify the scope of non-acknowledged process alarms. Specify a plant hierarchyname.

• Exclude Process MessageSpecify the scope of non-monitored messages. Specify a plant hierarchy name.

• Exclude System AlarmSpecify the scope of non-monitored system alarms by station name.

SEE ALSO

For the security using the plant hierarchy, see the following:

“● Security Using the Plant Hierarchy” in “■ Advantages of Plant Hierarchy and Usage Procedures” inE10.1.1, “How to Use the Plant Hierarchy”



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Combining Inclusive and Exclusive Definitions

You may combine inclusive and exclusive definitions to specify various scopes. The follow-ing are examples of combination:

• If operation and monitoring are possible at the FCS0101 and FCS0102;Specify FCS0101 and FCS0102 at the inclusive definition, and NON at the exclusivedefinition.

• If operation and monitoring are possible at other stations excluding FCS0103;Specify ALL at the inclusive definition, and FCS0103 at the exclusive definition.

• If operation and monitoring are possible at the FCS0101 and FCS0102, but not at theUNIT A;Specify FCS0101 and FCS0102 at the inclusive definition, and UNITA at the exclusivedefinition.

● Example of Operation and Monitoring Range Setting

Examples of operation and monitoring scope settings are shown below:

• Monitoring range: ALL

• Operation and monitoring range: FCS0101,FCS0102,%DR0001S010301,UNIT001

• Operation and monitoring range on windows: TANK1, WIN*

In the above example, all stations and windows are within the monitoring range. However,only stations FCS0101 and FCS0102, drawing DR0001 of station FCS0103(%DR0001S010301) and unit instrument UNIT001 are within the operation and monitoringrange. The operation and monitoring rights on windows covers all windows lower than thehierarchy TANK1 and the hierarchies windows under the windows whose names start withWIN.


<F9.3 Privilege Level> F9-33

IM 33S01B30-01E

F9.3 Privilege Level▼ Privilege Levels

The users’ operation and monitoring rights on HIS are defined according to privilegelevels.

The following attributes are assigned to each privilege level:

• Whether or not monitoring is permitted

• Whether or not operation is permitted

• Whether or not operation and monitoring on windows is permitted

■ Privilege Level and User SecurityWith the user security, a user’s operation and monitoring authority on function block’s dataitems and system operation windows is determined by the user’s privilege level.

■ Default Privilege LevelsThe following default privilege levels are available in HIS.

The three levels are shown as follows:

Table Rights and Abilities of three levels of privilege

Privilege level Monitoring Operation Maintenance (*1)

S1 Y N N

S2 Y Y N

S3 Y Y Y

F090301E.EPS

Y: AuthorizedN: Unauthorized*1: Rights on operating and monitoring the window for system administration.


F9-34<F9.3 Privilege Level>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Operation and Monitoring Authority on Data ItemsThe tables in which the relationship of the function block’s data items and the privilegelevels in operation and monitoring rights and abilities is stipulated as well as the rights andabilities related to the security levels of the function blocks are provided by CS 1000/CS3000 security policy.

The tables on operation and monitoring authority are fixed and cannot be edited.

Table Data Item Operation and Monitoring Authority Table (Function Blocks for Security Level 1)

Data items classificationPrivilege levels

S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV R/W R/W R/W

Alarm set value R/W R/W R/W

Write-allowed data items other than block mode,SV, MV, and alarm set value R/W R/W R/W

Write-prohibited data items R R R

AFLS (alarm acknowledgment) only (*1) R/W R/W R/W

F090302E.EPS

*1: Users having no AFLS operation authority cannot acknowledge alarms sent from the corresponding function blocks.R/W: Both operation and monitoring permittedR: Only monitoring permitted

Table Data Item Operation and Monitoring Authority Table (Function Blocks for Security Level 4)


S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV R R/W R/W

Alarm set value R R/W R/W

Write-allowed data items other than block mode,SV, MV, and alarm set value R R/W R/W


AFLS (alarm acknowledgment) only (*1) R/W R/W R/W

F090303E.EPS

*1: Users having no AFLS operation authority cannot acknowledge alarms sent from the corresponding function blocks.R/W: Both operation and monitoring permittedR: Only monitoring permitted

SEE ALSO

For details on security level, see the following:

“■ Security Levels” in F9.4, “Function Block Security”



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Window Operation and Monitoring Authority▼ Window Operation and Monitoring Authority

With CS 1000/CS 3000 security policy, the operation and monitoring authority can be setfor each window. By setting the operation and monitoring authority on graphic windows,changing the instrument faceplate assignment or acknowledging of alarm blinking can beprohibited.

On the Trend Window, the change of trend pens assignment and the start/stop of batchtrends can be prohibited. On the HIS Setup Window, the change of function key assign-ment definition can also be prohibited.

The following types of operation and monitoring authorities can be set for windows:

• General window

• Important window

• System operation window

• 4 to 8

The types of windows with which a user can perform operation and monitoring vary, de-pending on the settings of operation and monitoring authority on windows and the user’sprivilege level.

The operation and monitoring authority on system operation windows cannot be changed.The operation and monitoring authority on windows other than system operation windowscan be changed using System View.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Window Operation and Monitoring Authorities

The table below shows operation and monitoring authorities on windows, indicating whichuser can perform operation and monitoring using which types of windows:

Table Window Operation and Monitoring Authorities

Operation/monitoringauthority

Accesslevel

Privilege level

S1 S2

General window R/W R/W

Important window R R/W

System operation window R R

F090304E.EPS

R R

- R/W

- R

- -

-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

4

5

6

7

8 -

S3

R/W

R/W

R/W

R

R/W

R/W

R

-

R/W: Both operation and monitoring are permitted.R: Only monitoring is permitted.-: Both operation and monitoring are not permitted.

• Users of privilege level S1 or S2 cannot start System View from the system messagewindow, but can start and operate System View from [Start Menu].

• Users of privilege level S1 can operate and monitor general windows. However, theycan only monitor important windows and system operation windows excluding SystemView.

• Users of privilege level S2 can operate and monitor general and important windows.However, they can only monitor system operation windows excluding System View.

• Users of privilege level S3 can operate and monitor all windows.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Operation and Monitoring Authority on System Operation Windows ¡ £

The operation and monitoring authority is defined over the system operation windows byCS 1000/CS 3000 security policy.

The following windows are referred to as system operation windows:

• System status overview window

• System alarm window

• FCS status window

• HIS setup window

• System View

Table Operation and Monitoring Authority over System Operation Window ¡ £

Types of operationPrivilege levelAccess

level (*1) S1 S2 S3

Check system alarm Y Y Y

Delete system alarm N Y Y

Save tuning parameters N Y Y

Change buzzer settings N Y Y

Change alarm settings N Y Y

Change whether to have status display data in the HIS N Y Y

Change databases to be referenced N Y Y

Equalize data N Y Y

Change pre-set menu settings N Y Y

Change printer settings N Y Y

Change window expansion rules N Y Y

Change multimedia settings N Y Y

Change character string and color of operation marks N N Y

Import HIS settings N N Y

Start the FCS N N Y

Stop the FCS N N Y

Download data to the FCS N N Y

Download data to the I/O modules N N Y

Set time N N Y

Start System View N

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3 N Y

F090305E.EPS

Change the number of tags to be monitored N3 N Y

Specify whether to check a password when checking operation N3 N Y

Shutdown Windows from the Input Window Name dialog N3 N Y

Set ON/OFF of the touch panel (*2) Y1 Y Y

Change Disable/Enable of a V net (*2) N3 N Y

Y: AllowedN: Not allowed*1: A user cannot change his/her access level.*2: £ This is a function on the Console Type HIS.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Change Privilege Level on Operation KeyboardWhen the HIS console is connected with an operation keyboard, the privilege level of the usermay be changed temporarily using the mode switching key on the keyboard. The privilege levelchanged on the keyboard has higher priority than the level set in the user-in dialog box.

The following two mode switching keys are used to switch the privilege level:

• Operation keyThe key can be switched between the ON and OFF positions only.

• Engineering keyThe key can be switched to any position.

F090306E.EPS

In the case of the operation keyChanges between the ON, OFF positions.

When the engineering key is inserted.The key can beswitched to any position.

MODE

OFFON

ENG

MODE

OFFON

ENG

Figure Mode Switching Key

Table Relationship Among Mode Switching Key Position, Privilege Level and Operation Mode

Key position Privilege levels Operation key Engineering key

OFF/no-key Privilege level of the user(logged-in user) during operation Y Y

ON S2 Y

N

Y

ENG S3 Y

F090307E.EPS

Y: Operation availableN: Operation not available

If the privilege level is changed with the mode switching key while information is displayedin the operation and monitoring window, the operation will continue based on the changedprivilege level without requiring a window re-display operation.

Table Privilege Level Assignments With/Without Operation Keyboard

Operation keyboard User registration Description

With operation keyboard

Not registered Privilege levels can be switched using the mode switching key.

Registered The user’s privilege level is used. However, privilege level may be switched using the mode switching key.(*1)

Without operation keyboard

Not registered The privilege level set for a default user (OFFUSER, ONUSER or ENGUSER) is used.

Registered The user’s privilege level is used.

F090308E.EPS

*1: If the operation keyboard is used, the privilege levels set for the users login on User-In dialog box is valid when themode switching key of the operation keyboard is in OFF position or the key is not inserted.


<F9.4 Function Block Security> F9-39

IM 33S01B30-01E

F9.4 Function Block SecurityThe attributes of function blocks contain security levels, tag mark types and alarmprocessing levels. The attributes can be defined to each function block on the Func-tion Block Detail Builder and Function Block Overview Builder. There is no restric-tion on the combination of security levels, tag mark types and alarm processinglevels. By combining these attributes, how to operate and monitor the function blockand how handle the data and alarm of the function block can be configured.

■ Security Levels▼ Lvl

Each Function Block has an attribute called a security level. Function Blocks are classifiedby these security levels according to their relative levels of priority. The larger the securitylevel value, the higher the priority level will be. The highest security level is 8, and thedefault security level value for a function block is 4.

Several operation and monitoring authority tables classified by data items, each corre-sponding to a different function security level are provided. As the security level changes,the operation and monitoring authority changes over each data item.


Securitylevel 1

Securitylevel 8

S1 S2 S3



Write-allowed data items other than block mode, SV, MV, and alarm set value R/W R/W R/W

Write-prohibited data items R/- R/- R/-

AFLS (alarm acknowledgment) only R/W R/W R/W

F090401E.EPS

R/W: Both read and write are allowed.R: Only read is allowed.

Figure Security Levels

Security level may be set from level 1 to level 8. The security level definition of functionblocks may be carried out on the Function Block Detail Builder. Level 4 is the defaultsecurity level set for the function blocks.


F9-40<F9.4 Function Block Security>

IM 33S01B30-01E

The operation and monitoring authorities for different function security levels are shownbelow:

Table Operation and Monitoring Authorities for Security Level 1


S1 S2 S3



Write-allowed data items other than block mode,SV, MV, and alarm set value R/W R/W R/W



F090402E.EPS

R/W: Both read and write are allowed.R/-: Only read is allowed.


S1 S2 S3



Write-allowed data items other than block mode,SV, MV, and alarm set value R/- R/W R/W



F090403E.EPS




S1 S2 S3


Alarm set value R/- R/W R/W

Write-allowed data items other than block mode,SV, MV, and alarm set value R/- R/W R/W



F090404E.EPS





IM 33S01B30-01E


S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV

Alarm set value

Write-allowed data items other than block mode,SV, MV, and alarm set value

Write-prohibited data items

AFLS (alarm acknowledgment) only

F090405E.EPS

R/- R/W R/W

R/- R/W R/W

R/- R/W R/W

R/- R/- R/-

R/W R/W R/W




S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV

Alarm set value




F090406E.EPS

R/- R/- R/-

R/- R/- R/-

R/- R/- R/-

R/- R/- R/-

R/W R/W R/W




S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV

Alarm set value




F090407E.EPS

-/- R/- R/W

-/- R/- R/W

-/- R/- R/W

-/- R/- R/-

-/- R/W R/W


R/W: Both read and write are allowed.R/-: Only read is allowed.-/-: Neither read nor write are allowed.


F9-42<F9.4 Function Block Security>

IM 33S01B30-01E


S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV

Alarm set value




F090408E.EPS

-/- -/- R/-

-/- -/- R/-

-/- -/- R/-

-/- -/- R/-

-/- R/- R/W


R/W: Both read and write are allowed.R/-: Only read is allowed.-/-: Neither read nor write are allowed.


Data itemsPrivilege levels

S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV

Alarm set value




F090409E.EPS

-/- -/- -/-

-/- -/- -/-

-/- -/- -/-

-/- -/- -/-

-/- -/- -/-

-/-: Neither read nor write are allowed.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Types of Tag Marks and Alarm Processing LevelsFor function blocks, attributes such as the type of tag mark, alarm level and security levelcan be added. Define them for each function block on the Function Block Overview Builderor Function Block Detail Builder. Any combination of tag mark type, alarm level and securitylevel is allowed.

● Types of Tag Marks

The tag mark of a function block indicates the priority level and process status regarding tothe function block. There are eight types of tag marks as follows. The default is “2. Gen-eral.”

1. Important with Ack.

2. General

3. Aux. 1

4. Aux. 2

5. Important

6. General with Ack.

7. Aux. 1 with Ack.

8. Aux. 2 with Ack.

SEE ALSO

For the types of tag marks, see the following:

“■ Tag Mark – Status Display Area” in E8.1, “Components of Instrument Faceplate”

● Alarm Levels

The behavior of a function block alarm varies with the alarm level and the priority level ofthe function block. There are four types of alarm levels as follows. The default is “2.Medium.”

1. High

2. Medium

3. Low

4. Logging

SEE ALSO

For the Alarm Levels, see the following:

E12.2, “Alarm Priority”


F9-44<F9.5 Operation Mark>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F9.5 Operation MarkTo install or remove a tag mark on a function block may temporarily change theoperation authority on the function block.

When an operation mark is installed to a function block, a tag label can be added tothe function block or the operation authorities on the function block can be changedtemporarily during plant operation. When the operation mark is removed, operationauthorities return to the original setting.

Operation marks have the following attributes:

• Operation mark type (Tag level)

• Color

• Tag label

• Install/Remove attribute


<F9.5 Operation Mark> F9-45

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Security Provided by Operation MarkTo install an operation mark on a function block may stick a color label to the instrumentfaceplate of the function block and temporarily change the operation authority on thefunction block. When the operation mark is removed, the operation authority on thefunction block return to the original setting.

With the operation mark, the operation authority on the function block may be changed, butits monitoring scope is not affected since it is fixed based on the original security level set tothe function block.

F090501E.EPS

100.0

0.0

Reactor tankvapor pressure

MANNRPV KPA 55.0SV KPA 50.0MV % 50.0

OPN

CLSPROHIBIT

Operation Mark

PIC100

Figure Operation Mark

Installing/removing the operation mark may be carried out in the Operation Mark Assign-ment dialog box called up from Tuning windows.

The operation mark may be defined on the Operation Mark Builder and/or HIS Setupwindow. If you have differently defined the same operation mark on them, priority is given tothe latest-downloaded definition.

SEE ALSO

For details on Operation Mark Assignment dialog box, see the following:

“■ Toolbar of Tuning Window” in E4.3.1, “Components of Tuning Window”



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Types of Operation Marks▼ Tag Type, Tag Level

When an operation mark is defined, the following restrictions are temporarily exerted on thefunction block according to the type of the operation mark:

However, if the security level 1 exerted by operation mark is assigned to a Function Block,the original function block security setting is intact.

The operation marks can be defined on Operation Mark Builders.

TIP

The security levels 1 to 8 exerted by operation marks have different definitions from the function blocksecurity levels 1 to 8.

The security levels exerted by operation marks and the types of operation marks aredisplayed as follows.

Table Security Levels Exerted by Operation Marks and the Types Of Operation Marks

Types of Operation MarksSecurity Levels Exerted

by Operation Marks

Privilege level

S1 S2 S3

1 (Comment Type) Y Y Y

2 (S2, S3 Privileges) N Y Y

3 (S3 Privilege) N N Y

4 (Operation Guard Type) N N N

5 N Y Y

6 N N Y

7 N N Y

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 N N N

F090502E.EPS

Y: Operation permittedN: Operation not Permitted

• 1 (Comment Type)Operation can be performed within the security scope defined by the set functionsecurity level of the function block itself.

• 2 (S2, S3 Privileges)Users of privilege level S2 or S3 can perform operation within their respective author-ity (privilege) scope.

• 3 (S3 Privilege)Users of privilege level S3 can perform operation within the authority (privilege) scope

• 4 (Operation Guard Type)Only alarm acknowledgment can be performed.

• 5The same as 2 (S2, S3 Privileges) above.

• 6The same as 3 (S3 Privilege) above.

• 7, 8The same as 4 (Operation Guard Type) above.


<F9.5 Operation Mark> F9-47

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Tag Label of Operation Mark▼ Tag Label

Tag label can be set using the Operation Mark Builder. Up to 4 double-byte characters or 8characters can be entered as the text on the label (string).

The tag mark label may be temporarily changed during the operation on Operation Marktab on the HIS Setup window.

SEE ALSO

For details about Operation Mark tab on HIS Setup window, see the following:

E7.3.11, “Operation Mark Tab”

■ Color of Operation Mark▼ Color

The color of the operation mark may be defined on the Operation Mark Builder. The follow-ing colors may be used on operation marks.

Table Colors of Operation Mark

Color Color Code Color Color Code

Black N Steel Blue SB

Red R Pink PK

Green G Spring Green SG

Yellow Y Orange OR

Blue B Yellow Green YG

Magenta M Violet VO

Cyan C Deep Sky Blue DB

White W Gray GR

F090504E.EPS

The color of the operation mark may be temporarily changed on Operation Mark tab on theHIS Setup window.

SEE ALSO

For details about Operation Mark tab on HIS Setup window, see the following:

E7.3.11, “Operation Mark Tab”



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Install or Remove Operation Mark▼ Install/Remove

The unauthorized user is prohibited to install or remove the operation mark based on theattributes of the operation marks.

The setting of operation mark installing/removing attribute is performed in Operation MarkBuilder.

• Install/Remove:Select from “All privileges,” “S2, S3 Privileges” and “S3 Privilege.”The default is “All privileges.”

The relationship between user’s privilege level and the operation on installing/removingoperation mark authority is shown below:

Table User’s rights on Installing/Removing Operation Mark

Install/Remove Operation MarkPrivilege level

S1 S2 S3

All Privileges Y Y Y

S2, S3 Privileges N Y Y

S3 Privilege N N Y

F090505E.EPS

Y: Installing/removal operation permittedN: Installing/removal operation not permitted

Table Examples of the Operation Mark Setting

No Tag Label Color Type Install/Remove

1 RUNING Blue Comment Type All Privileges

2 ABNORMAL Red S3 Privileges S3 Privilege

3 MAINT. Cyan S2, S3 Privileges S3 Privilege

4 PROHIBIT Magenta Operation Guard Type S2, S3 Privileges

F090506E.EPS


<F9.6 Advanced Security Settings> F9-49

IM 33S01B30-01E

F9.6 Advanced Security SettingsThree default privilege levels, S1, S2 and S3, are provided for the system. Dependingon the operation condition of the plant, however, it may not be possible to providesufficient security using only the three default privilege levels provided for thesystem (S1, S2 and S3). In such cases, it is possible to define up to seven additionalprivilege levels, U1 to U7, in addition to the three privilege levels (S1, S2 and S3) onthe advanced security settings. U1 through U7 are called user-defined privilegelevels.

In the advanced security settings, it is possible to define the following securityfeatures for the user-defined privilege levels:

• Window monitoring rights

• Window operation rights

• Whether to display the Tuning and Faceplate windows of a function block

• Whether to allow writing to data items in a function block

• Operation mark security levels

• Operation mark install/remove attributes

• Password control mode

IMPORTANT

Rights given to the three default privilege levels S1, S2 and S3 cannot be changed. Therights given to S1, S2 and S3 are fixed for the system.


F9-50<F9.6 Advanced Security Settings>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Tabs for Defining Advanced Security SettingsThe advanced security settings can be defined on various tabs displayed by selecting[View] and then [Detailed Setting Items] in Security Builder. The following figure shows anexample of the display in Security Builder when [View] - [Detailed Setting Items] has beenselected.

Window Monitoring Operation-mark On

F090601E.EPS

Security Builder – [Pjt:MYPJT File:UserSec.edf]

Ready

U1

Position:Line 1 Column 5

YN

Message

File Edit View Tools Window Help

Window Operation Tag view Item Operation Operator Action Password Invalid User

No. S1 S2 S3 U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN N N N N N N N N NN Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N

12345678

Figure Security Builder – Item Operation Tab

TIP

Invalid User tab is displayed only when the Access Administrator Package (FDA:21 CFR Part11 compli-ant) is installed.



IM 33S01B30-01E

The following tabs constitute the detailed setting items;

• Window Monitoring tabIn this tab whether the windows are displayed or not is specified for each user-definedprivilege level and at each window access level.

• Window Operation tabIn this tab whether the users assigned to each user-defined privilege level and at eachwindow access level are allowed to operate windows or not is specified.

• Tag View tabIn this tab whether Tuning and Faceplate windows are displayed or not is specified foreach user-defined privilege level and at each security level of a function block.

• Item Operation tabIn this tab whether the users are allowed to write to data items of a function block ornot is specified for each user-defined privilege level and each data item definition tablenumber.

• Operator Action tabIn this tab the operation rights of a function block is defined for each operation marksecurity level and for each user-defined privilege level.

• Operation-mark On tabIn this tab whether the operation marks can be installed or removed is defined foreach user-defined privilege level and for each operation mark installing/removalattribute.

• Password tabIn this tab the password control mode for an operator to logon to the HIS is defined.There are two modes for controlling passwords: Local control and Common control.

• Invalid User tabIn the case that the Access Administrator Package (FDA:21 CFR Part11 compliant) isinstalled and a registered user is deleted, the user is deleted from the Valid User taband moved to the Invalid User tab. In this tab, there is no item to be defined by a user.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Example of Extended PrivilegesFor example, a request to “deprive privilege level S1 of alarm acknowledgment right” canbe met by setting the user-defined privilege level U1 as shown in the table below, therebycreating a new privilege level.

Table Example of Extended Privilege


S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV R R/W R/W

Alarm set value R R/W R/W

Write-allowed data items other than block mode,SV, MV and alarm set value R R/W R/W



F090602E.EPS

U1

R

R

R

R

R

U2 to U7

R/W

R/W

R/W

R

R/W


In this example, the users assigned to privilege level U1 will be prohibited from performingany operation.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F9.6.1 Defining Window Operation and Monitoring AuthoritiesIn the advanced security settings it is possible to define security settings such asallowing and prohibiting window display and operation for each user-defined privi-lege level.

■ Defining Window Monitoring Authorities▼ Window Monitoring

Specifies whether the window can be displayed or not for each user-defined privilege leveland for each window access level in the Window Monitoring tab of Security Builder.

Operation-Window Monitoring Window OperationUser GroupValid User Tag view Item Operation Operator Action

No. S1 S2 S3 U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YY Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YY Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YY Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN N N N N N N N N N

12345678

Fixed User-defined privilege level (can be changed)

F090603E.EPSWindow access level

Y: Window can be displayedN: Window cannot be displayedFigure Window Monitoring Tab (default setting)

■ Defining Window Operation Authorities▼ Window Operation

Specifies whether the following windows can be operated for each user-defined privilegelevel and for each window access level in the Window Operation tab of Security Builder.

• Batch trend starting and stopping in the Trend window

• Starting and stopping of control station and downloading to IOM in the system mainte-nance window

Operation-Window Monitoring Window OperationUser Group Tag view Item Operation Operator Action


12345678

Valid User


F090604E.EPSWindow access level

Y: Operation is allowedN: Operation is not allowedFigure Window Operation Tab (default setting)



IM 33S01B30-01E

F9.6.2 Defining Function Block Operation and MonitoringAuthoritiesIn the advanced security settings it is possible to define the security settings for aFunction Block for each user-defined privilege level.

■ Function Block Security LevelEach Function Block has an attribute called a security level. Function Blocks are classifiedby these security levels according to their relative levels of priority. The larger the securitylevel value, the higher the priority level will be. The highest security level is 8, and thedefault security level value for a function block is 4.

Operation and monitoring rights over data items are determined for each security level andprivilege level. If the security level changes, the operation and monitoring rights over dataitems for each privilege level will also change.


Securitylevel 1

Securitylevel 8

S1 S2 U1 to U7



Write-allowed data items other than block mode, SV, MV, and alarm set value

R/W R/W R/W



F090605E.EPS

S3

R/W

R/W

R/W

R

R/W


Figure Security Level



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Data Item Definition Table Numbers

Data item definition table number indicates the security level regarding data write and readof a function block by a number between 1 and 8.

A data item definition table number defines whether write and read of data items are al-lowed or not for each privilege level, as shown in the table below.

Whether writing is allowed or not for the user-defined privilege levels (U1 to U7) can bechanged. The table below shows the default settings for the user-defined privilege levels.

Table Rights Determined by Data Item Definition Table Numbers

Data item definitiontable number

Privilege levels

S1 S2 S3

R/W R/W R/W

R R/W R/W

R R R/W

R R R

-

1

2

3

4

5 R/W R/W

F090606E.EPS

-6 R R/W

-7 - R

-8 - -

U1 to U7

R/W

R/W

R/W

R

R/W

R/W

R

-

R/W: Both read and write are allowed.R: Only read is allowed.-: Neither read nor write is allowed

A data item definition table number has been assigned for each function block security leveland for data item classification categorized according to function and purpose. This assign-ment cannot be changed.

Table Assignment of Data Item Definition Table Numbers

Data Items classificationFunction Block’s Security Level

Block mode, SV, MV 1 1 8

Alarm set value 1 2 8

Write-allowed data item excluding block mode, SV, MV, alarm set value 1 2 8

Write-prohibited data item 4 4 8

AFLS (alarm acknowledgment) only 1 1 8

7

7

7

7

6

6

6

6

6

5

4

4

4

4

1

2

2

2

4

1

1

1 3 876542

1

2

4

1

F090607E.EPS

2 2 876422

3 3 876433

8 8 888888

Data item definition table number (Fixed)

System Reserved 1

System Reserved 2

System Reserved 3

For example, rights to read and write SV of a PID controller block with security level 4 canbe determined from data item definition table number 2. This means that users with S1rights cannot write data to SV, but users with S2 or S3 rights can write data to SV.



IM 33S01B30-01E

The following tables show the operation and monitoring rights for each security level. Thedefault settings are shown for the user-defined privilege levels (U1 to U7).



S1 S2 S3




R/W R/W R/W



F090608E.EPS

U1 to U7

R/W

R/W

R/W

R

R/W

Data item definition

table number

1

1

1

4

1

R/W: Both read and write are allowed.R: Only read is allowed.-: Neither read nor write is allowed.


S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV

Alarm set value




F090609E.EPS

U1 to U7

R/W R/W R/W

R/W R/W R/W

R R/W R/W

R R R

R/W R/W R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R

R/W

1

1

2

4

1

Data items classificationPrivilege levelsData item

definition table number



S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV

Alarm set value




F090610E.EPS

U1 to U7

R/W R/W R/W

R R/W R/W

R R/W R/W

R R R

R/W R/W R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R

R/W

1

2

2

4

1






IM 33S01B30-01E


S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV

Alarm set value




F090611E.EPS

U1 to U7

R R/W R/W

R R/W R/W

R R/W R/W

R R R

R/W R/W R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R

R/W

2

2

2

4

1





S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV

Alarm set value




F090612E.EPS

U1 to U7

R R R

R R R

R R R

R R R

R/W R/W R/W

R

R

R

R

R/W

4

4

4

4

1





S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV

Alarm set value


Write-prohibited data items (*1)


F090613E.EPS

U1 to U7

- R R/W

- R R/W

- R R/W

- R R/W

- R/W R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

6

6

6

6

5



R/W: Both read and write are allowed.R: Only read is allowed.-: Neither read nor write is allowed.*1: Even if R/W is specified, in practice data cannot be written.



IM 33S01B30-01E


S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV

Alarm set value




F090614E.EPS

U1 to U7

- - R

- - R

- - R

- - R

- R R/W

R

R

R

R

R/W

7

7

7

7

6





S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV

Alarm set value




F090615E.EPS

U1 to U7

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

- - -

-

-

-

-

-

8

8

8

8

8



-: Neither read nor write is allowed.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Defining Whether Function Blocks Can be Called▼ Tag View

Specifies whether the Tuning and Faceplate windows of a function block are displayed ornot for each user-defined privilege level and for each function block security level in the TagView tab of Security Builder.

OperationWindow Monitoring Window OperationUser Group Tag view Item Operation Operator Action

No. S1 S2 S3 U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YY Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YY Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YY Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YY Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN N N N N N N N N N

12345678

Valid User


F090616E.EPS

Function block security level

Y: Tuning and Faceplate windows can be displayed.N: Tuning and Faceplate windows cannot be displayed.

Figure Tag View Tab (default setting)



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Defining Whether Data Items Can be Written▼ Item Operation

As for each user-defined privilege level, whether writing a data item of a function block isallowed or not can be changed for each data item definition table number. Whether writinga data item of a function block is allowed or not is defined for each user-defined privilegelevel and for each data item definition table number in the Item Operation tab of SecurityBuilder.

IMPORTANT

• Whether reading (monitoring) a data item of a function block is allowed or not cannotbe changed.

• The security setting of a function block will become inconsistent if write is allowed for afield that the data item definition table number prohibits reading. For this reason, dataitem definition table number 8 should never be changed since it prohibits the readingof data items at all privilege levels.

• “Write-prohibited data items” cannot be written to even if it is defined as write-allowed.

SEE ALSO

For the explanation on allowing and prohibiting the reading (monitoring) of data items of a function block,see the following:

The Table “Rights Determined by Data Item Definition Table Numbers” in previous section “● Data ItemDefinition Table Numbers”

Window Monitoring Window Operation Tag view Item Operation Operator Action PasswordOperation-mark On


12345678


Data item definition table numberF090617E.EPS

Y: Data items can be writtenN: Data items cannot be writtenFigure Item Operation Tab (default setting)



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Example of Setting the Security Level through Advanced Settings

If the privilege level U1 that allows data write to SV of a PID controller block with securitylevel 5 is to be created, the following definitions should be made in the Item Operation tabof Security Builder. The data item definition table number for data item SV at security level5 is 4. Specify Y for data item definition level 4 of user-defined privilege level U1.

No. S1 S2 S3 U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN N N Y N N N N N NN Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN N N N N N N N N NN N N N N N N N N N

12345678


Specify Y.F090618E.EPS

Figure Definition Example in the Item Operation Tab

If the definition is made as shown in the figure above, the operation and monitoring authori-ties of security level 5 will be as follows:

Table Operation and Monitoring Authorities for Security Level 5 after the Change

S1 S2 S3

Block mode, SV, MV

Alarm set value




U1

R R R

R R R

R R R

R R R

R/W R/W R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

F090619E.EPS

U2 to U7

R

R

R

R

R/W

4

4

4

4

1




IMPORTANT

In the case of this example, the users assigned to privilege level U1 are allowed to write notonly to SV but also to all data items with data item definition table number 4.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F9.6.3 Operation Mark Security Level DefinitionIn the advanced security settings it is possible to define security settings for opera-tion marks for each user-defined privilege level.

■ Defining Whether Function Blocks Can be Operated▼ Operator Action

Specifies whether a function block can be operated or not for each user-defined privilegelevel and for each operation mark security level in the Operator Action tab of SecurityBuilder.


12345678



Operation mark security level

1: Comment type

2: S2, S3 Privileges

3: S3 Privilege

4: Operation Guard typeF090620E.EPS

Y: Operation of function blocks allowed by the operation mark security levelN: Operation of function blocks prohibited by the operation mark security level

Figure Operator Action Tab (default setting)

TIP

Note that operation mark security levels 1 to 8 are different from function block security levels 1 to 8.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Defining Whether Operation Marks Can be Installed or Removed▼ Operation-mark On

If an operation mark is installed to a Function Block, the operation and monitoring authori-ties of the corresponding Function Block will be temporarily changed.

The install/remove attribute of an operation mark is defined in the Operation-mark On tab ofSecurity Builder.

No. S1 S2 S3 U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y YN N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

123



Operation mark attachment/removal attribute

1: All Privileges

2: S2, S3 Privileges

3: S3 PrivilegeF090621E.EPS

Y: Installing and removing are allowed.N: Neither installing nor removing is allowed.

Figure Operation-mark On Tab (default setting)



IM 33S01B30-01E

F9.6.4 Definition of Password Control ModesThe password control mode for an operator to logon to the HIS is defined. Either theLocal control or the Common control can be specified.

IMPORTANT

When the control mode is switched from Local to Common, all passwords are initialized(deleted).Therefore, you need to register the passwords again in this case.

■ Definition of Password Control Modes▼ Password

The password control mode is defined on the Password tab on the Security Builder.

Tag view Item Operation Operator Action Operation-mark On Invalid UserPassword

0Password Control

Password Control Mode

0: Local (Default Setting)

1: Common

F090622E.EPS

Figure Password Tab


<F9.7 HIS Security> F9-65

IM 33S01B30-01E

F9.7 HIS SecurityThe security level regarding operation and monitoring as well as the operation andmonitoring scope can be set for the HIS itself. The HIS security check has a prece-dence over the user security check. On HIS Constant Builder, set the HIS security.

■ Security TargetsAmong the operation and monitoring scope for an HIS, operations that are performeddirectly on the HIS by an operator are checked. However, remote access using an OPC orDDE interface and message printing are not checked.

■ Security Level▼ HIS Attribute

Select the function security level of the HIS from the following two types:

• Dedicated monitoring machine

• Operation and monitoring machine (default)

If the HIS is set as a dedicated monitoring machine, a user can only perform monitoring onthe HIS regardless of privilege levels. Operations allowed on the HIS set as an operationand monitoring machine vary depending on the user privilege level and the access level ofthe operation target.


F9-66<F9.7 HIS Security>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Range of Operation and Monitoring▼ Monitoring Range, Operation and Monitoring Range, Window Range, Acknowledgment, Process

Message Receiving, System Alarm Receiving, Exclude Operation, Exclude Operation and Moni-toring , Exclude Acknowledgment, Exclude Process Message, Exclude System Alarm

The operation and monitoring scope of the HIS can be set for each HIS.

The operation and monitoring scope of the HIS is unrelated with the operation and monitor-ing scope set for each user group.

In the operation and monitoring scope check, both the operation and monitoring scope ofthe HIS and that of the user group are checked. Any operation or monitoring that is notincluded in both scopes cannot be performed.

• Monitoring Range (Default: ALL)

• Operation and Monitoring Range (Default: ALL)

• Window Range (Default: ALL)

• Acknowledgment (Default: ALL)

• Process Message Receiving (Default: ALL)

• System Alarm Receiving (Default: ALL)

• Exclude Operation (Default: NONE)

• Exclude Operation and Monitoring (Default: NONE)

• Exclude Acknowledgment (Default: NONE)

• Exclude Process Message (Default: NONE)

• Exclude System Alarm (Default: NONE)

The default setting is “ALL” for INCLUDE and “NONE” for EXCLUDE.

F090701E.EPS

Operation and monitoring range set for the HIS

Operation and monitoring range set for the user group

Operation and monitoring range permitted for the operator on this HIS

Figure Operation and Monitoring Range Permitted for Operator

SEE ALSO

The scope of the HIS operation and monitoring can be set like the scope of operation and monitoring byuser group. For the details, see the following:

“■ Setting Operation and Monitoring Range” in F9.2, “User Group”


<F10. Scheduler> F10-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

F10. SchedulerScheduler controls the specified applications or tasks to run at the specified time.The running schedule of tasks may be defined on the Scheduler Builder.


F10-2<F10. Scheduler>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Tasks Executable by Scheduler ¡ £▼ Function

The following tasks can be controlled by the scheduler:

• Calling up windowsCalls up the operation and monitoring windows.

• Execution of the system function keysExecutes the functions assigned to the system function keys.

• Starting, stopping or restarting of trendsStarts, stops or restarts trend data acquisition targeted.

• Flashing or turning ON/OFF of LEDControls the flashing or turning ON/OFF of LED.

• Startup of programs by file namesStarts up program by specifying the file name.

• Execution of the multimedia functionPlays the specified multimedia message.

• Calling up a panel set (*1)The pre-grouped panel set may be called up.

• Calling up windows to other stations (*1)The active window being displayed may be called up on other specified HIS consoles.

*1: ¡ £ The functions of calling up a panel set and windows to other stations are only for the CS 3000.

The tasks assigned to the function keys are also executable by the scheduler.

SEE ALSO

For the details on the functions assigned to function keys, see the following:

E13.2, “Function Keys”

The tasks to be executed by the scheduler can be defined using command lines in theScheduler Builder. Each command line can contain up to 48 alphanumeric charactersincluding arguments and space characters.

When specifying a program, specify the program name excluding the drive name and pathname. Before specifying a program, its path must be set in the PATH of the environmentalvariable in the HIS.

SEE ALSO

Refer to Windows reference manuals available over the counter for information on setting environmentalvariable PATH.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Execution of Tasks Defined on Scheduler▼ Start Method, Start Month, Start Date, Start Time, Period, Times of Repeat

The scheduled tasks may be started by scheduler in the following manners:

• Execute once at the startup of the operation and monitoring functions.

• Execute once at the specified date every year.

• Execute once at the specified time on the specified day every month.

• Execute once at the specified time on the specified day every week.

• Execute at the specified time every day.

As shown below, the start date, start time, period, number of times that can be defined varydepending on the startup method of the task.

Table Scheduler Definition Method for Each Type of Startup

Start method Start time (24 hours) Period (minutes) Number of times

When HIS startup -

--

(Once)

-(Once)

Monthly

00:00 to 23:59

Weekly

Daily

Yearly

Start dateStart month

-

1 to 31, End of Month

SUN to SAT

Daily

1 to 31, End of Month1 to 12

-

� 10 minutes

-

More than once

F100001E.EPS

-: Not valid even when defined.

Use the date and time displayed in the system message window as reference when defin-ing the date and time of execution. Start time is specified in minutes, and seconds arealways set to “0” (zero).

When multiple tasks are specified for execution at the same time, the tasks are executed inthe defined order. To define a task to be executed at the end of every month, specify “Endof Month” with “Monthly.” If “31” is defined with “Monthly,” the scheduler will not execute thetask properly in February, April, June, September and November.

If the defined function is to be executed everyday, the execution period and number oftimes should be defined. However, an error occurs if the product of the execution periodand number of times exceeds 24 hours.

For example, an error will not occur if a function with period of 1 hour is defined to beexecuted 10 times, but an error will occur if the same function is defined to be executed 25times, because the 1-hour period times the number of times equals 25 hours.



IM 33S01B30-01E

IMPORTANT

The CSV builder file exported from the Scheduler Builder with the release numbers R1,R2.01, R2.05 or R2.06 can not be simply imported to this R2.10 builder.

The Scheduler Builder with the release number R2.10 has an additional column StartMonth added between the columns of Start Method and Start Date in the builder CSV file.Using an application such as Microsoft Excel to add a column between Start Method andStart Date, then the old version builders’ file can be imported to the Scheduler Builder withthe release number R2.10.

■ Behavior of Scheduler when a Task Execution FailsWhen a task is not executed successfully, the scheduler notifies the user with a systemalarm message.

■ Behavior of Scheduler at a Failure to Start up a ProgramIf a program to be started up by specifying its file name does not exist and thus cannot bestarted up from the Scheduler, the startup request is not fulfilled. The system alarm mes-sage then notifies the user of the failure to start up the program.

If the program is started up successfully, the Scheduler disregards any errors in the pro-gram.

■ Comment for Scheduler▼ Comment

Up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters or 16 double-byte characters may be definedas comment.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Scheduler Action when the System Clock is ChangedThe system clock in the operation and monitoring console may be changed in the followingcases.

• Time is changed the Time Setting dialog box.

• Time is changed by the time setting function of the control bus.

When the system clock is changed, a process is performed to prevent disturbances causedby setting forward or backward of the system clock on the scheduler.

IMPORTANT

The process is performed only when the time of the system clock is changed by 5 minutesor less. If the time is changed by more than 5 minutes, there is a possibility that the sched-uled functions are not executed at all, or repeated after one execution.

● When the Clock is Set Forward

If the clock is set forward by 5 minutes or less, the scheduled functions are executed. If theclock is forwarded by more than 5 minutes, those functions are not executed.

(Example) When the setting is “Start up Program A at 12:00” and the time11:58 is forwarded 4 minutes to 12:02, Program A is started up.

F100002E.EPS

12:0011:58 12:02

Set the clock forward by 4 minutes

Program A is started up at 12:02.Time

"Start upProgram A"

Figure When the Clock was Set Forward by 4 Minutes

When the time 11:58 is forwarded 6 minutes to 12:04, Program A is notexecuted.

F100003E.EPS

12:0011:58 12:04

Set the clock forward by 6 minutes

"Start upProgram A"

Program A is not started up.Time

Figure When the Clock was Set Forward by 6 Minutes



IM 33S01B30-01E

● When the Clock is Set Backward

If the clock is set back 5 minutes or less, the functions executed in the last 5 minutes willnot be executed again. When the clock is set back more than 5 minutes, those functionsare executed again.

(Example) When the setting is “Start up Program A at 12:00” and the time 12:02 isreversed 4 minutes to 11:58, Program A will not be started up.

F100004E.EPS

11:58 12:00 12:02

12:00

Set the clock backwardby 4 minutes

"Start upProgram A"

Program A is started up at 12:00, but will not be started up after the clock is set backward.

Time

11:58

Figure When the Clock was Set Backward 4 Minutes

When the time 12:04 is set back 6 minutes to 11:58, Program A will bestarted up again.

F100005E.EPS

12:00

"Start upProgram A"

12:00"Start up

Program A"

11:58 12:04

Set the clock backwardby 6 minutes

Program A is started up at 12:00, and will bestarted up again at 12:00 after the clock is set backward.

Time

11:58

Figure When the Clock was Set Backward 6 Minutes


<F11. Self-Documentation> F11-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

F11. Self-DocumentationSelf-documentation includes the [Self-Document Printing] and [Print Parameters]tasks. Users can print the contents defined on the various builders and the tuningparameters to a document as archived materials using the tasks.

With [Self-Document Printing], the document can be printed to a PDF file instead ofpapers. User can read the PDF file created by [Self-Document Printing] with AcrobatReader.

SEE ALSO

For more information about printing document to PDF files, see the following:

F11.10, “Printing Self Documents to PDF Files”

■ Self-Document Printing[Self-Document Printing] task can be performed to print out the contents in the systemgeneration builders as a document. During the self-documentation, the cover page, thetable of contents can be created. The chapters and the sections are all documented inaccordance with structure of the builders. The printout documents can be archived asprinting materials.

Chapters are sorted in ascending order of domain andstation numbers.

Chapter 2 Project Definition

Contents

Title

Chapter 1 Explanatory legends

Chapter 3 Batch

Chapter N FCS

Chapter N HIS

Chapter N BCV

Chapter N CGW

Chapter N STN

F110001E.EPS

Figure Printout by [Self-Document Printing] Task

When printing, specify the print range using the project name and file name. In addition,only the builder files modified during a specific time period can be specified for printing.


F11-2<F11. Self-Documentation>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Print Parameters[Print Parameters] task can be performed to print the tuning parameters of multiple fieldcontrol stations all together in one document. It can also print out the tuning parameters ofa specified function block by designating its tag name. There is no cover page and table ofcontents will be added for printing parameters, however, the header and footer can be usedto indicate the control information (such as FCS station names and station numbers).

FCS0104

FCS0103

FCS0102

FCS0101

Tag name: PID001 XXXXXXXX

XX = XXXXXXXXX = XXXXXXXXX = XXXXXXXXX = XXXXXXXXX = XXXXXXX

F110002E.EPS

Figure Printout by [Print Parameters] Task

When printing the tuning parameters, specify the print range using the project name andFCS station name.


<F11.1 Self-Document Printing> F11-3

IM 33S01B30-01E

F11.1 Self-Document PrintingThe table of contents, chapters, header and footer comprising the self-documentcan be modified arbitrarily.

Furthermore, all definition items can be printed or only a part of items can beprinted.

To start the self-document printing, select the project folder, then click [Self Docu-ment Printing] from the [Tools] menu in System View.

■ Structure of a Self-DocumentA self-document is comprised of a cover, table of contents and chapters. Of these, the tableof contents and chapters can be arbitrarily modified.

● Printing the Table of Contents

In the table of contents, titles and page numbers are printed. Page number notations andthe start page number can be modified.

SEE ALSO

For details on the table of contents for each chapter, see the following later section in this document:

“■ Table of Contents for Group Self-Document ¡ £”

● Printing Chapters

Each chapter in a self-document is comprised of one or more sections.

2.8 Switch Position Label

F110101E.EPS

2.1 Project Properties

2.2 Multiple Projects Connection

2.3 Plant Hierarchy

2.4 Station Configuration

2.5 Security

2.6 Operation Mark

2.7 Engineering Unit Symbol

Chapter 2 Project Definition

Figure Printing Chapters


F11-4<F11.1 Self-Document Printing>

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Printing Individual Pages

On each page, a header, footer, chapter and section titles, and definition contents areprinted.

The header, footer and chapter title can be modified arbitrarily.

For the definition contents, the user can choose one of the print formats from the list.

No. Tag name.data item Data

RuleNo. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 27 28 29 30 3132

Comment

StepNo. A - A - -

Reference signal comment 1 - 2 - -

C01 %SW0201.PV ON Start Y - Y - -

C02 %SW0202.PV ON Level High N Y Y - -

C03 %SW0203.PV ON Level Low Y - - Y -

C04 - - - - -

C05 - - - - -

C06 - - - - -

C07 - - - - -

C08 - - - - -

C09 - - - - -

A31 - - - - -

A32 - - - - -

PREV THEN - A - A -

- 2 - 1 -

NEXT

2-10-2-3

Control drawing D002 MYPJT

Sequence table ( )

Start timing Periodical execution type (T)Output timing Output only when conditions change (C)Scan period Basic scanControl period 1Control phase 0

ELSE - - - - -

- - - - -

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

F110102E.EPS

Figure Print Image of a Sequence Table



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Table of Contents for Group Self-Document ¡ £The table of contents for a group self-document is shown below.

The title of each section can be arbitrarily modified.

● Table of Contents for the Project Common Section ¡ £

Table Default Table of Contents for the Project Common Section ¡ £

Chapter Section Title Remarks

Title

Contents

2

1

Project Definition

1

1

Project Properties

Multiple Project Connection (*1)2

Plant Hierarchy3

Station Configuration

Print out user and user group definitions.

Describes the symbols and abbreviations in self-documents.

Print out the content of alarm priority.

4

Security5

Operation Mark6

Engineering Unit symbol7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Switch Position Label

System-fixed Status Character String

Block Status Character String

Alarm Status Character String

Alarm Processing Table

Alarm Priority

Status Change Command Character String

State Transition Matrix List

Matrix

3

Batch

1 Process Management Configuration

2

Common Block List Print Common Block List

Unit Common Block

Print Common Blocks

3

Common Block4

5 RG01 to RG16 (Recipe Groups) Print Train and Product Control of Recipe Group

4- Organizes chapters in station units sorted in ascending order.

F110103E.EPS

Explanatory legends

*1: £ Multiple Project Connection printout is only supported by CS 3000.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Table of Contents for FCS Sections ¡

Table Default Table of Contents for FCS Sections ¡


FCSddss (*1)

FCS properties

N

FCS constant

4

1

2

SEBOL user’s function Print out a list of SEBOL user’s functions.

7

Application (FCS-C program list)

Sequence library Print out the contents of sequence library.

8 Print out a list of FCS-C.

9 IOMPrint out IOM properties and contents of each I/O module.

10 Communication I/O Print out contents of %WW.

Print out the contents of %WB.11 Communication I/O tags

12 Common switch [n] (*2)

14 Printout

15

16

Operator guide

Signal event

17 Annunciator

18 Function block

F110104E.EPS

Equipment3

• Print out the drawing list.• Print out the details of function blocks and control drawing. Empty files will not be printed out.

5 SFC sequence list Print out a list of SFC sequences.

6 Unit procedure list Print out a list of unit procedures.

13 Global switch

*1: The domain number is printed in dd and the station number in ss.*2: When n � 2, there are more than 1 common switch files, each common switch file will be printed out in one section.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Table of Contents for FCS Sections £

Table Default Table of Contents for FCS Sections £


FCSddss (*1)

FCS properties

N

FCS constants

4

1

2

SEBOL user ’s function list Print out a list of SEBOL user’s functions.

5 SFC sequence list Print out a list of SFC sequences.

6 Unit procedure list Print out a list of unit procedures.

7

8

Sequence library

Application (FCS-C program list)

Print out the contents of sequence library definitions.

Print out a list of FCS-C.

9 IOM

IOM2

Print out node properties, IOM properties and contents of each I/O module.

10

Communication I/O Print out contents of %WW.

Print out nest properties, IOM properties and contents of each I/O module.

Print out contents of %WB definitions.12

Common switch [n] (*2)13

Global switch

15

16 Operator guide

Signal event17

Annunciator18

19 Function block• Print out the drawing list.• Print out the details of function blocks and control drawing. Empty files will not be printed out.

F110105E.EPS

Equipment3

11

Communication I/O tags

14

Printout

*1: The domain number is printed in dd and the station number in ss.*2: When n � 2, there are more than 1 common switch files, each common switch file will be printed out in one section.

TIP

An APCS or a GSGW is handled as an FCS. However, the default chapters for printout do not include thechapters regarding to IOM and other components that do not exist in APCS or GSGW.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Table of Contents for HIS Sections ¡ £

Table Default Table of Contents for HIS Sections ¡ £


HISddss (*1)

HIS Property

N

HIS Constants

3

1

2

Scheduler

4 Sequence Message Request

5 Function Key Assignment

6 Panel Set (*2)

7 Trend Acquisition Pen Assignment

8

9

Window Hierarchy

10

Window List

11

12

Overview window

Control window

13

Graphic window

Help

F110106E.EPS

*1: The domain number is printed in dd and the station number in ss.*2: £ A panel set is printed out only for the CS 3000.

● Table of Contents for BCV Sections ¡

Table Default Table of Contents for BCV Sections ¡


BCV[L]ddss (*1)

BCV properties

N

1

F110107E.EPS

*1: The domain number is printed in dd and the station number in ss.

● Table of Contents for BCV Sections £

Table Default Table of Contents for BCV Sections £


BCV[V/H/L]ddss (*1)

BCV properties

N

1

F110108E.EPS


● Table of Contents for CGW Sections

Table Default Table of Contents for CGW Sections


ACGddss (*1)

CGW properties

N

1

F110109E.EPS




IM 33S01B30-01E

● Table of Contents for STN Sections

Table Default Table of Contents for STN Sections


STNddss (*1)

STN Properties

N

1

F110110E.EPS

Taglist2

*1: dd and ss indicate the domain number and the station number, respectively.

■ Builder Files for Self-Document PrintingWith the Self-Document Printing, builder files can be specified and then printed.

SEE ALSO

Builder files to be printed correspond to the table of contents. For details, see the following previoussection in this document:

“■ Table of Contents for Group Self-Document ¡ £”


F11-10<F11.2 Specifying Print Range for Self-Document Printing>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F11.2 Specifying Print Range for Self-DocumentPrintingThe builder files for Self-Document Printing can be specified in the Print Range tab.

■ Print Range Tab for Self-Document PrintingOn the Print Range tab, a project for printout or the builder files in the project for printoutcan be selected.

Print Range Print Type Print Order

F110201E.EPS

Self Document

ClosePrint

Select All

Deselect All

Ready

Header – Footer Drawing Select Print

Project Name

Print All

Print from the list

Print by Date Between ~

Title

Contents

Project Definition

FCS0101

FCS0102

HIS0123

1998/2/26 1998/2/28

Explanatory legends

+

+

Batch+

MYPJT

+

+

Figure Print Range Tab

TIP

[Select All] and [Deselect All] buttons become valid only when the option [Print from the list] is checked.


<F11.2 Specifying Print Range for Self-Document Printing> F11-11

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Selecting Builder Files for PrintingOn the Print Range tab, the builder files for printing can be selected.

● Selecting a Project for Printing

On the Print Range tab, a project for printing can be selected from the drop-down list box.

● Selecting Builder Files for Printing

If printing all builder files of the selected project, then check the option [Print All].

If printing a part of builder files of the selected project, then check the option [Print from theList].

After the option [Print from the List] is checked, by clicking [Select All] button all items in thelist box can be checked; While by clicking [Deselect All] button, all items in the list box canbe unchecked.

● Selecting Files by Designating a Date Range

If printing the files modified within a certain date range, check the option [Print by DateBetween] then designate the date range.


F11-12<F11.3 Editing Header and Footer for Self-Document Printing>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F11.3 Editing Header and Footer for Self-DocumentPrintingThe header and footer for a self-document can be edited in the Header/Footer tab.

■ Header/Footer Tab for Self-Document PrintingOn the Header/Footer tab, the header and footer of a self-document for printing can bespecified and edited.

F110301E.EPS

Self Document

ClosePrint

Ready

Open Clear

ClearOpen

Header

Footer

$Print Data $PageNo

$ProjectName $StationName $FileName

Print Range Print Type Print Order Drawing Select PrintHeader – Footer

Figure Header/Footer Tab

The results of header and footer edits are displayed in the form of macros on the Header/Footer tab. One single-byte space is inserted between macros in each print item. You willbe able to edit the macros directly by checking the [Header] or [Footer] check box on theHeader/Footer tab. To delete the contents in these areas, click the [Clear] button.


<F11.3 Editing Header and Footer for Self-Document Printing> F11-13

IM 33S01B30-01E

The maximum numbers of characters allowed for printing in the header and footer areasare indicated in the table below. The maximum number of characters that can be printed inthe header and footer areas varies with the font size and the page orientation.

Table Maximum Number of Characters for Each Print Item

ItemMaximum number

of characters Print example

Chapter number 6 1.1

Title 50 FCS properties

Project name 8 MYPJT

Print date 10 1998/3/2

Station name 7 FCS0101

Station number 2 1

File name 20 FcsDef.edf

File preparation date 19 1998/3/2 17:15:00

Project comment 32 This is the current project.

Author 80 YOKOGAWA

Page 10 1.1

F110302E.EPS

■ Editing the Header and FooterHeader and footer can be edited in the dialog box displayed when the [Open] button in theHeader/Footer tab is clicked.

A comment containing up to 80 single-byte characters can be entered in the Author field.

Header

CancelOK

F110303E.EPS

Chapter Number

Title

Project Name

Station Number

File Name

Author

Page Number

Project Comment

File Preparation Date

Station Name

Print Date

Figure Header Edit Dialog Box


F11-14<F11.4 Specifying Print Type for Self-Document Printing>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F11.4 Specifying Print Type for Self-DocumentPrintingEither all of the definition items of System Builders or only those items for whichdata are defined can be specified for printing. These settings may be defined on thePrint Type tab.

■ Print Type TabOn the Print Type tab, [Simple Print] or [Normal Print], or [Print Setting Items] may bespecified accordingly.

F110401E.EPS

Self Document

ClosePrint

Ready

Simple Print

Normal Print

Print Setting Items

Print Range Print Type Print OrderHeader – Footer Drawing Select Print

Figure Print Type Tab

● Simple Print

Of the various definition items of the builders, only those fields for which values are set maybe printed out.

● Normal Print

All definition items of the builders may be printed out. With normal print, the names of alldefinition items are printed out, including the items with no settings.

● Print Setting Items

The contents for printing setting items of the various builders are printed out.


<F11.5 Editing Table of Contents for Self-Document Printing> F11-15

IM 33S01B30-01E

F11.5 Editing Table of Contents for Self-DocumentPrintingWith respect to the table of contents for a self-document, titles and page numbernotations (page format) can be modified. These changes are made on the PrintOrder tab.

■ Print Order TabOn the Print Order tab, the page number notation and the start page number can bechanged. Also, titles of chapters can be changed or new chapters can be added.

F110501E.EPS

Self Document

Edit

Close

Insert Blank Delete BlankPage Style Clear

Print

Ready

Print Order

TitleContents1 . Explanatory legends2 . Project Definition3 . Batch4 . FCS01015 . FCS01026 . HIS0123


Figure Print Order Tab


F11-16<F11.5 Editing Table of Contents for Self-Document Printing>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Changing Page Number StyleWhen [Page Number] is checked for header or footer, the button for popping out the tab forpage style becomes valid.

The page number style can be changed in the Page Number Style dialog box displayedwhen the [Page Style] button on the Print Order tab is clicked.

CancelOK

F110502E.EPS

Page Number Style

Standard

Serial in the Chapter

Serial through the entire project

Style

Figure Page Number Style Dialog Box

The page number style can be selected from among the types shown below:

Table List of Page Number Styles

Page number styleExample of chapter and

section numberingExample of page number notation

Standard2.2.12.2

2-1, 2-2, 2-3 . . .2-1-1, 2-1-2, 2-1-3, . . .2-2-1, 2-2-2, 2-2-3, . . .

Serial through the entireproject

122.1

1, 2, 3, 45, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 1213, 14, 15, 16, 17, . . .

Serial in the Chapter

123

1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, . . .2-1, 2-2, 2-32-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, . . .

F110503E.EPS


<F11.5 Editing Table of Contents for Self-Document Printing> F11-17

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Changing Start Page NumberThe procedure for changing the start page number is given below:

1. In the Page Number Style dialog box, specify either [Serial through the entire project]or [Serial in the Chapter].

2. Select and double-click a chapter title from the table of content list in the Print Ordertab. The Page Number Setting dialog box appears.

Page Number Setting

F110504E.EPS

-

+

+

FCS0101<4-1-1> FCS Properties<4-2-1> FCS Constant <4-3-1> EquipmentIOM<4-5-1> Communication I/O <4-6-1> Communication I/O Tag <4-7-1> Common Switch <4-8-1> Printout Message <4-9-1> Operator Guide <4-10-1> Signal Event<4-11-1> AnnunciatorFunction Block

Figure Page Number Setting Dialog Box

3. Select the chapter title or section title for which the start page number is to bechanged, then double-click the title. The Page Setting dialog box appears.

F110505E.EPS

Page Setting Of FCS Property

Start Page 4 -

Serial in the chapter

1

Figure Page Setting Dialog Box

4. Change the page number in the Page Setting dialog box.The change made in this dialog box will be reflected in the Page Number Settingdialog box.


F11-18<F11.5 Editing Table of Contents for Self-Document Printing>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Inserting ChaptersNew chapters can be added to an existing table of contents.

For example, if you plan to add an FCS or HIS later on, a chapter for the FCS or HIS can becreated beforehand.

Select a chapter title from the print order list in the Print Order tab strip, then click the [InsertBlank] button. A new chapter will be inserted above the chapter title that was selected.

F110506E.EPS

Self Document

Edit

Close

Insert Blank Delete BlankPage Style Clear

Print

Ready

Print Order

TitleContents1 . Explanatory legends2 . Project Definition3 . Batch4 . FCS01015 . Blank Chapter 6 . FCS01087 . HIS0123

Print Range Print Type Print OrderHeader • Footer Drawing Select Print

Figure Inserting a Chapter

■ Changing a Chapter TitleA chapter title can be modified in the Edit Contents dialog box, which will appear when the[Edit] button is clicked after selecting the chapter title to be changed from the print order listin the Print Order tab.

F110507E.EPS

CancelOK

Edit Contents

FCS0101Title

Figure Edit Contents Dialog Box

When the Edit Contents dialog box is closed, the changes made are reflected in the printorder list box.


<F11.6 Drawing Select Print of Self-Documentation> F11-19

IM 33S01B30-01E

F11.6 Drawing Select Print of Self-DocumentationSelf-Documentation allows user to select printing categories such as Control Draw-ing, Function Block List, Function Block Data or etc, for printing the contents of theselected categories.

When creating documents for debugging, by selecting the need categories on thistab, the unneeded documents will not be printed out, so that the paper and time canbe saved.

■ Drawing Select Print Tab ¡ £On Drawing Select Print tab, there are two options, [Print All] and [Print Selected]. Check-ing the option [Print Selected], the categories on the tab can be selected or deselected.

By default, the option [Print All] is checked.

F110601E.EPS

Self Document

ClosePrint

Ready


Print All

Print Selected

Control Drawing Logic Chart

SFCFunction Block list


Sequence Table

General-Purpose Calculation Formula

Figure Drawing Select Print Tab

When Self-documentation is started for a designated project, the option [Print All] ischecked.

The selections made on Drawing Select Print tab will become invalid after termination ofSelf-Documentation. When Self-Documentation is started again, the setting will be reset tothe default option [Print All].


F11-20<F11.6 Drawing Select Print of Self-Documentation>

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Print All

Do not select the detailed items of control drawings for documentation. Self-Documentationprints out all contents designated in Print Range tab in Self-Document setting window.

● Print Selected ¡ £

The drawing contents for printing can be selected on Drawing Select Print tab by checkingthe check boxes of the categories.

The categories and the printing order of the categories are as follows.

• Control Drawing (*1)

• Function Block List

• Function Block Detail

• Sequence Table

• General-purpose Calculation Formula

• Logic Chart

• SFC (including plane list, plane detail, SFC drawing, SEBOL etc.)

*1: ¡ For CS 1000, control drawing is an optional package. If the control drawing package is not installed, controldrawing printout can not be performed, despite checking the option of Control Drawing.

If all categories are checked for printout, all contents will be printed out. Comparing with[Print ALL], this method prints the contents in the order of the categories while Print Allprints in the order of chapters, sections and paragraphs.

Moreover, if none of the categories is checked, the contents of the categories will not beprinted out. However, the contents designated in Print Range tab will be printed out.

■ Result of Drawing Select PrintThe selected categories for printing are valid for all FCSs in the whole project. However, theprintouts of all selected categories are in the group based on each FCS.

For an example, when printing Sequence Table and Logic Chart of FCS0101 andFCS0102, the printout will be as follows:

FCS0101Sequence table in DR0001, Sequence table in DR0002, ..., Sequence table in DR0022Logic chart in DR0001, Logic chart in DR0002, ..., Logic chart in DR0022

FCS0102Sequence table in DR0001, Sequence table in DR0003Logic chart in DR0001, Logic chart in DR0003

TIP

When the pages attached with the default page numbers, the page numbers and the chapter numbersprinted out are different between Print All and Print Selected.


<F11.7 Print Parameters> F11-21

IM 33S01B30-01E

F11.7 Print Parameters[Print Parameters] task can be performed to print the tuning parameters of multiplefield control stations all together in one document. Cover page and table of contentscan not be added in the document of parameters, however, the header and footercan be used to indicate the control information such as station names and stationnumbers so that the printout document can be archived.

■ Layout of Tuning Parameter PrintoutIn a tuning parameter print, the tuning parameters for the specified tag names will beprinted. The project name, control station name and station number can be included in theheader and footer areas of the printed material.

F110701E.EPS

Tag Name: PID001

MODE � IMA(CAS)

PV � 1.846077SV � 1.846077MV � 100.000000CPHI � 100.000000CPLO � 0.000000

Tag Name: AUT

MODE � AUT(AUT)

CPV � 84.261223GAIN � 1.000000SECT � 3RV � 84.132790

Tag Comment: Inlet TemperatureALRM � NRSVH � 50.000000SVL � �200.000000

Tag Comment:

ALRM � NRX01 � 0.000000X02 � 27.000000X03 � 135.000000X04 � 180.000000X05 � 0.000000X06 � 0.000000X07 � 0.000000X08 � 0.000000X09 � 0.000000X10 � 0.000000X11 � 0.000000X12 � 0.000000X13 � 0.000000X14 � 0.000000X15 � 0.000000

Y01 � 0.000000Y02 � 27.000000Y03 � 135.000000Y04 � 180.000000Y05 � 0.000000Y06 � 0.000000Y07 � 0.000000Y08 � 0.000000Y09 � 0.000000Y10 � 0.000000Y11 � 0.000000Y12 � 0.000000Y13 � 0.000000Y14 � 0.000000Y15 � 0.000000

� � � � � � � � � � � � Header part � � � � � � � � � � � �

P � 10.000000I � 150.000000D � 0.000000

Figure A Printout of Tuning Parameters

Parameters can also be consolidated and printed at one time by simply specifying the FCSname or project name without specifying individual tag names.


F11-22<F11.8 Specifying Print Range for Tuning Parameters>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F11.8 Specifying Print Range for Tuning ParametersThe print range for the tuning parameters can be specified on the Print Range tab.

■ Print Range Tab for Tuning ParameterOn the Print Range tab, a project and the function blocks of the project for printing can beselected.

F110801E.EPS

Print Parameters

ClosePrint

Ready

Project Name

All FCS

Select from the list

Specified Tag

MYPJT

Tag Name

FCS0101FCS0108

Print Range Header – Footer

Figure Print Range Tab

After selecting a project name for tuning parameter printout, specify tags using one of thefollowing methods:

• To print out all function blocks within the project, check [All FCS].

• To print out all function blocks of each FCS, check [Select from the list], then selectFCS. The FCS’s for which a tuning parameter save has not been executed will not bedisplayed in the selection list.

• To specify and print a specific tag, check [Specified Tag] and enter the tag name.When specifying more than one function block, separate the tag names with commas(,). A wild card (*) can be used for the tag name.


<F11.9 Editing Header and Footer for Tuning Parameters> F11-23

IM 33S01B30-01E

F11.9 Editing Header and Footer for TuningParametersThe header and footer for tuning parameters can be edited in the Header/Footer tab.

■ Header/Footer Tab for Tuning Parameters PrintOn the Header/Footer tab, the header or footer for the tuning parameter printout can beedited.

F110901E.EPS

Print parameters

ClosePrint

Ready

Open Clear

ClearOpen

Header

Footer

$PrintData $FileName $PageNo

$ProjectName $StationName $ProjectComment

Print Range Header – Footer

Figure Header/Footer Tab

SEE ALSO

For details on the operation and restrictions, see the following:

F11.3, “Editing Header and Footer for Self-Document Printing”


F11-24<F11.10 Printing Self Documents to PDF Files>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F11.10 Printing Self Documents to PDF FilesA self document can not only be printed out directly on paper, but also to a PDF(Portable Document Format) file. This allows saving the PDF self documents to amedia such as MO, thereby it uses less storage space compared to storing theinformation on papers. This is also an effective way to conserve paper. However,individual unit cannot be printed to PDF file separately, neither tuning parameters.

■ Hardware EnvironmentThe hardware environment used for printing to PDF files must conform to the CS 1000/CS3000 hardware environment. In addition, the PC that takes care of the printing to PDF filesmust have sufficient free memory and storage space on its hard disk. The time required forprinting to PDF file varies with file size, the contents in the project and the PC perfor-mances. If printing the multiple stations' documents into PDF files, it is recommended toprint the file one station by one station, and calculate the file size and the time for printingbeforehand.

■ Software EnvironmentAdobe Acrobat 5.0 is required to create PDF files. Moreover, Adobe Acrobat or AdobeAcrobat Reader 5.0 is required to view PDF files.

A table of contents for a self document printed as a set of PDF files is created in HTMLformat. In order to view the table of contents, a browser compatible with HTML 4.01 isrequired. Internet Explorer 5.0 is recommended as the browser.

■ Operational ProcedureThe procedures required to print a self document to PDF files can be classified into setupoperations and the actual operations for printing the self document to PDF files. The follow-ing figure shows the sequence of the operations.

Start setup

End setup

Install Adobe Acrobat

Set a PDF port

Set the spool

Set Distiller

Property settings of Acrobat Distiller

Setup

Start

End

Set the self document

Print to PDF files

View the PDF files

Printing to and viewing PDF files

F111001E.EPS

Figure Sequence of Operations


<F11.10 Printing Self Documents to PDF Files> F11-25

IM 33S01B30-01E

F11.10.1 SetupIn the setup procedure, Adobe Acrobat must be installed, after which propertiesmust be set for Acrobat Distiller. For doing so, administrator privilege is reguired.

■ Installation of Adobe AcrobatInstall Adobe Acrobat 5.0 on the PC. Perform the “standard installation” to install Acrobatand Acrobat Distiller.

When Adobe Acrobat 5.0 is installed, a printer driver named Acrobat Distiller is installed.Acrobat Distiller converts the PostScript file to PDF file.

■ Setting Properties for Adobe Acrobat DistillerThe “PDF port,” “spool,” and “Distiller” settings should be made via the Acrobat DistillerProperties dialog box.

1. From the [Start] menu of Windows, select [Settings] and then [Printer] to open theprinter folder.

2. Open the Acrobat Distiller Properties dialog box.

● PDF Port Setting

The necessary settings related to the PDF port are performed in the Ports tab of the Acro-bat Distiller Properties dialog box. The default PDF port is automatically set when AdobeAcrobat is installed.

Apply

F111002E.EPS

SharingGeneral Security Device SettingsColor ManagementAdvanced

Acrobat Distiller Properties

Acrobat Distiller

Print to the following port[s]. Documents will print to the first freechecked port.

CancelOK

?

Configure Port...Add Port... Delete Port

Enable printer pooling

Enable bidirectional support

Ports

Port DescriptionCOM1:COM2:COM3:COM4:FILE:C:\Do...

Serial PortSerial PortSerial PortSerial PortPrint to FilePDF Port Acrobat Distiller

Printer

Figure Ports Tab



IM 33S01B30-01E

When using default PDF port, Acrobat Distiller may put the temporary files on WindowsDesktop. To avoid this, a new PDF port (PDF files folder) is needs to be created. How tocreate a new PDF port shown as follows.

1. Click [Add Port...] in the Ports tab. The Printer Ports dialog box is displayed.

Printer Ports

CancelNew Port...New Port Type...

F111003E.EPS

Available port types:Local PortPDF PortStandard TCP/IP Port

?

Figure Printer Ports Dialog Box

2. Select [PDF Port] from the list of “Available port types:” and click the [New Port...]button. A dialog box for browsing folders is displayed.

3. In the dialog box for browsing folders, specify the folder to which PDF files are printedand click the [OK] button.The specified folder is added as a new PDF Port in the Ports tab of the Acrobat Dis-tiller Properties dialog box.

4. Select the new PDF Port added in the Ports tab of the Acrobat Distiller Propertiesdialog box, and click the [Apply] button or the [OK] button.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Spool Setting

The necessary settings related to the spool are performed in the Advanced tab of theAcrobat Distiller Properties dialog box.

1. Enable the [Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster] radio button. Allother items can be left at their default settings.

Apply

F111004E.EPS

Acrobat Distiller Properties

CancelOK

?

General Device Settings

Separator Page...Printing Defaults... Print Processor...

Print spooled documents first

Hold mismatched documents

Enable advanced printng features

Keep printed documents

Ports

1

12:00 AM 12:00 AM

Always available

Available from To

Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster

Start printing after last page is spooled

Start printing immediately

Print directly to the printer

Priority:

Advanced

New Driver...Driver: AdobePS Acrobat Distiller

SecurityColor ManagementSharingGeneral

Figure Advanced Tab

2. Click the [Apply] button or the [OK] button in the Acrobat Distiller Properties dialogbox.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Distiller Setting

The necessary settings related to the printing are performed in the General tab of theAcrobat Distiller Properties dialog box.

1. Click the [Printing Preferences...] button. The Printing Preferences dialog box isdisplayed.

Apply

F111005E.EPS

SharingGeneral Device SettingsAdvanced

CancelOK

Ports

Acrobat Distiller

Paper available: Letter

Location :

Comment :

Model : Adobe PS Acrobat Distiller

Features

Color : YesDouble-sided : No Staple : NoSpeed : 400 ppmMaximum resolution : 4000 dpi

Printing Preferences... Print Test Page

SecurityColor Management

Acrobat Distiller Properties ?

General

Figure General Tab



IM 33S01B30-01E

2. Select the Adobe PDF Settings tab in the Printing Preferences dialog box and performthe following settings.

IMPORTANT

Make sure to set the check buttons as shown below. If the settings are made differentlyfrom the figure below, Distiller may not operate properly.

Apply

F111006E.EPS

Paper/QualityLayout

Acrobat Distiller Printing Preferences

CancelOK

?

View Result In Acrobat

Do not send fonts to Distiller

Delete Log files for successful jobs

Ask to Replace existing PDF file

Prompt for the PDF Filename

Adobe PDF Settings

Conversion Settings : eBook

Edit Conversion Settings...

General

Figure Printing Preferences Dialog Box – Adobe PDF Settings Tab



IM 33S01B30-01E

F11.10.2 Printing to PDF Files and Viewing PDF FilesThis section explains how to print a self document to a PDF file and how to view aself document printed to a PDF file.

■ Printing to PDF FilesFollow the procedure below in order to print a self document to PDF files.

● Setting Self Document and Starting Printing

1. Start the self document function from the System View, specify the print range, andedit the header, footer, and table of contents in the same way as when printing onpaper.

2. Click the [Print] button in the self document function window. The Print dialog box isdisplayed.

Status :Type :Where :Comment :

Print

CancelOK

F111007E.EPS

Properties...

Printer

Name :

1All

Pages from :

Selection

?

Acrobat Distiller

Print range

Number of copies :

Copies

Collate11

22

33

to:

ReadyAdobePS Acrobat DistillerC:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Desktop\*.pdf

Figure Print Dialog Box

3. Select [Acrobat Distiller] as the printer name in the Print dialog box.

4. Click the [OK] button in the Print dialog box. The PDF Output dialog box is displayed.

PDF Output

CancelOutput

F111008E.EPS

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Desktop\MYPJT ...

Delete*.htm *.pdf in the Destination Folder

Destination

Figure PDF Output Dialog Box



IM 33S01B30-01E

5. A default PDF port\project name is set in the [Destination] field of the PDF Outputdialog box. Change the default name if it is desired to change the destination folder ofthe PDF file.

6. Enable the [Delete *.htm *.pdf in the Destination Folder] check box in the PDF Outputdialog box in order to delete all existing HTML files and PDF files in the destinationfolder before creating new PDF files.

7. Click the [Output] button in the PDF Output dialog box. The self document is printed tothe specified PDF file destination folder in the PDF format. The table of contents of theself document is printed in the HTML format.

IMPORTANT

• In order to prevent files from being overwritten by PDF printing operations performedby other operators, dedicated PDF ports and destination folders for PDF files shouldbe created for each task.

• Do not print PDF files to the same PDF port at the same time. Output files may bedeleted or overwritten.

• If the [Delete *.htm *.pdf in the Destination Folder] check box is enabled when newPDF files are created, all previously created PDF files and HTML files containingtables of contents are deleted. In order to prevent existing PDF files from being inad-vertently deleted, all the previously created PDF files should be saved in other foldersor external storage media.

• Always specify Acrobat Distiller as the printer driver when printing PDF files.

• Make sure that Acrobat is not activated when printing to PDF files. Moreover, do notstart Acrobat while printing to PDF files. In either case, the PDF file creation operationwill be disabled.

• Make sure that there is sufficient free storage space on the destination disk of the PDFfiles before beginning to print to the PDF files.

• By default, Acrobat Distiller prints documents into color PDF files. For printing graphicwindows, choose [Tools] - [Environment Setting] on System View, then check [Printwindow background color when specifying color print] option box.Moreover, if [Set individually] option is checked for printing items selection, the itemsmay not be output to the PDF file if the related contents do not exist even though theitem is checked. (For an example, if [Modify Information] option is checked, but thegraphic file does not have the Modify Information, in this case, the item will not beprinted to the PDF file.)



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Viewing Printed PDF FilesIn the destination folder of the PDF files, a table of contents in the HTML format (index.htm)is stored along with the PDF files printed for each item of the table of contents. In order toview a self document stored in the PDF format, open the table of contents (index.htm) andopen each file from the table of contents.

TIP

It is possible to open the PDF files directly and view them.

Back Search Favorites History

MYPJT - Microsoft Internet Explorer

E:\work\selfdoc0927\index.htm Go Links��

File Edit Favorites HelpTools

Address

Title

Contents

1.Explanatory legends2.Project Definition3.Batch4.FCS01015.BCVV01026.ACG01037.STN01048.HIS0164

1.Explanatory legends

2.Project Definition 1.Project Properties 2.Multiple Project Connection 3.Plant Hierarchy 1.User-definable equipment 2.Plant hierarchy equipment 4.Station Configuration 5.Security 6.Operation Mark 7.Engineering Unit symbol 8.Switch Position Label 9.System-fixed Status Character String 10.Block Status Character String 11.Alarm Status Character String 12.Alarm Processing Table 13.Alarm Priority 14.Status Change Command Charact 15.State Transition Matrix List 16.Matrix1

3.Batch 1.Process Management Configuration 2.Unit Common Block 3.Common Block List 4.Common Block 1.RDT0950

PROJECTMYPJT

S e l f - D o c u m e n t a t i o n

2001/9/27

F111009E.EPS

Done My Computer

ABC

Adobe

102%

1/1 209.9 x 297 mm

Sig

natu

res

Com

men

tsT

ham

nails

Boo

kmar

ks

Figure Example of Table of Contents Display


F12-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12. Graphic Builder>

F12. Graphic BuilderThe Graphic Builder is used to create and edit graphic windows for operation andmonitoring.

This chapter explains the functions specific to the graphic builder, including the useof tools to create/edit Graphic windows and to set properties for graphic objects.

■ Functions of the Graphic BuilderThe Graphic Builder provides specific functions to create and edit Graphic windows.

● Setting Properties for Files

The Graphic Builder sets properties for new files to be created. The window types of thenew Graphic windows are defined by these properties.

SEE ALSO

For details, see the following:

F12.10, “Setting Properties for Files”

● Optional Dialog

Use the optional dialog to perform settings related to the operating environment and thedefault value applied when graphic object is newly created.

SEE ALSO


F12.11, “Setting the Options”

● Tools to Create and Edit Graphic Objects

The tools used to create and edit graphic objects include tools to draw simple graphics or tocreate objects with functions such as the instrument faceplate.

SEE ALSO


F12.12, “Tools Used to Create and Edit Graphic Objects”


F12-2

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Container

This function displays a control object with Active X control. Set the type of the controlobject to be displayed.

SEE ALSO


F12.12.33, “Creating Control Object”

● Setting Properties for Graphic Objects

The Graphic Builder is used to set the attributes for created graphic objects.

SEE ALSO


F12.13, “Setting Properties for Graphic Objects”

● Assigning Softkeys

Functions can be assigned to push buttons that are always displayed on the Graphicwindows.

SEE ALSO


F12.2, “Assigning Softkeys to a Graphic Window”

● Importing Bitmap Files

Bitmap images can be used as a graphic object or background image, by importing theminto Graphic windows.

SEE ALSO


F12.4, “Importing a Bitmap File into the Graphic Window”

● Saving Graphic Objects as Parts

Several graphic objects created can be stored in files by saving them as parts. Objectssaved as parts can be easily used in other Graphic windows, as well.

SEE ALSO


F12.5, “Saving a Graphic Object as a Part”


F12-3

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Exporting Data to Conversion File

This function may export the tag names and the data item names defined on the GraphicBuilder to an external file. When editing the file by commercial software and importing it tothe Graphic Builder again, the definition is updated by the edited contents.

SEE ALSO


F12.6, “External File for Search and Replace”

● Debugging of Graphic Builder

This function tests whether or not the new Graphic windows operate normally.

However, the debugging function does not perform the test by actually connecting to theFCS but through virtual operation on the Graphic Builder.

SEE ALSO


F12.15, “Debugging on the Graphic Builder”

● Color Printing

Coloring printing is available when printing the graphic images with colors. This can bebedesignated on printer properties sheet.

On Environment Setting window started from System View, there is an option “Print windowbackground color when specifying color print.” Check this option box, the background of thegraphic window can be printed out with colors.

If the option is not checked, a color different from the window display may be printed out asbackground color. So as to properly printout the objects that may be hidden by the back-ground color.

SEE ALSO

For more information about environment setting window, see the following:

F1.1.4, “Tool Menu of System View”


F12-4

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Graphic Builder Operation ModeThe Graphic Builder is divided into the following two types of operating modes, dependingon the start up method.

• Engineering modeThe Graphic Builder becomes engineering mode when started directly from theSystem View or via other builders from the System View.

• Windows modeThe Graphic Builder becomes Windows mode when started individually as a Windowsapplication.

The following table shows the differences between Graphic Builder functions in differentmodes.

Table Differences between Engineering Mode and Windows Mode

Function Engineering mode Windows mode

Editing filesBuilder file (.edf)Working file (.sva)

Working file (.sva) only

Creating new files Disabled Enabled (select from menu)

Downloading files

Create Working File

Enabled (select from menu)

Applicable

Disabled

Checking presence/absence oftags or windows at file write

User can specify whether performing acheck or not.

Performs no check.

Not applicable

F120001E.EPS

■ Graphic Window Capacity ¡ £The capacity of one Graphic window is explained as follows. A Graphic window should notbe made beyond the limit of the capacity shown below. For some items, builder does notset restriction for the settings beyond the limit but the performance of the created Graphicwindow will be lowered.

● Number of Data Links ¡ £

This is a total data number for linking display objects to the process data, function blockdata used in the modifier condition formulas as well as the data communicated from otherstations.

• Maximum 200/Window (*1)


*1: ¡ Limit for CS 1000*2: £ Limit for CS 3000

● Number of Modifier Conditions ¡ £

• Maximum 8/Object



*1: ¡ Limit for CS 1000*2: £ Limit for CS 3000


F12-5

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Number of Graphs

This is a total number of Line-Segment graph, User-Defined Line-Segment graph, Bargraph, Step graph, Radar chart and Two-dimensional graph.

• Maximum 4/Window

● Graphic Arithmetic Expression

This is a total number of arithmetic expressions used for data displayed for the ProcessData-Character and the Process Data-Bar, and arithmetic expressions used for ModifyCoordinates along the X and Y axes.


● Number of Touch Targets

This is a total number of Line-Segment graph, User-Defined Line-Segment graph, Bargraph, Step graph, Radar chart and Two-dimensional graph.


● Overview Object, Graphic Modifier Color Change and Blinking

This is a total number of overview object, graphic modifier overview color change andoverview blocking.


● Number of Instrument Faceplate


● Number of Generic Names


● Number of Generic Name Sets



F12-6

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.1 Optimizing Graphic Window Display Size>

F12.1 Optimizing Graphic Window Display SizeA displayed Graphic window may appear differently from what is in the GraphicBuilder, depending on the settings of the following items:

• Windows (taskbar, desktop area, and font size)

• HIS (font size, operation screen mode, and toolbutton size)

• Graphic Builder (scaling settings, and Graphic window size)

By making recommended settings for the above items according to the HIS type andthe operation screen mode, a displayed Graphic window will appear the same aswhat is in the Graphic Builder.

This section explains the following:

• Settings recommended for Windows

• HIS and Graphic Builder setup items

• Values recommended for the Graphic window size

• Graphic window display size


F12-7

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.1.1 Settings Recommended for WindowsTo make a displayed Graphic window appear the same as what is in the GraphicBuilder, recommended settings should be made for the taskbar, the desktop area,and the font size of Windows. This section explains the recommended settings ofWindows.

■ Recommended Values for Windows Setup ItemsBelow are the recommended values for Windows setup items:

• Taskbar: “Always on top” should be on.“Auto hide” should be off.Hide

• Desktop area: 1280�1024

• Font size: Small fonts

Set the taskbar on the Options tab of the taskbar property sheet. The taskbar propertysheet can be displayed by positioning the cursor over the taskbar, right-clicking the mouse,and then selecting [Properties] from the pop-up menu. To hide the taskbar, position thecursor over the taskbar and drag it downward.

Set the desktop area and the font size on the Display property sheet of the display propertysheet. The display property sheet can be displayed by selecting [Display] from [ControlPanel] of Windows.


F12-8

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.1.2 HIS and Graphic Builder Setup ItemsThis section explains HIS and Graphic Builder setup items required to make a dis-played Graphic window appear the same as what is in the Graphic Builder.

■ HIS Setup ItemsBelow are the HIS setup items related to a displayed Graphic window and their defaultvalues:

• Font size: 16 (default)

• Operation screen mode: Window mode (default) (*1)

• Toolbutton size: 24�24 (default) (*2)

*1: For a console type HIS, the screen mode is the default setting.*2: For a console type HIS, 32�32 is the default setting.

The settings can be performed on Display tab of HIS Setup window. Clicking HIS Setupbutton on the toolbar of System Status Display window can open HIS Setup window.

SEE ALSO

• For more information about operation panel mode, see the following:

E2.2, “Operation Panel Mode”

• For more information about Display tab on HIS Setup window, see the following:

E7.3.4, “Display Tab”

■ Graphic Builder Setup ItemsBelow are the Graphic Builder setup items related to a displayed Graphic window and theirdefault values:

• Scaling: Yes (default)

• Window Size: 1024�686 (default)

On Set Details tab of Create New window dialog box of System View, there is check box[Without Scaling] can be checked or unchecked for Scaling option. For the windows al-ready created, this option can be changed on the tab for details setting of windows fileproperty sheet. Builder file property sheet can be opened by choosing a graphic window fileon System View, then clicking [Properties...] on [File] menu to open it.

Window Size can be set on Attribute tab of builder file property sheet. Clicking [Proper-ties...] on [File] menu can open this property sheet.

SEE ALSO

• For more information on the Set Details tab of the Create New Window dialog box, see the following:

F12.7.2, “Set Details Tab”

• For more information about Attribute tab of builder file property sheet, see the following:

F12.10.1, “Attribute Tab”


F12-9

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.1.3 Values Recommended for Graphic Window SizeThis section explains values recommended for HIS and Graphic Builder setup itemsaccording to each combination of an operation panel mode and an HIS, required tomake a displayed Graphic window appear the same as what is in the GraphicBuilder.

The following explanation assumes that the recommended values explained inF12.1.1, “Settings Recommended for Windows” for the Windows setup items.

■ Recommended Operation Panel ModeOperation panel can be set either in Full-screen mode or Windows mode. In general, it isrecommended to use one operation panel mode for one project. For Console Type HIS, thescreen mode is strongly recommended. The operation panel mode can be changed in theHIS Setup window. After changing the operation mode, the HIS needs to be restarted.

■ Recommended Graphic Window SizeThe recommended graphic window sizes for each type of HIS are shown in the followingtable.

Table Recommended Graphic Window Size on HIS

Type of HIS

HIS setup Settings on graphic builder

Graphic window size

With softkeys Without softkeysOperation panel mode Tool-button

size Scaling

Console Type HIS Full-screen mode 32�32 1276�864 1276�778

Non-Console Type Full-screen mode 24�24 1276�880 1276�792 Yes

Non-Console Type Windows mode 24�24 1024�686 1276�618

F120101E.EPS


F12-10

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ When Multiple Types of HIS are Applied in One ProjectBelow are values recommended for the Graphic window size when both a console typeHIS and a non-console type HIS are applied in one project.

The values depend on whether all of the HISs are set to the full-screen mode, or they areset to both the full-screen mode and the window mode.

A console type HIS is basically set to the full-screen mode, and therefore no values arerecommended for the window mode.

● When All of HISs are Set to Full-Screen Mode

Below are values recommended for the Graphic window size when both a console typeHIS and a non-console type HIS are applied in one project, and all of them are set to thefull-screen mode. The tool-button size of the non-console type HIS defaults to that of theconsole type HIS.

Table Values Recommended for Graphic Window Size with Operation Panel Mode Set to Full-Screen Mode

Type of HISOperation panel mode

HIS setup Settings on graphic builder

Tool-buttonsize

Graphic window size

With softkeys Without softkeysScaling

Console Type HISFull-screen mode 32�32 1276�864 1276�778

Non-Console Type

Yes/No(Either is fine)

F120102E.EPS

● When Both Full-Screen Mode and Windows Mode Applied in One Project

Below are values recommended for the Graphic window size when both a console typeHIS set to the full-screen mode and a non-console type HIS set to the window mode areapplied in one project. In this case, a window created with the option [Without Scaling]unchecked may appear slightly different from the window in the Graphic Builder.

Table Recommended Graphic Window Size when Both Full-Screen Mode and Windows ModeApplied in One Project

Type of HISOperation panel mode

HIS setup Settings on Graphic Builder

Tool-buttonsize

Graphic window size

With softkeys Without softkeysScaling

Console Type HIS Full-screen mode 32�32

Windows mode 24�241276�864 1276�778

Non-Console TypeYes

F120103E.EPS

■ Recommended Window Size for Overview and Control Panel WindowsThe window size for overviews, control panels can be set as follows regardless of thesettings on Windows.

• Graphic Windows Size: 1024�768

• Scaling: Yes


F12-11

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.1.4 Calculating Graphic Window Display SizeThis section explains how to calculate the Graphic window display size, and thechanges to the display size made by scaling. It also explains effects of calculatingthe display size without considering the height of softkeys.

■ Calculating Graphic Window SizeMake settings as explained below if settings explained in F12.1.3, “Values Recommendedfor Graphic Window Size” are to be made. The calculation below assumes that recom-mended values are assigned to Windows taskbar and font size.

● Graphic Window Size in Full-Screen Mode (Large)

Full-screen mode large graphic window size (-SL) is calculated with many effective factorssuch the size of Toolbar Button or Font Size set on HIS Setup window and the desktop sizeset on Windows display property dialog box. Full-screen mode large graphic window sizemay use the settings in the following table.

Furthermore, when running Test Function, all windows will be framed with a thick red line,in this case, the window will be displayed smaller in 4 pixels.

Table Graphic Windows Size for 1280�1024 Windows Desktop Area

HIS font sizeToolbar button size

24�24 32�32 48�48

14 1276�883 1276�867 1276�835

16 1276�880 1276�864 1276�832

18 1276�878 1276�862 1276�830

F120104E.EPS

Table Graphic Windows Size for 1024�768 Windows Desktop Area

HIS font sizeToolbar button size

24�24 32�32 48�48

14 1020�627 1020�611 Not configurable



F120105E.EPS


F12-12

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Graphic Window Size in Full-Screen Mode (Medium)

The medium size (-SM) graphic window in full screen mode is about 50 % of the desktopscreen width and 67 % of desktop screen height. The measurements of the medium size(-SM) graphic window in full screen mode are as follows.

Table Windows Mode Medium Graphic Windows Size

Windows NTDesktop area

Display size

Medium (-SM)

1280�1024 640�428

1024�768 512�343

F120106E.EPS

● Graphic Window Size in Window Mode

The graphic window size in Windows mode is not effected by the display property settingsof Windows. The width of Windows mode large (-SL) graphic window size can be set with80 % of width of Windows Desktop area. The width of Windows mode medium (-SM)graphic window size can be set with 50 % of width of Windows Desktop area. The height ofboth large (-SL) and medium (-SM) graphic window size can be set with 67 % of height ofWindows Desktop area. Windows mode graphic window size may use the settings in thefollowing table.

Table Windows Mode Medium Graphic Windows Size

Windows NTDesktop area

Display size

Large (-SL) Medium (-SM)

1280�1024 1024�686 640�428

1024�768 819�548 512�343

F120107E.EPS

● Graphic Window Size with Softkeys Assigned

When assigning softkeys to a Graphic window, subtract the height of softkeys from that ofthe window when calculating the window size.

The height of softkeys is calculated according to that of the Graphic window as follows:

• When the height of the Graphic window exceeds 600 pixelsThe height of softkeys will be 10 % of that of the Graphic window, regardless of theoperation panel mode (full-screen mode/window mode) and the window display size(large/medium).

• When the height of the Graphic window is 600 pixels or lessThe height of softkeys will be fixed at 60 pixels.

The softkeys displayed in the medium-sized (-SM) Graphic window that is 600 pixels orshorter increase in size vertically. This is because the width of each softkey adjusts to 1/8 ofthat of the Graphic window while the height of the softkey is fixed at 60 pixels.


F12-13

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Changes to Graphic Window Size Made by ScalingThis section explains changes to the Graphic window size made by scaling.

● Uncheck [Without Scaling] (Default)

When the option [Without Scaling] is unchecked, Scaling is activated. Thus the windowsize specified for the windows will be ignored. The windows displayed on the screen will bein accordance with the specification of Display Size (Large/Medium/Special). The objects inthe graphic windows will be adjusted as follows.

• The objects in the graphic windows will be adjusted proportionally with the specifiedDisplay Size. For example, when a graphic window is displayed in Large size (-SL)and in Medium size (-SM), the picture displayed in the medium window will be thesame as the picture in the large window but smaller in size. However, the windowdisplayed in Special size (-SC) will not be effected by the setting of [Without Scaling]option.

• The lines of same thickness may appear differently after scaling.

• A circle may appear like an ellipse.

• The text using a font that gives the same width of the characters normally displays adouble-byte character in the width of two single-byte characters. After scaling thisproportion may not be kept.

• After scaling, the width of characters may not be the same.

• The text in message object may be is dislocated in display.

• The displayed window size changes accordingly when softkeys are assigned orremoved from the window.

● Check [Without Scaling]

Check the [Without Scaling] option, the Graphic window can be displayed exactly the sameas what was created on the Graphic Builder. Note that with this option checked, theGraphic window will be displayed as follows:

• The scroll bars may be displayed in the graphic window according to the specificationof graphic window size (Large/Medium/Special), sometimes an unnecessary marginmay occur so that it is necessary to create the Graphic window with the considerationof the display result.

• When Graphic window displays in medium size (-SM), only the window framechanged to medium size and attached with the scrollbars. The objects displayed in theGraphic window are the same size as they were created on the Graphic Builder.


F12-14

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Softkey and ScalingWhen assigning a Graphic window with softkeys, in addition to the Graphic window sizespecified, an area for softkeys will be reserved for display. When softkeys are assigned to aGraphic window, regardless of Scaling setting, the height of Graphic window displayed isthe specified window size plus the height of softkey.

SEE ALSO

For more information about the height of softkey, see the following earlier section:

“● Graphic Window Size with Softkeys Assigned”

If the height of softkeys is not subtracted from that of the window, the Graphic window willbe affected as follows, depending on whether scaling is specified:

● [Without Scaling] is Unchecked (Default)

• Scaling may force the display of the graphic window area and the softkey area to thespecified size in proportion. This may result in the distortions of display such as thelines created with same thickness but have different appearance, the same sizecharacters may display in different sizes.

• The objects in the same Graphic window may be displayed in different sizes vary withassignment of softkeys. The objects in the window without softkeys appear larger thanthe objects in the windows with softkeys.

● [Without Scaling] is Checked

If [Without Scaling] is checked, the following phenomena will not occur.

• The softkeys are displayed in the window. However, softkeys may overlap with othergraphic objects.

• The displayed softkeys can be moved together with the graphic objects in the windowby scroll bars. Thus, it is possible that the softkeys may be displayed in a place otherthan the bottom of the window.

• Softkeys may not be displayed for certain sized windows.

TIP

The functions performed by softkeys can also be performed by push-buttons. If soft keys do not meet therequirement, use push-buttons instead.

When checking the option [Without Scaling], the display position of softkeys should betaken into account before creating the windows.


F12-15

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.2 Assigning Softkeys to a Graphic Window>

F12.2 Assigning Softkeys to a Graphic WindowThe softkeys can be assigned to a Graphic window.

The softkeys are the push buttons that are displayed in the predetermined positions.Up to 8 softkeys can be assigned to a single Graphic window. The assigned softkeysare always displayed so that their functions can be executed at all times.

■ Assigning Softkeys▼ Soft Key

Select the [Softkey...] from the [Insert] menu of the Graphic Builder to display the dialog boxin which to assign softkeys.

The softkey dialog box is shown below.

No. 1234567

Label Guard Function

Delete

Change1No.

Label

with Illumination

Black

Attach Guard

F120201E.EPS

Soft key No.1 is being edited.

Soft key FunctionText

CloseOK Apply

Figure Softkey Dialog Box

When the graphic window with softkeys assigned is displayed, the softkeys are positionedoutside of the drawing area (the area in which objects are drawn on the Graphic window.)

When scaling is applied, an object may be slightly moved. Set the Graphic window sizecarefully for delicate adjustment of objects.

SEE ALSO

For the setting of Graphic window size, see the following:

F12.1, “Optimizing Graphic Window Display Size”


F12-16

IM 33S01B30-01E


The figure below shows a softkey positioning.

Display in the Graphic Builder. Display in the HIS Graphic window.

F120202E.EPS

Scaling while maintainingthe vertical tohorizontal ratio

Softkey

Figure Positioning of Softkeys Assigned to the Graphic Window

■ Softkey NumbersThe softkeys are already assigned numbers 1 to 8 according to the display position. The“No.” item displays the number assigned to the softkey currently displayed. Specify a “No.”using the spin box, or select a softkey from the list view, to display the softkey correspond-ing to such number. The number can be selected from 1 to 8.

• To reflect the change content of the softkey currently set to the softkey of the currentnumber, press the [Change] button.

• To delete the softkey currently displayed, press the [Delete] button.

The figure below shows the softkeys and their numbers on the graphic window.

F120203E.EPS1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8Figure Softkey Placement in the Graphic Windows

Undefined softkeys are not displayed.

■ Labels Assigned to a SoftkeyThe text of up to 20 alphanumeric characters or 10 double-byte characters can be set forthe softkey label.The text of up to 20 alphanumeric characters or 10 double-byte characterscan be set for the softkey label. The label display may be wrapped to fit the size of the softkeys.

■ Attaching a Guard to a SoftkeyThis sets whether or not to attach a safety guard to a softkey. A softkey with a guard be-comes a two-push button. The first push releases the operation disabled frame, and thesecond push executes the function (two-step operation).


F12-17

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Soft Key Assignment FunctionOn the function tab of the soft key dialog box, the function of the soft key may be assigned.

On the tab for soft key dialog function, the push button and the touch target objects’ func-tions may also be defined.

SEE ALSO

For the function tab setting, see the following:

F12.13.19, “Function Tab”

■ Text may be Assigned for Soft KeyOn the text tab of the soft key dialog box, the text scripts and text format may be defined.

On the text tab, text objects, data character display objects’ and so on functions may alsobe defined.

SEE ALSO

For the text tab setting, see the following:

F12.13.4, “Text Tab”


F12-18

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.3 Data Bind>

F12.3 Data BindWhen creating Graphic windows for similar process units, if their drawing objectsare the same but the function block, data item of process data, modifier conditionsas well as constant values bound to the drawing objects are different, using DataBind will enable one Graphic window to satisfy the control requirements instead ofmaking multiple Graphic windows.

■ Graphic Generic NameA graphic generic name is an alias of tag name, item or value bound to a graphic object.The representation of the alias is referred to as binding. Bindings can be defined on theData Bind tab. One graphic generic name can be bound with multiple bindings (genericname sets).

The bindings of graphic generic names can be defined either on the property sheet of thegraphic builder file at one time or on each object’s property sheet individually.

If the bindings of graphic generic names are defined on the object’s property sheet, whenthe objects are referenced from other Graphic windows as graphical parts, the definedbindings will also be handed over.

SEE ALSO

For more information on Data Bind, see the followings:

F12.10.2, “Data Bind Tab - File Properties”

F12.13.46, “Data Bind Tab - Object Properties”


F12-19

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.3 Data Bind>

By using Data Bind, all objects in a Graphic window will change their displays to the defaultor selected generic name set.

This change occurs when a Graphic window is opened or when the [DataBind] button onthe Graphic window toolbar is clicked.

F120301E.EPS

XXXXXX.X

XXXXXX.X

XXXXXX.X

XXXXXX.X

GR0001Data displayData type: process dataDisplay entity: $Tag_1.PV

Data displayData type: process dataDisplay entity: $Tag_2.PV



Set 1

Generic name Binding

$TAG_1 FIC101$TAG_2 FIC201$TAG_3 FIC301$TAG_4 FIC401

Data bind

Set 2


$TAG_1 FIC102$TAG_2 FIC202$TAG_3 FIC302$TAG_4

Data bind

Set 3


$TAG_1 FIC103$TAG_2 FIC203$TAG_3$TAG_4 FIC403

Data bind

File properties

When switching the set of generic names, the displayed data of bindings will change accordingly.

Figure Bindings of Graphic Generic Names


F12-20

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.3 Data Bind>

■ List of the Objects that may be Assigned Graphic Generic Names

Table List of the Objects that may be Assigned Graphic Generic Names (1/2)

Object Assignment

Data Bar Display• Tag name, Item name, Array, Numeric data in arithmetic expression, Text data• Batch ID, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array• High and low limits

Data Text Display • Tag name, Item name, Array, Numeric data in arithmetic expression, Text data • Batch ID, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array

Graph• Tag name, Item name, Array• Batch ID, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array• High and low limits

Touch Target

• Tag name of condition test formula, Item name, Array, Text data in condition test formula, Numeric data• Batch ID of condition test formula, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array• Objects may be assigned with functions (*1)

Push ButtonFaceplate block button

• Tag name of condition test formula, Item name, Array, Numeric data in arithmetic expression, Text data• Batch ID of condition test formula, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array• Label text• Tag name of faceplate block button• Objects may be assigned with functions (*1)

Soft key

• Tag name of condition test formula, Item name, Array, Numeric data in arithmetic expression• Batch ID of condition test formula, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array• Label text• Objects may be assigned with functions (*1)

Instrument Diagram Tag name

Windows• Window name• Tag name of condition test formula, Item name, Array, Text data, Numeric data• Batch ID of condition test formula, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array

Dialog Name Key (Tag Name, Batch ID)

Trend • Tag name and Item name of trend point • Window name of trend group

Message Parameters for message range (Station Name, Tag Name, Plant Hierarchy)

Overview

• Function Block Type (tag name) Tag name• Function Block Type (tag name with tag mark) Tag name• Function Block Type (window name) Window name, Tag name, data item name, and Array

for the second line data• Function Block Type (annunciator) Annunciator name, Tag name, data item name, and Array

for the second line data• Function Block Type (comment) Comment text• Parameters for windows to be extended

F120302E.EPS

*1: The objects that may be assigned functions are as follows.• Parameters for calling out windows• Tag name, Item name, Command and Array for function block command• Program name of a file related program, parameters• Tag name. Item name, Batch ID, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array called out in data

entry dialog box• Tag name. Item name, Batch ID, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array called out in menu dialog

box• Tag name. Item name, Batch ID, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array of Data Item dependent

menu dialog data• Trend group name for trend Start/Stop/Restart• File name for running multimedia function• Parameters for report printout• Panel set name


F12-21

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.3 Data Bind>

Table List of the Objects that may be Assigned Graphic Generic Names (2/2)

Object Assignment

Arithmetic Calculation • Tag name, Item name, Unit name, Common block name, • Batch ID, Item name, Array, Text data, Numeric data

Graphic Modifier

• Tag name of condition test formula, Array• Batch ID of condition test formula, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array• Numeric data in condition test formula (Double quotations “ ” are not required).• Numeric data in condition test formula

Coordinate Modifier• Tag name, Item name, Array• Batch ID, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array• Text data, Numeric data

Auto FunctionAssignment • Objects may be assigned functions (*1)

F120303E.EPS

*1: The objects that may be assigned functions are as follows.• Parameters for calling out windows• Tag name, Item name, Command and Array for function block command• Program name of a file related program, parameters• Tag name. Item name, Batch ID, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array called out in data entry dialog

box• Tag name. Item name, Batch ID, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array called out in menu dialog box• Tag name. Item name, Batch ID, Unit name, Common block name, Item name, Array of Data Item dependent menu

dialog data• Trend group name for trend Start/Stop/Restart• File name for running multimedia function• Parameters for report printout• Panel set name

■ Syntax of Graphic Generic NameThe syntax of a graphic generic name has a beginning letter $ (dollar sign) followed byalphanumeric character 0 - 9, A - Z, _ (underscore), - (minus). Up to 16 alphanumericcharacters, including $ sign, can be used to form a generic name. Generic names are notcase-sensitive. The graphic generic names start with $_ (dollar and underscore) are sys-tem fixed graphic generic names, can not be defined by users.

SEE ALSO

For the system fixed graphic generic names, see the following the later section of this chapter:

“■ System Fixed Graphic Generic Names”


F12-22

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.3 Data Bind>

■ System Fixed Graphic Generic Names

Table System Fixed Graphic Generic Names

Graphic Generic Name Data Type Description

$_WindowName Text Window name

$_WindowComment Text Window comment

$_ZoomScale Numeric Zoom In/Out ratio (%)

$_ModifyTime Numeric Date of last graphic builder update (*1)

$_BindName Text Selected generic name set for data binding

$_BindComment Text Comment of selected generic name set for data binding

$_Time Numeric System clock (*1)

$_StationName Text HIS station name

$_UserName Text Operating user name

$_BatchID Text Batch ID (*2)

$_GroupNo Numeric Recipe Group Number (*2)

F120304E.EPS

*1: For displaying in text style, specify the [date] or [time] as display format.*2: Available on the Product control window only.

■ Variants Bound to Graphic Generic NamesThe variants that can be bound to graphic generic names are explained in this section. Avariant to be bound to a graphic generic name can be the following 4 types of data; anumeric value, a text string, a process variable or a recipe datum. When binding a numericvalue or a text string, the numeric value and the text string can be directly used. Whenbinding process variables or recipe data, the following functions are required.

• Function for Process Variable@ProcessData()Example @ProcessData(FIC100.ALARM)

• Function for Recipe Datum (according to Unit name)@RecipeUnit()Example @RecipeUnit(UT0100.DATA01.ITEM01)

• Function for Recipe Datum (according to Batch ID)@RecipeBatchID()Example @RecipeBatchID (01-0010.DATA01.ITEM01)

● When Binding Process Data or Recipe Data

When a Graphic window is displayed, if a generic name bound with process data or recipedata is changed, the communication data or the modified conditions using the variantsbound to the generic name will not be affected by the generic name change. This meansthat generic name changes during graphic display, but the process data bound to thegeneric name are displaying the variants bound to the generic name when the graphicwindow is initially opened.


F12-23

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.3 Data Bind>

■ Using Graphic Generic Name in Modification Condition Test FormulaDefine the WND001 condition test formula in the object as follows.

$1.ALRM=$2

Using the following command scripts to call WND001.

WND001�{$1=FIC100,$2=HI}

In the above condition, the [FIC100.ALRM=“HI”] becomes bound formula.

■ Using Graphic Generic Name in Functional Text StringCalling up the WND001 window by pushing a push button may be defined as follows.

WND002�{$1=$1}

Using the following command to call up WND001 window.

WND001�{$1=AA-0001}

In the above condition, [WND002�{$1=AA-0001}] becomes bound formula. Thus thegraphic generic name declared by $1 of WND001 may be passed to $1 of WND002.


F12-24

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.3 Data Bind>

■ Example of Applying Data Binding to Data Text Display

Data Text Display (1)Data Type: Graphic generic nameData Display: $_BindName

F120305E.EPS

Generic Name Set = XXXXXX

COMMENT = XXXXXXXXXX

.PV= XXX. XXXXX

.PV= XXX. XXXXX

WND001

Graphic Window

Data Text Display (3)Data Type: Graphic generic nameData Display: $TAG_1

Data Text Display (4)Data Type: Graphic generic nameData Display: $TAG_2

Data Text Display (5)Data Type: Process dataData Display: $TAG_1.PV

Data Text Display (6)Data Type: Process dataData Display: $TAG_2.PV

Data Text Display (2)Data Type: Graphic Generic NameData Display: $_BindComment

Set: SET01Comment: AAAAA

Generic name set 1$TAG_1$TAG_2

Generic nameFIC100-1Undefined

Binding

Set: SET02Comment: BBBBB


Generic nameFIC100-2FIC200-2

Binding

Set: SET03Comment: CCCCC


Generic nameUndefinedFIC200-3

Binding

Figure Example of Data Bind Function


F12-25

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.3 Data Bind>

● When Generic Name Set 1 to 3 is Defined and the Generic Name Set 2 isSet as the Default

The data text displays corresponding to calling-up (1) to (5) will be as follows.

Calling-up (1) WND001

Calling-up (2) WND001�{SET01}

Calling-up (3) WND001�{SET01,SET03}

Calling-up (4) WND001�{$TAG_1=FIC999-1}

Calling-up (5) WND001�{SET03,$TAG_1=FIC999-1}

Table Examples of Data Text Display (The default generic name set is not designated)

Calling-up(1) Calling-up(2) Calling-up(3) Calling-up(4) Calling-up(5)

Data Text Display (1) SET02 SET01 SET03 SET02 SET03

Data Text Display (2) BBBBB AAAAA CCCCC BBBBB CCCCC

Data Text Display (3) FIC100-2 FIC100-1 (empty) FIC999-1 FIC999-1

Data Text Display (4) FIC200-2 (empty) FIC200-3 FIC200-2 FIC200-3

Data Text Display (5) FIC100-2.PV FIC100-1.PV (error) FIC999-1.PV FIC999-1.PV

Data Text Display (6) FIC200-2.PV (error) FIC200-3.PV FIC200-2.PV FIC200-3.PV

F120306E.EPS


F12-26

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.3 Data Bind>

● When Generic Name Set 1 to 3 is Defined and the No Generic Name Set isDefined as the Default

The data text displays corresponding to calling-up (1) to (5) will be as follows.

If the default generic name set has not been designated, the set with smallest number willbe used as the default.

Calling-up (1) WND001

Calling-up (2) WND001�{SET01}

Calling-up (3) WND001�{SET01,SET03}

Calling-up (4) WND001�{$TAG_1=FIC999-1}

Calling-up (5) WND001�{SET03,$TAG_1=FIC999-1}

Table Examples of Data Text Display (The default generic name set is not designated)

Calling-up(1) Calling-up(2) Calling-up(3) Calling-up(4) Calling-up(5)

Data Text Display (1) SET01 SET01 SET03 SET01 SET03

Data Text Display (2) AAAAA AAAAA CCCCC AAAAA CCCCC

Data Text Display (3) FIC100-1 FIC100-1 (empty) FIC999-1 FIC999-1

Data Text Display (4) (empty) (empty) FIC200-3 (empty) FIC200-3

Data Text Display (5) FIC100-1.PV FIC100-1.PV (error) FIC999-1.PV FIC999-1.PV

Data Text Display (6) (error) (error) FIC200-3.PV (error) FIC200-3.PV

F120307E.EPS


F12-27

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.3 Data Bind>

■ Binding Graphic Generic Name to Individual ObjectThe figure below shows the relationship between a graphic generic name and its bindingwhen the graphic generic name is bound to an individual object:

F120308E.EPS

Set 1


$TAG_1 FIC101

Data Bind

Set 2


$TAG_1 FIC102

Data Bind

Set 1


$TAG_2 FIC201

Data Bind

Set 2


$TAG_2

Data Bind

Set 1


$TAG_1 FIC101

Data Bind

Set 2


$TAG_1 FIC102

Data Bind

Set 1


$TAG_2 FIC201

Data Bind

Set 2


$TAG_2

Data Bind

Data displayData type: process dataDisplay entity: $TAG_1.PV

Data displayData type: process dataDisplay entity: $TAG_2.PV

File properties

RRRRRR.R

RRRRRR.R

Graphic Builder: GR0001

RRRRRR.R

RRRRRR.R

Graphic Builder: GR0002

Quoted as a part

A generic name defined on the property sheet of an individual object is bound to the object

If a binding is defined on the property sheet of an individual object, a binding cannot be defined on the file property sheet.

Set1


$TAG_1 FIC101

$TAG_2 FIC201

Data Bind

Set 2


$TAG_1 FIC102

$TAG_2

Data Bind

File properties

Since no binding is defined on the property sheet of an individual object, a binding can be defined.

Figure Binding Graphic Generic Name to Individual Object


F12-28

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.4 Importing a Bitmap File into the Graphic Window>

F12.4 Importing a Bitmap File into the GraphicWindowA bitmap file can be imported as a graphic object or background image of a Graphicwindow.

■ Importing a Bitmap as an Object▼ Importing a Bitmap File

This is the function that imports a bitmap file as a graphic object.

Select the [Diagram...] button on the [Insert] menu of the Graphic Builder to display thebitmap file selection dialog.

The following lists the restrictions applied when importing a bitmap file.

• Extension: bmp, dib

• Color: Up to 256 colors


F12-29

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of a Bitmap ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type, or display method can be set for a bitmap object.

Use the bitmap tab to set attributes for the bitmap. To display the bitmap tab, select [Prop-erty] from the menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button while the bitmapobject is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations, while theobjects drawn with the bitmap object is selected.

• Select the [Property] button on the format tool bar.

• Select one of the common tabs from the [Format] menu.

Also, when [Open property sheet] is selected for the double-click operation in the dialog box displayed byselecting [Option] from the [Tool] menu, the property setting menu box can be displayed by double-clicking the displayed objects.

The bitmap property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. Various attributes canbe set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab

This tab is used to set the attributes that are common to all graphic objects created. The tabsets the object name, display position and size, as well as whether the object can be usedas a tag object and whether data setting is possible during debugging.

● Graphic Modifier Tab

This tab is used to set change conditions for the attributes such as color, shape and light-ing/flashing status of a graphic object.

● Coordinate Modifier Tab

This tab is used to set attributes to change a bitmap object into another bitmap object.

● Data Bind Tab

This tab is used to bind different variants to graphic generic names.

SEE ALSO

For the details of items to be defined in the tabs, see the following:



F12-30

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Importing a Bitmap as a Window Background ImageThis function imports a bitmap as a background image for a window.

● Import

▼ Importing a Background Screen Bitmap

Select [Background Screen Bitmap]-[Import...] on the [Insert] menu to display the bitmapfile selection dialog.

To import a bitmap, click the [Open] button after selecting a file.

● Modification

▼ Background Bitmap Properties

Select [Background Screen Bitmap]-[Property...] from the [Insert] menu, to display a dialogused to change the position and size of the bitmap already imported as a backgroundimage.

CancelOK

F120401E.EPS

Background Bitmap Properties

Position(P)

X 0 0Y

Size(S)

489 317

Figure Dialog to Change Attributes of Background Screen Bitmap

SEE ALSO

Since the setting contents are the same as those of the general tab, for the details of setting, see thefollowing:

F12.13.1, “General Tab”

● Delete

▼ Deleting a Background Screen Bitmap

Select [Background Screen Bitmap]-[Delete] on the [Insert] menu to delete the bitmap filealready imported as a background image.


F12-31

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.5 Saving a Graphic Object as a Part>

F12.5 Saving a Graphic Object as a PartIn the Graphic Builder, a portion of existing Graphic windows can be reused bysaving objects as parts. This is called part registration and quotation.

Use the Part window for the part registration and quotation.

In the graphic object part, data such as the graphic modifier condition set in thatobject are saved.

■ Part Window▼ Parts Window

Use the Part window to register parts from or quote parts to the Graphic window that isbeing edited.

Select [Parts...] on the [Insert] menu may call out the Parts window. Clicking the Pats buttonon toolbar may call out the Parts window too.

Parts Window - C:\Parts\Parts01.gpt

F120501E.EPS

123456789

10111213

File Edit

Reactor Model

User Parts01.gptSystemType of Parts File

Figure Image Diagram of the Parts Window


F12-32

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.5 Saving a Graphic Object as a Part>

■ Selecting a Part FileSelect a parts file.

To create a new parts file, choose [User] option on Parts Window, then click [Create New]on [File] menu.

To open an existing parts file, click [Open] on [File] menu, then choose the file to beopened.

■ Part Registration and Re-UtilizationThe part registration and quotation are performed between the Parts window and theGraphic window that is being created. The part names registered in the Parts window areshown in the parts list.

• Part registrationTo register parts in the user part file, select an object to be saved as a part from thegraphic builder, and drag it to the part image display area on the part window.

• Part re-utilizationTo re-utilize a part, drag it from the part image display area on the part window to thegraphic builder.

Background images and softkeys are not saved as parts.

Graphic Builder

F120502E.EPS

Parts Window - C:\Parts\Parts01.gpt

123456789

10111213

File Edit

Reactor Model

User Parts01.gptSystemType of Parts File

Part Quotation

Part Re-utilization

Figure Part Registration and Re-Utilization


F12-33

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.6 External File for Search and Replace>

F12.6 External File for Search and ReplaceThe contents defined on graphic builder such as tag names and data item namescan be exported to an external file.

■ Exporting Data to a File for Search and ReplaceThe contents defined on Graphic Builder can be extracted and then be exported to anexternal file. The file can be edited or modified with a third party application. The modifiedfile can then be imported to the Graphic Builder. With this method, the items defined in theGraphic Builder can be replaced with new contents all together.

The contents defined on the Graphic Builder can be extracted by choosing [External file]→[Export] on [File] menu of the Graphic Builder.

The contents that can be exported to the external file for data replacement are shown asfollows.

Table Defined Contents may be Exported to the File (1/2)

Object Tab Items Extracted Data

Definable object Graphic Modify Conditional expression TagName.DataItem (*1)

Definable object Modify Coordinates X-axis data, Y-axis data TagName.DataItem (*1)

Process data-character Process Data-Character Display Data TagName.DataItem (*1)

Process data-arrow Process Data-Arrow Display Data TagName.DataItem (*1)

Process data-bar Process Data-Bar Display Data TagName.DataItem (*1)

Process data-circle Process Data-Circle Display Data TagName.DataItem (*1)

Line-segment graph Line-segment Graph X-axis data TagName.DataItem (*1)

User-defined line-segment graph User-defined Line-segment Graph X-axis data TagName.DataItem (*1)

Bar graph Bar Graph X-axis data TagName.DataItem (*1)

Step graph Step Graph X-axis data TagName.DataItem (*1)

Radar chart Radar Chart X-axis data TagName.DataItem (*1)

Two-dimentional graph Two-dimentional Graph X-axis data, Y-axis data TagName.DataItem (*1)

Faceplate block button Faceplate Block Button Parameter TagName.DataItem (*1)

Instrument diagram Instrument Diagram Tag Name TagName

Window WindowWindow Name WindowName

Display Conditions TagName.DataItem (*1)

Message MessageParameter ("Tag Name" for "Message Range")

TagName

Dialog name Dialog Name Key ("Tag Name" for "Key Type") TagName

F120601E.EPS

*1: Data can be extracted in the format of UnitName.CommonBlockName.DataItem orBatchID.CommonBlockName.DataItem.TagName.DataItemName[ArrayElement1, ArrayElement2] may also be used for data extraction.


F12-34

IM 33S01B30-01E


Table Defined Contents may be Exported to the File (2/2)

Object Tab Items Extracted Data

Trend Trend

Overview Overview

Touch target, Push button, Soft key and Window link fundtions

Function

TagName.DataItem ("Trend Point" for "Display Type")

Trend Window Name ("Trend Group" for "Display Type")

Tag Name ("Tag Name" for "Type")

Window Name ("Window Name" for "Window Name")

Annunciator Name ("Annunciator" for "Type")

Display data on the second line ("Window Name" or "Annunciator" for "Type)

Parameter ("Call Window" for "Type" and "Graphic" is set for "Window Name")

Data ("Instrument Command Operation", "Call Data Input Dialog", "Call Menu Dialog" or "Data-item dependent Menu Dialog" for "Type)

Conditional Formula ("Instrument Command Operation", "Call Data Input Dialog", "Call Menu Dialog" or "Data-item dependent Menu Dialog" for "Type)

Parameter ("Call Window" for "Type" and "Tuning", "Sequence Table Status Display", "SFC Status Display", Logic Chart Status Display", "Control Drawing Status Display", "SEBOL Status Display" or "Faceplate" for "Window Name")

TagName.DataItem (*1)




WindowName

TagName

WindowName

WindowName

TagName

TagName

F120602E.EPS

*1: Data can be extracted in the format of UnitName.CommonBlockName.DataItem orBatchID.CommonBlockName.DataItem.TagName.DataItemName[ArrayElement1, ArrayElement2] may also be used for data extraction.


F12-35

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Format of External File for Search and Replace

● Format of External File for Search and Replace

The format of the file for searching and replacing data is as follows;

Object Number, Object Type, Data type, Original Data, Convert Data5, Push Button, 1, FIC100.PV, FIC200.PV.. .. .. .. ..

The headings of data columns will be placed into the first line. Then the data of eachcolumn will be placed under their headings.

The file format consists of the following items:

• Object NumberIn the Graphic Builder, each type of object can be identified with a number for internalprocessing. With this number, after the modification of the contents (tag names orwindow names), the objects can be recognized by the Graphic Builder and place themback into their original position.

Nevertheless, the soft keys and the connected windows will be represented by thefollowing strings instead of the symbols displayed on the Graphic Builder.

S1 to S8 : Soft Keys

W1 to W8 : Connected Windows

• Object TypeThe type of each object is indicated by the text such as:

Push Button, Window, Rectangle, Softkey and so on.

• Data TypeThe numbers are used to represent the following data types:

1 : Process Data

2 : Recipe Data (Identified by Unit name)

3 : Recipe Data (Identified by Batch ID)

• Original DataThe data extracted to each corresponding Object Number, such as the tag names orwindow names defined on the Graphic Builder.

• Convert DataThe data for replacing the Original Data. The data are user defined.

When exporting the contents from Graphic Builder for searching and replacing data,the same data extracted for Original Data will be placed to the column for ConvertData.

With the file for searching and replacing data, the tag names and window names defined ina Graphic Builder can be replaced with new names all together. An example shown belowexplains the most general method of searching and replacing data.


F12-36

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Global Replacement of Extracted data

The extracted data for their corresponding objects can be globally replaced with substitutedata.

The first, to extract the data from the Graphic Builder then export the data into a file. Anexample of the file for the extracted data is as follows:

Object Number, Object Type, Data type, Original Data, Convert Data

5, Push Button, 1, FIC100.PV, FIC100.PV

18, Window, GR0001, GR0001

Using Microsoft Excel to open the above data file, it displays as follows:

F120603E.EPS

A B C D E

1

2

3

Object Number

5

18

Object Type

Push Button

Window

Data Type

1

Original Data

FIC100. PV

GR0001

Convert Data

FIC100. PV

GR0001

Figure File with Extracted Data Opened by Microsoft Excel

The data in the column of Covert Data can be modified to replace the data in the column ofOriginal Data. After modifying the file, the data on the Graphic Builder such as tag names orwindow names will be replaced by the data in the column of Covert Data when importingthe file.

● Replacing the common part of Strings

In the following example, the common part in the extracted strings (Tag names or windownames) may be replaced all together.

F120604E.EPS

A B C D E

1

2

3

Object Number

5

5

Object Type

Push Button

Push Button

Data Type

1

1

Original Data

FIC100. PV

FIC100. MV

Convert Data

FIC200. PV

FIC200. MV

Globally replace FIC100 with FIC200

Figure Replacing the Common Part of Extracted Strings

In the above case, a part of the string is designated as the search string, a string can bedefined as the substitute string. Thus, the common part of strings will all be replaced withthe designated substitute string.

F120605E.EPS

A B C D E

1

2

Object Number

5

Object Type

Push Button

Data Type

1

Original Data

FIC100

Convert Data

FIC200

Only the string for replacement is specified

Figure Designating Common Part Search and Substitute Strings


F12-37

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Replacing the Common Part of Extracted Strings in Multiple Objects

In the following example, the common part of the extracted strings (Tag names or windownames) in multiple objects may be replaced all together.

F120606E.EPS

A B C D E

1

2

3

Object Number

5

9

Object Type

Push Button

Rectangle

Data Type

1

1

Original Data

FIC100. PV

FIC100. PV

Convert Data

FIC200. PV

4 S1 Softkey 1 FIC100. PV FIC200. PV

FIC200. PV

Globally replace FIC100 with FIC200 in Multiple Objects

Figure Replacing the Common Part of Extracted Strings in Multiple Objects

In the above case, placing a wild card (*) in the column of Object Number and designatingthe common part as the search string then designate a substitute string. Thus, the commonpart of strings in multiple objects will all be replaced with the designated substitute string.

F120607E.EPS

A B C D E

1

2

Object Number

*

Object Type Data Type

1

Original Data

FIC100. PV

Convert Data

FIC200. PV

Search for a string and its replacement

Use a wild card (*) to represent the object numbers.

Figure Search and Replace Strings in Multiple Objects

With this, the string replacement can be performed in multiple builder files.

■ Precautions when Editing the File for Search and ReplaceWhen editing the file of extracted data for search and replace, the following points need tobe dealt with carefully. Otherwise, when importing the edited file to the Graphic Builder,abnormalities may occur.

● Designated Substitute String may be Ignored when Importing the File

Under the following circumstances, the designated substitute string may be ignored so asthe designated string may not be replaced when the file is used for converting the graphicbuilder file. At the same time, a waning message may be displayed in message area.

• In the file, substitute string is not in the same format of the search string.For an example, if the substitute string is in the format UNIT.TAG.ITEM, it will notagree with the data type 1 of the search string.

• The Graphic Builder does not have the corresponding object specified by the objectnumber in the imported file.

• When the length of the substitute string exceeds limit.For an example, when a substitute string for replacing tag names has more than 16letters.

• When the substitute string is not in correct format.For examples, when a substitute string is written in double byte characters for replac-ing tag name FIC100, or when the data item in the substitute string is not in the sameformat for replacing the data items PV01 to PV99 of a faceplate block.


F12-38

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Items not be checked by Graphic Builder

When importing the file for replacing strings in a Graphic Builder, the following items in thefile will not be checked by the Graphic Builder.

• Object TypeFor an example, a substitute string for replacing string of Push Button, the GraphicBuilder will replace the designated without checking if the object is a Push Button ornot as long as the object number is agreed.

• Format of Window Names

● Searching and Replacing Rules

When importing the file for searching and replacing strings in a Graphic Builder, the file willbe executed line by line to search all objects in the Graphic Builder for the strings.

An example of searching and replacing strings is shown as follows:

In an object with object number 1 has the following two expressions of conditional modifier.

FIC100. PV > 0

FIC200. PV > 0

The searching and replacing strings are designated as following in the file for replacing thetwo expressions.

F120608E.EPS

A B C D E

1

2

3

Object Number

5

5

Object Type

Push Button

Push Button

Data Type

1

1

Original Data

FIC100. PV

FIC200. PV

Convert Data

FIC200. PV

FIC300. PV

Figure Strings for Searching and Replacing

The result of searching and replacing the two expressions will be as follows:

FIC300. PV > 0

FIC300. PV > 0


F12-39

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.7 Creating a New Graphic Window>

F12.7 Creating a New Graphic WindowSystem View allows the creation of a Graphic window for a selected HIS in the datatree.

To create a new Graphic window, set in the Create New Window dialog box the typeand name of a window, a window operation and monitoring message, and scaling.

■ Create New Window Dialog BoxWith a WINDOW folder under any HIS folder selected, select [Create New...] - [Window]from the [File] menu to display the Create New Window dialog box used to create a newGraphic window.

The Create New Window dialog box consists of the Type tab and the Set Details tab.


F12-40

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.7.1 Type TabThe Type tab is used to set a type, a name, a help message number, and a commentfor a window.

■ Setup Items on the Type TabThis section explains setup items on the Type tab of the Create New Window dialog box.

F120701E.EPS

Cancel

Revert to initial value

OK

Create New Window

Type Set Details

Window Type Graphic

Window Name GR0002

Help Message Number

Window Comment

Figure Type Tab of the Create New Window Dialog Box


F12-41

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Window Type

Type of window may be specified.

The default setting for type of windows is graphic. The previous settings are stored in thecombo box.

SEE ALSO

For details on windows’ type, see the following:

E2.1, “System Windows and User-Defined Windows”

● Window Name

Up to 16 alphanumeric characters may be used to define the name of a window.

SEE ALSO

For details on window names, see the following:

F2.1, “Names”

● Help Message Number

A help message number may be specified.

SEE ALSO

For details on the help message number, see the following:

“■ Help Messages” in E11.1, “Message Types”

● Window Comment

Up to 24 alphanumeric (or 12 double-byte) characters may be set as a window comment.

SEE ALSO

For details on window comment, see the following:

F2.2, “Comment”


F12-42

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.7.2 Set Details TabThe Set Details tab is used to set a window operation and monitoring message, andscaling.

■ Setup Items on the Set Details TabThis section explains setup items on the Set Details tab of the Create New Window dialogbox.

F120702E.EPS

Cancel

Revert to initial value

OK

Create New Window

Type Set Details

Without Scaling

Window Operation and Monitoring Message General Window

Window Operation and Monitoring Message

Figure Set Details Tab of the Create New Window Dialog Box

● Authority to Monitor Window Operation

There are the following three types of authorities in monitoring window operations:

• General window

• Important window

• System operation window

SEE ALSO

For the authority to monitor window operation, see the following:

F9.3, “Privilege Level”


F12-43

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Scaling

To cancel scaling, check the “Without Scaling” check box.

Without scaling, a window is displayed in the window size of the builder.

With scaling, delicate adjustment of objects may be difficult. Displaying an object includingrectangle and text, for example, may cause displacement of their positions because differ-ent rates of scaling apply to the rectangle and text.

Scaling is applied at the default.

SEE ALSO

For more information on scaling, see the following:

F12.1.4, “Calculating Graphic Window Display Size”


F12-44

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.8 List of Graphic Builder Menus>

F12.8 List of Graphic Builder Menus▼ Menu List

The Graphic Builder menu bar contains the following nine menus:

• File

• Edit

• View

• Insert

• Format

• Tool

• Draw

• Window

• Help

This section explains the functions of each menu.

■ Graphic Builder File Menu

Table Function Overview of [File] Menu

Menu Function

Create New Opens a new document window.

Open ... Opens an editor file.

Close Closes an active document window.


Save As ... Saves the contents under a different file name.

External File

Create Working File

Default ... Reads a default file.

Creates a work file.

Import ...

Export ...

Imports an external file.

Export graphic builder configuration to an external file.

Import CS source file ...

Setting Data

Screen Image

Imports a CS source file.

Properties Displays the property sheet of a file.

Print PreviewDisplays a print preview of printout.

Displays a print preview of data set in objects.

Print ... Executes printing.

Download Downloads to HIS.

Exit Graphic Definition Builder Exits the graphic builder.

F120801E.EPS


F12-45

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Graphic Builder Edit Menu▼ Find, Find Next

Table Function Overview of [Edit] Menu

Menu Function

Undo Cancels the previous edit operation.

Cut Deletes the selected objects and stores them on clipboard.

Copy Stores the selected objects on clipboard.

Paste Extracts the data stored on clipboard.

Delete Deletes the selected objects.

Selection Mode Sets the mode in which objects can be selected.

Edit Point Sets the mode in which a point of an object can be modified.

Select All Selects all objects.

Deselect All Deselects all the selected objects.

Find ... (*1) Searches for an object by a given string or object number.

Find Next (*1) Continue to search for the same item.

F120802E.EPS

*1: The objects and functions that can not be selected are searched. The objects of soft-keys, functions linked to windowsand elements of linked parts will be searched.

● Details of [Find] Menu

Clicking [Find] on the menu, the [Find] dialog box displays. The [Find] program searches forthe designated string throughout the texts of all primitive objects and mark the object thatcontains the designated string. A substitute string can be designated to replace thesearched string. Asterisk character (*) can not be used as wildcard. However, the charac-ters contained in a string can be used as searching condition. If a primitive object uses thespecified characters in the settings, the corresponding objects are picked up as thesearched matches.

• Items to searchWhen searching for a string, [Find] will search all the items that can be exported to anexternal file as well as the settings for the following items of primitive objects.

- Text: Characters of the text

- Rectangle, Sector, Circle and all process data bars: High/Low limits

- Line segment graph, User-defined line segment graph, Bar graph, Step graph, Radar chart and all other graphs: High/Low limits

- Two-dimensional graph: High/Low limits of X-axis and Y-axis

- Pushbutton: Label character string

- Message: Parameters

- Overview: Data displayed on the second line: Settings on [Function] tab

- Dialog Name: Key

- Touch Target, Pushbutton: Settings on [Function] tab

SEE ALSO

For more information about exporting to an external file, see the following:

F12.6, “External File for Search and Replace”


F12-46

IM 33S01B30-01E


• Search OrderThe search order is determined by system. Selecting a certain objects on the graphicwindow does not change the search order and does not make the search start fromthe selected objects.

• Selected StateWhen [Find] searches a primitive object and found the searched string, the objectturns to selected state. If the searched string is found in a object for a number of times,the object will be kept in the selected state for the same number of times of search,then move to the next object.

For an example:If two conditional formulas “if FIC100.PV > 50.0 then color changes to red” and “ifFIC200.PV > 50.0 then color changes to red” are set in a circle primitive, whensearching for [FIC] string, this circle primitive will be made twice into selected state.

• Find and ReplaceThe string can be replaced with another, in the graphic object by performing Find. Ifarbitrarily replace an object, the error my occur, indicted by an error dialog box. Sothat it is recommend performing Find before replacing an object.

• Error Processing when Replace StringsWhen replacing strings, it may cause a syntax error. In this case, a dialog box appearswith a message indicating that the string can not be replaced. When [Replace All] isrunning, a dialog box for choosing to abort or to continue appears. Click [OK], thesearch continues while click [No], the search for the string aborts. An instance thattriggers syntax error is shown as follows.

Example:FIC100.PV is set as the displayed data (process data). When a command of replacingFIC100.PV with FIC100 is running, a syntax error occurs since it removes the “.PV”from whole string, as a result.

■ Graphic Builder View Menu

Table Function Overview of [View] Menu

Menu Function

Zoom In Enlarges display area.

Zoom Out Reduces display area.

Zoom Area Enlarges specific area.

Whole Page Enlarges or reduces the display area automatically so that theentire drawing area is displayed.

Display Foreground Image Displays/hides the foreground image.

Display Background Screen Displays/hides the background image.

Redraw Performs redrawing.

Display Object Number Displays the object number.

Toolbar ... Opens a dialog for customizing display methods of toolbars.

Status Bar Switches the status bar display.

Ruler Switches the ruler display.

Message Display Area Switches message area display between on and off.

F120803E.EPS


F12-47

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Graphic Builder Insert Menu

Table Function Overview of [Insert] Menu

Menu Function

Menu Function

Diagram (P) ... Imports diagrams such as bitmap from an external source.

Parts ... Starts the parts window.

Linked Part ... Starts the linked part window.

Pen Selects the pen tool.

Line

Straight Line Draws a straight line.

Polyline Draws a polyline.

Arc Draws an arc.

Graphic

Rectangle Draws a rectangle.

Circle Draws a circle with a specified radius.

Ellipse Draws an ellipse.

Sector Draws a sector.

Fill Area Draws a fill area

Marker Draws a marker.

Text Draws text.

DataDisplay

Process Data-Character Draws a process data character display object.

DataBarDisplay

Rectangular Bar Draws a rectangular bar object.

Arrow Bar Draws an arrow bar object.

Circular Bar Draws a circular bar object.

DisplayDataGraph

User-defined line-segment graph

Draws a user-defined line-segment graph object.

Bar Graph Draws a bar graph object.

Line-segment Graph Draws a line segment graph object.

Step Graph Draws a step graph object.

Radar Chart Draws a radar chart object.

Two-dimensional Graph (X)

Draws a two-dimensional graph object.

F120804E.EPS

Button

Touch Target Draws a touch target object.

Push Button Draws a push button object.

Faceplate Block Button Draws a faceplate block button.

Instrument Diagram Draws an instrument diagram.

Window Draws a window object.

Message Draws a message object.

Dialog Name Draws a dialog name object.

Trend Draws a trend object.

Control Inserts a control object.

Overview Draws an overview object.

Soft Key ... Sets up a soft key.

BackgroundScreen Bitmap

Import ... Imports a bitmap file.

Delete Deletes an imported file.

Properties ... Sets properties for the imported file.


F12-48

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Graphic Builder Format Menu

Table Function Overview of [Format] Menu

Menu Function

General ... Starts the object’s general tab.

Line ... Starts the tab that specifies lines in the object.

Fill ... Starts the tab that specifies fill in the object.

Text ... Starts the tab that specifies text in the object.

Modify ... Starts the tab that specifies modifier in the object.

Default ... Starts the tab that specifies defaults for the object.

Copy Modify Copies the graphic modifier setting of the selected object.

Paste Modify ConditionPastes the graphic modifier setting that is copied onto theselected object.

F120805E.EPS

■ Graphic Builder Tool Menu

Table Function Overview of [Tool] Menu

Menu Function

Debug ... Executes debugging.

Tag/Window Name List ... Displays the tag/window selection dialog.

Create Default File ... Creates a user-defined default file.

Delete Default File ... Deletes a user-defined default file.

Options ...Displays the option property sheet that sets operatingenvironment of the graphic builder.

F120806E.EPS

Graphic Utility Preferences of graphic builder

■ Graphic Builder Draw Menu

Table Function Overview of [Draw] Menu

Menu Function

Grid Option... Specifies grid option.

Object Order

Bring to Front Moves the selected object to the very top.

Send to Back Moves the selected object to the very bottom.

Bring Forward Moves up the selected object by one layer.

Bring Backward Moves down the selected object by one layer.

Arrange Objects ... Opens a dialog for aligning selected objects.

Rearrange Objects ... Opens a dialog for arranging the selected objects evenly.

Group Groups the selected objects.

Ungroup Ungroups the selected objects.

InvertHorizontal Displays the selected object horizontally in reverse.

Vertical Displays the selected object vertically in reverse.

Rotate

Rotate 90 Degrees Counterclockwise

Rotates the selected object 90 degrees to the left.

Rotate 90 Degrees Clockwise

Rotates the selected object 90 degrees to the right.

F120807E.EPS


F12-49

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Graphic Builder Window Menu

Table Function Overview of [Window] Menu

Menu Function

New Window Opens the currently open file as a new document window.

Cascade Displays all currently open windows stacked and offset.

Tile HorizontallyAdjusts each document window size so that all open documentwindows are displayed side by side.

Tile VerticallyAdjusts each document window size so that all open documentwindows are displayed one above the other.

Arrange Icons Displays document window icons aligned.

Document Window Title Displays a title list of the currently open document windows.

F120808E.EPS

■ Graphic Builder Help Menu

Table Function Overview of [Help] Menu

Menu Function

Using On-line Manual ... Starts the on-line manual.

Engineering Operation Manual ... Displays the engineering operation manual. (*1)

Builder Definition Items ... Displays a list of builder definition items.

Reference Index ... Displays the reference information.

Version Information ... Displays the version information.

F120809E.EPS

*1: Not activate on product control builder.


F12-50

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.9 Graphic Builder Toolbar List>

F12.9 Graphic Builder Toolbar List▼ Toolbar List

The Graphic Builder contains the following five types of toolbars:

• Standard

• Draw

• HIS Functions

• Format

• Edit Object

• Part

The following shows tool functions of each toolbar.

■ Graphic Builder Standard Toolbar

Table Standard Toolbar Tool List (1/2)

Button Tool Function


Create Working File Creates a work file.

Print

Screen Image Print Preview

Starts printing.

Setting Data Print Preview Displays the print preview of data set for objects.

Displays the print preview of printout.

Debug Executes debugging.

Cut Deletes the selected objects and stores them on clipboard.

Copy Stores the selected objects on clipboard.

Paste Extracts the data stored on clipboard.

Copy Modify Copies the graphic modifier setting of the selected object.

Paste Modify Pastes the graphic modifier setting that is copied onto the selected object.

F120901E.EPS


F12-51

IM 33S01B30-01E


Table Standard Toolbar Tool List (2/2)

100%

Function

F120902E.EPS

Button Tool

Undo Cancels the previous edit operation.

Switches the grid display between on and off.

Snap to grid

Grid

Switches the snap to grid setting between on and off.

Zoom In Enlarges the display area.

Zoom Out Reduces the display area.

Area Zoom Enlarges a specific area.

Specify Zoom Size Specifies the size of display area.


F12-52

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Graphic Builder Draw Toolbar

Table Draw Toolbar Tool List

*****


Select Mode Sets the mode in which objects can be selected.

Point Correction Enters the point correction mode.

Pen Selects the pen tool.

Straight Line Draws a straight line.

Polyline Draws a polyline.

Arc Draws an arc.

Rectangle Draws a rectangle.

Fill Area Draws a fill area.

Circle Draws a circle with a specified radius.

Ellipse Draws an ellipse.

Sector Draws a sector.

Marker Draws a marker.

Text Draws text.

F120903E.EPS


F12-53

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Graphic Builder HIS Functions Toolbar

Table HIS Functions Toolbar Tool List (1/2)

0.0


Process Data-Character Draws a data character display object.

Process Data-Bar Draws a rectangle data bar object.

Process Data-Arrow Draws an arrow data bar object.

Process Data-Circle Draws a circle data bar object.

Line-segment Graph Draws a line-segment object.

User-defined Line-segment Graph Object

Draws a user-defined line-segment graph object.

Bar Graph Draws a bar graph object.

Step Graph Draws a step graph object.

Radar Chart Draws a radar chart object.

Two-dimensional Graph Draws a two-dimensional graph object.

Touch Target Draws a touch target object.

F120904E.EPS


F12-54

IM 33S01B30-01E


Table HIS Functions Toolbar Tool List (2/2)

F


Push button Draws a push button object.

Faceplate Draws a faceplate block button.

Instrument Diagram Draws an instrument diagram.

Window Draws a window display object.

Message Draws a message object.

Dialog Name Draws a dialog object.

Trend Draws a trend object.

Control Inserts an ActiveX control object.

Overview Draws an overview object.

F120905E.EPS


F12-55

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Graphic Builder Format Toolbar

Table Format Toolbar Tool List

MS Gothic

10


Font Type Selects font type of text.

Font Size Selects font size of text.

Bold Displays text in boldface.

Italic Displays text in italics.

Underline Underlines text.

Text Color Displays the menu from which a text color is selected.

Fill Color Displays the menu from which a fill color is selected.

Line Color Displays the menu from which a line color is selected.

Line Type Displays the menu from which a line type is selected.

Line Thickness Displays the menu from which thickness of a line is selected.

Line EndDisplays the menu from which items such as directions of arrows areselected.

Properties Displays the property sheet of the selected object.

F120906E.EPS


F12-56

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Graphic Builder Edit Object Toolbar

Table Edit Object Toolbar Tool List


Align Opens a dialog for aligning the selected objects.

Distribute Opens a dialog for arranging the selected objects evenly.

Group Groups the selected objects.

Ungroup Ungroups the selected group objects.

Bring to Front Moves the selected object to the very top.

Send to Back Moves the selected object to the very bottom.

Bring Forward Moves up the selected object by one layer.

Flip Horizontally Flips the currently selected object horizontally.

Send Backward Moves down the selected object by one layer.

Flip Vertically Flips the currently selected object vertically.

Rotate 90 degreescounterclockwise

Rotates the selected object 90 degrees to the left.

Rotate 90 degreesclockwise

Rotates the selected object 90 degrees to the right.

F120907E.EPS

■ Parts Toolbar on Graphic Builder

Table Parts Toolbar Tool List

F120908E.EPS


Parts Starts the parts windows

Linked Part Starts the linked part windows


F12-57

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.10 Setting Properties for Files>

F12.10 Setting Properties for FilesThe file property sheet is used to set the type, the display size, the refresh cycle, andthe background color for a Graphic window, and to bind a graphic generic name andthe window linked function.

■ File Property SheetThe property sheet of the file being edited via the Graphic Builder is displayed by selecting[Properties] from the [File] menu of the Graphic Builder.

The file property sheet consists of the following four types of tabs.

• Outline tabTab used to display a file name, a project name, file creation date/time, and updatedate/time. The user does not need to set these items.

• Attribute tabTab used to display or set properties related to the windows

• Data Bind tabTab used to set the Set name and comment, Generic name and data bound to thegraphic generic name.

• Window Linked Function tabTab used to set functions to be executed by linking with Graphic windows

The attribute tab, data bind tab and window linked function tab are specific to the GraphicBuilder.


F12-58

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.10.1 Attribute TabBasic attributes related to the windows, panel update interval, and background colorare set in the attribute tab.

■ Attribute Tab Setup ItemsThis section explains setup items for the attribute tab of the file property sheet.

F121001E.EPS

CloseOK

Outline Window Linked Function

File Properties

Attribute Data Bind

Size

Panel Type Graphic Window

Small Large

800 536

Screen Refresh Period

Window Background

Multiple

�

Black

1

Figure Attribute Tab


F12-59

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Panel Type

▼ Panel Type

These are the types of windows displayed. They include three types of windows: [Graphicwindow], [Overview window], and [Control window].

● Window Size

▼ Size

The size of new graphic windows can be set in dot units, using a slider. The followingshows the selection of sizes.

• 1600�1072

• 1280�858

• 1024�686 (Default)

• 800�536

• 640�429

When setting the window to a user defined size, the number of vertical pixels and horizontalpixels can be set using the spin boxes.

The setting values can also be directly entered to the boxes.

One screen can display total of 3,686,400 pixels. (*1)

*1: 1280 � 720 (pixels) � 4 (windows)

SEE ALSO

For more information on setting the window size, see the following:

F12.1, “Optimizing Graphic Window Display Size”

● Screen Refresh Cycle

▼ Screen Refresh Period

This is the interval at which the entire graphic window display is updated. The unit forupdate intervals is a multiple of the basic update cycle unit (1 Sec.) for HIS operation andmonitoring windows. The default setting is the same as the basic update cycle unit.

● Window Background Color

▼ Window Background Color

This is the background color used when displaying Graphic windows. The backgroundcolor set here is also used in the work areas of the Graphic Builder. Choose one color from256-color palette for the background color.

SEE ALSO

For the setting to import a bitmap image in the background, see the following:

F12.4, “Importing a Bitmap File into the Graphic Window”


F12-60

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.10.2 Data Bind Tab - File PropertiesOn the Data Bind tab, the Set of generic names, the generic names and bindings canbe defined. There are two types of Data Bind, one is in File’s Properties sheet whilethe other is in Object’s Properties strip. This section will explain the Data Bind in theFile’s Properties strip.

SEE ALSO

For more information about Data Bind in Object’s Properties strip, see the following:

F12.13.46, “Data Bind Tab - Object Properties”

■ Data Bind Tab SettingSetting on Data Bind tab of File Properties dialog box are explained.

CloseOK


F121002E.EPS

File Properties

Attribute Data Bind

Set generic name

Set No. 1

Comment

Set

Generic Name Initial value

Export

Type Object Na. . . Coord. . . Gener. . . Initial valu

Set Default Generic Name

Import

List View

Figure Data Bind Tab

The list view displays a list of the generic names used in the window of the builder file beingedited.

● Generic Name Set

▼ Set No., Set Name, Comment

This sets the set name, set number and comment for graphic generic name set.

Set number can be defined in the range of 1 to 200, For the set name, up to 16 alphanu-meric characters can be used.

For the comment, up to 30 alphanumeric or 15 double-byte characters can be used.


F12-61

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Import

▼ Import

This reads the data file created in the CSV file format. The data file can be specified in thefile selection dialog displayed by clicking on the [Import] button.

When reading a generic name set data file, it will replace the currently used generic nameset data and do the following:

• Among “generic names” set for the generic name set data file, only those that match“generic names” currently registered in the builder file are read.

• If any data has an invalid format, only the preceding data are read. For example, if “thenumber of generic names” set for the generic name set data file does not match thatof data items, data before “the number of generic names” are read.

• If multiple generic name sets are designated as a default generic name set, the lastgeneric name set is read as a default generic name set.

• If one generic name set has multiple identical generic names with different initialvalues set for them, the first initial value is read.

The generic name set data file is read as follows:

F121003E.EPS

0, set 01, information on binding imported set 01, 1, 6,, $TAG01, IMPFIC100, , $ITEM01, IMPPV, , $DATA01, IMP100, , $TAG02, IMPFIC200, , $ITEM02, IMPPVI, , $DATA02, IMP200, 1, set 02, information on binding imported set 02, 1, 7,, $TAG01, IMPFIC500, , $ITEM01, IMPPV02, , $DATA03, , , $TAG03, , , $ITEM03, , , $DATA03, , , $TAG01, IMPFIC400, 2, set 03, information on binding imported set 03, 0, 5,, $TAG01, IMPFIC300, , $ITEM01, IMPPID, , $DATA01, IMP300, , $TAG02, , , $ITEM02, IMPPV03, , $DATA02, IMP600,

*1: This data is not read because it is not registered as a generic name.

Duplicate data

(*1)

The numbers of data items do not match.

Up to this data item are read.

1 Set 01

Informationon bindingimportedset 01



$TAG01$ITEM01$DATA01$TAG02$ITEM02$DATA02

Genericname setnumber

Setname Comment Generic

name Initial value

IMPFIC100IMPPVIMP100IMPFIC200IMPPVIIMP200

2(*2)

Set 02


IMPFIC500IMPPV02

3 Set 03


IMPFIC300IMPPIDIMP300

IMPPVI03

Generic name set in CSV file format Definition Contents on the Data Binding Tab

*2: Designated as a default generic name set

Figure Reading Generic Name Set Data File


F12-62

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Export

▼ Export

This exports the generic name set data in the CSV file format. The data file can be specifiedin the file selection dialog displayed by clicking on the [Export] button.

The generic name set data is written in the format as shown below:

Generic name set number, set name, comment, default generic name set information, number of generic names,, generic name, initial value,, generic name, initial value,, generic name, initial value,, generic name, initial value, • • •, generic name, initial value,Generic name set number, set name, comment, default generic name set information, number of generic names,, generic name, initial value,, generic name, initial value,, generic name, initial value,, generic name, initial value, • • •, generic name, initial value, • • •

This process is repeated the number of times equal to the number of graphic generic namesregistered.

This process is repeated the number of times equal to the number of generic name sets registered.

F121004E.EPS

Figure Generic Name Set Data Format

The table below shows the components of the generic name set data written:

Table Components of the Generic Name Set Data Written

F121005E.EPS

Components Explanation

Generic name set number

Indicates the generic name set number for which an initial value is registered.The generic name set number to be written is “the registered generic name set number - 1.”

Set name Indicates the set name registered.

Comment Indicates the set comment registered.

Default generic name set information

Indicates whether the generic name set is set as a default generic name set.If set as a default generic name set, 1 is written. Otherwise 0 is written.

Number of generic names Indicates the number of graphic generic names registered.

Generic name Indicates the graphic generic name registered.This is not written if the system-fixed graphic generic name is designated.

Initial value Indicates the initial value registered.


F12-63

IM 33S01B30-01E


The generic name set data is written as follows:

F121006E.EPS


Setname Comment Generic

name Initial value

FIC100PV100FIC200SV200


1 Set 01

Information on binding imported set 01



2 Set 02

3(*1) Set 03


FIC300PV300

Genericname setnumber

0, set 01, information on binding imported set 01, 0, 6,, $TAG01, FIC100, , $ITEM01, PV, , $DATA01, 100, , $TAG02, FIC200, , $ITEM02, SV, , $DATA02, 200, 1, set 02, information on binding imported set 02, 0, 6,, $TAG01, , , $ITEM01, , , $DATA01, , , $TAG02, , , $ITEM02, , , $DATA02, , 2, set 03, information on binding imported set 03, 1, 6,, $TAG01, FIC300, , $ITEM01, PV, , $DATA01, 300, , $TAG02, , , $ITEM02, , , $DATA02, ,

Generic name set in CSV file formatDefinition Contents on the Data Binding Tab

*1: Designated as a default generic name set

Figure Writing Generic Name Set Data

● Generic Name

▼ Generic Name

The graphic generic name selected in the list view will be displayed. The selected graphicgeneric name can be changed, except for the generic name of the system-specific windowand the generic name of the object whose property sheet is defined with [Set an IndividualGeneric].

When a graphic generic name is changed, whether the new name is defined within 16alphanumeric characters including underscore ( _ ) and hyphen (-) and whether it beginswith “$” are checked.

When the setting for the graphic generic name is changed, the setting for correspondingobjects will be changed automatically.

● Binding of Graphic Generic Name

▼ Binding

The binding of the graphic generic name selected in list view can be defined except for thegeneric name of the system-specific window and the generic name of the object whoseproperties sheet is defined with [Set an Individual Generic].

The length of the graphic generic name will be checked for not exceeding 200 bytes.

One generic name can be bound with different variants in accordance with different graphicgeneric name sets.


F12-64

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Set Default Generic Name

▼ Set as Default Generic Name

A selected graphic generic name set may be specified as the default generic name set.

When a graphic window is started, if the arguments for the generic name set is omitted, thedefault generic name set will be used. In the case that the default generic name set is notdefined, the name set with the smallest number is taken as the initial generic name set.


F12-65

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.10.3 Window Linked Function TabThe window linked function tab is used to enable the function of executing assignedfunctions and its timing.

■ Window Linked Function Tab Setup ItemsThis section explains setup items for the window linked function tab of the file property sheet.

CloseOK

Function Definition


F121007E.EPS

File Properties

Attribute Data Bind

No

Function Window calling button

1

Start Exit

Execution timingChange

Delete

12345678

FunctionNo Execution timing

List view

Figure Window Linked Function Tab

The list view displays the function numbers, execution timings, and assigned functionscurrently specified for the window linked function.

● Function Number

▼ No.

This is the number to assign to a function to be executed. Select from numbers 1 to 8 byusing the spin box.

● Execution Timing

▼ Execution Timing

This is the timing to execute the assigned function. Selected the execution timing fromdisplay start or display end of Graphic windows.

● Assigning Functions

▼ Function

This sets the assigning function. Functions used in softkeys and touch target can be set onthis tab, as well.

The assigning function is set using the dialog displayed when the [Function Definition]button is pressed.

SEE ALSO

The setting contents are the same as those set in the function tab. For details, see the following:

F12.13.19, “Function Tab”


F12-66

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.11 Setting the Options>

F12.11 Setting the OptionsThe option dialog box is used to set the Graphic Builder’s operating environment,such as the properties that are used to create a new object. The Options dialog boxconsists of the Options and Debug tabs. The Options dialog box can be displayed byselecting [Options] from the [Tool] menu of the Graphic Builder.

This section explains setup items for each tab of the Options dialog box.

■ Option Dialog Box (Option)

CancelOK

F121101E.EPS

Options

Check if tag/window name exist when saving.

Maximum levels of [Undo]. 5

Property During Draw

Default Properties

Previous Property

Double Click

Open Property Sheet

Start change processing

Options Debug

Figure Option Tab


F12-67

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Checking the Tag Name/Window Name when Saving

▼ Check if Tag/Window Name Exist when Saving

When saving a file, the system checks whether or not a tag name or window name linkedwith an object on the graphic window exists, and determines whether or not to display theresult in the message area.

If the tag name or the window name linked with the object does not exist, such objects willnot properly function on the graphic windows.

● Draw Property

▼ Property During Draw

This is the setting for property values used to create a new graphic object.

Select one of the following.

• Default property value

• Property value when the previous graphic object was created.

● Double-Click Operation

▼ Double Click

This is the setting for operation when an object is double-clicked.

Select either one of the following.

• Open the property setting menu dialog box for the double-clicked object.

• Start point correction of the double-clicked object.

● Maximum Number of Valid “Undo” Operations

▼ Maximum Levels of [Undo].

Set the number of times to undo the most recent actions by selecting the [Undo] on the editmenu bar or standard tool bar. The maximum number of times that can be set for valid“undo” operations is five.


F12-68

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Option Dialog Box (Debug)

CancelOK

F121102E.EPS

Options

Window Size

Parameter

Specify Window Size

DebugOptions

Large Size

Figure Debug Tab

● Specifying Window Size

▼ Specify Window Size

Set whether the size of the debug window is specified or not.

● Window Size

Specify the size of the graphic window to start up.

Select one from [Large Size], [Medium Size], [Special Size].

● Parameter

▼ Parameter

Specify the parameter to be passed to the graphic window by start command. Limited to2000 byte.


F12-69

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.12 Tools Used to Create and Edit Graphic Objects>

F12.12 Tools Used to Create and Edit GraphicObjectsThe Graphic Builder provides specific tools to create and edit graphic objects thatcompose a Graphic window.

■ List of Tools to Create Objects

F121201E.EPS

0.0

*****

A

F

ButtonButton Button

Process Data-Arrow

Select Mode

Point Correction

Pen

Straight line

Polyline

Arc

Rectangle

Fill area

Circle

Ellipse

Sector

Marker

Text

Process Data-character

Process Data-Bar

Process Data-Circle

User-defined Line- segment Graph

Line-Segment graph

Bar Graph

Step Graph

Radar Chart

Overview

Control

Two-dimensional graph

Touch target

Push Button

Faceplate

Instrument Diagram

Window

Message

Dialog Name

Trend

ToolToolTool

Figure List of Tools


F12-70

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.1 Selecting the ObjectsThe selection tool is used to select the graphic object.

■ Selection Mode▼ Select Mode

To switch to the selection mode, perform any one of the operations described below:

• Select [Selection Mode] from the [Edit] menu.

• Select [Select All] from the [Edit] menu.

• Select [Find...] from the [Edit] menu.

• Select the [Select Mode] button from the draw toolbar.

• Select [Selection Mode] from the pop-up menu by clicking the right mouse button inthe document window.

• Double-click in the area with no objects. (*1)

• Press the [ESC] key. (*1)

*1: Some type of object do not support this operation.

When an object is selected in the selection mode, the selected object is surrounded by thehandles.

F121202E.EPS

1 dimensional graphic 2 dimensional graphic Multiple objects

Figure Selected Objects

When the cursor is positioned over a handle, the cursor shape changes as shown below,enabling the handle to be selected.

F121203E.EPS

Figure Change in the Shape of Cursor

Dragging the handle changes the size of an object.

The selected object can be copied by just dragging it, or dragging it while holding down the[Ctrl] key.


F12-71

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.2 Modifying the ObjectsTo add, move or delete the point of an object, use the point modification tool.

■ Modifying an Object▼ Point Correction

To use the point modification tool, perform one of the following operations after selecting anobject.

• Select [Edit Point] from the [Edit] menu.

• Select [Point Correction] button from the draw tool bar.

• Select [Edit Point] from the pop-up menu displayed by clicking the right mouse buttonafter selecting an object.

• Double-click the object. (Only when the double-click operation is specified to “StartChange Processing” via the [Options] Dialog box called up from the [Tools] menu.)

Perform one of the above operations, to edit the object by selecting the points of an object.

At this time, the handles change as follows.

F121204E.EPS

handle

point

Figure Change in the Handles

When the cursor is positioned over the handle, it changes the shape as shown in the figurebelow, enabling the handle to be selected.

F121205E.EPS



F12-72

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Add, Delete and Move a PointAfter selecting an object and put it into Edit Point mode, clicking the right button of mousewill pop-up an menu in which Add, Delete or Move a point can be chosen. The Edit Pointfunctions differently for different types of object.

Table Point Modification for Each Type of Object

Graphic primitive type Add Move Delete

Straight line � � �

Arc - � -

Polyline � � �

Rectangle � � �

Circle/ellipse - - -

Sector - � -

Marker - - -

Text - - -

Pen � � �

F121206E.EPS

Exit Point Editing

Add

Delete

MoveF121207E.EPS

Figure Edit Point Pop-up Menu


F12-73

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Add Point

On the pop-up menu opened by clicking the right mouse button, choose [Add], Add Pointmode will be activated.

In the Add Point mode, click a spot on a line of the object, a new point will be added to theposition.

TIP

A point can also be added by the following method.

In Edit Point mode, click a spot on a line of the object while holding the [Ctrl] key, a new point will beadded to the position.

● Delete Point

On the pop-up menu opened by clicking the right mouse button, choose [Delete], DeletePoint mode will be activated.

In the Delete Point mode, click a point on a line of the object, the point will be removed fromthe position.

TIP

A point can be also deleted by the following method.

In Edit Point mode, click a point on a line of the object while holding the [Ctrl] and [Shift] keys, the pointwill be removed from the position.

● Move Point

After entering the Edit Point mode, the Move Point is activated automatically. To drag anddrop a point may move the point.

In the Add Point or Delete Point mode, choose [Delete] on the pop-up menu opened byclicking the right mouse button may go to Move Point mode.


F12-74

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Switching Display between Foreground and Background Images▼ Display Foreground Image, Display Background Screen

The display of the client area can be switched between foreground and background im-ages.

The foreground image refers to the object with the modification condition set, or the objectthat performs dynamic drawing such as displaying process data dynamically.

The background image refers to the object, for which no modification condition is set, thatperforms only static drawing without displaying process data.

For example, if a modification condition is set for a straight line drawn with the straight-linetool, the line is handled as a foreground image in the Graphic window. If no modificationcondition is set for the line, it is handled as a background image.

Normally, both foreground and background images are displayed.

The following operations display/hide foreground image and background image.

• Select [Display Foreground Image] or [Display Background Screen] from the [View]menu.

• Select [Display Foreground Image] or [Display Background Screen] from the menuthat is displayed by clicking the right mouse button.

Foreground image+ background image Foreground image only Background image only

F121208E.EPS

The object for which data has been set (foreground image)is always displayed in front.

Figure Switching between Foreground and Background Images

The display status of foreground and background images is shown on the graphic builderstatus bar. The display of foreground and background images can also be switched byclicking on this area on the toolbar.

• F/B:Both foreground and background images are displayed

• F: Foreground image display only

• B: Background image display only

ChangeF/B

F121209E.EPS

800�400X:0346 Y:0015

Display status of foreground and background images.

Figure Status Bar


F12-75

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.3 Drawing Freehand Lines and GraphicsUse the pen tool to draw freehand lines and graphics. The pen tool provides a draw-ing function for straight lines and circular arc.

■ Pen Tool▼ Pen

Select the [Pen] from the [Insert] menu or on the draw toolbar to change the cursor shapeas shown below:

F121210E.EPS

Select [Pen] from the[Insert] menu. Or

Toolbar Cursor


By dragging the mouse as shown in the figure below, the object can be drawn as follows:

The cursor pointer has different shapes varying with a line or an arc drawing object.

• A straight line can be drawn by dragging the mouse straight.

Starting pointDrag

F121211E.EPS

Figure How to Draw a Straight Line

• A circular arc can be drawn by dragging the mouse fast as if drawing a circle.

Starting point Drag

F121212E.EPS

Figure How to Draw a Curve

An object is drawn when the left mouse button is released.

After drawing a straight line or an arc, drag the mouse continuously to further draw linesegments. In this case, stop drawing by one of the following methods.

• Click the mouse.

• Overlap the starting point with the end point of an intended line (the internal area canbe filled).

Clicking the right mouse button while drawing an object cancels the set point, starting fromthe last one.


F12-76

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Objects Drawn Using the Pen ToolVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the lines andgraphics drawn using the pen tool.

The property setting menu box is used to set various attributes. To display the propertysetting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed by clicking the rightmouse button while the object drawn with the pen tool is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations, while theobjects drawn with the pen tool is selected.

• Select the [Properties] button on the format tool bar.


Also, when [Open property sheet] is selected for the double-click operation in the dialog box displayed byselecting [Options] from the [Tool] menu, the property setting menu box can be displayed by double-clicking an object.

The property setting menu box of a line or graphic drawn using the pen tool consists of thefollowing tabs. The attributes can be set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab

This tab is used to set the attributes that are common to all graphic objects created. The tabsets the object name, position and size, as well as whether the object can be used as a tagobject and whether data setting is possible during debugging.

● Line Tab

This tab is used to set the line attributes such as line type, thickness and line-end shape.

● Fill Tab

This tab is used to set the fill type when filling a graphic object. The setting can be per-formed only when the graphic drawn with the pen tool is formed by closed lines.


F12-77

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Graphic Modify Tab


● Modify Coordinates Tab

This tab is used to set change conditions for the position of a graphic object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-78

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.4 Drawing a Straight LineUse the straight line drawing tool to draw straight lines.

■ Straight Line Drawing Tool▼ Straight Line

Select the [Line]-[Straight Line] from the [Insert] menu or [Straight Line] button on the drawtool bar to change the cursor shape as shown below:

F121213E.EPS

Select [Line] - [Straight Line]from the [Insert] menu.

Or

CursorTool bar


A straight line can be drawn by dragging the mouse from the starting point to end point ofthe intended line.

• To draw a straight line that extends horizontally, vertically or diagonally at a 45-degreeangle, drag the mouse while holding down the [Shift] key.

• To draw a straight line extending from the starting point both in the dragging andopposite directions, drag the mouse while holding down the [Ctrl] key.

• To draw a straight line that extends vertically, horizontally, or diagonally at a 45-degreeangle from the starting point both in the dragging and opposite directions, drag themouse while holding down the [Shift] + [Ctrl] keys.

Clicking the right mouse button while dragging it cancels the set starting point.


F12-79

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Straight Line ObjectsVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for a straight lineobject.

The straight line property setting menu box is used to set attributes for the straight lineobject. To display the straight line property setting menu box, select [Properties] from thepop-up menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button while the straight line object isselected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thestraight line object is selected.




The straight line property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributescan be set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Line Tab



This tab is used to set change conditions for the attributes such as color, shape and light-ing/flashing status of the graphic object.



● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-80

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.5 Drawing a PolylinePolyline is a line segment consisting of multiple straight lines. Use the polylinedrawing tool to draw polylines.

■ Polyline Drawing Tool▼ Polyline

Select the [Line]-[Polyline] from the [Insert] menu or [Polyline] button on the draw tool bar tochange the cursor shape as shown below.

Select [Line] - [Polyline]from the [Insert] menu. Or

F121214E.EPS

CursorTool bar


After clicking at the starting point, drag the mouse from near the second point to the secondpoint to draw a line segment. Then, release the left mouse button to determine the linesegment. Repeat the operation to add more line segments.

Starting point

Drag

Drag

F121215E.EPS

Second point

Third point

Figure How to Draw a Polyline

A polyline can be drawn by clicking the mouse.

To draw a segment line that extends horizontally, vertically or diagonally at a 45-degreeangle, drag the mouse while holding down the [Shift] key.

Clicking the right mouse button while drawing a polyline cancels the vertices, starting fromthe last one.


F12-81

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Polyline ObjectsVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for a polyline object.

The polyline property setting menu box is used to set attributes for the polyline object. Todisplay the polyline property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menudisplayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the polyline object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thepolyline object is selected.




The polyline property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes can beset or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Line Tab



This tab is used to set change conditions for the attributes such as color, shape and light-ing/flashing status of the graphic object.



● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-82

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.6 Drawing an ArcUse the arc drawing tools to draw elliptic or circular arcs.

■ Arc Drawing Tool▼ Arc

Select the [Line]-[Arc] from the [Insert] menu or [Arc] button on the draw tool bar to changethe cursor shape as shown below.

Select [Line] - [Arc] fromthe [Insert] menu.

Or

F121216E.EPS

CursorTool bar


An arc can be drawn by dragging the mouse from the starting point to end point of theintended arc.

• To draw a circular arc, drag the mouse while holding down the [Shift] key.

• To draw an elliptic arc extending from the starting point both in the dragging andopposite directions, drag the mouse while holding down the [Ctrl] key.

• To draw a circular arc extending from the starting point both in the dragging andopposite directions, drag the mouse while holding down the [Shift] + [Ctrl] key.

Clicking the right mouse button while dragging cancels the set starting point.

The size of a drawn object can also be changed by dragging its handles.


F12-83

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Arc ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for an arc object.

The arc property setting menu box is used to set attributes for the arc object. To display thearc property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed byclicking the right mouse button, while the arc object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thearc object is selected.




The arc property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes can be setor changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Line Tab






● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-84

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.7 Drawing a RectangleUse the rectangle drawing tool to draw rectangles.

■ Rectangle Tool▼ Rectangle

Select [Graphic]-[Rectangle] from the [Insert] menu or [Rectangle] button on the draw toolbar to change the cursor shape as shown below:

Select [Graphic] - [Rectangle] from the [Insert] menu.

Or

F121217E.EPS

CursorTool bar


To draw a rectangle object, drag the mouse by drawing the diagonal line of the intendedrectangle object.

• To draw a square, drag the mouse while holding down the [Shift] key.

• To draw a rectangle from its center, drag the mouse while holding down the [Ctrl] key.

• To draw a square from its center, drag the mouse while holding down the [Shift] + [Ctrl]key.

Clicking the right mouse button while dragging cancels the object creation.



F12-85

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Rectangle ObjectsVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the rectangleobjects.

The rectangle property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for rectangle objects.To display the rectangle property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-upmenu displayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the rectangle object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while therectangle object is selected.




The rectangle property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes canbe set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Line Tab


● Fill Tab

This tab is used to set the fill type when filling a graphic object.





● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-86

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.8 Drawing a Fill AreaThe fill area is a 2-dimensional graphic consisting of multiple straight lines. Use thefill area tool to draw fill areas.

■ Fill Area Tool▼ Fill Area

Select [Graphic]-[Fill area] from the [Insert] menu or [Fill Area] button on the draw tool bar tochange the cursor shape as shown below.

Select [Graphic] -[Fill area]from the [Insert] menu.

Or

F121218E.EPS

CursorTool bar


Drag the mouse to draw a line segment, and release the left mouse button to determine thesegment line. Repeat the above operation to add more segment lines. For the fill area,segment lines are added with the starting point and end point connected at all times.

Starting point Drag

Drag

F121219E.EPS

Figure How to Draw a Fill Area

A fill area can be drawn by clicking the mouse at any given point.

To draw a polygon with a horizontal line, vertical line or oblique side at a 45-degree angle,drag the mouse to each vertex while holding down the [Shift] key.

Clicking the right mouse button while creating a fill area cancels the vertices, starting fromthe last one.



F12-87

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Fill Area ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for a fill area object.

The fill area property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for the fill area object. Todisplay the fill area property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menudisplayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the fill area object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thefill area object is selected.




The fill area property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes can beset or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Line Tab


● Fill Tab






● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-88

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.9 Drawing a CircleUse the circle drawing tool to draw circles.

■ Circle Drawing Tool▼ Circle

Select [Graphic]-[Circle] from the [Insert] menu or [Circle] button on the draw tool bar tochange the cursor shape as shown below.

Select [Graphic] - [Circle]from the [Insert] menu. Or

F121220E.EPS

CursorTool bar


To draw a circle, drag the mouse from one end of the intended object’s radius to the other.For this circle, the starting point becomes the center of the circle.

Clicking the right mouse button while dragging cancels the drawing of the object.



F12-89

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Circle ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for a circle object.

The circle property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for the circle object. Todisplay the circle property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menudisplayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the circle object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thecircle object is selected.




The circle property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes can beset or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


However, the vertical to horizontal ratio is fixed in the size setting of the circle object.

● Line Tab


● Fill Tab






● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-90

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.10Drawing an EllipseUse the ellipse drawing tool to draw an ellipse.

■ Ellipse Drawing Tool▼ Ellipse

Select [Graphic]-[Ellipse] from the [Insert] menu or [Ellipse] button on the draw tool bar tochange the cursor shape as shown below.

Select [Graphic] - [Ellipse]from the [Insert] menu.

Or

F121221E.EPS

CursorTool bar


Dragging the mouse will create an ellipse whose circumscribed rectangle is the areacreated by dragging.

• To draw a circle, drag the mouse while holding down the [Shift] key.

• To draw an ellipse from its center, drag the mouse while holding down the [Ctrl] key.

• To draw a circle from its center, drag the mouse while holding down the [Shift] + [Ctrl]keys.

TIP

• To draw a circle using the circle drawing tool, specify the radius.

• To draw a circle using the ellipse drawing tool, specify the radius or diameter.




F12-91

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Ellipse ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for an ellipse object.

The ellipse property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for the ellipse object. Todisplay the ellipse property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menudisplayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the ellipse object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while theellipse object is selected.




The ellipse property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes can beset or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Line Tab


● Fill Tab






● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO

For the details of items to be defined in the tabs , see the following:



F12-92

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.11 Drawing a SectorUse the sector drawing tool to draw a sector.

■ Sector Drawing Tool▼ Sector

Select [Graphic]-[Sector] from the [Insert] menu or [Sector] button on the draw tool bar tochange the cursor shape as shown below.

Select [Graphic] - [Sector]from the [Insert] menu. Or

F121222E.EPS

*** **

CursorTool bar


Dragging the mouse will draw a sector that is formed by connecting the starting point andthe end point.

Starting point

Drag

F121223E.EPS

Starting point

Drag

Figure How to Draw a Sector

• To draw a sector with a circular arc, drag the mouse while holding down the [Shift] key.

• To draw a sector with an elliptic arc extending from the starting point both in thedragging and opposite directions, drag the mouse while holding down the [Ctrl] key.

• To draw a sector with a circular arc extending from the starting point both in the drag-ging and opposite directions, drag the mouse while holding down the [Shift] + [Ctrl]keys.

Clicking the right mouse button while dragging cancels the set starting point.



F12-93

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Sector ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for a sector object.

The sector property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for the sector object. Todisplay the sector property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menudisplayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the sector object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thesector object is selected.




The sector property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes can beset or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Line Tab


● Fill Tab






● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-94

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.12Drawing a MarkerUse the marker drawing tool to draw a marker. It is convenient to use a marker forhighlighting character strings, or marking the touch panels.

■ Marker Drawing Tool▼ Marker

Select [Marker] from the [Insert] menu or [Marker] button on the draw tool bar to change thecursor shape as shown below.

Select [Marker] from the [Insert] menu.

Or

F121224E.EPS

*****

CursorTool bar


A marker can be drawn by clicking the mouse at a desired position.

The marker includes the following 5 types.

., +, *, �, �


F12-95

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Marker ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for a marker object.

The marker property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for marker object. Todisplay the marker property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menudisplayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the marker object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while themarker object is selected.




The marker property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes can beset or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Marker Tab

This tab is used to set the attributes of the marker, such as type, size, and color.





● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-96

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.13Displaying TextTo display text, create a text object using the text tool.

■ Text Tool▼ Text

Select [Text] from the [Insert] menu or [Text] button on the draw tool bar to change thecursor shape as shown below.

Select [Text] from the[Insert] menu. Or

F121225E.EPS

***** Text

CursorTool bar


Clicking the mouse at the starting point displays a rectangular area, and text object can beentered into the rectangular area.

Click

F121226E.EPS

Text

Figure How to Draw a Text Object

After entering the text, double-click or drag other area to determine the text object.

In order to modify the text object once created, select the text object first and click the [Text]tool button on the tool bar, the text object may be edited.


F12-97

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Text ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for a text object.

The text property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for the text object. To displaythe text property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed byclicking the right mouse button, while the text object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thetext object is selected.




The text property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes can be setor changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Text Tab

This tab is used to set the text format. The colors of text itself and its background can alsobe set.





● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-98

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.14Displaying Data with Numeric Values or CharacterStringsTo display the process data or batch data handled by the FCS on Graphic windowsusing numeric values and text, create a data character display object using theprocess data character display tool.

■ Process Data Character Display Tool▼ Process Data - Character

Select [Data Display]-[Process Data-Character] from the [Insert] menu or [Process Data-Character] button on the HIS functions tool bar to change the cursor shape as shownbelow.

Select [Data Display] - [Process Data-Character]from the [Insert] menu.

Or

F121227E.EPS

0.0

0.0

Tool bar

Cursor


Click the mouse to draw a data character display object. The position clicked will be the topleft corner of the drawn object. At this time, the default will be displayed as shown below.

RRRRRRR

TIP

Use the data character display property setting menu box to associate the drawn data character displayobject with the process data to be displayed.


F12-99

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Data Character Display ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for a data characterdisplay object.

The data character display property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for thetext object. To display the text property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the data character display isselected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thedata character display object is selected.




The property setting menu box of data characters display consists of the following tabs.The attributes can be set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Text Tab

This tab is used to set the text format. The color of text itself as well as its background canbe set.


F12-100

IM 33S01B30-01E






● Process Data-Character Tab

This tab is used to set the process data to be displayed as numeric values or characterstrings.The process data-character tab is specific to the data character display object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-101

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.15Displaying Data Using Rectangular BarTo display the process data handled by the FCS on Graphic windows using therectangular bar, create a data rectangular bar display object using the data rectangu-lar bar display tool.

■ Data Rectangular Bar Display Tool▼ Process Data - Bar

Select [Data Display]-[Data Bar Display]-[Rectangular Bar] from the [Insert] menu or[Process Data-Bar] button on the HIS functions tool bar to change the cursor shape asshown below.

Select [Data Display] - [Data Bar Display] - [Rectangular Bar] from the [Insert] menu.

Or

F121228E.EPS

0.0

Cursor

Tool bar


A data rectangular bar display object can be drawn by dragging the mouse over the area ofthe intended object.

Starting point

F121229E.EPS

Drag

Figure How to Draw a Data Rectangular Bar

To create a data rectangular bar display object from the center, position the pointer at thecenter of the supposed object’s location and click the mouse. Drag outward while holdingdown the [Ctrl] key.



TIP

Use the data rectangular bar display property setting menu box to associate the drawn data rectangularbar display object with the process data to be displayed.


F12-102

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Data Rectangular Bar Display ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the data rectangu-lar bar display object.

The data rectangular bar display property setting menu box is used to set the attributes fordata rectangular bar display object. To display the data rectangular bar display propertysetting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed by clicking the rightmouse button, while the data rectangular bar display object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thedata rectangular bar display object is selected.




The data rectangular bar display property setting menu box consists of the following tabs.The attributes can be set or changed in each tab.

● General TabThis tab is used to set the attributes that are common to all graphic objects created. The tabsets the object name, position and size, as well as whether the object can be used as a tagobject and whether data setting is possible during debugging.

● Fill TabThis tab is used to set the fill type when filling a graphic object.


F12-103

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Graphic Modify TabThis tab is used to set change conditions for the attributes such as color, shape and light-ing/flashing status of a graphic object.

● Modify Coordinates TabThis tab is used to set change conditions for the position of a graphic object.

● Process Data-Bar TabThis tab is used to set the display method of the rectangular bar, or process data to bedisplayed.

The process data-bar tab is a page that is specific to the data rectangular bar displayobject.

● Data Bind TabThis tab is used to bind different variants to graphic generic names.

SEE ALSO




F12-104

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.16Displaying Data Using Arrow BarTo display the process data handled by the FCS on Graphic windows using thearrow bar, create a arrow process data bar display object using the arrow processdata bar display tool.

■ Arrow Process Data Bar Display Tool▼ Process Data - Arrow

Select [Data Display]-[Data Bar Display]-[Arrow Bar] from the [Insert] menu or [ProcessData-Arrow] button on the HIS functions tool bar to change the cursor shape as shownbelow.

Select [Data Display] - [Data Bar Display] - [Arrow Bar] from the [Insert] menu.

OrOr

F121230E.EPS

Cursor

Tool bar

Cursor

Tool bar


To draw an arrow process data bar display object, drag the mouse to draw the movingrange (line part of the arrow) of the intended object.

F121231E.EPS

DragStarting point

Figure How to Draw a Arrow Process Data Bar Display Object

The moving range of the arrow bar displayed here will be either a line segment that extendsvertically or horizontally from the starting point.

If the direction drawn is different from the default moving direction set in the arrow processdata bar display tab, the direction drawn will precede the default setting.

Clicking the right mouse button while dragging cancels the drawing of the object .


To create an arrow process data bar display object from the center, position the pointer atthe center of the supposed object’s location and click the mouse. Drag the mouse outwardwhile holding down the [Ctrl] key.

TIP

Use the arrow process data bar display property setting menu box to associate the drawn arrow processdata bar display object with the process data to be displayed.


F12-105

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Arrow Process Data Bar Display ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the arrow processdata bar display object.

The arrow process data bar display property setting menu box is used to set the attributesfor arrow process data bar display object. To display the arrow process data bar displayproperty setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed by clickingthe right mouse button, while the arrow process data bar display object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thearrow process data bar display object is selected.




The arrow process data bar display property setting menu box consists of the followingtabs. The attributes can be set or changed in each tab.

● General TabThis tab is used to set the attributes that are common to all graphic objects created. The tabsets the object name, position and size, as well as whether the object can be used as a tagobject and whether data setting is possible during debugging.

● Fill TabThis tab is used to set the fill type when filling a graphic object. There exist 3 types of fills,including transparent, solid color, and pattern.


F12-106

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Graphic Modify TabThis tab is used to set change conditions for the attributes such as color, shape and light-ing/flashing status of a graphic object.

● Modify Coordinates TabThis tab is used to set change conditions for the position of a graphic object.

● Process Data-Arrow TabThis tab is used to set the display method of the arrow bar as well as the process data to bedisplayed.The process data-arrow tab is specific to the arrow process data bar display object.

● Data Bind TabThis tab is used to bind different variants to graphic generic names.

SEE ALSO




F12-107

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.17Displaying Data Using Circle BarTo display the process data handled by the FCS on Graphic windows using anextendible circle, create a data circle bar display object using the data circle bardisplay tool.

■ Data Circle Bar Display Tool▼ Process Data - Circle

Select [Data Display]-[Data Bar Display]-[Circular Bar] from the [Insert] menu or [ProcessData-Circle] button on the HIS functions tool bar to change the cursor shape as shownbelow.

Select [Data Display] -[Data Bar Display] - [Circular Bar] from the [Insert] menu.

Or

F121232E.EPS

Cursor

Tool bar


To draw a data circle bar display object, drag the mouse from one end of the intendedobject’s radius to the other. For this, the starting point becomes the center of the circle.


The size of a drawn object can also be changed by dragging its handles, however, thevertical to horizontal ratio of the data circle bar display object is fixed.

TIP

Use the data circle bar display property setting menu box to associate the data circle bar display objectdrawn with the process data to be displayed.


F12-108

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Data Circle Bar Display ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the data circle bardisplay object.

The data circle bar display property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for datacircle bar display object. To display the data circle bar display property setting menu box,select [Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button,while the data circle bar display object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thedata circle bar display object is selected.




The data circle bar display property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. Theattributes can be set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Fill Tab


There exist 3 types of fill, including transparent, completely painted, or pattern.


F12-109

IM 33S01B30-01E






● Process Data-Circle Tab

This tab is used to set the process data to be displayed in the data circle bar.The process data-circle tab is specific to the data circle bar display object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-110

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.18Displaying Data Using Line-Segment GraphTo display the interrelation among multiple process data or array data in a line-segment graph format, create a line-segment graph object using the line-segmentgraph tool. Up to 60 data items can be displayed in one line-segment object.

■ Line-Segment Graph Tool▼ Line - Segment Graph

Select [Data Display]-[Display Data Graph]-[Line-Segment Graph] from the [Insert] menu or[Line-Segment Graph] button on the HIS functions tool bar to change the cursor shape asshown below.

Select [Data Display] - [Display Data Graph] -[Line-segment Graph] from the [Insert] menu.

Or

F121233E.EPS

Cursor

Tool bar


A line-segment graph object can be drawn by dragging the mouse over the area of theintended object.



To create a line-segment object from the center, position the pointer at the center of thesupposed object’s location and click the mouse. Drag the mouse outward while holdingdown the [Ctrl] key.

TIP

Use the line-segment graph property setting menu box to associate the line-segment graph object drawnwith the process data or array data to be displayed.


F12-111

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Line-Segment Graph ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the line-segmentgraph object.

The line-segment graph property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for line-segment graph object. To display the line-segment graph property setting menu box, select[Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button, while theobject is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while theline-segment graph object is selected.




The line-segment graph property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. Theattributes can be set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Line-Segment Graph Tab

This tab is used to set the color of the line-segment graph, the process data and the arraydata to be displayed.

The line-segment graph tab is specific to the line-segment graph object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-112

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.19Displaying Data Using User-Defined Line-SegmentGraphTo display the multiple process data or array data in a line-segment graph format,user may create a user-defined line-segment graph object using the user-definedline-segment graph tool. Up to 60 data items can be displayed in one user-definedline-segment object.

■ User-Defined Line-Segment Graph Tool▼ User-Defined Line - Segment Graph

Select [Data Display]-[Display Data Graph]-[User-Defined Line-Segment Graph] from the[Insert] menu or [User-Defined Line-Segment Graph] button on the HIS functions tool bar tochange the cursor shape as shown below.

Select [Data Display] - [Display Data Graph] -[User-DifinedLine-segment Graph] from the [Insert] menu.

Or

F121234E.EPS

Cursor

Tool bar


A user-defined line-segment graph may be created by designating each data sample’s lowand high limits’ positions with mouse.

Pointing the mouse at the position of the first data sample's low limit then drag the mouseto the position of the high limit of the sample. When releasing the button of the mouse, theposition that the button of the mouse is released is the position of the high limit of the firstdata sample, a line connecting the low and high limits is visible. Then repeat the sameoperation may draw the second line for the second data sample then the third and the next.

Low limit position of the first sample

High limit position of the first sample

Drag

DragClicking the mouse may

finalize the graph position.

Low limit position of the second sample

High limit position of the second sample

High limit position of the third sample

Low limit position of the third sample

F121235E.EPS

Drag

Figure Method of Drawing a User Defined Line-Segment Graph

TIP

Use the user-defined line-segment graph property setting menu box to associate the user-defined line-segment graph object drawn with the process data and array data to be displayed.


F12-113

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the User-Defined Line-Segment Graph ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the user-definedline-segment graph object.

The user-defined line-segment graph property setting menu box is used to set the at-tributes for user-defined line-segment graph object. To display the user-defined line-seg-ment graph property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menu displayedby clicking the right mouse button, while the object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while theuser-defined line-segment graph object is selected.




The user-defined line-segment graph property setting menu box consists of the followingtabs. The attributes can be set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● User-Defined Line-Segment Graph Tab

This tab is used to set the color of the user-defined line-segment graph and to set theprocess data or array data indicated by the graph.

Both the user-defined line-segment graph object and the line segment graph object may bedefined on the user-defined line-segment graph tab.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-114

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.20Displaying Data Using Bar GraphTo display the multiple process data or array data in a bar graph format, user maycreate a bar graph object using the bar graph tool. Up to 60 data items can be dis-played in one bar graph object.

■ Bar Graph Tool▼ Bar Graph

Select [Data Display]-[Display Data Graph]-[Bar Graph] from the [Insert] menu or [BarGraph] button on the HIS functions tool bar to change the cursor shape as shown below.

Select [Data Display] -[Display Data Graph] - [Bar Graph] from the [Insert] menu.

Or

F121236E.EPS

Cursor

Tool bar


A bar graph object can be drawn by dragging the mouse over the area of the intendedobject.



To create a bar graph object from the center, position the pointer at the center of the sup-posed object’s location and click the mouse. Drag the mouse outward while holding downthe [Ctrl] key.

TIP

Use the bar graph property setting menu box to associate the bar graph object drawn with the processdata or the array data to be displayed.


F12-115

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Bar Graph Object – GraphicVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the bar graphobject.

The bar graph property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for bar graph object.To display the bar graph property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-upmenu displayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the bar graph object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thebar graph object is selected.




The bar graph property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes canbe set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Bar Graph Tab

This tab is used to set the color of the bar graph as well as the process data to be dis-played. The bar graph tab is specific to the bar graph object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-116

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.21Displaying Data Using Step GraphTo display the multiple process data or array data in a step graph format, user maycreate a step graph object using the step graph tool. Up to 60 data items can bedisplayed in one step graph object.

■ Step Graph Tool▼ Step Graph

Select [Data Display]-[Display Data Graph]-[Step Graph] from the [Insert] menu or [StepGraph] button on the HIS functions tool bar to change the cursor shape as shown below.

Select [Data Display] - [Display Data Graph] - [Step Graph] from the [Insert] menu.

Or

F121237E.EPS

Cursor

Tool bar


A step graph object can be drawn by dragging the mouse over the area of the intendedobject.



To create a step graph object from the center, position the pointer at the center of thesupposed object’s location and click the mouse. Drag the mouse outward while holdingdown the [Ctrl] key.

TIP

Use the step graph property setting menu box to associate the step graph object drawn with the processdata or the array data to be displayed.


F12-117

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Step Graph ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the step graphobject.

The step graph property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for step graph object.To display the step graph property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-upmenu displayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the step graph object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thestep graph object is selected.




The step graph property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes canbe set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Step Graph Tab

This tab is used to set the color of the step graph and to set the process data or the arraydata to be displayed. The step graph tab is specific to the step graph object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-118

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.22Displaying Data Using Radar ChartTo display the multiple process data or array data in a radar chart format, user maycreate a radar chart object using the radar chart tool. Up to 60 data items can bedisplayed in one radar chart object.

■ Radar Chart Tool▼ Radar Chart

Select [Data Display]-[Display Data Graph]-[Radar Chart] from the [Insert] menu or [RadarChart] button on the HIS functions tool bar to change the cursor shape as shown below.

Select [Data Display] - [Display Data Graph] - [Radar Chart] from the[Insert] menu.

Or

F121238E.EPS

Cursor

Tool bar


The radar chart object can be drawn by dragging the mouse from one end of the intendedobject’s radius to the other. For this, the starting point of drag becomes the center of theradar chart while the first data will be displayed at the end point.



TIP

Use the radar chart property setting menu box to associate the radar chart object drawn with the processdata or array data to be displayed.


F12-119

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Radar Chart ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the radar chartobject.

The radar chart property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for radar chartobject. To display the radar chart property setting menu box, select [Properties] from thepop-up menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the radar chart object isselected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while theradar chart object is selected.




The radar chart property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes canbe set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Radar Chart Tab

This tab is used to set the color of the radar chart as well as the process data to be dis-played. The radar chart tab is specific to the radar chart object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-120

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.23Displaying Data Using Two-Dimensional GraphTo display 2 different types of process data or array data in a two-dimensional graphformat, user may create a two-dimensional graph object using the two-dimensionalgraph tool.

■ Two-Dimensional Graph Tool▼ Two-Dimensional Graph

Select [Data Display]-[Display Data Graph]-[Two-Dimensional Graph] from the [Insert]menu or [2-Dimensional Graph] button on the HIS functions tool bar to change the cursorshape as shown below.

Cursor

Tool bar

Select [Data Display] -[Display Data Graph] - [Two-dimensional Graph]from the [Insert] menu.

Or

F121239E.EPS


A two-dimensional graph object can be drawn by dragging the mouse over the area of theintended object.

Clicking the right mouse button while dragging cancels the drawing of the two-dimensionalgraph object.

The size of a drawn two-dimensional graph object can also be changed by dragging itsedges.

To create a two-dimensional graph object from the center, position the pointer at the centerof the supposed object’s location and click the mouse. Drag the mouse outward whileholding down the [Ctrl] key.

TIP

Use the two-dimensional graph property setting menu box to associate the two-dimensional graph objectdrawn with the process data or array data to be displayed.


F12-121

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Two-Dimensional Graph ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the two-dimen-sional graph object.

The two-dimensional graph property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for two-dimensional graph object. To display the two-dimensional graph property setting menu box,select [Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button,while the object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thetwo-dimensional graph object is selected.




The two-dimensional graph property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. Theattributes can be set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Marker Tab

This tab is used to set the attributes of markers such as types, sizes, and colors.

● Two-Dimensional Graph Tab

This tab is used to set the method of displaying the process data in a two-dimensionalgraph.

The two-dimensional graph tab is specific to the two-dimensional graph object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-122

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.24Creating Touch TargetThe touch target is an object that executes assigned functions, such as a windowcalling, by touching a window or selecting a function with a cursor.

To create the touch target object, use the touch target tool.

■ Touch Target Tool▼ Touch Target

Select [Button]-[Touch Target] from the [Insert] menu or [Touch Target] button on the HISfunctions tool bar to change the cursor shape as shown below.

Cursor

Tool bar

Select [Button] -[Touch Target] from the[Insert] menu.

Or

F121240E.EPS


A touch target object can be drawn by dragging the mouse over the area of the intendedobject.


The size of a drawn object can also be changed by dragging its edges.

To create a touch target object from the center, position the pointer at the center of thesupposed object’s location and click the mouse. Drag the mouse outward while holdingdown the [Ctrl] key.

TIP

Use the touch target property setting menu box to set functions for the touch target object drawn.


F12-123

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Touch Target ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the touch targetobject.

The touch target property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for touch targetobject. To display the touch target property setting menu box, select [Properties] from thepop-up menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the touch target object isselected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations whiletouch target object is selected.




The touch target property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributescan be set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Function Tab

This tab is used to set the functions to be assigned to a touch target object. The assignablefunctions include the window calling function, the function to control the trend window thatis specific to the graphic window, instrument command operation, and the menu windowcalling function.

● Data Bind Tab


● Menu Tab

The setting can be performed in this tab only when the menu window calling function isassigned to the touch target object. The menu window display position and the data to bedisplayed in the menu are set here.

SEE ALSO




F12-124

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.25Displaying Push ButtonUse the push button tool to display the push button.

The push button is an object that executes assigned functions such as windowcalling by selecting with a cursor. Any label can be attached to the push button.

■ Push Button Tool▼ Push Button

Select [Button]-[Push Button] from the [Insert] menu or [Push Button] button on the HISfunctions tool bar to change the cursor shape as shown below.

Cursor

Tool bar

Select [Button] -[Push Button] from the[Insert] menu.

Or

F121241E.EPS

F


A button object can be drawn by dragging the mouse over the area of the intended object.



TIP

Use the push button property setting menu box to set functions for the push button object drawn.


F12-125

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Push Button ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the push buttonobject.

The push button property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for push buttonobject. To display the push button property setting menu box, select [Properties] from thepop-up menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the push buttonobject is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thepush button object is selected.




The push button property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributescan be set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Text Tab

This tab is used to set the text format. The colors of text itself and its background can beset.

● Label Tab

The setting can be performed in this tab only when drawing the push button object. The tabis used to set the label to be attached to the push button, its color and the safety guard.


F12-126

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Function Tab

This tab is used to set the functions to be assigned to a push button object. The assignablefunctions include the window calling function, the function to control the trend window thatis specific to the graphic window, instrument command operation and the menu windowcalling function.

● Menu Tab

The setting can be performed in this tab only when the menu window calling function hasbeen assigned to the push button object. The menu window display position and the datato be displayed in the menu are set here.



The push button can be hidden according to conditions.

SEE ALSO

For more information on hiding the push button, see the following:

F12.13.5, “Graphic Modify Tab”

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-127

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.26Displaying Faceplate Block ButtonTo display one of the faceplate block push buttons, create a faceplate block buttonobject using the faceplate block button tool.

■ Faceplate Block Button Tool▼ Faceplate Block Button

Select [Button]-[Face Plate Block Button] from the [Insert] menu or [Faceplate] button onthe HIS function tool bar to change the cursor shape as shown below.

Cursor

Tool bar

Select [Button] -[Face Plate Block Button] from the [Insert] menu.

Or

F121242E.EPS

FF


A faceplate button object can be drawn by dragging the mouse over the area of the in-tended object.



To create a faceplate button object from the center, position the pointer at the center of thesupposed object’s location and click the mouse. Drag the mouse outward while holdingdown the [Ctrl] key.

TIP

Use the faceplate button block property setting menu box to set functions for the faceplate block buttonobject drawn.


F12-128

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Faceplate Block Button ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the faceplate blockbutton object.

The faceplate block button property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for face-plate block button object. To display the faceplate block button property setting menu box,select [Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button,while the faceplate block button object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thefaceplate block object is selected.




The property setting menu box of the faceplate block button consists of the following tabs.The attributes can be set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Face Plate Block Button Tab

This tab is used to set push buttons for the faceplate block to be assigned to a faceplateblock button object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-129

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.27Displaying Instrument DiagramTo display the instrument diagram of function blocks on the graphic window, createa instrument diagram object using the instrument diagram tool. Up to 16 instrumentdiagram objects can be created per window.

■ Instrument Diagram Tool▼ Instrument Diagram

Select [Instrument Diagram] from the [Insert] menu or [Instrument Diagram] button on theHIS functions tool bar to change the cursor shape as shown below.

Cursor

Tool bar

Select [Instrument Diagram]from the [Insert] menu. Or

F

F121243E.EPS

F


A instrument diagram object can be drawn by dragging the mouse over the area of theintended object. However, the vertical to horizontal size ratio of the instrument diagram isfixed.



To create a instrument diagram object from the center, position the pointer at the center ofthe supposed object’s location and click the mouse. Drag the mouse outward while holdingdown the [Ctrl] key.

TIP

Use the instrument diagram property setting menu box to associate the instrument diagram object drawnwith the contents of the instrument diagram.


F12-130

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Instrument Diagram ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the instrumentdiagram object.

The instrument diagram property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for instru-ment diagram object. To display the instrument diagram property setting menu box, select[Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button, while theinstrument diagram object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while theinstrument diagram object is selected.




The instrument diagram property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. Theattributes can be set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Instrument Diagram Tab

This tab is used to set the function block displayed as an instrument diagram and thedisplay contents of the instrument diagram.

The instrument diagram tab is specific to the instrument diagram object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-131

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.28Displaying Window InformationTo display a window that satisfies specific conditions, create a window object usingthe window tool.

■ Window Tool▼ Window

Select [Window] from the [Insert] menu or [Window] button on the HIS functions tool bar tochange the cursor shape as shown below.

Cursor

Tool bar

Select [Window]from the [Insert] menu. Or

W

F121244E.EPS


A window object can be drawn by dragging the mouse over the area of the intended object.However, when “Display in the default size” is set in the window tab, the object is displayedin the default size regardless of the size of the object drawn by dragging the mouth.

Clicking the right mouse button while dragging it cancels the drawing of the object.


To create a window object from the center, position the pointer at the center of the sup-posed object’s location and click the mouse. Drag the mouse outward while holding downthe [Ctrl] key.

TIP

Use the window property setting menu box to associate the window object drawn with the displaycontents of the window.


F12-132

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Window ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the window object.

The window property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for window object. Todisplay the window property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menudisplayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the window object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thewindow object is selected.




The window property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes can beset or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Window Tab

This tab is used to set the name for a window to be displayed and the conditions to displaywindows.

The window tab is specific to the window object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-133

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.29Displaying MessageTo display the messages sent from FCS on the Graphic window, create a messageobject using the message tool.

■ Message Tool▼ Message

Select [Message] from the [Insert] menu or [Message] button on the HIS functions tool barto change the cursor shape as shown below.

Cursor

Tool bar

Select [Message] from the [Insert] menu. Or

M

F121245E.EPS


Drag the mouse in the area you want to display a message. The message object willappear in the selected area. The number of the characters of the message displayed in themessage object are automatically determined by the size of the message object.



To create a message object from the center, position the pointer at the center of the sup-posed object’s location and click the mouse. Drag the mouse outward while holding downthe [Ctrl] key.

TIP

Use the message property setting menu box to associate the message object drawn with the message tobe displayed.


F12-134

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Message ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the messageobject.

The message property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for message object. Todisplay the message property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menudisplayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the message object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while themessage object is selected.




The message property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes canbe set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Text Tab


● Message Tab

This tab is used to set the message types and the search range for collecting messages.

The message tab is specific to the message object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-135

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.30Displaying Dialog NameTo display on a Graphic window the name of a dialog that is required to be displayedin a unit instrument etc., user may create a dialog name object using the dialogname tool. It will be even more convenient if the dialog name is combined with apush button.

■ Dialog Name Tool▼ Dialog Name

Select [Dialog Name] from the [Insert] menu or [Dialog Name] button on the HIS functionstool bar to change the cursor shape as shown below.

Cursor

Tool bar

OrD

Cursor

Tool bar

Select [Dialog Name] from the [Insert] menu. Or

D

F121246E.EPS


Click the mouse to draw a dialog name object. The position clicked will be the top leftcorner of the drawn object.

To create a dialog name object from the center, position the pointer at the center of thesupposed object’s location and click the mouse. Drag the mouse outward while holdingdown the [Ctrl] key.

TIP

Use the dialog name property setting menu box to associate the dialog name object drawn with the dialogname.


F12-136

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Dialog Name ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the dialog nameobject.

The dialog name property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for dialog nameobject. To display the dialog name property setting menu box, select [Properties] from thepop-up menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the dialog name object isselected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thedialog name object is selected.




The dialog name property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributescan be set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Text Tab


● Dialog Name Tab

This tab is used to set the tag names associated with the dialog name object. The dialogname tab is specific to the dialog name object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-137

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.31Displaying Trend DataTo display the trend data on the Graphic window, create a trend object using thetrend tool. The displayable trend data include the trend point and the trend group.

■ Trend Tool▼ Trend

Select [Trend] from the [Insert] menu or [Trend] button on the HIS functions tool bar tochange the cursor shape as shown below.

Cursor

Tool bar

Select [Trend] from the[Insert] menu. Or

F121247E.EPS


A trend object can be drawn by dragging the mouse over the area of the intended object.



To create a trend object from the center, position the pointer at the center of the supposedobject’s location and click the mouse. Drag the mouse outward while holding down the[Ctrl] key.

TIP

Use the trend property setting menu box to associate the trend object drawn with the trend data to bedisplayed.


F12-138

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Trend ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the trend object.

The trend property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for trend object. To displaythe trend property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed byclicking the right mouse button, while the trend object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while thetrend object is selected.




The trend property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes can beset or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Trend Tab

This tab is used to set the trend group name or the tag name that are the acquisition sourceof the trend data to be displayed in the trend object.

The trend tab is specific to the trend object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-139

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.32Creating Overview ObjectThe overview object is a push button type object that has the functions to displaythe statuses of function blocks and windows, and to call windows, etc. To create anoverview object, use the overview tool. Up to 64 overview objects can be created perwindow.

■ Overview Tool▼ Overview

Select [Overview] from the [Insert] menu or [Overview] button on the HIS functions tool barto change the cursor shape as shown below.

Cursor

Tool bar

Select [Overview] from the[Insert] menu. Or

F121248E.EPS


An overview object can be drawn by dragging the mouse over the area of the intendedobject.



To create an overview object from the center, position the pointer at the center of thesupposed object’s location and click the mouse. Drag the mouse outward while holdingdown the [Ctrl] key.

TIP

Use the overview property setting menu box to set functions for the overview object drawn.


F12-140

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Overview ObjectVarious attributes such as name, type and display method can be set for the overviewobject.

The overview property setting menu box is used to set the attributes for overview object. Todisplay the overview property setting menu box, select [Properties] from the pop-up menudisplayed by clicking the right mouse button, while the overview object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while theoverview object is selected.




The overview property setting menu box consists of the following tabs. The attributes canbe set or changed in each tab.

● General Tab


● Overview Tab

This tab is used to set the types of overview objects, process data to be displayed, alarmnotification, and windows to be called.

The overview tab is specific to the overview object.

● Function Tab

This tab is used to set the function to call other window from an overview object, etc.


F12-141

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Text Tab

This tab is displayed when the “Specify font” is checked at the Overview tab. Specify type,size and style of font of characters displayed at the overview object.

● Data Bind Tab


SEE ALSO




F12-142

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.12.33Creating Control Object

The control object is an object with Active X.

■ Control Tool▼ Control

In order to change the cursor shape as shown below Select [Control] from the [Insert] menuor [Control] button from the HIS functions tool bar.

Cursor

Tool bar

Select [Control] from the[Insert] menu. Or

F121249E.EPS


Dragging the mouse causes the drawing of a control object according to the area of themouse movement, resulting in a four-sided object surrounded by a solid white line.

For distinction from other four-sided objects, a four-sided object representing a controlobject displays the type of the ActiveX control object inside itself.



To create a control object from the center, position the pointer at the center of the supposedobject’s location and click the mouse. Drag the mouse outward while holding down the[Ctrl] key.

TIP

In the Graphic Builder, only the type and position of the control object may be defined.


F12-143

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Property of the Control ObjectA control object for displaying ActiveX control may be set on the control object.

The control property setting sheet may be used to set the attributes for control object. Todisplay the control property setting sheet, select [Properties] from the pop-up menu dis-played by clicking the right mouse button, while the control object is selected.

TIP

The property setting menu box can be displayed by performing one of the following operations while theoverview object is selected.




The control property setting sheet consists of the following tabs. The attributes can be setor changed in each tab.

● General Tab

This tab is used to set the attributes that are common to all graphic objects created.

The tab sets the object name, position and size, as well as whether the object can be usedas a tag object and whether data setting is possible during debugging.

SEE ALSO

For details on General tab, see the following:

F12.13.1, “General Tab”

● Control Tab

This tab is used to set the types of ActiveX controls displayed as control objects.

The control tab is specific to the control objects.

SEE ALSO

For details on Control tab, see the following:

F12.13.18, “Control Tab”


F12-144<F12.13 Setting Properties for Graphic Objects>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13 Setting Properties for Graphic ObjectsVarious tabs are used to set properties for objects.

■ Property SettingProperties can be set for the graphic objects drawn by using various tools. Use various tabsshown below to set properties.

Table Tabs for Each Object (1/2)

TabGeneral Line Fill Text

Graphicmodify

Modifycoordinates

Function MenuDataBind

Specific tabobject

Pen

Straight line

Polyline

Arc

Rectangle

Fill Area

Circle

Ellipse

Sector

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

Marker

Text

Process datacharacter display

�

�Process Data-Character

Rectangle processdata bar display

Process Data-Rectangular

Arrow process databar display

Process Data-Arrow

Circle process databar display

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

(*1)

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�Process Data-Circle

F121301E.EPS

Marker

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�: Indicates that this tab is used for the marked object.*1: Valid only for the objects with closed areas.


<F12.13 Setting Properties for Graphic Objects> F12-145

IM 33S01B30-01E

Table Tabs for Each Object (2/2)

Tab

object

User-definedLine-segment graph

Line-segment graphLine-segment graph

User-definedLine-segment graph

�

�

Bar graph � Bar graph

Step-type graph � Step graph

Radar chart � Radar chart

2-Dimensionalgraph

� �2-Dimension-al graph

Control �

Touch target �

Pushbutton � �� (*2)

� (*3)

Label

Control

Faceplate blockbutton

Face Plateblock button

�

Instrument faceplate �Instrumentdiagram

Window � Window

Dialog name � � Dialog name

Message � � Message

Trend � Trend

Overview �

��

(*1)

�(*1)

�

� Overview

Bitmap �

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

F121302E.EPS

General Line Fill TextGraphicmodify

Modifycoordinates

Function MenuDataBind

Specific tabobject

Marker

�: Indicates that this tab is used for the marked object.*1: Indicates that the Menu tab is available only when the [Call menu dialog] is selected for the function on the function tab.*2: Indicates that the Graphic Modify tab is available only when [With illumination] is checked.*3: Indicates that the Text tab is available only when [Specify Font] is checked.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.1 General Tab▼ General

The General tab is used to set basic attributes that are common to all objects cre-ated.

The General tab sets the object name, display position and size, as well as whetherthe object can be used as a tag object and whether data setting is possible duringdebugging.

Position

X 0

0

0

0

Y

(S) (H)

Size

Object Name

Activate Tag Object

Set data during debugging

General TextLine Fill Marker Graphic Modify

CloseOK

F121303E.EPS

Default

Apply

Figure General Tab

■ Object NameThis sets the name of an object. The text of up to 15 double-width characters can beentered as an object name. Use the name set here to search an object or to identify anobject for data input at debugging.

■ Object PositionThis sets the display position of an object (x coordinate and y coordinate). The settingrange is between -5000 and 3686400 dots. The coordinates (x coordinate and y coordi-nate) of the top left corner of a graphic object will be the reference point of the graphicobject display position.

The display position of a selected object can be changed by clicking on the up or downarrows in the box or directly entering an integer value into the box.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Object SizeThis sets the width and height of an object. The setting range is between 1 and 3686400dots.

The display position of a selected object can be changed by clicking on the up or downarrows in the box or directly entering an integer value into the box.

■ Setting a Tag ObjectOne of the methods to call a window from the Graphic window is to press the windowcalling button after selecting an object. In this operation, tag objects will be subject to suchselection. However, tag objects are limited to the following objects to which a tag name(process data) can be assigned.

• Graphic primitive object with modifier

• Data character display object

• Data bar display object

• Instrument diagram object

These graphic objects can be used as tag objects once they are set as a tag object in thetag object setting.

SEE ALSO

For the operation during tag object selection, see the following:

E2.5, “Calling up and Closing Operation and Monitoring Windows”

■ Presence/Absence of Data Set During DebuggingThe display and action of graphic objects can be checked by using the debug function ofthe Graphic window. The presence/absence of simulation data setting during debuggingcan be set for graphic objects.

SEE ALSO

For the details of data to be set during debugging, see the following:

F12.15, “Debugging on the Graphic Builder”



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.2 Line Tab▼ Line

The Line tab is used to set the line attributes such as type, thickness, and line endshape.

Line Style

2

Hairline

Dot

Transparent

Medium

Arrow

Same type(Y)

Start Exit

Roundness of EdgeHairline

Line ColorBlack

Line

General TextLine Fill Marker Graphic Modify

CloseOK

F121304E.EPS

Default

Sample

(T)

(T)

(G)

Apply

Figure Line Tab

When setting a polyline object, the setting item specific to disjoint is added to the line tab.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Line StyleThe line style setting is applied to the line of the line object such as straight line and arc,and to the outline of a graphic object.

● Line Style

This sets the type of a line. The line types include “solid line,” “broken line,” “dotted line,”“chain line,” and “two-dot chain line.”

Table Types of Lines

Line type Style

Solid line

Broken line

Dotted line

Chain line

Two-dot chain line

F121305E.EPS

● Setting a Transparent Line

This sets a transparent line.

■ Line WidthThe line width is applied to the line of a line object such as straight line and arc, and to theoutline of a graphic object.

● Thickness of Line

This sets the line thickness. The thickness can be selected within the range between 1 dotand 48 dots. The hairline is set when the line thickness is 1.

● Setting a Hairline

The hairline is the thinnest line that can be displayed. This sets whether the line thicknessof an object is hairline or not.

TIP

When the hairline is selected, the data entry box of the line thickness is grayed out and cannot be set.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ ArrowThis sets a marker to be attached to the line end. Different shapes of markers can be set foreach end of the line.

● Markers at Starting Point and End Point

This sets the shapes of markers at the starting and end points of dragging the mouse whendrawing a line object the table below lists the marker types that can be set.

Table Type of Markers

Shape of Marker at Line End Shape

Arrow1

Arrow2

Circle

Square

F121306E.EPS

Line only

The following table shows possible combinations of markers at starting and end points ofan arrow.

Table Possible Combinations of Markers

Arrow1 Arrow2 Circle Square None

Arrow1 � - � � �

Arrow2 - � �

�

�

�

�

Circle � � - -

Square � � - -

None � � - - �

F121307E.EPS

�: Combination allowed-: Combination not allowed

● Setting the Same Type of Markers at Each End of the Line

This sets whether or not to use markers of the same shape at each line end.

● Size of Markers at Line Ends

This sets the size of markers at line ends. The available sizes include [Large], [Medium],and [Small].

■ Line ColorOne color can be selected from the color palette.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Roundness of Line-Segment CornersThis sets the roundness of the corner at which a line turns. The available roundness typesinclude “No Rounding,” “Extremely Small,” “Small,” “Medium,” “Large,” and “ExtremelyLarge.”

■ Specifying DisjointThe disjoint function displays every other polyline that is drawn by clicking the mouse ateach end of the line.

This function can be set only when a polyline graphic object is drawn.

When the disjoint is specified, it is applied to graphic objects. The figure below shows anexample of disjoint.

An example of a drawing with disjoint specification.

An example of a drawing without disjoint specification.

F121308E.EPS

Disjoint line

a b c d e f

An example of a polyline drawn by clicking the mouse from a through f.

a b c d e f

a b c d e f

No skip.

The lines “bc” and “de”are skipped.

Figure Example of Disjoint



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.3 Fill Tab▼ Fill

The Fill tab is used to set the fill types and pattern styles when filling graphic ob-jects.

Fill Type

Sample

Transparent

Fill

Pattern

Foreground

Fill Color

White

Gradation

General TextLine Fill Marker

CloseOK

F121309E.EPS

Default

Red

Graphic Modify

Apply

Figure Fill Tab

■ Fill TypeThe four fill types include [Transparent], [Fill], [Pattern] and [Gradation].

● Transparent

This sets the transparent color to fill an object.

● Fill

This fills an object with a single color. The color can be specified.

● Pattern

This fills an object with a pattern. The pattern’s style as well as its foreground and back-ground colors can be specified.

● Gradation

This fills an object with a gradient.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Fill ColorThis is set when [Fill] is selected. One color can be selected from the color palette.

■ Patterned FillWhen [Pattern] is selected, set the pattern style, the foreground and background colors.

● Foreground Color of Patterned Fill

Set the color of pattern design. One color can be selected from the color palette.

● Background Color of Patterned Fill

Set the background color. One color can be selected from the color palette.

● Style of Patterned Fill

Set the type of pattern design. Up to 53 pattern styles available, including [horizontal],[vertical], [crossed], [slant], [backward slant], [slanted-crossed] and so on.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ GradationGradation may be selected as a kind of filling. The gradation style, gradation type, bright-ness start point and last point may be defined.

● Gradation Style

The gradation style may be selected from the 16 styles provided.

● Gradation Type

The gradation color type may be selected from the 14 types provided.

● Start Point of Brightness

The start point of brightness for the gradation may be specified.

● Last Point of Brightness

The last point of brightness for the gradation may be specified.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.4 Text Tab▼ Text

The Text tab is used to set the format, color and background color of the text.

Whtie

TRUE TypeFixed Pitch

Text Color Sample

BlackBackground Color

Text Angle

ABCabTransparent

Courier New

Lucida ConsoleLucida Sans UnicoTimes New Roman

Courier New Courier New

F121310E.EPS

Text

Size Font StyleBold

UnderlineItalic

26283032

2424

OK

General Text Modify Coordinates Data BindGraphic Modify

0

Font

Close Apply

Figure Text Tab

■ Fixed PitchCheck Fixed Pitch, the font list will be filtered for displaying fixed-pitch font only.

■ TRUE TypeCheck TRUE Type, the font list will be filtered for displaying true type font only.

■ FontA font can be selected from all the fonts installed on the HIS.

■ SizeThe font size can be set.

The available size varies with the type of font.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Font StyleThe bold, italic, and underline can be set for the text.

● Bold Font Formatting

This set whether or not to select a bold font.

● Italic Font Formatting

This sets whether or not to select a italic font.

● Underlined Formatting

This sets whether or not to select an underlined font.

■ Text ColorOne color can be selected from the color palette.

■ Text Background ColorOne color can be selected from the color palette.

■ Transparent Background ColorThis sets the color of text background to transparent.

■ Text AngleThis sets the angle of a character when moving the character with its bottom left corner asthe center of rotation. 0 to 359 degrees can be set. The default setting is 0.

[Text Angle] is not checked for default setting.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.5 Graphic Modify Tab▼ Graphic Modify

The graphic modify is a function that changes the object’s color, blinking status andpattern based on the process data and the conditional formula.

In the Graphic Modify tab, the timing for changing the object, the display status ofthe object such as color, shape and blinking, and conditions to modify the displayattributes of a graphic object may be set.

Always ExecuteModify Condition

1

Change Type

General Text

F121311E.EPS

Ellipse

%SW1418S0102.PV=1

Modify CoordinatesGraphic ModifyFill Data Bind

Condition Number

Color Change

Blink

Data Type Process data

Normal Color Change

Yes White

1

Change Color

Transparent

DeleteChange Add Insert

Conditional Formula

Continue the Conditional Formula Parsing

ApplyCloseOK

No. Color Change Blink Continue Condition1 White Yes No %SW1418S0102.PV=1

Data TypeProcess data

Figure Graphic Modify Tab

When setting the following two objects, definition items specific to each object is added tothe Graphic modify tab.

• For text objectThe definition items, [Modify String] and [Invert String] are available.

• When importing a bitmap file as an objectThe definition item [With Changes in Bitmap] and a [Preview] button are available.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Graphic Modifier FunctionThe Graphic window tests the establishment of the condition in conditional formula at eachwindow update scan cycle. If the conditional formula is satisfied, the object will have anvisible change such as changing color or blinking.

Up to 8 graphic modifier conditions can be set for each graphic object. The graphic modifierconditions are tested in order of the graphic modifier condition number. And if the condi-tional formula is satisfied, a change action corresponding to the conditional formula isexecuted, thereby completing the test. Even when one of the conditions is satisfied, how-ever, this function can continue the conditional formula testing for the next condition num-ber.

■ Change TypeThis sets when to perform the testing on graphic modifier conditions. The execution timingfor the conditional testing can be selected from [Execute Always], or [Execute First TimeOnly].

● Always Execute

While the conditional formula is true, change actions such as change color and blinking orthe default drawing are performed at any given time.

● Execute First Time Only

If the conditional formula is true when the Graphic window is called, change actions suchas change color and blinking is performed only once.

■ Graphic Modifier ConditionThe [Condition Number] item displays the condition number assigned to a graphic modifiercondition currently displayed.

Specifying a condition number using the spin box or selecting a condition from the graphicmodifier condition list view displays the graphic modifier condition corresponding to thecondition number.

• Press the [Add] button to add a new graphic modifier condition. The [Add] button isdisabled when 8 conditional formulas already exist.

• Press the [Change] button to reflect the contents of the graphic modifier conditionchange to the data of current number.

• Press the [Delete] button to delete the graphic modifier condition currently displayed. Ifany of the condition numbers is freed, the remaining numbers will be automaticallyreassigned.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Change ActionAfter a conditional formula is tested, visible change actions on the Graphic window screen,such as change color and blinking are executed in response to the conditional formulas.The available actions include [Color Change], [Blink], [Transparent], [Modify String], [InvertString] and [With Changes in Bitmap]. Multiple actions can be set for an object.

● Change Color

This action changes the color of an object. A change color type can be selected from thefollowing 4 types: [Normal Color Change], [Change Alarm-Specific Color], [OverviewColor], and [No Color Change].

The changed color varies by the type of change color selected.

• Normal Change ColorThis displays an object in the color specified. Select a color from the color palette inthe [Change Color].

• Change Alarm-specific ColorThis displays an object in the alarm color of a function block. Set a tag name of thefunction block in the conditional formula.

• Overview ColorThis displays an object in the alarm color that is subject to monitoring specified by thetag name or window name. The tag name or window name is set in the conditionalformula.

● Transparent

This action makes an object transparent upon satisfaction of modifier conditions.

Upon satisfaction of modifier conditions, a push button object set to be transparent seemshidden in the Graphic window, as shown below:

F121312E.EPS

Label

Push buttonobject

Upon satisfactionof modifierconditions

This broken lineis not displayed.

Figure Push Button Object Upon Satisfaction of Modifier Conditions

Clicking or touching the hidden push button object will not activate the function assigned tothe push button.

The arrow keys on the keyboard cannot be used either to position the cursor over the pushbutton object. The cursor will skip over the object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Blinking

This action makes an object blink (blinking action). A blinking type can be selected from thefollowing 5 types: [Yes], [Alarm Specific Blinking], [Screen Blinking], [Overview Blinking]and [No].

• YesThis enables an object to blink.

• Alarm Specific BlinkingThis makes an object blink according to the alarm status of the function block. Use theacknowledgment key may stop blinking. When this type of blinking is specified, theobject blinks in accordance with the alarm status of the function block used in themodification condition. Other blinking actions designated in the modification conditionbecome invalid.

• Screen BlinkingThis makes an object blink. If this is selected, the object blinking will be stopped whenthe acknowledgment operation is performed. If the status of conditional formulachanges after the acknowledgment operation, the blinking will resume.

• Overview BlinkingA tag name or a window name may be defined in the formula for overview blinking testcondition. The overview will have the same blinking behavior as those for the tagname and the window name defined in the formula.When a tag name is defined in the formula, the graphic object shows ON/OFF blinkingin accordance to the ON/OFF alarm blinking of the instrument faceplate with the tagname. The alarm blinking may be acknowledged by acknowledgment operation.Furthermore, the tag name defined may also be treated as a representative tag namefor the Graphic window.

• NoThis disables an object from blinking.

All colors may be set to blink in Graphic windows;

● Modify String

Only available for text object.

This action changes a character string to another character string. Up to 16 alphanumericcharacters for replacement can be entered.

● Invert String

Only available for text object. This sets the character string to be displayed in reversevideo.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Bitmap Change

This changes the bitmap that has been imported as a graphic object.

When setting the bitmap change, the [Preview] button is displayed on the Graphic modifytab as shown below.

Color ChangeN... Blink Co... Condition

With Changes in Bitmap

Conditional Formula %SW1418S0102. PV=1

Continue the Conditional Formula Parsing

F121313E.EPS

Preview

Data Type Process data Transparent

Figure Items Added When Setting the Bitmap Change

When the change bitmap enabled is set, the [Preview] button is enabled. Use this button todisplay the bitmap preview dialog.

CloseOpen

F121314E.EPS

Bitmap

Figure Bitmap Preview Dialog Box

Select the changed bitmap file, as a file selection common dialog is displayed when the[Open] button is pressed. The selected bitmap is displayed on the bitmap preview dialog.

Use the [Close] button to close the bitmap preview dialog.

TIP

The bitmap change can be set only for bitmaps that have been imported as graphic objects by selecting[Diagram] from the [Insert] menu.

● Data Type

Specify the data type.

The data types include [Process Data], [Recipe Data (Unit Name Specification)], [RecipeData (Batch ID Specification)].



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Continuation/Non-Continuation of Graphic Modifier ConditionalExpression Testing

This sets whether or not to continue testing of the graphic modifier conditional formula.

In the default setting, the testing is performed in sequence, starting from the graphic modifierconditional formula of the condition number 1. If the condition is satisfied, the change actionwill be executed and the graphic modifier conditional formula testing is then completed.

When the continuation of testing is selected, the graphic modifier conditional formula testingis continued even after the condition is satisfied. In this case, all change actions associatedwith satisfied conditions are executed. However, when multiple conditions with the samechange action are satisfied, the execution of the condition of a larger number will precede.

■ Graphic Modifier Conditional formulaThis sets the graphic modifier conditional formula to be used as the criteria of the testingthat is performed when modifying a graphic.

The following can be used for the graphic modifier conditional formula:

• Process data(Example) PIC300.SV

• Integer constant(Example) 100, 0

• Real number constant(Example) 50.0, 0.50

• Hexadecimal constant(Example) 0x0001

• Text constant(Example) MAN, AUT

TIP

When the alarm change color has been set for change color, only the tag name is set as the graphicmodifier conditional formula. When the overview change color has been set as a change color, the tagname or window name is set as the graphic modifier conditional formula.



IM 33S01B30-01E

The condition formula for graphic modification varies with the different data type. Thecondition formulas for different data types are described as follows.

● Process Data

Process data can be used in conditional test formula for graphic modification.

The formula using process data is in “TagName.DataItem” syntax format. When using thedata status of a function block, the formula can be set in “TagName.#DataItem” format.

Up to 45 alphanumeric can be used to script a conditional formula.

Unary operators, comparison operators and brackets can be used for conditional formulas.

• The applicable unary operators are shown below.

+, -, *, /, & (bitwise AND), | (bitwise OR), % (remainder)

• The comparison operators may be applied to conditional formulas are shown below.

=, <> (not equal), >, <, >=, <=, and (AND conditional formulas), or (OR conditionalformulas)

• Actual notation examples are shown below.

FIC100.PV > 50.0FIC100.PV + FIC300.PV <= FIC400.PVFIC100.PV > 50.0 AND FIC200.PV < 20.0FIC100.ALRM = “HI” or “HH”FIC100.AOFS = “AOF”FIC100.#PV = “CAL”%CI0001.PV & 0x00FF <> 0

Block mode, alarm status and block status can be applied as following.

MODEThe mode with highest priority and the mode with lowest priority (String)

ALRMAlarm with highest priority (String)

BSTSBlock status (String)

@MODEMemory image of mode (unsigned integer)

@ALRMMemory image of alarm (unsigned integer)

@BSTSMemory image of block status (unsigned integer)

@ASMemory image of alarm status (unsigned integer)

They can be actually scripted as follows.

FIC100.ALRM=“HI”Since the alarm HH has the highest priority, when HH occurs, this condition will beignored.

FIC100.@ALRM=“HI”This condition exists even when HH occurs.



IM 33S01B30-01E

Total conditional formulas can contain up to 8 data items and a total of 400 alphanumericcharacters.

Examples of setting data and counting data items are shown below.

To display the average of process variables of the TIC100, TIC200, and TIC300,specify as follows:

(TIC100.PV+TIC200.PV+TIC300.PV)/3

In this case, the three data items are used, namely TIC100.PV, TIC200.PV andTIC300.PV.

● Recipe Data Unit Name Specification

When recipe data (Unit name specification) is the selected data type for graphic objectmodification, the graphic calculation may be used. The syntax is as follows.

UnitName.CommonBlockName.DataItem[X,Y]

( X, Y are array data.)

● Recipe Data Batch ID Specification

When recipe data (Batch ID specification) is the selected data type for graphic objectmodification, the graphic calculation may be used. The syntax is as follows.

BatchID.CommonBlockName.DataItem[X,Y]




IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.6 Modify Coordinates Tab▼ Modify Coordinates

The coordinate modifier is the function that moves the display position of a graphicobject according to the change in process data value. The Modify Coordinates tab isused to set conditions for changing display positions of graphic objects.

X 0 Y 0

High limit value Low limit value

Y-axis data

X-axis data

Last Move Position

General Line

CloseOK

F121315E.EPS

Pen

Modify Coordinates


Settings

Graphic Modify

Apply



Data Bind

Figure Modify Coordinates Tab

The moving range of an object includes the initial display position and final movementposition. The initial display position applies when the process data is a minimum valuewhile the final movement position applies when the process data is a maximum value.

The Modify Coordinates tab is used to set the process data that corresponds to changes inthe X-coordinate and Y-coordinate.

TIP

The coordinate modifier cannot be set for a grouped graphic object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Data TypeSpecify the data type.


■ Coordinate Data of Coordinate ModifierThis reference coordinate data is used to determine the display position of a graphic object.The process data or conditional formula can be set for the coordinate data. In addition, thehigh and low limits of the reference coordinate used for the change range of each coordi-nate can also be set.

At least either one of the X-axis data or Y-axis data must be set. The graphic object makesa 2-dimensional move when both axis data are set, and 1-dimensional move when onlyeither one of the coordinate data is set.

The following can be used for a coordinate data:





• Recipe Data (Unit Name Specification)(Example) UNIT01.SYSRCM.STATUS

• Recipe Data (Batch ID Specification)(Example) 01-0041.SYSRCM.STATUS



IM 33S01B30-01E

The coordinate data used for coordinate modification vary with the data types. The types ofthe coordinate data may be applied are explained as follows.

● Process Data

The following two types of formats are used when setting the X-axis data and Y-axis data ofa graphic object. One uses process data while the other uses a conditional formula.

• Setting the format that uses process dataSet process data using the format, “tag name.Data item.” Up to 45 alphanumericcharacters can be entered.

The following are examples of process data settings.

To display the setpoint value (SV) of the PIC300, specify as follows:PIC300.SV

• Setting the format by a calculation formulaUnary operators, comparison operators and brackets can be used in the calculationformula.The applicable unary operators are shown below.

+, -, *, /, & (bitwise “and”), | (bitwise “or”), % (remainder)

Actual notation examples are shown below.

FIC100.PVFIC100.PV + FIC300.PV

One calculation formula may contain up to 8 data items and a total of 400 alphanu-meric characters.


To display the average of process variables of the TIC100, TIC200, and TIC300,specify as follows:(TIC100.PV+TIC200.PV+TIC300.PV)/3

In this case, the three data items are present, namely TIC100.PV, TIC200.PV andTIC300.PV.


When recipe data (Unit name specification) is the selected data type, the graphic calcula-tion may be used. The syntax is as follows.




When recipe data (Batch ID specification) is the selected data type, the graphic calculationmay be used. The syntax is as follows.





IM 33S01B30-01E

■ High and Low Limits of Coordinate DataThe high and low limits of each axis data for a moving object may be set with an up to 9digit numerical value or an graphic generic name. These data indicates the allowed movingrange of the object. When the high and low limits are omitted, the limits will be the valuesfrom the tag list (The user defined range for the tag on the Function Block Detail Builder).

■ Last Move PositionThis is the display position of a graphic object when the process data is a maximum value.To set the final position the object moves to, enter values directly to the spin box or use themouse.

● Entering Values Directly

Enter values for X- and Y-coordinates. The setting range is between -5000 and 3686400.

When manipulating the [�] [▼] spin buttons, setting will be restricted in the range of -5,000to 16,384. A value greater than 16,384 can be Key in directly.

● Using the Mouse for Setting

Press the [Set] button to change the setting mode to the mode using the mouse. The shapeof the cursor changes to the handles used when creating an object, and the button changes to[Exit Setup].



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.7 Marker Tab▼ Marker

The Marker tab is used to set display attributes of markers such as the type, size,and color.

Marker type(M) Marker color(R)

Black

Size(S) 1

Sample

General Marker

CloseOK

F121316E.EPS

Marker

.+

*�

�

Graphic Modify Modify Coordinates

Apply

+

Data Bind

Figure Marker Tab

The sample column displays a marker object based on the contents of the current setting.

■ Marker TypeOne marker type can be selected from the following five types: “., +, *, 0, x.”

■ Marker SizeThe marker size can be set in x 1 to 5 magnification. The table below lists the magnifica-tions and corresponding marker sizes. The unit is in dots.

Table Magnifications and Corresponding Sizes

X 1 .

X 2

X 3

X 4

X 5

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�F121317E.EPS

Note that x 1 is the only available size for the marker “.”.

■ Marker ColorOne color can be selected from the color palette.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.8 Process Data-Character Tab▼ Process Data - Character

The Process Data-Character tab is used to set data type, display data format anddisplay data in order to display the process data or the array data as numeric valuesor character strings.

Display Format

Display Data

Sample

Process Data

7

0

Data Type

Number of Digits for Integer

Number of Digits After the Decimal Point

Specify Position

Type Numerical Value

Right Justification

General Text

CloseOK

F121318E.EPS

Process Data - Character

Graphic Modify


RRRRRRR

Apply

Leading Zero

Display Engineering Unit

Modify Coordinates Data Bind

Figure Process Data-Character Tab

The sample column displays a data character display object based on the contents of thecurrent setting.

TIP

The Process Data-Character tab is a page specific to each data character display object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Display Data FormatThis sets the format, number of digits in integer portion and that in decimal point portion ofthe data to be displayed.

The table below shows the numbers of digits in integer portion and decimal point portion foreach format.

Table Numbers of Digits in Integer Portion and Decimal Point Portion for Each Format of DisplayData

Display data formatNumber of digits in

integer portionNumber of digits in

decimal point portion

Numeric value 1 to 16 0 to 16

Percentage (*1) 1 to 16 0 to 16

Character string 1 to 16 -

Hexadecimal 1 to 16 -

Date 1 to 99 -

Time 1 to 99 -

Tag list (*1) - -

F121319E.EPS

*1: This item is not available be when data type is [Graphic Generic Name].

Besides, the display settings such as alignment, leading zeros and engineering units canalso be defined.

● Display Data Format

This is how to set the format of display data. The display formats include numeric value,percent, text, hexadecimal, date, time and tag list.

• Numeric valueNumeric value is displayed.

• PercentageNumeric data is normalized in its data span and displayed.

• Character stringsCharacter strings are displayed.

• HexadecimalNumeric data is converted into hexadecimal data and displayed.

(Example) 0x0001

• DateNumeric data is converted into a date format and displayed.

(Example) 97/12/01

• TimeNumeric data is converted into a time format and displayed.

(Example) 15:38

• Tag-ListThe display format, the number of digits before and after decimal point and the pro-cess data are based on the settings of the Function Block Detail Builder. While, therecipe data (with unit name or batch ID) are based on the settings of the CommonBlock Builder.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Number of Digits in the Integer Portion of Display Data

From 1 to 99 digits can be set for the number of digits.

However, this item is not available when tag list is selected.

● Number of Digits in the Decimal Point Portion of Display Data

This setting is available when numeric value or percent is selected for the display format.

From 0 to 16 digits can be set for the number of digits.

● Justification of Data Display

The base position of the displayed data.

The Right, Center, or Left Justified may be specified.

● Leading Zero of Data Display

When the digits of a datum less than the specified number of digits, the leading zero maybe specified to be placed before the valid numbers.

The leading zero may only be specified for the data with format type of [Number], [Percent]or Hexadecimal].

● Engineering Unit of Data Display

To show or to hide the symbol of engineering unit symbol may be specified.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Data Type of Data Character DisplaySet the data type of the data to be displayed.

The displayable data types are as follows:

• Process data

• Recipe data (unit name specification)

• Recipe data (batch ID specification)

• Tag Comment

• Graphic generic name

■ Display Data of Data Character DisplayThis sets the data to be displayed as a data character display object.

The following can be used for display data of a data character display.





• Text constant(Example) MAN, AUT

• recipe data (Batch ID)(Example) 01-0041.SYSRCM.RECIPE

Formats for setting the data character display vary according to the data type. The formatsfor each data type are as follows:

● Process Data

When process data is selected as data type, there are two format types; one displays thedata item of one tag, while the other displays the arithmetic expression.

• Setting the format that uses process dataSet process data using the format, “tag name.data item.” Up to 45 alphanumericcharacters can be entered.Process data can be set in all format types.

The following are examples of process data settings.

To display the setpoint value (SV) of the PIC300, specify “PIC300.SV.”

To display the alarm status of the PIC300, specify “PIC300.ALRM.”

To display the pushbutton text, specify “SW100.SWLB[2].”

To display the data displayed in the array, specify “FIC100.IJ[01,02].”



IM 33S01B30-01E

• Setting the format by a calculation formulaThe data can be set using conditional formulas only when numeric value, percent, orhexadecimal is selected for the display data format.Unary operators, comparison operators and brackets can be used in the calculationformula.The applicable unary operators are shown below.


Actual notation examples are shown below.

FIC100.PVFIC100.PV + FIC300.PVFIC500.PV & 0x00FF



To display the average of process variables of the TIC100, TIC200, and TIC300,specify as follows:




The syntax for data setting when [Recipe Data Unit Name Specification] is selected as datatype is as follows. The same syntax may also be applied in a calculation formula.

“Unit name, common block name, data item[X,Y] ([X,Y] are array data)”


The syntax for data setting when [Recipe Data Batch ID Specification] is selected as datatype is as follows. The same syntax may also be applied in a calculation formula.

“Batch ID, common block name, data item[X,Y] ([X,Y] are array data)”

● Tag Comment

The setting format when [Tag Comment] is selected as data type is as follows:

“Tag Name”

● Graphic Generic Name

The syntax for data setting when [Graphic Generic Name] is selected as data type is asfollows. The same syntax may also be applied in a calculation formula.

“Graphic Generic Name”



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.9 Process Data-Bar Tab▼ Process Data - Bar

The Process Data-Bar tab is used to set display method and display data of therectangular bar in order to display process data or the array data in the form of arectangular bar.

Only one process data can be displayed in a rectangular bar.

General Fill

Modify Coordinates

CloseOK

F121320E.EPS

Process Data - Bar

Graphic Modify

Extending Direction of Bar Reference Point

Display Data

Sample

Up

Down

Right

Left

0 point Center


Apply

Process dataData Type

Process Data - Bar Data Bind

Figure Process Data-Bar Tab

The sample column displays process data rectangular bar display object based on thecontents of the current setting.

TIP

The Process Data-Bar tab is a page specific to each data rectangular bar display object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Increase Direction of Rectangular Bar DisplayThis sets the direction in which the rectangular bar data display area extends as dataincreases: up, down, right or left.

UL LU

High limi Low limit

U

L

L

U

Up Down Right Left

F121321E.EPS

U : L :

Figure Bar Extension Direction

■ Reference Point of Rectangular Bar DisplayThis is the reference point for displaying process data using the rectangular bar. Selecteither [0 point] in which the reference point is at one end of the rectangular bar, or [Center]in which the reference point is at the center of the rectangular bar.

F121322E.EPS

0 point: Reference point at one end of the rectangular bar

Center: Reference point at the center of the rectangular bar

: TIC200.PV: 100 �C: –100 �C: 30 �C

100

–100

0 30–100100 0

–100

100

0 30

100–100 0

30 30

: TIC100.PV: 100 �C: 0 �C: 65 �C

100

0

65

0100

0

100

1000

65

65

65

Display data

Low limitHigh limit

Process variable (PV)

Display data

Low limit High limit


Up Down Right Left

Up Down Right Left

Figure Reference Point for Rectangular Bar Display

■ High and Low Limits of Process Data Rectangular Bar DisplaySet 9-digit numerical values or graphic generic names for the high and low limit of the datato be displayed.

If display data has been set using process data, the settings of high and low limits can beomitted. If the settings are omitted, high and low limits are taken from the tag list (The valuerange has been set in the function block detail definition builder).

If display data has been set using a conditional formula, high and low limits must be set.



IM 33S01B30-01E



■ Display Data of Process Data Rectangular Bar DisplayThis sets the data to be displayed as a process data rectangular bar display object.

The following can be used for display data of the process data rectangular bar display:





Formats for setting the rectangular bar display vary according to the data type. The formatfor each data type are as follows:

● Process Data

There are two formats for setting display data of the process data rectangular bar display.One uses process data, while the other uses a conditional formula.

• Setting the format that uses process dataSet process data using the format, “tag name.data item.” Up to 45 alphanumericcharacters can be entered.The following are examples of process data settings.




IM 33S01B30-01E





To display the average of process variables of the TIC100, TIC200, and TIC300,specify as below:






(X, Y are array data.)







IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.10Process Data-Arrow Tab▼ Process Data - Arrow

The Process Data-Arrow tab is used to set display method and display data of thearrow bar in order to display process data in the form of an arrow bar.

Only one process data can be displayed in an arrow bar.

General Fill

Modify Coordinates

CloseOK

F121323E.EPS

Process Data - Arrow

Graphic Modify

Display Data

Sample

High limit value Low limit value100 0

Move Arrow Direction

Up

Down

Right

Left

Arrow Display Position Left

PIC100.PV

Apply


Process Data - Arrow Data Bind

Figure Process Data-Arrow Tab

The sample column displays a process data arrow bar display object based on the con-tents of the current setting.

TIP

The Process Data-Arrow tab is specific to each process data arrow bar display object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Arrow Moving DirectionThis sets the direction in which the data display arrow extends as data increases: up, down,right or left.

L U U L

U

U: High limitL: Low limit

U

L

L

Up Down Right LeftF121324E.EPS

Figure Arrow Moving Direction

■ Display Position of ArrowsThis is the relative position of the arrow to the display bar. The content of the setting variesdepending on the moving direction of an arrow.

When the arrow moves up and down, [Right Arrow] or [Left Arrow] can be selected.

When the arrow moves sideways, [Up Arrow] or [Down Arrow] can be selected.

0 300 0 300

(120) (120)

300

0

300

0

(120) (120)

Right Left Up Down

F121325E.EPS

: FIC100.PV: 300 m /h: 0 m /h3

: 120 m /h3

3Display data

Low limitDisplay data


Figure Display Position of Arrows





IM 33S01B30-01E

■ High Limit and Low Limit of Process Data Arrow Bar DisplaySet 9-digit values or graphic generic names for the high and low limits of the data to bedisplayed.

If data display is set using process data, the settings of high and low limits can be omitted,because the high and low limits are taken from the tag list (user sets the value range in thefunction block detail definition builder).


■ Display Data of Process Data Arrow Bar DisplayThis sets the data to be displayed on a graphic window as a process data arrow bar displayobject.

The following can be used for the display data of a process data arrow bar display:



• Decimal point constant(Example) 50.0, 0.50


Formats for setting the arrow bar display vary according to the data type. The format foreach data type are as follows:

● Process Data

There are two formats for setting the display data of a process data arrow bar display. Oneuses process data, while the other uses a computational formula.





IM 33S01B30-01E


















IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.11 Process Data-Circle Tab▼ Process Data - Circle

The Process Data-Circle tab is used to set data to be displayed in a circular bar thatindicates the data fluctuations by expanding or reducing its radius.

Sample

General Fill

Modify Coordinates

CloseOK

F121326E.EPS

Process Data - Circle

Graphic Modify

Display Data


FIC100.PV

100 0

Apply


Process Data - Circle Data Bind

Figure Process Data-Circle Tab

The sample column displays a process data circular bar display object based on thecontents of the current setting.

TIP

The Process Data-Circle tab is a page specific to each process data circular bar display object.



IM 33S01B30-01E



■ High Limit of Process Data Circular Bar DisplaySet constants (9-digit numerical values) for the high and low limits of the data to be dis-played.

If display data has been set using process data, the settings of high and low limits can beomitted. If the settings are omitted, high and low limits are taken from the tag list.


Display data: PIC100.PV

Low limit: 0 kPaHigh limit: 49 kPa

Process variable (PV): 30 kPaF121327E.EPS

Center of the circle (Low limit of the circular bar display)

Circle with the maximum radius(High limit of the circular bar display) 49

300

Figure Display Example of Circular Bar Display

■ Display Data of Process Data Circular Bar DisplayThis sets the data to be displayed as a process data circular bar display object.

The following can be used for the display data of a process data circular bar display:







IM 33S01B30-01E

Formats for setting the circular bar display vary according to the data type. The format foreach data type are as follows:

● Process Data

There are two formats for setting the display data of a process data circular bar display.One uses process data, while the other uses a conditional formula.




















IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.12Line-Segment Graph Tab▼ Line-Segment Graph

The Line-segment Graph tab is used to set multiple process data or array data to bedisplayed in the line-segment graph format on a graphic window, and to set the colorof the line-segment graph.

Data Definition

No. High Limit Low Limit X-coordinate data

No.

Data Type

High limit value

Low limit value

X-axis data PIC100.PV

0

344

1

Graph Color Black

Line-segment GraphGeneral

CloseOK

F121328E.EPS

Line-segment Graph

Add

Delete

Change

Apply

Process data

Data Type1 344 0 PIC100.PV Process data

Data Bind

List view

Figure Line-Segment Graph Tab

The list view displays the currently set numbers, high/low limits and X axis data.

TIP

The Line-segment Graph tab is common for setting both user-defined line-segment graph object and line-segment graph object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Color of Line-Segment GraphsThis is the color of the line connecting individual data displayed. One color can be selectedfrom the color palette.

■ Display Data NumberUp to 60 data items can be displayed via one line-segment graph object by assigning anumber to each data item.

The [No.] item displays the number assigned to the X axis data (display data) that is cur-rently displayed.

To display X axis data corresponding to a desired “No.” item, specify the “No.” using thespin box, or select data from the X axis data list view.

• To add new X axis data, press the [Add] button. The [Add] button cannot be pressed if60 X axis data items have already been defined.

• To reflect the change in X axis data to the data of the current number, press the[Change] button.

• To delete the X axis data currently displayed, press the [Delete] button. If a free X axisdata number is created, renumbering is done automatically.

■ Data Type of Line-Segment GraphThe data type for displayed data of Line-Segment Graph may be specified.

The data types of Process data, Recipe data (Unit name specification) and Recipe data(Batch ID specification) are supported.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Data Display of Line-Segment GraphThe data for X-axis may be assigned in different ways vary with data types. The supporteddata types are explained as follows.

● Process Data

There is no default setting for the process data on X-axis. It requires assigning the data inthe “TagName.Item” format. The tag name is the tag number for the process data.

This setting is allowed to have up to 45 alphanumeric characters.

An example is as follows. An arithmetic expression cannot be displayed.

When setting the Set Value of PIC300, the setting format is

PIC300.SV


When recipe data (Unit name specification) is the selected data type, the graphic calcula-tion cannot be used. The syntax is as follows.




When recipe data (Batch ID specification) is the selected data type, the graphic calculationcannot be used. The syntax is as follows.



■ High/Low Limits of Display DataFor data displayed, high and low limits may be defined on Y-axis.

When setting the process data or array data limits on Y-axis, up to 9 digits integer orgraphic generic names may be applied.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.13User-Defined Line-Segment Graph Tab▼ User-Defined Line-Segment Graph

The User-defined Line-segment Graph tab may be used for setting the multipleprocess data or array data to be displayed on a Graphic window in line-segmentgraph format.

Data Definition

No.123

High Limit Low Limit X-coordinate data Data Type

No.

Data Type

High limit value

Low limit value


0

344

1

Graph Color Black

User-defined Line-segment GraphGeneral

F121329E.EPS

User-defined Line-segment Graph

Change

ApplyCloseOK

Process data

Data Bind

List view

Figure User-Defined Line-Segment Graphic Tab

The list view displays the currently set numbers, high/low limits and X-axis data.

TIP

The User-defined Line-segment Graph tab is common for setting both user-defined line-segment graphobject and line-segment graph object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Color of User-Defined Line-Segment GraphThe color for each line that represent one item of data to be displayed may be selected onthis tab.

■ Display Data NumberUp to 60 data items may be displayed via one line-segment graph object by assigning anumber to each data item.

[No.] item displays the number for the data of X-axis being currently defined and displayedon the tab.

For setting the process data to the corresponding graph on X-axis, the number of the datalisted in the list view pane may be selected on the spin box.

Clicking the [Apply] button may update the display to reflect the modified information on X-axis.

■ Data Type of User-Defined Line-Segment GraphThe data type for displayed data of User-Defined Line-Segment Graph may be specified.




IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Data Display of User-Defined Line-Segment GraphThe data for X-axis may be assigned in different ways vary with data types.

The supported data types may be assigned are explained as follows.

● Process Data





PIC300.SV













IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.14Bar Graph Tab▼ Bar Graph

The Bar Graph tab is used to set multiple process data or array data to be displayedin a bar graph format on a Graphic window, and the color of the bar graph.

Data Definition

No.1234567

High Limit939939939939939939939

Low Limit0000000

X-coordinate dataFIC100.PVFIC100.PVFIC100.PVFIC100.PVFIC100.PVFIC100.PVFIC100.PV

Data TypeProcess dataProcess dataProcess dataProcess dataProcess dataProcess dataProcess data

No.

Data Type

High limit value

Low limit value

X-axis data FIC100.PV

0

939

1

Graph Color White

Bar GraphGeneral

F121330E.EPS

Bar Graph

Change

ApplyCloseOK

Process data

Add

Delete

Data Bind

List view

Figure Bar Graph Tab


TIP

The Bar Graph tab is a page specific to each bar graph object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Color of Bar GraphsThis is the color of rectangles used to display data. Select one color from the color palette.

■ Display X Axis Data NumberUp to 60 data items can be displayed via a single bar graph by assigning a number to eachdata item.



• To add new X axis data, press the [add] button. The [add] button cannot be pressed if60 X axis data items have already been defined.

• To reflect the change in X axis data to the data of the current number, press the[Change] button.


■ Data Type of Bar GraphThe data type for the data displayed in bar graph format may be specified.




IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Data Display of Bar GraphThe data for X-axis may be assigned in different ways vary with data types.


● Process Data





PIC300.SV













IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.15Step Graph Tab▼ Step Graph

The Step Graph tab is used to set data in order to display the interrelation amongmultiple process data in the step-type graph format on a Graphic window. It sets thecolor of the step-type graph and the data to be displayed.

Data Definition

No.1234567

High Limit344344344344344344344

Low Limit0000000

X-coordinate dataPIC100.PVPIC100.PVPIC100.PVPIC100.PVPIC100.PVPIC100.PVPIC100.PV


No.

Data Type

High limit value

Low limit value


0

344

7

Graph Color Blue

Step GraphGeneral

F121331E.EPS

Step Graph

Change

ApplyCloseOK

Process data

Add

Delete

Data Bind

List view

Figure Step Graph Tab


TIP

The Step Graph tab is a page specific to each step-type graph object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Color of Step-Type GraphsThis is the color of the graph used to display data. Select one color from the color palette.

■ Display Data NumberUp to 60 data items can be displayed via a single step-type graph by assigning a number toeach data item.



• To add new X axis data, press the [Add] button. The [Add] button cannot be pressed if60 X axis data items have already been defined.

• To reflect the change in X axis data to the data of the current number, press the[change] button.


■ Data Type of Step-Type GraphThe data type for the data displayed in step-type graph format may be specified.




IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Data Display of Step-Type GraphThe data for X-axis may be assigned in different ways vary with data types.


● Process Data





PIC300.SV













IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.16Radar Chart Tab▼ Radar Chart

The Radar Chart tab is used to set multiple process data or array data to be dis-played in radar chart format on a graphic window, and the color of the radar chart.

Data Definition

No.1234567

High Limit344344344344344344344

Low Limit0000000

X-coordinate dataPIC100.PVPIC100.PVPIC100.PVPIC100.PVPIC100.PVPIC100.PVPIC100.PV


No.

Data Type

High limit value

Low limit value


0

344

7

Graph Color Red

Radar ChartGeneral

F121332E.EPS

Radar Chart

Change

ApplyCloseOK

Process data

Add

Delete

Data Bind

List view

Figure Radar Chart Tab


TIP

The Radar Chart tab is a page specific to each radar chart object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Color of Radar ChartsThis is the color of the radar chart used to display data. Select one color from the colorpalette.

■ Display Data NumberUp to 60 data items can be displayed via a single radar chart by assigning a number toeach data item.



• To add new X axis data of current setting, press the [Add] button. The button cannotbe pressed if 60 X axis data items have already been defined.

• To reflect the change in X axis data to the data of the current number current setting,press the [Change] button.

• To delete the X axis data currently displayed, press the [Delete] button. The X axisdata numbers are resorted automatically.

■ Data Type of Radar ChartThe data type for the data displayed in radar chart format may be specified.




IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Data Display of Radar ChartThe data for X-axis may be assigned in different ways vary with data types.


● Process Data





PIC300.SV









■ High/Low Limits of Display DataThe process data or array data are displayed in the scale of the high and low limits. For aradar chart, the center of the polygon formed by the radar chart is the low limit.

When setting the process data or array data limits, up to 9 digits integer or graphic genericnames may be applied.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.17Two-Dimensional Graph Tab▼ Two-Dimensional Graph

The Two-dimensional Graph tab is used to set two different items of process data orarray data to be displayed in the two-dimensional graph format on a Graphic win-dow. It sets the display method and the display data when displaying data ongraphs.

Apply

Data Type

Data Type

Process data

Process data

Type

Refresh Rewrite

General Marker

CloseOK

F121333E.EPS

Two-dimensional Graph

Two-dimensional Graph

X-axis data


Y-axis data


Data Bind

Figure Two-Dimensional Graph Tab

TIP

The Two-dimensional Graph tab is a page specific to each two-dimensional graph object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Data Type of Two-Dimensional GraphThe data type for the data displayed in two-dimensional graph format may be specified.


■ Types of Two-Dimensional GraphsThis sets how to add markers when rewriting data on a graph. There are two types ofmarking methods available as shown below.

• RefreshThis deletes the previously drawn markers and displays only the latest values, whenredrawing the marker.

• RewriteThis keeps the previously drawn markers and displays the redrawn markers over it,when drawing the marker.

■ Data Display of Two-Dimensional GraphsThe data for X-axis and the data for Y-axis may be assigned in different ways vary with datatypes.


● Process Data

There is no default setting for the process data on X-axis. It requires assigning the data inthe TagName.Item format. The tag name is the tag number for the process data.

This “TagName.Item” setting is allowed to have up to 45 alphanumeric characters.



PIC300.SV








(X, Y are array data.)

■ High/Low Limits of the Data on X-axis and Y-axisFor data displayed, high and low limits may be defined.

When setting the process data or array data limits, up to 9 digits integer or graphic genericnames may be applied.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.18Control Tab▼ Control

The Control tab sets the type of the control object to be displayed on a Graphicwindow.

Type Acrobat Control for Acti

General Control

CloseOK

F121334E.EPS

Control

Apply

Select

Properties

Figure Control Tab

TIP

The Control tab is specific to the control object.

■ Types of Control ObjectsSet the type of the control object to be displayed on the graphic object.

The control object type is selected in the “insert object” dialog box which appears by click-ing the mouse on the [Select] button.

Create Control

F121335E.EPS

Insert Object

Object Type:

Cancel

OK

CENTUM ControlMarqueeCtl ObjectMicrosoft Animation Control, Version 5.0Microsoft Common Dialog Control, VersionMicrosoft Forms 2.0 CheckBoxMicrosoft Forms 2.0 ComboBox

ActiveXPlugin Object

Inserts a new ActiveXPlugin Object object intoyour document.

Result

Figure Insert Object Dialog Box



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.19Function Tab▼ Function

The Function tab consists of the area used for assigning functions and that forsetting the cursor movement sequence. The setting contents of the area vary withthe functions to be assigned.

The Function tab is used to set functions to be assigned to touch targets, pushbuttons, overview objects and softkeys.

Function Type

System Function Key Name Hard Copy

Execute System Function KeyAssign Function

Cursor Movement Sequence

Display Cursor

0

General Function

CloseOK

F121336E.EPS

Touch Target

Apply

Data Bind

Displayed items vary with the selected function type.

Figure Function Tab

TIP

The Function tab is specific to the objects of touch targets, push buttons, overviews, and softkeys.

IMPORTANT

When saving the settings on the Function tab, an internal script text is created. This scripttext is referred to as Function text string. This Function text string is internally limited by 48alphanumeric characters or 24 double-byte characters. Thus the internally, the script textcreated when saving the settings on the Function tab may exceed the limit especially whengeneric names are used. In this case, a warning message displays. It is necessary tochange the settings so as to reduce the text length accordingly.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Types of Assigning Functions ¡ £This sets the type of functions to be assigned to an object. Functions such as systemfunction key function and Graphic window specific function can be assigned. Some func-tions require setting on the menu page. The available function types are shown below.

• Call window

• Execute the system function key

• Start/Stop/Restart Trend

• Flash/Light/Turn OFF the LED

• Execute the Program by File Name

• Instrument Command Operation

• Call Data Input Dialog

• Call Menu Dialog

• Data-Item Dependent Menu Dialog

• Execute the Multimedia Function

• Report Printout

• Call Panel set (*1)

• Others

*1: ¡ £ The panel set is a function only for the CS 3000.

SEE ALSO

For the details of setting associated with each function, see the followings:

From F12.13.20, “Function Tab [Call Window]”

to F12.13.32, “Function Tab [Others]”

■ Displaying the CursorSet whether or not to display the cursor movement sequence.

■ Cursor Movement OrderThe cursor moves between created touch targets every time the arrow key is pressed onthe Graphic window.

The cursor normally moves from one touch target to the nearest target in order of the targetplacement on the window, starting from the upper left corner. However, a desired move-ment order can also be specified, canceling the order of target placement.

The cursor movement order is specified by assigning priority numbers to the objects. Themovement order number can be set for the objects using an integer within the range from 1to 99999. Priority numbers can be set as many as the number of the objects that havecursor function, drawn in a window.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.20Function Tab [Call Window]This section explains the items to be set when [Call Window] is selected as thefunction type of the Function tab.

■ Assigning the [Call Window] Function to an ObjectThis assigns the [Call Window] function to an object.

The Function tab displayed when the [Call Window] function is selected as the functiontype of the Function tab is shown below.

F121337E.EPS

Assign Function

0

General Function

CloseOK

Touch Target

Function Type

Window Name

Parameter

Specify Window Size

Window Size

Specify Window Display Position

Specify Coordinates Specify Monitor No.

Display Position

Monitor Number

Large Size

Process Alarm

Call Window

X Y0

1

0

Specify Window Display Position

Cursor Movement Sequence

Display Cursor

Apply

Data Bind

Figure Function Tab when [Call Window] is Selected



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Window Type

This sets the type of a window to be called. The setting parameter and window size varywith the window type as shown below.

Table Window Types, Setting Parameters and Window Sizes (1/2)

Window name ParameterWindow size

Large Medium Special

Graphic User-definable window name � � �

Operator guide (*1)

None

� � �

Tag name

Control station name

Plant hierarchy name

Process alarm (*1)

None

� � �

Tag name



F121338E.EPS

{Recipe group number.} batch ID


Process report (*2)

None

� � -TAG{ .sheet name}

IO{ .control station name.elementtype}

Historical message report(*3)

- ��

Tag name



System status overviewdisplay

None

Domain number� � -

System alarm (*1) None

� � �Control station name

None


HIS setup None - - -

FCS status Control station name � � -

�, ��: Window size may be specified.��: Default when window size specification is omitted.-: The window is called up at the default size, disregarding the designation.{}: Omissible*1: May call up the special size window or individual acknowledgment window*2: TAG: Tag Report, I/O: I/O Report*3: Function parameters are omissible



IM 33S01B30-01E

Table Window Types, Setting Parameters and Window Sizes (2/2)

Window name ParameterWindow size

Large Medium Special

Help

None

- - -

Tag name

Window name

U.help number

M.message number

F121339E.EPS

Sequence table status Tag name � � -

None

Recipe group number {.train name}

Batch ID

Recipe group number.batch ID{.train name}

Unit name PRODUCT

Recipe group number.batch ID

Recipe group number.batch ID.unitrecipe number.

Product overview

Product control

Recipe procedure

Unit recipe procedure

� � -

� � -

� � -

� � -

� � -

{Filter ID}Advanced Alarm Filter - - -

� � -

Tuning Tag name � � -

Faceplate Tag name - - -

SFC status

Control drawing status Tag name � � �

Logic chart status display Tag name � � �

Tag name (*1)� � -

Unit name (*2)

SEBOL status display Tag name (*3) � � -

�: Window size can be specified.-: The window is called up at the default size, disregarding the designation.{ }: Omissible*1: SFC function block name for the sequential function chart.*2: Unit name in the unit instrument for the unit procedure.*3: SFC function block name for the SEBOL program



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Parameters for Calling a Window

Set the parameter using 46 alphanumeric characters. This item may be disabled depend-ing on the type of the window selected.

● Window Size

This sets whether or not to specify a window size. When specifying a window size, select awindow size from [Large Size], [Medium Size], or [Special Size]. This item may be disableddepending on the type of the window selected.

If a window display size is not specified, with the some exceptions, the window displays inthe same size of the window where it is called up. The display size saved by the window setfunction is valid only when the window display size specification is omitted.

SEE ALSO

For details on the window size, see the following:

E2.3, “Display Size of Operation and Monitoring Windows”

● Window Display Position (Specify Coordinate)

This sets the display position of a window to be called. Check the [Specify Coordinate]check box.

The following two types of methods are used to set the display position.

• Using the spin boxThis sets the display position, using X- and Y-coordinates. The setting range is be-tween -5000 and 3686400.When manipulating the spin buttons, setting will be restricted in the range of -5,000 to16,384. A value greater than 16,384 can be key in directly.

• Using the mousePress the [Specify window display position] button to enable setting by the mouse.The cursor shape changes as shown below during the setting, and the buttonchanges to [Exit Specification].

F121340E.EPS

Figure Cursor Displayed when Specifying a Window Display Position

The display position reference point is located at the top left corner of the drawing area.

The “setting window display position” is optional. If it is not selected, the window displayposition can not be specified.

● Window Display Position (Monitor Number)

Windows display position can be specified with a monitor number instead of the coordi-nates. If the HIS is installed with Multiple-Monitor Support Package, this setting is required.Check [Specify Monitor No.] check box, and then spin the spin box for setting the monitornumber. 1 or 2 can be selected.

SEE ALSO

For more information about multiple monitors, see the following:

E14, “Multimonitoring”



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.21Function Tab [Execute the System Function Key]This section explains the items to be set when [Execute the System Function Key] isselected as a function type of the Function tab.

■ Assigning a System Function Key to an ObjectThis assigns a system function to an object.

The figure below shows the Function tab when [Execute System Function Key] is selectedas a function type of the Function tab.

Function Type

System Function Key Name

Parameter

Delete Monitor Specified Screen

Execute System Function KeyAssign Function

General Function

CloseOK

F121341E.EPS

Touch Target

0Cursor Movement Sequence

Display Cursor

Apply

Data Bind

Figure Function Tab when [Execute System Function Key] is Selected

● System Function Key Name ¡ £

This sets the type of a system function key.

● Parameter

For the HIS installed with Multiple-Monitor Support Package, the parameter for the function“Delete Monitor Specified Screen” can be entered. In this case, the monitor number isspecified as the parameter.



IM 33S01B30-01E

Table Type of System Function Key Name

System function key name Function of system function key

Hard copyOutputs a hard copy of all the windows displayed including the Windows-based general-purpose application windows.

Buzzer reset Performs buzzer reset operation.

Save window set Saves a dynamic window set.

Delete window set Deletes a dynamic window set.

Window downOf the windows displayed in cascade, moves the window displayed on thetop to the bottom. However, the main window is excluded.

Window upOf the windows displayed in cascade, moves the window displayed at thebottom to the top. However, the main window is excluded.

FocusSwitches the active window between the main window and the secondarywindow displayed on the top. This is enabled only in the full screen mode.

Main window focusSets the main window to active. This is enabled only in the full screenmode.

CirculateSwitches front/back relationship between the operation and monitoringwindows and Windows general-purpose applications.

PrintPrints an active window. This is enabled only when a print button isavailable in the operation and monitoring window to be printed.

Message Printout All message printers are compelled to print out the current messages.

Silence sound output The sound output may be silenced by acknowledging operation.

Panel Set (*1) Graphic window related panel set may be called out.

IsolateThis Isolate function may prevent the windows to be called out by other HIS consoles. The isolation status may be switched.

AcknowledgePerforms alarm acknowledgment operation on alarms related to the activewindow.

Close window Erases all currently displayed windows.

Main window close Closes only the main window. This is enabled only in the full screen mode.

Main window eraseErases the display contents of the main window, and displays an emptywindow. This is enabled only in the full screen mode.

Close Active Window Closes an active window.

History Call SendCalls up the previously displayed operation windows one at time, startingfrom the oldest one.

History Call ReturnCalls back the previously displayed operation and monitoring windows oneat time, starting from the latest one.

Navigator Calls a navigator window.

User in Calls a log-in dialog.

Clear Cancels a selection or input data.

Message monitor window Calls a message monitor window.

System function key name Function of system function key

F121342E.EPS

Shift Screen (*2) Shifts the HIS standard windows displayed in main monitor to sub-monitor.

Exchange Screen (*2) Exchanges the HIS standard windows displayed in main monitor and sub-monitor.

Hard-Copy Sub-monitor (*2) Print screen of the sub-monitor

Delete Monitor Specified Screen (*2) Remove windows by specifying monitor number.

*1: ¡ £ The panel set is a function only for the CS 3000.*2: The function keys can properly function only when the Multiple-Monitor Support Package is installed.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.22Function Tab [Start/Stop/Restart Trend]This section explains the items to be set when [Start/Stop/Restart Trend] is selectedas the function type of the Function tab.

■ Assigning a [Start/Stop/Restart Trend] Function to an ObjectThis assigns to an object the function that controls the trend data acquisition.

The figure below shows the Function tab displayed when [Start/Stop/Restart Trend] isselected as a function type of the Function tab.

This function takes effects only on the batch type trend.

Start

F121343E.EPS

Function Type

Trend Group Name

Parameter

Start/Stop/Restart TrendAssign Function

General Function

CloseOK

Touch Target


Display Cursor

Apply

Data Bind

Figure Function Tab when [Start/Stop/Restart Trend Function] Key is Selected

● Trend Group Name

Enter the name of the trend group subject to start/stop/restart to acquire trend data in 16 orless alphanumeric characters.

● Parameter

This sets the operation command associated with the trend data acquisition. The followingthree types of commands can be set: [Start], [Stop], and [Restart].



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.23Function Tab [LED Flashing/On/Off Specification]This section explains the items to be set when the LED function is selected on theFunction tab.

■ Assigning the LED Flashing/On/Off Specification to an ObjectThis assigns to an object the function that controls the LED’s flashing, on, and off.

The figure below shows the Function tab displayed when [LED Flashing/On/Off Specifica-tion] is selected as a function type of the Function tab.

Flashing

F121344E.EPS

Function Type

LED Number

Parameter

LED Flashing/On/Off SpecificationAssign Function

General Function

CloseOK

Touch Target

1


Display Cursor

Apply

Data Bind

Figure Function Tab when [LED Flashing/On/Off Specification] is Selected

● LED Number

This is the number of an LED to be controlled. Use the spin box to select from numbers 1 to64.

● Parameter

The LED display status can be selected from the following three types: “Flashing,” “On,”and “Off.”



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.24Function Tab [Execute the Program by File Name]This section explains the items to be set when Specify File Name to Execute Pro-gram is selected as the function type of the Function tab.

■ Assigning the Program Execution Function by Specifying a File Name toan Object

This assigns to an object the function that executes a specified function.

The figure below shows the display contents of Function tab when the [Execute the Pro-gram by File Name] is selected as the Function type of the Function tab.

Function Type

Program Name Execute Program by File Name

Assign Function

General Function

CloseOK

Touch Target

Parameter

Specify Parameters

F121345E.EPS


Display Cursor

Apply

Data Bind

Figure Function Tab when [Execute the Program by File Name] is Selected



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Program Name

Up to 46 alphanumeric characters can be entered as a name of a program to be executed.

Note that one space the size of an alphanumeric character is automatically inserted be-tween a program name and a parameter. Therefore, the length of a program name com-bined with a parameter must not exceed 45 alphanumeric characters when specifying aparameter.

TIP

• When an application corresponding to the file type (extension) is registered in Windows, user canspecify the application from a file name. For instance, when Microsoft Word is registered as theapplication program corresponding to the extension “.doc,” Microsoft Word starts up by itself when“xxxx.doc” file is opened directly.

If the program name is too long, do the following:

1. Display the program name in My Computer or Windows Explorer, right click the program name, thenchoose [Create Shortcut] from the popup menu.

2. Open the properties sheet of the shortcut and edit the target description to make sure the programname and the arguments are correctly defined.

The usage of arguments p, s, t are as follows.

Example: “C:\Program Files\YOKOGAWA\program1.exe –p MYPJT –s STN0101 –t FIC100”

3. Move the shortcut file into C:\CS3000\his\users\program folder.

4. When designating program name on Function tab of graphic builder, this shortcut name and its pathcan be defined. No parameter is required.

Example: “C:\CS3000\his\users\program\<Shorcut Name>”

● Specifying a Parameter

This sets whether or not to specify a parameter (program argument) that is passed to theprogram. The parameter setting can be omitted.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.25Function Tab [Instrument Command Operation]This section explains the items to be set when instrument command operation isselected as the function type of the Function tab.

■ Assigning the Instrument Command Operation Function to an ObjectThis assigns to an object a function that sets the status control and data.

The figure below shows the Function tab when the “instrument command operation” isselected as the function type of the Function tab.

Display Cursor

Function Type

Data Type

Data

Acknowledgment

Command Data

Assign Function

General Function

CloseOK

Touch Target

Cursor Movement Sequence 0

F121346E.EPS

Data Type

Conditional Formula

Instrument Command Operation

Process data

With Acknowledgment

Process data

Check when Input

Apply

Data Bind

Figure Function Tab when [Instrument Command Operation] is Selected

● Data Type

Specify the data type of the data to be used as a checking condition.

The data types include [Process Data], [Recipe Data (Unit Name Specification) ] and[Recipe Data (Batch ID Specification)].

● Data

Specify a target of instrument command operation.

FIC300.SV



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Acknowledgment

The Instrument command operation with acknowledgment can be sent to a function block.Select the setting from [With acknowledgment], [With OK acknowledgment] or [No ac-knowledgment].

With [With acknowledgment], an message is displayed to prompt for operator’s acknowl-edgment. It is the same operation as performed on instrument faceplate blocks.

With [With OK acknowledgment], an OK is displayed to prompt for operator’s acknowledg-ment.

With [No acknowledgment], nothing is displayed nor requirement for operator’s operation.The figure below shows examples of message displays for [With acknowledgment] and[With OK acknowledgment].

With acknowledgment With OK acknowledgmentF121347E.EPS

FIC300 OK ?Gas flow rate control

Name: ENGUSER

Reason:

FIC300 Important tag operation ?Gas flow rate control

Name: ENGUSER

Reason:

Figure Operation Acknowledgment Messages

TIP

With enhanced security, user name cannot be entered on confirmation dialog box from release R3.01.

● Command Data

This sets the command contents in a data format, using up to 16 characters of text.

50.0

● Input Check

This sets whether or not to check data at instrument command operation.

● Conditional Formula for Input Check

Up to 400 bytes of text can be entered for the conditional formula used for input check. Theconditional formula must be defined. After checking [Check when Input] option, the [DataType] needs to be specified. This Data Type should be the same data type of [InstrumentCommand Operation].

Further, with the conditional formulas for checking, $$ can be used to describe the data tobe entered in the data input dialog.

$$ > 50.0

SEE ALSO

The description format of a conditional formula is same as that of the modifier conditional formula. Fordetails on the description format, see the following:




IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.26Function Tab [Call Data Input Dialog]This section explains the items to be set when Call Data Input Dialog is selected asthe function type of the Function tab.

■ Assigning [Call Data Input Dialog] Function to an ObjectThis assigns the function that calls up the data input dialog to an object.

The following shows the Function tab when the [Call Data Input Dialog] is selected as thefunction type of the Function tab.

Display Cursor

Function Type

Data Type

Data

Acknowledgment

Assign Function

General Function

CloseOK

Touch Target


F121348E.EPS

Data Type

Conditional Formula

Call Data Input Dialog

Process data

With Acknowledgment

Process data

Check when Input

Apply

Data Bind

Data Entry Dialog Style Normal INC/DEC

Figure The Function Tab when [Call Data Entry Dialog] is Selected

● Data Entry Dialog Style

Set the style of data entry dialog box.

[Normal] or [INC/DEC] can be selected. When [INC/DEC] is selected, the dialog boxsubject to the following restrictions.

• In [Data Type] field, [Process data] is the only option.

• In [Data] field, data is set in TagName.Item format. This setting can not be omitted.

• In [Acknowledgement] field, [With Acknowledgment] is the only option.

• [Check when Input] option box can not be checked.

TIP

When data entry dialog style is INC/DEC, on the graphic window the dialog box behaves as follows:

• Different from standard instrument faceplate, real time data does not update during operation.

• On the dialog box, INC/DCE operation is valid only to the items that can be increased or decreasedon a standard instrument faceplate.

• The number of dialog boxes opened is counted together with the number of faceplates opened.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Data Type



● Data

Specify the data that serves as an object to call up the data input dialog box.

● Acknowledgment

The command operation with acknowledgment can be sent to an instrument. Select thesetting from [With acknowledgment], [With OK acknowledgment] or [No acknowledgment].



With [No acknowledgment], nothing is displayed nor requirement for operator’s operation.The figure below shows examples of message displays for [With acknowledgment] and[With OK acknowledgment]. User name cannot be entered on the dialog box.



Name: ENGUSER

Reason:


Name: ENGUSER

Reason:


● Input Check



Up to 400 bytes of text can be entered for the conditional formula used for input check. Theconditional formula must be defined. After checking [Check when Input] option, the [DataType] needs to be specified. This Data Type should be the same data type of [Call DataInput Dialog].

The description format of a conditional formula is the same as that of modifier conditionalformula. Further, with the conditional formulas for checking, $$ can be used to describe thedata to be entered in the data input dialog.

$$ > 50.0

SEE ALSO

The description format of a conditional formula is same as that of the modifier conditional formula. Fordetails on the description format, see the following:




IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.27Function Tab [Call Menu Dialog]This section explains the items to be set when the Call Menu Dialog function isselected on the Function tab.

■ Assigning the [Call Menu Dialog] Function to an ObjectThis assigns to an object the function that calls the menu dialog box.

The figure below shows the Function tab displayed when the [Call Menu Dialog] function isselected.

Display Cursor

Function Type

Data Type

Data

Acknowledgment

Assign Function

General Function

CloseOK

Touch Target


F121350E.EPS

Data Type

Conditional Formula

Call Menu Dialog

Process data

With Acknowledgment

Process data

Check when Input

Apply

MenuData Bind

Figure Function Tab when [Call Menu Dialog] is Selected

Selecting the [Call Menu Dialog] function displays the menu tab that enables setting associ-ated with the menu window.

SEE ALSO

For the detail setting of the menu, see the following:

F12.13.33, “Menu Tab”

● Data Type



● Data

Specify the data that serves as an object to call up the menu window.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Acknowledgment







Name: ENGUSER

Reason:


Name: ENGUSER

Reason:


● Input Check



Up to 400 bytes of text can be entered for the conditional formula used for input check. Theconditional formula must be defined. After checking [Check when Input] option, the [DataType] needs to be specified. This Data Type should be the same data type of [Call MenuDialog].

The description format of a conditional formula is the same as that of modifier conditionalformula.

SEE ALSO

For details on the description format, see the following:




IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.28Function Tab [Data-Item-Dependent Menu Dialog]This section explains the items to be set when the Data-Item-Dependent MenuWindow is selected as function type on the Function tab.

■ Assigning Data-Item-Dependent Menu Window to an ObjectThis assigns to an object the function that calls up the Data-Item-Dependent Menu Win-dow.

[Data-item-dependent menu window] is a data item setting window to define the data itemsof the SFC block and unit instruments.

The figure below shows the Function tab displayed when the [Data-Item-Dependent MenuWindow] is selected.

Function Type

Data Type

Data

Acknowledgment

Assign Function

General Function

CloseOK

Touch Target

F121352E.EPS

Data Item Dependent Menu Diaiog

With Acknowledgment

0 0

Conditional Formula

X Y

Specify Menu Display Position

Menu Display Position


Display Cursor

Apply

Data Type

Check when Input(H)

Data Bind

Figure Function Tab Displayed when the [Data-Item-Dependent Menu Window] is Selected

● Data Type



● Data

Specify the data that serves an object to call up the data item-dependent menu dialog box.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Acknowledgment







Name: ENGUSER

Reason:


Name: ENGUSER

Reason:


● Input Check



Up to 400 bytes of text can be entered for the conditional formula used for input check. Theconditional formula must be defined. After checking [Check when Input] option, the [DataType] needs to be specified. This Data Type should be the same data type of [Data-Item-Dependent Menu Dialog].

The description format of a conditional formula is the same as that of modifier conditionalformula.

SEE ALSO

The description format of a conditional formula is same as that of the modifier conditional formula. For thedetails of description format, see the following:




IM 33S01B30-01E

● Menu Display Position

The display position of the menu can be preset.

The following two types of methods are used to set a display position.

• Using the spin boxThis sets the display position using X-coordinate and Y-coordinate. The setting rangeis between -5000 and 3686400.

When manipulating the [�] [▼] spin buttons, setting will be restricted in the range of -5,000 to 16,384. A value greater than 16,384 can be Key in directly.

• Using the mousePress the [Menu Display Position] button to enable the setting using the mouse. Thecursor shape changes as shown below during setting, and the button changes to [ExitSpecification].

F121354E.EPS

Figure Cursor Displayed When Setting the Menu Display Position





IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.29Function Tab [Execute Multimedia]This section explains items to be set when execute multimedia is selected as thefunction type of the Function tab.

■ Assigning a Multimedia Task Function to an ObjectThis assigns a multimedia task function to an object.

The figure below shows the Function tab when the [Execute Multimedia] is selected as thefunction type of the Function tab.

Function Type

File Name

Execution Type

Number of Executions

Assign Function

General Function

CloseOK

Touch Target

F121355E.EPS

Execute the Multimedia Function

PLAY

1


Display Cursor

Apply

Data Bind

Figure Function Tab when [Execute Multimedia] is Selected



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Multimedia File Name ¡ £

Enter a file name registered as a multimedia file in Windows. Total size of file name can notbe greater than 39 bytes. The file may be replayed are under the following folders.

• CS 1000: \CS1000\HIS\Media\User (*1)

• CS 3000: \CS3000\HIS\Media\User (*2)

*1: ¡ The folder for replay the files in CS 1000 system.*2: £ The folder for replay the files in CS 3000 system.

● Playback Operation of Multimedia Task Message

Select multimedia task message play operation from [PLAY], [REPEAT] and [STOP].

When choosing [STOP], the file name can be omitted, in this case all files will stop.

IMPORTANT

When [REPEAT] is selected as play operation, make sure to assign [STOP] task to anotherfunction key. If not, the multimedia message will not stop.

● Number of plays of multimedia task message

Set the number of executions when playing back multimedia task messages. It can be setfrom 1 to 3 times. When the number of playbacks setting is omitted, the message is playedonly once.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.30Function Tab [Report Printout]This section explains the setting items when Report Printout is selected as thefunction type of the Function tab.

■ Setting when Assigning the Report Printout Function to an ObjectAssign the report printout function to an object.

The tab when [Report Printout] is selected as the function type of the Function tab is asshown below.

Function Type

Print Report Name

Output

Parameter

Display Cursor


Assign Function

General Function

CloseOK

F121356E.EPS

Touch Target

Report Printout

Printer

Apply

Data Bind

Figure The Function Tab when [Report Printout] is Selected

● Print Report

Set the name of the report to be printed.

Example : recipe - report A

● Output

Set the output destination of the report. The [Printer] or [File] menu may be clicked forspecifying output destination. If the [Printer] is selected, the default printer of the HIS will beused.

● Parameter

Set the parameter of the output destination.

Example : Printout of a recipe batch report with system default settings.-b12345678

TIP

Total size of [Print Report Name] and [Parameter] can not be greater than 32 bytes.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.31Function Tab [Call Panel Set]This section explains the setting items when [Call Panel Set] is selected as thefunction type of the Function tab.

■ Setting when Assigning [Call Panel Set] to an Object £Assign the [Call Panel Set] function to an object.

The tab when [Call Panel Set] is selected as the function type of the Function tab is asshown below.

Function Type

Panel Set Name

Display Cursor


Assign Function

General Function

CloseOK

F121357E.EPS

Touch Target

Call Panel Set

Apply

Data Bind

Figure Function Tab when [Call Panel Set] is Selected

The panel set name may be specified on the tab when [Call Panel Set] function is selected.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.32Function Tab [Others]This section explains the setting items when Others is selected as the function typeof the Function tab.

■ Setting when Assigning [Others] to an ObjectAssign the [Others] function to an object.

The tab when [Others] is selected as the function type of the Function tab is as shownbelow.

Function Type

Parameter

Display Cursor


Assign Function

General Function

CloseOK

F121358E.EPS

Touch Target

Others

Apply

Data Bind

Figure The Function Tab when [Others] is Selected

By entering parameters at the specified format, the same function as menu items otherthan [Others], such as calling an window and executing a function key, can be executed.Specify parameters using up to 48 bytes character strings.

Example1:Call the Control Drawing Status Display window where the FIC300 tag name is defined.Specify a special size as the display size.

O�FIC300�DRAW�-SC

Example2:

Hand over [EVENT01] event text string to ActiveX control.

D�EVENT01

Parameters of multiple functions cannot be specified at the same time.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.33Menu Tab▼ Menu

The Menu tab is used to set the touch target, push buttons, overview objects, andthe menu window called up from the softkey.

The Menu tab is enabled only when the menu [Call Menu Dialog] is selected on theFunction tab.

Menu data

Clear(E)

Change(L)

Specify Menu Display Position

No.123456

Label Data

No.

Label

Data

1

Input Data Type(I) Label Text

Menu Display Position(M) YX 00

General Function

CloseOK

F121359E.EPS

Touch Target

Apply

MenuData Bind

List view

Figure Menu Tab

The list view display the menu number, label character string, and specified data that arecurrently set.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Menu DialogThe menu dialog is called by the touch operation of an object.

Each item displayed in the menu represents the input data.

Switch1

When the entered data type is “Menu Number.”

Switch2

Menu dialog1 2

Switch off

AUT

When the entered data type is “Label Text String.”

MAN

Menu dialog

CAS

SV

1.0m

Menu dialog

Level LL

When the entered data type is “Specified Data.”

Level L

Level M

Level H

Level HH

(20)

(30)

Data

(50)

(70)

(80)

F121360E.EPS

When select the first data on the menu, 1 becomes the data.

When select the text string for label, AUT becomes the data.

20 becomes the specified data.

Touch area

Touch area

Touch area

Figure Explanation of the Menu Dialog

Select data from the menu to send the selected menu data to the command operationdestination that is set in the Function tab.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Input Data TypeThis is the type of the menu data that are sent to a command operation destination whenthe menu is selected. Select one type from [Menu Number,] [Label Text String,] and[Specified Data.]

■ Menu Display PositionThe display position of the menu can be preset. The following two types of methods areused to set a display position.

• Using the spin boxThis sets the display position using X-coordinate and Y-coordinate. The setting rangeis between -5000 to 3686400. You can use the spin box button when the value isbetween -5000 and 16384. When the value exceeds 16384, enter the value using thekeyboard.

• Using the mousePress the [Menu Display Position Specification] button to enable the setting using bythe mouse. The cursor shape changes as shown below during setting, and the buttonchanges to [Exit Specification].

F121361E.EPS

Figure Cursor Displayed when Specifying the Menu Display Position





IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Menu DataThis is the data to be displayed in the menu window. The menu data consists of menunumber, label character string and specified data. Set each data individually.

● Menu Number

Up to 64 individually numbered menu data can be displayed in the menu window.

The [No.] item displays the number to be assigned to the currently displayed menu data.Specify [No.] using the spin box, or select data from the menu data list view, to display themenu data corresponding to the [No.]

• To reflect the changed contents of the menu data to the menu data of current number,press the [Change] button.

• To delete the menu data currently displayed, press the [Clear] button. Deleting thedata will leave the menu data field blank since an empty field is allowed in the menunumber setting. The numbers will not be re-sorted automatically.

● Label Character String

This is the label attached to identify each menu data. Up to 16 characters can be entered.

● Specified Data

This is the command data to be sent to the command operation destination. This is enabledwhen the specified data is selected as the input data type. Up to 16 characters can beentered.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.34Faceplate Block Button Tab▼ Faceplate Block Button

The faceplate block button tab is used to set the function to be assigned to thefaceplate block button. For the faceplate block button, associated window are called.

Apply

Parameter(P)

General

CloseOK

F121362E.EPS

Faceplate Block Button

Faceplate Block Button

Display Cursor

Cursor movement(O) 0

Data Bind

Figure Faceplate Block Button Tab

● Parameter

This sets a tag name to be assigned to the faceplate block button. The following are the inputformats.

T.PVnn or T.pvnn, T.MVnn or T.mvnn

T: Tag name

nn: 01 to 99 (Specify a data item that corresponds to the button to be displayed.)

● Displaying the Cursor

Set whether the cursor movement sequence of the faceplate is displayed or not.

● Cursor Movement Order

The cursor moves between created touch targets every time the arrow key is pressed onthe Graphic window.

The cursor normally moves from one touch target to the nearest target in order of targetplacement on the window, starting from the upper left corner. However, a desired move-ment order can also be specified, overriding the cursor movement order by target place-ment.

The cursor movement order is specified by assigning priority numbers to the objects. Themovement order number can be set for the objects using an integer within the range from 1to 99999. Priority numbers can be set as many as the number of the objects that havecursor function, drawn in a window.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.35Label Tab▼ Label

The Label tab is used to set the label, label color, safety guard to be attached to thepushbutton object.

Setting on the Label tab is enabled only when drawing a pushbutton object.

Apply

Label Text(B)

White

Attach guard(G)

with Illumination(I)

General Function

CloseOK

F121363E.EPS

Push Button

Label Data Bind

Figure Label Tab

TIP

The Label tab is a page specific to each pushbutton object.

■ Label Character StringThis is the name displayed on the pushbutton. Up to 10 double-byte characters can beentered for setting.

■ Coloring the LabelThis sets whether or not to add color to the label.

If the [with illumination] check box is checked, a graphic modification tab is added to theproperty menu setting dialog box.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Label ColorThis is enabled only when [With Illumination] is set. One color can be selected from thecolor palette.

■ Attaching a Guard to a PushbuttonThis sets whether or not to attach a safety guard to a pushbutton. The pushbutton with aguard becomes a two-push button. The first push releases the operation guard, and thesecond push executes the function. The label character string is grayed out when it isdisplayed with the operation guard frame.

Trend

F121364E.EPS

Operation guard

Figure Pushbutton with the Guard



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.36Instrument Diagram Tab▼ Instrument Diagram

The Instrument Diagram tab is used to set the function block instrument diagram tobe displayed on the Graphic window, its display contents, size, and tag name.

Apply

Sample

Instrument Diagram Width1-Width

2-Width

Operation Control Ke.

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

Tag Name

Normal

Compact Type

Display Format

General

CloseOK

F121365E.EPS

Instrument Diagram

Instrument Diagram Data Bind

Figure Instrument Diagram Tab

TIP

The Instrument Diagram tab is a page specific to each instrument diagram object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Instrument Diagram Display TypeThe display content of an instrument diagram differs by the type of a faceplate. Select eithernormal type or compact type.

• NormalThe entire display contents of the instrument diagram are displayed in full.

• CompactThe display contents of the instrument diagram are simplified. In compact type, thedigital display of data is no longer available.

The size of both full and compact types can be changed. However, the vertical to horizontalratio is fixed in both types.

■ Width of the Instrument DiagramThis sets whether the instrument diagram is displayed in default width (single-width) or indouble width. However, even if the double width is specified, the actual HIS display mayonly be in single-width (default size) depending on the type of an instrument faceplate.

■ Operation KeyThe operation key (INC/DEC key) on the console type HIS may be specified for the corre-sponding instrument faceplates on the display position 1 to 8. For the double-width instru-ment faceplate, it may be specified to the adjacent two positions. Thus, on position 8, thedouble-width instrument faceplate can not be assigned. For example, if position 3 and 4 areavailable, it may be specified on position 3.

■ Instrument Diagram Tag NameEnter text for the tag name of an instrument diagram to be displayed.

SEE ALSO

For the details of instrument diagrams, see the following:

E8, “Instrument Faceplate”



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.37Window Tab▼ Window

The Window tab is used to set the window display timing and the display conditionsin order to display in the window display object the window that satisfies the condi-tion.

Apply

Window Name(N)

Display in the default size(I)

Condition Display

General

CloseOK

F121366E.EPS

Window

Window

Display Timing(D)

Data Type

Display

Data Bind

Figure Window Tab

TIP

The Window tab is a page specific to each window object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Window Name of Window DisplayEnter the name of the window to be called and displayed. Up to 48 alphanumeric charac-ters can be entered.

■ Timing of Window DisplayThe display content of an instrument diagram differs depending on the window displaytiming. Select either initial display or conditional display as a display timing.

• Initial displayIf “Initial display” is selected, the specified window will be displayed when the Graphicwindow is called.

• Conditional displayWhen “Conditional display” is selected, the specified window will be displayed if thecondition based on the conditional formula is satisfied, and erased if not.

■ Data Type of Window DisplayThe data type for window display conditional formula may be specified.


The data type for window display conditional formula may be defined only when [ConditionDisplay] is selected for setting the graphic display timing.

■ Display Condition of Window DisplayThis is the conditional formula to be set when [Condition display] is selected as a windowdisplay timing.

User can set a conditional formula which is the same as that of modifier conditional formu-las.

SEE ALSO

For details of the conditional formula , see the following:


■ Default Size Display of Window DisplayThis sets whether or not to display the window in the HIS default size.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.38Dialog Name Tab▼ Dialog Name

The Dialog Name tab is used to set the tag name or batch ID of the function blockthat generates a request to display a dialog box on the graphic window. When thefunction block specified by a tag name or batch ID generates a request to display adialog described by SEBOL, the dialog name is displayed on the Graphic window.

Apply

Key

General

CloseOK

F121367E.EPS

Dialog Name

Text Dialog Name

Tag Name

Key Type

Batch ID

Data Bind

Figure Dialog Name Tab

TIP

The Dialog Name tab is a page specific to dialog name object.

■ Key TypeSet the key type to designate the function block to initiate a request to display a dialog box.As the key types, select the tag name or the batch ID.

■ KeySet the function block that initiates a request to display a dialog box. Setting method varieswith the key type.

When [Tag Name] is selected, syntax check is performed on entered the character string.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.39Message Tab▼ Message

The Message tab is used to set the type of messages to be displayed, the displayarea and the range to collect those messages.

Apply

ViewColumn Number(D) Number of Lines(N)

Specify Message Number(E)Message Number(M)

Message Type(T) Process Alarm

Message Range(S) Station

1

6 1

Parameter(P)

General Text

CloseOK

F121368E.EPS

Message

Message Data Bind

Figure Message Tab

TIP

The Message tab is a page specific to message object.

■ Message TypeThe three types of messages, [Process Alarm Message], [Operator Guide Message], and[System Alarm Message] can be displayed in the Graphic window.

■ Column Number of a MessageA message can be displayed up to the full width of the drawing display area. This sets thenumber of characters (number of digits) of a message to be displayed in one line. Thenumber of digits is set by the number of alphanumeric characters. The maximum number ofdigits for a message that can be set is determined by the size of the graphic window to becreated (set in the attribute tab of the file information property sheet).



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Number of LinesThis sets the number of lines used to display a message. The maximum number of linesthat can be set is up to the height of the window.

■ Message Collection RangeThis sets the search range and data when collecting messages. Setting items differ de-pending on the collection range.

● Message Range

This is the search range used when collecting messages. Select the range from [Project],[Station], [Tag], [Plant Hierarchy], or [No specified]. If [No specification] is selected, allmessages generated will be collected.

Only [Project], [Station] and [No specification] can be set for message range when thesystem alarm message is selected.

● Parameter

When specifying items other than [No specification] at the Message Range, enter a projectID, a station name, a tag name or a plant hierarchy name as the scope of retrieving data toacquire messages.

The maximum numbers of alphanumeric characters that can be entered for the parameterare as follows:

• Project ID: 2

• Station name: 8

• Tag name: 25

When specifying a control drawing to a plant hierarchy, use the following format:

%DRnnnnSddss01

Area name (fixed to 01)Station number (2digits)Domain number (2digits)Fixed to “S”Control drawing number (4digits)Fixed to “DR”Always put “%” at the top of the control drawing name

F121369E.EPS

Figure Parameter Format

■ Setting a Message NumberThis sets whether or not to specify a system alarm message to be displayed, when thesystem alarm message is selected as a message type.

To specify a particular system alarm message, set the system alarm message number tobe displayed.

(Example) To display the system alarm message No. 100 : 100



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.40Trend Tab▼ Trend

The Trend tab is used to set the tag name or the Trend window name of a trend pointto be displayed as a trend object.

Apply

Display Type

Tag Name.Data Item

Sampling Period

Trend Point

1 Second

General

CloseOK

F121370E.EPS

Trend

Trend Data Bind

Time Axis x1

Figure Trend Tab

If Tuning Trend is chosen for Display Type, the Trend tab displays as follows.

Apply

Display Type

Tag Name

Time Axis

Tuning Trend

x1

General

CloseOK

F121378E.EPS

Trend

Trend Data Bind

Figure Trend Tab Display for Tuning Trend

TIP

The Trend tab is a page specific to trend object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Trend Data TypeTrend Point, Trend Group and Tuning Trend are the trend data types can be displayed onGraphic windows.

■ Display TypeFor Display Type field, Trend Point, Trend Group or Tuning Trend listed in the combo boxcan be selected.

● Trend Point

If the trend point is selected as a display type, select the trend data to be displayed from theprocess data that have been assigned to the trend gathering pen via the “Trend AcquisitionPen Assignment Builder,” and set it in the “tagname.data item” format.

● Trend Group

Set the trend window name to display the trend group.

● Tuning Trend

When Tuning Trend is chosen as Display Type, a tag name needs to be defined.

■ Sampling PeriodThis setting is available only when Display Type is set with [Trend Point].

When the same tag name is assigned to trend gathering pens in different sampling period,specify the trend sampling period to particularize a trend gathering pen.

SEE ALSO

For trend gathering pens, see the following:

E9, “Trend Recording”

■ Time AxisSet a zoom level for Time Axis to this field.

SEE ALSO

For more information about time axis, see the following:

E4.3, “Tuning Window”



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.41Overview Tab▼ Overview

The Overview tab is used to set the monitoring target to be assigned to an overviewobject. It also sets the properties of the display data and the presence/absence of analarm notification according to the selected monitoring target.

Apply

Type

Tag Name

First Line Display Type

Alarm Specific Blinking

Specify font

Tag Name

Tag Name

General Function

CloseOK

F121371E.EPS

Overview

Overview Data Bind

The display items vary with display types.

Figure Overview Tab



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Monitoring Target of an Overview ObjectThe items may assigned as overview objects are shown as follows.

● Type

This sets the type of a monitoring target to be assigned to an overview object. [Tag name],[Tag name (with tag mark)], [Window name], [Annunciator] and [Comment] can be selectedas a monitoring target.

The table below lists the types of monitoring targets and the setting items for each target.

Table Types of Monitoring Targets and Corresponding Setting Items

Monitoring targettype

1st line displaytype

Assigned data2nd line display

dataWindow to be

displayed

Tag nameTag name

Tag commentTag name - Mandatory

Tag name(with tag mark)

Tag mark and tag nameTag mark and tag comment

Tag name - Mandatory

Window nameWindow name

Window commentWindow name -

AnnunciatorAnnunciator

MessageAnnunciator name Optional

Optional

Mandatory

Comment CommentComment character

string- Mandatory

F121372E.EPS

-: Indicates that data entry is not allowed.

SEE ALSO

For the detail of setting corresponding to various types of overview objects, see the followings:

From F12.13.42, “ Overview Tab [Tag Name]”

to F12.13.45, “Overview Tab [Comment]”

● Alarm Blinking

Checking the [Alarm-specific Blinking] check box will enable the overview objects to indi-cate the blinking status of the tag name or the window name, allowing the alarm to beacknowledged.

● Specify a Font

Checking [Specify font] check box enables to specify font displayed on overview object.

The following three items need to be defined.

• Font type

• Font size

• Font style



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.42Overview Tab [Tag Name]This section explains the items to be set when Tag Name is selected as a monitoringtarget on the Overview tab.

■ Setting When [Tag Name] is Selected as a Monitoring Target of anOverview Object

This sets the tag name to be assigned to an overview object, the data to be displayed, andthe presence/absence of alarm notification.

The figure below shows the Overview tab displayed when [Tag Name] is selected as amonitoring target.

Apply

Type

Tag Name


Alarm-specific Blinking

Specify font

Tag Name

Tag Name

General Function

CloseOK

F121373E.EPS

Overview

Overview

FIC100

Data Bind

Figure Overview Tab when [Tag Name] is Selected



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Tag Name

Enter text for the tag name to be assigned to an overview object. Up to 25 alphanumericcharacters can be entered.

● First Line Display Label

Select either a tag name or tag comment as a label to be displayed in the first line of anoverview object.

● Presence/Absence of Alarm Notification

This sets whether or not to perform alarm notification in case an alarm is activated at theoperation and monitoring destination. Alarm notification is given by blinking of an overviewobject. The alarm may be acknowledged via the operation on HIS.

● Setting Font Attributes

When checking the “Specify font” check box, the Text tab is added to the Overview propertysheet.

The type, size and style of font of character displayed at an overview object can be speci-fied at the Text tab.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.43Overview Tab [Window]This section explains the items to be set when window is selected as a monitoringtarget on the Overview tab.

■ Setting when the [Window] is Selected as a Monitoring Target of anOverview Object

This sets a window name to be assigned to an overview object, data to be displayed, andthe presence/absence of alarm notification.

The figure below shows the Overview tab when [Window] is selected as a monitoringtarget.

Apply

Type

Window name


Display data on the second line(S)


Specify font

Window name

Window name

GR0001

PID100.PV

General Function

CloseOK

F121374E.EPS

Overview

Overview Data Bind

Figure Overview Tab when [Window] is Selected



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Window Name

Enter text for the window name to be assigned to an overview object. Up to 16 alphanu-meric characters can be entered.


Select either a window name or window comment as a label to be displayed in the first lineof an overview object.

● Second Line Display Data

This sets process data and other data such as messages to be displayed in the second lineof an overview object, using the “Tagname.data item” format. Up to 45 alphanumericcharacters can be entered.

The second line display data is displayed under the first line display label.


This sets whether or not to perform alarm notification in case an alarm is activated at theoperation and monitoring destination. The alarm notification is given by blinking of anoverview object.


When checking the [Specify Font] check box, the Text tab is added to the Overview prop-erty sheet.




IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.44Overview Tab [Annunciator]This section explains the items to be set when Annunciator is selected as a monitor-ing target on the Overview tab.

■ Setting when [Annunciator] is Selected as a Monitoring Target of anOverview Object

This sets an annunciator message name to be assigned to an overview object, data to bedisplayed, and the presence/absence of alarm notification.

The figure below shows the Overview tab when [Annunciator] is selected as a monitoringtarget.

Apply

Annunciator

Annunciator Message

AN0001

PID100.PV

General Function

CloseOK

F121375E.EPS

Overview

Overview

Type

Annunciator Name


Display data on the second line(S)


Specify font

Data Bind

Figure Overview Tab when [Annunciator] is Selected



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Annunciator Name

Enter text for the annunciator message name to be assigned to an overview object. Up to25 alphanumeric characters can be entered.


For a label to be displayed in the first line of an overview object, select the annunciatormessage from the drop down combo box.

● Second Line Display Data

This sets process data and messages to be displayed in the second line of an overviewobject, using the “Tagname.data item” format. Up to 45 alphanumeric characters can beentered.

The second line display data is displayed under the first line display label.


This sets whether or not to perform alarm notification in case an alarm is activated at theoperation and monitoring destination. Alarm notification is given by blinking of an overviewobject. The alarm message may be acknowledged by the acknowledge operation on anHIS.


When checking the “Specify font” check box, the Text tab is added to the Overview propertysheet.




IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.45Overview Tab [Comment]This section explains the items to be set when [Comment] is selected as a monitor-ing target on the Overview tab.

■ Setting when [Comment] is Selected as a Monitoring Target of anOverview Object

This sets the comment to be assigned to an overview object and the presence/absence ofalarm notification. The figure below shows the overview tab when the comment is selectedas a monitoring target in the Overview tab.

Apply

Comment

Comment

General Function

CloseOK

F121376E.EPS

Overview

Overview

Type

Comment



Specify font

Data Bind

Figure Overview Tab when [Comment] is Selected



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Comment

Enter text for the comment name to be assigned to an overview object. Up to 16 alphanu-meric characters can be entered.


For a label to be displayed in the first line of an overview object, select a comment from thedrop down combo box.


This sets whether or not to perform alarm notification in case an alarm is activated at theoperation and monitoring destination. Alarm notification is given by blinking of an overviewobject.


When checking the [Specify font] check box, the Text tab is added to the Overview propertysheet.




IM 33S01B30-01E

F12.13.46Data Bind Tab – Object Properties▼ Data Bind

This section explains the items to be set on Data Bind tab.

On Data Bind tab, the bindings, variants bound to the generic names of objects, canbe defined.


F121377E.EPS

General Text Graphic Modify

Modify Coordinates

ApplyCloseOK

Data Bind

Set No.

Comment

$TAG_1

$TAG_1 FIC101$TAG_2 FIC201$TAG_3 FIC301


1 Set

Generic

Set an individual generic

Initial

Gener... Initial value

FIC101

SET01

PLANT-A

Figure Data Bind Tab

In the list box of the Data Bind tab, the bindings of the object’s generic name are displayedin List View.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Settings on Data Bind TabSettings on Data Bind tab are explained as follows.

● Set No.

Set of graphic generic names can be numbered from 1 to 200.

● Set

The name of the set can be defined on file Properties tab, the defined set name is dis-played on this tab but can not be edited on this tab.

SEE ALSO

For more information about Set, see the following:


● Comment

The description about this set be entered on file Properties tab, the entered text is dis-played on this tab but can not be edited on this tab.

SEE ALSO

For more information about Comment, see the following:


● Set an Individual Generic Name

Checking this item, the object graphic generic names and their corresponding bindings canbe defined.

When checking this [Set an Individual Generic Name] item, the bindings defined on DataBind tab for in file Properties tab can not be changed, the generic names can not be modi-fied any more.

● Generic Name

The generic name selected from the list will be displayed.

SEE ALSO

For more information about Generic Name, see the following:

“■ Graphic Generic Name” in F12.3, “Data Bind”

● Binding

The variant bound to the selected generic name will be displayed.

SEE ALSO

For more information about Binding, see the following:

“■ Variants Bound to Graphic Generic Names” in F12.3, “Data Bind”


F12-258

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.14 User-Defined Faceplate>

F12.14 User-Defined FaceplateThe user-defined faceplate is a Graphic window similar to an instrument faceplate,which can be freely created by the user. The window type is created in a “Graphicwindow.” The user can create a Graphic window for calling up a user-defined face-plate, and then can call up a user-defined faceplate by defining window call func-tions such as Touch Target.

■ Creating a User-Defined Faceplate▼ Creating a User-Defined Faceplate

The following steps are required to create a user-defined faceplate:

1. Define the display specifications of a user-defined faceplate.

2. Define the operation specifications of a user-defined faceplate.

3. Define the graphic generic name to be used for a user-defined faceplate.

The above steps is performed using the Linked Part. Only graphic generic names are usedon linked parts without using tag names or item names.

SEE ALSO

For details on the Linked Part function, see the following:


4. Place linked parts in a Graphic window for user-defined faceplates.

5. Define a generic name set.

The work in steps 4 and 5 is performed using Graphic Builder. Place the linked parts cre-ated in steps 1 through 3 above in the Graphic window. Subsequently, create a genericname set and specify a tag name and an item name.

■ Example of a User-Defined FaceplateThe following shows a display example of a user-defined faceplate that has been created.

USERDEFINED01 User-Defined01

Ready

TAGNAME

MANNR CAL AOF

%

27.3

PVGraphicalParts SV

MV

76.0

100.0

13:27 13

TAG COMMENT

F121401E.EPS

Figure Display Example of a User-Defined Faceplate


F12-259

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.14.1 Analog User-Defined FaceplateThis section explains how to create an analog user-defined faceplate.

In the following explanations, a character string starting with “$” represents a ge-neric name. Although the window body is created using Graphic Builder, the cre-ation of parts to be placed in the window as linked parts is done with considerationfor the degree of necessity.

SEE ALSO

For details on the Linked Part function, see the following:


■ Displayed PartsThe following shows an example of an analog user-defined faceplate. This example ex-plains how to create an analog user-defined faceplate.


Ready

TAGNAME

MANNR CAL AOF

%

27.3

PVGraphicalParts SV

MV

76.0

100.0

13:27 13

TAG COMMENT

F121402E.EPS

Rectangle that blinksin case of alarm (*1)

Trend (*2)

Tag comment

Graphical parts

Instrument display part (*3)

Status display part (*4)

Parameter display part (*5)

Tag name

Figure Example of Analog User-Defined Faceplate Creation

(*1) Graphically indicates the alarm statuses of function blocks and elements.(*2) Monitors the statuses of function blocks and elements in time series. Expands the window by clicking.(*3) From the left

(1) Indexes (process value)(2) PV value bar (process value)(3) SV value bar (process value)(4) Scale(5) MV value bar (process value)Expresses process values graphically. In the same manner as the instrument faceplate, the INC/DEC Operation dialogbox can be called up by clicking any bar. With this dialog box it is possible to perform fine adjustments of set values.

(*4) Indicates the statuses of function blocks and elements in digital display. The status can be changed by clicking.(*5) Shows process values in digital display. The entry zone for data input can be called up by clicking.


F12-260

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Creating the Window

The window is created with Graphic Builder.

Specify black as the background color of the process data display (instrument display part,status display part, and parameter display part). To do so, place a rectangle on the displayarea, and fill it with black. This makes each part sharp, thereby improving visual recogni-tion.

Table Setting Items of the Window

Part

File Properties Attribute

Window Type

Size

Screen Update Cycle

Window Background Color

Graphic window

320 x 400

x 1

Gray 25

Approx. 1/8 the size of(1280 x 1024)

ItemTab RemarkSet value

F121403E.EPS

● Creating the Tag Name and the Tag Comment

A tag name and a tag comment are set in a generic name, and the value of that genericname is displayed in a string.

Table Setting Items of the Tag Name and the Tag Comment

Part

ProcessData-Character


Type


Data Type

Display Data

String

16

Graphic Generic Name

$TAG

$TAGCOMMENT

Sets the display format.

For the tag name

For the tag comment

ItemTab RemarksSet value

F121404E.EPS


F12-261

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Operation of a Rectangle that Blinks in Case of Alarm

The alarm statuses of function blocks and elements are monitored. When the rectangle isclicked with the mouse, the Tuning window is displayed. Using this window, the applicablefunction blocks and elements can be controlled.

● Creating a Rectangle that Blinks in Case of Alarm

1. Fill the rectangle with the alarm color of a function block or an element.

Table Setting Items of a Rectangle that Blinks in Case of Alarm

Part

Rectangle

Line

Graphic Modify

Touch Target Function

Line Type

Change Type

Change Color

Blinking

Data Type

Conditional Formula

Function Type

Window Name

Parameter

Window Size

Transparent

Always Execute

Change Alarm-Specific Color


Process Data

$TAG

Call Window

Tuning

$TAG

Medium Size

Display Cursor With Check


F121405E.EPS


F12-262

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Operation of the Trend Part

The Trend window can be displayed by clicking the trend display area with the mouse. TheTuning window is displayed for the tuning trend.

● Creating the Trend Part

1. Select the window to be displayed from Trend Group, Trend Point and Tuning Trend,according to the conditions of use.

2. To display the result of trend collection, select Trend Group. Otherwise, select TuningTrend.

TIP

The tuning trend begins collecting process data values as soon as a Graphic window is displayed.However, the Graphic window may be displaying previous data when the tuning trend display is startedbecause process data values are being collected by another window, the reserved status is activated, orfor another reason.

Table Setting Items of Trend

Part

Trend Trend


Display Type

Trend GroupWindow Name

Time Axis

Function Type

Parameter

Display Cursor

Trend Group

$TREND

x 1

Others

O $TREND -SM

Without Check

Can be selected fromTrend Group, Trend Point,and Tuning Trend.

When the Trend Group isselected

Can be selected fromx1/4, x1/2, x1, x2, and x4.


F121406E.EPS


F12-263

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Operation of the Instrument Display Part

For an analog instrument the PV value bar, SV value bar, MV value bar, indexes and scaleare displayed.

• The INC/DEC Operation dialog box is displayed by clicking either the SV value bar orthe MV value bar with the mouse.

• The entry zone of the item OPHI is displayed by clicking the upper area of the indexdisplay position.

• The entry zone of the item OPLO is displayed by clicking the lower area of the indexdisplay position.

● Creating an Instrument Display Part

1. Create a PV value bar, an SV value bar and an MV value bar in the process data-bar.

2. Create indexes using process data-arrows.

3. Create a scale with a straight line.

4. The MV value bar may be created in the lateral direction. Set the bar color to the sameas the graph color of the applicable trend. For the indexes, place a process data-arrowat the same position for both OPHI and OPLO. Place the item OPLO first, then placethe item OPHI.

TIP

The INC/DEC Operation dialog box is called up according to the following rules:

1. The INC/DEC Operation dialog box can only be displayed for the item names that can be called upby standard instrument faceplates (i.e., the item names assigned to the indexes). For example, itemsMV and SV can call up the INC/DEC Operation dialog box, but item PV cannot call it up.

2. The INC/DEC Operation dialog box may not be displayed, depending on the mode of the applicablefunction block, in the same manner as for standard instrument faceplates.

3. The manipulated variable in the INC/DEC Operation dialog box is reflected on the foregrounddiagram (process data-bar) in a Graphic window at every graphic update cycle. The visual feedback(reflecting the data value being manipulated on a drawing in real time) as executed by standardinstrument faceplates will not be performed. However, the digital value display on the INC/DECOperation dialog box will be reflected for each manipulated variable.

4. The INC/DEC operation cannot be performed using the operation keyboard.

5. The call count of the INC/DEC Operation dialog box is included in the usage count of instrumentfaceplates. Therefore, a maximum combined total of 16 instrument faceplate primitives and INC/DECOperation dialog boxes can be called up per Graphic window.


F12-264

IM 33S01B30-01E


Table Setting Items of the Instrument Display Part

Part

ProcessData-Bar

Fill

ProcessData-Bar

Touch Target(for ProcessData-Bar) Function

Fill Color

Extending Direction of Bar

Reference Point

Data Type

Display Data

Function Type

Dialog Type

Data Type

Data

Acknowledgement

Trend Graph Color

Up

0 Point

Process Data

$TAG.$PV


INC/DEC

Process Data

$TAG.$MV

With Acknowledgement

Right in the case of thelateral direction

$SV for the SV value bar,$MV for the MV value bar

No touch targetspecification for the PVvalue bar, $SV for the SVvalue bar

ProcessData-Arrow

Fill Color CyanFill

Display Cursor Without Check

ProcessData-Arrow

Touch Target(For ProcessData-Arrow.Assign OPHI inthe upper area,and OPLO in thelower area.)

Function

Move Arrow Direction

Arrow Display Position

Data Type

Display Data

Function Type

Dialog Type

Data Type

Data

Acknowledgement

Display Cursor

Up

Left

Process Data

$TAG.$OPHI


Normal

Process Data

$TAG.$OPHI


Without Check

Right in the case of thelateral direction

Up in the case of thelateral direction

$OPLO when OPLO isused

$TAG.$OPLO whenOPLO is used

Straight Line Line Color WhiteLine


F121407E.EPS


F12-265

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Operation of the Status Display Part

The status display part displays the statuses of function blocks and elements.

• When the block mode display part is clicked with the mouse, a menu dialog box formode change is displayed. Using this dialog box, the mode can be changed.

• When the calibration status display part is clicked with the mouse, a menu dialog boxfor changing the calibration status is displayed. The calibration status can be changedusing this box.

• When the alarm ON/OFF display part is clicked with the mouse, a menu dialog box forsetting the alarm to ON or OFF is displayed. Using this dialog box, the alarm can beset to ON or OFF.

● Creating the Status Display Part

1. On the first line, create the block mode (left side) and the block status (right side)using process data-characters.

2. On the second line, create the alarm status (left side), the calibration status (center)and alarm ON/OFF (right side) using process data-characters.

3. Arrange the tags so that they are close to each other. Also, limit the number of displaydigits to the minimum.


F12-266

IM 33S01B30-01E


Table Setting Items of the Status Display Part (1/2)

Part

ProcessData-Character(Block mode: Leftside on the firstline)

Text


ProcessData-Character(Block status:Right side on thefirst line)

Text


Text Color

Type


Data Type

Display Data

Text Color

Type


Data Type

Cyan

String

4

Process Data

$TAG.$MODE

Cyan

String

4

Process Data



ProcessData-Character(Alarm status:Left side on thesecond line)

Text Color CyanText

Display Data $TAG.$BSTS


Text(Calibrationstatus: Center onthe second line)

Graphic Modify

Type


Data Type

Display Data

Change Type

Color Change

Change Color

Blink

Transparent

Modify String

String

4

Process Data

$TAG.$ALRM

Always Execute

Normal Color Change

Cyan

No

Without Check

CAL


ProcessData-Character(Alarm ON/OFF:Right side on thesecond line)

Text Color CyanText


Type


Data Type

Display Data

String

4

Process Data

$TAG.$AOFS


Set #PV as the initialvalue of $CAL genericname definition.

Data Type Process Data

Conditional Formula $TAG.$CAL=“CAL”


F121408E.EPS


F12-267

IM 33S01B30-01E


Table Setting Items of the Status Display Part (2/2)

Part

Touch Target(Block mode: Leftside on the firstline)

Function

Menu

Touch Target(Alarm ON/OFF:Right side on thesecond line)

Function

Function Type

Data Type

Data

Acknowledgement

Check when Input

Display Cursor

Input Data Type

Menu Data

Function Type

Data Type

Call Menu Dialog

Process Data

$TAG.$MODE


Without Check

With Check

Label Text String

1. Manual MAN2. Auto AUT3. Cascade CAS4. Semi-Auto SEMI

Call Menu Dialog

Process Data

1. Label Data2. Label Data3. Label Data4. Label Data

Menu

Touch Target(Calibrationstatus: Center onthe second line)

Function

Menu

Input Data Type

Menu Data

Function Type

Data Type

Data

Acknowledgement

Check when Input

Display Cursor

Input Data Type

Menu Data

Label Text String

1. Set Alarm Suppression AOF2. Cancel Alarm Suppression AON

Call Menu Dialog

Process Data

$TAG.$AOFS


Without Check

With Check

Label Text String

1. Set Calibration CAL2. Cancel Calibration NCL

1. Label Data2. Label Data

Data

Acknowledgement

Check when Input

Display Cursor

$TAG.$AOFS


Without Check

With Check

1. Label Data2. Label Data


F121409E.EPS


F12-268

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Operation of the Parameter Display Part

The item names and process data values that correspond to the bars in the instrumentdisplay part are displayed. When an item name or a process data value is clicked with themouse, the entry zone of the applicable item is displayed.

● Creating a Parameter Display Part

1. On the first line create an engineering unit symbol using process data-characters.

2. On the second line create the item name and process data value for the PV valueusing process data-characters.

3. On the third line create the item name and process data value for the SV value usingprocess data-characters.

4. On the fourth line create the item name and process data value for the MV value usingprocess data-characters.

Table Setting Items of the Parameter Display Part

Part

ProcessData-Character(Engineering unitsymbol: First line)

Text


ProcessData-Character(Item name: Leftside on thesecond, third andfourth lines)

Text


Text Color

Type


Data Type

Display Data

Text Color

Type


Data Type

Display Data

White

String

6


$ENGUNIT

White

String

4


$PV



$SV for SV, $MV for MV

Touch Target(Process datavalue: Second,third and fourthlines)

Function

Display Engineering Unit

Data Type

Display Data

Function Type

Dialog Type

Data Type

Data

Acknowledgement

Display Cursor

Without Check

Process Data

$TAG.$PV


Normal

Process Data

$TAG.$PV


With Check

$TAG.$SV for SV, $TAG.$MV for MV

ProcessData-Character(Process datavalue: Right sideon the second,third and fourthlines)

Text


Text Color

Type


Number of Digits after theDecimal Point

Cyan

Numerical Value

7

1


$TAG.$SV for SV, $TAG.$MV for MV


F121410E.EPS

● Graphical Parts

The advantages of creating parts in a Graphic window can be used. For example, placeparts and controls in this area.


F12-269

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.14.2 Discrete User-Defined FaceplateThis section explains how to create a User-Defined Faceplate window for discreteinstruments, using an motor instrument as an example.

The figure shown below is the same as that used for the analog user-defined face-plate described in the previous section, except for the pushbuttons in the instru-ment display part. Therefore, only the process pushbuttons are explained in thissection.

■ Displayed PartsThe following shows an example of a discrete user-defined faceplate. This example ex-plains how to create a discrete user-defined faceplate.


Ready

TAGNAME

MAN SIMNR CAL AOF

%

50.0

FVGraphicalParts SV

MV

100.0

1.0

17:39

TAG COMMENT

F121411E.EPS

STOP

DIRECT

REVERS

M

Rectangle that blinksin case of alarm (*1)

Trend (*2)

Tag comment

Graphical parts

Instrument display part (*4)

Status display part (*5)

Parameter display part (*6)

Tag name

Lamp (*3)

Switch (*3)

Figure Example of Discrete User-Defined Faceplate Creation

(*1) Graphically indicates the alarm statuses of function blocks and elements.(*2) Monitors the statuses of function blocks and elements in time series. Expands the window by clicking.(*3) The switch (left side) and the lamp (right side) are displayed above the buttons, in the same manner as for the process

pushbuttons in instrument faceplates.(*4) From the left

(1) Process pushbuttons (process value)(2) Scale(3) FV value bar (process value)(4) SV value bar (process value)Expresses process values graphically. In the same manner as for the instrument faceplate, the INC/DEC Operationdialog box can be called up by clicking any bar. Fine adjustments of the set values can be performed using this dialogbox.

(*5) Shows the statuses of function blocks and elements in digital display. The status can be changed by clicking with themouse.

(*6) Shows process values in digital display. The entry zone for data input can be called up by clicking.


F12-270

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Operation of the Instrument Display Part (Process Pushbuttons)

For an electric-motor instrument the process pushbuttons, the FV value bar, SV value barand scale are displayed. The FV value bar, SV value bar and scale for the electric-motorinstrument are the same as those for the analog instrument, so their explanations areomitted here. Data input is performed via pushbutton operation.

● Creating an Instrument Display Part (Process Pushbuttons)

1. Create a switch and a lamp (above the pushbuttons) using a rectangle. An additionalrectangle is placed on the lamp in order to represent the alarm color. In other words,one rectangle is placed for the switch and two rectangles are placed for the lamp. Forthe lamp, place lamp 1 first, then lamp 2 on top of lamp 1. When the value matchesthe callback value, make lamp 2 transparent. If they do not match, fill with lamp 2. As aresult, only one lamp will be displayed for all buttons.

2. Create a pushbutton using a pushbutton primitive. Set Graphic Modify and display theprocess status graphically.

3. Make the color of the pushbutton match the button color setting of Function BlockDetail Builder, then change the color according to the status of the instrument (linkedwith the lamp) that was answered back. Since the user-defined faceplate containsmany display parts, change the button colors for the purpose of improving visibility.

Table Setting Items of the Instrument Display Part (1/2)

Part

Rectangle(Switch)

Fill

Graphic Modify

Rectangle(Lamp 1)

Fill

Fill Color

Change Type

Color Change

Change Color

Blink

Transparent

Data Type

Conditional Formula

Fill Color

Change Type

Gray 40

Always Execute

Normal Color Change

Red

No

Without Check

Process Data

$TAG.$MV=2

Gray 40

Always Execute

For three pushbuttons,the top button is 2, the center button is 1, and the bottom button is 0.

Graphic Modify

Data Type

Conditional Formula

Process Data

$TAG.$PV=2

For three pushbuttons,the top button is 2,the center button is 1,and the bottom button is 0.

Rectangle(Lamp 2)

Fill

Graphic Modify

Color Change

Blink

Transparent

Data Type

Conditional Formula

Fill Color

Change Type

Color Change

Blink

Transparent

Change Alarm-Specific Color

NO

Without Check

Process Data

$TAG

Gray 40

Always Execute

Normal Color Change

NO

With Check


F121412E.EPS


F12-271

IM 33S01B30-01E


Table Setting Items of the Instrument Display Part (2/2)

Part

Graphic Modify

Command Data

Check when Input

Display Cursor

Change Type

Color Change

Change Color

Blink

Transparent

Data Type

Conditional Formula

2

Without Check

Without Check

Always Execute

Normal Color Change

Red, for example

No

Without Check

Process Data

$TAG.$PV=2

For three pushbuttons,the top button is 2, the center button is 1, and the bottom button is 0.

For three pushbuttons,the top button is 2,the center button is 1,and the bottom button is 0.

Pushbutton

Text

Label

Function

Text Color

Label Text String

With Illumination

Attach Guard

Function Type

Data Type

Data

Acknowledgement

White

DIRECT

With Check

With Check

Instrument CommandOperation

Process Data

$TAG.$MV


For three pushbuttons, thetop button is “DIRECT,”the center button is“STOP,” and the bottom button is “REVERS.”

Color is dark gray.


F121413E.EPS


F12-272

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.14.3 Compound Block User-Defined FaceplateThe following shows an example of the display of compound blocks connected incascade. For the compound blocks, a Trend window corresponding to the functionblocks of both the cascade connection source and the cascade connection destina-tion is displayed.

■ Display Image


Ready

VLV1000

MANNR

%

96.7

PVGraphicalParts SV

MV

59.3

13.1

13:4613:44 13:45

VALVE

F121414E.EPS

FIC1000

GraphicalParts

PUMP CASNR

%

28.9

PV

SV

MV

77.5

100.0

Figure Example of Compound Block User-Defined Faceplate Display


F12-273

IM 33S01B30-01E


F12.14.4 Procedure for Calling a User-Defined Faceplate WindowThis section explains the procedure for calling a User-Defined Faceplate window.

■ Calling from the Name Input DialogA User-Defined Faceplate window can be called up using the Name Input dialog box in thefollowing format:

• Operation using the Name Input dialog boxUser-defined design name� {generic name set} �-SC

User-defined design name: Name of the window created with Graphic Builder�: Space

However, if the above calling method is used, it will be necessary to know the generic nameset in advance. Additionally, it is required to add the display size specification of the user-defined faceplate. Therefore, instead of using the above method, graphically create adedicated window to call a User-Defined Faceplate window, then call the User-DefinedFaceplate window from that window.


F12-274

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ User-Defined Faceplate Call Window


Ready

FIC1000

MANNR

%

96.0

PVGraphicalParts SV

MV

90.8

46.8

13:50 13

FLOW

F121415E.EPS

Display using generic name set 03.

User-Defined Faceplate Call window

ProcessFunctionA (UserDefinedWnd SET01)

ProcessFunctionB (UserDefinedWnd SET02)

ProcessFunctionC (UserDefinedWnd SET03)

ProcessFunctionX (UserDefinedWnd SETXX)

:

Mouseclick

Graphic window

Graphicobject file

Generic name set XXGeneric name set 03

Generic name set 02

$TAG = FIC0001$MODE = MODE$ALRM = ALRM$PV = PV$SV = SV$MV = MV$TREND = TG0101:

Generic name set 01

Figure Calling a User-Defined Faceplate


F12-275

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Definition of the Window to Call a User-Defined Faceplate WindowThe following shows an example of a window to call a User-Defined Faceplate window, andexplains how to create a User-Defined Faceplate window based on this example.

USERDEFINEDCALL User-Defined Call

Ready

F121416E.EPS

User-defined faceplate Window

ANALOGA

DISCRETEA

CASCADEA

ANALOGB

Rectangle that blinks in case ofalarm

Displays the setting source as wellfor compound blocks connected incascade

User-definedfaceplate name

Figure Example of a User-Defined Faceplate Call Window

● Creating a Window

Since a User-Defined Faceplate Call window is used frequently, it should be a long andnarrow window so that it does not overlap other windows.

It is convenient to create a separate window to call a User-Defined Faceplate Call window,according to the number of User-Defined Faceplate windows.

Table Setting of a User-Defined Faceplate Call Window

Part

File Properties Attribute

Window Type

Size

Screen Update Cycle

Window Background Color

Graphic Window

320 x 686

x 1

Gray 25


F121417E.EPS


F12-276

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Operation of the Window

The User-Defined Faceplate Call window displays a rectangle that corresponds to thealarm for the User-Defined Faceplate window and the window name. To call a User-De-fined Faceplate window, click a line that contains the desired window to be called up.

● Creating Parts

1. Place a rectangle that blinks if an alarm is generated in order to display the alarm colorof the User-Defined Faceplate window. The name of a User-Defined Faceplate win-dow having two rectangles indicates a window that contains compound blocks con-nected in cascade.

2. Create process data-characters in order to display the window name of the user-defined faceplate.

Table Setting Items of the User-Defined Faceplate Call Window Parts

Part

Rectangle

Line

Graphic Modify



Line Type

Change Type

Color Change

Blink

Data Type

Conditional Formula

Type


Data Type

Display Data

Transparent

Always Execute

Change Alarm-SpecificColor


Process Data

$TAG001

String

16


$UNAME001



Function Type

Window Name

Parameter

Window Size

Display Cursor

Call Window

Graphic

$UFPW001

Special Size

With Check


F121418E.EPS


F12-277

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.15 Debugging on the Graphic Builder>

F12.15 Debugging on the Graphic BuilderThe Graphic Builder has a debug function that performs a unit test on the Graphicwindow that is being edited.

Debugging checks the Graphic window image displayed on the operation andmonitoring screen. It also performs an action verification using simulation data.

■ Debug▼ Debug

The debug function checks on how the operation and monitoring screen will display theGraphic window that is being editing via the Graphic Builder. Action verification on severalfunctions can also be performed, by setting simulation data.

● Image Verification

The debug function checks the images of window background, object display, and datadisplay on the operation and monitoring screen.

• Window backgroundChecks the background color and background bitmap display.

• Object displayChecks the object display.However, only the area indicating frame are displayed for the window display (initialdisplay, conditional display), message, instrument faceplate, overview, trend, dialogname, and faceplate.

• Data display (Character display, data bar display, graph display)For data character display, data bar display and graph display, an image to be dis-played can be checked by setting simulation data.However, if the high and low limits are omitted in the tab for data bar display or graphdisplay, high and low limits of simulation data must be set.

● Action Verification

The debug function checks actions corresponding to the conditional formulas specified inthe graphic and coordinate modifiers, and the functions assigned to buttons.

• Verification with the graphic and coordinate modifiersFor a graphic modifier, it checks whether the color and shape change, by respondingto the simulation data, as specified in the setting. For a coordinate modifier, it checkswhether the coordinates change, by responding to the simulation data, as specified inthe setting.However, the above does not apply to the overview color change.

• Buttons (Pushbuttons and touch targets)For buttons, a dialog indicating the definition contents is displayed.


F12-278

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Debug Dialog BoxSelect the [Debug] from the [Tools] menu of the Graphic Builder to start the Graphic win-dow and simultaneously display a dialog in which to set simulation process data for debug-ging.

F121501E.EPS

Debug

Exit Debug

Update Data

Import...

Save...

Type Object Name Coordinates Tag name.Data item Data Ki

Tag Name.Item

Data Kind

Data Value

Alarm-specific Color

Object Name

Undefined

(NON)

Data Type

High limit value

Low limit value


Primitive Type

Reread

Figure Debug Dialog Box

The debug dialog consists of the pushbuttons to control debug, field to enter simulationdata, and list view to display simulation data.

■ Debug Control ButtonsThese buttons are used to end the debug function or to reflect simulation data to the dis-play image.

● [Exit Debug] Button

This closes the Graphic window and debug dialog displayed for debugging.

● [Update Data] Button

This reflects the set simulation data to the Graphic window.


F12-279

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Data Setting AreaSimulation data required for debugging can be set for each object type.

● Primitive Type

This is the type of the object, object name and display coordinates of an object that is beingset. This is displayed automatically when a data may be selected from the list view.

● Tag Name for Debug

The debug target may be specified in the format of Tag Name.Item. It can also be selectedon the list view displayed automatically when an object is selected.

The data display and action may be confirmed.

● Simulation Data Type

This is the type of data to be set for simulation data. Select a type for setting from [NumericValue], [Character], and [Undefined].

Select “Undefined” if the debugging using simulation data is not performed.

● Simulation Data Value

This is the value set for simulation data. Use the text edit box to set the data value.

● Data Type Display

When data is selected form the list view, the data type displays automatically.

● High and Low Limits of Simulation Data

High and low limits of simulation data. If the settings for high and low limits of data areomitted for the data bar display object or graph display object, the high and low limits ofsimulation data must be set in order to verify actions of the object. Use the text edit box toset the limits.

● Function Block Alarm Name

This is the alarm name of the function block that is set for confirming the alarm colorchange of the graphic modifier.

● Setting the Blink

To confirm whether the blink by alarm on the graphic modifier is performing properly,specify whether or not to set “blinking” for the alarm status of the function block.


F12-280

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.16 Importing CS Source Files>

F12.16 Importing CS Source Files▼ Import CS source file

This section explains the CS Source File Import function. The CS Source File Importfunction is used to import source files created with CENTUM CS Graphic Builderusing CS 1000/CS 3000 Graphic Builder. Primitive object data, as defined by CSGraphic Builder, consists of three types of data: data to be imported as is, data to beimported with different content, and data not to be imported. This section describesthe data to be imported with different content and the data not to be imported.

■ Data to be Imported with Different ContentThe following definition content is imported to the CS 1000/CS 3000 as data having differ-ent definition content from that in the CS.

● Primitive Object

The following primitive object is imported to the CS 1000/CS 3000 with different contentfrom that defined in the CS. The following table lists the differences:

Table Primitive Object to be Converted to Different Content

Object Difference

CS CS 1000/CS 3000

Polymarker

Multiple markers become onepolymarker.

No polymarker exists, andpolymarkers become individualmarker objects.

The sizes of polymarkers that havethe attribute of [O] are 7, 11, ....

The sizes of marker objects that havethe attribute of [O] are 6, 10, ...; thus,they are smaller by 1 as compared tothe CS.

F121601E.EPS

● Attributes of the Primitive Object

A part of the attributes existing in the CS may not exist in the CS 1000/CS 3000. In such acase the attributes are automatically converted into attributes that can be operated on theCS 1000/CS 3000, and are then imported.

• Window frame

For both [With Frame] and [Without Frame], the size is retained for conversion into a[With Frame] window. The size of a window defined as [With Frame] in the CS isconverted into the following:

heightBK = heightCS + 44

widthBK = widthCS + 12

• Modify type

If the modify type is defined as [Execute if Changed] in the CS, it will be converted into[Always Execute] in the CS 1000/CS 3000.


F12-281

IM 33S01B30-01E


• Font Size, Font Type

The font type and font size of a text primitive or a text label of a pushbutton are auto-matically converted based on the similarity to the font size and font type of CENTUMCS. However, user can define the rules for the automatic conversion using graphicutility program.

SEE ALSO

For more information about Graphic Utility, see the following:

F12.17, “Graphic Utility”

• Character-Vp Vector

The character-up vector of the CS is converted as a rotation angle attribute of a stringin the CS 1000/CS 3000. The following table lists the conversion method:

Table Correspondence of Character-Up Vector

Character-up vector

Rotationangle

Right LeftUp Down

Right 90degrees 0 degrees Left 90

degrees 180 degrees

F121602E.EPS

• Instrument Diagram

The operation keys are numbered and imported with the instrument diagram.


F12-282

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Data to Watch forSome primitive objects require the verification and change of the definition content after it isimported into the CS 1000/CS 3000.

● Screen Update Cycle of Information Specific to the Source File

Data is designated in units of seconds in graphics of the CS. However, it is designated bythe magnification of the basic display update cycle of the window in the CS 1000/CS 3000.This difference is ignored when importing, and data designated in units of seconds isimported as is. Therefore, if data was designated as two seconds in the CS, it is importedas data of [x2]. Therefore, if the basic display update cycle is set to two seconds, it will beupdated with four seconds (2 seconds x 2). Verify the definition content after importing.

● Element Names

In graphics of the CS, element names starting with a period (.) and a percent (%) may beused to specify window names, etc. In such cases the definition content is not changedduring import, but when it is downloaded to an HIS and operated it is then possible that theoperation may be different from that on the CS.

For example, if [.GR0001] was defined to call a pushbutton window in the source file of theCS, the imported result will also be [.GR0001]. When it is downloaded to the HIS andoperated with that definition, a Control window or a Trend window, instead of a Graphicwindow, may be displayed depending on the situation of the window definition of the HIS. Insuch cases, change the definition contents of the element names after importing.

● Call Panel

The [Window Name], which is one of the definition items in the CS 1000/CS 3000, is notdefined in the definition of [Call Panel] for Pushbutton and Touch Target in Graphic Builderof the CS. Therefore, if the imported result is verified with Graphic Builder of the CS 1000/CS 3000, the selected values for [Window Name] will be displayed as [Graphic], regardlessof the definition content of the calling window. However, since this information is not re-quired in order to call windows on the HIS, when operating the Graphic windows that havebeen downloaded to the HIS, windows such as the Process Alarm window and the Face-plate will be displayed in exactly the same manner as defined in the CS.


F12-283

IM 33S01B30-01E


■ Data not ImportedThe following primitive objects and data of the CS will not be imported with the CS SourceFile Import function:

● Primitive Objects

The following primitive objects of the CS will be ignored during import, and will not beloaded into the CS 1000/CS 3000:

• Pattern blocks

• Group setting elements

• Pushbuttons and touch targets for operation sequences

● Function Definitions

If the following definitions are made using primitive objects of pushbuttons, soft keys andtouch targets, they will be ignored during import, and will not be loaded into the CS 1000/CS 3000.

• Panel sequence

• User program

• Signal notification

• Operation sequence

• Display switching

• Standard batch report

• Selecting operation sequence

• Instrument faceplate display

• Recipe status operation

• Screen expanding menu

• Batch ID menu

• Group setting (entry zone)

• Group setting (menu entry)

● Operation Sequence Modify

If Operation Sequence Modify, which is related to a touch target for operation sequence, isdefined in a primitive object, only the data of Operation Sequence Modify will be ignoredduring import, and will not be loaded into the CS 1000/CS 3000.


F12-284

IM 33S01B30-01E


● Information Specific to the Source File

The following information that is defined as graphic panel attributes will be ignored duringimport even if it is defined in the CS source file. It will not be loaded into the CS 1000/CS3000.

• File comments

• Optimize specification

• Screen link program and its arguments

• Screen link option program and arguments

• Screen type (presence of scroll bar, etc.)

• Group Setting

• Window Handling upon Screen Clear

• EOPS Supper Window Information

• Communication switching table


F12-285

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.17 Graphic Utility>

F12.17 Graphic Utility▼ Graphic Utility

Using graphic utility, the graphic builder preferences can be set. The setting itemsare as follows.

• CS Source File Import

• Linked Parts

■ Calling Graphic UtilityOn the toolbar of graphic builder, choose [Graphic utility] from [Tool] menu. Graphic Utilitycan be started.

■ Preferences of CS Source File Import▼ CS Source File Import

Preferences regarding to importing CS source file can be with graphic utility. When import-ing a CS source file, the pre-defined rules for the font type and font size are applied.

Font Size (1) For Text and Process Data Character

CS 8 Height → Convert to 8

(2) For Pushbutton and Softkeys

CS Height → Convert to 10



Font Type (1) For Text

Horizontal

(3) For Pushbutton

CS Source File Import Update Linked Part

ApplyCancelOK

F121701E.EPS

CS1000/3000 Graphic Utility

Courier New

Vertical Courier New

(2) For Process Data Character

Horizontal Courier New

Vertical Courier New

Courier New

(4) For Softkeys

Courier New

Figure CS Source File Import Tab

● Font Size

The font sizes with the heights of 8, 16 and 24, are defined to correspond to the font sizesin the CS source file for the text and process data, the characters of pushbutton labels andsoft-key labels respectively.

● Font Type

The font types are defined to correspond to the font types in the CS source file for the text,process data, the characters of pushbutton labels and soft-key labels respectively.


F12-286

IM 33S01B30-01E

<F12.17 Graphic Utility>

■ Linked Parts▼ Update Linked Part

If the internal information such as modification conditions of a linked part is bound to a-generic name, the bound information can be applied together with the linked part to thegraphic. The bindings and the linked parts can be set on the graphic builder. On the graphicbuilder, the priority for bindings of the generic names in a linked part can be set in the[Linked Parts] tab. This setting is valid for the whole project when updating the genericnames in the linked parts. The [Linked Parts] tab is shown as follows.

Higher priority when updating generic names

Project Name

Update Linked Part

ApplyCancelOK

F121702E.EPS

CS1000/3000 Graphic Utility

Original

ProjectMYPJT Original

Higher priority w...

Builder

CS Source File Import

MYPJT

Figure Linked Parts Tab

● Updating Generic Names

Updating mode of generic name binding information can be set on this tab.

• Original

When this option is set, the original generic name bindings of the linked parts areused.

• Builder

When this option is set, the generic name bindings of the linked parts defined on thegraphic builder are used.

SEE ALSO

For more information about the updating the generic name binding information, see the following:

F13.4.2, “Setting Linked Part Object Properties”


<F13. Linked Parts> F13-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

F13. Linked PartsThe Graphic Builder, Status Display Builder, and Product Control Builder can use akind of object called linked part. Linked parts are the embedded parts whose statesare linked to the sources of the parts.

The parts embedded in many kinds of windows and linked to the sources are allcalled “linked parts.”The Link-Part Windows are used to create, register, and manage the linked parts.The linked parts can be dragged and dropped to other builders. The registeredlinked parts can also be edited. In addition, when the sources of the linked parts aremodified, the linked parts are updated automatically on the builders where the linkedparts are embedded.

This chapter explains how to handle the linked parts.Please note that although the examples shown in this manual are mainly for theGraphic Builder, the linked parts can also be inserted to the Status Display Builderand Product Control Builder in the same manner as on the Graphic Builder.


F13-2<F13.1 Outline of Linked Parts>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F13.1 Outline of Linked PartsThe linked parts can be handled mainly on Linked-Part List Window, Linked-PartEditor Window, and linked part update dialog. These windows are used to manageand create linked parts, insert linked parts in the Graphic Builders, and update theembedded linked parts.

■ What are Linked PartsMultiple objects can be combined into a single part and that part can be registered to allowit to be reused in the Graphic Builder. These registered parts are called “parts.” The regis-tered parts can be inserted as objects (hereinafter referred to as “part objects”) in thegraphic window. There are two types of parts: “normal parts” and “linked parts.”

When a normal part is used, changes in the original part file are not reflected in the partobject inserted in a window.

While, if a linked part is used, the relationship between the embedded linked part and thelinked part source file (link information) is retained even after the object is inserted (herein-after referred to as the linked part object). Thus, changes made to linked-part sources willbe reflected on the embedded linked-part objects.

The features of the linked parts are as follows:

• Objects other than linked parts can be registered as linked parts.

• After a link part object is inserted on the Graphic Builder, data binding and graphicmodification can be set using the property sheet of the linked part object.

• The graphic windows embedded with linked parts can be handled from the linked partwindows.

• After a linked part is edited, linked part objects can be updated for all graphic windowsembedded with the linked part.

• The updated builder file can be downloaded to the HIS after linked part objects areupdated.


<F13.1 Outline of Linked Parts> F13-3

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Overview of Operations Performed with Linked PartsThe linked part related windows are used to perform various operations for linked parts. Anoverview of operations is shown below.

● Management of Linked Parts

The Linked-Part List Window is used to manage the files and folders that store linked parts.A list of linked parts is displayed in the Linked-Part List Window. This window is mainly usedto create, copy, and delete files and folders.

● Creation of Linked Parts

The Linked-Part List Window is used to register an object that exists in the Graphic Builderas a linked part. The Linked-Part Editor Window can also be called to edit a registeredlinked part.

The Linked-Part Editor Window can be used to add, modify, and delete objects that com-prise a linked part. This window is also used to change the properties of objects such asgraphic modifications.

● Using Linked Parts

The linked parts that are registered in a project can be dragged from the Linked-Part ListWindow. The builders that the linked parts can be dropped are as follows:

• Graphic Builder (Engineering mode)

• Graphic Builder (Windows mode)

• Status Display Builder (logic charts, drawings)

• Product Control Builder

● Updating and Downloading Linked Part Objects

When a linked part is edited, the linked part objects that are already inserted must beupdated. After searching for the builder files that need to be updated using the linked partupdate dialog, the files will be automatically updated. The updated builder files can bedownloaded to the HIS.


F13-4<F13.1 Outline of Linked Parts>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Utilities for Linked PartsThe link parts are handled on Linked-Part List Window, Linked-Part Editor Window, andlinked part update dialog.

The tasks for handling linked parts are illustrated below:

Product Control Builder

Status Display Builder

Graphic Builder (*2)

Linked-Part List Window

Edit

Save

Insert

Register

Insert

Register

Update

Builder Files

Linked Part Files

F130101E.EPS

CallSystem View

Linked Part Update DialogLinked-Part Editor Window

Graphic Builder (*1)

*1: Indicates the Graphic Builder in the Windows mode*2: Indicates the Graphic Builder in the Engineering mode

Figure Illustration of Handling Linked Parts

● Linked-Part List Window

Manages, registers, creates and inserts linked parts.

● Linked-Part Editor Window

Edits linked parts.

● Linked Part Update Dialog

Performs the update of linked part objects as well as the download of the builders that usesthe updated linked part objects.

● Builders that can Insert Linked Parts

Inserts the registered linked parts.


<F13.1 Outline of Linked Parts> F13-5

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Basic Operation Flow when using Linked Parts▼ Creating Linked Part

The following describes the basic operation flow when using linked parts.

Repeat the operations if needed.

Creating Linked Part

Inserting Linked Part toGraphic windows

Editing Linked Part

Updating anddownloading Linked Part

F130102E.EPS

Figure Basic Operation Flow when Using Linked Parts

● Creating Linked Part

Creates a new linked part.

After a linked part is created in the Linked-Part List Window, perform one or both of thefollowing operations:

• Register an object that exists in the Graphic Builder or register a normal part as alinked part.

• Edit a linked part using the Linked-Part Editor Window.

● Inserting a Linked Part to Graphic Window

The Graphic Builder is used to insert a linked part to a graphic window.

● Editing Linked Parts

Existing linked parts can be edited if needed.

Perform one or both of the following operations:

• Re-register an object that exists in the Graphic Builder or register a normal part as alinked part.

• Edit an existing linked part using the Linked-Part Editor Window.

● Update and Downloading Linked Part Object

After a linked part is modified, the inserted linked part object is updated in the Graphicwindow.

After the update is complete, the builder file that embedded with the linked part can bedownloaded to the HIS.


F13-6<F13.2 Management of Linked Parts>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F13.2 Management of Linked PartsOne linked part is stored in one linked part file.

The linked part files are handled using the Linked-Part List Window instead of Sys-tem View.

The Linked-Part List Window is used to manage the files and folders associated withlinked parts.


<F13.2 Management of Linked Parts> F13-7

IM 33S01B30-01E

F13.2.1 Linked Part FilesTo use a linked part, the linked part file must be stored in the LinkParts folder di-rectly under the top folder (Project Folder) of the Project Database.

When a new project is created with System View, a general linked part file will becopied by the system to a folder under the Project Folder.

■ Folder of Linked Part Files ¡ £The linked part files are stored in the following folder:

{Project Folder} \LinkParts

It is also possible to create a custom folder within the LinkParts folder to store linked partfiles. An example below shows structures of the LinkParts folder:

● For CS 1000

F130201E.EPS

Example)C:\CS1000\eng\BkProject\MyPjt\LinkParts\Pump1.lpt \Pump2.lpt \COMMON\Valve1.lpt \Valve2.lpt

Figure Folder Structure of Linked Part Files (CS 1000) ¡

● For CS 3000

F130202E.EPS

Example)C:\CS3000\eng\BkProject\MyPjt\LinkParts\Pump1.lpt \Pump2.lpt \COMMON\Valve1.lpt \Valve2.lpt

Figure Folder Structure of Linked Part Files £

Since linked part files are stored under the project folder, it can be backed up together withthe project.

TIP

If the project database could not be accessed caused by absence of the project. For an instance, if theproject has not been created or the machine used is only installed with the graphics builder package, theLinkParts folder shown above does not exist. In such cases, the folder of linked part files can be anyfolder. However, the linked parts inserted in the builder files will not be updated automatically under thiscircumstance.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Linked Part FilenamesLink part files have the filename in the format of “LinkPartName.lpt.” Identical filenames arenot allowed regardless of whether or not they reside in the same directory. Up to 64 alpha-numeric characters can be used for a filename. However, the maximum length for thefilename is subject to the restrictions of Windows.

■ Using Linked Parts in Other ProjectsWhen a project is copied with System View, the linked part files in the source project will becopied to the destination project. This allows the linked part files to be used by the destina-tion project.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F13.2.2 Linked-Part List WindowThe linked part window is used to manage linked part files that are stored in theproject database. The Linked-Part List Window is used to perform tasks such asdisplaying a list of linked part files as well as creating or copying linked part files.

■ Starting Linked-Part List WindowPerform one of the following operations to start the Linked-Part List Window.

• In the Graphic Builder, select [Linked Part...] from the [Insert] menu or click the [LinkedPart] tool button.

F130203E.EPS

Figure [Linked Part] Tool Button

• Select [Program] - [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Linked-Part List Window] from theWindows’s [Start] menu.

TIP

When starting Linked-Part List Window from the Start menu of Windows, the object files outside of theproject can be used as linked parts. Nevertheless, when link the objects outside the project to the graphicfiles on graphic editor window, the Linked-Part Update Dialog does not refresh automatically.

● Cautionary Points for Starting on Multiple Machines

The Linked-Part List Window can be opened from multiple machines. In addition, the sameLinkParts folder can be opened from multiple machines if the project database is sharedacross a network. However, in such cases the following cautions must be taken into consid-eration:

• When a linked part is modified in the Linked-Part List Window on one machine, theupdated contents cannot be viewed in the Linked-Part List Windows on other ma-chines at real time. To view any changes, the Linked-Part List Window must be re-started.

• A linked part edited in the Linked-Part Editor Window started from the Linked-Part ListWindow cannot be edited by another Linked-Part List Window at the same time.

• When a file or folder is created, deleted, or renamed in one Linked-Part List Window,the other Linked-Part List Windows will not reflect any of the changes automatically. Torefresh the display, select [Refresh] from the [View] menu.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Linked-Part List Window Composition▼ Linked-Part List Window Composition

The following shows the composition of the Linked-Part List Window.

All Folders Contents of Tank-

Linked-Part List Window [Pjt:MYPJT]

LinkPartsPump

ValveMotor

Tank

Tank No_1

Name Date

2000/01/

Tank No_2 2000/01/

Ready

Tank No_3 2000/01/

Tank No_4 2000/01/

Tank No_5 2000/01/

Tank No_6 2000/01/

Tank No_7 2000/01/

Tank No_8 2000/01/

F130204E.EPS

File Edit Help

Image DisplayArea

Folder Structure Display Area List Display Area Comment Display Area

Figure Linked-Part List Window Composition

This window is comprised of the following display areas:

● Folder Structure Display Area

The tree structure of the folders under the LinkParts folder is displayed.

● List Display Area

The linked part names and the last update dates are displayed in a list. The displayedlinked parts can be sorted by name or by date.

● Image Display Area

The image of the linked part selected in the list display area is shown.

If the image is larger than the image display area, the image will be reduced proportionallyto fit the display area.

● Comment Display Area

The comment text set in the linked part's properties sheet will be displayed.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Menu BarThe menu bar of the Linked-Part List Window contains four menu items : [File], [Edit],[View], [Help], and a group of menus that are cascaded from the menu items.

Table Menu Bar

Menu Title Menu Item Description

File

Creates a new folder.

Creates a new linked part.

Open... Opens the folder that contains a linked part.

Displays the print preview of a linked part.

Prints a linked part.

Print Preview

Print...

Exit Linked-Part List Window Exits the Linked Part Window.

Edit

Cut Deletes the selected linked part and storesit in the clipboard.

Copy Copies the selected linked part to the clipboard.

Paste Pastes the data stored in the clipboard.

Edit... Starts the Linked-Part Editor Window of theselected linked part.

Delete Deletes the selected linked part or folder.

Properties... Displays the properties setting dialog of theselected linked part.

View Refresh Updates the display of the folder structure orfile list.

Help

Version Information Displays the version information.

Create NewFolder

Linked Part

F130205E.EPS

Reference Index... Displays Indexes of reference manuals.

Builder Definition Items.. Displays the builder items.

Using On-Line Manual.. Explains how to use on-line manual

■ Pop-Up MenusThe following pop-up menu items are displayed when the right mouse button is clicked inthe Linked-Part List Window.

• Cut

• Copy

• Paste

• Edit

• Delete

• Properties



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Toolbar▼ Toolbar

The toolbar of the Linked-Part List Window is shown below.

The toolbar on Linked-Part List Window cannot be used in floating mode.

CreateNew Folder

OpenPrint Preview

CutPaste

Pin

Create New Parts Delete Edit

Print Copy

F130206E.EPS

Figure Toolbar on Linked-Part List Window

All the buttons above except [Pin] have the same functions as menu items of the menu bar.The [Pin] is only available on the toolbar.

● Pin

Clicking the [Pin] button toggles the Pin function on and off.

Whether to keep the Linked-Part List Window visible on top of other application windowscan be switched by clicking the Pin button.

• When the [Pin] button is not pressedThe Linked-Part List Window may hide behind the windows of other applications.

• When the [Pin] button is pressedThe Linked-Part List Window is always visible on top.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ File Menu▼ File Menu

● Create New

Creates a new folder or linked part file.

Rename the default filename or folder name to a new name.

The folder name or linked part filename can also be changed directly in the folder structurearea or list display area of the Linked-Part List Window.

● Open

Opens the folder that contains linked part files.

1. Select [Open] from the [File] menu.A dialog box named “Browse for Folder” displays.

F130207E.EPS

Browse for Folder

Open Folder

[C:]

[D:]

Ee99 [E:]

CancelOK

-

+

+

+

+

+

-

31/2 Floppy [A:]

My computer


Desktop

My Brief case

Figure Browse for Folder Dialog Box



IM 33S01B30-01E

2. Perform one of the following operations:

• If a LinkParts folder existsSelect the LinkParts folder or the folder above it, and click the [OK] button.

The selected folder will be displayed as the top folder in the folder structure area of theLinked-Part List Window.

• If a LinkParts folder does not existSelect an existing folder and click the [OK] button.

A dialog confirming the creation of a new LinkParts folder will be displayed.

Clicking the [Yes] button will create a new LinkParts folder. The LinkParts folder will bedisplayed as the top folder in the folder structure area of the Linked-Part List Window.

Clicking the [No] button will return to the Browse for Folder dialog.

Note that clicking the [Cancel] button in the “Browse for Folder” dialog will close the“Browse for Folder” dialog box.

● Print Preview and Print

[Print] prints a list of linked parts, the descriptions of the structural elements of the linkedparts, and the image of a linked part in respect to all linked parts displayed in the folderstructure area of the Linked-Part List Window. [Print Preview] displays an image of theprintout in a window.

The descriptions of structural elements of liked parts are similar to those for the GraphicBuilder.

TIP

The Linked Parts Editor Window can be used to print each linked part individually.

● Exit Linked-Part List Window

Exits the Linked-Part List Window.

TIP

An error dialog appears if a linked part file still opens in the Linked-Part Editor Window. Close the Linked-Part Editor Window first.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Edit Menu▼ Edit Menu

● Cut

Deletes the selected folder or linked part file, and stores it in the clipboard. The operationsafter the cut operation are shown below:

Table Operations after Cut Operation

Area in LinkedPart Window Selected Item Operation when the Cut Operation is Executed

Folder Structure Display Area

Folder

The selected folder and all folders and linked part files under that folder are cut. Note that a cut operation cannot be performed if there are files other than linked part files under the selected folder.

List Display Area Linked Part File The selected linked part file is cut

Image Display Area (*1) The elements of the linked part file being selected in the list display area are cut.

F130208E.EPS

*1: In the image display area, the cut operation is performed using the pop-up menu that is displayed by clicking the rightmouse button.All objects that are elements of the linked part that is cut will be deleted. Thus, the linked part will have no objects in thestructural elements.

Note that [Cut] in the [Edit] menu can be used only when any of the items in the above tableis selected.

● Copy

Copies the selected folder or linked part file, and stores it in the clipboard. The operationsafter the copy operation are shown below:

Table Operations after Copy Operation

Area in LinkedPart Window Selected Item Operation when the Copy Operation is Executed

Folder Structure Display Area Folder

The selected folder and all folders and linked part files under that folder are copied. Note that if there are files other than linked part files under the selected folder, all files except those files are copied.

List Display Area Linked Part File The selected linked part file is coped.

Image Display Area (*1) The elements of the linked part file being selected in the list display area are copied.

F130209E.EPS

*1: In the image display area, the copy operation is performed using the pop-up menu that is displayed by clicking the rightmouse button.

Note that [Copy] in the [Edit] menu can only be used when any of the items in the abovetable is selected.

● Paste

The files or folders stored in the clipboard by Cut or Copy is pasted to the area in theLinked-Part List Window.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Delete

Deletes the selected linked part file or folder.

A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Clicking the [OK] button will delete the selectedlinked part file or folder.

TIP

When deleting a linked part file, whether the linked part is embedded in the windows is not checked.

● Edit

Starts up the Linked-Part Editor Window to edit the linked part file selected in the list displayarea of the Linked-Part List Window.

TIP

Double-clicking a linked part name in the list display area can also start the Linked-Part Editor Window.

● Properties

Calls the dialog to change the properties of the selected linked part file or folder.

Folder Name

F130210E.EPS

Cancel

Change Folder Properties

VALVE

OK

Comment

Figure Change Folder Properties Dialog Box

A linked part name or folder name can be specified in this dialog. A comment text can alsobe entered for the linked part file.

■ Display Menu▼ Display Menu

● Refresh

Refreshes the display contents of the folder's hierarchy or a list of linked part files containedin the folder.


<F13.3 Editing and Creating Linked Parts> F13-17

IM 33S01B30-01E

F13.3 Editing and Creating Linked PartsThe Linked-Part Editor Window is used to edit a newly created linked part or anexisting linked part. This window is also used to register an object or a normal partthat is being used on the Graphic Builder as a linked part.

■ Overview of Operations for Creating or Modifying a Linked PartThe Linked-Part List Window, Linked-Part Editor Window, and Graphic Builder are used tocreate or modify a linked part.

● Operations for Creating a New Linked Part

A linked part file can be created using the Linked-Part List Window. The created file will beregistered as an empty linked part without objects for its structural element. Perform one orboth of the following operations in the order show below to add an object as the structuralelement of this linked part.

• Register a normal part or an object that already exists in the Graphic Builder as alinked part.

• Edit a linked part in the Linked-Part Editor Window.

● Operations for Modifying a Linked Part

An existing linked part can be modified by selecting the linked part in the Linked-Part ListWindow.

Perform one or both of the following operations in the order show below:

• Replace a normal part or an object that exists in the Graphic Builder with the elementof an existing linked part.

• Edit the existing linked part in the Linked-Part Editor Window.


F13-18<F13.3 Editing and Creating Linked Parts>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Objects that can be Used as Linked PartsThere are no limits for the number of linked parts that can be created on Linked-Part ListWindow.

The objects or parts that can be used as elements of linked parts are as follows:

● Objects that can be Used

• Graphic objects

• Group objects

• Registered normal parts

TIP

When a group object is registered as a linked part, the grouping attributes associated with the groupobject will also be maintained by the registered linked part.

● Objects that cannot be used

• Linked parts

• Soft keys

• Background bitmaps

• Window link



IM 33S01B30-01E

F13.3.1 Functions of Linked-Part Editor WindowThe Linked-Part Editor Window is used to add, edit and delete objects that comprisea linked part.

The Linked-Part Editor Window has similar functions of the Graphic Builder withonly little functional difference.

SEE ALSO

For more information about the Graphic Builder, see the following:


■ Editing Linked PartsThe following describes the procedure for using the Linked-Part Editor Window to edit alinked part.

1. In the Graphic Builder, select [Linked Part...] from the [Insert] menu, or click the toolbutton that starts up the Linked-Part List Window. The Linked-Part List Window opens.

TIP

The linked parts window can also be opened by selecting a folder that contains linked part files afterchoosing [Program] - [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Linked-Part List Window] from the Windows’s [Start]menu.



IM 33S01B30-01E

2. Select a linked part file to edit in the Linked-Part List Window, and select [Edit...] fromthe [Edit] menu.

The Linked-Part Editor Window displays. The window contains the contents of theselected linked part file.

F130301E.EPS

File Edit Format Tool DrawView Insert Window Help

F/B X:0239 Y:0064

Linked - Part Editor Window [ File : Tank No_1 - [150%] ]

500

100

150

200

250

500 100 150 200 250 300 350 4000.0

F

*****

150%

Figure Linked-Part Editor Window

3. Edit a linked part on Linked-Part Editor Window.

4. After the editing of the linked part is complete, select [Save] from the [File] menu.

The edited linked part will be saved in the linked part file.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Tools for Editing Linked PartsThe following describes the features of Linked-Part Editor Window that are different fromthose of the Graphic Builder.

● Menu Bar

The menu items that can be accessed from the Linked-Part Editor Window are similar tothose of the Graphic Builder.

A tool menu can be used for drawing objects for batch system. The objects are:

• Recipe Comment

• Recipe Group Comment

• Description

• Equipment Requirement

SEE ALSO

For more information about the product control toolbar, see the following:

G7.3.1, “Elements of Product Control Window”

● Toolbar

The tool buttons that can be accessed from the Linked-Part Editor Window toolbar aresimilar to those on the Graphic Builder.

However, correspond to the items removed from the menu bar, the tool buttons are re-moved too.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F13.3.2 Registering Other Objects as Linked PartsExisting objects defined on the Graphic Builder or the normal parts that have beenregistered can be registered as linked parts.

■ Registering Linked Parts▼ Registering Linked Parts

The existing objects used on the Graphic Builder or registered normal parts can be regis-tered as Linked parts. The registration procedure is shown below:

1. Open a graphic builder file that will be registered as a linked part on the graphicbuilder.

2. Select the call button of the Linked-Part List Window in the tool bar of the GraphicBuilder menu bar.

3. Create a new linked part file or select an existing linked part file in the Linked-Part ListWindow.

TIP

If an existing linked part file is selected for registration, all the contents of that linked part file will beremoved, and it will be a new linked part.

After this, the procedure will differ depending on the object to be registered on the GraphicBuilder or a registered normal part.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● When Registering an Object as a Linked Part

The following describes the procedure for registering an object defined in the GraphicBuilder as a linked part.

4. Select the object to be registered as a linked part using the Graphic Builder.

5. Drag and drop the selected object to the image display area of the Linked-Part ListWindow.

F/B X:0239 Y:0064

500

100

150

200

250

500 100 150 200 250 300 350 4000.0

F

150%

*****

-

Ready

F130302E.EPS

File Edit Format DrawView Insert WindowTool Help

Linked - Part List WindowFile Edit Help

Contents of PumpLinkParts

PumpValveMotorTank

Pump No_1Date2000/01/

Pump No_2 2000/01/

Drag and Drop

Graphic Builder

All FoldersName

Figure Registering a Linked Part

After drag and drop, an image of the linked part will be displayed in the image display areaof the Linked-Part List Window.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● When Registering an Existing Part as a Linked Part

The following describes the procedure for registering a part used on the Graphic Builder asa linked part.

4. Start the parts window in the Graphic Builder.

5. Select the part to be registered as a linked part in the parts window.

6. Drag and drop the selected object to the image display area of the Linked-Part ListWindow.

An image of the linked part will be displayed in the image display area of the Linked-Part List Window.

TIP

An embedded normal part object cannot be replaced with a linked part object by just performing theabove procedure.

To replace an embedded normal part object with a linked part object, the registered linked part must beinserted again on the Graphic Builder after the above procedure is complete. In this case, the attributes ofthe normal part object will be inherited to the linked part object except the part comment.


<F13.4 Inserting a Linked Part to Graphic Window> F13-25

IM 33S01B30-01E

F13.4 Inserting a Linked Part to Graphic WindowThe Graphic Builder (Engineering mode, Windows mode), Status Display Builder(control drawings, logic charts), and the Product Control Builder can insert thelinked parts. Various editing operations and property settings can be set to theinserted linked part objects. This section describes the method to insert the linkedparts on the Graphic Builder as an example.

■ Inserting Linked Parts▼ Inserting Linked Parts

1. Select [Linked Part...] from the [Insert] menu in the Graphic Builder, or click the toolbutton that starts the Linked-Part List Window.

The Linked-Part List Window starts up.

TIP

The linked part window can also be started by selecting the folder that contains linked part files afterchoosing [Program] - [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Linked-Part List Window] from the Windows [Start]menu.

2. Select the linked part file to be inserted to the graphic window in the Linked-Part ListWindow.

3. On Graphic Builder, open the Graphic Builder File where the linked part is to beinserted.


F13-26<F13.4 Inserting a Linked Part to Graphic Window>

IM 33S01B30-01E

4. Drag the linked part displayed in the image display area of the Linked-Part List Win-dow and drop it to the Graphic Builder window.

File Edit Format Tool DrawView Insert Window Help

F/B X:0239 Y:0064

500

100

150

200

250

500 100 150 200 250 300 350 4000.0

F

*****

Contents of Pump- LinkParts

PumpValveMotorTank

Pump No_1 2000/01/

Pump No_2 2000/01/

Ready

File Edit Help

F130401E.EPS

Drag and Drop

Graphic Builder

Linked - Part List Window

All Folders

150%

Name Date

Figure Inserting a Linked Part

After the drag and drop, an object of the linked part is embedded in the GraphicBuilder window.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F13.4.1 Editing a Linked Part ObjectVarious editing operations can be performed to the linked part object inserted on theGraphic Builder if needed.

■ Editing Operations for Linked Part ObjectsLinked part objects inserted on the Graphic Builder can be treated as objects like circles orsquares. The following editing operations can be performed to the linked part objects.

Table Editing Operations for Linked Part Objects

Cannot be edited if there are elements thatcannot be rotated.

Cannot be edited if there are elements that cannot be rotated.

Only proportional size changes are allowed.

Editing Operation Allowed/Not allowed Remarks

Point Correction No

Move Yes

Cut Yes

Copy Yes

Paste Yes

Delete Yes

Copy Modify Yes

Past Modify Condition Yes

Flip Horizontally No

Flip Vertically No

Rotate 90 Degrees Counterclockwise Yes

Rotate 90 Degrees Clockwise Yes

Arbitrary Rotation No

Change Size Yes

F130402E.EPS

Yes: AllowedNo: Not allowed

TIP

The setting data in the linked part object cannot be searched or replaced using the Find dialog.

■ Deleting the Linked Part Attribute from a Linked Part ObjectThe object embedded as a linked part has a linked part attribute. To change the linked partobject to a normal object, the linked part attribute must be removed from the object.

Select a linked part object in the Graphic Builder, and select [Ungroup] from the [Draw]menu.

The link part attribute and the group attribute will be deleted simultaneously from the object.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Printing a List of Linked PartsA list of linked parts being inserted to the graphic window that are open in the GraphicBuilder can be printed. The printing order will be after “HIS Unique Primitive Information.”

To print, select [Print...] from the [File] menu.

The Print dialog will be displayed to execute printing.

■ Updating Linked Part Objects in the BuilderIn the Graphic Builder, the image of the linked part object will be updated when the graphicbuilder file that quotes the linked part is opened or when the external file that quotes thelinked part is imported.

The linked part object will be updates according to the table below for each builder that canquote linked parts.

Table Linked Par Object Update Timing

F130403E.EPS

Builder Startup Mode Operation Linked Part Update

Graphic Builder

Windows modeOpen Not updated

Import external file Not updated

Engineering modeOpen (*1) Updated

Import external file Updated

Status Display Builder Engineering modeOpen (*1) Updated


Product Control Builder Engineering modeOpen (*1) Updated


1*: The [Open] menu in the Engineering mode is for sva file format. The linked parts that are embedded in the sva files willbe updated.

There is a possibility that a linked part source may have already deleted when the updatingthe linked part object. In this case, the image and information before the updating will beused for the embedded linked part object. At the same time, a message stating that thelinked part object could not be updated will be displayed in the Graphic Builder.

TIP

If a builder file contains a linked part, and the source of the linked part is no longer exist, when download-ing the builder file to the HIS, the previous settings for the linked part will be applied to the data displaysand modify operations on the HIS screen.

When updating the linked part objects, the updating mode of a generic name bindinginformation can be set per project.

SEE ALSO

• For more information about the updating the generic name binding information, see the following:

F13.4.2, “Setting Linked Part Object Properties”

• The updating mode for generic name is set by using the graphic utility of graphic builder. For more infor-mation about the graphic utility, see the following:

F12.17, “Graphic Utility”



IM 33S01B30-01E

F13.4.2 Setting Linked Part Object PropertiesAs a normal object, properties can be set for a linked part object inserted on theGraphic Builder. The tabs and setting items on the tabs are listed below:

• General tab (object name, X & Y coordinates, size)

• Graphic Modify tab

• Data Bind tab (binding of generic name)

Position

(S) (H)

X : 186

Valve 11

29

694

28

Y :

Size

Object Name Position

Activate Tag Object

Set Data During Debugging

General Data BindGraphic Modify

ApplyCloseOK

F130404E.EPS

Linked Part

Figure Tabs for Setting Linked Part Object Properties

■ General TabThe General tab is used to set the object name, location, and size of a linked object. Thereis no default setting for object name.

User can change the size of the linked part object, but can not change the proportions ofthe object.

■ Graphic Modify TabThe Graphic Modify tab is used to set graphic modification conditions for all objects thatcomprise a linked part object.

When graphic modification conditions are set for the linked part object, the graphic modifi-cation conditions that were set during linked part registration and editing will becomeinvalid, and will be replaced with the newly set graphic modification conditions.

TIP

When all graphic modification conditions of a linked part object are deleted, a dialog for confirming thechange of the linked object will be displayed. If Update is selected, the linked part file will be read thegraphic modification conditions set during linked part registration, so that the previous settings arerestored. When Update is selected, the Undo operation cannot be performed, so that the linked partobject cannot be reverted to the condition prior to the Update.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Setting Graphic Modification to a Linked-Part Object

When a pump and a text are inserted as a linked-part object, and the graphic modifyconditions for the linked-part object is defined, the settings will be reflected as follows:

F130405E.EPS

Process data:FIC100.PV

Text

Modify condition statement:FIC100.PV>50.0

Graphic Modify

100.0

Text

The graphic modification condition set to the linked part object will be reflected in all objects that comprise a linked part object.

Linked part object

Graphic (pump)

Figure Setting Graphic Modification to a Linked-Part Object

In the above example, “Color change at FIC100.PV>50.0” is set as a graphic modificationcondition of a linked part object. This graphic modification condition is applicable to thepump and the text that comprise the linked part object.

The graphic modification condition set for the linked part object will take priority even ifgraphic modification conditions have already been set for the pump or the text when regis-tering or editing the linked parts.

● Cautionary Points Regarding the Display of Graphic Modification Condi-tions

When the Graphic Modify tab is opened, no graphic modification conditions will be dis-played even if graphic modification conditions are set for each object that comprises alinked part object.

The graphic modification conditions that are set for each object will be displayed only forthe linked part objects that meet both of the following conditions:

• There is only one group of elements for the linked part object.

• A graphic modification condition is set for the entire group when registering the groupas a linked part. (A graphic modification condition is set in the Properties sheet aftergrouping is complete)



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Data Bind TabAll generic names used for a object that comprises a linked part object are displayed in theData Bind tab. A datum can be set to bind to each generic name.

● Generic Name for a Linked Part Object

If a pump and a text are embedded as a linked part object, the generic names will bedisplayed in the Data Bind tab as shown below:

Process data:$TAG02.$ITEM02

Text

Modification conditional formula:$TAG01.$ITEM01>50.0

Graphic Modify

100.0

Data Bind

Generic Name$TAG01$ITEM01$TAG02$ITEM02

BindingFIC-001PVFIC-002MV

F130406E.EPS

Graphic (pump)

Text

Linked part object

All generic names used by both the graphic (pump) and text are displayed.

Figure Generic Name for a Linked Part Object in Data Bind Tab

A condition statement “$TAG01.$ITEM01>50.0” is set as a graphic modification conditionfor the pump corresponding to a generic name. Process data “$TAG02.$ITEM02” is set asthe text to be displayed.

In such cases, all generic names used by the pump and text will be displayed in the DataBind tab of the linked part object. The data bound to the generic names can be changed.

TIP

When data bound to the generic names are changed, they become the generic names for individualobjects.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Updating Graphic Generic Name Binding InformationThe binding information of a graphic generic name can be set on the graphic builder whenthe linked part is used for the graphic, or an original binding information can be set to thegeneric name. When updating the used linked parts in the graphic window, which bindinginformation is used for the generic names can be defined. This setting is valid for the wholeproject.

• Original

When this option is set, the original bindings of the linked parts are used. All theoriginal bindings of all generic names in the linked part file are valid when the linkedpart is updated.

• Builder

When this option is set, the bindings of the linked parts defined on the graphic builderare used. All the bindings of all generic names defined on the graphic builder for thelinked part are valid when the linked part is updated. If a generic name is added to thelinked part as the original binding information, the original binding information may beapplied.

TIP

With the CS3000/CS1000 system software release R3.02 or earlier versions, the original binding informa-tion of the linked parts are used when a linked part is updated.

● Original Bindings are Used

When updating the linked parts status, the original bindings set to the generic names in thelinked parts are used. When a linked part is inserted on a Graphic Builder, and even thenew bindings are defined for the generic names of the linked part on the Graphic Builder,the linked parts still change status based on the information of the original bindings. More-over, if the linked parts do not have the original binding information but only the bindinginformation defined on builder, the binding information set on builder will be ignored whenthe linked part is updated.

Valve 1Valve 2Valve 3

Updating

Linked part

F130407E.EPS

Linked Part: Valve

Graphic Builder Graphic Builder

Original Binding Information

$TAG=FIC100

Binding Information Set on Builder

$TAG=FIC200

Binding when the Linked Part is updated

$TAG=FIC100

Figure Original Bindings are Used



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Bindings Set on Builder are Used

When updating the linked parts, the bindings of the generic names in the linked partsdefined on the Graphic Builder are used. When a linked part is inserted on a GraphicBuilder, and when the new bindings are defined for the generic names of the linked part,the linked parts will change status based on the information of these bindings set on thebuilder. However, when setting the bindings to the generic names, the object name must beconsistence to the original. If no bindings are set to the generic names on the GraphicBuilder, the original bindings are still ignored when linked parts are updated.

Valve 1Valve 2Valve 3

Updating

Linked part

F130408E.EPS

Linked Part: Valve

Graphic Builder Graphic Builder

Original Binding Information

$TAG=FIC100

Binding Information Set on Builder

$TAG=FIC200

Binding when the Linked Part is updated

$TAG=FIC200

Figure Bindings Set on Builder are Used

• Adding New Generic Names in a Linked Part

If new generic names with binding information are added to an existing linked part, thenewly added bindings will be used for updating the linked part status.


F13-34<F13.5 Updating and Downloading Linked Part Objects>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F13.5 Updating and Downloading Linked PartObjectsWhen a registered linked part in a project is modified, it is necessary to update thelinked part object of the builder file in which that linked part is embedded. The linkedpart object of the builder file can be updated by using the “Linked Part Update”dialog started from System View. The builder file can also be downloaded to the HISwhen the linked part object is updated.

TIP

When a builder file is opened or imported on Graphic Builder, Status Display Builder or Product ControlBuilder, the linked part object in that builder file will be updated automatically.


<F13.5 Updating and Downloading Linked Part Objects> F13-35

IM 33S01B30-01E

F13.5.1 Starting Linked Part Update DialogLinked Part Update dialog can be started from System View.

■ Linked Part Update Dialog Startup ProcedureTo start Linked Part Update dialog, select [Update Linked Part...] from the [Tools] menu inSystem View. The Linked Part Update dialog will start to search for files to be updated.During this search, the following message dialog will be displayed, and the operation on theLinked Part Update dialog becomes disabled.

F130501E.EPS

Update Linked Part

Searching update file…

Figure Linked Part Update Message

After the search is complete, the operation on Linked Part Update dialog returns enabled.

TIP

• The [Update Linked Part...] menu can only be selected when a project is selected in the SystemView. Otherwise, the menu is grayed-out.

• For one project, multiple Linked Part Update dialogs cannot be started. However, it is possible to startmultiple linked Part Update dialogs for multiple projects.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F13.5.2 Functions of Update Linked Part Dialog BoxThe most recent state of a linked part can be updated in all builder files where thelink part is embedded.

■ Link Part Update Dialog Box▼ Link Part Update Dialog Box

The following is a display of Update Linked Part dialog.

F130502E.EPS

Find

CancelUpdate and DownloadUpdate

Update Linked Part

All Folders

Update File / Total File : 0 / 10

Quotation Date Quoted Linked PartFind Key

+ MYPJT

Message display area

Figure Update Linked Part Dialog Box (Static)

● Find Key

▼ Find

Choose [Quotation Date] or [Quoted Linked Part] option as a search method for linked partfiles. The default is [Quotation Date].

● Message Display Area

Various messages related to the update of linked parts are displayed.

When the Linked Part Update dialog is started up, the number of files to be updated isdisplayed. After a search is complete, the number of searched files is displayed.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Searching for Linked Parts to be Updated by Quotation Date▼ Quotation Date

After the linked parts registered in a project are edited, the linked parts to be updated canbe searched by Quotation Date as a search key in order to update the linked part objectsfor the builder files where the linked parts are embedded.

1. Select [Quotation Date] as a search key in the Update Linked Part dialog.

2. Click the [Find] button.The dates of inserting the linked parts in builder files of the project and the last editingdates of these linked parts will be compared. Once the date comparison is complete,the builder files where the embedded linked parts with different dates will be found.

F130503E.EPS

Find

Update Linked Part

All Folders Quoted Linked Part : GR0003

Tank No_1Tank No_2Tank No_4Tank No_6


-

--

-

+

+++

LPHIS0164HIS0163

WINDOWOV0001GR0003GR0002GR0001CG0001

FCS0101DISPLAY

FCS0102BATCH



Inserted Link Part Display AreaInserted File List Display Area

Figure Update Linked Part Dialog Box (When Searching by Quotation Date)

● Inserted File List Display Area

The folder structure of a project from the top folder and below, as well as all the builder fileswith linked parts is displayed in a tree structure. The builder files that contain the linkedparts to be updated will have a check mark (GR0001 and GR0003 in the figure above). Thecheck marks cannot be turned on and off. Only the top folder of the project is displayed bydefault. The user must open other folders if needed.

TIP

The folders that contain builder files with check marks (HIS0163 and DISPLAY in the figure above) alsohave a check mark.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Inserted Link Part Display Area

All the linked parts that are inserted in a builder file selected in the Inserted File List Displayarea are displayed in a list format. The linked parts to be updated will have a check mark.The check marks cannot be turned on and off.

TIP

If the same linked part is inserted for multiple times in a selected builder file, only one is displayed as arepresentative. If there is a linked part to be updated, it will become the representative. The linked partthat is displayed in this case will also have a check mark.

■ Searching for Builder Files by Inserted Linked Parts▼ Quoted Linked Part

After linked parts have been edited and updated, inserted linked parts can be used as asearch key to search a builder file in order to perform processes such as the fine adjust-ment of the location of a linked part object in the Graphic Builder. When a linked part isselected after the search is complete, only the builder file inserting that linked part can beupdated.

1. Select the [Quoted Linked Part] option as a search key in the Update Linked Partdialog.

2. Click the [Find] button.The builder files where the linked parts are embedded will be found.

F130504E.EPS

Find

Update Linked Part

All Folders


-

--

-

+

+++

LPHIS0164HIS0163

WINDOWOV0001GR0003GR0002GR0001CG0001

FCS0101DISPLAY

FCS0102BATCH

Quoted Linked Part

Tank No_1Tank No_2Tank No_4Tank No_6



Inserted File Display Area Linked Part Selection Area

Figure Update Linked Part Dialog (When Searching by Quoted Linked Part Linked Parts)



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Linked Part Selection Area

A list of linked parts inserted to any of the builder files in a project is displayed.

When a linked part is selected in this area, the display description of the inserted file displayarea will be updated.

TIP

• Only one linked part is displayed even when the linked part is inserted to multiple builder files.

• The linked parts that are not inserted to any of the builder files will not be displayed even though theyexist in a project.

• If a system provided linked part is used, the linked part may be displayed even though it does notexist under the project's folders.

● Inserted File Display Area

The folder structure of a project from the top folder and below, as well as all the builder fileswith embedded linked parts is displayed in a tree structure. The builder files with embeddedlinked parts selected in the linked part selection area will have check marks. These builderfiles are to be updated.

■ Update and Download▼ Update, Update and Download

After the linked parts for updating are found, execute “Update” or “Update and Download.”

SEE ALSO

For more information about the processing after executing “Update” or “Update and Download,” see thefollowing:

F13.5.3, “Update and Download”

● Update

To only update linked part objects, click the [Update] button. The Linked Part Update Statusdialog is displayed to perform the update process.

● Update and Download

Click the [Update and Download] button to update linked part objects and download theupdated data to the HIS.

The Linked Part Update Status dialog is displayed and the update process is performedfirst. After the update process is complete, a download process begins.

TIP

When the Test Function is running, use the [Update and Download] button to download to the HIS.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Exiting Linked Part Update DialogCancel the linked parts update, and exit the Linked Part Update dialog. To end the dialog,click the [Cancel] button.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F13.5.3 Update and DownloadWhen “Update” or “Update and Download” is executed in the Linked Part Updatedialog, the update process of linked part objects will be performed first. When “Up-date and Download” is executed, a download process to the HIS begins once theupdate process is complete. The progress of these processes can be viewed in theLinked Part Update Status dialog.

■ Progress of Update and DownloadThe progress of the update process of linked part objects and the download process canbe viewed in the Linked Part Update Status dialog as shown below:

F130505E.EPS

CloseCancel

Linked Part Update Status

50%

Start Thu Oct 28 11:19:59 1999BATCH\RG01\ProductWind

Progress bar

Figure Linked Part Update Status Dialog Box

This dialog box displays various messages regarding the update and download. Theprogress of a process is displayed in the progress bar. For an example, during the updateprocess, the progress ratio of the files that have been updated in relation to the total num-ber of files for updating is displayed in a percentage.

● Update Process

The builder files with check marks in the Linked Part Update dialog will be updated. Theupdate process is performed for one builder file at a time in station units.

For a builder file that successfully completes the update process, the linked part objects inthat builder file will be updated. The check marks will be removed in the Linked Part Updatedialog.

TIP

The removal of the check marks in the Linked Part Update dialog box is directly related to whether or notthe update process is completed successfully; it is irrelevant to download process.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Download Process

When the “Update and Download” is executed in the Linked Part Update dialog, the down-load process begins after the update process is complete.

The updated files will be downloaded.

● Canceling the Process

The update process or download process can be cancelled during the process. Click the[Cancel] button to abort the process.

When the [Cancel] button was clicked to cancel the update or download process, a mes-sage, “The process was cancelled,” will be displayed in the Linked Part Update dialog, andthe process will be aborted after the update or download process of a builder file that was inthe middle of processing is completed.

TIP

When neither update process nor download process is in progress, the [Cancel] button will be grayed outand cannot be clicked.

● Exiting Linked Part Update Status Dialog

When neither update process nor download process is in progress, the Linked Part UpdateStatus dialog can be closed.

To exit the dialog, click the [Close] button.

TIP

When either update process or download process is in progress, the [Close] button will be grayed out andcannot be clicked.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Handling Update or Download Failures

● Handling Update Failures

Under the certain circumstances such as the builder file is being used, updating the linkedpart object in the builder file may fail. The failure will trigger a message to indicate theupdate failure. A message box similar to the one shown below will be displayed.

In this case, the update process of the builder file that could not be updated will be skippedand the next file will be updated. The builder files that could not be updated continue tohave a check mark in the Linked Part Update dialog.

F130506E.EPS

CloseCancel

Linked Part Update Status

50%

HIS1664\WINDOW\GR0001.edfERROR=5100 :

HIS1664\WINDOW\GR0002.edf

Figure Linked Part Update Status Dialog Box when Update Failed

When a download process is performed immediately after an update process is complete,the files that failed to be updated will not be downloaded.

● Handling an Absent Linked Part File

If the file for the linked part inserted to a builder is absent, the update of the linked partobject will not be performed, and the original linked part object information will be leftunchanged. However, if a linked part file is absent and no information exists for the linkedpart object, the linked part will be removed from the inserted file.

● Handling Download Failures

Under the certain circumstances such as the HIS is not running properly, download pro-cess to the HIS may fail. The failure will trigger a message to indicate the download failure.After the failure, the rest builder files for downloading to the same HIS will be skipped.


Blank Page

<F14. Graphic Container> F14-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

F14. Graphic ContainerThis chapter explains the function to use Graphic windows as containers for theActiveX controls (graphic container). The explanation follows the operation flowfrom creating an ActiveX control to displaying it in a Graphic window. Use VisualBasic, a general-purpose tool, to perform engineering associated with the graphiccontainer.

■ Overview of Graphic ContainerGraphic windows provide an object that functions as a container for the ActiveX controls.Use this object to embed ActiveX controls in Graphic windows.

GR0001

Ready

F140001E.EPS

100.00

80.00

60.00

40.00

20.00

0.00

-20.00

-40.00

-60.00

-80.00

-100.00

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718

3D SURFACE PLOT

ActiveX control

Graphic window

Object that functions as a container (control object)

Figure Relationship between ActiveX Control and Graphic Window

Use Visual Basic to create ActiveX controls that are embedded in the Graphic windows.Commercially available ActiveX controls can also be used.

Some commercially available ActiveX controls offer functions to display on the meter theprocess data acquired from an OPC server or to display the level of process data, whileothers display 3-dimensional graphs based on data acquired from a general-purposedatabase. Using these commercially available ActiveX controls expands the Graphicwindow functions.

Note that the DDE server cannot be accessed from ActiveX controls that are created withVisual Basic.


F14-2<F14. Graphic Container>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Using a Commercially Available ActiveX ControlWhen using a commercially available ActiveX control, use Visual Basic to create a newActiveX control that contains the commercially available ActiveX control. Necessary func-tions, including the function to transmit data pertaining to the commercially availableActiveX control, must be programmed into the new ActiveX control using Visual Basic.

File Edit View Project Format Debug Run Tools Add-Ins Window Help

Project1(Project1)

User Controls

UserControl1(UserControl1)

-

-

Project1 - Microsoft Visual Basic [design]

Project1 - UserControl1(UserControl)

ab

XY

OLE

0.0 4800 � 3600

General

Project • Project1

Properties - UserControl1

Alphabetic Categorized

UserControl1 UserControl

(Name)AccessKeysAlignableAppearanceAutoRedrawBackColorBackStyleBorderStyleCanGetFocusClipControlsControlContainerDefaultCancelDrawModeDrawStyleDrawWidthEditAtDesignTimeEnabledFillColorFillStyle

UserControl1

False1 - 3DFalse� & H8000000F&1 - Opaque0 - NoneTrueTrueFalseFalse13 - Copy Pen0 - Solid1FalseTrue� & H00000000&1 - Transparent

(Name)Returns the name used in code to identify an object.

Form Layout

GR0001

F140002E.EPS

100.00

80.00

60.00

40.00

20.00

0.00

-20.00

-40.00

-60.00

-80.00

-100.00

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718

3D SURFACE PLOT

Graphic window

Visual Basic

Object that functions as a container (control object)

Commercially available ActiveX control

Paste the commercially available ActiveX control.

Program data transmission and other functions using Visual Basic.

Figure Using Commercially Available ActiveX Control


<F14. Graphic Container> F14-3

IM 33S01B30-01E

When using a commercially available ActiveX control, it is necessary to consider licenseimplications. ActiveX controls are subject to different types of licenses. Understand thelicensing mechanisms described later, and obtain necessary licenses.

■ Precautions for Reading the Process DataThe ActiveX control can be used to gather the process data on the OPC server. To use theOPC server, the “Exaopc OPC interface package” is normally required. However, whenusing the ActiveX control in the Graphic window to gather the process data (only currentvalues) on the OPC server, the “Exaopc OPC interface package” does not need to bepurchased. Note that to gather data other than the current values (such as historical data,closing data, etc.), the “Exaopc OPC interface package” is required.


F14-4<F14.1 Licensing Mechanisms for the ActiveX Control>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.1 Licensing Mechanisms for the ActiveXControlCommercially available ActiveX controls adopt different licensing mechanisms.This section explains five representative licensing systems.

■ ActiveX Control LicenseActiveX controls are created as reusable parts that may be used with other software. A userwho purchases a software program containing an ActiveX control is indirectly acquiring theActiveX control. In other words, not the software developer who purchased the ActiveXcontrol, but the user who purchased the software can reuse the ActiveX control for otherpurposes. In light of the situation, ActiveX control developers provide a license agreementor integrate a software licensing mechanism into the ActiveX control itself to protect theirsoftware property. These license agreements and software licensing mechanisms arebased on a number of different systems. The following are representative licensing sys-tems:

● Design-Time License

When designing a software in which an ActiveX control is embedded (design time), it isnecessary to obtain a license for the ActiveX control. No license is required for the ActiveXcontrol when running the software (run time).

This system can be adopted for ActiveX controls created with Visual Basic. The design-time license system is adopted by many ActiveX controls.

When working with a Graphic window, embedding an ActiveX control is considered adesign-time use. Displaying the Graphic window on the HIS is considered a run-time use.

● Run-Time License

Not only embedding the ActiveX control in a software during designing, but running thesoftware also requires a license for the ActiveX control.

● Demonstration License

The operating environment of ActiveX controls under this license may be limited within aparticular application, or the controls may not function fully.

● Time-Limited License

ActiveX controls under this license can be operated only during the specified period of time.

● Agreement Only

The terms of license are only specified in an agreement, and the functions of the ActiveXcontrol are not limited.

Some ActiveX controls adopt a combination of the above licensing systems, while othersadopt the developer’s own licensing system. Use commercially available ActiveX controlsin accordance with the contents of their license(s).


<F14.2 Flow from Creating an ActiveX Control to Displaying it in ...> F14-5

IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.2 Flow from Creating an ActiveX Control toDisplaying it in a Graphic WindowThis section explains the procedures on how to use the System Generation Func-tion installed in an HIS to create an ActiveX control and put it in a Graphic window,and how to display the Graphic window on the HIS.

This section gives a brief introduction about Visual Basic Development Environmentand features of ActiveX Control. For details, see the Visual Basic online manual,“Books Online.” This Books Online can be opened from the Start menu.

■ Procedure Flow

Creating an ActiveX control (*1)

Creating an ActiveX control Setup FD

Putting the ActiveX control in a Graphic Window

Downloading to HIS

Setting up the ActiveX control

Displaying the Graphic Window

F140201E.EPS

On the HIS with System Generation Function installed.

On HIS

*1: ActiveX Control can also be created on the general-purpose PC not with System Generation Function installed.

Figure Procedure Flow

SEE ALSO

When using an ActiveX Control to access the process data, it is necessary to setup the libraries providedfor users. For more information about the libraries, see the following:

M1, “User Development Environment”

On the HIS with System Generation Function installed, when the procedures from “Creat-ing an ActiveX control” to “Putting the ActiveX control in a Graphic Window” are completed,the Graphic window can be displayed on the HIS.

Moreover, it is necessary to install Visual Basic to the HIS in which System GenerationFunction is installed.

On the HIS in which Visual Basic is not installed, it is necessary to use the setup FD tosetup the environment for ActiveX Control.


F14-6<F14.2 Flow from Creating an ActiveX Control to Displaying it in ...>

IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Overview of Visual Basic Development EnvironmentThe development environment of Visual Basic comprises five windows: toolbox, designwindow, project explorer, property window and form layout window.


Project1(Project1)

User Controls


-

-



ab

XY

OLE

0.0 4800 � 3600

General

Project - Project1




F140202E.EPS

Form Layout



UserControl1


Property window

Form layout window

Project explorerToolbox

Design window

Figure Windows when Creating an ActiveX Control

The following describes the role of each window:

● Toolbox

The toolbox displays a list of icons corresponding to the objects that can be placed in theUserControl object.

● Design Window

The UserControl object will be displayed when creating an ActiveX control. Select a desiredobject in the toolbox and place it in this object to design a window for the ActiveX control. If“Standard EXE” is selected in the New Project tab, an object called “Form” will be displayedinstead of the UserControl object.

● Project Explorer

The project explorer displays the hierarchical structure within the project as a tree.

● Property Window

The property window displays the names and values of object properties in list format.Property values can be set or changed in this window.

● Form Layout Window

The form layout window displays the position in which the application window will appear atrun time.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Ambient PropertiesSince ActiveX controls are considered parts installed in a container, information on thecontainer side may become necessary at run time. For example, when the backgroundcolor of the ActiveX control is set to change according to the background color of thecontainer, the ActiveX control will reference the corresponding Ambient property.

The values of Ambient properties are provided from the container. Thus, it is necessary tocheck in advance which properties the container provides. Graphic windows provide theAmbient properties listed below:

• BackColor:Background color of the Graphic window specified via the builder

• ForeColor:Foreground color of the HIS. The default is white. Cannot be specified using thebuilder.

• Font:Font set via HIS setting

• DisplayName:Window name

• UserMode:“True” for Graphic windows and “False” for graphic builders

• LocaleID:Locale of the system

• DisplayAsDefault:“False” (fixed value)

• MessageReflect:“False” (fixed value)

• Palette:Not supported (fixed value)If the ActiveX control uses a customized palette, the display colors may be disturbedwhen the system is using 256 colors.

• RightToLeft:“False” (fixed value)

• SupportsMnemonics:“False” (fixed value)

• ScaleUnits:Character string, “pixel” (fixed value)

• ShowGrabHandles:“False” (fixed value)

• ShowHactching:“False” (fixed value)

• TextAlign:“0” (fixed value)

• UIDead:“False” (fixed value)

SEE ALSO

In addition to the development environment and properties described above, the “Books Online” onlinemanual for Visual Basic contains explanations on Visual Basic coding conventions and other subjects.See the applicable explanation as necessary. “Books Online” can be started from the Start menu.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.2.1 Creating an ActiveX ControlThis section explains the steps to create an ActiveX control using Visual Basic.

After the ActiveX control window has been designed and the attributes (properties)and processing (codes) of objects (buttons placed in the window, etc.) defined,confirm the operation and compile the ActiveX control.

This operation is performed on the general-purpose PC equipped with Systembuilders.

■ Creating an ActiveX ControlThe following explains how to create an ActiveX control that changes the background colorwith a click of the [Blue] button or [Red] button in the window.

Blue Red

F140203E.EPS

Click on the button to change

the background color

Figure ActiveX Control



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Designing the ActiveX Control Window

Start Visual Basic, and begin designing a window for the ActiveX control.

1. Start Visual Basic from the Start menu of Windows.The New Project dialog box will appear.

F140204E.EPS

Help

Cancel

Open

New Existing Recent

Don't show this dialog in the future

New Project ?

Standard EXE ActiveX EXE ActiveX DLL ActiveXControl

VB ApplicationWizard

VB WizardManager

ActiveXDocument Dll

ActiveXDocument Exe

Deta ProjectAddin

Microsoft Visual BasicVisual Basic

Figure New Project Dialog Box

2. Select [ActiveX Control] in the New Project dialog box.



IM 33S01B30-01E

3. Select the [Open] button.The windows in the Visual Basic development environment will appear.


Project1(Project1)

User Controls


-

-



ab

XY

OLE

0.0 4800 � 3600

General

Project - Project1




F140205E.EPS

Form Layout



UserControl1


Figure Visual Basic Development Environment



IM 33S01B30-01E

4. Set the project.Select [Project Properties] from the [Project] menu.The Project Property dialog box will appear.

Project Type:

Unattended Execution

Require License Key

Upgrade ActiveX Controls

Retained In Memory

General Make Component DebuggingCompile

F140206E.EPS

Project1 - Project Properties

HelpCancelOK

ActiveX ControlStartup Object:(None)

Project Name:Project1

Help File Name:

Project Description:

Project HelpContext ID:

0

Threading Model

Apartment Threaded

Thread per Object

Thread Pool threads1

...

Figure Project Property Dialog Box

5. Enter [Project Name] and [Project Description] in the General tab.The project name entered here becomes the name for the ActiveX control file.

Project Type:

Unattended Execution

Require License Key

Upgrade ActiveX Controls

Retained In Memory

General Make Component DebuggingCompile

F140207E.EPS

Project1 - Project Properties

HelpCancelOK

ActiveX ControlStartup Object:(None)

Project Name:Color

Help File Name:

Project Description:

Change Color

Project HelpContext ID:

0

Threading Model

Apartment Threaded

Thread per Object

Thread Pool threads1

...

Figure Project Name and Project Description in General Tab



IM 33S01B30-01E

6. Assign a name for the ActiveX control.Select [UserControl] using the project explorer. Then, enter [ChangeColor] in theObject Name field in the property window.

7. Confirm that the entered name is displayed in the project explorer.

Project1(Project1)

User Controls

ChangeColor (ChangeColor)

-

-

Project • Project1

Properties - ChangeColor

ChangeColor UserControl


F140208E.EPS



ChangeColor


Figure Project Explorer and Property Window



IM 33S01B30-01E

8. Place a button in UserControl.Select a command button in the toolbox, then drag it to a desired area insideUserControl.The command button will be placed in the position.

Color - ChangeColor(UserControl)

Command1

F140209E.EPS

Figure Command Button Placed in UserControl



IM 33S01B30-01E

9. Set properties for the command button.Enter [cmdBlue] in the Object Name field in the property window. Then, enter [Blue] inthe Caption field. If necessary, change the font and point settings to adjust the propor-tion of letters displayed on the button.

Color(Color)

User Controls

-

-

Color - ChangeColor(UserControl)Project - Project1

Properties - Command1


Command1 - CommandButton

(Name)AppearanceBackColorCancelCaptionDefaultDisabledPictureDownPictureDragIconDragModeEnabledFontHeightHelpContextIDIndexLeftMaskColorMouseIconMousePointerOLEDropModePictureRightToLeftStyleTabIndexTabStop

Command11 - 3D� & H8000000F&FalseBlueFalse(None)(None)(None)0 - ManualTrueMS Sans Serif8550

480� & H00C0C0C0&(None)0 - Default0 - None(None)False0 - Standard1 True


Blue

F140210E.EPS

Figure Settings for Command Button Properties



IM 33S01B30-01E

10. Place another button in UserControl.By following the same steps used to place the [Blue] button, select a command buttonin the toolbox and place the button inside UserControl.

11. Enter [cmdRed] in the Object Name field and [Red] in the Caption field in the propertywindow.


Blue Red

Color(Color)

User Controls

-

-

Project - Project1

Properties - Command1


Command1 - CommandButton

(Name)AppearanceBackColorCancelCaptionDefaultDisabledPictureDownPictureDragIconDragModeEnabledFontHeightHelpContextIDIndexLeftMaskColorMouseIconMousePointerOLEDropModePictureRightToLeftStyleTabIndexTabStop

Command11 - 3D� & H8000000F&FalseRedFalse(None)(None)(None)0 - ManualTrueMS Sans Serif8550

480� & H00C0C0C0&(None)0 - Default0 - None(None)False0 - Standard1 True


F140211E.EPS

Figure UserControl with [Blue] Button and [Red] Button Placed Inside



IM 33S01B30-01E

12. Place a label in UserControl.Select a label control in the toolbox, then drag it to a desired area inside UserControl.The label control will be placed in the position.


Blue Red

F140212E.EPS

Label1

Figure Example of Label Control

13. Set properties for the label control.After confirming that the label control is selected inside UserControl, enter “Click onthe button to change the background color” in the Caption field in the property window.If necessary, change the font and point settings to adjust the proportion of letters.


Blue Red

F140213E.EPS



Figure Label Control Placed in UserControl

Now, the ActiveX control window has been designed.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Defining Processing (Codes) for the Button

The next step is to define the processing (codes) that will be triggered when the [Blue]button or [Red] button is clicked.

Define the codes for the [Blue] button

1. Double-click on the [Blue] button.The code window will open.

2. Enter the codes shown below.

Private Sub cmdBlue_Click()

UserControl.BackColor = &HFF0000

End Sub

3. When the codes have been entered, close the code window.

Define the codes for the [Red] button

1. Double-click on the [Red] button.The code window will open.

2. Enter the codes shown below.

Private Sub cmdRed_Click()

UserControl.BackColor = &HFF&

End Sub

3. When the codes have been entered, close the code window.

Now, the ActiveX control codes have been defined.

● Saving the Project

Save the project after defining the codes.

1. From the [File] menu, select [Overwrite Project].The Save File As dialog box will open.

2. Enter a file name, and select the [Save] button.The project will be saved.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Confirming the Operation of ActiveX ControlThe next step is to confirm the operation of the ActiveX created.

1. From the [File] menu, select [Add Project].The Add Project dialog box will appear.

F140214E.EPS

Add Project

Help

Cancel

Open

New Existing Recent

Standard EXE ActiveX EXE ActiveX DLL ActiveXControl

VB ApplicationWizard

VB WizardManager

ActiveXDocument Dll

ActiveXDocument Exe

Deta ProjectAddin

Figure Add Project Dialog Box

2. In the New Project tab of the Add Project dialog box, select [Standard EXE].



IM 33S01B30-01E

3. Select the [Open] button.Form1 will open. Paste the ActiveX control in Form1 and confirm the operation.



Project1 - Form1(Form)

ab

XY

OLE

General

Form1

F140215E.EPS

Figure Form1

4. Close the design window for the ActiveX control.



IM 33S01B30-01E

5. Confirm that the ActiveX control icon is displayed in the toolbox.

ab

XY

OLE

F140216E.EPS

General

Figure ActiveX Control Icon in Toolbox



IM 33S01B30-01E

6. Select the ActiveX control from the toolbox, then drag it to a desired area in Form1.The ActiveX control will be placed in the position.

Project1 - Form1(Form)

ab

XY

OLE

Form1

F140217E.EPS

Red



Blue



General

Figure ActiveX Control in Form1

7. Select [Start] from the [Run] menu. If it is the first time running of a newly createdproject, a dialog box of the project properties displays.Click on the [OK] button.

8. Click on the [Blue] button or [Red] button of the ActiveX control in Form1, and confirmthat the background color changes.

Now, operation has been confirmed.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Compiling the ActiveX ControlThe next step is to compile the ActiveX control.

1. In the project explorer, double-click on the name of the ActiveX control.The design window for the ActiveX control will appear.

2. Select [Create color.ocx] from the [File] menu.The Create Executable File dialog box will appear.

3. Confirm the directory and name of the file, then click on the [OK] button.Compilation starts, and an ActiveX control file (OCX file) will be created.

4. Save the project.From the [File] menu, select [Save File As].The Save Project Group As dialog box will appear.

5. Assign a desired name and save the project, etc.

Now, a new ActiveX control has been created.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.2.2 Creating a Setup Disk for the ActiveX ControlWhen an ActiveX control has been created, create a setup disk for the ActiveXcontrol.

Use the Package and Development Wizard of Visual Basic to create a setup disk.

This setup disk is used to operate the ActiveX control in an environment whereVisual Basic is not running. If Visual Basic is installed in the HIS on which to displaythe Graphic window, it is not necessary to create a setup disk.

■ Procedure of Creating an ActiveX Control Setup Floppy DiskThe following is an example of the Package and Development Wizard using Visual Basic6.0 Package.

1. Start the Setup Wizard from the Start menu. (Microsoft Visual Studio 6.0 – MicrosoftVisual Studio 6.0 Tools).Then start Package and Development Wizard.

F140218E.EPS

Bundle this project into a distributable package, such as anInternet cab or a setup program.

Send one of this project‘s packages to a distribution site, such asan Internet server.

Rename, duplicate, and delete your packaging and deploymentscripts for this project.

Package and Development Wizard

Close Help

Select project:

Package

Deploy

ManageScripts

Browse...C:\TEMP\VBAPP\Color.vbp

Figure Package and Development Wizard



IM 33S01B30-01E

2. Choose a package to continue.If the Color.ocx cannot be found, a dialog box prompting for compiling the projectdisplays. Clicking [Compile] to continue. After compiling, the window “Package andDevelopment Wizard - Package Type” appears.

F140219E.EPS

Cancel

Package and Development Wizard - Package Type

Help < Back Next >

Choose the type of package you want to create.

Package type:Standard Setup PackageInternet PackageDependency File

Finish

Description:

Use to create a package that will be installed by a setup.exe program.

Figure Package and Development Wizard - Package Type

3. Select [Standard Setup Package] in Package type field, then click [Next] button.The display switches to Package Folder dialog box.

F140220E.EPS

Choose the folder where your package will be assembled.

Package and Development Wizard - Package Folder

Network...

New Folder...

C:\

TEMP

Distribute

Package folder:

C:\TEMP\Distribute\Package

C:

C:

CancelHelp < Back Next > Finish

Figure Package and Development Wizard - Package Folder



IM 33S01B30-01E

4. Choose a folder for holding the package then click [Next] button. The following mes-sage box for confirmation appears. Click [OK] to continue.

F140221E.EPS

Package and Development Wizard

If this control woll be used within a design environment other than Visual Basic, you will need to distribute the PropertyPage DLL.

Do you want to include this file in your package?

Yes No

Figure Dialog for Confirmation

5. Changes to the dialog box for included files. The included files are listed in the dialogbox.

Color.ocx C:\TEMP\VBAPP\

MSPRPJP.DLL C:\WINNT\system32

MSSTKPRP.DLL C:\WINNT\system32

SETUP.EXE C:\Program Files\Micros

SETUP1.EXE C:\Program Files\Micros

STSUNST.EXE C:\Program Files\Micros

Name Source

F140222E.EPS

The files in the list below will be included in your package. ClickAdd to include additional files. Clear the checkbox to the left of the file name to remove a file from the package.

Files:

Cancel

Package and Development Wizard - Package Type

Help < Back Next > Finish

Add...

Figure Dialog Box for Included Files

TIP

When a commercially available ActiveX control is used, a list of ActiveX control names will be displayed inthe ActiveX Server Components window. For the license details pertaining to these commercially avail-able ActiveX controls, see the applicable manual or other documentation.



IM 33S01B30-01E

6. Click [Next] button to continue.The dialog box for cab options appears. Since the package is for saving into floppydisk, check the option of Multiple cabs.Set a size within the capacity of the floppy disk to Cab Size.

F140223E.EPS


Single cab

Multiple cabs

1.44 MB

Cab size:

Cab options

You can create one large cab file or multiple cab files for yourpackage. If you are going to distribute your application on floppy disks, you must create multiple cabs and specify a cabsize no larger than the disk you plan to use. Choose the appropriate option below.

Package and Development Wizard - Cab Options

Figure Dialog Box of Cab Options

7. Click [Next] button to continue.The dialog box for setting installation title appears. Enter the title of installation.

F140224E.EPS

Enter the title to be displayed when the setup program is run.


Installation title:

Color

Package and Development Wizard - Installation Title

Figure Installation Title Dialog Box



IM 33S01B30-01E

8. Click [Next] button to continue.The Start Menu Items dialog box appears.

F140225E.EPS

Determine the start menu groups and items that will be createdby the installation process.

Package and Development Wizard - Start Menu Items

Properties...

Remove

New Group

New Item...

Start menu items

Win

dow

s

Programs

Start Menu


Figure Start Menu Items Dialog Box

9. Click [Next] button to continue.The dialog box of Install Locations appears.

Color.ocx C:\TEMP\VBAPP $(AppPath)

MSPRPJP.DLL C:\WINNT\system32 $(WinSysPath)

Name Source Install Location

F140226E.EPS

You can modify the install location for each of the files listedbelow by changing the macro assigned to the file in the table. Ifdesired, you can ad subfolder information to the end of a macro, as in $(ProgramFiles)\MySubFolder.

Choose the file you want to modify, then change the information in the Install Location column.

Files:

Cancel

Package and Development Wizard - Install Locations


C:

Figure Install Locations Dialog Box



IM 33S01B30-01E

10. Click [Next] button to continue.The dialog box for choosing shared files appears. Do not check the files displayed.

Color.ocx C:\TEMP\VBAPP $(AppPath)

Name Source

F140227E.EPS

When this package is installed, the following file(s) can be installed as shared files. Shared files may be used by more thanone program. They are only removed if every program which uses them is removed. Check the files you want to install as shared.

Cancel

Package and Development Wizard - Shared Files


Shared files:

Install Location

Figure Shared Files Dialog Box

11. Click [Next] button to continue.The Finished dialog box appears. The script name can be changed if required.

F140228E.EPS

The wizard has finished collecting information needed to buildthis package. Enter the name under which to save the settings for this session, then click Finish to create the package.

Script name:

Cancel

Package and Development Wizard - Finished!


Standard Setup Package 1

Figure Finished! Dialog Box



IM 33S01B30-01E

12. Click [Finish] button.Then building the packaging files starts. When the packaging is completed, a reportdialog box appears. The report can be saved into a file if required.

13. Click [Deploy] button on Package and Deployment Wizard. The dialog box for deploy-ing package appears. Enter the script name specified in the previous step 11.

F140229E.EPS

Cancel

Package and Development Wizard - Package to Deploy

Help < Back Next >

Choose the package you want to deploy.

Package to deploy:Standard Setup Package 1

Finish

Figure Package to Deploy Dialog Box

14. Click [Next] button to continue.The Deployment Method dialog box appears. Select Floppy Disks from the list.

F140230E.EPS

Cancel

Package and Development Wizard - Development Method

Help < Back Next >

Choose the type of development you want to perform.

Development method:

Floppy Disks

Folder

Web Publishing

Finish

Description:

Use to distribute a package to multiple floppy disks.

Figure Deployment Method Dialog Box



IM 33S01B30-01E

15. Click [Next] button to continue.The Floppy Drive dialog box appears. Designate the floppy drive on this dialog box.

F140231E.EPS

CancelHelp < Back Next >

Please choose a floppy drive from the list below.

Finish

A:\

Format before copying

Floppy drive:

A :C :

Package and Development Wizard - Floppy Drive

Figure Floppy Drive Dialog Box

16. Click [Next] button to continue.The Finished dialog box appears.

F140232E.EPS

The wizard has finished collecting information needed to deploythis package. Enter the name under which to save the settings for this session, then click Finish to deploy the package.

Script name:

Cancel

Package and Development Wizard - Finished!


Floppy Development 1

Figure Finished Dialog Box



IM 33S01B30-01E

17. Insert a floppy disk into the drive.Click [Finish] button, then the packaged files are copied to the floppy disk. Sometimes,more than one floppy disk is required. In this case, follow the displayed instruction toinsert new floppy disks.

After these steps, the floppy disks for setting up ActiveX Controls are created.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.2.3 Embedding in a Graphic WindowRetrieve the created ActiveX control into a Graphic window.


1. Display a desired Graphic window on a general-purpose PC equipped with Systembuilders.

2. Place the control object inside the Graphic window.

3. Display the property sheet.

4. In the Control tab of the property sheet, click on the [Select] button. The Insert Objectdialog box will appear.

5. Select the name of the ActiveX control file.

6. Click on the [OK] button.The Insert Object dialog box will close.

7. Click on the [OK] button in the property sheet.The ActiveX control will be displayed in the Graphic window.

F140233E.EPS

Ready

GR0001 ActiveX Control

Red



Blue

Figure ActiveX Control in Graphic Window

8. Confirm the operation of the ActiveX control using the Graphic window’s debuggingfunction.

9. Configure other portions as necessary, and save the Graphic window file.

SEE ALSO

For graphic builder operation, see the following:


Now, the control has been embedded in the Graphic window.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.2.4 Downloading to HISWhen the ActiveX control has been embedded in the Graphic window, download thewindow file to HIS.


■ Downloading to HISFrom System View of the general-purpose PC equipped with System builders, downloadthe file of the Graphic window in which the ActiveX control has been embedded.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.2.5 Setting up ActiveX ControlWhen the Graphic window file has been downloaded, use the ActiveX control setupdisk to add to the HIS environment the files needed to operate the ActiveX control.

This operation is performed on the HIS.

■ ActiveX Control Setup Procedure1. Insert the ActiveX control setup floppy disk into the floppy disk drive of the HIS.

2. Double-click on SEUP.EXE in Explorer.The setup program will be started.

F140234E.EPS

OK Exit Setup

Project1 Setup

Welcome to the Project1 installation program

Setup cannot install system files or update shared files if they are in use.Before proceeding, we recommend that you close any applications you may be running.

Figure Setup Program Start Window

3. Perform operation according to the on-screen instructions.

TIP

If the graphic file has not been downloaded to the HIS, complete the step explained in F14.2.4, “Down-loading to HIS,” then perform the following operation.

Now, the ActiveX control has been set up.

When the setup is complete, the ActiveX control will operate even if Visual Basic is notinstalled.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.2.6 Displaying Graphic WindowWhen the ActiveX control has been set up in the HIS, display the Graphic window toconfirm the operation of the ActiveX control.

This is performed on the HIS.

■ Procedure for Displaying in Graphic Window1. Call the Graphic window from System View.

2. Confirm that the ActiveX control is displayed in the Graphic window.

3. Confirm that the ActiveX control displayed in the Graphic window operates normally.

TIP

When a commercially available ActiveX control is used, this process may find that the control is notoperating normally. In this case, the ActiveX control may not be set up correctly.

Now, confirmation by displaying the Graphic window has been completed.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.2.7 Creating ActiveX ControlsThe following example describes creating an ActiveX control that remains invisiblewhen generated but displays a message box after a specified period of time.

In this example, a timer control is placed in UserControl. The control is also set toobtain the corresponding Ambient property and adjust the background color ofUserControl to that of the container. Thus, the ActiveX control remains invisible inthe window when it is generated.

■ Display Example of WindowThe following is a display example of UserControl at design time.

F140235E.EPS

Figure UserControl for ActiveX Control That Operates in Background

The following is a display example of the message box that will appear at run time.

F140236E.EPS

Project1

OK

TEST

Figure Message Box



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Code Example

' Execute after tmrTim.Interval from the time the control is generated.

' Turn off the timer after displaying the message box.

' Reference the Ambient property and adjust the control’s background color to

that of the container.

Private Sub tmrTim_Timer()

MsgBox"Test"

tmrTim.Enabled = False

End Sub

' Turn on the timer when the control is generated.

Private Sub UserControl_Initialize()

tmrTim.Interval = 2000 ' Set the interval (Execute tmrTim_Timer() after 2

seconds)

tmrTim.Enabled = True

End Sub

Private Sub UserControl_InitProperties()

UserControl.BackColor = Ambient.BackColor

End Sub

Private Sub UserControl_AmbientChanged(PropertyName As String)

If PropertyName = "BackColor" Then


End If

End Sub

Private Sub UserControl_Paint()

If UserControl.BackColor <> Ambient.BackColor Then


End If

End Sub



IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.2.8 Precautions on the Font Size of ActiveX ControlsThe font sizes of the ActiveX control and the Graphic window may be required tomatch when the ActiveX control is created using Microsoft Visual Basic (hereinafterreferred to as VB). Note that VB and the Graphic Builder have different font sizeunits. Note also that the unit conversion ratio depends on each Windows operatingenvironment. This section explains how to compute the unit conversion ratio in theWindows operating environment.

■ Difference in Font Size Unit between VB and the Graphic BuilderThe unit of a font size designated in VB for creating the ActiveX control is “point.” One pointis the font size unit representing 1/72 of one inch on the CRT (25.4 mm).

On the other hand, the unit of a font size designated in the Graphic Builder for creating theGraphic window is “pixel.” One pixel is the font size unit representing one picture element.

Therefore, the point and pixel must be converted to match the font sizes of the ActiveXcontrol and the Graphic window.

■ Computing the Conversion Ratio of the Point to PixelIn Windows, the number of pixels per one inch on the CRT changes depending on the CRTsize, the device drivers, the screen size setting, the selection of the large/small screendisplay font. This changes the conversion ratio of the point to pixel. The relational expres-sion for the point and pixel in Windows is shown later in this section. Use this expression forreference to compute the conversion ratio of the point to pixel.

Note that this expression is used on the assumption that Windows has been installed onthe console type HIS according to the standard installation procedure. It is also used on theassumption that the Graphic window is set to be displayed without scaling or at special size(-SC), and that the Graphic window is set to be displayed at the same size it was created.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● With [Large Fonts] Selected for [Display] - [Settings] in the Control Panel

Relational expression:One pixel (Graphic Builder) = 0.6 point (VB ActiveX control)

Computation method:In the above operating environment, there are 120 pixels per one inch (both horizon-tally and vertically).As one point equals 1/72 inch, 120 pixels equal 72 points, making one pixel equal to0.6 point.

● With [Small Fonts] Selected for [Display] - [Settings] in the Control Panel

Relational expression:One pixel (Graphic Builder) = 0.75 point (VB ActiveX control)

Computation method:In the above operating environment, there are 96 pixels per one inch (both horizontallyand vertically).As one point equals 1/72 inch, 96 pixels equal 72 points, making one pixel equal to0.75 point.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ VB Program Acquiring the Number of Pixels per One InchAs explained in the above computation method, the conversion ratio of the point to pixelcan be computed for each operating environment by acquiring the number of pixels per oneinch in the current Windows operating environment.

The number of pixels per one inch can be acquired by writing a VB program usingGetDeviceCaps() API, and then executing the program under Windows.

The following is a sample VB program using GetDeviceCaps() API:

' API call procedure

Private Declare Function GetDC Lib "user32"

(ByVal hwnd As Long) As Long

Private Declare Function GetDeviceCaps Lib "gdi32" _

(ByVal hDC As Long, ByVal nindex As Long) As Long

Private Declare Function ReleaseDC Lib "user32" _

(ByVal hwnd As Long, ByVal hDC As Long) As Long

'GetDeviceCaps() API argument

Private Const LOGPIXELSX = 88

Private Const LOGPIXELSY = 90

Private Sub Command1_Click()

Dim hDC As Long

' Obtain the CRT device context.

hDC = GetDC(0)

Dim lVal As Long

' Number of pixels per one inch horizontally

' With console type HIS, lVal equals 96.

lVal = GetDeviceCaps(hDC, LOGPIXELSX)

Print "(LOGPIXELSX)", "Horizontal pixel per inch:", lVal

Print "One pixel = ", 72/lVal, "point"

' Number of pixels per one inch vertically

' With console type HIS, lVal equals 96.

lVal = GetDeviceCaps(hDC, LOGPIXELSY)

Print "(LOGPIXELSY)", "Vertical pixel per inch:", lVal

Print "Pixel = ", 72/lVal, "point"

' Be sure to release the device context.

lVal = ReleaseDC(0, hDC)

SEE ALSO

See the following documents of The Microsoft Knowledge Base for detailed information on the relation-ship between the point and pixel in Windows:

• For how to match the font sizes of the ActiveX control and the Graphic windowAPTICLE-ID: Q138801TITLE: How to Adjust FontSize at Run Time for Different Video Drivers

• For how to write a program using GetDeviceCaps()APTICLE-ID: Q114709TITLE: How to use GetDeviceCaps within Visual Basic


<F14.3 Graphic Interface Control> F14-41

IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.3 Graphic Interface ControlThe graphic interface control is an ActiveX control offered by Yokogawa.

Use of the graphic interface control allows the creation of an ActiveX control closelyrelated to the HIS including those of the Graphic windows.

■ Positioning of the Graphic Interface ControlThe graphic interface control is an ActiveX control positioned above other ActiveX controls.One Graphic window can be linked to multiple graphic interface controls.

Graphic interfacecontrol

F140301E.EPS

Data flow via Ambient property

Graphic window/graphic container

ActiveX controlCOM Interface

Figure Positioning of the Graphic Interface Control

■ Graphic Interface Control Library Name ¡ £The graphic interface control library name is “libbkhGrConnect.dll.”

The graphic interface control functions including this library are included in the followingsoftware packages:

• PHS1101 Standard Operation and Monitoring Function (*1)

• PHS5151 Graphic Builder (*1)

• LHS1100 Standard Operation and Monitoring Function (*2)

• LHS5150 Graphic Builder (*2)

*1: ¡ This is a software package for the CS 1000.*2: £ This is a software package for the CS 3000.


F14-42<F14.3 Graphic Interface Control>

IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.3.1 Graphic Interface Control Operating EnvironmentThis section describes the operation environment for the graphic interface control.

■ Hardware EnvironmentThe hardware environment for the HIS applies to the graphic interface control.

■ Software EnvironmentThe following software environment is required:

OS: Windows 2000 or Windows XP

ActiveX control:An ActiveX control developed in either of the following software packages (*1):

Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0 Professional EditionVisual Studio 6.0 Service Pack 5

*1: The ActiveX controls created with MFC/ATL are not supported. And Visual Basic .NET cannot be used for creatingActiveX controls.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.3.2 ActiveX Control Development Environment for GraphicInterface Control

An ActiveX control can be developed on an HIS installed with the system gen-eration functions by using the graphic interface control, in the same manner asan ActiveX control that can be developed without the use of the graphic inter-face control.

An ActiveX control can also be developed on a PC other than an HIS (develop-ment PC) by using the graphic interface control.

■ Setting Up the Environment for a Development PC ¡ £To develop an ActiveX control on a PC other than an HIS by using the graphic interfacecontrol, the following setup operation is required.

Note that Visual Basic (hereinafter referred to as VB in this chapter) needs to be installed inthe PC.

● Setting Up a PC ¡ £

Set up a PC as follows:

1. Have a formatted floppy disk ready.

2. Insert this floppy disk into the floppy disk drive of the HIS, and then executeBKHCopyUSR.exe in one of the following directories.A setup floppy disk for setting up a library will be created.

• C:\CS1000\Program\BKHCopyGr.exe (1*)

• C:\CS3000\Program\BKHCopyGr.exe (2*)

*1: ¡ This is a directory when the system software is installed in C:\CS1000.*2: £ This is a directory when the system software is installed in C:\CS3000.

3. Log on the PC on which the library is set up as Administrator.

4. Insert the created setup floppy disk into the floppy disk drive of the PC.

5. Execute setup.exe in the setup floppy disk.A graphic interface control will be created.

● Loading to VB

The graphic interface control is provided as an ActiveX control. Add the ActiveX control tothe VB tool box as follows:

1. Click [Component] on the VB [Project] menu.The component dialog box will be displayed.This dialog box displays all addable ActiveX controls.

2. Select [CENTUM Graphic Interface Library 1.0] in the component dialog box.

3. Click the [OK] button in the component dialog box.The graphic interface control will be added to the VB tool box.

TIP

The graphic interface control is displayed as an icon in the VB tool box and on Form, and is not displayedwhile executed.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.3.3 Interface TypesThis section describes the following three types of interface for the graphic interfacecontrol:

• Property: obtains the Graphic window status

• Event: receives information from the Graphic windows

• Method: requests the Graphic windows to process data

Other ActiveX controls and user programs can be linked to the Graphic windows byusing the property, event, and method of the graphic interface control.

■ Data FlowThe property obtains information from the graphic interface control. The figure belowshows the types of data flow by using the method and event:

F140302E.EPS

Method (1)

Method (2)

Event (1)

Event (2)

Graphic interfacecontrol

ActiveXcontrol

(developed in VB)

Figure Data Flow via Method and Event

● Method (1)

This flow causes VB to request the graphic interface control to process data. The process-ing result is not returned to VB. All methods other than method (2) fall into this category.

● Event (1)

This flow causes the graphic interface control to transmit an event to VB. The event can bereceived by VB only when an event handler is defined in VB. All events other than event(2) fall into this category.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Method (2), Event (2)

This flow includes the method that causes VB to request the graphic interface control toprocess data, and the event that causes the processing result to return to VB as an event.Note that user operation may prevent the generation of an event.

The possible combinations of the methods and events are as follows:

• Method DisplayConfirmDlg and event ConfirmDlgEvent

• Method CallUserInputDialog and event UserInputDialogEvent

• Method CallUserMenuDialog and event UserMenuDialogEvent

SEE ALSO

• For the details of the property, see the following:

F14.3.4, “Property Details”

• For the details of the event, see the following:

F14.3.5, “Event Details”

• For the details of the method, see the following:

F14.3.6, “Method Details”

■ PropertyVB can obtain the Graphic window status by referencing the graphic interface controlproperty that includes the following:

• HIS name

• Display mode (full screen mode/window mode)

• Graphic window name

• CRT number (for future use)

• Window type

• Window size specifier (large/medium/special)

• Index number in the window list (internal data)

• Window update cycle

• Active/inactive statuses

• Minimized/maximized/normal sizes

• Arrow cursor display status

• Coordinates for the currently selected touch area and pushbutton (arrow cursordisplay position)

• Character strings for defining the functions of the currently selected touch area andpushbutton

• Algorithm for function key event transmission

• Function key event filtering string

• Positions of the keys on the operation keyboard (OFF/ON/ENG)

• Enlargement/reduction percentage

• Window call-up argument



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ EventVB can perform the following processings according to an event received from the graphicinterface control:

• Notification of switchovers between active and inactive statuses

• Notification of switchovers between among minimized, maximized, and normal sizes

• Notification of the pressing of function keys, button, etc. (notifying ActiveX controls ofevents)

• Notification of drawn object blinking events

• Notification of periodic events

• Notification of the results of operation in the reconfirmation dialog boxes

• Display/hiding of the arrow cursor for a pushbutton

• Notification of the results of input in the user-defined entry dialog boxes (for processdata, a formula with a unit name specified, and a formula with a batch ID specified)

• Notification of the results of input in the user-defined menu dialog boxes (for processdata, a formula with a unit name specified, and a formula with a batch ID specified)

■ MethodVB can send the following requests to the graphic interface control by using the methods:

• A request to start interlocking

• A request to terminate interlocking

• A request to move the arrow cursor

• A request to display the confirmation dialog box and to transmit the confirmation result

• A request to display a mis-operation message

• A request to execute function definition strings

• A request for the LED status

• A request to change the buzzer status

• A request for the value of a graphic generic name

• A request to set the value of a graphic generic name (with a window displayed again)

• A request to set the value of a graphic generic name (with no window displayed again)

• A request for a list of set names

• A request to call the user-defined entry dialog box

• A request to call the data entry dialog boxes (for process data, a formula with a unitname specified, and a formula with a batch ID specified)

• A request to call the user-defined menu dialog box

• A request to call the data entry menu dialog boxes (for process data, a formula with aunit name specified, and a formula with a batch ID specified)

SEE ALSO

• For the graphic generic names, see the following:

F12.3, “Data Bind”

• For the set names, see the following:




IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.3.4 Property DetailsThis section describes the properties supported by the graphic interface control.

IMPORTANT

If the ActiveX control references the property values before calling the OpenWindowmethod or after calling the Close Window method, the undefined values will be returned tothe ActiveX control.

Be sure to cause the ActiveX control to reference the property values after calling theOpenWindow method.

■ Property ListThe table below shows a list of the properties supported by the graphic interface control:

Table List of the Properties Supported by the Graphic Interface Control (1/2)

StationName r / -

r / -

r / -

r / -

r / -

r / -

r / -

r / -

r / -

r / -

String Indicates the HIS name.

Property name Data type Attribute(*1) Description

F140303E.EPS

Indicates the display mode.CSHIS_GR_WINDOW: window modeCSHIS_GR_PANEL: full screen mode

Indicates the window type.CSHIS_GR_GR: graphicCSHIS_GR_CG: graphic (with the control attribute)CSHIS_GR_OV: graphic (with the overview attribute)CSHIS_GR_DRW: drawingCSHIS_GR_LOG: logic chartCSHIS_GR_RM: product control

Window size specifierCSHIS_GR_SL: -SLCSHIS_GR_SM: -SMCSHIS_GR_SC: -SC

Indicates the active/inactive statuses.True: activeFalse: inactive

Indicates the maximized/minimized/normal sizes of windows.CSHIS_GR_Maximize: maximized sizeCSHIS_GR_Minimize: minimized sizeCSHIS_GR_Normalize: normal size

Indicates the window name.

Indicates the CRT number (for future use).

Indicates the index number in the window list (internal data).

Indicates the window update cycle (in msec).

enumCSHIS_GR_WindowStatus

Boolean

Long

Long

enumCSHIS_GR_WindowSize

enumCSHIS_GR_WindowType

Long

String

enumCSHIS_GR_WindowMode

WindowStatus

WindowFocus

Period

WindowIndex

WindowSize

WindowType

CrtNo

WindowName

WindowMode

*1: r/- indicates that the property can only be read.



IM 33S01B30-01E

Table List of the Properties Supported by the Graphic Interface Control (2/2)

CursorOn r / -Boolean Indicates whether any touch area, push button, etc. is currently selected (whether the arrow cursor is displayed).True: selected/displayedFalse: not selected/displayed

Indicates whether operation is performed on the actual HIS(or by the test functions), or is performed by the debuggingfunctions.True: operation performed by the graphic builder debugging functionFalse: operation performed on the actual HIS or by the test functions

Indicates the algorithm for function key event transmission(with the target event being ButtonExecuted).True: the graphic interface control always transmits the event to the ActiveX control regardless of the window active/inactive status.False: the graphic interface control transmits the event to the ActiveX control only when the window is in the active status (default setting).

Indicates whether an event for debugging is to be generatedwhen VB is used.True: generatedFalse: not generated (default setting)

Property name Data type Attribute(*1) Description

F140304E.EPS

Indicates the function key event filtering string. (The default setting is "".)

Enlargement/reduction percentage (same as the system-fixedgeneric name $_ZoomScale)

Graphic window call-up argument that can be set by the user.

Statuses of the OFF/ON/ENG keysCSHIS_GR_KeyOff: OFFCSHIS_GR_KeyOn: ONCSHIS_GR_KeyEng: ENGCSHIS_GR_KeyNone: with no operation keyboard

Position of the arrow cursor (X coordinate) (A valid value is input only when CursorOn is True.)

Position of the arrow cursor (Y coordinate) (A valid value is input only when CursorOn is True.)

Character string defining the arrow cursor function (excludingstrings starting with "D"). Note that this property accommodatesonly functions defined as "events to ActiveX controls" (startingwith "D"). The character string is "" for the other functions.(A valid value is input only when CursorOn is True.)

r / w

r / -

r / -

r / w

r / w

r / -

r / -

r / -

r / -

SendEventDesignMode

ZoomScale

KeyStatus

ButtonFilter

ButtonAlways

DebugMode

CursorY

CursorX

Boolean

r / wWindowParam String

Single

enumCSHIS_GR_KeyType

String

Boolean

Boolean

Long

CursorDefine String

Long

*1: r/- indicates that the property can only be read, while r/w indicates that the property can be both read and written.

SEE ALSO

For the algorithm for function key even transmission and the function key event filtering string in the abovetable, see the following:

F14.3.7, “Event Notification Using a Function Key”



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Example of and Precautions on WindowParam

WindowParam is used to change the Graphic window call-up argument. An example ofWindowParam is as follows:

Example:

' Forcibly change the current call-up argument.

GrInterface1.WindowParam = "($STN=" & GrInterface1.StationName & ")"

Precautions on use of WindowParam are as follows:

• If WindowParam is used to change the call-up argument, the Graphic window isdisplayed again upon setting of a value in WindowParam.Note that with the VB ActiveX control, using WindowParam in the Initialize method canprevent the window from being displayed again.

• In HISs, the Graphic window is given “a window name + call-up argument.” Therefore,changing the call-up argument using WindowParam will cause the Graphic windowwith the changed call-up argument to be given another name. For example, thewindow will be handled as another window in a dynamic window set.

• Transmitting the Graphic window to other HISs will also transmit the window’s call-upargument. Therefore, changing the call-up argument using WindowParam will affectthe transmission destination HIS.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.3.5 Event DetailsThis section describes the events supported by the graphic interface control.

■ Event List

Table List of the Events Supported by the Graphic Interface Control

Event name Description

WindowFocusChanged

WindowStatusChanged

ButtonExecuted

ButtonSelected

BlinkingEvent

PeriodicEvent

ConfirmDlgEvent

Cursor Status Changed

UserInputDialogEvent

UserMenuDialogEvent

Active/inactive statuses switch events

F140305E.EPS

Minimized/maximized/normal sizes switch events

Function key and push button execution events (already filtered)

Push button selection events (already filtered)

Drawn object blinking events

Periodic events

Results of operation in the reconfirmation dialog boxes

Display/hiding of the push buttons, the touch targets,and the arrow cursors for the soft keys

Results of input in the user-defined entry dialog boxes

Results of input in the user-defined menu dialog boxes



IM 33S01B30-01E

This section details each of the events. Examples are given below on the assumption thatthe VB graphic interface control object name is “GrInterface1.”

● WindowFocusChanged

Syntax:

WindowFocusChanged()

Description:

This event gives the notification of changes in the Graphic window focus status. Forthe Graphic window focus status, see property WindowFocus.

Example:

Private Sub GrInterface1_WindowFocusChanged()

Text1.Text = “WindowFocusChanged: “ & GrInterface1.WindowFocus

End Sub

● WindowStatusChanged

Syntax:

WindowStatusChanged()

Description:

This event gives the notification of switches among the Graphic window sizes: mini-mized/maximized/normal. For the Graphic window status, see propertyWindowStatus.

Example:

Private Sub GrInterface1_WindowStatusChanged()If GrInterface1. WindowStatus = CSHIS_GR_Maximize Then

Text1. Text = “Maximized”Else If GrInterface1. WindowStatus = CSHIS_GR_Minimize Then

Text1. Text = “Minimized”Else If GrInterface1. WindowStatus = CSHIS_GR_Normalize Then

Text1. Text = “Normalized or Size changed”End If

End Sub



IM 33S01B30-01E

● ButtonExecuted

Syntax:

ButtonExecuted(strParam As String)

Parameter: strParam

Function definition string (excluding function definition strings starting with D)

Description:

This event gives the notification of executed operation and monitoring functions calledsystem functions including function keys, touch targets, push buttons, etc. (notifyingActiveX controls of events, using a function definition string starting with D). Theparameter strParam does not include “D�.”

With property ButtonAlways being True, event ButtonExecuted is generated, regard-less of whether the Graphic window for which the ActiveX control exists is active orinactive.

With property ButtonAlways being False, event ButtonExecuted is generated onlywhen the Graphic window for which the ActiveX control exists is active.Operating a touch target or push button in the Graphic window activates the Graphicwindow; this generates event ButtonExecuted regardless of the value for propertyButtonAlways.

Note that if “the function of notifying ActiveX controls of events (using a string startingwith D�)” is assigned to a function key, the generation of event ButtonExecuteddepends on the value for property ButtonAlways.

SEE ALSO

See property ButtonFilter. For the details of ButtonFilter, see the following:

F14.3.7, “Event Notification Using a Function Key”

Example:

Private Sub GrInterface1_ButtonExecuted(ByVal strParam As String)If strParam = “EXEC01 START” ThenMsgBox “Start”

Else If strParam = “EXEC01 STOP” ThenMsgBox “Stop”

End If

End Sub



IM 33S01B30-01E

● ButtonSelected

Syntax:

ButtonSelected(strParam As String)

Parameter: strParam

Function definition string (excluding function definition strings starting with D)

Description:

This event gives the notification of selected buttons, touch targets, and soft keys in theGraphic window. The notification targets are those defined for “notifying ActiveXcontrols of events (using a string starting with D�).”

Double-clicking a touch target transmits event ButtonExecuted after eventButtonSelected.The parameter strParam does not include “D�.”

Properties ButtonAlways and ButtonFilter operate in the same manner as eventButtonExecuted.

Example:

Private Sub GrInterface1_ButtonExecuted(ByVal strParam As String)If strParam = “EXEC01 START” ThenMsgBox “Start button is selected.”

Else If strParam = “EXEC01 STOP” ThenMsgBox “Stop button is selected.”

End If

End Sub

● BlinkingEvent

Syntax:

BlinkingEvent(bFore As Boolean)

Parameter: bFore

True: foreground color blinking timing

False: background color blinking timing

Description:

This event gives the notification of drawn object blinking timing. To implement blinkingwith the ActiveX control, the foreground and background colors must alternate. Theblinking background color can be obtained via Ambient property.

BlinkingEvent may not give the notification of the above two colors alternately: it mustbe assumed that events of the same type may be transmitted consecutively.

Pressing the hardcopy button may transmit the foreground color as an event consecu-tively, because all windows must be displayed in the foreground color.

Example:

Private Sub GrInterface1_BlinkingEvent(ByVal bFore As Boolean)If bFore = True Then'Draw foreground colorShape1.FillColor = &HFF& 'Red

Else'Draw background colorShape1.FillColor = UserControl.Ambient.BackColor

'Window’s background colorEnd If

End Sub



IM 33S01B30-01E

● PeriodicEvent

Syntax:

PeriodicEvent()

Description:

This event is generated at every Graphic window update cycle, which has been set asa graphic builder window property.

Example:

Private Sub GrInterface1_PeriodicEvent()

' Display current time.

Label1.Caption = Format(Time, "Long Time")

End Sub

● ConfirmDlgEvent

Syntax:

ConfirmDlgEvent(bResult As Boolean, strUser As String, strReason As String)

Parameter: bResult

Reconfirmation result

True: the OK button has been pressed.

False: the cancel button has been pressed.

Parameter: strUser

Operator (up to 16 bytes)

Parameter: strReason

Operation reason (up to 128 bytes)

Description:

This event returns the results of operation in the reconfirmation dialog box displayedby method DisplayConfirmDlg.

Parameters strUser and strReason set the parameter bEntUser for methodDisplayConfirmDlg to True. Only clicking OK in the reconfirmation dialog box thenreturns valid strings.

SEE ALSO

For method DisplayConfirmDlg, see the following:

F14.3.6, “Method Details”

Example:

Private Sub GrInterface1_ConfirmDlgEvent(ByVal bResult As Boolean, ByVal strUser

As String, ByVal strReason As String)

Text1.Text = _

"bResult = " & bResult & vbCrLf & _

"strUser = " & strUser & vbCrLf & _

"strReason = " & strReason

End Sub



IM 33S01B30-01E

● CursorStatusChanged

Syntax:

CursorStatusChanged()

Description:

This event is generated when the display/hiding statuses switch for the push buttons,the touch targets, and the arrow cursors for the soft keys.

This event changes the following properties:

• CursorOn

• CursorX

• CursorY

• CursorDefine

Reference the CursorOn property value for the display/hiding status of the arrowcursor.

Example:

Private Sub GrInterface1_CursorStatusChanged()

Text.Text= _

"CursorOn/Off= " & GrInterface1.CursorOn & vbCrLf & _

"CursorX = " & GrInterface1.CursorX & vbCrLf & _

"CursorY = " & GrInterface1.CursorY & vbCrLf & _

"Definition = " & GrInterface1.CursorDefine & vbCrLf

End Sub

● UserInputDialogEvent

Syntax:

UserInputDialogEvent(strValue As String)

Parameter: strValue

Input string

Description:

This event returns the results of input in the user-defined entry dialog box displayed bymethod CallUserInputDialog. The returned value is always a string.

Note that clicking the cancel button in the dialog box will not return eventUserInputDialogEvent.

Example:

Private Sub GrInterface1_ CallUserInputDialogEvent(ByVal strValue As String)

Text1.Text = "Input Result: " & strValue

End Sub



IM 33S01B30-01E

● UserMenuDialogEvent

Syntax:

UserMenuDialogEvent(strValue As String)

Parameter: strValue

Selected string

Description:

This event returns the results of input in the user-defined entry dialog box displayed bymethod CallUserMenuDialog. The returned value is a string specified as argumentstrDatas() for method CallUserMenuDialog.

Note that clicking the cancel button in the menu dialog box will not return eventUserMenuDialogEvent.

Example:

Private Sub GrInterface1_ CallUserMenuDialogEvent(ByVal strValue As String)

Text1.Text = "Input Result: " & strValue

End Sub



IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.3.6 Method DetailsThis section describes the methods supported by the graphic interface control.

■ Method List

Table List of the Methods Supported by the Graphic Interface Control

Method name Description

OpenWindow A request to start interlocking

F140306E.EPS

A request to terminate interlocking

A request to move the arrow cursor

A request to display the confirmation dialog box and totransmit the confirmation result

A request to display a mis-operation message

A request to output a mis-operation message

A request to execute a function definition string

A request to change the LED status

A request to change the buzzer status

A request for the values of graphic generic names (includingsystem-fixed generic names)

A request to set a generic name for a Graphic window(with a window displayed again)

A request to transmit a list of valid set names

A request to change the current generic name set

A request to transmit a list of generic names included inthe generic name set

A request to call the user-defined entry dialog box

A request to call the entry dialog boxes for entering processdata

A request to call the entry dialog boxes for entering recipedata with a unit name specified

A request to call the entry dialog boxes for entering recipedata with a batch ID specified

A request to call the user-defined menu dialog box

A request to call the menu dialog boxes for enteringprocess data

A request to call the menu dialog boxes for entering recipedata with a unit name specified

A request to call the menu dialog boxes for entering recipedata with a batch ID specifiedCallRcpBatchIDDataMenuDialog

CallRcpUnitDataMenuDialog

CallProcessDataMenuDialog

CallUserMenuDialog

CallRcpBatchIDDataInputDialog

CallRcpUnitDataInputDialog

CallProcessDataInputDialog

CallUserInputDialog

QueryAvailableGenericNames

ChangeCurrentSetName

QueryAvailableSetNames

ChangeDataBindValue

A request to set a generic name for a Graphic window(with no window displayed again)ReplaceDataBindValue

DataBindValue

ChangeBuzzerStatus

ChangeLedStatus

CallSysFunc

OutputOpeMessage

DisplayMisOpeMessageByStr

DisplayConfirmDlg

MoveCursol

CloseWindow



IM 33S01B30-01E

The details of each of the above methods are as follows. Note that each method error canbe obtained from a VB On Error statement.

● OpenWindow

Syntax:

object.OpenWindow

Description:

This method specifies the start of the graphic interface control. This method is calledfrom method Initialize for the ActiveX control. Access to properties or use of othermethods before calling this method will return undefined values to the ActiveX control.

Example:

GrInterfacel_Initialize()

{

GrInterface1.OpenWindow

}

● CloseWindow

Syntax:

object.CloseWindow

Description:

This method specifies the termination of the graphic interface control. This method iscalled from method Terminate for the ActiveX control. Access to properties or use ofother methods after calling this method will return undefined values to the ActiveXcontrol.

Example:

GrInterfacel_Terminate()

{

GrInterface1.CloseWindow

}

● MoveCursor

Syntax:

object.MoveCursor nMove

Parameter: nMove

Attribute enum[IN] cursor movement directionCSHIS_GR_CursorUp: same as pressing the Up keyCSHIS_GR_CursorDown: same as pressing the Down keyCSHIS_GR_CursorLeft: same as pressing the Left keyCSHIS_GR_CursorRight: same as pressing the Right keyCSHIS_GR_CursorReturn:same as pressing the Return keyCSHIS_GR_CursorEsc: same as pressing the Esc key

Description:

This method moves the cursor displayed in the Graphic window. This method isbypassed when the cursor is not displayed. The cursor display status can be obtainedvia property CursorOn.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● DisplayConfirmDlg

Syntax:

object.DisplayConfirmDlg bEntUser, strMessage

Parameter: bEntUser

Attribute Boolean[IN] occurrence of inputting of operator name and operation reason

True: occurred

False: has not occurred

Parameter: strMessage

Attribute String[IN] message string

Description:

This method specifies the reconfirmation dialog box. Event ConfirmDlgEvent returnsthe reconfirmation result. Calling event ConfirmDlgEvent with the reconfirmationdialog box displayed returns an error.

Example:

GrInterface1.DisplayConfirmDlg True, “Open Valve?”

● DisplayMisOpeMessageByStr

Syntax:

object.DisplayMisOpeMessageByStr strMessage


Attribute String[IN] message string

Description:

This method displays the mis-operation message dialog box.

Example:

GrInterface1.DisplayMisOpeMessageByStr "Illegal operation."

● OutputOpeMessage

Syntax:

object.OutputOpeMessage strMessage, [strUserName]


Attribute String[IN] message string (up to 128 bytes)

Parameter: strUserName

Attribute String[IN] user name (this is omissible. When omitted, the current user name is applied.)

Description:

This method outputs the operation message, which is output to the historical reportand printed.

Example:

GrInterface1.OutputMessage "Operation canceled.", "SuperUser"



IM 33S01B30-01E

● CallSysFunc

Syntax:

object.CallSysFunc strParam

Parameter: strParam

Attribute String[IN] function definition string (up to 48 bytes. Any further bytes are bypassed.)

Description:

This method executes HIS system functions specified for argument strParam. Thisperforms the same functions as a function key.

SEE ALSO

For the function definition strings, see the following:

E13.2, “Function Keys”

Example:

GrInterface1.CallSysFunc "O GR0001" ‘Graphic call-up

● ChangeLedStatus

Syntax:

object.ChangeLedStatus LedNo, enumLedStatus

Parameter: LedNo

Attribute Long[IN] number of the LED whose status is to be changed (the key corresponding to eachnumber is as follows:)

1 to 64: function keys 1 to 64

65: system key

66: alarm key

67: operator guide window call key

68: overview key

69: NG (�) key

70: OK (�) key

Parameter: enumLedStatus

Attribute enum[IN] LED status to be applied

CSHIS_GR_LedOn: on

CSHIS_GR_LedOff: off

CSHIS_GR_LedFlash: flashing

CSHIS_GR_LedShot: one-shot flashing

Description:

This method changes the status of the LED with a specified number to the specifiedstatus.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● ChangeBuzzerStatus

Syntax:

object.ChangeBuzzerStatus enumBuzzerStatus, enumBuzzerType

Parameter: enumBuzzerStatus

Attribute enum[IN] buzzer status to be applied

CSHIS_GR_BuzzerOff: turn off the buzzer sound

CSHIS_GR_BuzzerOn: turn on the buzzer sound

Parameter: enumBuzzerType

Attribute enum[IN] buzzer type to be applied

CSHIS_GR_BuzzerAll: all buzzers (*1)

CSHIS_GR_BuzzerConfirm: reconfirmation buzzer

CSHIS_GR_BuzzerMisOpe: mis-operation buzzer

CSHIS_GR_BuzzerOpeguide: operator guide buzzer

CSHIS_GR_BuzzerEmg: emergency buzzer

CSHIS_GR_BuzzerHigh: intermediate buzzer

CSHIS_GR_BuzzerLight: ordinary buzzer

CSHIS_GR_BuzzerSystem: system buzzer

CSHIS_GR_BuzzerNr: return notification sound

*1: CSHIS_GR_BuzzerAll can be specified only when CSHIS_GR_BuzzerOff is to be set for enumBuzzerStatus.

Description:

This method outputs the buzzer sound. The reconfirmation buzzer requires thereconfirmation dialog box: this method alone cannot output the reconfirmation buzzer.

● DataBindValue

Syntax:

object.DataBindValue(strGenName)

Parameter: strGenName

Attribute String[IN] graphic generic name

Description:

Returns a variant (internal processed string variant).This method obtains the value for a graphic generic name. A system-fixed genericname can also be obtained.

Example:

Dim StrValue As String

GrInterface1.DataBindValue("$_WindowComment")



IM 33S01B30-01E

● ChangeDataBindValue

Syntax:

object.ChangeDataBindValue strGenNames(), strValues()

Parameter: strGenNames()

Attribute String[IN] array of graphic generic names

Parameter: strValues()

Attribute String[IN] array of values

Values are also set as strings.

Description:

This method sets the value for a graphic generic name. After calling this function, theGraphic window is displayed again while the ActiveX control remains.The value sets with this method are given the highest priority in the Graphic window.

High priority is given to:

• Settings for ChangeDataBindValue or ReplaceDataBindValue

• Settings for the Graphic window calling arguments (high priority is given to thearguments in the reverse order of their input positions)

Low priority is given to:

• Setting in the graphic builder

Note that the settings for ChangeDataBindValue are deleted upon next calling ofChangeDataBindValue or upon termination of the ActiveX control. The ActiveX controlis terminated when:

• The window is closed.

• A tag name is changed in the instrument faceplate switch dialog box.

• A generic name set is changed in the graphic data bind switch dialog box.

Example:

Dim strGenNames(1 To 2) As String

Dim strValues(1 To 2) As String

strGenNames(1) = "$TAG01"

strValues(1) = "FIC100"



GrInterface1.ChangeDataBindValues strGenNames, strValues



IM 33S01B30-01E

● ReplaceDataBindValue

Syntax:

object.ReplaceDataBindValue strGenNames(),strValues()


Attribute String[IN] array of graphic generic names

Parameter: strValues()

Attribute String[IN] array of valuesValues are also returned as strings.

Description:

This method sets the value for a graphic generic name. This method does not displaythe Graphic window again, while the ChangeDataBindValue method does. Combiningthis method with the Graphic window data characters prevent the flickering of theActiveX control data in the Graphic window when displayed again.This method is valid for the graphic generic names shown in the table below. Thismethod is invalid for other graphic generic names (such as those used in instrumentfaceplates) as they are substituted upon initialization of the Graphic window.

Table Graphic Generic Names for which ReplaceDataBindValue is Valid

Targeted object Valid data

Data bar • Numeric and character data in arithmetic expressions

Data character • Numeric data and characters in arithmetic expressions• Graphic generic name designated as displayed "graphic generic data"

Touch target • Where a function is assigned (*1)

• Where a function is assigned (*1)



Pushbutton

Softkey

Window • Character and numeric data in conditional expressions for display

Arithmetic expression • Character and numeric data

Modified figure • Numeric and character data in conditional expressions

• Numeric and character data in conditional expressionsModified coordinates

Automatic function assignment

F140307E.EPS

*1: The following are excluded:• Tag names, item names, commands, and array numbers for instrument commands• Tag names, item names, batch IDs, unit names, common block names, item names, and array numbers for calling

up a data input dialog box• Tag names, item names, batch IDs, unit names, common block names, item names, and array numbers for calling

up a menu dialog box• Tag names, item names, batch IDs, unit names, common block names, item names, and array numbers for calling

up a menu dialog box dependent on a data item

Note that the settings for ReplaceDataBindValue are deleted upon calling ofChangeDataBindValue or upon termination of the ActiveX control. The ActiveX controlis terminated when:

• The window is closed.

• The tag name is changed in the instrument faceplate assignment dialog box.

• The generic name set is switched during switching the graphic data bind.



IM 33S01B30-01E

Example:

Dim strGenNames(1 To 2) As String

Dim strValues(1 To 2) As String



strGenNames(2) = "$VALUE01"

strValues(2) = "100"

GrInterface1.ReplaceDataBindValue strGenNames, strValues

The relationship between ReplaceDataBindValue and ChangeDataBindValue is as follows:

• ChangeDataBindValue initializes the value set for ChangeDataBindValue orReplaceDataBindValue, and then displays the window again.

• ReplaceDataBindValue overwrites the value set for ChangeDataBindValue orReplaceDataBindValue.

• If ReplaceDataBindValue is executed more than once, the later execution takespriority (priority given to later execution).

• If ChangeDataBindValue is executed more than once, the later execution takespriority (priority given to later execution).

The table below shows changed generic names $DATA and &VALUE in the Graphicwindow:

Table Changed Generic Names

Steps Explanation$DATA $VALUEOperation (method)

1. Initial values RUN 100 Set the initial values in the Graphic Builder.

2. Use ChangeDataBindValue toset STOP for $DATA and 20for $VALUE.

STOP 20 Set a value for both $DATA and $VALUE.The window is displayed again.

3. Use ReplaceDataBindValueto set 40 for $VALUE.

STOP 40 The setting through ReplaceDataBindValue takespriority, changing only the value of $VALUE.

4. Use ReplaceDataBindValueto set RUN for $DATA.

RUN 40 The setting through ReplaceDataBindValue takespriority, changing only the value of $DATA.

5. Use ReplaceDataBindValue toset WAIT for $DATA and 60for $VALUE.

WAIT 60 The settings through ReplaceDataBindValue takepriority, changing the values of both $DATA and$VALUE.

6. Use ChangeDataBindValueto set ERROR for $DATA.

ERROR 100 ChangeDataBindValue first initializes the values ofboth $DATA and $VALUE, and then sets the newvalue for $DATA. The window is displayed again.

7. Operation in the instrumentfaceplate assignment dialogbox

RUN 100 $DATA and $VALUE are both initialized.The window is displayed again.

F140308E.EPS



IM 33S01B30-01E

● QueryAvailableSetNames

Syntax:

object.QueryAvailableSetNames strSetNames()

Parameter: strSetNames()

Attribute String[OUT] array of set names

Description:

This method returns a list of set names defined for the current Graphic window.

Example:

Dim strSetNames() As String

Dim i As Long

GrInterface1.QueryAvailableSetNames strSetNames

For i = LBound(strSetNames) To UBound(strSetNames)

MsgBox strSetNames(i)

Next i

● ChangeCurrentSetName

Syntax:

object.ChangeCurrentSetName strSetName

Parameter: strSetName

Attribute String[IN] a set name to be changed

Description:

This method switches the name of a generic name set. The name of a generic nameset must be defined in the graphic builder beforehand.

Example:

GrInterface1.ChangeCurrentSetName "SET01"

● QueryAvailableGenericNames

Syntax:

object.QueryAvailableGenericNames strSetName, strGenNames()

Parameter: strSetName

Attribute String[IN] a set name


Attribute String[OUT] array of graphic generic names

Description:

This method obtains a list of graphic generic names included in a generic name set.



IM 33S01B30-01E

Example:

Dim strGenNames() As String

Dim i As Long

QueryAvailableGenericNames "SET01", strGenNames

For i = LBound(strGenNames) To UBound(strGenNames)

MsgBox strGenNames(i)

Next i

● CallUserInputDialog

Syntax:

object.CallUserInputDialog strTitle, DialogType, strLabelCurrentData,strLabelEntryData, strCurrentData, strUnit, [PosX], [PosY]

Parameter: strTitle

Attribute String[IN] entry dialog box title string (up to 48 bytes)

Parameter: DialogType

Attribute enumType of data entry dialog box

CSHIS_GR_DialogHalf: the first current data line is not displayed.

CSHIS_GR_DialogFull: the first current data line is displayed.

Parameter: strLabelCurrentData

Attribute String[IN] current data label string (up to 24 bytes)

The string is right-aligned. This is bypassed with CSHIS_GR_DialogHalf.

Parameter: strLabelEntryData

Attribute String[IN] not-current data label string (up to 24 bytes)

The string is right-aligned.

Parameter: strCurrentData

Attribute String[IN] current data string (up to 24 bytes)

The string is right-aligned. This is bypassed with CSHIS_GR_DialogHalf.

Parameter: strUnit

Attribute String[IN] unit string (up to 8 bytes)

The string is left-aligned. This is bypassed with CSHIS_GR_DialogHalf.

Parameter: PosX

Attribute Long[IN] X coordinate (this is omissible. When omitted, the dialog box is displayed at adefault position.)

Parameter: PosY

Attribute Long[IN] Y coordinate (this is omissible. When omitted, the dialog box is displayed at adefault position.)



IM 33S01B30-01E

Description:

This method calls the user-defined entry dialog box. The value entered in this dialogbox is returned by event UserInputDialogEvent.

With X and Y coordinates omitted, the dialog box is displayed at a default position (thecenter of a window).

AAAAAAAA = CCCCCCUU

BBBBBBBB =

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

F140309E.EPS

strTitle

strLabelCurrentData

strCurrentData strUnit

strLabelEntryData Data Entry Zone

First current data line

Figure User-defined Dialog Box

Example:

GrInterface1.CallUserInputDialog "Change Value", CSHIS_GR_DialogFull, "Current

Value", "90", "%", "Change Value"

● CallProcessDataInputDialog

Syntax:

object.CallProcessDataInputDialog strTagName, strItemName, nElemNo1,nElemNo2, AckType, [PosX], [PosY]

Parameter: strTagName

Attribute String[IN] data tag name

Parameter: strItemName

Attribute String[IN] data item name

Parameter: nElemNo1

Attribute Long[IN] data array element No.1 (0 is set if no value is specified.)

Parameter: nElemNo2


Parameter: AckType

Attribute enum[IN] confirmation type

CSHIS_GR_Ack:the operation reconfirmation-request message is displayed according to the data type.The same operation is performed as the instrument faceplate.

CSHIS_GR_AckOK: “OK” is always displayed as a confirmation message.

CSHIS_GR_AckNone: No confirmation is performed.



IM 33S01B30-01E

Parameter: PosX


Parameter: PosY


Description:

This method displays the process data entry dialog box. Security check is performednormally, and data writing into an FCS is performed with this method. The input resultis not returned by any event.With X and Y coordinates omitted, the dialog box is displayed at a default position (thecenter of a window).

Example:

GrInterface1.CallProcessDataInputDialog "FIC100", "MV", 0, 0, CSHIS_GR_AckNone

● CallRcpUnitDataInputDialog

Syntax:

object.CallRcpUnitDataInputDialog strUnitName, strCommonName, strItemName,nElemNo1, nElemNo2, AckType, [PosX], [PosY]

Parameter: strUnitName

Attribute String[IN] data unit name

Parameter: strCommonName

Attribute String[IN] data common block name



Parameter: nElemNo1


Parameter: nElemNo2


Parameter: AckType







IM 33S01B30-01E

Parameter: PosX


Parameter: PosY


Description:

This method displays the recipe data (with a unit name specified) entry dialog box.Security check is performed normally, and data writing is performed with this method.The input result is not returned by any event.With X and Y coordinates omitted, the dialog box is displayed at a default position (thecenter of a window).

Example:

GrInterface1.CallRcpUnitDataInputDialog "UT0101", "SYSRCM", "STATUS", 0, 0,

CSHIS_GR_AckNone

● CallRcpBatchIDDataInputDialog

Syntax:

object.CallRcpBatchIDDataInputDialog strBatchID, strCommonName, strItemName,nElemNo1, nElemNo2, AckType, [PosX], [PosY]

Parameter: strBatchID

Attribute String[IN] data batch ID





Parameter: nElemNo1


Parameter: nElemNo2


Parameter: AckType







IM 33S01B30-01E

Parameter: PosX


Parameter: PosY


Description:

This method displays the recipe data (with a batch ID specified) entry dialog box.Security check is performed normally, and data writing is performed with this method.The input result is not returned by any event.With X and Y coordinates omitted, the dialog box is displayed at a default position (thecenter of a window).

Example:

GrInterface1.CallRcpBacthIDDataInputDialog "01-0024", "SYSRCM", "STATUS", 0, 0,

CSHIS_GR_AckNone

● CallUserMenuDialog

Syntax:

object.CallUserMenuDialog strTitle, strLabels(), strDatas(), PosX, PosY

Parameter: strTitle

Attribute String[IN] menu dialog box title string (up to 16 bytes)

Parameter: strLabels()

Attribute String[IN] array of label strings

The array of label strings must be up to 16 bytes, with up to 64 array elements. Thearray elements can be blank.

Parameter: strDatas()

Attribute String[IN] array of data strings

The array of data strings must be up to 16 bytes, with up to 64 array elements.

Parameter: PosX

Attribute Long[IN] X coordinate for displaying the menu dialog box

Parameter: PosY

Attribute Long[IN] Y coordinate for displaying the menu dialog box

Description:

This method calls the user-defined menu dialog box. The menu selection result isreturned as a data string of a user-selected array element by eventUserMenuDialogEvent.



IM 33S01B30-01E

Example:

Dim strLabels(1 To 4) As String

Dim strDatas(1 To 4) As String

strLabels (1) = "START"

strDatas (1) = "1"

strLabels (2) = "STOP"

strDatas (2) = "2"

strLabels (3) = ""

strDatas (3) = "3"

strLabels (4) = "CONTINUE"

strDatas (4) = "4"

GrInterface1. CallUserMenuDialog "USER OPERATION", strLabels, strDatas, 150, 150

‘150x150 Coordinate

● CallProcessDataMenuDialog

Syntax:

object.CallProcessDataMenuDialog strTagName, strItemName, nElemNo1,nElemNo2, AckType, strLabels(), strDatas(), PosX, PosY

Parameter: strTagName

Attribute String[IN] data tag name,



Parameter: nElemNo1


Parameter: nElemNo2


Parameter: AckType


CSHIS_GR_Ack:the operation reconfirmation-request message is displayed accord ing to the datatype. The same operation is performed as the instrument faceplate.








IM 33S01B30-01E




Parameter: PosX

Attribute Long[IN] X coordinate

Parameter: PosY

Attribute Long[IN] Y coordinate

Description:

This method displays the menu for entering process data. Security check is per-formed normally, and data writing on the FCS is performed with this method. Theinput result is not returned by any event.

● CallRcpUnitDataMenuDialog

Syntax:

object.CallRcpUnitDataMenuDialog strUnitName, strCommonName, strItemName,nElemNo1, nElemNo2, AckType, strLabels(), strDatas(), PosX, PosY

Parameter: strUnitName

Attribute String[IN] data unit name





Parameter: nElemNo1


Parameter: nElemNo2


Parameter: AckType







IM 33S01B30-01E







Parameter: PosX


Parameter: PosY


Description:

This method displays the menu for entering a formula (with a unit name specified).Security check is performed normally, and data writing is performed with this method.The input result is not returned by any event.

● CallRcpBatchIDDataMenuDialog

Syntax:

object.CallRcpBatchIDDataMenuDialog strBatchID, strCommonName, strItemName,nElemNo1, nElemNo2, AckType, strLabels(), strDatas(), PosX, PosY

Parameter: strBatchID

Attribute String[IN] data batch ID





Parameter: nElemNo1


Parameter: nElemNo2




IM 33S01B30-01E

Parameter: AckType



CSHIS_GR_AckOK: “OK” is always displayed as a confirmation mes-sage.








Parameter: PosX


Parameter: PosY


Description:

This method displays the menu for entering a formula (with a batch ID specified).Security check is performed normally, and data writing is performed with this method.The input result is not returned by any event.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F14.3.7 Event Notification Using a Function KeyThis section describes event notification using a function key, and processing bythe graphic interface control.

■ Defining the Function for a Function KeyTo notify the ActiveX control of an event (event ButtonExecuted) using a function key,define the following:

Syntax: D�event string ( � indicates a space.)

The event string must be up to 48 bytes.

The event string is arbitrary. Event interpretation depends on each ActiveX control.

■ Processing by the Graphic Interface ControlThe event notification using a function key transmits the event to all graphic interfacecontrols for all Graphic windows currently displayed.

Whether event ButtonExecuted is actually called depends on the property settings for eachgraphic interface control.

With properties ButtonAlways and ButtonFilter specified, the event is transmitted accordingto these specifications.

■ Filtering the Event StringThe property ButtonFilter string is compared with the beginning of the event string (afterD�). The pattern-matching character “*” cannot be specified for property ButtonFilter.

Example 1: the property ButtonFilter “EVENT01” matches the event string “DEVENT01 START.”

Example 2: the property ButtonFilter “EVENT01” does not match the event string “DEVENT02 START.”

Example 3: the property ButtonFilter “EVENT01” matches the event string “DEVENT011 START.”

Example 4: the property ButtonFilter “EVENT01” does not match the event string “DEVENT0.”



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Event Processing FlowThe figure below shows the flow of the graphic interface control after the event notificationusing a function key:

F140310E.EPS

Event ButtonExecuted is generated.

Is propertyButtonFilterunspecified?

Does theproperty Button Filter stringmatch the beginning of the

event string?

End

Is the graphicwindow active?

Is propertyButtonAlways

True?

Start

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Figure Event Processing Flow


<F15. All Generation> F15-1

IM 33S01B30-01E

F15. All GenerationAll Generation is used to generate multiple working files of the FCS related buildersas a batch. The result can be downloaded online to an FCS as a batch for the currentproject. For a non-current project it is downloaded online to the FCS simulator of thevirtual test.

■ What is All Generation?Simultaneous changes in the definitions of multiple builder files may occur in FCS engi-neering. Example cases include when a batch of new control processing is added to anFCS by utilizing multiple builder files by importing them from another FCS, changing tagnames, and changing a portion of the definitions. If Function Block Builder is used for thesechanges, Function Block Builder will be opened for each builder file and online download-ing will be repeated. However, the changes will be made for each file if such a procedure isused. Therefore, given a connection with a block that is defined in another drawing file, ageneration error may occur as a result of a temporary conflict. All Generation can be usedto omit such repetitious online downloading and avoid the problem of temporary conflictoccurrence.

● Overview of Operation

All Generation is used to generate multiple FCS working files in a batch. The user createsbuilder files to be changed as all working files in advance, then starts up All Generation. AllGeneration internally loads the master project file as well as the working files created by theuser as temporary files, then generates as a batch while adjusting the connection statusamong multiple files. If no generation error occurs, the contents can be downloaded onlineto an FCS in their entirety. When the online download operation is complete, the result ofthe change will be reflected in the master project. The following depicts the structure of AllGeneration.

PC for system generation

Online downloading Control bus

Ethernet

Createsworking files.

FCS

HIS

Equalize

Reflects in the master project.

F150001E.EPS

All Generation

Temporary file

Master project(current project)

Working file

Builder fileCopy

Figure Structure of All Generation


<F15.1 Overview of All Generation> F15-2

IM 33S01B30-01E

F15.1 Overview of All GenerationThis section explains problems occurring in FCS engineering that can be avoided byexecuting All Generation, as well as an overview of All Generation.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F15.1.1 Problems that May Occur in FCS EngineeringProblems such as generation errors, caused mainly by engineering procedures,may occur while performing FCS engineering. It is possible to resolve the followingproblems, for example by using the All Generation feature.

■ Problems in Creating Function BlocksThe following restrictions may be applicable when creating a function block.

• When creating a connection between drawings (a connection between drawings offunction blocks), a function block must first be created, then the connection must becreated subsequent to downloading.

• If a connection already exists between drawings, an error will occur in the model namechange, tag name change and deletion of the connection destination block on theoutput side. To avoid such an error it is necessary to delete the connection once,download once the required changes are made, and connect again.

■ Problems in Importing FilesProject files may be imported without any problem if the user is aware of the order ofimporting. But in reality it is difficult to import files in the following cases:

• If function blocks that have been defined between drawing files are referencing eachother.For example, if a connection between terminals of function blocks is newly importedacross drawings.

• If a sequence table block and %PR are referencing each other.

• If a sequence table block and %EV are referencing each other.

• When importing files that cause tag names to move.Moving tag names refers to an operation that moves tag A from drawing file 1 todrawing file 2, or conversely when it moves tag B from drawing file 2 to drawing file 1.



IM 33S01B30-01E

F15.1.2 What is All Generation?This chapter describes an overview of All Generation.

■ Required Disk SpaceIn order to operate All Generation properly, at least 200 MB of free space per an FCS isrequired in the hard disk in which the CS 1000/CS 3000 is installed. Other operating envi-ronments are the same as those of Function Block Builder.

■ Object Devices of All Generation

● Object Stations ¡ £

All Generation can be used for CS 1000/CS 3000 FCS stations as well as for the APCS(*1). In addition, All Generation can execute for stations performing a virtual test.

*1: £ The APCS is a CS 3000 station.

● Object Files

All Generation can use the files of FCS related builders listed below. Other FCS relatedbuilder files that are not listed below, such as the project common builder file, IOM defini-tion, communication input/output definition, communication input/output tag definition,drawing, and logic chart status display, cannot be used for All Generation.

• FCS constants

• SEBOL user functions

• SFC sequences

• Unit procedures

• Common switches

• Global switches

• Print messages

• Operator guides

• Signal events

• Annunciators

• Function block list

• Control drawings

• Function block details

■ Others• All Generation can continuously use the tuning parameters of the master project.

• If a free disk space of a PC that is performing a system generation is insufficient, or ifoperation and monitoring are performed in a PC that is performing a system genera-tion, it is possible to execute All Generation using a PC that is being used for other CS1000/CS 3000 engineering.


<F15.2 Precautions for Using All Generation> F15-5

IM 33S01B30-01E

F15.2 Precautions for Using All GenerationWhen using All Generation, there are several precautions that need to be observed,such as precautions for procedures. The following describes those precautions:

■ Relationship between All Generation and Other BuildersIf files to be used for All Generation are opened by builders, All Generation cannot beexecuted. Close all the applicable builders first, and then execute All Generation.

If files of a station that is performing All Generation are to be opened by builders, these fileswill only be opened as reference only.

■ FCS Related Builder Files that are not Used for All GenerationIOM files, communication input/output files and communication input/output tag files are notsupported for All Generation. Thus, if process input/output or communication input/outputdefinitions need to be added, changed or deleted, it is necessary to perform requiredchanges in advance by using System View and each of IOM, Communication I/O andCommunication I/O Tag Builders.

■ Restrictions on the Total Volume of Data that can be Changed ¡ £There are restrictions on the total volume of data that can be changed by All Generation.These restrictions include the total volume of online maintenance communication and theFCS processing capability. Each of these restrictions is discussed below.

● Restrictions on FCS Processing Capability

Online downloading of All Generation attempts to complete addition/change processing byusing a spare time in the same basic scan synchronization of the FCS, regardless of thevolume that is to added or changed by online maintenance. Therefore, if the amount of anaddition or a change is large, the spare time of the FCS will temporarily become zero. As aresult, it may affect the control operation of the function blocks.

If a change exceeds the following restrictions on the change volume during online down-loading, reduce the number of files that will be used for each execution of All Generationwithin the limit, and execute All Generation several times to complete the change.

• Make the number of tag names to be added simultaneously less than 50.

• Make the number of tag names to be deleted simultaneously less than 50.

• Make the number of tag names to be changed less than 25.

• Make the number of function blocks or function restriction levels of elements to bechanged simultaneously less than 50.

• Make the number of function blocks to be added simultaneously less than 25 whenconverting it into PID blocks.

• Make the number of function blocks to be deleted simultaneously less than 25 whenconverting it into PID blocks.

• Make the number of function blocks to be changed simultaneously less than 12 whenconverting it into PID blocks.


<F15.2 Precautions for Using All Generation> F15-6

IM 33S01B30-01E

● Restrictions on the Total Volume of Online Maintenance Communication

When performing online downloading to an FCS, there are restrictions on the total volumeof online maintenance communication. If a change exceeds the restrictions on the totalvolume of online maintenance communication, reduce the number of files that will be usedfor each execution of All Generation within the limit, and execute All Generation severaltimes to complete the change. The restrictions on the total volume of communication varybetween the CS 1000 and the CS 3000.

● Restrictions on the Total Volume of Online Maintenance Communicationfor the CS 1000 ¡

The total size of a communication frame which an FCS can receive is 100K bytes for oneonline downloading. The following describes the applicable restrictions:

• Restrictions on simultaneous addition, deletion or change of function blocks with tagnames should be in accordance with the restriction counts (converted into PID blocks)of FCS processing capability.

• Simultaneous change of Y/N patterns of the sequence table is allowed for up to 45tables with conversion of condition 32 and operation 32.

• Restrictions on simultaneous addition, deletion or change of unit blocks are allowedfor up to two blocks.

● Restrictions on the Total Volume of Online Maintenance Communicationfor the CS 3000 £

The total size of a communication frame which an FCS can receive is 150K bytes for oneonline downloading. The following describes the applicable restrictions:

• Restrictions on simultaneous addition, deletion or change of function blocks with tagnames should be in accordance with the restriction counts (converted into PID blocks)of FCS processing capability.

• Simultaneous change of Y/N patterns of the sequence table is allowed for up to 60tables with conversion of condition 32 and operation 32.

• Restrictions on simultaneous addition, deletion or change of unit blocks are allowedfor up to three blocks.

■ Prohibiting the Simultaneous Change of SEBOL User Functions andFunction Blocks

Online downloading of addition or change of SEBOL user functions, and online download-ing of addition of function blocks or change in the execution sequence cannot be performedsimultaneously by using All Generation. Do not select these files at the same time as theobject files of All Generation.

■ Prohibiting the Exchange of Tag Names between the Annunciator andthe Function Block

All Generation cannot be used to perform such online downloading that will exchange thetag name defined in the annunciator and the tag name defined in the function block.


<F15.3 All Generation Dialog Box> F15-7

IM 33S01B30-01E

F15.3 All Generation Dialog BoxThis section explains the All Generation dialog box, the processing flow, and theprecautions for engineering procedure.

■ Required PreparationThe following preparation is required according to the situation when using All Generation:

● When Creating Function Blocks and when Importing Files

1. Create a required IOM, define IOM, communication I/O, and communication I/O tagbuilders, or import builder files, and then save or perform downloading.

2. Create or import an FCS sequence library (SEBOL user functions, SFC sequences,unit procedures) as necessary, and then save or perform downloading.

3. As for the FCS related builder files other than the above, enter engineering data with abuilder, and then create a working file. It is also possible to import the engineeringdata.

■ Startup ProcedureSelect an FCS to be used for All Generation from System View, and click [All Generation] inthe [FCS] menu.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ All Generation Dialog BoxThe following explains the structure of the All Generation dialog box.

All Generation

PJT01Project Name FCS0101Station Name

Working File Name Type Modified Date

Quick Generation Detailed Setting

F150301E.EPS

Select All

Clear All

CloseStartPrev Results

Generation Object Station

Generation Option

Use Existing Tuning Parameters

Master Project

Working File

The temporary file when ending

Save

Delete

Delete temp-file

Generation objectfile list

Figure All Generation Dialog Box

● Generation Object Station

• Project NameA project name to be used for generation is displayed. It is possible to select the nameof a project registered in System View from the drop-down combo box.

• Station NameA station name to be used for generation is displayed. It is possible to select the FCSof the selected project from the drop-down combo box.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Generation Option

• Quick GenerationFor a simple modification, tag addition or change only, check this check box to omitthe processing of unnecessary parts for quick generation (it is checked by default).

TIP

If the object working file contains a step that moves tag names or user-defined labels between files, aduplicate tag name registration error may occur depending on the sequence of generation.In such a case, uncheck this check box to resolve the error. However, it will take much longer to generate.

Uncheck the Quick Generation check box in the following cases:

Case 1:When tag name “SW0001” included in SwitchDef2 has been moved toSwitchDef

Case 2:When tag name “PID0001” of DR0002 has been moved to DR0001

Working file

DR0001.wkf

PID0001

DR0002.wkf

PID0001

Duplicate registration error

PID0001 still exists when DR0001 is to be generated.

Generation sequence

F150302E.EPS

Tag name before moving

Figure Example of Case in which the Quick Generation must be Unchecked



IM 33S01B30-01E

• Detailed SettingSwitches to display and hide the detailed setting items. (Default setting is unchecked.)

• Delete temp-fileWhen this button is selected, a temporary file to be used during All Generation (a filecopied to a generation work area) will be deleted.

• The temporary file when ending (detailed setting item)If [Save] is selected, a temporary file to be used during All Generation will be saved(default).If [Delete] is selected, a temporary file to be used during All Generation will be deletedupon completion.

TIP

If [Save] is selected under the [The temporary file when ending] option, a temporary file that has matchingfile update date and size will not be copied when the temporary file is updated. The processing time forthe next generation can be reduced by saving the temporary file.

If [Delete] is selected, extra time will be required to update the temporary file when starting the nextgeneration. Therefore, if there is an ample disk space, select [Save] for the [The temporary file whenending] option.

• Use Existing Tuning Parameters (detailed setting item)To use the FCS tuning parameters of the master project (to be saved from an FCSwhen starting All Generation), select [Master Project] (default).To create a working file by importing a drawing that has been engineered in advance,including the tuning parameters, and to use the tuning parameters of the importsource drawing, select [Working File]. If [Working File] is selected, the tuning param-eters cannot be saved from an FCS when starting All Generation.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Generation Object File List

• Generation File List ViewA list of generation object files is displayed. Any of the displayed file names can beselected. The files displayed in this list are working files of builders that will be used forAll Generation.

TIP

If a working file of Function Block Detail Builder exists, the name of a drawing file to which the corre-sponding function block belongs will be displayed in the list.

The displayed items include file names, types, update dates, and comments.

File names are displayed with a path under the station folder.

Types are the same as those displayed in System View.

The display order is the same as the default display order of System View.

• Select AllAll files in Generation File List View will be selected.

• Clear AllThe selection of all files selected in Generation File List View will be canceled.

● Start

Starts generation. When generation starts, the All Generation Dialog box will be displayed.

● Close

Closes the All Generation Dialog box.

● Prev Results

Displays the previous generation result.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ All Generation Dialog BoxThe following explains the structure of the All Generation Dialog box:

CloseCancel

F150303E.EPS

All Generation Dialog - [Pjt: MYPJT Stn: FCS0108]

********** Start All Generation ********** Fri Apr 20 15:48:44 2001********** Start Updating Temporary Files ********** Fri Apr 20 15:48:44 2001********** Completed Updating Temporary Files ********** Fri Apr 20 15:48:51 2001

********** Start Precompile ********** Fri Apr 20 15:48:51 2001********** Completed Precompile ********** Fri Apr 20 15:48:51 2001

********** Start Compile ********** Fri Apr 20 15:48:51 2001********** Completed Compile ********** Fri Apr 20 15:48:51 2001

********** Start Updating Database ********** Fri Apr 20 15:48:51 2001********** Completed Updating Database ********** Fri Apr 20 15:48:52 2001

********** End All Generation ********** Fri Apr 20 15:48:52 2001

Message area

Progress bar

Figure All Generation Dialog Box

● Message Area

The result of All Generation is displayed.

● Cancel

The generation in progress is cancelled. This button can be selected only while All Genera-tion is being executed.

● Close

The All Generation Dialog box is closed. This button is displayed in gray and cannot beselected while All Generation is being executed.

● Progress Bar

The progress status of generation is displayed using the bar.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Processing FlowThe following explains the processing flow after the execution of All Generation is started.

● Precheck for Generation

When the [Start] button in the All Generation Dialog box is pressed, the following precheckwill be executed:

• Check for lockIf a generation object project is locked, such as while writing files that belong to theproject, generation will be canceled.

• Check for file openIf a builder file of the generation object station is opened, generation will be canceled.

• Check for builder contentionIf “Resolve invalid element (including during FCS off-line downloading and at virtualtest startup)” or “All Generation” is being executed, generation will be canceled.

● Saving the Tuning Parameters

If a generation object project is the current project, and the designation of tuning parameterconnection is [Master Project], a dialog box for confirming the execution of saving thetuning parameters will be displayed. To use the current FCS tuning parameters, select[Yes].

● Updating Temporary Files

Temporary files to be used during All Generation will be updated.

● Precompile

Compilation is performed without creating connection information in order to resolve aconnection problem between drawings. If a compilation error occurs, generation will stopwhen the precompilation of all generation object files is completed.

● Compile

Compilation is performed while creating connection information. At this time, the drawingsof blocks that are reflected by generation are also compiled. If a compilation error occurs,generation will stop when all compilation is completed.

● Detecting Differences

Difference detection is performed by comparing the master project and the FCS databaseof a project that consists of temporary files. Information of the files that will be equalized toan HIS will be created at the same time.

● Online Downloading

The Online Download Confirmation dialog box is displayed. If [Yes] is selected, the result ofthe difference detection will be downloaded online to an FCS.



IM 33S01B30-01E

● Updating the Database

If online downloading is completed without an error, the result of All Generation will bereflected in the master project.

● Equalizing

Equalizing operation is executed to all operation and monitoring stations.

■ Operation when an Error Occurs

● Tuning Parameter Save Error

If an error occurs during tuning parameter save operation, generation will be canceledimmediately.Check the FCS status and the network connection, and execute it again.

● Compile Error

If a generation error occurs, generation will be canceled when all compilation is completed.Review the contents of builder definitions, and redefine correctly.

● Online Download Error

If an error occurs during online download operation, generation will be canceled.Reduce the amount of a change, and execute it again.

● Equalize Error

If an error occurs during equalizing operation, generation will be terminated after theequalizing operation to all operation and monitoring stations is executed. However, database update to the master project will be performed.Perform tag list download operation to the HIS in which the error has occurred.



IM 33S01B30-01E

■ Precautions for Using All GenerationIf the following changes are included in the objects of All Generation, it is necessary toexercise caution to the operating procedure, etc.

● Moving Tag Names and User-Defined Labels between All GenerationObject Files

Uncheck [Quick Generation].

SEE ALSO

For more details on the quick generation, see the following:

“■ All Generation Dialog Box" in F15.3, “All Generation Dialog Box”

● Moving Tag Names to IOM Builder or Communication I/O Builder

It is necessary to manually change the definitions of IOM Builder or Communication I/OBuilder in advance before All Generation is executed. However, when attempting to movetag names assigned to function blocks to IOM Builder or Communication I/O Builder, aduplicate tag name definition error will occur because the tag names before moving stillremain in the drawing file when the manual change is being executed. In this case, deletethe tag names before moving with Drawing Builder, and then change the definitions of IOMBuilder or Communication I/O Builder.

● Moving Tag Names Using Various Message Builders or Various SwitchBuilders

Caution must be exercised to move tag names or user-defined labels using various mes-sage builders (annunciator, signal event, operator guide, print message) or various switchbuilders (global switch, common switch).

If the tag names are moved with these builders and the corresponding element numbersare changed, the function blocks that are connected to these tag names will become invalidelements, and will be subject to generation.

Example: If tag name “SW0101” has been moved from %SW0001 to %SW1000, thefunction blocks that are connected to SW0101 will all be subject togeneration.

If such change is included in All Generation, a large difference will occur and it may exceedthe capacity that can be handled by one online downloading. In this case, do not use AllGeneration. Move the tag names using normal builder operation, and then resolve invalidelement from System View.


Blank Page